ΤΕΥ AR Y 


OF THE 


UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA. 


GIFT OF | 


ee ὦ. eae ae C. | 1565 


Ges? 


- egos 
ate eee 


set 
ΤΥ 


athe aio sound 4: de --- a aw OL, 7M iat 


hy ye A. - 
ἢ τὴ GAME ,, Pe ID Bee ΞΔ βὰς sm 
foe dy ephe 
ae YU fC yY (uct 4.) Cunth y fore) ¥ 


PbOeE | 
Ean δ. frsmwer Ξῷς δε): ς 


Ἔφερε). 
δ Ρ ε{ rey.) tame Ἐφεϑοῦ γ᾿ ᾿ 
Bees οι: 
befne feng ὡς «ἡ ἡ alph, ὁ v2 abentA — ε) ἐὲ 
ἊΣ Ὡς 
Ec jae? a cee bU r- 
: 3 ie ἘῸΝ ΕΝ ἢ 
ὡς. ἐν ne foul ob, ay OC -- Se 
E noe 
i CCT? ta’ OU Bitten ἐδήλου 
; | ; δγλοουσ ε. 
ἀφῥριρϑυ mow w chithdl -- dy fove-e 
Sy how 
bret Δι τὸ nu — ἘΞ ὁ 
ΩΣ forme Gaeat 
1 7 Da ime Ξν ὅ γήδὲ ς 


; δεδόῃ « 
νὰ Y. fod ῳ (εὐ 6ὲ) a ocd WS, 


eae Te 
* Ὕ πο en 
pd 2 i Sa 4 


; a. , 
τ ρος 9 λὴ Ὁ 


πὸ AS gm 
τ" πὸ ιος 


+ 
ὃ 


rte τα ΡΣ ΘΝ 


5 


Digitized by the Internet 


in 2007 with funding from 


_ Microsoft Corporation 


a 


AN 


- 


ELEMENTARY | 


GREEK GRAMMAR. 


BY 


WILLIAM W. GOODWIN, Puz.D., 


ELIOT PROFESSOR OF GREEK LITERATURE IN HARVARD COLLEGE. 


REVISED AND ENLARGED EDITION. 


GINN AND HEATH 
1881. 


ee - 


Copyright, 1879, 
By Wi.itiam W. Goopwin. 


2 35 5’ 


Ὰ 29Ὁ ᾿ 
GbS TEST 
[94 PREFACE. ᾿ς 


MAIN 


- Tuis Grammar is partly a revised edition of the 
Elementary Greek Grammar published in 1870, and 

partly an independent work. The part which precedes — 
the Inflection of the Verb contains the substance of the 
former edition revised and enlarged, with many additions 
to the Paradigms. The part relating to the Inflection of 
the Verb, 88 88—127, has been entirely re-written, and 
. inereased from fifty to one hundred pages. Part III, 
on the Formation of Words, is entirely new. The Syn- 
tax is in most parts substantially the same as in the 
former edition; but some changes and numerous addi- 
tions have been made, the chief increase being in the 
sections on the Prepositions. Part V., on Versification, 
is almost entirely new, and is based to a great extent on 
the Rhythmic and Metric of J. H. H. Schmidt, which 
has just been published in an English translation by 
Professor J. W. White. I have not followed Schmidt, 
however, in making all iambic and anapaestic verses 
trochaic and dactylic; and I have followed the ancient 
authorities ,in recognizing cyclic anapaests as well as 
cyclic dactyls. I have adopted the modern doctrine of 
 logaoedic verses, which enlarges their dominion and 
reduces them to a uniform ὃ. measure, thus avoiding 


iv PREFACE. 


many of the incongruities which beset the common 
theory of these verses. 

The Catalogue of Verbs is increased from nineteen to 
thirty-two pages, and contains a greater number of verbs 
and gives the forms more completely than the former one. 
The object has still been to present only the strictly 
classic forms of each verb, and thereby to save the learner 
from a mass of detail which he may never need. It is 
surprising how simple many formidable verbs become 
when all later and doubtful forms are removed. In pre- 
_ paring the Catalogue I have relied constantly on Veitch’s 
Greek Verbs, Irregular and Defective, a work in the 
Clarendon Press Series, for which every classical scholar 
will bless the author. 

It will ‘be seen that the enlargement has been made 
chiefly in the part relating to the Inflection of the Verb. 
There I have adopted (ὃ 108) the division of verbs in o 
into eight classes which is employed by G. Curtius: this 
reduces many of the apparent irregularities of the Greek 
verb to rule and order. In the former edition I adopted 
Hadley’s addition of a class of “ reduplicating”’ verbs. 
I have omitted this class as unnecessary in my present 
arrangement. Of the six verbs (apart from verbs in μὲ 
and verbs in oxw) which composed this class, γίγνομαι, 
lox, and πίπτω are now assigned by Curtius to his 
“mixed class”; the first syllable of τέκτω is now not 
considered “ἃ reduplication by Curtius; μέμνω is used 
only in the present stem; while tutpdw seems too late a 
form to affect classification. The chief innovation which 
I have now ventured to make in the classification of Cur- 
tius relates to the large class of verbs which add e- to the 


PREFACE. Vv 


stem in certain tenses not belonging to the present stem. 
I have no thought of disputing the remark of Curtius 
that this phenomenon and the addition of ε- in the pres- 
ent stem (as in dox-, doxé-w) are to be explained on simi- 
lar principles. But it seems obvious that the former is 
not, like the latter, a process by which the present stem 
is formed from the simple stem, and it therefore has no 
place in the classification which we are here considering. 
Further, the addition of e- in other tenses than the pres- 
ent occurs in every one of the eight classes of Curtius, so 
that it must confuse the classification to introduce it 
there at all. I have therefore included this among the 
modifications of the stem explained in § 109, thus class- 
ing it with such phenomena as the addition of o- in 
certain verbs and other modifications which affect only 
special tenses, (See ὃ 109, 8.1) In ὃ 120, 1, I have 
followed the doctrine of F. D. Allen, stated in the 
American Philological Transactions for 1873 (pp. 5-19), 
by which Homeric forms like ὁρόω for ὁράω are explained 
by assimilation. 

1 fear I may have offended many scholars in giving the 
present stems of λύω, λέγω, λείπω, GC. as Av-, Ney-, AevTr-, 
&ec., and not as Avo(e)-, Neyo(e)-, λευπο(ε)-. &e. I have 
been careful to state in several places (see foot-notes, 
pp. 82 and 144) that the latter is the better approved and 
more correct form of expression ; but I have not ventured 
to make the first attempt at a popular statement of the 
tense stems with the variable vowel-attachment. A slight 
reflection showed me that. this must be made by a pro- 


1 See also the Proceedings of the American Philological Association for 
1879. 


vi PREFACE. 


fessional etymologist, who can settle, at least consistently, 
the many doubtful questions which still beset the subject 


τς of tense stems. I was finally decided by finding that 


G. Curtius himself had made no change in this respect 
in the latest edition (1878) of his Schulgrammatik, and 
continued to call Av-, Aey-, λείπ-, &c. present stems, 
evidently thinking the other forms too cumbrous for a 
school-book. I have had no hesitation in following his 
- example. . 

The sections on the Syntax of the Verb contain a con- 
densed statement of the principles which I have explained 
at greater length in a larger work, Syntax of the Moods 
and Tenses of the Greek Verb, to which I must refer more 
advanced students, and especially teachers, for a fuller 
exposition of this subject.1. I must still confess myself 
unable to give any general definitions which shall include 
all the uses of either the indicative, the subjunctive, or 
the optative, and yet be accurate enough to meet modern 
scientific demands. The truth must be recognized that 
these moods were not invented deliberately to express 
certain definite classes of ideas to the exclusion of all 
others, and then always held rigidly to these pre-deter- 
mined uses. On the contrary, their various uses grew up 
gradually, as language was developed and found new ideas 
to express. Both the Greek and the Latin inherited most 
of their modal forms through a line of ancestors now lost, 


1 For a still fuller explanation of the classification of conditional sen- 
tences here introduced, with the corresponding arrangement of relative 
clauses, I must refer to articles in the Z'ransactions of the American Philo- 
logical Association for 1873 and 1876, printed also in the Journal of Phi- 
lology, Vol. v. No. 10, pp. 186-205, and Vol. viii. No. 15, pp. 18-88. 


PREFACE. vii 


and each language employed these forms, partly in con- 
formity with tradition, and partly to suit its own peculiar 
needs and tendencies of thought. We must have a far 
better knowledge of the uses of the moods in the original 
Indo-European tongue and of the earliest uses in both 
Greek and Latin than we are likely ever to get from our 
present stock of material, before we can hope to trace 
historically each use of the moods in the classic languages. 
Investigations made through the Sanskrit, like those of 
Delbriick, are looking in the right direction ; but scholars 
differ widely in their interpretation of the results thus 
obtained, and the moods are used too vaguely in Sanskrit 
(compared with Greek or Latin) to be decisive in the 
comparison. We know enough, however, not to be sur- 
prised when we find the same idea expressed in Latin by 
the past tenses of the subjunctive, and in Greek by the 
past tenses of the indicative, especially when we find the 
two constructions coincide in a few instances in Homeric 
Greek. 

Much that is contained in the Notes of this Grammar, 
especially all in the smallest type, is intended to be used 
for reference, or to be read by the more interested pupils 
as they study the remainder of the book. A great change 
has gradually come upon the study of grammar in these 
practical days ; and no teacher (it is hoped) now believes 
in cramming pupils in advance with grammatical details 
which they are not expected to use or even understand 
until they have learnt the language in some other way. 
I am strongly of the opinion that a pupil should begin to 
translate easy sentences from Greek into English and from 
English into Greek as soon as he has learnt the forms 


᾿ς ὙΠ PREFACE. 


absolutely necessary for the process. The true time to. 
teach each principle of grammar (beyond the most general 
rules, which every student of Greek will have already) is 
the moment when the pupil is to meet with it in reading 
or writing ; and no grammar which is not thus illustrated 
as it is taught ever becomes a reality to the pupil. But: 
it is not enough for a learner merely to meet each con- 
struction or form in isolated instances ; for he may do this 
repeatedly, and yet know little of the general principle 
which the single example partially illustrates. Men saw 
apples fall and the moon and planets roll ages before the 
_ principle of gravitation was thought of. It is necessary, 
therefore, mot merely to bring the pupil face to face with 
the facts of a language by means of examples carefully 
- selected to exhibit them, but also to refer him to a state- 
ment of the general principles which show the full 
meaning of the facts and their relation to other prin- 
ciples.1 In other words, systematic practice in reading 
and writing must be supplemented from the beginning by 
equally systematic reference to the grammar. Mechanics 
are not learnt by merely observing the working of levers 
and pulleys, nor is chemistry by watching experiments 
on gases; although no one would undertake to teach 
either without such practical illustrations. I have, there- 
fore, no faith in-classical scholarship which is not based 
on a solid foundation of grammar; while I still believe 
that more attention to practical illustration than has 
_ generally been paid is urgently needed, and that the 


1 These objects seem to me to be admirably attained in the First Lessons 
in Greek, which was prepared by my colleague, Professor J. W. White, to 
be used in connection with this Grammar. 


PREFACE. Le: 


study of grammar may thus be relieved of most of its 
traditional terrors and made what it should be, a means, 
not an end. These remarks apply especially to syntax, 
the chief principles of which have always seemed to me 
more profitable for a pupil in the earlier years of his 
classical studies than the details of vowel-changes and 
exceptional forms which are often thought more seasona- 
ble. The study of Greek syntax, properly pursued, 
gives the pupil an insight into the processes of thought 
of a highly cultivated people; and while it stimulates his — 
own powers of thought, it teaches him habits of more 
careful expression by making him familiar with many 
forms of statement more precise than those to which he 
is accustomed in his own language. The Greek syntax, 
as it was developed and refined by the Athenians, is a 
most important chapter in the history of thought, and 
even those whose classical studies are limited to the 
rudiments cannot afford to neglect it entirely. 

One of the best practical illustrations of any language, 
ancient or modern, one which is available even for those 
who have no teachers, is committing to memory passages 
of its best literature, and using them as a basis for both 
oral and written exercises. This “natural method,” which 
has proved so successful in teaching modern languages, 
can be made of great advantage in classical education by 
a skilful teacher; although I am convinced that in the. 
_ ancient languages it should always be accompanied by 
careful grammatical study, and especially by constant 
reference to a systematic grammar. As an important 
aid, however, it cannot be too highly commended, and it 
can hardly begin too early. 


x PREFACE. 


I have not thought that the subject of Pronunciation, 
in its only practical form, belongs properly to Greek 
grammar. The question of the ancient sound of the 
Greek letters is too extensive, and involves too much 
learned discussion and controversy, to be treated in a 
work like this. A very different question, it seems to 
me, is the practical one, How are boys to be taught to 
pronounce Greek in our schools? Even if we had a 
complete ancient account of Greek pronunciation, — 
which we are very far from having,—it would be a much 
harder task to teach boys of the present day to follow 
it than it would be to teach them to pronounce French 
or German by rules without the help of the voice. The 
chief practical considerations here are simplicity and 
uniformity. For more than a generation, until very re- 
cently, there has been no system of pronouncing Greek 
in the United States which could claim notice on the 
ground of uniformity. Only our oldest scholars remember 
the prevalence of the so-called “ English system,” which 
uses English vowel-sounds and Latin accents; and this 
would now be unintelligible in most of our schools and 
colleges. My own efforts have been exerted merely 
towards bringing some order out of this chaos. Our © 
scholars have generally assumed that the written accents 
should be used; and, whatever theory of ancient accent 
we may hold, it will be admitted that the Greeks marked 
the first syllable of ἄνθρωποι, and the Romans the first 
syllable of homines, in the same way. The English vowel- 
sounds are not easily combined with Greek accents, 
especially when a short penultimate is accented, as in 
πραγμάτων. Harvard College has for the past eighteen 


PREFACE. eee | 


years recommended schools to use the Greek accents, and 
to pronounce a as ὦ in father, ἡ and ε ase in féte and 
men, t a8 ὃ in machine, leaving further details to each 
teacher’s discretion. The American Philological Asso- — 
ciation has twice recommended the same; and to this 
extent some degree of uniformity has thus been secured 
within the last ten years. The other sounds have generally 
remained as they are in the English system, with the 
exception of ov, which is generally pronounced like ow 
in group. Perhaps the majority pronounce av like ow in 
house (as the Germans do). To those who ask my advice, — 
I am in the habit of recommending the following system, 
which I follow chiefly from its simplicity, and because it 
is adopted by more scholars in the United States than 
any other, not pretending that all the sounds (e.g. those 
of εὖ and the aspirated consonants) rest on a scientific 
basis : — : 

aas a in father, ἡ as 6 in féte, ε as 6 in men, 4 as ὁ in 
machine, ὦ as o in note, v as French u; short vowels 
merely shorter than the long vowels ;— az as atin aisle, 
εἰ as Εἰ in height, ov as οἱ in oil, vs as ui in quit or wi in- 
with, av as ou in house, ev as eu in feud, ov as ou in group; 
a, ἢ» @, like a, ἡ: o;— the consonants as in English, 
except that y before x, y, ἕξ, and y has the sound of n, 
but elsewhere is hard; that 0 is always like th in thin; 
and that y is always hard, like German ch.. I have 
always pronounced ¢ like English z, but it would prob- 
ably be more correct to give it the sound of soft ds (not 
that of German z), as it is a double consonant (§ 5, 2). 
Many scholars prefer to pronounce e like ei in eight; 
and this has much to be said in its favor on several 


΄ 


xii PREFACE. 


᾿ς 


grounds. I do not think we have any positive knowl- 
edge of the sound of ev before it reached the sound of i 
(our ee), and I have held to that of ei in height simply 
to avoid another change from both English and German 
usage. 
I need not enumerate here the familiar works to which 
I am indebted for most of the facts of Greek Grammar. 
These have been collected so often and so thoroughly, that 
there is little room for originality except in the form of 
presentation. The best examples of every principle have 
already been used scores of times, and I have never 
hesitated to use them again. I must again acknowledge 
my deep obligations to the late Professor Hadley for his 
kind permission to use the valuable material in his pub- 
lished works, and for the friendly aid and advice on 
which I constantly depended for many years. The influ- 
ence of his profound learning and his noble example will 
long survive in American scholarship. I am greatly 
indebted to all who have given me their counsel during 
the preparation of this book. I must mention particularly 
Professors Ε', D. Allen, Addison Hoge, M. W. Humphreys, 
and J. W. White. Professor Caskie Harrison of Sewanee, 
‘Tennessee, has done me the great kindness of sending me 
an elaborate criticism of Part I. and the whole Syntax 
of my former edition, with discussions of many of the 
most important points. I have often been aided by his 
remarks in revising these portions of my work; and even 
when 1 could not agree with his opinions, his criticisms 
have shown me some weak points in my former state- 
ments, 


PREFACE. xiii 


‘My special thanks are due to Mr. un Jackson, of 
‘Trinity College, Cambridge, who has kindly read the 
proofs of the English edition, published at the same time 
with this, and has given me many valuable suggestions 
during the printing. 


W. W. GOODWIN. 


HarvarRD COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE, 
October, 1879. 


uM Et ET 


᾿ 
adh 
De he 
τ ᾿ a : 
RE ΝᾺ fr ee — 
ae, Se mat AS ᾿ 
a mpm τ De 
= . ae 91 


CONTENTS. 


PacE 


INTRODUCTION. — The Greek Language and Dialects . . ‘ 1 


PART I.— LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. 


§ 1. The Alphabet . : 2 eee , ° 5 
§§ 2, 3. Vowels and Diphithongs ; ; 3 ; Σ ; . 6 
§ 4. Breathings . : Σ : : 5 . 6, 7 
§§ 5-7. Consonants and their Divisions ; ; ς : oni hee 
§ 8. Collision of Vowels. — Hiatus. 8 


§ 9. Contraction of Vowels ‘ ‘ ‘ ; ‘ ‘ . 8-10 
§ 10. Synizesis . ° ‘ ἢ , ὁ . ὁ ° 2 10 
§ 11. Crasis . : ‘ : : ‘ " ᾿ Ὰ ᾿ ΤᾺΝ 1 ΘΚ 4] 
δ᾽ 1, Fa gS τ τοῖς ον οὐ Se oa a ΡΝ 
§ 18, Movable Consonants . ᾧ . ἐ | ° ᾿ ° 12 


§ 14. Metathesis and Syncope . . ; . : ° . 18 
88 15-17. Euphony of Consonants . . : : . 18-16 
§ 18. Syllables and their Division . ἢ : : x Ἑ 17 


δὲ 19, 20. Quantity of Syllables . : J ‘ . . ae 1 3 
88 21-23. General Principles of Accent . eee ° - 18-20 
§ 24, Accent of Contracted Syllables. > - ‘ ° . 20, 21 
§ 25. Accent of Nouns and Adjectives . : ; . a: 23; 33 
§ 26. Accent of Verbs . ‘ ‘ s A ines Pe ~ 22, 23 
δέ Se 98. Balitieg Δι πὸρ μὸν ve es er eee ey ΟΝ Ὁ 
§ 29. Proclitics . ; ὃ ᾿ ° Α , ° » 24, 25 
_ § 80, Dialectic Changes in Letters ° . ‘ : . . 25 
§ 31. Punctuation-Marks . . ‘ ᾿ é ‘ 25 


xvi pte” CONTENTS. 


PART II. —INFLECTION. 


§ 32. Definitions. — Inflection, Root, Stem, Ending . : . 
§ 33. Numbers, Genders, Cases . ° : : ° ° . 


NOUNS. 


§ 34. Three Declensions of Nouns . . ς: . . 
§§ 35, 36. Stems and Terminations of First Paciaaaten : : . 
§ 37. Paradigms of First Declension . ἜΜ ΤΗΝ Bs : . 
§ 88. Contract Nouns of First Declension . ' , ‘ Ἢ 
§ 39. Dialects of First Declension . ‘ ‘ 
§§ 40, 41. Stems and Terminations of Second Heslensba ‘ . 
§ 42. 1. Paradigms of Second Declension. 

2. Attic Second Declension. 2 
§ 48. Contract Nouns of Second Declension 
§ 44. Dialects of Second Declension . ὃ 
§ 45. Stems and Case-endings of Third Haclendion 


26, 27 


84, 35 


Norr. Comparison of Case-endings in the Three Declensions 8 


§ 46. Nominative Singular of Third Declension . 

ὃ 47. Accusative Singular of Third Declension . ‘ . . 

ὃ 48. Vocative Singular of Third Declension . 

§ 49. Dative Plural of Third Declension 3 ᾿ 

§ 50. Paradigms of Nouns of Third Declidelog with Mute or 
Liquid Stems 

§§ 51-56. Paradigms of Nouns of Third Daclension with isin § in 
= or Vowel Stems (chiefly contract) . 

§ 57. Syncopated Nouns of Third Declension . a ‘ é 

§ 58. Gender of Third Declension . ; . . 

§ 59. Dialects of Third Declension . ‘ ἢ . 

§ 60. Irregular Nouns . ° ἃ : . : ‘ : 

§ 61. Local Endings, «θι, -θεν, -de, ke. ξ . : ᾿ ° 


ADJECTIVES, 


§§ 62-64. Adjectives of the First and Sadana ἫΝ ἀφ ΤῊΝ . 

8 65. Contract Adjectiyes of the First and Second Declensions . 
§ 66. Adjectives of the Third Declension 

§ 67. First and Third Declensions combined 

§ 68. Participles in -wy, -as, -εἰς, -us, τως me 

§ 69. Contract Participles in -awy, -ewv, τοὼν . ; δ 2 
§ 70. Declension of μέγας, πολύς, and πρᾶος. . . ls 


36, 37 
37 


CONTENTS. XVii 


Comparison of Adjectives. 


§ 71. Comparison by -repos, -raros : ᾽ ° : - 64 
§ 72. Comparison by -ἰων, -ἰστος, ᾿ 2 j ‘ ; . 64, 65 
§ 73. Irregular Comparison . . . . . . . 65, 66 


ADVERBS AND THEIR COMPARISON, 
§ 74. Adverbs formed from Adjectives . : é : : f 67 
$75.Comparison of Adverbs .. 10, 8 hl) em 67 


NUMERALS, 


§ 76. Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, and Numeral Adverbs . . 68, 69 
§ 77. Declension of Cardinal Numbers, &c. ἘΜ ci ΟὟ 


THE ARTICLE. 
§ 78. Declension of ὃ, ἡ, τό. paces ae tet Ἔν ΣΝ 71 
PRONOUNS. 


§ 79. Personal and Intensive Pronouns. : ied al . 71-73 
§ 80. Reflexive Pronouns - ; . : . : . 73, 74 


δ᾽} Reciprocal Pranoan ρον eg cee 74 
δ᾽ 85. Peneceive Promote ee oe ee ce ee 74 
§ 88. Demonstrative Pronouns . ᾿. <a ed ΜΉΝ ἘΣ 
§§ 84, 85. Interrogative and Indefinite Pronotiiis Pe mr eS. 
§ 86. Relative Pronouns . , εν ΤΥ Ua) ee oe ον 


§ 87. Pronominal Adjectives and ‘havathe oe gare ἡ ee 


VERBS. 


§§ 88-91. Voices, Moods, Tenses, Numbers, and Persons . . 79-81 
§ 92. Tense Stems. — Principal Parts of a Greek Verb . " . 81-84 
§ 93. Conjugation. — Two Forms: Verbsin wand Verbsinme . 84, 85 


CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN 02. 


§ 94. Present Stem of Verbs in w. Ἶ “ Η : - ° 85 

§ 95. 1. Synopsis of the Regular Verb in ὦ ; aL ἐς - 85-91 

2. Meaning of the Forms of the Verb . err . . 92, 98 

§ 96. Paradigm of the Regular Verbinw . . . . 94-110 
§ 97. Perfect and Pluperfect Middle and Passive of Verbs with 

Consonant Stems . ὲ : . / : Ἶ 111-114 

8.98, Contract Verbs in aw, ew, andow . : é Fs - 115-118 


xviii CONTENTS. 
Augment. 
§ 99. Syllabic and Temporal Augment and Reduplication 
defined. . . : 119 
§ 100. Augment of Imperfect and hovel’ Tiatoative : . 119, 120 
§ 101. Augment of Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect 120, 121 
§ 102.. Attic Reduplication SOE Ticats Sate ig con ag 122 
§ 103. Augment of Diphthongs . 122 
§ 104. Syllabic Augment prefixed to a Teak. ὲ ᾽ 123 
8 105. Augment of Compound Verbs . 128, 124 
§ 106. Omission of Augment . ° 124 
Verbal Stems. | 
§§ 107, 108. Formation of Present from Simple Stem. Gene 
-Classes of Verbs in w ‘ : . 125-131 
§ 109. Modification of the Stem in certain hae. ; ἃ 131-135 
§ 110. Formation of the Seven Tense-Stems Ξ . 135-141 
8 111. Table of Tense-Stems. . τ ἢ : 141 
Personal Endings. 
§ 112. Table of Personal Endings. — Connecting Vowel . . 142-144 
§ 113. 1. Connecting Vowels of the Indicative . 144, 145 
2. Personal Endings of Indicative with Connentine Vowel 145, 146 
§ 114. Terminations of the Subjunctive . ° Ἢ ; - 146 
§ 115. Terminations of the Optative . - 146-148 
§ 116. Terminations of the Imperative . 148, 149 
§ 117, Terminations of the Infinitive, Participles, ot Verbal 
Adjectives . ° . . ὃ . , 149, 150 
ὃ 118, Periphrastic Forms . 150, 151 
Dialects. 

§ 119. Dialectic and Poetic Forms of Verbs in ὦ. J . . 151-153 © 
§ 120. Special Dialectic Forms of Contract Verbs . . 5. 154, 155 
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN μι. 

§§ 121, 122. General Character of Verbs in μι. --- Two Classes . 156-158 
§ 128. 1. Synopsis of Verbs in -nut, -ωμι, -υμι ., 158, 159 

2. Paradigms of peculiar Tenses. . 159-165 
8. Full Synopsis of Indicative 165, 166 
§ 124. Second Perfect and Pluperfect of the seliahe F ς 167 
8 125. Enumeration of the wi-forms - - ag ifaw - 168-170 
§ 126. Dialectic Forms of Verbs in μὲ : . 4 - 170-172 
8 127. Irregular Verbs in μι, --- Paradigms . ais tim 172-179 


CONTENTS. 


PART III.— FORMATION OF WORDS. 


§ 128. 1. Simple and Compound Words . 
2. Verbals and. Denominatives ._ 


8. Suffixes. ‘ Σ 


§§ 129, 130. Formation of Simple War 
§ 131. Formation of Compound Words . 
§ 132. Meaning of Compounds ., . 


PART IV.—SYNTAX. 


§ 133. Subject, Predicate, Object 

§ 134. 1. Subject Nominative (of Finite Verbs) 
2. Subject Accusative (of Infinitive) 
8. Subject of Infinitive omitted . 


Nores. Subj. Nom. omitted, Lanaritnal Verba ke, 


§ 135. Subject. Nominative and Verb 
§ 136. Predicate in same Case as Subject : 
§ 137. Apposition . 


ADJECTIVES. 


§ 138. Adjectives agreeing with Nouns 
§ 139. Adjective used asa Noun . ὸ : ‘ 


THE ARTICLE. 


§ 140. Homeric Use of the Article (as Pronoun) ir 


§ 141. Attic Use of the Article (as Definite Article) 
§ 142. Position of the Article . ᾿ ᾿ 
§ 143. Pronominal Article in Attic (ὁ μέν... 


PRONOUNS. 


§§ 144, 145. Personal and Intensive Pronouns . 
§ 146. Reflexive Pronouns . 

§ 147. Possessive Pronouns 

§ 148. Demonstrative Pronouns 

§ 149. Interrogative Pronoun 

§ 150. Indefinite Pronoun , 


§ 151. Relative Pronoun as related to its Meccan ‘ 


§ 152. Relative with omitted Antecedent ‘ 
δὲ 153, 154. Assimilation and Attraction of Relatives 
§ 155. Relative in Exclamations, &. , 

§ 156. Relative Pronoun not repeated in a new hie ‘ 


ὁ δέ, &e.). 


. 182-187 
. 187-189 


.. 209, 210 


. 210-212 


ΧΙΧ 


180 


180, 181 


181 


189, 190 


191, 192 
192 
192 
192 


- 192, 193 


193, 194 


. 194, 195 


195, 196 


. 196-198 


198, 199 


- 199, 200 


200, 201 


- 201-204 


204, 205 


. 205, 206 


206, 207 
207 
208 
208 
209 


210 


212 
212 


xx CONTENTS. 


THE CASES. 
I. Nominative and Vocative. 
§ 157. 1. Nominative, as Subject or Predicate  . : ἕ 212 
2. Vocative used in addressing .. .. ‘ . 5 218 


II. Accusative. 


REMARK. — Various Functions of the Accusative . Ξ ‘ 213 
§ 158. Accusative of Direct (External) Object . ; ‘ ‘ 213 
§ 159. Cognate Accusative (of Internal Object) . Ξ . 218-215 
§ 160. 1. Accusative of Specification (Synecdoche) . Ais ae 215 

2. Adverbial Accusative .°9' .° . : 2 ς 215 
δ 161. Accusative of Zutent of Time or Space . are. ἘῸΝ : 216 
8 162. Terminal Accusative (Poetic) «ὦ. . ὁ. ΠῸΟΡᾷῷῳἌρι6 


§ 163. Accusative after Νή and Md . oy : : |) eS 


Two Accusatives with Verbs signifying 
8 164. To ask, teach, clothe, conceal, deprive, divide, &c.. 6. 217 


§ 165. To do anything to or say anything of a Person . ‘ . 217, 218 
§ 166. To name, appoint, consider, &c. (Predicate Accusative) . 218 


III. Genitive. 


REMARK. — Various Functions of the Genitive. ο. : ‘ 218 
§ 167. Genitive after Nouns rer, ; ς ? » ’ 219, 220 
ὃ 168. Partitive Genitive (specially) - 3 - 220 
§ 169. 1. Genitive after Verbs signifying Ὁ be, habsiess Selon ὅθ. 221 
2. Partitive Genitive after Verbs signifying to name, ᾿ 

make, &c. Cops : 3 ‘ : 221 


§ 170. Partitive Genitive after atticg Wah ἷ ee a 221, 222 
§ 171. Genitive after Verbs signifying 
1. To take hold of, touch, claim, hit, miss, begin, &e. . 222 
2. To taste, smell, hear, remember, forget, desire, spare, ; 
neglect, admire, despise, το. ᾿΄, ; ‘ ὃ . 222, 229 
8.. To rule or command ‘ ; : 223 
§ 172. 1. Genitive after Verbs of iden and Want “eel 222 
2. Accusative and Genitive after Verbs signifying ¢o fll” “ie 224 
§ 173. Causal Genitive, — 
1. After Verbs expressing Praise, Pity, Anger, Envy, &c. 224 
2. After Verbs of Accusing, ΠΥ Condemning, &c. 224, 225 
3. In Exclamations. ; : ) ‘ d . 225 


CONTENTS. 
§ 174. Genitive as Ablative. — Genitive of Separation . 4 
Ay dam Ba a “τ Genitive after Comparative : 
ον Ὁ a ae PN Ἢ Genitive with Verbs of surpass- 
Ἧς ing, being inferior, ke... : 
S176 toy ΣᾺ Genitive of Source 
oe ae ‘a Genitive (Poetic) of ine or 
‘ Instrument... . 
§ 177. Genitive after Compound Verbs been FER in ; 3 
§ 178. Genitive of Price or Value _. : ; ‘ ; 
Nore. Genitive after ἄξιος and ἀξιόω ahi εἶ 
§ 179. 1. Genitive of Time within which . τς ie ° ; 
' 9, Genitive of Place within which (Poetic) . 208 8g 
§ 180. Objective Genitive with Verbal Adjectives é - 
§ 181. Possessive Genitive with Adjectives denoting Pistons 
sion, &c. . Ἶ ‘ . Σ 5 ς . 
§ 182. Genitive with Aayorhie Σ ἢ ὃ ᾿ : 
§ 183, Genitive Absolute (sce also § 278, τὴ ἐ : ; 


IV. Dative. 


REMARK. — Various Functions of the Dative. . . . 


§ 184. 


§ 185. 
§ 186, 


§ 187. 
§ 188. 


§ 189. 
§ 190. 


Dative expressing to or for : — 

1. Dative of Indirect Object. . ‘ ‘ τ : 
2. Dative after certain Intransitive Verbs . , ° 
3. Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage . ὃ ; 5 


Nore 6. Ethical Dative ‘ ᾿ Ξ : - 
4, Dative of Possession (with εἰμί, &c.) . Ἶ ; ; 
5. Dative denoting that with respect to which, &c. 
Dative after Adjectives kindred to preceding Verbs... 
Dative of Resemblance, Union, and Approach : 
Nore... Dative after Verbs signifying to discourse with, or 

contend with : : ° : δ Ἴ F - 
Dative after Compound Verbs. ‘ ‘ 3 
1. Dative of Cause, Manner, Means, and. ᾿ ὙΜσο σα 

ΝΌΟΤΕ 2. Dative after χράομαι, use . : - Pr 
2. Dative of Degree of Difference (with Comparatives) . 
3. Dative of Agent (with Perf. and Plup. Pass.) . 
4, Dative of Agent (with Verbal in -réos or -réov) .ὅ . 
5. Dative of Accompaniment (sometimes with αὐτός). 
Dative of Time ᾿ ; ; ; 5 : . : 
Dative of Place (Poetic) , : 
Nore 1. Occasional Use in Prose ἀμ of ‘Attic Deines) 


225 
225, 226 


- 296 
226 


226 
226 
227 
227 
227 
227 
227, 228 


230 
230, 231 
231, 232 
232 
232 
232 
232 
233 


233 
233 
234 
234 
᾿ς 234 
234 
235 
235 
235 
236 
236 


xxii CONTENTS. 


PREPOSITIONS. 
§§ 191, 192. Prepositions with Genitive, Dative, and Accusative 238=242 
§ 193. Prepositions in Composition taking their own Cases. ο. S242, 
. ADVERBS. 
ὃ 194, Adverbs qualifying Verbs, Adjectives, and Adverbs . 243 


SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 


ἢ VOICES. 
§ 195. Active Voice . : ) : ὃ ; ome e ° 243 
8 196. Passive Voice . é ° 243 
§ 197. Agent after Passive Verbs (ὑπό εἰὰ Genitive). ἀκα Bhs 244 
Nore 2. Passive Construction when Active has two Cases 244 


§ 198. Cognate Accusative made Subject of Passive . ‘ . 244 245 
§ 199. Middle Voice (three Uses) . : : : ᾿ « 245, 246 


TENSES, 
Tenses of the Indicative. 
§ 200. Tenses of the Indicative (Time of each) . , , . 246-248 
§ 201. Primary and Secondary Tenses of Indicative . ‘ 248 
| Tenses of Dependent Moods. 
§ 202. Not in Indirect Discowrse (chiefly Present and Aorist) . 248 


1. Distinction between Present and Aorist in this Case 249 
2. Perfect not in Indirect Discourse (seldom used) . ᾿ 249 
3. Future Infinitive not in Indirect Discourse (exceptional) 250 
4. Future Optative (used only in Indirect Discourse)  . 250 


§ 203. Optative and Infinitive in Indirect Discourse A - 250, 251 
_ Nore 1. Present Infinitive and Optative includes 


. Imperfect < ‘ 251 
Nore 2. Infinitive after Forks of Pripteg, Prointeins, ke. 
(two Constructions allowed) . ὃ . ° ; 251 
§ 204. Tenses of the Participle , : ἃ ὃ ‘ ‘ 252 


Gnomic and Iterative Tenses. 


§ 205. 1. Gnomie Present, expressing Habit or General Truth . 252 
2. Gnomic Aorist ἐν 4 en %. ἐν 02, 258 
3. Gnomic Perfect ras Ἢ ᾽ν . 253 

§ 206. Iterative Imperfect and Aorist with ἄν. : italy 253 


CONTENTS. — 3x0 


- THe PARTICLE “Ap, 


§ 207. Two Uses of the Adverb “Av . : . . : . 253, 254 


§ 208. “Av with the Indicative : ‘ A Ξ ᾿ 254 
1. Never with Present or Perfect br ae ἢ . . 254 
2. With Future (chiefly Homeric) ᾿ ἢ ‘ ‘ 254 
8. With Secondary Tenses (see ὃ 222) . ‘ . ° 254 
§ 209. “Ay with the Subjunctive . . ὃ . 254, 255 


§ 210. “Av with the Optative (always in Apodosis) ° β . Q55 : 
-§ 211. “Av with the Infinitive and Participle (in Apodosis) . 255, 256 
§ 212. Position of dv. —“Ay repeated, or used in Ellipsis . . 256 


THE Moons. 


General Statement and Classification. 


§ 213. 1. Various Uses of Indicative Se es hl a, QUE Be 
2. Various Uses of Subjunctive ᾿ ᾿ : ὃ . 257 


3. Various Uses of Optative . . ; ‘ . ° 258 
4. The Imperative . . ° . . : . . 258 
5. The Infinitive . : : ᾿ 258 


§ 214. Classification of Constraitions of Moods ne : ° 259 


‘I. Final and Object Clauses after ἵνα; ds, ὅπως, μή. 


§ 215. Three Classes of these Clauses . ᾿ : | ‘ 259 
Note 1. Negative Particle in these Chased Sabet - 260 
§ 216. Final Clauses (after all the Fina! Particles) :— 


1, With Subjunctive and Optative A eg . 260 
2. With Subjunctive after Secondary ‘Person, . ‘ 260, 261 
3. With Secondary Tenses of Indicative ὃ . "BP 


§ 217. Object Clauses with ὅπως after Verbs of Striving, ko. . 261, 262 
Nore 4. Ὅπως or ὅπως μή with Fut. Ind. (elliptically) 262 
§ 218. Object Clauses with μή after Verbs of Fearing, &. . . 262 
Note 2. Μή or ὅπως μή used elliptically ‘ Ἦ 262 
Norte ὃ. Μή with Present or Past Tenses of Indicative 262, 263 


II. Conditional Sentences, 


§ 219. 1. Definition of Protasis and Apodosis , : ᾿ . 263 
2. Use of ἄν (Hom. κέ) in Protasis and Apodosis . : 263 
3. Negative Particles in Protasis and Apodosis . - . 268 
§ 220. Classification of Conditional Sentences . A ε . 2638-267 


Xxiv 


§ 221. 


§ 222. 


§ 223. 


§ 224, 


§ 225. 


§ 226. 


§ 227. 


8 228, 


8. 229. 
§ 230. 
§ 231. 
§ 232. 


§ 238. 
§ 234, 


§ 235. 
§ 236, 


CONTENTS. 


Four Forms of Ordinary Protasis. . 


Present and Past Conditions with simple Indicative . ‘ 267 
Nore. Future sometimes used in these Conditions 267 
Present and Past Conditions with Secondary Tenses of In- 
dicative (ἄν in Apodosis) ; ᾿ . 267, 268 
Note 1. “Av sometimes omitted in the ‘Aniiiotie ‘ 268 
ΝΌΤΕ 2. "Ede, ἐχρῆν, &c. with Infin. in Apodosis 
(without ἄν) 268 
Future Conditions. — ἀρ νον with ἐάν i in Pianists ‘ 269 
Note 1. Future Indicative with εἰ in Protasis . 269 
Nore 2. Ei (without ἄν or κέ) in Protasis (Homeric) 269 
Future Conditions. — Optative in Protasis and Apodosis 269, 270 
Nort. “Av very rarely omitted here . 270 
Present and Past General Suppositions. 
Subjunctive and Optative in Protasis : 270 
Note 1. Indicative with εἰ (occasionally) . é 270, 271 
Peculiar Forms of Conditional Sentences. 
1. Protasis contained in Participle or other Word . 271 
2. Protasis omitted. — Potential Indic. or Opt. with dy 271, 272 
3. Infin. or Partic. in Indirect Discourse forming Apodosis 272, 273 
4. Infin. (not in Indirect Discourse) forming A podosis 273 
1. Protasis and Apodosis of different Classes. . . 278, 274 
2. Aé introducing an Apodosis . . 274 
Ei after Verbs of Wondering (θαυμάζω), ke. ; 274 
III. Relative and Temporal Sentences. 
Definite and Indefinite Antecedent explained . : 274, 275 
Relative with Definite Antecedent 275 
Relative with Indefinite Antecedent. Conditional Relative 275 
Four Forms of Conditional Relative Sentence (corresponding 
to those of ordinary Protasis, §§ 221-224) ‘ . 275, 276 
Conditional Relative Sentences in Present and Past General 
Suppositions (as in Protasis, § 225) 3 3 «276, 277 
Nore 1. Indicative with ὅστις, for Subj. with és ἄν 277 
Peculiar Forms in Conditional Relative Sentences . 277 
Assimilation in Conditional Relative Sentences . : 277, 278 
Relative Clauses expressing Purpose, &c. (with Fut. Ind.) — 


278 


8 237. 
8.238. 


§ 289. 
§ 240. 


§ 241. 


8 242. 


§ 243. 
§ 244, 


§ 245, 
§ 246. 


§ 247. 


§ 248. 


§ 249. 


§ 250. 


CONTENTS. ᾿ XXV 


Note 1. Subj. and Opt. in this Construction (Homeric) 278 
Norte 2. ’Ed’ ᾧ οὐ ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε with Future Indicative . . 278 


Ὥστε (sometimes ws) with Indicative . : ‘ , 279 

Causal Relative Sentences : 4 , : ; ; 279 
Temporal Particles signifying Until, Before that. 

Constructions after ἕως, ἔστε, ἄχρι, &c., until «ve ¢ 279,280 


Πρίν with the Finite Moods (see also § 274) ‘ ‘ 280, 281 
Nore. Πρὶν 4, πρότερον 7, πρόσθεν 4, used like πρίν. 281 
IV. Indirect Discourse. 

Direct and Indirect Quotations and Questions . Ἵ . 281 
Nore. Meaning of Expression Indirect Discourse. 281 
General Principles of Indirect Discourse. — Use of dv. — 


Negative Particles . : ‘ eo ° 281, 282 


Simple Sentences in Indirect Discourse. 


Indic. and Opt. after ὅτι or ὡς, and in Indirect Questions 282, 283 
ΝΌΤΕ 1. Pres. Opt. occasionally represents Imperfect 283 
Subj. or Opt. in Indirect Questions, representing Interroga-. 
tive Subj...- .. : ‘ Ξ ° . 284 
Indic. or Opt. with ἄν ἜΣΚΕΝ eer 284 
Infinitive and Participle in Indirect Quotabionias ; 4 285 


Notre. When Infinitive is said to be in Indirect Discourse 285 


Indirect Quotation of Compound Sentences, 


Rule for Dependent Clauses in Indirect Quotation . . 285, 286 
Nore 1. .One Verb changed to ad while another 

is unchanged . p 286 
Nore 2. When Dependent kor, Ladin. can be cabins to 

Optative ὲ 286 


Single Dependent Clauses in “Endiveds Ἰράρονανόι ἐπδδρον. 

dently of the rest of the Sentence.—Four Classes . 287, 288 
1. Ὅπως used for ὡς in Indirect Quotation (rare) : . 288 
2. Homeric Use of ὅ for ὅτι (rare) . : ° Ariss 288 


V. Causal Sentences. 


Causal Sentences with Indicative A R 5 288, 289 
Nore. Optative sometimes used after Past Tenses (see 
§ 248) e . .Ψ Φ . . . On; . 289 


ΧΧΥ CONTENTS. 


VI. Expression of a Wish. 


8 251. 1. Optative in Wishes (with or without εἴθε, &c.) . . 289 
2. Indicative in Wishes (with εἴθε, &c.) ὸ ᾿ » 290 
Nore 1. Ὥφελον with Infinitive in Wishes . . Ἢ 290 


VII. Imperative and Subjunctive in Commands, Exhortations, 
and Prohibitions. 


᾿ § 252. Imperative in Commands, Exhortations, &c. . > ὃ 290 
§ 253. First Person of Subjunctive in Exhortations ὃ ‘ 290, 291 


§ 254. Present Imper. or Aor. Subj. in Prohibitions . . . 291 


VIII. Subj. like Fut. Indic. in Homer.—Interrog. Subj.— Subj. and 
Fut. Indic. with οὐ μή. 


§ 255. Homeric Use of the Subjunctive as simple Future . ° 291 
§ 256. Interrogative Subjunctive (Questions of Doubt) . : 291 
§ 257. Subjunctive and Future Indicative with οὐ μή. ὃ 3 292 


Tue INFINITIVE. 


§ 258. Infinitive as Verbal Noun ἢ 292 
§ 259. Infinitive as Subject (Nom. or late ) or - Predicate ( Nom. ἢ 292 
§ 260. Infinitive as Object of a Verb:— 
1. Not in Indirect Discourse (chiefly Present and Aorist) . 293 
2. In Indirect Discourse (with Time of Tenses preserved) 293, 294 


§ 261. Infinitive with Adjectives, Nouns, and Adverbs . ‘ 294 
§ 262. 1. Infinitive (with the Article) after a Preposition . . 295 
2. Infinitive (with the Article) as Genitive or Dative . — 295 

§ 263. 1. Infinitive (with or without rod and μή) after Verbs of 
Hindranee, &e. . . 5 295 


Notr. Double Regstive μὴ οὐ with this Infinitive 295, 296 

2: Infinitive with τό or τὸ μή (or τὸ μὴ οὐ) after Verbs of 
Negative Meaning . e Ξ ‘ ο 296 
§ 204, Infinitive with Adjuncts and the Article, as Rens ᾿ ‘ 296 
- § 265. Infinitive expressing a Purpose . . «. «© « 296, 297 
8 266. Infinitive after ὥστε or ὡς. ‘ ° ‘ : ; > 297 


§ 267. Infinitive after ἐφ᾽ ᾧ οὐ ἐφ᾽ gre. ‘ * 297, 298 
§ 268, Absolute Infinitive (generally with ὡς or Mie vi ᾿ . 298 

Nore. Ἑκὼν εἶναι, willingly, τὸ νῦν εἶναι, ee. . 298 
§ 269. Infinitive as Imperative . : : . . 298 


§ 270. Infinitive expressing a Wish (like Optative): . re Τὰ 298 


8 971. 
8 272. 
8 278. 
8 274. 


§ 275. 
§ 276. 


§ 277. 


§ 278. 


§ 279. 


§ 280. 


§ 281. 


§ 282. 


§ 283. 


CONTENTS. 


Infinitive in Laws, Treaties, Proclamations, &c. ; 
Infinitive (with or withont τό) expressing Surprise . 
Τηδηϊνο ἢ Narration (with Verb of Saying understood) 
Infinitive with πρίν (see also ὃ 240) . 2 : ὃ 2 


THE PARTICIPLE. 


Participle as Verbal Adjective. — Three Uses. .  . 
1. Participle with a Noun (expressing simple Attribute) . 


xxvu 


298, 299 
299 
299 
299 


299 
300 


2. Participle with Article =e who or those who witha Verb 300 


Participle defining the’ Circwmstances of an Action :— 

1-6. Various Relations denoted by this Participle . 
ΝΌΤΕΒ. ‘Various Adverbs used with this Participle 

1. Genitive Absolute (see also § 183) ° ἢ ‘ . 

2: Accusative Absolute (of Impersonal Verbs) . . 

Participle with Verbs (like Infinitive) : — 

1. With Verbs signifying to begin, cease, repent, &c. . ° 

2. With Verbs signifying to perceive, find, or represent , 

3. With περιοράω and ἐφοράω, overlook, ὅτο. ᾿ . 

4, With Χανθάνω, τυγχάνω, and φθάνω, ‘ Ν 

Participle (like Infin.)’in Indirect Discourse (see ἢ 246) 

ΝΟΤῈ 1. Δῆλός or Φανερός εἰμι with Participle . : . 


Nore 2. Σύνοιδα and συγγιγνώσκω with a Participle in 


Nom. or Dat. : . ᾿ : 4 ; ; 


VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -τέος AND -τέον. 


-1. Personal Construction of Verbal in -réos ‘ . . 


2. Impersonal Verbal in -réov (or -réa) a ee 


INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES, 


1. Direct and Indirect Interrogatives 5 . . . 
2. Direct Interrogatives, —*H, ἄρα, οὐ, si μῶν. ‘ 
8. Ἄλλλοτι Hs Or ἄλλοτι; - - : . 7 


4. Indirect Questions with εἰ ἀξουνάς ἤ or τ ἠδ) ° ὁ 
5. Alternative Questions, — Πότερον... ἤ, &c. . ° : 


NEGATIVES. 


1, 2. Οὐ or μή with Indic., Subj., Opt., and ἀραὶ : 
3. Negative with Infinitive . . . 
4, 5. Negative with Participles and bdjeotives. Ἢ . 


300, 301 
301, 302 
302 
802. 


808 
808 
808, 804 
804 
804, 305 
305 


305 


305 
306 


306 
306 
307 
307 
307 


307, 308 
308 
308 


xxviii CONTENTS. 


6. My.with Infin. after Verbs with Negative Idea (8 263) 
7. Μὴ od with Infinitive (after Negative Leading Verb) 


8, 9. Two or more Negatives in one Clause... 4. 809, 


PART V.—VERSIFICATION. 


APPENDIX. 


308 
309 
310 


§ 284. Foot. — Ictus. — Rhythm and Metre. — Arsis and Thesis 311, 312 

§ 285. 1. Long and Short Syllables. — Times 312 

2. Enumeration of Feet Ἶ 3 . > . . 313, 314 

8. Place of the Ictus in a Foot . ° et). ta . 314 

4, Anacrusis . . ᾿ ‘ ‘ : 814 

§ 286. 1. Resolution and Contes Mien . ᾿ . ς 814, 315 

2. Syncope . 4 : . ° . ὃ ° ° 315 

3. Irrational Time . . . . ᾿ . 81 

4, Cyclic Dactyl and inact . δ . . . 315 

5. Syllaba Anceps . : . . . 81 

§ 287. 1. Rhythmical Series and pone ‘ Ἢ . . . 810, 316 

2. Close of Verse Ἶ . ° ° . . . , 316 

3. Catalexis “anaes ὦ . : . . 316 

4, Pauses ᾿ . . . . . . . ° 316 

§ 288. 1. Caesura . . . ° . . . . . 316 

. 2. Diaeresis ἃ ᾿ js : Ἢ - . "4 316, 317 

§ 289. 1. Verses. " ; ° ° . ° 317 

; 2. Monometers, Dimeters, ke, ; ‘ A . 4 Ἄ 817 

3. Rising and Falling Rhythms . . . 317 

4, Systems and Strophes . : eae” . : 318 

§§ 290, 291. Trochaic Rhythms : . ° ς ἢ . 318, 319 

§§ 292, 293. Iambic Rhythms . ° ° ° . : 319, 320 
ἜΝ 294, 295. Dactylic Rhythms . . . . © . 821,322. 

§§ 296, 297. Anapaestic Rhythms ᾿ * Ὁ 4 ς 322, 323 

ὃ 298. Anapaestic Systems : ° . . 929 

Nore. lambic and Trochais erase ἥ . . ‘ 323 

§§ 299, 300. Logaoedic Rhythms . . . . 823-325 

§ 301. Rhythms with Feet of Five or Six Times ὃ 3 325, 326 

§ 302. Dochmiacs Z 4 - - ° ° . ὁ 326 


CATALOGUE OF VERBS . ὃ : ᾿ φῶς Ὰ . 9899.860 


INDEXES . ς ; ‘ ὁ : : z : ᾿ 361- 


TABLE OF PARALLEL REFERENCES. 


᾿ ‘Tuts includes all cases in which references to the former edition are affected by 
changes in numbering, made in the new edition; except those in §§ 88-132 and 


Part V., which are too much changed to make any such comparison possible. 


Old Edition. New Edition. Old Edition. New Edition. . 
§ 3 (paragraph 2). ὃ 3, Note. § 173, 1, Note. § 173, 1, N. 2. 
§ 4, 1, Note. § 4, 1, Note 1. § 180, 2, N. 1. § 180, 1, Notes 1 & 2. 
§ 7 (par. 2). § 7, Note. § 184, 3, N. 5. ᾿ § 184, 3, N. 6. 
§ 9, 4, Note. § 9,4, Notes 2 & 1. § 184, 3, N. 6. ὃ 184, 3, N. 5. 
§ 13, 2. § 13,2 & 3. § 189, Note. § 189, Notes 1 & 2. 
§ 16, 1, Note. § 16,1, N. 2. § 190, Note. § 190, Notes 1 & 2. 
§ 16, 5 (par. 2), & § 16, 6, and Notes 1 § 191, 1, 2, 3. § 192, 1, 2, 3. 

Notes 1 & 2. & 2. § 192, 1-6. § 191, I.-VI. 


δ 16,5, N. 3. § 16, 6, Notes 3 & 4. § 195, Note. § 195, Notes 1 & 2. 
§ 19, 1, Note. § 19, 1, Note 1. § 201 (par. 5). § 201, Rem. 

§ 25, 3, Note. § 25, 3, Notes 1, 2, 3. § 206 (par. 3). § 206, Rem. 

§ 29, Note. § 29, Notes 1 & 2. § 207, 2 (par. 3). ὃ 207, 2, Rem. 
§ 37, 2, N. 2. § 37, 2, Notes 2 & 3, § 210 (par. 2). § 210, Note. 

§ 42, 2, Note, ὃ 42, 2, Note 1. § 213, 1 (par. 4). ὃ 213, 1, Rem. 
ὃ 47, Note. Omitted. § 219,3 (par 2). § 219, 3, Note. 
§ 53, 2, N. 1. Omitted. § 220 (last par.). ὃ 220, Rem. 1. 
§ 54.(par. 2). § 54, Note. § 223 (par. 3). § 223, Rem. 

§ 56, 1, Note. § 56, Note § 224, Note. § 224, N. 1. 

§ 59, 1 (par. 2). § 59, 2. § 225 (par. 3). § 225, Rem. 

§ 59, 2. ὃ 53, 1, N. 3. § 225 (par. 4). " ἢ 225, N. 2. 

§ 59, 3. § 53, 3, N. 4. § 226,2(par.3). ὃ 226, 2, N. 1. 
§ 59, 4. § 52, 2, N. 4. § 226, 3. § 226,3 & 4. 

§ 70-(end). § 70, N. 1. § 226, 3, Note. 8 226, 4, N. 1. 
§ 70, Note. § 70, N. 2. § 228 (par. 3). § 228, Note. 

§ 72, 1 (last line). ὃ 72, 1, Note. § 232, 3 (par. 3). ὃ. 232, 3, N. 

§ 72, 2 (end). § 72, 2, Notes 1 & 2. § 235, Note. § 235, 2. 


§ 77, 2, N. 4 (end). ὃ 77, 2, N. 5. 
§ 79,1, N.2 (last § 79, 1, Notes 3-6, 


§ 239, 2, Note. 
§ 242, 1 (par. 3). 


§ 239, 2, N. 1. 
§ 242, 1, Note. 


4 par.). § 242, 3(par. 2). § 242, 3, Note. 

§ 82, Note. § 82, Notes 1 & 2. § 244 (par. 3). § 244, N. 2. 
§ 251, 2, N. 1 §251,2,N. 2. 

§ 134, 2(par.2). ὃ 134, 3. (par. 2). 
§ 141, N. 6 (par. 2). ὃ 141, N. 7. § 260, 1 (par. 3). § 260,1, N. 1. 
§ 142,1(par.3). § 142, 1, Note (end). § 261, 1, Note. § 261, 1, N. 1. 
§ 142, 2, N. 5. § 142, 2, N. 6. § 261, 2(par.3). ὃ 261, 2, Rem. 
ὃ 142,4,N. 1&2. § 142,4, Notes5 &6. § 263,2(par 3). ὃ 263, 2, Note. 
§ 145, 1 (par. 3). § 145, 1, Note. § 269 (last clause). § 269, Note. 
§ 159, (par. 3). § 159, Remark. § 279, 1. § 279, 1 & 2. 


§ 163, Note. 
§ 166, N. 1. 


§ 173, 1 (par. 3). 


§ 163, Notes 1 & 2. 
Included in § 164, 
§ 173, 1, N. 1. 


§ 279, 2 & Note. 
§ 283, 8 (par. 2). 
§ 283, Note. 


§ 279, 4 & Note. 
§ 283, 9. 
§ 283, 1, Note. 


ath © 


ὉΞ 


πε PME Ge Ἂν Aa 


ἈΠ τρὶς 3. eae ae “ἜΝ Ἷ 
ἐπι eee ee ie ; ; 
+ 


MO iE ": 


ie 


Ὁ ie ie mis ἜΝ by 
cee ar wee τῇ 


Wa: 


" Ἢ " " 
at Lae tite A es os 


ἜΡΟΝ ued orks 


2 eG RSMO ED Fr we: 


GREEK GRAMMAR. 


INTRODUCTION. 


THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND DIALECTS. 


Tue Greek language is the language spoken by the Greek 
race. In the historic period, the people of this race called 
themselves by the name Hellenés, and their language Hellenic. 
We call them Greeks, from the Roman name Graeci. They 
were divided into Aeolians, Dorians, and Ionians. The 
Aeolians inhabited Aeolia (in Asia), Lesbos, Boeotia, and 
Thessaly ; the Dorians inhabited Peloponnesus, Doris, Crete, 
some cities of Caria (in Asia), with the neighboring islands, 
Southern Italy, and a large part of Sicily; the Ionians in- 
habited Ionia (in Asia), Attica, many islands in the Aegean 
Sea, and some other places. " 

In the early times of which the Homeric poems are a record — 
(before 850 B.c.), there was no such division of the whole 
Greek race into Aeolians, Dorians, and Ionians as that which 
was recognized in historic times ; nor was there any common 
name of the whole race, like the later name of Hellenes. 
The Homeric Hellenes were a small tribe in South-eastern 
Thessaly, of which Achilles was king; and the Greeks in 
general were called by Homer Achaeans, Argives, or 
Danaans. 


ῷ INTRODUCTION. — 


-The dialects of the Aeolians and the Dorians are known as 
the Aeolic and Doric dialects. In the language of the Ionians 
we must distinguish the Old Jonic, the New Jonic, and the 
Attic dialects. The Old_ Ionic or Epic is the language of 


the Homeric poems, the oldest Greek literature. The New 
Ionic was the language of Ionia in the fifth century B.c., as 
it appears in Herodotus and Hippocrates. The Attic was 
the language of Athens during her period of literary eminence 
(from about 500 to 300 B.o.).? 

The Attic dialect is the most cultivated and refined form 
of the Greek language. It is therefore made the basis of 
Greek Grammar, and the other dialects are usually treated, 
for convenience, as if their forms were merely variations of 
the Attic. This is a position, however, to which the Attic 
has no claim on the ground of age or primitive forms, in 
respect to which it holds a rank below the other dialects. 

The literary and political importance of Athens caused her 
dialect gradually to supplant the others wherever Greek was 
spoken; but, in this very extension to regions widely sepa- 
rated, the Attic dialect itself was not a little modified by 
various local influences, ‘and lost some of its early purity. 
The universal Greek language which thus arose is called the 
Common Dialect. This begins with the Alexandrian period, 
the time of the literary eminence of Alexandria in Egypt, 
which dates from the accession of Ptolemy II. in 285 8.6. 
The name Hellenistic is given to that form of the Common . 
Dialect which was used by the Jews of Alexandria who made 


1 The name Jonic includes both the Old and the New Ionic, but not the 
Attic. When the Old and the New Ionic are to be distinguished in the 
present work, Ep. (for Epic) or Hom.:(for Homeric) is used for the former, 
and Hdt. or Herod. (Herodotus) for the latter. ; . 


INTRODUCTION. 3 


the Septuagint version of the Old Testament (283-135 5.6.) 
and by the writers of the New Testament, all of whom were 
Hellenists (i.e. foreigners who spoke Greek). The language 
which has been spoken by the Greeks during the last seven 
centuries is called Modern Greek or Romaic. 

The Greek is descended from the same original language 
with the Indian (i.e. Sanskrit), Persian, German, Slavonic, 
Celtic, and Italian languages, which together form the Indo- 
European (sometimes called the Aryan) family of languages. 
Greek is most closely connected with the Italian languages 
(including Latin), to which it bears a relation similar to the 
_ still closer relation between French and Spanish or Italian. 
᾿ This relation accounts for the striking analogies between 
Greek and Latin, which appear in both roots and termina-. 
tions ; and also for the less obvious analogies between Greek 
and the German element in English, which are seen in a ἐν 
words like me, 18, know, &e. 


hy ye , ᾿ 
ere ἘΝ ἐξ τας 
PLY. he pe iat 
ξέ : mabey 
Le 


i 8) ἘΠ: 


oh Cee Ne θα Me 
ἣ ΟΡ ΛΕ δ spate 


Rs 6 ORE ees 
WEE RTs EeS Sa ee) 


eel 5 
ἌΡ: 
pe Ne Be 


ga 
ὌΠ ον 


ΓΝ μὰν 
Γαδ 444 


> 


᾿ς χνμν 
Rett oe 


στ ὕ 
π΄ 1 


ἽΝ 


ἀν δα τ, γι) 
Lipa 
: al 


"- 


NEMS SHMUVAOMSRRATOANEAUHA 


orm. 


BBs Vr 2 2 WD & 


Φ 


Se~NRNSE6C IAD yx ow vee yaS 
an 


PART 


LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. 


THE ALPHABET. 
§ 1, Tue Greek alphabet has twenty-four letters : — 


Equivalent. 


a 
b 

8 

d 

e (short) 
Ζ 

e (long) 
th 

i 


k or hard ¢ 


] 
m 
n 
x 


ο (short) 


= 


Name. 

"Arba Alpha 
Βῆτα 6ὁ .Βεία 
Γάμμα Gamma. . 
Δέλτα Delta 
Ἔ wWidov Epsilon 
Zita Zeta 
°"Hra Eta 
Θῆτα Theta 
ΙΙῶτα Ἔ[1},οἰὰ 
Karra. Kappa 
AdpBsa Lambda 
Mo Mu 

Nv Nu 

Ἐξ Xi 

Ὃ pixpdv Omicron 
ITt Pi 

‘Po Bho 
Σίγμα Sigma 
Tad Tau 

ΟὟ ψιλόν Upsilon 

dt Ρυ Phi 

Xi Chi 

ΨῚ Bae τὺ 

Ὦ μέγα Omega 


.---- 


Remark. The Greek v was represented by the Latin y, and was prob- 


ably 


ronounced somewhat like the French uw or the German ii. 


remarks on Pronunciation see the Preface. 


For 


6 ὃ LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§ 2. 


Nore 1. At the end of a word the form ς is used, elsewhere the 
form σ; thus, σύστασις. 


Nore 2. Two obsolete letters— Vaw or Digamma (F or ¢) equivalent 
to V or W, and Koppa (?), equivalent to Q—and also the character 
San(2)), a form of Sigma, are used as numerals (§ 76). The first of these 
had not entirely disappeared in pronunciation when the Homeric poems 
were composed, and the metre of many verses in these is explained only 
by admitting its presence. Many forms also which seem irregular are 
‘explained only on the supposition that F has been omitted: see § 53, 3, 
N.1; ὃ 54, N.; § 108, IL., 2. 


VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. 


§ 2. The vowels are a, ¢, 7, 4,0, @, and v. Of these, 
ε and o are always short; ἡ and w are always long; a, 1, 
and v are sometimes short and sometimes long, whence 
they are called doubtful vowels. | 


Note. A, ε, 7, ο, and ὦ from their pronunciation are called open 
vowels; « and v are called close vowels. 


᾿ 8 8, The diphthongs (6/-¢0oyyor, double sounds) are 
Gl, αὖ, El, EV, οἱ, OV, NU, VL, a, ἢ, @. These are formed by 
the union of an open yowel with a close one; except. v1, 
which is formed of the two close vowels. The union of 
τῷ long vowel (4, ἡ, ὦ) with ὁ forms the (so called) zm- 
proper diphthongs a, 7, @. The Ionic dialect has also a 
diphthong wv. 
Nore. In a, ῃ, ῳ, the. is now written below the first vowel, and 
is called iota subscript. But with capitals it is written in the line; 
- as in THI KOMOIAIAI, τῇ κωμῳδίᾳ, and in "Quyero, ᾧχετο. This 


was written as an ordinary letter as long as it was pronounced, 
that is, until the first century B.C. 


BREATHINGS. 


§ 4. 1. Every vowel or diphthong at the beginning of 
a word has either the rough breathing (‘) or the smooth 
breathing (᾽). .The rough breathing shows that the 
vowel is aspirated, i.e. that it is preceded by the sound 


861 ‘CONSONANTS. ag 


of ἢ; the smooth breathing shows that the vowel is not 
aspirated. Thus ὁρῶν, seeing, is pronounced horén; but 
ὀρῶν, of mountains, is pronounced orén. 


Note 1. A diphthong takes the breathing (like the accent) upon 
its second vowel. But a, ῃ, and ῳ take it upon the first vowel, even 
when the « is written in the line. Thus οἴχεται, εὐφραίνω, Αἵμων; 
but ᾧχετο or” Oryero, ad or “Ado, ἤδειν or “Hidew. On the other 
hand, the breathing of ἀίδιος (Aidios) shows that a and « do not 
form a diphthong. 


ΝΟΤΕ 2. The rough breathing was once denoted by H. When this 
character was taken to denote long 6 (which once was not distinguished 
from e), half of it E was used for the rough breathing ; and afterwards the 
other half 1 was used for the smooth breathing. From: these fragments — 
came the later signs‘ and ’. 


2. The consonant p is generally written f at the begin- 
ning of a word. In the middle of a word pp is often 
written pp. Thus ῥήτωρ (rhetor), orator; ἄῤῥητος, un- 
speakable ; Πύῤῥος, Pyrrhus (pp = rrh). 


CONSONANTS. 
§ 5, 1. The consonants are divided into 


labials, 7, B, φ, ps 
palatals, x,y, xX, 
linguals, τ, 5, 0, σι r, ν, ρ. 


2. The double consonants are é, ψ, ζ. ἘΞ is composed of « 
and oc; W,ofzando. Z-generally arises from a combination 
of ὃ with a soft 5 sound (originally 47) ; hence it has the 
effect of two consonants in lengthening a preceding vowel 
(§ 19, 2). 

§ 6. By another classification, the consonants are divided 
into semivowels and mutes. 


1. The semivowels are A, Hs Vy Ps and σ; of which the first 
four are called iguids, and o is called a’ sibilant. M and ν 


8. LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§ 7. 


are also called nasals; to which must be added y before x, 
y, x, or &, where it has the sound of v, as in ἄγκυρα (ancora), 
anchor. 


2. The mutes are of three orders : — 


smooth mutes, 7, κ, τ, 
middle mutes, B, y, 5, 
rough mutes, ¢, x, 0. 


These again correspond in the following classes : — 


labial mutes, a, 8, >, 

palatal mutes, x, γ, x; 

lingual mutes, τ, δ, 0. 
Note. Mutes of the same ordgr are called co-ordinate ; those of 
the same class are called cognate. The smooth and rough mutes, 


with o, ἕξ, and y, are called surd (hushed sounds); the other con- 
sonants and the vowels are called sonant. 


8 7. The only consonants which can stand at the end of a 
Greek word are ν, p, ands. If others are left at the end in 
forming words (cf. § 46, 1), they are dropped. 


Note. The only exceptions are found in the proclitics (§ 29) 
ἐκ and οὐκ (or οὐχ), which have other forms, ἐξ and ov. Final é 
and ¥ (xo and se) are no exceptions. 


EUPHONY OF VOWELS. 
COLLISION OF VOWELS. HIATUS, 


§ 8. A succession of two vowel sounds, not forming a diph- 
thong was generally displeasing to the Athenians. In the 
middle of a word this could be avoided by contraction (§ 9). 
Between two words—where it is called hiatus, and was 
especially offensive — it could be avoided by erasis (§ 11), by 
elision (§ 12), or by adding a movable consonant (§ 13) to the 
_former word. | 


CONTRACTION OF VOWELS. 


§ 9. Two successive vowels, or a vowel and a diphthong, 
‘are often united by contraction in a single long vowel or a 


§ 9.) EUPHONY OF VOWELS. 9 


diphthong; as φιλέω, φιλῶ; φίλεε, φίλει; τίμαε, τίμα. Τί 
seldom takes place unless the former vowel is open (8 2, 
Note). < 

The regular use of contraction is one of the characteristics 
of the Attic dialect. It follows these general principles : — 


1. Two vowels which can form a diphthong (§ 3) simply 
unite in one syllable; as τείχεϊ, τείχει ; yépai, γέραι; ῥάϊστος, 
ῥᾷστος. 


2. If one of the vowels is o or w, they are contracted into o. 
But εο, oo, and oe give ov. _ Thus δηλόητε, δηλῶτε ; φιλέωσι, 
φιλῶσι; τιμάομεν, τιμῶμεν ; ᾿τιμάωμεν, τιμῶμεν ; ; δηλόω, δηλῶ; -- 
but γένεος, γένους ; πλόος, πλοῦς ; νόε, νοῦ. 


ΝΌΤΕ. In contract adjectives in oos (8 65) o is dropped before a 
and η, a. and 7; as <r ἁπλα; ἁπλόη, ἁπλῆ ; ἁπλόαι, ἁπλαῖ; ἁπλόῃ; 
> ἁπλῇ. 


3. If the two vowels are a and ε (or 7), the first vowel 
sound prevails, and we have a ory. Aa gives a, ey or ye gives. 
4; buteegivese. Thus, ἐτίμαε, ἐτίμα ; τιμάητε, τιμᾶτε ; τείχεα, - 
τείχη ; μνάα, μνᾶ ; φιλέητε, φιλῆτε ; τιμήεντος, τιμῆντος ; ἐφίλεε, 
ἐφίλει. 

Note. In the first and second declensions, ea becomes ἃ in the 
dual and plural, and in all numbers after a vowel or p (88 38, 65); 
it also becomes ἃ in the third declension whenever it follows a 
vowel (§ 52, 2, N. 2; ὃ 53,3, N. 3). In the dual of the third 


declension ee sometimes becomes n (§ 52, 2; ὃ 53,1, N. 2). In the 
acensative plural of the third declension eds generally becomes εἰς 


(§ 51, 2). 


4. A vowel disappears by absorption before a diphthong 
beginning with the same vowel. Further, ε is always ab- 
sorbed before οἱ, and in contract nouns and adjectives also 
before αι. In other cases, a simple vowel followed by a diph- 
thong is contracted with the first vowel of the diphthong, and _ 


the second vowel disappears unless it can be retained as tota 


subscript (8 3) ing, ῃ, or ». Thus, μνάαι, μναῖ; ; μνάᾳ, μνᾷ; 


φιλέει, φιλεῖ ; φιλέῃ, φιλῇ; δηλόοι, δηλοῖ ; ; νόῳ, νῷ ; δηλόου, δηλοῦ 5 
φιλέοι, φιλοῖ ; χρύσεοι, χρυσοῖ ; χρύσεαι, χρυσαῖ (cf. ἁπλόαι, 


10 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§ 10. 


dat); τιμάει, τιμᾷ ; τιμάῃ, τιμᾷ ; τιμάοι, τιμῷ ; τιμάου, τιμῶ ; 
φιλέου, φιλοῦ ; λύεαι, Avy (ν. Note 1); λύηαι, Avy; μεμνήοιρ, 
μεμνῷο ; πλακόεις, πλακοῦς (V. N. 2). 


Nore 1. In the second person singular of the passive and middle, 
eat (for ἐσαι) gives a form in εἰ as well as that in 7; as Avea, Avy 
or λύει. (See § 113, 2, N. 1.) 


Nore 2. In verbs in da, oe. and on give οἱ; as δηλόεις, δηλοῖς; 
δηλόῃ, δηλοῖ (cf. ἁπλύῃ, dary, 2, N ote). Infinitives in dew and dew 
ee ι in the contracted form; as τιμάειν, τιμᾶν; δηλόειν, δηλοῦν (8 98, 

5). 


5. The close vowels (u and v) are contracted with a follow- 
-ing vowel in some forms of nouns in vs and vs of the third 
declension. (See § 53,1, N. 3; § 53, 2.) 


REMARK. In some classes of nouns and adjectives of the third declen- 
. sion, contraction is confined to certain cases ; see §§ 53,67. For exceptions 
in the contraction of verbs see § 98, Notes 1, 2, 3. 


SYNIZESIS. 


§ 10. In poetry, two successive vowels, not forming a 
diphthong, are sometimes united in pronunciation for the sake 
of the metre, without being contracted. This is called syni- 
zesis (συνίζησις, settling together). Thus, θεοί may make but 
one syllable in poetry ; στήθεα or χρυσέῳ may make but two. 


CRASIS AND ELISION. 


§ 11.. 1. A vowel or diphthong at the end of a word is often 
contracted with one at the beginning of the following word. 
This is called crasis (κρᾶσις, mixture). The cordnis. (°) is 
placed over the contracted syllable. The first of the two 
words is generally an article, a relative pronoun, or καί. 

Crasis generally follows the laws of contraction (§ 9), but 
with these modifications : — 


(a.) A diphthong at the end of the first word aidps its last 
vowel before crasis takes place. 


§ 12.] CRASIS AND ELISION. . 11 


_ (0) The article drops its final vowel or diphthong in crasis 
before a. The particle τοί drops o before a; and καί drops 
αι before Ἢ, av, ev, ov, and the words εἰ, εἰς, οἱ, at. 


2. The following are examples of crasis :— 


To ὄνομα, τοὔνομα; τὰ ἀγαθά, τἀγαθά; τὸ ἐναντίον, τοὐναντίον; ὁ ἐκ, 
οὗκ; ὁ ἐπί, οὗπί; τὸ ἱμάτιον, θοἰμάτιον (8 17, 1); ἃ ἄν, ἅν; καὶ ἄν, κἄν; 


καὶ εἶτα, κάτα; --- ἀνήρ, ἁνήρ; οἱ ἀδελφοί, ἀδελφοί: τῷ ἀνδρί, τἀνδρί; 
τὸ αὖτό, ταὐτό; τοῦ αὐτοῦ, ταὐτοῦ ; — τοι ἄν, τὰν (μέντοι ἄν, μεντἄν); 
τοι ἄρα, τἄρα: --- καὶ αὐτός, καὐτός; καὶ αὕτη, “χαὔτη (§ 17, 1); καὶ εἰ, 


Kel} Kal ov, κοὺ; καὶ οἱ, χοὶ; καὶ al, xai- So ἐ ) ἐγὼ οἶδα, ἐγῴδαὶ ὦ ἄνθρωπε, 
ὦνθρωπε; τῇ ἐπρβῇ; τἠπαρῇ;; Ρ προέχων, προὔχων. 


Nore 1. If the first word is an article or relative with the rough 
breathing, this breathing is retained on the contracted syllable, 
taking the place of the coronis ; as in ἅν, ἁνήρ. 


Norte 2. Incrasis, ἕτερος takes the form & ἅτερος; —whenee θατέρου, 
᾿ θατέρῳ, &e.. (§ 11, 1, ὃ; § 17, 1.) 


Nore 3. Crasis, like contraction (§ 10), may rhe left to pronun- 
ciation in poetry. Thus, μὴ οὐ makes one syllable i in poetry; 80 μὴ 
εἰδέναι, ἐπεὶ ov. 


Note 4. A short vowel at the beginning of a word is sometimes 
dropped after a long vowel or a diphthong. This i is called aphaeresis 
(ἀφαίρεσις, taking off ). Thus, μὴ ᾽γώ for μὴ ἐγώ; ποῦ στιν for rod 
wise ἐγὼ ᾿φάνην for ἐγὼ ἐφάνην. 


Nore 5. Crasis is much more common in poetry than in prose. 
ἡ 
8 19, 1. A short final. vowel may be dropped when the 
next word beging with a vowel. This is called elision. An 
apostrophe (’) marks the omission. L.g. 
Ai ἐμοῦ for διὰ ἐ ἐμοῦ; ἀντ᾽ ἐκείνης for ἀντὶ ἐκείνης; λέγοιμ᾽ ἄν for λέ- 


γοιμι ἄν; ἀλλ᾽ εὐθύς for ἀλλὰ εὐθύς, ἐπ᾽ πα ΒΩ] for ἐπὶ ἀνθρώπῳ. So 
ep’ ἑτέρῳ; νύχθ᾽ ὅλην for νύκτα' ὅλην (8 17, 1 ; 16, 1). 


2. A short final vowel is generally elided also when it comes ~ 
before a vowel in forming a compound, word: Here no apos- 
trophe is used. Z£. [ἢ 


᾿Απ-αιτέω (ἀπό and αἰτέω), δι-έβαλον (διά and ἔβαλον). So adiarplen 
(ἰπό and αἱρέω, § 17, 1); δεχ-ήμερος (δέκα and ἡμέρα). 


τοὺς Epic form νύ. 


12 ᾿ς LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§ 13. 


Nore 1. The poets sometimes elide a in the verbal endings pat, 
σαι, Tal, and σθαι. So o in οἴμοι, and rarely in pou. 


Nore 2. The prepositions περί and πρό, the conjunction ὅτι, that, 
and datives inzof the third declension, are not elided in Attic 
Greek. The form ὅτ᾽ stands for ὅτε, when. 


Note 3. The poets sometimes cut off a short vowel even before a con- 
sonant. Thus in Homer we find dp, ἄν, κάτ, and πάρ, for dpa, ἀνά, κατά, 
and παρά. In composition, κάτ assimilates its τ to.'a following consonant 
and drops it before two consonants; as κάββαλε and κάκτανε, for κατέβαλε 
and κατέκτανε ;— but κατθανεῖν for καταθανεῖν (§ 15, 1). 


Nore 4. Elision is often neglected in prose, especially by certain writers 
(as Thucydides). Others (as Isocrates) are more strict in its use. 


MOVABLE CONSONANTS. 


§ 13. 1. Most words ending in σι, and all verbs of the 
third person ending in ε, add ν when the next word begins 
with a vowel. This is called v movable. E.g. 


Πᾶσι δίδωσι ταῦτα; but πᾶσιν ἔδωκεν ἐκεῖνα. So δίδωσί por; but 
δίδωσιν ἐμοί. 


_ Nore 1. ’Eori takes ν movable, like third persons in ot. The 
Epic κέ (for gf Sony v before a vowel. The enclitic νύν has an 

any adverbs in -θεν (as πρόσθεν) have poeti¢e forms 
in -θε. 


Nore 2. N movable may be added at the end of a sentence or of 
a line of poetry. It may be added even before a consonant in 
poetry, to make position (§ 19, 2). 


2. Ov, not, becomes οὐκ before a smooth vowel, and οὐχ 
before a rough vowel; as οὐκ αὐτός, οὐχ otros. Μή inserts x 
in μηκ-έτι, no longer, (like οὐκ-έτι). 

_ Ἐκ, from, becomes ἐξ (és) before a vowel; as ἐκ πόλεως, 
but ἐξ ἄστεος. 


8. Οὕτως, thus, and some other words may drop ς before a 
consonant ; 88 οὕτως ἔχει, οὕτω δοκεῖ. 


§ 16.] EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS. 18 


METATHESIS AND SYNCOPE. 


8 14. 1. Metathesis is the transposition of two letters in a 
word; as in κράτος and κάρτος, strength; θάρσος and θράσος, 
courage. (See § 109, 7, a.) 


2. Syncope is the omission of a vowel from the middle of a 
word; as in zarépos, πατρός (ὃ 57) ; πτήσομαι for πετήσομαι 
(§ 109, 7, δ). 


Nore 1. When μ is brought before p or ἃ by syncope or meta- 
thesis, it is strengthened by inserting B; as μεσημβρία, midday, for 
μεσημ(ε)ρια (μέσος and ἡμέρα) ; μέμβλωκα, Epic perfect of Brocka, 
go, from stem pod-, μλο-, (μλω-, § 109, 1), pe-pAw-Ka, μέ-μβλω-κα. 
At the beginning of a word such a p» is dropped before 8; as in 
βροτός, mortal, from stem pop-, μρο- (cf. Lat. morior, die), uBpo-ros, 
βροτός; 80 βλίττω, take honey, from stem μελιτ- of μέλι, honey (cf. 
Latin mel), by syncope μλιτ-, μβλιτ-, βλιτ-, βλίττω (8 108, IV.). 


Norte 2. So ὃ is inserted after ν in the oblique cases of ἀνήρ, man 
(§ 57, 2), when the ν is brought by syncope before p; as ἀνδρός for © 


ἀνέρος, ἀν-ρος. 
EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS. 


§ 15, 1. A rough consonant (8 6, 2) is never doubled ; 
but ad, xx, and 7@.are always written for φῴ, xx, and 06. 
Thus Sarda, Βάκχος, κατθανεῖν, not Σαφφώ, Bayyos, καθθανεῖν 
(8 12, N. 8). So in Latin, Sappho, Bacchus. 


2. Initial p is doubled when a vowel precedes it in forming 
a@ compound word; as in dvappirrw (ava and fiztw). So 
after the syllabic augment ; as in ἔρριπτον (imperfect of pizrw). 
But after a diphthong it remains single ; as in εὔροος, εὔρους. 


$16. The following rules apply chiefly to euphonic 
changes made in the final consonant of a stem in adding the 
endings, especially in forming and inflecting the tenses of 
verbs : — . 


14 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. _ [§ 16. 
Ae. Ag 
1. Before a lingual mute (7, 5, 6). a labial or palatal mute 
must be of the same order (§ 6, Note), and another lingual 
must be changed too. #.g. 

_ Τέτριπται (for rerpiB-rar), δέδεκται (for Sedey-rar), πλεχθῆναι (for 
πλεκ-θηναι), ἐλείφθην (for ἔλειπ-θην), ypaBdnv (for ypad-dyv). Πέπεισ- 
ται (πεπειθ-ται), ἐπείσθην (ἐπειθ-θην), ἧσται (ἠδ-ται), ἴστε (ἰδ-τε). 

Nore 1. Ἔκ, from, in composition retains x unchanged; as in 
ἐκ-δρομή, ἔκ-θεσις. ver 3 

Nore 2. No combinations of different mutes, except those here 
included and those. mentioned in § 15, 1, are allowed in Greek. 
When any such arise, the first mute is dropped; as in πέπεικα (for | 


πεπειθ-κα)ὴ. When γ stands before x or x, as in συγ-χέω (σύν and 
'χέω), it is not a mute but a nasal (ὃ 6, 1). 


2. No mute can stand before-o except 7 and κ (in w and ἕξ). 
B and ¢ become z before c; y and x become x; 7, ὃ, and θ 
are dropped. ig. | 


Tpivo (for τριβ-σω), γράψω (for γραφ-σω), λέξω. (for λεγ-σω) 
πείσω (for πειθ-σω), dow (for ἀδ-σω), σώμασι (for σωματ-σι), ἐλπίσι 
(for ἐλπιδ-σι). So φλέψ (for PrcB-s), ἐλπίς (for eAmid-s), νύξ (for 
vukr-s). See examples under ὃ 46, 2. : 


8. Before p, a labial mute (7, 8, ¢) becomes μ; a palatal 
mute (x, x) becomes y; and a lingual mute (τ, δ, @) becomes 


δ. 2.9. 


Λέλειμμαι (for λελειπ-μαι), τέτριμμαι (for τετριβ-μαι), γέγραμμαι 
(for γεγραφ-μαι), πέπλεγμαι (for πεπλεκ-μαι), τέτευγμαι (ἴον τετευχ- 
μαι), ἦσμαι (for ἠδ-μαι), πέπεισ-μαι (for πεπειθ-μαι). 


ΝΟΤΕ. When yyp or uum would thus arise, they are shortened to yu or 
py; as ἐλέγχω, ἐλήλεγ-μαι (for ἐληλεγχ-μαι, ἐληλεγγ-μαὼ ; κάμπτω, κέκαμ- 
μαι (for κεκαμπ-μαι, κεκαμμ-μαι) ; πέμπω, πέπεμμαι (for πεπεμπ-μαι, πεπεμμ- 
μαι). (See ὃ 97, N. 2.) 

Ἔκ here also remains unchanged, as in ἐκ- μανθάνω, 


- 4, In passive and middle endings, o is dropped between 


eee 


Norn. In the verbal endings σαι and go, o is often dropped after 
a vowel; as in λυε-σαι, Aveat, Avy, Or λύει (ὃ 9, 4, N. 1). Stems in 


8. 16.] . EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS. ‘15 


eo of the third declension also drop o before a vowel or another P 
(See § 52, 1, Note.) 


5. Before a labial mute (z, 8, ¢) v becomes p; before a 
palatal mute (x, y, x) it becomes y (δ 6,1). Fg. 


Ἐμπίπτω (for ἐν-πιπτω), συμβαίνω (for συν-βαινω), ἐμφανής (for 
ἐν-φανης). Συγχέω (for συν-χεω), συγγενής (for συν-γενης). 
6. Before another liquid v is changed to that liquid ; before 


o it is generally dropped and the preceding vowel is length- 
ened (ε toa,otoov). H.g. 3 


Ἐλλείπω (for ἐν-λειπω) ἐμμένω (for ἐν-μενω), συρρέω (for συν-ρεω). 
Μέλᾶς (for μελαν-ς), εἷς (for ev-s), λύουσι (for λυο-νσι, § 112, 2, Note). 
So ἔσπεισ-μαι (from σπένδω) for ἐσπενδ-μαι, ἐσπενσ-μαι (8 16, 3). 


Norte 1. The combinations v7, vd, v6, are often dropped together 
before σ (§ 16, 2 and 6), and the preceding vowel is lengthened, as 
above (8 16, 6); as πᾶσι (for παντ-σι), γίγᾶς (for yryavrs), λέουσι 
(for λεοντ-σι), τιθεῖσι (dat. plur. for τιθεντ-σι), τιθείς (for τιθεντ-ς), 
δούς (for dovt-s), σπείσω (for σπενδ-σω), λύουσα (for Avort-ca), 
λυθεῖσα (for λυθεντ-σα), πᾶσα (for παντ-σα). 


Note 2. N standing alone before o of the dative plural is 
dropped without lengthening the vowel; as δαίμοσι (for δαιμον-σι). 
Compare πᾶσι (for mavt-or), N. 1 

So vr in adjectives in es, but never in participles; as xapieou (for 
χαριεντ-σι) ; but τιθεῖσι, as given above. 

Norte 3. The preposition ἐν is not changed before o, .p, or ¢. 


Σύν becomes συσ- before o and a vowel, but ov- before o and.a con- 
sonant or before ¢. Thus, ἐνράπτω, σύσσιτος, σύζυγος. 


Nots 4. Some verbs in vw change v to o before μαι in the perfect 
middle (8 109, 6, Note) as φαίνω, πέφασ-μαι (for πεῴφαν-μαι); and 
the v reappears and is retained before oa in the second person, as in 
πέφαν-σαι. (See § 97, 4, with N. 2.) 


7. The following changes occur when :, representing an 
original 7 of the root ya (pronounced ya), follows the final 
consonant of a stem. , 


(a) Palatals (x, y, x) and rarely other mutes with such an ¢ be- 
come oo (later Attic.rr); as φυλάσσ-ω (stem φυλακ-) for dudAak-t-w ; 
ἥσσων, worse, for ἡκ-ιτων (δ 73); τάσσ-ω (ray-), for tay-i-a@; ἐλάσσων, 
less, for ἐλαχ-ιτων (comp. of μικρός, § 73); ταράσστω (rapax-), for 
Tapax-t-w; κορύσσ-ω (κορυθ-), for κορυθ-ι-ὠ. Ἣν 

(5) A (sometimes γ or yy) with « forms ¢; as φράζεω (ppad-), for 
ppad-t-o; κομίζεω (κομιδ-:}), for κομιδ-ι-ω; κράξ-ω (kpay-), for Kpay-t-@ ; 
μέζων (Ion.) or μείζων (comp. of μέγας, great), for μεγ-ιτ-ων (ὃ 73). 


16 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§ 17. 


(c) A with « forms AA; as μᾶλλον, more (comp. of pdd-a), for 
, pad-t-ov; στέλλ-τω (στελ-), for cred-i-w; ἅλλο-μαι (ἀλ-), leap, for 
ἁλει-ομαι (cf. Lat. salio); ἄλλος, other, for ἀλ-ι-ος (cf; Lat. alius). 


_ (d) N and p with: undergo metathesis (§ 14, 1), and ε. 15. then 
contracted τα the preceding vowel; as φαίν-ω (φαν-), for φαν-ι-ὦ 
(cf. Lat. fug-i-o from stem fug.); reiv-w (rev-), for rev-i-w; ἀμείνων 
stay, better, for ἀμεν-ι-ων; χείρων (stem yep-), worse, for yep-t-wy 
§ 73); Kei-po (xep-), for κερ-ι-ω; κρἴνω (κρῖν-), for xpiv-i-@ (ci be- 
coming 1) duive (apiv-), for ἀμὕν-ι-ω; σύρω for σὕρ-ι-ω (vi becoming 
v). So μέλαινα δ ὍΠΗ: οἵ μέλας, black, stem pedav-) for μελαν-ι-α 
(ὃ 67); σώτειρα (fem. of σωτήρ, saving, saviour, stem σωτερ-); for 
σωτερ-ι-α. 


§ 17. 1. When a smooth mute (z, x, τ) is brought before 
a rough vowel (either by elision or in forming a compound 
word), it is itself made rough. 4.9. 


_ *Adinut (for ἀπ-ΐημι), καθαιρέω (for xat-aipew), ἀφ᾽ ὧν (for ἀπὸ ὧν), 
νύχθ᾽ ὅλην (for νύκτα ὅλην, § 12,1; § 16, 1 
So in crasis, where the rough breathing may affect even a conso- 
_ nant not immediately preceding it. (See examples in ὃ 11, 2.) 


Nore. The Ionic dialect does not observe this principle, but has 
(for example) ἀπ᾽ οὗ, ἀπίημι (from ἀπό and ip). 


2. In reduplications (§ 101, 1) an initial rough mute is 
always, made smooth, to avoid two rough consonants in suc- 
cessive syllables. £.g. 


Πέφυκα (for φεφυκα), perfect of dia; κέχηνα (for “exe perf. 
of χάσκω: τέθηλα (for θεθηλα), perf. of θάλχω. re τίθημι (for 
θι-θημι), ὃ 121, 3. 


Notsr. A similar change takes place in a few verbs which origi- 
nally had two rough consonants in the stem; as τρέφω (stem τρεφ- 
for Oped-), nourish, fut. θρέψω, aor. pass. ἐθρέφθην; τρέχω (rpex- for 
Opex-), run, fut. θρέξομαι; ἐτάφην, from θάπτω (ταφ- for θαφ-), bury ; 
see also θρύπτω, τύφω, and stem (θαπ-), in the Catalogue of Verbs. 
So in ἐτύθην (for ἐθυθην) from θύω, and ἐτέθην (for ἐθεθην) from 
τίθημι. So in θρίξ, hair, gen. τριχός (stem τριχ- for θριχ-); and in 
ταχύς, swift, comparative θάσσων for θαχ-ιων, §16,7,a). Here the first 
aspirate reappears whenever the second is lost. See 8 110, VI. N.3. 


8. The ending & of the first aorist imperative passive be- 
comes τι after θη- of the tense stem (8 116, 3) ; as λύθητι (for 
AvOy-61), φάνθητι (for φανθη-θι) ; but φάνηθι. 


πο 


§ 19.] 


§ 18. 1. A Greek word has as many syllables as it 


has separate vowels or diphthongs. The syllable next 


to the last is called the penult (pen-ultima, almost last) ; 


the one before the penult is called the antepenult. 


2. A pure syllable is one whose vowel or diphthong 
immediately follows another vowel or diphthong; as the 
last syllable of φιλέω, οἰκία, χρύσεος. . 


Nore. In most editions of the Greek authors, the following rules 


are observed in dividing syllables at the end of a line: — - 


1. Single consonants, combinations of consonants which can begin 
a word (which can be seen from the Lexicon), and mutes followed 
by » or v, are placed at the beginning of a syllable. Other combi- 
nations of consonants are divided : thus, ¢-ya, ἐγώ, ἑ-σπέ-ρα, νέ-κταρ; 
ἀ-κμή, δε-σμός, μι-κρόν, πρά-γμα-τος, πράσ-σω, ἐλ-πίς, ἐν-δόν. 


2. Compound words are divided into their original parts; θὰ 


when the final vowel of a preposition has been elided in compo- 


sition, the compound is divided like a simple word: thus mpoo-d-yo ὁ 


(from πρός and ἄγω) ; but ma-pd~yw (from παρά and ἄγω). 
QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 
8.19. 1. A syllable is long by nature when it has a 


long vowel or a.-diphthong; as in τιμή; κτείνω. 


2. A syllable is long by posztion when its vowel is fol- 
lowed by two consonants or a double consonant; as in 


ὄρτυξ. 


8. When a vowel short by nature is followed by a mute | 


and a liquid, the syllable is common (i.e. either long or 
short) ; as in τέκνον, ὕπνος, ὕβρις. But in Attic poetry 
such a syllable is generally short ; in other poetry it is 
generally long. 


Note 1. A middle mute (8, y, 8) before Δ. p, or ν generally 
lengthens a preceding vowel ; as in dyvas, βιβλίον, δόγμα. 


eet) 


18 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§ 20. 


_ Nore 2. E in ἐκ is long when a liquid follows, either in compo- 
sition or in the next word ; as ἐκλέγω, ἐκ νεῶν (both ---). 


§ 20. The quantity of most syllables can be seen at once. 
Thus ἡ and ὦ and all diphthongs are long by nature; ε and o 
are short by nature. (See § 2.) 

When a, ει, and v are not long by position, their quantity 
must generally be learned by observation. But it is to be 
_ remembered that 


1. Every vowel arising from contraction or crasis is long ; 
as a in γέρα (for γέραα), ἄκων (for ἀέκων), and κἄν (for καὶ av). 


2. The endings as and vs are long when ν or vr has been 
᾿ dropped'before σ (§ 16, 6, and N. 1). | 


3. The accent often shows the quantity of a vowel. (See 
§ 21,1; § 22.) 


The quantity of the terminations of nouns and verbs will be 
stated below in the proper places. 


ACCENT. 


GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 

§ 21. 1. There are three accents, the acute, (’), the 
grave (“), and the circumflex (7). The acute: can stand 
only on one of the last three syllables of a word, the cir- 
cumflex only on one of the last two, and the grave only 
on the last. The circumflex can stand only on a syllable 
long by nature. 

Remark. The marks of accent were invented by Aristophanes of 
Byzantium, an Alexandrian scholar, about 200 B. c., in_ order to teach 
foreigners the correct accent in pronouncing Greek. By the ancient 
theory every syllable not having either the acute or the circumflex was 
said to have the grave accent; and the circumflex, originally formed 


thus “, was said to result from the union of an acute and a following 
grave. Ἢ 


8 22] ACCENT. 19 


Nore 1. The grave accent is rarely used except in place of the 
acute in the case mentioned in ὃ 29, 1, and occasionally on the 
indefinite pronoun ris, ri (δ 84). 


Nore 2. The accent (like t ne Pring) stands on & the second 
vowel of a diphthong. (See 8.1) 1, Note 1.) 


2. A word is called oxytone (sharp-toned) when it has the 
acute on the last syllable ; paroxytone, when it has the acute 
on the penult; proparoxytone, when it has the acute on the 
antepenult. 

A word is called perispomenon when it has the circumflex _ 
on the last syllable ; properispomenon, when it has the circum- 
flex on the penult. These terms refer to the shape of the 
mark (*"~) as twisted, or cireumflexed, περισπώμενος. 

A word is called barytone (grave or flat-toned) when its last 
syllable has no accent, i.e. when (on the ancient theory) it 
has the grave accent. 


3. When a word throws its accent as far back as possible 
(§ 22), it is said to have recessive accent. This is especially 
the case with verbs (8 26). (See § 25, 1, Note.) 


§ 22. 1. The antepenult cannot be accented if the 
last syllable is long either by nature or by position. 
If accented, it takes the acute ; as πέλεκυς, ἄνθρωπος. 


2. The penult, if accented, takes the circumflex if it 18. 
long by nature and if at the same time the last syllable is 
short by nature; as μῆλον, νῆσος, ἧλιξ. Otherwise, if 
accented, it takes the acute. 


Note 1. Final a and o are considered short in determining the 
accent; as ἄνθρωποι. νῆσοι: except in the optative mood, and in the 
adverb οἴκοι, at home; as τιμήσαι, ποιήσοι (not τίμησαι OY ποίησοι). 


Note 2. Genitives in ews and ewv from nouns in ἐς and vs of the third 
declension (ὃ 53, 1, N. 2), all cases of nouns and adjectives in ws and ων 
of the Attic second declension (§ 42, 2), and the Ionic genitive in ew of the 
first (δ 39, 8), allow the acute on the a eters as ἀνώγεων, πόλεως, 
Τήρεω (Tap). For ὥσπερ, οἵδε, &c., see ὃ 28, N. 3. 


᾿ 


20 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§ 23. 


§ 28, 1. An oxytone changes its acute to the grave 
before other words in the same sentence; as τοὺς πονη- 
povs ἀνθρώπους (for τούς πονηρούς ἀνθρώπους). 


Note. This change is not made before enclitics (§ 28) nor before 
an elided syllable (§ 24, 3), nor in the interrogative τίς, ri (§ 84). 
It is generally made before a comma, but not before a colon. 


2. When a dissyllabic preposition follows its case, it throws 
its accent back to the penult; as τούτων πέρι, about these. 
This is called anastrophe (ἀναστροφή, turning back). 


This occurs in Attic prose only with περί, but in the poets with 
all the dissyllabic prepositions except ἀνά, διά, ἀμφί, and ἀντί. In 
Homer it occurs when a preposition follows a verb from which it is 
separated by tmesis (8 191, N. 3); as ὀλέσας ἄπο, having destroyed. 
Anastrophe takes place also when:a preposition stands for itself 
compounded with ἐστίν; as πάρα for πάρεστιν. 


ACCENT OF CONTRACTED SYLLABLES. 


§ 24. 1. A contracted syllable is accented if either of the 
original syllables had an accent. If it is a penult or ante- 
penult, the accent is regular (§ 22). If it is a final syllable, 
it is circumflexed ; but if the original word had the acute on 
the last syllable, this is retained. 9. 


Τιμώμενος from τιμαόμενος, φιλεῖτε from φιλέετε, τιμῶ from τιμάω; 
but βεβώς from βεβαώς. This proceeds from the ancient principle 
(§ 21, 1, Rem.) that the circumflex comes from ’ and‘, never from 
‘and’; so that τιμάὼ gives τιμῷ, but BeBads gives BeBas. 


Nore. If neither of the original syllables had an accent, the 
accent is not affected by contraction; as τίμα for τίμαε. ἦν 

Some exceptions to the rule of 8 24, 1 will be noticed under the 
declensions. (See § 43, Note; § 65.) 


2. In crasis, the accent of the first word is lost and that’ of 
the second remains ; as τἀγαθά for ra ἀγαθά, éydda for ἐγὼ οἶδα, 
xara for καὶ εἶτα ; τἄλλα for τὰ ἄλλα. 


3. In elision, oxytone prepositions and conjunctions lose 
their accent with the elided vowel; other oxytones throw the 


8 25.] ACCENT OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 21 


accent back to the penult, but without changing the acute to 
the pave (§ 23, 1, Note). £.g. 


Ἐπ᾿ αὐτῷ for ἐπὶ αὐτῷ, ἀλλ᾽ εἶπεν for ἀλλὰ εἶπεν, φήμ᾽ ἐγώ for φημὶ 
ἐγώ, κάκ᾽ ἔπη for κακὰ ἔπη. 


ACCENT OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 


§ 25, 1. The place of the accent in the nominative singu- 
lar must generally be learned by observation. ‘The other cases" 
accent the same syllable as the nominative, if the last syllable — 
permits (§ 22) ; otherwise, the following syllable. £.g. 


Θάλασσα, θαλάσσης, θάλασσαν, θάλασσαι, θαλάσσαις ; κόραξ, κόρακος, 
᾿ an, ’ > ΄ - 
κόρακες, κοράκων; πρᾶγμα, πράγματος, πραγμάτων; ὀδούς, ὀδόντος, ὀδόντων, 
> a 
ὀδοῦσιν. 


The kind of accent is determined as usual (8 22); as νῆσος, 
νήσου, νῆσον, νῆσοι, νήσοις. (See also ὃ 25, 2.) 


ΝΌΤΕ. The following nouns and adjectives have recessive accent 
(§ 21, 3):— (a) contracted adjectives in oos (§ 43, N. 8): (Ὁ) the neuter 
singular and vocative singular of adjectives in wy, ov (except those in 
por, compounds of φρήν), “and the neuter of comparatives in wv; as evdal- . 
μων, εὔδαιμον (ὃ 66); βελτίων, βέλτιον (ὃ 72, 2); but δαΐῴρων, δαΐφρον : 
(6) many barytone compounds in 7s in all forms ; as αὐτάρκης, αὔταρκες, 
gen. pl. αὐτάρκων ; φιλαλήθης, φιλάληθες ; but ἀληθής, ἀληθές ; ; —this in- 
cludes vocatives like Σώκρατες, Δημόσθενες (ὃ 52, 2, Ν. 1): (4) the vocative 
of syncopated nouns in xp (ὃ 57), of compound. proper names in wy, as 
᾿Αγάμεμνον, Αὐτόμεδον (except Λακεδαῖμον), and of ᾿Απόλλων, Ποσειδῶν, 
σωτήρ, saviour, and (Hom.) da%p, brother-in-law, —voc. ᾿"πολλον, Πόσει- 
δον, σῶτερ, δᾷερ. 


2. The last syllable of the genitive and dative of oxytones 
of the first and second declensions is circumflexed. In the 
jirst declension, wy of the genitive plural is circumflexed 
(§ 36, Note), except in the feminine of barytone adjectives 
and participles in os, which is spelt and accented like the 
masculine and neuter. £.9. 


Τιμῆς, τιμῇ, τιμαῖν, τιμῶν, τιμαῖς; θεοῦ. θεῷ, θεοῖν, θεῶν, θεοῖς ; also 
δικῶν, δοξῶν (from δίκη, δόξα), but ἀξίων, λεγομένων (fem. gen. plur. 
of ἄξιος, λεγόμενος, ὃ 62, 3). 


Note. The genitive and dative of the Attic second declension 
(§ 42, 2) are exceptions. 


22 | LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§ 26. 


3. Most monosyllables of the third declension accent the. 
last syllable in the genitive and dative of all numbers: here 
ων and ow are circumflexed. £.9. 


Ons, servant, θητός, Onri, θητοῖν, θητῶν, θησί. 


Note 1. Παῖς, child, Τρώς, Trojan, δᾷς, torch, δμώς, slave, φῶς, 
light, οὖς, ear, and a few others, violate the last rule in the genitive 
dual and plural; so πᾶς, all, in both genitive and dative plural: as 
mais, παιδός, παιδί, παισί, but παίδων ; πᾶς, παντός, παντί, πάντων, πᾶσι. 


Note 2. The interrogative τίς, τίνος, rim, &c., always accents the 
first syllable. So do all monosyllabic participles; as ὦν, ὄντος, ὄντι, 
ὄντων, οὖσι; Bas, βάντος. 


Nore 3. Some further exceptions occur in irregular nouns, and . 
others will be noticed under the different declensions. . 


ACCENT OF VERBS. 


§ 26. Verbs throw the accent as far back as the last 
syllable permits; as βουλεύω, βουλεύομεν, βουλεύουσιν ; παρέχω, 


΄ 3 / 5 / 
πάρεχε, ἀποδίδωμι, ἀπόδοτε. 


Note 1. This applies to compound as well as simple verbs. But 
the accent (in compound verbs) can never precede the augment : 
thus, παρεῖχον (not πάρειχον). So when the verb begins with a long 
vowel or a diphthong not augmented ; as ἐξεῦρον (not ἔξευρον). 


Nore 2. Participles in their inflection are accented as nouns 


(8 25, 1), not as verbs. Thus, βουλεύων has in the neuter βουλεῦον 
(not BotAevov) ; φιλέων, φιλῶν, has φιλέον (not φίλεον), φιλοῦν 
(§ 69). 


Nore 3. The chief exceptions to the principle just stated (δ 26) 


’ are these :— 


(1.) The following forms accent the penult: the first aorist , 
active infinitive, the second aorist middle infinitive, the perfect 
passive infinitive and participle, and all infinitives in vac or μεν 
(except those in μεναι). Thus, βουλεῦσαι, γενέσθαι, λελύσθαι, λελυ- 
μένος, ἱστάναι, διδόναι, λελυκέναι, δόμεν and δόμεναι (both Epic for 
δοῦναι). : 

Add the compounds of δός, és, θές, and σχές ; as ἀπόδος. 


(2.) The following forms have the acute on the last syllable: the 
second aorist active participle, participles in εἰς, ovs, vs, and ws, and 


5.23. ENCLITICS. οὃῦὃὕὃὅ 98 


present participles in as from verbs in μι. Thus, λιπών, λυθείς, 
διδούς, δεικνύς, λελυκώς, ἱστάς (pres.), but λύσας and στήσας (aor.). 
Add the imperatives id¢, εἰπέ, ἐλθέ, εὑρέ, and λαβέ. 


(3.) The following circumflex the last syllable: the second aorist 
active infinitive in ew, and the second person singular of the second 
aorist middle imperative in ov, except when the latter is com- 
pounded with a dissyllahic preposition (not elided). Thus, λιπεῖν, 
λιποῦ, mpodov, ἀπ-ολοῦ, ἀφ-οῦ (but κατάθου, περίδου). , 


Nore 4. For optatives in o and ae see ὃ 22, Note 1. Some other 
exceptions occur, especially in irregular verbs (like εἰμέ and φημί.) See 
also § 122, N. 2. 


ENCLITICS. 


§ 27. An enclitic is a word which loses its own accent, and 
is pronounced as if it were part of the preceding word; as 
ἄνθρωποί τε (like héminésque in Latin). The enclitics are: 


1. The personal pronouns μοῦ (wed), μοί, μέ; σοῦ (σέο, aed), 
got (τοί), σέ (τέ, τίν, τύ, ACCUS.) ; οὗ, of, €, and (in poetry) 
σφίσι (with Ionic or poetic cdi, σφίν, σφέ, σφωέ, σφωΐν, σφέων, 
σφέας, σφᾶς, σφέα, ἕο, εὗ, ἕθεν, piv, viv, ὃ 19. 1). ; 


2. The indefinite pronoun τὶς, τὶ, in all its forms; also the 
indefinite adverbs πού, ποθί, my, tol, “ποθέν, ποτέ, πώ, πώς. 
These must be distinguished from the interrogatives τίς, ποῦ, 
τῆς δ, (§ ST). 


8. The present indicative of εἰμί, be, and of φημί, say, 
except the forms εἶ and φής. | 


4. The particles γέ, τέ, τοί, πέρ, viv (not νῦν) ; and the Epic . 
κέ (or κέν), θήν, and ῥά. Also the inseparable -Se in ὅδε, 
τούσδε, ὅσ. (not δέ, but); and -Ge and -x in εἴθε and ναίχι 
(§ 28, N. 3). | 


§ 28. The word before an enclitic retains its own accent, 


and never changes aefinal acute to the grave (§ 23, 1). 


1. If its last syllable is accented} the accent of the enclitic 
is merely dropped ; as τιμαί τε, τιμῶν τε, σοφός τις, καλῶς φησιν. 


ld 


24 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS, [§ 29. 


2. If its last syllable is unaccented and it has not the acute 
on the penult, it receives from the enclitic an acute on the 
last syllable as an additional accent, while the enclitic’ loses 
its accent; as ἄνθρωπός τις, δεῖξόν μοι, παῖδές τινες, οὗτός ἐστιν, 

, εἴ τίς: 


8. If it has the acute on the penult, it receives no second 
accent. A monosyllabic enclitic here drops its accent; a 
dissyllabic enclitic retains it. Thus, τούτου ye, πόσος τις; 
ἄνδρες τινές (but παῖδές τινες), οὕτω φησίν (but οὗτός φησιν). 


Norte 1. Enclitics retain their accent whenever special emphasis 

᾿ falls upon them: this occurs especially (1) when they begin a sen- 

tence, (2) when the preceding syllable is elided. The personal 

ronouns generally retain their accent after an accented preposition ; 

_ here ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, and ἐμέ are used (except in πρός pe). The personal 

pronouns of the third person are not enclitic when they are direct 

reflexives (8 144, 2); σφίσι never in Attic prose. Ἔστί at the 

. beginning of a sentence, and when it signifies existence or possibility, 

becomes ἔστι; so after οὐκ, pn, εἶ, ὡς, kai, ἀλλ᾽ (for ἀλλά), and τοῦτ᾽ 
(for τοῦτο). 


Note 2. When several enclitics occur in succession, each takes 
an acute from the following, the last remaining without accent; as 
εἴ τίς τί σοί φησιν, if any one is saying anything to you. 


Norte 8. When an enclitic forms the last part of a compound 
word, the compound is accented as if the enclitic were a separate 
word. Thus, οὗτινος, ᾧτινι, ὥντινων, ὥσπερ, ὥστε, οἵδε, τούσδε, εἴτε; 
οὔτε, μήτε, are only apparent exceptions to § 22. 


PROCLITICS. 


§ 29. A proclitic is-a word which has no accent, and is 
pronounced as if it were part of the following word. The 
proclitics are the articles 6, 7, oi, ai, and the particles εἰ, ws, 
οὐ (οὐκ, οὐχ)» εἰς (és), ἐκ (ἐξ), ἐν (εἰν). 


Norte 1. Οὐ takes the acute at the end.of a sentence; as πῶς γὰρ 

ov; for why not? ‘Qs and sometimes ἐκ and ἐς take the acute when 
_(in poetry) they follow their noun; as κακῶν ἔξ, from evils ; θεὸς ὥς, 
asa God. ‘Qs is accented also when it means_thus_; as ὡς εἶπεν, thus 
he spoke. This use of ὥς is chiefly poetic; but καὶ ὥς, even thus, and 
οὐδ᾽ "ὥς or μηδ᾽ ὥς, not even thus, sometimes occur in Attic prose. 


§ 31.] DIALECTIC CHANGES IN LETTERS. 25 


Nore 2. When ὁ is used for the relative ὅς (§ 140), it is accented 
(as in Od. ii. 262); and many editors accent all articles when they 
are demonstrative, as in JI. i. 9, ὃ γὰρ βασιλῆι χολωθείς. 


DIALECTIC CHANGES IN LETTERS. 


§ 80. 1.. The Ionic dialect is marked by the use of ἡ 
where the Attic has a; and the Doric by the use of ἃ where 
the Attic has η.- Thus, lonic yevey for γενεά, ἰήσομαι for ἰάσομαι 
(from ἰάομαι, ὃ 109, 1) ; Doric τιμᾶσῶ for τιμήσω (from τιμάωλ). 
But an Attic ἃ caused by contraction (as in τίμα from τίμαε) 2. 
or an Attic 7 lengthened from ε (as in φιλήσω from φιλέω), 
§ 109, 1), is never thus changed. 


2. The Ionic often has εἰ, ov, for Attic e«, ο; and wi for. 
Attic εἰ in nouns and adjectives in eos, ev; as cores for 
ἕένος, μοῦνος for μόνος ; ἢ βασιλήϊος for βασίλειος. 


8. The Ionic does not avoid successive vowels, like the 
Attic; and it therefore very often omits contraction (§ 9). 
It contracts eo and cov into ev (especially in Herodotus) ; as 
ποιεῦμεν, ποιεῦσι (from ποιέομεν, ποιέουσι). for Attic ποιοῦμεν; 
ποιοῦσι. Herodotus does not use ν movable (ὃ 13, 1). See 
also § 17, 1, Note. 


PUNCTUATION MARKS. 


8 81. The Greek uses the comma (,) and the period (.) 
like the English. It has also a colon, a point above the 
line (-), which is equivalent to the English colon and semi- 
-eolon. Its mark of interrogation (;) is the same as the 
English semicolon. The mark of exclamation (!) is some- 
times used in modern editions of Greek authors, 


PART II. 


INFLECTION. 


§ 82. 1. INFLECTION is a change in the form of a 
word, made to express its relation to other words. It 
includes the declension of nouns, adjectives, and pronouns, 
and the conjugation of verbs. 


2. Every inflected word has a fundamental part, which 
is called the stem. ‘To this are appended various letters 
or syllables, called endings, to form cases, tenses, persons, 
numbers, &c. . 


Notre. Most words contain a still more primitive element than 

the stem, which is called the root. Thus, the stem of the verb τιμάω, 
honor, and that of the noun τιμή, is τιμα-, that of τίσις, payment, 
recompense, 15. tiot-, that of τίμιος, held in honor, is τιμιο-, that of 
τίμημα (τιμήματος), valuation, is τιμηματ-; but all these stems are 
developed from one root, τι-, which is seen pure in the verb ria, 
honor. In τίω, therefore, the stem of the verb and the root are the 
same. ; ; 
The stem itself may be modified and assume various forms in 
different parts of a noun or verb. Thus the same verbal stem may 
in different tenses appear as λιπ-, λειπ-, and λοιπ-; and the same 
nominal stem may appear as τιμα- and τιμη-. 


- 


§ 33. 1. There are three numbers; the singular, the 
dual, and the plural. The singular denotes one object, 
the plural more than one. The dual is sometimes used 
to denote two objects, but even here the plural is more 
common. 


§ 33.] INFLECTION. | 27 


2. There are three genders ; the masculine, the fem- ἡ 
inine, and the neuter. 


Nore 1. The grammatical gender in Greek is very often different 
from the natural gender. Especially many names of things are 
masculine or feminine. A Greek noun is called masculine, femi- 
nine, or neuter, when it requires an adjective or article to take the 
form adapted to either of these genders. The gender is often indi- 
cated by prefixing the article; as (6) ἀνήρ, man; (ἡ) γυνή, woman; 
(τὸ) πρᾶγμα, thing. (See § 78.) 


Note 2. Nouns which may be either masculine or feminine are 
said to be of the common gender: as (6, ἡ) θεός, God or Goddess. 
Names of animals which include both sexes, but have only one 
grammatical gender, are called epicene (émixowos); as 6 ἀετός, the - 
eagle ; ἡ ἀλώπηξ, the fox. 


Nore 3. The gender must often be learned by observation. But 
names of males are generally masculine, and names of females fem- 
inine. Most names of rivers, winds, and months are masculine; and 
most names.of countries, towns, trees, and islands are feminine. Most 
nouns denoting qualities or conditions are feminine; as ἡ ἀρετή, virtue, 
ἐλπίς, hope. Diminutive nouns are neuter; as παιδίον, child. Other 
rules are given under the declensions (§§ 35, 40, 58) and in § 129. 


3. There are five cases ; the nominative, genitive, dative, 
accusative, and vocative. . 

The nominative and vocative plural are always alike. 
In neuters, the nominative, accusative, and vocative are 
alike in all numbers; and in the plural these cases end 
in & The nominative, accusative, and vocative dual are 
always alike; and the genitive and dative dual are always 
alike. 


Nore 1. The cases have in general the same meaning as the cor- 
responding cases in Latin; as Nom. a man (as subject), Gen. of a 
man, Dat. to or for a man, Accus. a man (as object), Voc. O man. 
The chief functions of the Latin ablative are divided between the 
Greek genitive and dative. (See Remark before § 157.) 


Note 2. All the cases except the nominative and yocative are 
called oblique cases. 


28 ἷ INFLECTION, [§ 34. 


NOUNS. 


8 84. There are three declensions of nouns, in which 
_also all adjectives and participles are included. 


These correspond in general to the first three declensions 
in Latin. (See § 45,2, Note). The first is sometimes called 
the A declension, and the second the O declension; these two 
together are sometimes called the Vowel declension, as opposed 
to the third or Consonant declension (§ 45,1). The principles 
which are common to adjectives, participles, and substantives 
are given under the three declensions of nouns. 


, 

Note. The name noun (ὄνομα), according te ancient usage, includes 
both substantives and adjectives. But by modern custom noun is often 
used as synonymous with substantive, and it is so used in the present 
work, 


FIRST DECLENSION. 


§ 35. Stems of the first declension end originally in a, 
‘ which is often modified into ἡ in the singular. The nom- 
inative singular of feminines ends in a or 7; that of mas- 
culines ends in as or ἧς. : 


§ 86: The following table shows the terminations in all the 
eases of this declension. These consist of the final a (or 7) of 
the stem united with the case-endings (ὃ 32,2). See ὃ 45,2, N. 


SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL. . 
᾿ Feminine. Masculine. Mase. and Fem. Mase. and Fem. 
N eos ἢ as ἧς N. a 
G. Gs οἵ ἧς 7s ov (for ao) N. A. V. ἃ G. ὧν (for dev) 
D ᾳ« οἷ ἢ ᾳ« ἢ G. Ὁ. aww D. ats 
A. av ἢν av ἢν - _| A. as 
Vv a n ἃ Gory V. ae 


§ 37.] FIRST DECLENSION. - 29 
Nore. Here, as in most cases, the relation of the stem to the termina- 
tions must be explained by reference to the earlier forms of the language. 
Thus, ὧν of the genitive plural (δ 25, 2) is contracted from the Homeric 
άων (ὃ 39); and ov of the genitive singular comes from the Homeric ao 
(through a form εο) by contraction. The stem in a may thus be seen in 
all the cases of οἰκία and ταμίας, and (with the change of a to ἡ in the 
singular) also in all the other paradigms. (See § 45, 2, Note.) The forms 
in a and 7 have no case-endings. 


§ 37. 1. The nouns (ἡ) τιμή, honor, (ἡ) οἰκία, house, 
(ἡ) χώρα, land, (ἡ) Μοῦσα, Muse, (0) πολίτης, citizen, 


(0) ταμίας, steward, are thus declined --- : 
Singular. | 
N. τιμή οἰκὰἩ χώρα Μοῦσα πολίτης ταμίας 
G. τιμῆς οἰκας χώρας Μούσης πολίτου ταμίου 
D. τιμῇ οἰκίᾳ χώρᾳ Μούσῃηῃ πολίτη ταμίᾳ 
A. τιμήν οἰκίάν χώραν Μοῦσαν πολίτην ταμίαν 
Υ. τιμή οἰκία χώρα Μοῦσα πολῖτα - ταμία 
Dual. | 
N. A.V. τιμά olka χώρα Μούσα πολίτα ταμία 
6. Ὁ. τιμαῖν οἰκίαν χώραιν Μούσαιν πολίταιν ταμίαιν 
Plural. 
N. τιμαί οἰκίαι χῶρα Μοῦσαι πολῖται ταμίαι 
G. τιμῶν οἰκιῶν χωρῶν Μουσῶν πολιτῶν ταμιῶν᾽ 
D. τιμαῖς οἰκίαις χώραις Μούσαις πολίταις ταμίαις 
A, τιμάς οἰκίὰς χώρας Μούσας πολίτας. ταμίας 
γ: τιμαί οἰκίαν χῶραι Μοῦσαι πολῖται ταμίαι 


The following show varieties of quantity and accent : — 


θάλασσᾶ, sea, θαλάσσης, θαλάσσῃ, θάλασσαν ; Pl. θάλασσαι, &e. 
γέφυρᾶ, bridge, γεφύρας, γεφύρᾳ, γέφυραν ; ; Ph, γέφυραι, &e. 
σκιᾷ, shadow, σκιᾶς, σκιᾷ, σκιάν ; Pl. σκιαΐ, σκιῶν, σκιαῖς, ζῶα 


γνώμη, opinion, γνώμης, γνώμῃ, γνώμην: Pl. . γνῶμαι; γνωμῶν, &c. 
πεῖρα, ΚΝ, πείρας, πείρᾳ, πέϊραν ; Pi. πεῖραι, πειρῶν, &C. 


2. Nouns ending in a preceded by e, 4, or p, and a few 
proper names, retain a throughout the singular, and are 


80 τς INFLECTION, [8 88. 


declined like οἰκία or χώρα (those with & like γέφυρα or 
πεῖρα). Other nouns in a are declined like Μοῦσα. 


Norte 1. The nouns in ns which have ἅ in the vocative singular 
(like πολίτης) are chiefly those in rns, national appellatives (like 
Πέρσης, a Persian, voc. Ilépca), and compounds (like γεω-μέτρης, 
a geometer, VOC. yewpérpa). Δεσπότης, master, has voc. δέσποτᾶ. 
Most other nouns in ἧς have the vocative in n; as Κρονίδης, son of 

Kronos, Κρονίδη. 


Nore 2. The termination a of the nominative singular is always 
short when the genitive has ns. It is generally long when the gen- 
itive has as; the exceptions, which can always be seen by the accent 
(§ 22), are chiefly (a) most nouns ending in pa preceded by a diph- 
thong or by o (as μοῖρα, yépipa), (L) most abstract nouns formed 
from the stems of adjectives in ns or oos (as ἀλήθεια, εὔνοια), (c) 
most compounds in eva (as peoo-yera), (7) common nouns in ea and 
τρια designating females (as βασίλεια, queen, ψάλτρια, female harper): 
but βασιλεία, kingdom (with 4a). ! | 


Nore 3. Av of the accusative singular and a of the vocative sin- 
gular agree in quantity with a of the nominative. The quantity 
of all other vowels may be seen from the table in § 36. 


Nore 4. The noutis in ἅ always have recessive accent (§ 21, 3). 


Contract Nouns of the First Declension. 


ὃ 38. Most nouns in aa, ea, and eas, are contracted 
(§ 9). Μνάα, μνᾶ, mina, σὑκέα, συκῆ. fig-tree, and “Eppé- 
as, Ἑρμῆς, Hermes (Mercury), are thus declined : ~ 


Singular. 
N. (uvda) μνᾶ (συκέα) συκῆ (‘Epuéas) “Epps 
G. (uvdas) μνᾶς (cvKéas) συκῆς (Ἑρμέου) “Eppod 
D. νά μὙέὀ  οσὄᾷἀ(συκέᾳ) συκῇ (Ἑρμέᾳ)͵ Ἑρμῇ 
A. ᾿(μνάαν) μνᾶν (συκέαν) συκῆν (Epuéav) Ἑρμῆν 
Υ. (μνάα) μνᾶ (συκέα) συκῆ CEpuéa) = ‘Epph 
Dual. | 
N. A. V. (uvda) pve (συκεα) συκᾶ (Ἑρμέα) ‘Eppa 
σ᾿; Ὁ. (μνάαιν) μναῖν (cuKéaw) συκαῖν. (‘Epuéav) “Eppaty 


§ 41.} SECOND DECLENSION. 31 


Plural. 
N. (uvdat) μναῖ (συκέαι) συκαῖ (Ἑρμέαι) ‘Eppat 
G. (μναῶν) μνῶν (συκεῶν) συκῶν (Ἑρμεῶν) “Eppav 
D. (μνάαι5) μναῖς (cuxéas) συκαῖς (‘Epuéacs) “Ἑ!ρμαῖς 
Α. (uvdas) μνᾶς - (cuxéas) συκᾶς (Eppyeas) “Eppas 
V. (uvdat) μναῖ (συκέα) συκαῖ (Ἑρμέαι) ‘Eppat 


Nore 1. Βορέας, North wind, which appears uncontractedin Attic, 
has also a contracted form Boppas, (with irregular pp), gen. (of Doric 
form, ὃ 39, 3) Βορρᾶ, dat. Boppa, acc. Boppav, voc. Βορρᾶ. 


Nore 2. For ea contracted to ἃ in the dual and the accusative plural, 
see ὃ 9, 3, Note. For contract adjectives of this class, see ὃ 65. . 


Dialects. 


§ 39. 1. Ionic η, ns, n, nv, in the singular, for a, as, a, av. Doric 
a, as, a, av, for ἡ, &c. in the same cases. (See ὃ 30.) The Ionic 
generally uses the uncontracted forms cf contract nouns. | | 


2. Nom. Sing. Hom. sometimes ἅ for ns; as ἱππότα for ἱππότης; 
horseman. (Compare Latin poeta = ποιητής.) 


3. Gen. Sing. For ov, Hom. ao, ew, sometimes @; as ᾿Ατρείδαο, 
᾿Ατρείδεω, βορέω: Tidt. ew, rarely ἔω for ἔεω (sometimes ew in old 
Attic proper names): Doric ἃ (rarely in Attic nouns in as). 


4. Gen. Plur. Wom. dev, ἐων (whence, by contraction; Attic ὧν; 
Doric dv); a8 ναυτάων, ναυτέων (Att. ναυτῶν) : Hdt. ἔων. 


5. Dat. Plur. Poetic aor, Hom. now, ns; Hdt. ns; as τιμαῖσι, 
Μούσῃσι or Μούσῃς (for Μούσαις). 


SECOND DECLENSION. 


§ 40. The nominative singular of most nouns of the 
second declension ends in os or ον (gen. ov). Those in 
os are masculine, rarely feminine; those in oy are neuter. 


Norr. The stem of nouns of this declension ends in o, which is 
sometimes lengthened to w. It becomes ¢ in the vocative singular; 
and @ in the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural of neuters. 


§ 41. The following table shows the terminations of nouns 
in os and ον in this declension, that is, the final o of the stem 
(with its modifications) united with the case-endings : — 


82 INFLECTION. ὁ 


SINGULAR. DUAL. 


Mase. ὦ Fem. Neuter. | Masc., Fem., ὦ Neuter. 
N os ov 

G. ov (foroo) | N. A.V. ὦ (for o) 
D. w for ov) G. D. οὖν 

A. ov 

γ ε ον 


[8 42. 


PLURAL. 

Mase. ὦ Fem. Nevrt. 
N. ov a 
G. wv (for owv) 
D. ols 
A. ovs(forovs) «@ 
V. οι a 


Note. Looking at the original forms of these terminations (§ 36, Note), 
we see the stem in o in all the cases except in the vocative singular in ε and 


the neuter plural ina. (See ὃ 45, 2, Note.) 


ὃ 42, 1. The nouns (6) λόγος, word, (ἡ) νῆσος, island, 
(6, ἡ) ἄνθρωπος, man or human being, (ἡ) ὁδός, road, 


(τὸ) δῶρον, gift, are thus declined : — 


Singular. 
Ν. λόγος νῆσος ἄνθρωπος 
α. λόγου νήσου ἀνθρώπου 
D. λόγῳ νήσῳ ἀνθρώπῳ 
A. λόγον νῆσον ἄνθρωπον 
Υ. λόγε νῆσε ἄνθρωπε 
Dual. — 
N. A.V. λόγω νήσω ἀνθρώπω 
α. D. λόγοιν νήσοιν ἀνθρώποιν 
Plural, 
λόγοι νῆσοι ἄνθρωποι 
λόγων νήσων ἀνθρώπων 
λόγοις νήσοις ἀνθρώποις 
λόγους νήσους ἀνθρώπους 
"λόγοι νῆσοι ἄνθρωποι 


AP OR 


886s δῶρον 


ὁδοῦ δώρου 
ὁ δώρῳ SS * 
ὁδόν δῶρον 


odé Sapov 
656 Sapo 
ὁδοῖν δώροιν 
ὁδοί Sapa 
ὁδῶν δώρων 


ὁδοῖς ϑώροις 
ὁδούς δῶρα 
ὁδοί δώρα 


Thus decline νόμος, law, κίνδυνος, danger, ποταμός, river, 
Bios, life, θάνατος, death, σῦκον, fig, ἱμάτιον, outer garment. - 


8431 SECOND DECLENSION. 33 


Nore. The nominative in os is sometimes used for thé vocative 
in εἰ as ὦ φίλος (8 157, Note). Θεός, God, has always θεός as 
vocative. ‘AdeAdos, brother, has voc. ἄδελφε. 

2. A few masculine and feminine nouns of this de- 
clension end in ws (gen. wm), and a few neuters in wy 
(gen.w). This is often called the Attie declension. The 
nouns (0) νεώς, temple, and (τὸ) ἀνώγεων, hall, are thus 
declined : — | | 


Singular. Dual. Plural. 

N. γεώς ' Ν, νεῴ 

G. ved WA. ¥i νεώ G. vey 

D. vo  |G.D vewy D. γεῴς 

Α. γεών Α. γεώς 

γ. νεώς ἯΙ γεῴ 

N. A. Υ. ἀνώγεων | N. A. V. ἀνώγεω | N. A. V. ἀνώγεω 
G. ἀνώγεω |G. Ὁ. ἀνώγεῳν 6. ἀνώγεων 
D. ἀνώγεῳ Ὁ. ἀνώγεῳς 


The aecent of these nouns is irregular (N. 2). (See § 22, N. 2; 
and § 25, 2, Note. See also § 53, 1, N. 2.) 


Note 1. Some masculines and feminines of this class may drop 
v of the accusative singular; as λαγώς, accus. λαγώμ or ayo. 
“Aws, rov”Adwy or” Aba; Kas, τὴν Kav or Ka; and Kéas, Τέως, Μίνως. 
"Eos, dawn, has regularly τὴν “Eo. 


Nore 2. Most nouns in ews which follow the Attic declension have 
older forms in dos or nos (with reversed quantity); as Hom. λᾷός, people, 
Att. λεώς ; Dor. vdbs, Ion. νηός, Att. νεώς ; Hom. Μενέλαος, Att. Μενέλεως. 


In words like Mevédews, the original accent is retained. (See § 53,-35N.1 5 


§ 54, Note.) 
Ἢ ] 7 


i 
Contract Nouns of the Second Declensi ΣῊΝ 


§ 48, Many nouns in eos, οος, eov, and oie con- 


tracted. Νόος, νοῦς, mind, and ὀστέον, ὀστοῦν, bone;-are 


thus declined : — 


34 INFLECTION. [§ 44. 
Singular. Dual. Plural. 

N. (véos) νοῦς N. (vba) νοΐ 

G. (νόου) νοῦ |N.A.V. (vdw) vo G. (νόων) νῶν 
D. (νόῳ) νῷ 6, ἢ. (νόοι») νοῖν |{D. (νόοι) νοῖς 
Ἂς (γόον) νοῦν . 14. (νόου) νοῦς 
V. (ve) vod Υ. (νόο) νοῖ 
N.A.V. (ὀστέον) ὀστοῦν] Ν. Δ, Υ. (ὀστέω) ὀστῴ |N.V.A. (ὀστέα) ὀστᾶ 
G. (ὀστέου) ὀστοῦ |G. D. (ὀστέον) ὀστοῖν . (ὀστέων) ὀστῶν 
D. (ὀστέῳ) ὀστῷ D. (ὀστέοις) ὀστοῖς 


For the forms in εος and oov, which are generally adjectives, see 


§ 65. 


Notre. The accent of these contract forms is irregular in seve- 
ral points: — 

1. The nominative, accusative, and vyocative dual contract ἕω and 
dw into ὦ (not ὦ). See ὃ 24, 1. 


2. Adjectives in eos circumflex the last syllable of all contract 
forms ;, as χρύσεος, χρυσοῦς (not χρύσους, ὃ 24, 1), golden. So κάνεον, 
κανοῦν, basket.. Except ὦ in the dual, just mentioned. 


3. The contracted forms of compounds in oos follow the accent of 
the contracted nominative singular; as dvrimvoos, ἀντίπνους, blowing 
against, gen. ἀντιπνόου, ἀντίπνου (not ἀντιπνοῦ), &c. 


For ea contracted to ἃ in the neuter plural, see ὃ 9, 3, Note. 


Dialects. 


8 44. 1. Gen. Sing. Epic ow (for ojo), Doric ὦ (for 00); as 
θεοῖο, μεγάλω. Attic ov is contracted from oo. 

2. Gen. and Dat. Dual. Epic ouy for ow; as ἵπποιιν. 

3. Dat. Plur. Tonic and poetic oor for ois; as ἵπποισι. 

4. Acc. Plur. Doric ὡς or os for ous; as νόμως, τὼς λύκος. 

5. The Ionic generally omits contraction. 


THIRD DECLENSION. 


§ 45. 1. This declension includes all nouns not be- 
longing to either the first or the second. Its genitive 
singular ends in es (sometimes ws). 


8 45.] THIRD DECLENSION. 35 


Norte. This is often called the Consonant Declension (δ 34), because the 
stem here generally ends in a consonant. Some stems, however, end in a 
close vowel (« or v), some in a diphthong, and afew in o. The last two are 
supposed to have ended originally in a consonant (F or o). See ὃ 53, 3; 
§ 54; § 55. . 

2. The stem of a noun of the third declension cannot 
always be determined by the nominative singular; but it is 
generally found by dropping os (or ws) of the genitive. 
The cases are formed by adding to the stem the following 
endings (which here are not united with any letter of the 
stem) :— 


SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL. 


Masc. & Fem. Neut.| Masc., Fem., Neut.| Masc. & Fem. Neut. 
N ς None. N. ες ἅ 
α. ος, ὡς ἽΝ ΚΑ, Ὗς ἃ α. ων 
Boe ἵ G. D. ou D. ot 
A aorv - ‘None. A. as a 
V. None, or like N. None. V. ες ἃ 


Norr. The following comparison shows the relations of the 
case-endings in the three declensions : — 


Sina. — Nom. 1st decl. masc. ¢; 2nd masc. and fem. s, neut. ν 
(Lat. 8, m); 3rd masc. and fem. ς (Lat. s). 

Gen. 1st mase. 0, fem. ¢; 2nd o or wo, making ov or oo with o of 
the stem. (cf. Lat. 7); 3rd os (Lat. is). ee τ 

Dat. All decl. 1; Ist and 2nd ¢ in a, n, @ (Lat. 2, ai, ae, 0). 

Accus. Mase. and fem. Ist and 2nd ν for p (Lat. m); 3rd ν 
(Lat. m), or ἅ for αν or aw (Lat. em), cf. τύρσι-ν with Lat. turri-m, 
ὀ-δόντ-α(ν) with Lat. dent-em. 


Dua. N. A. V. 1st and 2nd a and oof stem lengthened to.a and 
w; 3rd e. | ; : 
᾿ G. D. 1st and 2nd w; 3rd ow. 


Piur. — Nom. Mase. and fem. Ist and 2nd; making a and oz 
with a and o of the stem (cf. Lat. 7); 3rd es (Latin és; neut. 3rd 
a@ (Lat. ἃ). 

Gen. wv; in 1st and 2nd contracted with a or o of the stem to wy 
(cf. Lat. um, om). 

Dat. 1st and 2nd ες (older ἐστ) ; 3rd σι. 

Accus. Mase. and fem. 1st and 2nd ¢ (for vs), ἄς and ovs coming 
from avs and ovs (Lat. as, os); 3rd as (for avs) retaining ἅ (Lat. és): 
neut. 3rd ἅ (Lat. ἃ). 

_ The vocative is either like the nominative or without a case- 
ending. 


36 INFLECTION. ᾿ς [8 46. 


FORMATION OF CASES. 


Nominative Singular. 


8 46. The forms of the nominative singular of this de- 
clension are numerous, and must be learned partly by 
practice. The following are the general principles on which 
the nominative is formed from the stem. 

1. In neuters, the nominative singular is generally the 
same as the stem. Stems ending in τ (including vr) regu- 
larly drop ther (8 7). Fg. 

Σῶμα, body, σώματ-ος; peddy (neuter of pédas), black, μέλαν-ος; 
λῦσαν (neuter of λύσας), having loosed, λύσαντ-ος; πᾶν, all, παντ-ός ; 
τιθέν, placing, τιθέντ-ος ; χαρίεν, graceful, χαρίεντ-ος ; διδόν, giving, δὲ- 
δόντος; λέγον, saying, λέγοντ-ος ; δεικνύν (Ὁ), showing, δεικνύνττος. For 


the masculine nominatives of these adjectives and participles, see 
below, § 46, 2, 3, and Note 1. ὃ 


Some neuter stems in ar changer to ς in the nominative, and 
a few to p; as τέρας, prodigy, τέρατ-ος ; ἧπαρ, liver, ἥπατ-ος. 


2. Masculine and feminine stems (except those included 
under 3 and 4) form the nominative singular by adding sand 
making the needful euphonic changes (8 16). Μ΄. 

Φύλαξ, guard, φύλακ-ος ; yoy, vulture, γυπ-ός ; φλέψ, vein, preB-os 
(8. 16, 2); ἐλπίς (for ἐλπιδς), hope, ἐλπίδ-ος (8. 10, 2); χάρις, grace, 
χάριτ-ος; ὄρνις, bird, ὄρνζθ-ος; νύξ, night, νυκτ-ός; μάστιξ, scourge, 
pdoriy-os; σάλπιγξ, trumpet, σάλπιγγ-ος. So Αἴᾶς, Ajax, Αἴαντ-ος 
(§ 16, 6, Ν. 1); λύσᾶς, λύσαντ-ος ; πᾶς, παντ-ός ; τιθείς, τιθέντ-ος ; χαρί- 
εἰς, χαρίεντ-ος ; δεικνύς (Ὁ), δεικνύνττος. (The neulers of the last five 
words, λῦσαν, πᾶν, τιθέν, χαρίεν, and δεικνύν, are given under § 46, 1.) 

8. Masculine and feminine stems in vy and p lengthen the 
last vowel, if it is short, but are otherwise unchanged in the 
nominative. £.9. 

Αἰών, age, aidv-os; δαίμων, divinity, δαίμον-ος ; λιμήν, harbor, λιμέν- 
os; θήρ, beast, Onp-os; ἀήρ; air, ἀέρ-ος. 

Exceptions are μέλᾶς, black, pedav-os; τάλᾶς, wretched, rddav-os ; 
εἷς, one, év-ds; Kreis, comb, Krev-os; pis, nose, pw-os; Which add s. 

4. Masculine stems in ovr generally drop τ, and form the 
nominative like stems in ν (δ 46,3). Z.g. 


Λέων, lion, λέοντ-ος ; λέγων, speaking, λέγοντ-ος ; ὦν, being, ὄντ-ος. 


8 47.] THIRD DECLENSION. 37 


, 


Note 1. Masculine participles from verbs in an change ovr to 
ovs (ὃ 46, 2); as διδούς, giving, διδόνττος (ὃ 16, 6, N. 1). Soa few 
nouns in ovs; as ὁδούς, tooth, ὀδόνττος. Neuters in ovr- are regular 
(§ 46,1): In πούς, ποδ-ός, ‘foot, -ods becomes -ous. 


_ Nore 2. The perfect active participle (§ 68), with a stem in or, 
forms its nominative in ws (masc.) and os (neut.); as λελυκώς, hav- 
ing loosed, λελυκός, ZEN. λελυκότ-ος. 


Nore 8. For nominatives in ys (es) and os, gen. eos, see ὃ 52, 1, Note. 
A few other peculiar formations in contract nouns will be noticed below, 
§§ 53-56. 


Accusative Singular. 


§ 47. 1. Most masculines and feminines with stems ending 
in a consonant form the accusative singular by adding &@ to 
the stem; as φύλαξ (puAak-), φύλακα ; λέων (Acovt-), lion, λέ- 


οντα. 


2. Nouns in ts, vs, avs, and ovs, if the stem ends in a vowel 
or diphthong, change ς of the nominative to v; as πόλις, state, 
πόλιν ; ἰχθύς, fish, ἰχθύν ; ναῦς, ship, ναῦν ; βοῦς, ox, βοῦν. 

But if the stem ends in a consonant, barytones of these 
classes have v in prose (rarely a) and ν or a in poetry, while 
others have only the form ina; as ἔρις, strife, ἔριν (poet. also 
ἔριδα) ; ὄρνις, bird, ὄρνιν (poet. ὄρνιθα) ; εὔελπις, hopeful, εὔελπιν 
(εὐέλπιδα) ; while ἐλπίς, hope, has only ἐλπίδα ; πούς (ποδ-), 
foot, rida; παῖς (παιδ-), child, παῖδα. 


Norte 1. ᾿Απόλλων and Ποσειδῶν (Ποσειδάων) contract the accusa- 
tive into ᾿Απόλλω and Ποσειδῶ, after dropping ν. 

For a similar contraction of ova into w, and of oves and ovas into 
ous, see the declension of comparatives, ὃ 72, 2 


Norte 2. For accusatives in ea (for εσα, εἴα) from nouns in ns and evs, 
see ὃ 52, 1, Note, and § 53, 3, N. 1; and for those in ὦ (for oa or wa) from 
nouns in ὦ or ws, see ὃ 55. 


88 ᾿ INFLECTION. [8 48, 


Vocative Singular. 


\ . . . . 
§ 48, 1. The vocative singular of masculines and femi- 
nines is generally the same as the nominative. 


2. But in the following cases, it is the same as the stem : — 


(a) In barytones with stems ending in a liquid; as δαίμων 
(Sapov-), divinity, voc. δαῖμον ; ῥήτωρ (pytop-), speaker, voc. 
ῥῆτορ ; σώφρων (cwdpov-), continent, voc. σῶφρον. 

But if the last syllable is accented, the vocative is the same 
as the nominative ; as λιμήν (Aev-), harbor, voc. λιμήν ; αἰθήρ 
(aidep-), sky, voc. αἰθήρ. 

(Ὁ) In barytone nouns and adjectives whose stems end in 
vt, final τ of the stem being dropped (ὃ 7) ; as γίγας (γιγαντ-)» 
giant, voc. yiyav; λέων - (Acovr-), lion, voc. λέον ; χαρίεις (χα- 
ριεντ-). graceful, voc. χαρίεν. 

But all participles of the third declension have the vocative 
and nominative alike. (Compare λύων, loosing, voc. ‘Noor, 
with λέων, lion, voc. λέον.) 


᾿ (6) In nouns and adjectives in ts (except those in is wos), 
evs, vs, and avs. These drop s of the nominative to form the 
vocative ; as τυραννίς (τυραννιδ-), tyranny, voc. tupavvi (ὃ 7) ; 
πόλις (πολι-), state, VOC. πόλι; ἰχθύς, ἰχθύ; βασιλεύς, βασιλεῦ 
(8 ὅ8, 8, N. 1) 3 γραῦς, γραῦ (§ 54, Note) ; παῖς (for πάϊς), 
παῖ (for πάϊ). So in βοῦς, Bod (8 54), and sometimes in 
Οἰδίπους; Οἰδίπου, Oedipus. 

(4) In nouns and adjectives in ys, gen. eos (ovs). These 


form the vocative in ες (ὃ 52); ; as Σωκράτης, VOC. Σώκρατες 
(v. Note) ; τριήρης, Voc. τριῆρες ; ἀληθής, VOC. ἀληθές. 


Nore. For the recessive accent of many vocatives, as ᾿Αγάμεμνον, Σώκρα- 
τες, "λπολλον, κακόδαιμον, see ὃ 25, 1, Note. 


3. Nouns in ώ, gen. οὖς (§ 55), form the vocative in oi. So 
a few in dv, gen. ods (§ 55, N. 2) ; as ἀηδών, voc. ἀηδοῖ. 


§ δ0.] THIRD DECLENSION. 39 


_ Dative Plural. 


8 49. The dative pie al is formed by adding σι to the 
stem. Lg. 

Φύλαξ, (φυλακ-), φύλαξι; ῥήτωρ (ῥητορ-), ῥήτορσι; ; ἐλπίς (amd), 
ἐλπίσι; ποῦς (ποδ-), ποσί; λέων εοντ-}» λέουσι; δαίμων, (δαιμον-), 
δαίμοσι ; τιθείς (τιθεντ-), τιθεῖσι; χαρίεις (χαριεντ-), χαρίεσι ; ἱστάς 
(ἱσταντ-), ἱστᾶσι; δεικνύς (δεικνυντ'), δεικνῦσι; βασιλεύς (βασιλευ-), 
βασιλεῦσι; βοῦς (βου-), βουσί; γραῦς (γραυ-), γραυσί (§ 54). For the 
euphonic changes, see § 16, 2 and 6, with notes. 

For a change in syncopated nouns, see § 57. 


NOUNS WITH MUTE OR LIQUID STEMS. | 


τ 8 50. The following are examples of the most com- 
mon forms of nouns of the third declension with mute or 
_ liquid stems. 


For the formation of the cases of these nouns, see §§ 46— 
49. For euphonic changes in nearly all,"see ὃ 16, 2 and § 46. 
For special changes in λέων and γίγας, see ὃ 16, 6, N. 1. 


I. MASCULINES AND FEMININEsS. 


ὃ (φυλᾶκ-) ἡ (φλεβ) ἡ (σαλπιγγ-) ὁ (Aeovr-) 
watchman. vein. trumpet. lion. 
Singular. 
N. φύλαξ φλέψ σάλπιγξ λέων 
G. φύλακος φλεβός σάλπιγγος λέοντος 
D. φύλακι φλεβί σάλπιγγι λέοντι 
Α. φύλακα φλέβα σάλπιγγα λέοντα 
¥. φύλαξ. φλέψ σάλπιγξ λέον 
Dual. 
N. A.V. φύλακε φλέβε - σάλπιγγε λέοντε 
G. ἘΣ φυλάκοιν φλεβοῖν σαλπίγγοιν λεόντοιν 
Plural. . 
N. V. φύλακες φλέβες σάλπιγγες λέοντες 
G. φυλάκων φλεβῶν σαλπίγγων λεόντων 
Ὁ. φύλαξι - φλεψί σάλπιγξι λέουσι 
Α. φύλακας φλέβας σάλπιγγας λέοντας 


40 INFLECTION, [§ 50. 


ὃ (yeyavr-) ἡ (Aapwa8-) ἡ (ἐλπῖδι) ὁ ἡ (Spvi0-) 
giant. torch. hope. bird. 
Singular. 
N. ylyas λαμπάς ἐλπίς ὄρνις 
6. γίγαντος λαμπάδος ἐλπίδος ὄρνιθος 
Ὁ. γίγαντι λαμπάδι ἐλπίδι ὄρνιθι 
Α. , γίγαντα λαμπάδα ἐλπίδα ὄρνιν (ὄρνιθα) 
Ἧς γίγαν λαμπάς ἐλπί ὄρνι 
Dual. 
ἀν ΑΙ Υ. γίγαντε λαμπάδε ἐλπίδε ὄρνιθε 
σ. Ὁ. γιγάντοιν λαμπάδοιν ἐλπίδοιν ὀρνίθοιν 
Plural. 
ΝΟΥ, γίγαντες λαμπάδες ἐλπίδες ὄρνιθες 
G. γιγάντων λαμπάδων ἐλπίδων ὀρνίθων 
Ὁ. γίγασι λαμπάσι ἐλπίσι ὄρνισι 
A. γίγαντας λαμπάδας ἐλπίδας ὄρνιθας 
ὃ (ποιμεν-) δὃΣ (αἰων-) ὃ (ἡγεμον-) ὁ (δαιμον-) 
shepherd. age. leader. divinity. 
Singular. 
N. ποιμήν αἰών ἡγεμών ϑαίμων 
G. ποιμένος αἰῶνος ἡγεμόνος δαίμονος 
D. ποιμένι αἰῶνι ἡγεμόνι ᾿ δαίμονι 
A. ποιμένα, αἰῶνα ἡγεμόνα δαίμονα 
Vy ποιμήν αἰών ἡγεμών δαῖμον 
Dual. | 
N. A. V. ποιμένε αἰῶνε ἡγεμόνε Salpove 
G. D. ποιμένοιν αἰώνοιν ἡγεμόνοιν δαιμόνοιν 
Plural. 
NWS ποιμένες αἰῶνες ἡγεμόνες δαίμονες 
G. ποιμένων αἰώνων ᾿ ἡγεμόνων δαιμόνων 
D. ποιμέσι αἰῶσι ἡγεμόσι ϑαίμοσι 
A. ποιμένας αἰῶνας ~ ἡγεμόνας δαίμονας 


§ δ0.] 


THIRD DECLENSION. 


ὃ (ῥητορ-) 
orator. 
ῥήτωρ θής 
ῥήτορος θητός 
ῥήτορι θητί 
ῥήτορα θῆτα 
ῥῆτορ θής 
ῥήτορε θῆτε 
ῥητόροινν θητοῖν 
ῥήτορες θῆτες 
ῥητόρων / θητῶν 
ῥήτορσι θησί 
ῥήτορας θῆτας 


ὁ (θητ-) ὁ (ἀλ-) 


hired man. salt. 


Singular. 


ἅλς 
ἁλός 
ἁλί 
ἅλα 
ἅλς 


Dual. 


fire 
ἁλοῖν 
Plural. 
ἅλες 
ἁλῶν 
ἁλσί 
ἅλας 


II. ΝἜΈΣΤΕΒΒ. 


τό (σωματ-)} 
body. 


σῶμα 
σώματος 
σώματι 


σώματε 
σωμάτοιν 


σώματα 
σωμάτων 
σώμασι 


τό (περατ-)} 


end, 


Singular. 


πέρας 
πέρατος 
πέρατι 


Dual. 
πέρατε 


περάτοιν 


Plwrat. 
πέρατα 


_ περάτων 
πέρασι 


ὃ (θηρ-) 


ἡ (ῥῖν-) 


beast. nose. 


θήρ ῥίς 
θηρός ῥῖνός 
θηρί ῥινί 
θῆρα ῥῖνα 
θήρ ῥίς 


ῥῖνε 
ῥινοῖν 


θῆρε 
θηροῖν 


ῥῖνες 
ῥινῶν 
ῥισί 

ῥῖνας 


θῆρες 
θηρῶν 
θηρσί 
θῆρας 


τό (ἧπατ-) 
liver. 


ἧπαρ 
ἥπατος 
ἥπατι 


ἥπατε 
ἡπάτοιν 


ἥπατα 
ἡπάτων 
ἥπασι 


41 


.42 INFLECTION. [8 51. 


STEMS ENDING IN 3, OR IN A VOWEL OR DIPHTHONG. 


§ 51. 1. Most nouns of the third declension in which 
a vowel of the stem directly precedes a vowel in the 
case-ending are contracted in some of their cases. 


2. The contracted nominative and accusative plural | 
have the same form. (See, however, § 53, 3, N. 3.) 


Nott. The collision of vowel sounds in these nouns is often caused 
by dropping the final consonant of the stem, usually ¢ or F. (See § 45, 1, 
Note.) 


STEMS IN EX. 


§ 52. 1. Nouns in ns and os, gen. eos, are contracted 
whenever eof the stem precedes a vowel. 


Norge. A comparison of kindred languages shows that the original 
stem of these nouns ended in eo, in which σ is dropped before a vowel or 
another o in the case-ending (ὃ 16, 4, Note.) The genitive γένεος, there- 
fore, stands for an original form yeveo-os, which, however, is never found 
in Greek. (See § 56, Note.) The proper substantive stems change es 
to os in the nominative singular (as in γένος, τεῖχος); the adjective stems 
lengthen es to ys in the masculine and feminine, and retain es in the neu- 
ter. (See ὃ 66.) A few adjectives in npys are used substantively, as 
τριήρης (triply fitted, sc. ναῦς), trireme. 


2. The nouns (ἡ) τριήρης (rpinpeo-), trireme, and (τὸ) 
γένος (yeveo-), race, are thus declined : — 


Singular. 
N. τριήρης γένος 
α. (τριήρεο) τριήρους (γένεο) γένους 
D. (τριήρεῇ τριήρει (yévet) γένει 
A. (τριήρεα) τριήρη γένος 
V. τριῆρες γένος 

Dual. 

N. A. V. (τριήρεε) τριήρη (γένεε) γένη 
G. D. (τριηρέοιν) τριήροιν (γενέον) γενοῖν 


§ 53] THIRD DECLENSION, 43 


Plural. 


N:. V. (τριήρεε) τριήρεις (γένεα) γένη 
6. (τριηρέων τρνήρων γενέων γενῶν 
D. τριήρεσι γένεσι 

A. (rpijpeas) τριήρεις , (γένεα) γένη 


Nore 1. Like the singular of τριήρης are declined proper names 
in ns, gen. (eos) ovs, aS Δημοσθένης, Σωκράτης: for accusatives in nv 
see § 60, 1 (6); and for the accent of the vocatives Δημόσθενες, 
Σώκρατες, &c., see ὃ 25, 1, Note. Τριήρης has recessive accent in 
the contracted genitive and dative dual and gen. plural. Some other 
adjectives in ns have this in all forms (§ 25, 1, N.; § 66). 


Nore 2. When the termination ea is preceded by a vowel, it is 
generally contracted into a; as ὑγιής; healthy, accus. sing. ὑγιέα, ὑγιᾶ 
(sometimes ὑγιῆ); χρέος, debt, N. A. V. plur. xpea In the dual, ee 
is irregularly contracted into 7. 


Norr 8. Proper names in κλεῆς are doubly contracted in the 
dative, sometimes in the accusative. Περικλέης, Pericles, is thus 
declined (see also § 59, 3): — | 


N. (Περικλέης) Περικλῆς 

G. (Περικλέεος) Περικλέους 

D. (Περικλέεῦ (Περικλέει) Περικλεῖ 

A, τ“ (Περικλέεα) Περικλέα ᾿ (poet. Περικλῆ) 
A (Περίκλεες) ΠΕερίκλεις 


Note 4. In proper names in κλεης Homer has fos, ἢι, ja, Herodotus 
éos (for eos), é, €a. In adjectives in ens Homer sometimes contracts ee to 
εἰ: as, εὐκλέης, acc. plur. εὐκλεῖας for εὐκλέεας. 


STEMS IN I, T, or ET. 


§ 53. Nouns in ἐς and ¢ (stems in 2), vs and v (stems 
- In v), contract only the dative singular, and the nomina- 
tive, accusative, and vocative plural. Nouns in evs gener- 
_ally contract only the dative singular and the nominative 
and vocative plural. 

1. Most stems in ¢, with a few in v, change their final 
s or v toe in all cases except the nominative, accusative, 
and vocative singular. 

The nouns (7) πόλις, city (stem πολῖ-), πῆχυς, cubit 
(mnxv), and ἄστυ, city (ἀστῦ-), are thus declined : — 


« 


41 INFLECTION. ᾿ [8 ὅϑ. 


Singular. 
N. πόλις πῆχυς ἄστυ 
G. πόλεως πήχεως ἄστεος (poet. ἄστεως) 
D. (πόλε) πόλει (πήχεϊ) πήχει (ἄστεϊ) ἄστει 
A. aod πῆχυν ἄστυ 
γ; ONL πῆχυ ἄστυ 
᾿ς Dual. 
N. A. Ὑ. πόλεε πήχεε ἄστεε 
G. D. πολέοιν ᾿ πηχέοιν ἀστέοιν 
Ῥιωγαῖ, 
N. Υ. (πόλεες) πόλεις (πήχεες) πήχεις (ἄστεα) ἄστη 
σ. πόλεων πήχεων ἀστέων 
D πόλεσι πήχεσι ἄστεσι 
Α (πόλεας) πόλεις (πήχεας) πήχεις (ἄστεα) ἄστη 


Note 1. Nouns in. are declined like ἄστυ; as (τὸ) σίνᾶπι mus- 
tard, gen. owdreos, dat. (σινάπεϊ), σινάπει, &c. 


Norte 2. The genitives in ews and ew of nouns in ts and vs ac- 
cent the antepenult. So genitives in ews of nouns inv. The dual. 
rarely contracts ee to ἢ or ev 

Nore 8. The original « of the stem of nouns in ἐς (Attic gen. ews) is 
retained in Ionic. Thus, πόλις, πόλιος, (πόλει) πόλϊ, πόλιν ; plur. πόλιες, 
πολίων ; Hom. πολίεσσι (Hdt. πόλισι), πόλιας (Hdt. πόλϊς). Homer has 
also πόλει (with πόλεϊ) and πόλεσι in the dative. There are also Epic 
forms πόληος, πόληϊ, πόληες, πόληας. The Attic poets have a genitive in 
eos. The lonic has a genitive in eos in nouns in us of this class. 


2. Most nouns in vs retain v and are regular; as (6) 
ἰχθύς (ἰχθῦ-). fish, which is thus declined : — 


Singular. Dual. Plural. 
N. ἰχθύς. N. ἰχθύες 
α. ἰχθύος Ν. A.V. ixOve G. ἰχθύων 
D. ἰχθύϊ (Hom. ἰχθυῖϊ) | G. Ὁ. ἰχθύοιν D. ἰχθύσι 
Α. ἰχθύν A. (ἰχθύας) ἰχθῦς 
V. ἰχθύ 


Note 1. Ἔγχελυς, eel, is declined like ἰχθύς in the singular, and 
like πῆχυς in the plural. 


᾿ 8 54.) THIRD DECLENSION. . 45 


Nore 2. Adjectives in vs are declined in the masculine like 
πῆχυς, and in the neuter like ἄστυ. But the masculine genitive ends 
in eos (like the neuter); and eos and ea are not contracted. (See 
§ 67.) Αστυ is the principal noun in v; its genitive ἄστεως is 
poetic. 


3. Nouns in evs retain ev in the nominative and voca- 


tive singular and dative plural; as (0) βασιλεύς, king 
(stem Baotrev-), which is thus declined : — 


Singular. Dual. Plural. 
N. βασιλεύς N. V. (βασιλέες) βασιλεῖς 
G. βασιλέως N. A. V. βασιλέέξε [6 βασιλέων 

Ὁ. (βασιλέῆ βασιλεῖ |G. Ὁ. ββασιλέοιν [ἢ. ββασιλεῦσι 

Α. βασιλέὰ A βασιλέας 
γ. βασιλεῦ 


Note 1. The stem of nouns in evs changed ev to ε (§ 1, Note 
2) before a vowel of the ending. Afterwards F was dropped, leay- 
ing the stem in e. (See § 54, Note.) The cases of these nouns 
are therefore perfectly regular, except in ws of the genitive, and 
long a and as of the accusative, where ews, ed, eds come (by inter- 
change of quantity) from the Epic nos, na, nas (Note 4). 


Note 2. The older Attic writers (as Thucydides) have ἧς (con- 
tracted from jes, N. 4) in the nominative plural of nouns in evs; as 
ἱππῆς, βασιλῆς, for ἱππεῖς, βασιλεῖς. In the accusative plural, eas 
usually remains uncontracted; but here eis is sometimes found, 
rarely ἧς. 


Notre 3. When a vowel precedes, ews of the genitive singular 
may be contracted into ὥς, and ἐα of the accusative singular into a; 
rarely éas of the accusative plural into ἃς, and éwy of the genitive 
plural into ὧν. Thus, Πειραιεύς, Peiraeus, gen Πειραιέως, Πειραιῶς, 
accus. Πειραιέα, Πειραιᾶ; [yoevs] a kind of measure ; gen. xoews, χοῶς, 
ace. χοέα, χοᾶ, χοέας, χοᾶς; Δωριεύς, Dorian, gen. plur. Δωριέων, Δω- 
ριῶν, acc. Δωριέας, Δωριᾶς. 


Nore 4. In nouns in evs, the Doric and Ionic have e.g. βασιλέος for 


βασιλέως ; the Epic has βασιλῆος, βασιλῆϊ, βασιλῆα ; βασιλῆες, βασιλήων, 
βασιλήεσσι, βασιλῆας. Ἵ 


STEMS IN OT or AT. 


ὃ 564, The nouns (6, ἡ) Bots, ox or cow (stem Bov-), (ἡ) 
γραῦς, old woman (stem ypav-), and (ἡ) ναῦς, ship (stem vav-), 
are thus declined : — : 


ὟΝ. βοῦς 
α βοός 
D. Pot 
A. βοῦν 
V. ; βοῦ 


N. A. V. βόε 
G. D. Booty 


ΝΎ, βόες 
α. βοῶν 
D. βουσί 
A. Bots 


INFLECTION. 


Singular. 


γραῦς 
γρᾶός 
γράϊ 
γραῦν 
γραῦ 
“Dual. 
‘ypae 
ypdotv 
Plural, 
γρᾶες 
γρᾶῶν 


γραυσί 
γραῦς 


[8 δῦ. 


ναῦς 
νεώς 
νηί 
ναῦν 
ναῦ 


νῆε | 


veoty 


νῆες 
νεῶν 
ναυσί 
ναῦς 


Nore. The stems of these nouns became BoF-, ypaF-, and vaF- before 
a vowel of the ending (compare the Latin bov-is and nav-is). Afterwards - 


F was dropped, leaving βο-, ypa-, and νά-. 


(See § 53, 8, N. 1.) In Doric 


and, Ionic, vais is much more regular in its declension than in Attic : — 


Dor. vais, vads, vai, ναῦν ; pl. νᾶες, νὰῶν, ναῦσι or νάεσσι, vaas. 

Ion. νηῦς, νηός or veds, νηί, νῆα or véa; pl. νῆες or νέες, νηῶν or νεῶν, 
νηυσί (νήεσσι ΟΥ νέεσσι), νῆας ΟΥ νέας. 

In Attic, it changes va- to ve- or v7-. 


STEMS IN O or Q. 


8 55. Some feminines in ὦ contract dos, di, da in the sin- 
gular into οὖς, of, and ώ, and form the vocative singular irregu- 
larly in ot. The dual and plural (which rarely occur) follow 
the second declension. Ἠχώ (ἡ); echo, is thus declined : — 


Singular, 
ἠχώ 
(ἠχόος) ἠχοῦς 
(ἠχόδ ἠγχοῖ 
(ἠχό) ἠχώ 
ἠχοῖ . 


ree te 


Dual. 
NA. ¥. ἠχώ 
G. Ὁ. ἠχοῖν 


Plural. 
N. V: ἠχοί 
G. ἠχῶν 
D. ἠχοῖς 
Α. ἠχούς 


§ ὅ7.} THIRD DECLENSION. 47 


Note 1. Αἰδώς, shame, and the Ionic nas, morning, form their 
oblique cases like ἠχώ (but with ὦ, not ὦ, in the accusative singu- 
lar); as αἰδώς, αἰδοῦς, αἰδοῖ, αἰδώ, --- ἠώς, ἠοῦς, ἠοῖ. ἠῶ. 

Nouns in ὡς, gen qos are regular, but are sometimes contracted ; 
aS ἥρως, hero, ἥρωος, ἥρωϊ, OY ἥρῳ, ἥρωα Or ἥρω, &e. 


Nore 2. A few nouns in ὧν (εἰκών, image, and ἀηδών, nightingale) 
occasionally have forms like those of nouns in @; as gen. εἰκοῦς, - 
andovs; accus εἰκώ; voc. andot. 


Note 3. The uncontracted forms of these nouns in dos, di, and 
da are not used. Herodotus has an accusative singular in ody; as 
᾿Ἰοῦν for “1d, from "Ie, Jo, gen. "Iods. 


\ 


= 


STEMS IN AZ, OR IN AZ AND AT. 


§ 56. 1. Neuters in as, gen. aos, are contracted when the 
a of the stem is followed by a vowel; as (τὸ) γέρας, prize, which 
is thus declined :— : 


Singular. Dual. Plural. 
N.A.V. γέρας N.A.V. (yépae) yépa | N.A.V. (γέραα) yépa 
G.  ἠἀ(γέραορ) γέρως |G. D. — (yepdow) γερῷν | 6. (γεράων) yepav 
D. (γέραϊ) yépar 19, γέρᾶσι 


2. A few neuters in ας, gen. aros, drop τ and are contracted 
like yépas; in Attic prose only (τὸ) κέρᾶς, horn, gen. κέρατος 
(κέρᾶος) κέρως ; Cat. κέρατι (κέρἄϊ) κέραι ; plur. κέρατα (xépia) 
κέρα ; gen. κεράτων (κερᾶων) κερῶν ; dat. κέρᾶσι. 


Notr. The original stem of nouns in as, gen. aos, is supposed to 
have ended in ao (ὃ 52, 1, Note), which dropped o before a vowel or o, but 
retained it inthe nominative. Neuters in as, aros, which drop 7, have one 
— in ar and another in as, the latter appearing in the nominative sin- 
gular. 


Syncopated Nouns. 


§ 57. Some nouns in yp (stem in ep), gen. epos, are syn- 
copated (8 14, 2) by dropping « in the genitive and dative 
singular. In the dative plural, they change ep to pa before — 
ot. The accent is irregular; the syncopated genitive and da- 
tive being oxytone (except in Δημήτηρ), and the vocative 


48 INFLECTION. [8 57. 


singular having recessive accent (§ 25, 1, Note), and ending 
in ep as in barytones (§ 48, 2, a). 


1. Πατήρ (6), father, and θυγάτηρ (4), daughter, are thus 
declined : — 


Singular. 
N. πατήρ - θυγάτηρ 
G. (warépos) πατρός (@vyarépos) θυγατρός 
D. (rarép) πατρί (θυγατἔρ) θυγατρί 
A. πατέρα | θυγατέρα 
Υ. πάτερ θύγατερ 
! Dual. 

N. A. V. πατέρε θυγατέρε 
G. D. πατέροιν θυγατέροιν 

' Plural. 
Ν. Υ. πατέρες θυγατέρες 
α. πατέρων θυγατέρων 
D. πατράσι . θυγατράσι 
Α. πατέρας θυγατέρας 


ΝΟΤΕ 1. Μήτηρ (ἡ); mother, and γαστήρ (7), belly, are declined 
and accented like πατήρ. Thus, μήτηρ has (μητέρος) μητρός, and (μη- 


τέρι) μητρί; plur. μητέρες, μητέρων, Χο 
᾿Αστήρ (6), star, has ἀστράσι in the dative plural, but is otherwise 


regular (without syncope). 


Nore 2. The uncontracted forms of all these nouns are often used by 
the poets, who also syncopate other cases of θυγάτηρ. ; 


2. ᾿Ανήρ (6), man, drops ε whenever a vowel follows ep, and 
inserts 6 in its place (§ 14, N. 2). It is thus declined : — 


dar yaZ 


Singular. Dual. Plural. 

ἀνήρ N. V. (ἀνέρες) ἄνδρες 
(ἀνέρος) ἀνδρός  Ν. A. 7. (ἀνέρε ἄνδρε) | G. (ἀνέρων) ἀνδρῶν 
(ἀνέρ) ἀνδρί |6. Ὁ. (ἀνέροιν) ἀνδροῖν | D. ἀνδράσι 
(ἀνέρα) ἄνδρα Α. (ἀνέρας) ἄνδρας 
ἄνερ 


8. The proper name Δημήτηρ syncopates all the oblique 
cases, and then accents the first syllable. Thus, gen. (Δημή- 
repos) Δήμητρος ; dat. (Δημήτερι) Δήμητρι ; accus. (Δημήτερα) 
Δήμητρα ; voc. Δήμητερ. ὟΣ 


§ 60.] IRREGULAR NOUNS. 49 


Gender of the Third Declension. 


§ 58, The gender of many nouns in this declension must 
be learned by observation. A few general rules, however, may 
be given. ; 


1. The following are masculine: substantives ending in 
ἄν, nv, evs, most of those in yp, wp, and wy (gen. wvos), and all 
. that have vros in the genitive. Except (ἡ) φρήν, mind. 


2. The following are feminine : those in avs, rns (gen. τη- 
Tos), as (gen. ados), ὦ Or ws (gen. ods), and most of those 
in ts. 


3. The following are neuter: those in a, ει, νυ, ap, op, os, and 
as (gen. aros OY aos). 


Dialects. 


§ 59. 1. Gen. and Dat. Dual. Homeric ouy for ov. ~ 
2. Dat. Plur. Homeric ἐσσι, eo, oor, for σι. 


3. Most of the uncontracted forms enclosed in ( ) in the para- 
digms, which are not used in Attic prose, are found in Homer or 
Herodotus; and some of them occur in the Attic ‘poets. For spe- 
cial dialectic forms of some of these nouns, however, see § 52, 2, 
N. 4; § 53, 1, N. 3, and 3, N. 4; § 54, Note; §.55, N. ὃ. 


IRREGULAR NOUNS. 


§ 60. 1. (a) Nouns which belong to more than one de- 
clension are called heteroclites. Thus σκότος, darkness, is usu- 
ally declined like λόγος (8 41), but. sometimes like γένος 
(8 52, 2). So Οἰδίπους, Oedipus, has genitive Οἰδίποδος or 
Oidérov, dative Οἰδίποδι, accusative Οἰδίποδα or Οἰδίπουν. 


(Ὁ) Especially, proper names in ys (gen. cos) of the third 
declension (except those in «Aé€ys) have also an accusative in 
nv like those of the first; as Δημοσθένης, accus. Δημοσθένην or 
Δημοσθένη, Σωκράτης, Σωκράτην ΟΥ̓ Σωκράτη. So nouns in as 

gen. avros Or ανος) have poetic forms like the first declen- 
4 -- 


50 INFLECTION. [8 60. 


sion; as Πολυδάμας, voc. Πολυδάμα (Hom.); Alas, accus. 
Αἴαν. 


- 2. Nouns which are of different genders in different cases 
are called heterogeneous; as (6) otros, corn, plur. (τὰ) otra; 
(6) δεσμός, chain, (oi) δεσμοί and (τὰ) δεσμά. 

3. Defective nouns have only certain cases; as ὄναρ, 
dream, ὄφελος, use (only nom. and accus.) ; (τὴν) vida, snow 
(only accus.). | 

4. Indeclinable nouns have one form for all cases. These 


are chiefly foreign words, as ᾿Αδάμ, Ἰσραήλ; and names of 
letters, “AAda, Bijra, &c. 


5. The following are the most important irregular nouns : — 
1. “Αιδης, Hades, gen. ov, &c. regular. Hom. ᾿Αἴδης, gen. ao or 

ew, dat. n, acc. nv; also” Aidos, “Aide (from stem ᾿Αἱδ-). 
& 2. ἄναξ (6), king, ἄνακτος, &c., voc. ἄναξ (poet. ἄνα, in addressing 


3. ”Apns, Ares,” Apeos, Or "Apews, (“Apei) ”Apet, (Αρεα)" Αρη or” Apny, 
"Apes (also *Apes). 

4. Stem (dpv-), gen. (rod or τῆς) ἀρνός, lamb, apvi, ἄρνα; pl. ἄρνες, 
ἀρνῶν, ἀρνάσι, ἄρνας. In the nom. sing. ἀμνός (2d decl.) is used. 


ν 


5. γάλα (τό), milk, γάλακτος, γάλακτι, &c. 

e 6. γόνυ (τό), knee, γόνατος, γόνατι, &c. (from stem yovar-); Ton. 
and poet. γούνατος, γούνατι, &c.; Hom. also gen. youvds, dat. youvi, 
pl. γοῦνα, γούνων, youverat. 

» T. youn (4), wife, γυναικός, γυναικί, γυναῖκα, γύναι; dual yuvaike, 

yuvatxoiv; pl. γυναῖκες, γυναικῶν, γυναιξί, γυναῖκας. 

8. δένδρον (τό), tree, ov, reg. (Ion. δένδρεον)͵ dat. sing. δένδρει; 
pl. δένδρεσι. 

9. δόρυ (τό), spear (cf. γόνυ), δόρατος. δόρατι or δορί: pl. δόρατα, 
&e. Jon. and poet. δούρατος, &c.; also gen. δουρός, dat. δουρί, δορί, or 
δόρει; dual δοῦρε; pl. δοῦρα, dovpwr, δούρεσσι. 

10. Ζεύς (ZEol. Δεύς), Zeus, Διός, Διί, Δία, Ζεῦ. Ion. and poet. Ζη- 
νός,͵ Ζηνί, Ζῆνα. 

11. Θέμις (ἡ). justice (also as proper name, Themis), gen. Θέμε-. 
δος, Θέμιστος, Θέμιτος, Θέμιος (Hdt.); dat. Θέμιστι; acc. Θέμεστα or 


»“ 


§ 60.]: IRREGULAR NOUNS. 51 


Θέμιν; voc. Θέμε; pl. θέμιστες, θέμιστας ; all Ion. or poet. In Attic 
prose, indeclinable in θέμις ἐστί, fas est. 


12. θρίξ (ἡ), hair, τριχός, τριχί, &c., θριξί (§ 17, 2, Note). 

_ 13. kdpa (τό), head, poetic; in Attic only nom., accus., and voce. 
sing. Hom. κάρη, gen. kdpyros, καρήατος, κράατος, kparos; dat. κάρητι, 
καρήατι, kpaatt, κρᾶτί (trag. κάρᾳ) ; acc. (τὸν) κρᾶτα, (τὸ) κάρη OY Kap; 
plur. nom. κάρᾶ, καρήατα, κράατα; gen. kparwv; dat. κρᾶσί; acc. like 
nom. with (τοὺς) xparas; nom. and ace. pl. also κάρηνα, gen. καρή- 
νων. 

14. κρίνον (τό), lily, ov, &e. In plural also κρίνεα (Hdt.) and κρί- 
MO... 
<- 15. κύων (6, 9), dog, voc. κύον: the rest from stem kiv-, κυνός, κυνί, 

κύνα, pl. κύνες, κυνῶν, κυσί, κύνας. 


16. λᾶς (6), stone, Hom. λᾶας, poetic; gen. λᾶος (or Adov), dat. 
Aai, ace. λᾶαν, Aav; dual Ade; plur. λαῶν, λάεσσι. 
Ἂς 5 ’ . . 
17. λίπα (Hom. λίπ᾽, generally with ἐλαίῳ, oil), fat, oil; proba- 
bly λίπα is neut. accus., and Aim’ is dat. for λιπί. See Lexicon. 
18. μάρτυς (6, 7), witness, μάρτυρος, &c., dat. pl. μάρτῦὕσι. 
19. μάστιξ (ἡ), whip, gen. pdortyos, &c., Hom. dat. pdori, ace. 
μάστιν. 
“ 40. οἷς (4), sheep, οἷός, oil, otv; pl. οἷες, οἰῶν, οἷσίν, οἷας. Hom. dis, 
lee lew ° A ee 3 Ms 
dios, div, dies, diwy, ὀΐεσσι (οἴεσι, decor), dis. Aristoph. has dat. di. 
21. ὄνειρος (6), ὄνειρον (τό), dream, gen. ov; also ὄναρ (τό), gen. 
ὀνείρατος, dat. dveipart; plur. ὀνείρατα, ὀνειράτων, ὀνείρασι. 
22. ὄσσε (τώ), dual, eyes, poetic; plur. gen. ὄσσων, dat. ὄσσοις or 
ὄσσοισι. ι 
23. dpvis (6, ἡ), bird, see 8 50. Also, from stem édpri-, pl. ὄρνεις, 
ὄρνεων, acc. ὄρνεις OF ὄρνις. . 
24. οὖς (τό), ear, dros, ὠτί; pl. ὦτα, ὥτων (8 9ὅ, 8, N. 1), ὠσί. 
Hom. also gen. οὔατος; pl. οὔατα, οὔασι. 


25. Πνύξ (ἡ), Pnyx, Πυκνός, Ἰπυκνί, Πύκνα (for Πνυκ-ος, &c.). 


20. πρέσβυς (6), old man, elder (properly adj.), poetic, ace. πρέ- 
σβυν (as adj.), voc. πρέσβυ; pl. πρέσβεις (Ep. πρέσβηες), chiefs, elders: 
the common word in this sense is πρεσβύτης, distinct from πρεσβευ- 
τής. Πρέσβυς --ἰ ambassador, w. gen. πρέσβεως, is rare and poetic in 
sing.; but common in prose in plur., πρέσβεις, πρέσβεων, πρέσβεσι, 
πρέσβεις (like πῆχυς) : πρεσβευτής, ambassador, is common in sing., 
but rare in plural. 


Lb 21. wip (τό), fire, πυρός, πυρί; pl. (ra) πυρά, esp. watch-fires. 


28. σπέος or σπεῖος (τό), cave, Epic; σπείους, σπῆι, σπείων, σπήεσσι 
oY σπέσσι. : 


A 
[“ 


L 


52 | ΟΠ INFLECTION, [§ 61. 


L£ 29. ὕδωρ (τό), water, ὕδατος, ὕδατι, &c., dat. plur. ὕδασι. 


« 80. vids (6), son, υἱοῦ, &c. reg.; also (from stem vie-) υἱέος, (viéi) 
υἱεῖ, (viéa), vice, υἱέοιν ; (υἱέες) υἱεῖς, υἱέων, υἱέσι, (υἱέας) υἱεῖς. Hom. 
also gen. υἷος, dat. υἷι, acc. via, dual vie; pl. vies, υἱάσι, vias. 
t- 81. χείρ (ἡ), hand, χειρός, χειρί, &c. ; but χεροῖν (poet. χειροῖν) and 
χερσί (poet. χείρεσσι or χείρεσι) : poet. also χερός, χερί, &c. 

32. (χόος) χοῦς (6), a measure, χοός, χοΐ, χόες, χουσί, xoas (cf. βοῦς, 
8 54). Att. also gen. χοῶς, &c. (§ 53, ὁ, N. 3). 

33. (χόος) χοῦς (6), mound, xods, χοΐ, χοῦν (like βοῦς, § 54). 


p 84. pes (6), skin, χρωτός, χρωτί, χρῶτα; poet. also χροός, xpoi, 


χρόα; dat. χρῷ (only in ev χρῷ, near). me 


LOCAL ENDINGS. 


§ 61, These endings may be added to the stem of a noun 
or pronoun to denote place : — 


-6., denoting where; as ἄλλοθι, elsewhere; οὐρανόθι, in 
heaven. 


«θεν, denoting whence ; as οἴκοθεν, from home ; αὐτόθεν, from 
the very spot. . 


τδε, (-ζε or -ce), denoting whither ; as Μέγαράδε, to Megara ; 
οἴκαδε (itreg.), homeward. 


Nore 1. In Homer, the forms in -6: and -θεν are governed by a 
preposition as genitives; as Ἰλιόθι πρό, before Llium; ἐξ ἁλόθεν, from 
the sea. 


Nore 2. Sometimes a relic of an original locative case is found 
with the ending « in the singular and a in the plural; as Ἰσθμοῖ, at 
the Isthmus ; οἴκοι (oixo-c), at home; ᾿Αθήνησι, at Athens. These 
forms (and indeed those of § 61) are commonly classed among 
adverbs. 


Norte 3. The Epic ending qi or dw forms a genitive or dative 
in both singular and plural. It is sometimes locative, as κλεσίηφι. in 
the tent; and sometimes it has other meanings of the genitive or 
dative, as βίηφι, with violence. So after prepositions; as mapa ναῦφι, 
by the ships. . . 


§ 62.] ΑΓ ΕΟΤΙΨ ΕΒ --- FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 58 


ADJECTIVES. 
FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 


862. 1. Most adjectives in os have three endings, os, 


ἡ, ov. The masculine and neuter are of the second de- . 


clension, and the feminine is of the first; as σοφός, 
σοφή, σοφόν, wise. 


2. If a vowel or p precedes os, the feminine ends in 4; 
as ἄξιος, ἀξία, ἄξιον, worthy. But adjectives in οος have 
on in the feminine, except those in poos; as ἁπλόος, 
ἁπλόη, ἁπλόον, simple ; ἀθρόος, ἀθρόα, ἀθρόον, crowded. 


3. Σοφός, wise, and ἄξιος, worthy, are thus declined sities 


. Singular. 

Tis σοφός σοφή σοφόν ἄξιος ἀξία ἄξιον 
6. σοφοῦ σοφῆς σοφοῦ ᾿ς ἀξίου ἀξίας ἀξίου 
D. cobs σοφῇ σοφῷ ἀξίῳ ἀξίᾳ ἀξίῳ, 
Α. σοφόν σοφήν σοφόν — ἄξιν ἀξίαν ἄξιον 
ὟΣ: σοφέ σοφή σοφόν ἄξιε ἀξία ἄξιον 

Dual, 
N. A. V.. cope σοφά σοφώ ἀξίω ἀξία ἀξίω 
G: D. σοφον σοφαῖν σοφοῖν ἀξίοινν ἀξίαιν ἀξίοιν 
Plural. 
N. V. copot σοφαί σοφά ἄξιι ἄξιαι ἄξια 
G. σοφῶν σοφῶν σοφῶν ἀξίων ἀξίων ἀξίων 
Ὁ. σοφοῖς σοφαῖς σοφοῖς ἀξίοις ἀξίαις ἀξίοις 
Α. σοφούς σοφάς σοφά ἀξίους ἀξίας ἄξια 


So μακρός, μακρά, μακρόν, long; gen. μακροῦ, μακρᾶς, μακροῦ ; 
dat. μακρῷ, μακρᾷ, μακρῷ ; ACC. μακρόν, μακράν, μακρόν, &C., like 
ἄξιος. 

All participles in os are declined like σοφός. 


5A | ες INFLECTION. ΣΥ͂Σ 


ΝΌΤΕ. Proparoxytones in os have recessive accent also in the 
feminine ; as ἄξιος, ἄξιαι (not ἀξίαι. like ἀξία). For the accent of 
ov in the feminine of the genitive plural of barytones, see § 25, 2. 


§ 68. Some adjectives in os, especially compounds, have 
only two endings, os and ov, the feminine being the same as 
the masculine. They are declined like σοφός, omitting the 
feminine ; as ἄλογος, ἄλογον ; gen. ἀλόγου ; dat. ἀλόγῳ, &e. 

Note. Some adjectives in os may be declined with either two 
or three endings. 


ὃ 64. A few adjectives of the second declension end in 
ws and wy, and are declined like νεώς and ἀνώγεων (ὃ 42, 2). 
“Trews, gracious, and ἀγήρως, free from old age, are thus de- 
clined : — | 


Singular. 
N. V. ἵλεως ἵλεων ἀγήρως ἀγήρων 
α. ἵλεω ἵλεω ἀγήρω ᾿ ἀγήρω 
D. ἵλεῳ ἵλεῳ ἀγήρῳ ἀγήρῳ 
A. ἵλεων ἵλεων ἀγήρων ἀγήρων 
Dual. 
N. A.V. ἵλεω ἵλεω ἀγήρω ἀγήρω 
G. Ὁ. ἵλεῳν ἵλεῳν ἀγήρῳν ἀγήρῳν 
Plural. 
N. V. ἵλεῳ ἵλεω ἀγήρῳ ἀγήρω 
ζ- ἵλεων ἵλεων ἀγήρων ἀγήρων 
D Trews Trews . ἀγήρῳς ἀγήρῳς 
Α - ἵλεως ἵλεω ἀγήρως ἀγήρω 


For the accent οἵ ἵλεως, see § 22, Note 2. 

§ 65. Many adjectives in cos and oos are contracted. Xpv- 
σεος, golden, ἀργύρεος, of silver, and ἁπλόος, semple, are thus 
declined : — 


Singular. 
N. (χρύσεος) fe Sot (χρυσέα) χρυσῆ (χρύσεον) χρυσοῦν 
α. (χρυσέου) χρυσοῦ (χρυσέας) χρυσῆς (χρυσέου) χρυσοῦ 
D. (χρυσέῳ) χρυσῷ (χρυσέᾳ) χρυσῇ (χρυσέῳ) χρυσῷ 
A. (χρύσεον) χρυσοῦν (χρυσέαν) χρυσῆν (χρύσεον) χρυσοῦν 


4 


8 65.] ADJECTIVES— FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 55 | 


2 τ 


boas 


ΞῊ 


PEA 


PEs 


oF 


᾿(χρυσέω) χρυσώ 


(χρυσέοιν) χρυσοῖν 


(χρύσεοι) χρυσοῖ 
(χρυσέων) χρυσῶν 
(xpucéows) χρυσοῖς 
(χρυσέου) χρυσοῦς 


Dual. 


(χρυσέα) χρυσᾶ 
(xpuvcéaw) χρυσαῖν 


Plural. 

χρυσαῖ 
χρυσῶν 
χρυσαῖς 


(χρύσεα) 
(χρυσέων) 
(χρυσέαι5) 
(χρυσέας) 


(ἀργύρεος) ἀργυροῦς 
(ἀργυρέου) ἀργυροῦ 
(ἀργυρέῳ) ἀργυρῷ 
(ἀργύρεον) ἀργυροῦν 


(ἀργυρέω) ἀργυρώ 
(ἀργυρέοιν) apyupoty 


(ἀργύρεοι) ἀργυροῖ 
(ἀργυρέων) ἀργυρῶν 
(ἀργυρέοις) ἀργυροῖς 
(ἀργυρέους) ἀργυροῦς 


φ 
ΒΝ 
in A 


(<i 
ῳ. 


Singular. 


(dpyupéa) ἀργυρᾶ 
(dpyupéas) ἀργυρᾶς 
(ἀργυρέᾳ) ἀργυρᾷ 
(ἀργυρέα») ἀργυρᾶν 


Dual. 


(dpyupéa) ἀργυρᾶ 
(dpyupéaw) apyvpaty 


Plural. 
(ἀργύρεαι) ἀργυραῖ 
(ἀργυρξέων)Ὶ ἀργυρῶν 
(ἀργυρέαις) ἀργυραῖς 
(ἀργυρέας) ἀργυρᾶς 


(ἁπλόος) 
(ἁπλόου) 
(ἁπλόφ) 
(ἁπλόον) 


ἁπλοῦς 
ἁπλοῦ 
ἁπλῷ 
ἁπλοῦν 


ἁπλώ᾽ 
ἁπλοῖν 


(ἁπλόω) 
(ἁπλόοιν) 


(ἁπλόαιν) 


Singular. 
(ἁπλόη) ἁπλῆ 
(ἁπλόη) ἁπλῆς 
(ἁπλόῃ) ἁπλῇ 
(ἁπλόη) ἁπλῆν 

Dual. 
(ἁπλόα) ἁπλᾶ 


ἁπλαῖν 


χρυσᾶς — 


(χρυσέω) χρυσώ 
(xpucéow) χρυσοῖν 


(χρύσεα) χρυσᾶ 
(χρυσέων) χρυσῶν 
(xpucéots) χρυσοῖς 
(χρύσεα) χρυσᾶ 


aK 


(ἀργύρεον) ἀργυροῦν 


(ἀργυρέου) ἀργυροῦ 
(ἀργυρέῳ) ἀργυρῷ 
(ἀργύρεον) ἀργυροῦν 


» 


(ἀργυρέω) ἀργυρώ 


᾿(ἀργυρέον) ἀργυροῖν 


(ἀργύρεα) ἀργυρᾶ 
(ἀργυρέων) ἀργυρῶν 
(ἀργυρέοι5) ἀργυροῖς 
(ἀργύρεα) ἀργυρᾶ 


(ἁπλόον) ἁπλοῦν 
(ἁπλόου) ἁπλοῦ 
(ἁπλόῳ)γ, ἁπλῷ 
(ἁπλόον) ἁπλοῦν 
(ἁπλόω ἁπλώ 
(ἁπλόοιν)͵ ἁπλοῖν 


56 INFLECTION, ¥ [8 66. 


Plural. 
N. (ἁπλόοι) ἁπλοῖ (ἁπλόα) ἁπλαῖ (ἁπλόα) ἁπλᾶ 
6. (ἁπλόων) ἁπλῶν (ἁπλόων») ἁπλῶν (ἁπλόων) ἁπλῶν 
D. .ἁπλόοι) ἁπλοῖς (ἁπλόαι) ἁπλαῖς ((ἁπλόοι) ἁπλοῖς 
A. (ἁπλόους) ἁπλοῦς Ἰάπλόα) ἁπλᾶς (ἁπλόα) ἁπλᾶ 


For the accent, see ὃ 43, Note. For irregular contraction, see 
§ 9,2, Note; and §9, 8, Note. No distinct vocative forms occur. 


THIRD DECLENSION. 
8 66. Adjectives belonging only to the third declen- 


sion have two endings, the feminine being the same as 
the masculine. Most of these end in ἧς and ες, or in ων 
and ov. ‘Arnis, true, πέπων, ripe, and εὐδαίμων, happy, 
are thus declined: — | | 


Singular. 
M. F. N. 

N. ἀληθής ἀληθές 

σ. (ἀληθέος) ἀληθοῦς ᾿ 

D. (ἀληθέϊ) ἀληθεῖ 

Α. (ἀληθέα) ἀληθῆ ἀληθές 

γ. ἀληθές 

: Dual. 
N. A. V. (ἀληθέε) ἀληθῆ 
G. Ὁ. (ἀληθέοιν) ἀληθοῖν 
: Plural. 

N.Y. (ἀληθέες) ἀληθεῖς οο (ἀληθεα) ἀληθῆ 

6. (ἀληθεων)ὴ ἀληθῶν 

D. ἀληθέσι . 

A. (ἀληθέας) ἀληθεῖς (ἀληθέα) ἀληθῆ 

_ Singular. 
M. F. N. M. F. N. 

N. πέπων πέπον εὐδαίμων εὔδαιμον 
G. πέπονος εὐδαίμονος 
D. πέπονι εὐδαίμονι 
Α. . πέπονα πέπον εὐδαίμονα εὔδαιμον 
γ. πέπον εὔϑαιμον 


~ 


᾿Ξ 


§ 67.] ADJECTIVES — FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. 57 


Duai. 

N. A. V. πέπονε οτος εὐδαίμονε 

G. D. πεπόνοιν ᾿ εὐδαιμόνοιν 
Plural. : 

N. V. πέπονς πσπέπονα εὐδαίμονες εὐδαίμονα 

α πεπόνων εὐδαιμόνων 

D. πέποσι εὐδαίμοσι 

Α πέπονας πέπονα εὐδαίμονας εὐδαίμονα 


For the accent of the form εὔδαιμον see § 25, 1, Note. 


Note 1. One adjective in wv, ἑκών, ἑκοῦσα, éxdv, willing, has 
three endings, and is declined like participles in wy (§ 68). So its 
compound, ἄκων (ἀέκων), unwilling, ἄκουσα, ἄκον. 


Norx 2. The poetic ἴδρις, knowing, has ace. ἴδριν, voc. ἴδρι, nom. 
pl. ἴδριες. 


ΝΌΤΕ 3. Adjectives compounded of nouns and a prefix are 
generally declined like those nouns; as εὔελπις, hopeful, gen. εὐέλ- 
πιδος ; εὔχαρις, graceful, gen. εὐχάριτος (8 50). But compounds of 
πατήρ and μήτηρ end in wp (gen. opos), and those of πόλις in ts 
(gen. cos). 


Notre 4. Some adjectives of the third declension have only one 
ending, which is both masculine and feminine; as φυγάς, φυγάδος;͵ 
fugitive ; ἄπαις, ἄπαιδος, childless ; ἀγνώς, ἀγνῶτος, unknown ; ἄναλκις, 
ἀνάλκιδος, weak. ‘The oblique cases occasionally occur as neuter. 


A very few adjectives of one termination are of the first declen- 
sion, ending in as or ns; as γεννάδας, noble, gen. γεννάδου. 


FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS COMBINED. 


§ 67. 1. Most adjectives of this class end in us, eva, v, - 
or in εἰς, εσσα, εν. : -- 

Three end in ἂς, --- πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, all; μέλας, μέλαινα, 
μέλαν, black; and τάλας, τάλαινα, τάλαν, wretched. 

2. Γλυκύς, sweet, χαρίεις, graceful, πᾶς, all, and μέλας, 
black, ave thus declined : — | | 


ag Singular. 
Ν, γλυκύς γλυκεῖα γλυκύ 
G. γλυκέος γλυκείας γλυκέος 
D. (γλυκέ!) γλυκεῖ γλυκείᾳ (γλυκέϊ) γλυκεῖ 
A. γλυκύν. γλυκεῖαν ᾿ ηλυκύ 
V. 


γλυκύ γλυκεῖα γλυκύ 


SPEEA 


2 
o 


SP ORS 


> 
“i 


ἘΡΌΘΕ 


2 2 
s 


a a 


INFLECTION. [8 67. 
Dual. 
γλυκέε γλυκεία γλυκέε 
γλυκέοιν' γλυκείαιν γλυκέοιν 
Plural. 
(γλυκέες) γλυκεῖς γλυκεῖαι γλυκέα 
γλυκέων γλυκειῶν γλυκέων 
γλυκέσι γλυκείαις γλυκέσι 
(yAukéas) γλυκεῖς γλυκείας γλυκέα 
Singular. 
χαρίεις χαρίεσσα χαρίεν 
Xaptevros χαριέσσης xaplevros — 
χαρίεντι χαριέσσῃ χαρίεντι 
χαρίεντα χαρίεσσαν χαρίεν 
χαρίεν χαρίεσσα χαρίεν 
Dual. 
xaplevre χαριέσσα χαρίεντε 
Χχαριέντοιν χαριέσσαιν χαριέντοιν 
Plural.. 
xaplevres χαρίεσσαι χαρίεντα 
χαριέντων χαριεσσῶν 'χαριέντων 
χαρίεσι χαριέσσαις χαρίεσι 
χαρίεντας χαριέσσας χαρίεντα 
χαρίεντες χαρίεσσαι χαρίεντα 
Singular. d 
πᾶς πᾶσα πᾶν μέλας μέλαινα μέλαν 
παντός πάσης παντός μέλανος μελαίνης μέλανος 
πανί πάσῃ παντί μέλανι μελαίνῃ μέλανι 
πάντα πᾶσαν πᾶν μέλανα μέλαιναν μέλαν 
μέλαν μέλαινα μέλαν 
Dual. 
μέλανε μελαίνα μέλανε 
μελάνοιν μελαίναιν μελάνοιν 


§ 68.] ADJECTIVES — FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. ὅ9 


Plural. 
N. πάντες πᾶσαι πάντα μέλανες 
G. πάντων πασῶν πάντων μελάνων 
D. πᾶσι πάσαις πᾶσι μέλασι 
A. πάντας πάσας πάντα μέλανας 
γ; μέλανες 


μέλαιναι 


μελαινῶν 
μελαίναις 


μελαίνας 


μέλαιναι 


μέλανα 
μελάνων 
μέλασι 
μέλανα 
μέλανα 


For the feminine οὗ μέλας, see § 16, 7, (ε). 


Note.1. The Ionic feminine of adjectives in vs ends in ea or 
en. Homer has εὐρέα (for εὐρύν) as accusative of εὐρύς, wide. For 
the dative plural of adjectives in es, see § 16, 6, N. 2. 


Notre 2. Some adjectives in nes, neooa, nev, contract these end- 
ings to js, joa, ἣν; and some in oes, dea, oev, contract these to 
ovs, οὔσσα, οὖν; AS τιμήεις, τιμήεσσα; τιμῆεν, --- τιμῇς; τιμῆσσα; τιμῆν; --- 
valuable; gen. τιμήεντος, τιμηέσσης, --- τιμῆντος, τιμήσσης, &c. So 
πλακόεις, πλακόεσσα, πλακόεν --- πλακοῦς, πλακοῦσσα, πλακοῦν, --- flal ; 
gen. πλακόεντος, πλακοέσσης, --- πλακοῦντος, πλακούσσης ; but not φω- 
νήεις, φωνήεσσα, φωνῆεν, vocal. 


Nore 3. One adjective in ην, ---- τέρην, τέρεινα, τέρεν, tender (Latin 
tener), gen. répevos, τερείνης, τέρενος. &c., —is declined after the 
analogy of μέλας. So ἄρσην (or ἄρρην), ἄρσεν, male, gen. ἄρσενος, 
which has no feminine form. δ 

8 68. To this class belong all active and all aorist 
passive participles. Avwy, loosing, ἱστάς, erecting, τιθείς, 
placing, δεικνύς, showing (present active participles of 
λύω, ἵστημι, τίθημι, ANd δείκνυμι), and λελυκώς, having 
loosed (perfect active participle οὗ Avw), are thus de- 
clined : — 


Singular. 

N. λύων λύουσα λῦον ἱστάς ioraca ἑᾧστάν 

G. λύοντος λυούσης λύοντος ἱστάντος ἱστάσης ἱστάντος 
D. λύοντι λυούσῃ λύοντι ἱστάντι ἱστάσῃ ἱστάντι 
Α. λύοντα λύουσαν λῦον ἱστάντα ἱστᾶσαν torav 

Υ. λύων λύουσα λῦον ἱστάς teraca tordv 

Dual. 

N.V.A. λύοντε λυούσα λύοντε ἱστάντε ἰστάσα ἱστάντε 
σ. Ὁ λνόντοιν λυούσαιν λυόντοινν ἱστάντοιν ἱστάσαιν ἱστάντοιν 


60 


D 
A 


The accent of the neuter singular appears 


N. Vi 
G 


INFLECTION. 


Plural. 


λύοντες λύουσαι λύοντα ἱστάντες 
λυόντων λυουσῶν λυόντων ἱστάντων 
λύουσι Avotoats λύουσι ἱστᾶσι 
λύοντας λυνυούσας λύοντα ἱστάντας 


ουσα, βουλεῦον. (ὃ 26, N. 2.) 


<p 


N.A.V. Sexvivre δεικνύσα Sexvivre τιθέντε 


G. ἢ. δεικνύντοιν δεικνύσαιν δεικνύντοιν τιθέντοιν 
Plural. 
N. Υ. δεικνύντες δϑεικνῦσαι δεικνύντα τιθέντες 
G. Sexvivrav ϑεικνυσῶν δεικνύντων τιθέντων 
D. ϑεικνῦσι δεικνύσαις δεικνῦσι τιθεῖσι 
A. δεικνύντας δεικνύσας δεικνύντα τιθέντας 
: : 
Singular. 
N. λελυκώς λελυκυῖα 
G. λελυκότος Χελυκυίας 
D. λελυκότι λελυκυίᾳ 
Α. λελυκότα λελυκυῖαν 
Vv. λελυκώς ᾿ δλελυκυῖα 
Dual. 
N. A. V. λελυκότε λελυκυία 
6. Ὁ. λελυκότοιν λελυκνίαιν 


Singular. 
δεικνύς δεικνῦσα δεικνύν τιθείς 
δεικνύντος δεικνύσης δεικνύντος τιθέντος 
δεικνύντι δεικνύσῃ δεικνύντι τιθέντι 
δεικνύντα δεικνῦσαν δεικνύν τιθέντα 
δεικνύς δεικνῦσα δεικνύν τιθείς 
Dual. 


[§ 68. 


ioraca. ἱστάντα 
ἱστασῶν ἱστάντων 
ἱστάσαις ἱστᾶσι 
ἱστάσας ἱστάντα 


in βουλεύων, βουλεύ- 


τιθεῖσα τιθέν 
τιθείσης τιθέντος 
τιθείσῃ τιθέντι 


τιθεῖσαν τιθέν 
τιθεῖσα τιθέν 


τιθείσα τιθέντε 


τιθείσαιν τιθέντοιν 


τιθεῖσαι τιθέντα 


τιθεισῶν τιθέντων 
τιθείσαις τιθεῖσι - 
τιθείσας τιθέντα 


λελυκός 
λελυκότος 
λελυκότι 
λελυκός 
λελυκός 


λελυκότε. 
λελυκότοιν 


§ 69.] ADJECTIVES — FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. 61 


; Plural. 
N,V. λελυκότες λελυκυῖαι. ,, λελυκότα 
G. λελυκότων λελυκυιῶν λελυκότων 
D. λελυκόσι λελυκνυίαις λελυκόσι 
A. λελυκότας λελυκνυίας λελυκότα 


Nore. All participles in wy are declined like λύων: for ovea in 
the feminine, for ovr-ca, see § 16,6, Ν. 1. Participles in ovs are 
declined like λύων, except in the nominative and vocative: singular; 
as διδούς, διδοῦσα, διδόν, giving; gen. διδόντος, διδούσης ; dat. διδόντι, 
διδούσῃ, &c. Aorist active participles in as are declined like ἑστάς ; 
as λύσας, λύσασα, λῦσαν, having loosed ; gen. λύσαντος, λυσάσης ; dat. 
λύσαντι, Avedon, &c. Aorist passive participles in es are declined 
like τιθείς ; as λυθείς, λυθεῖσα, λυθέν, loosed ; gen. λυθέντος, λυθείσης ; 
dat. λυθέντι, λυθείσῃ, α. When the accent differs from that of the 
paradigm, it follows the general principle (§ 25, 1). See § 117, 2. 


§ 69. Participles in dwv, έων, and dwy are contracted. 
Tipdwv, τιμῶν, honoring, and φιλέων, φυλῶν, loving, are 
declined as follows.: — 


Singular. 
N. (τιμάων) τιμῶν (τιμάουσα) τιμῶσα (τιμάον)ῇ τιμῶν 
α. (τιμάοντος) τιμῶντος (τιμαούση:) τιμώσης (τιμάοντος) τιμῶντος 
D. (τιμάοντι) τιμῶντι (τιμαούσῃ) τιμώσῃ (τιμάοντι) - τιμῶντι 
A. (τιμάοντα) τιμῶντα (τιμάουσαν). τιμῶσαν ἱ{τιμάον)]ἢ; τιμῶν — 
VY. (τιμάων) τιμῶν (τιμάουσα) τιμῶσα (τιμάον) τιμῶν 
Dual. 

N. (τιμάοντελ τιμῶντε (τιμαούσα) τιμώόσα (τιμάοντε) τιμῶντε 
α 


> (TyadvTow) τυμώντοιν (τιμαούσαι»ν) τιμώσαιν (τιμαόντοω) τιμώντοιν 


Plural. 


. {τιμάοντεο) τιμῶντες (τιμάουσαι) τιμῶσαι (τιμᾶοντα) τιμῶντα 
. (σιμαόντων) τιμώντων (τιμαουσῶν) τιμωσῶν (τιμαόντων) τιμώντων 
- (σμάουσ) τιμῶσι (σιμαούσαι5) τιμώσαϊις (τιμάουσι) τιμῶσι 

- (ζιμάοντας) τιμῶντας (τιμαούσας) τιμώσας (τιμάοντα) τιμῶντα 
. (σιμάοντε5) τιμῶντες (τιμάουσαι) τιμῶσαι. (τιμάοντα) τιμῶντα 


“4Ἃ»ΌΩῷ Καὶ 


62 _- INFLECTION. | [8 70. 


Singular. 


N. (φιλέων) φιλῶν. (φιλέουσα) φιλοῦσα (φιλέον)͵ φιλοῦν 

. (φιλέοντος) φιλοῦντος (φιλεούση5) φιλούσης (φιλέοντος) φιλοῦντος 
. (φιλέοντ.) φιλοῦντι (φιλεούσῃ) φιλούσῃ (φιλέοντι) φιλοῦντι 
. (φιλέοντα) φιλοῦντα (φιλέουσαν) φιλοῦσαν (φιλέον) φιλοῦν 

. (φιλέων) φιλῶν (φιλέουσα) φιλοῦσα (φιλέον) φιλοῦν 


<P> 050 


Dual. 


. (pirdovre) φιλοῦντε (φιλεούσα) φιλούσα (φιλέοντε) φιλοῦντε 
. (φιλεόντοιν) φιλούντοιν (φιλεούσαιν) φιλούσαιν (φιλεόντοιν) φιλούντοιν 


QZ 


Plural. 


- (φιλέοντες) φιλοῦντες (φιλέουσαι) φιλοῦσαι (φιλέοντα) φιλοῦντα 
. (φιλεόντων) φιλούντων (φιλεουσῶν) φιλουσῶν (φιλεόντων) φιλούντων 

. (φιλέουσι) φιλοῦσι (φιλεούσαιΞ) φιλούσαις (φιλέουσι) φιλοῦσι 
. (préovras) φιλοῦντας (gircovcas) φιλούσας (φιλέοντα) φιλοῦντα 
. (φιλέοντες) φιλοῦντες (φιλέουσαι) φιλοῦσαι (φιλέοντα) φιλοῦντα 


<bpbayw 


The present participles of verbs in ow (contracted 6) are declined 
like φιλῶν, the contracted form of φιλέων. Thus δηλῶν, δηλοῦσα, 
δηλοῦν, manifesting: gen. δηλοῦντος, δηλούσης ; dat. δηλοῦντι, δηλούσῃ, 
&c. The uncontracted form of verbs in ow is not used. § 98, Rem. 


Notr. <A few second perfect participles in ads of the με- form 
(8 124) have ὥσα in the feminine, and retain in the oblique cases. 
They are contracted in Attic; as (€oraws, ἑσταῶσα, ἑσταός), contr. 
ἑστώς, ἑστῶσα, ἑστός (irregular for ἑστώς). standing: gen. ἑστῶτος, 
ἑστώσης, ἑστῶτος, &c. But τεθνεώς, τεθνεῶσα, τεθνεός, dead, from 
θνήσκω, always remains uncontracted. See § 110, iv. (ὦ), N. 3. 


, 


ἡ 


IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 


8 70. The irregular adjectives, μέγας, great, πολύς, 
much, and πρῶος, mild, are thus declined : — : 


Singular. 


μέγας μεγάλη μέγα πολύς πολλή πολύ 
μεγάλου μεγάλης μεγάλου πολλοῦ πολλῆς πολλοῦ 
μεγάλῳ μεγάλῃ μεγάλῳι. πολλῷ: : πολλῇ πολλῷ 
μέγαν μεγάλην μέγα πολύν πολλήν πολύ 
μεγάλε μεγάλη μέγα 


SPURS 


9 EEA 
. _ 


= 


ΖΕ: TS 
§ 70.] ADJECTIVES — IRREGULAR a emir Αννα “63 


Dual. 
N. A. V. μεγάλω μεγάλα μεγάλω 
G. D. peydAow μεγάλαιν μεγάλοιν 

Plural, 
ΝΥ μεγάλου μεγάλαι μεγάλα πολλοί πολλαζ πολλά 
G μεγάλων μεγάλων μεγάλων πολλῶν πολλῶν πολλῶν 
D μεγάλοις μεγάλαις μεγάλοις πολλοῖς πολλαῖς πολλοῖς 


> 
3 
4 
5 


μεγάλας μεγάλα πολλούς πολλάς πολλά 


Singular. 
N. πρᾶος πραεῖα πρᾶον 
α. πράου πραείας πράου 
D. πράῳ πραείᾳ πράῳ 
Α. πρᾶον πραεῖαν πρᾶον 
Dual. 
Ni # πράω πραεία πράω. 
G. D. πράοιν πραείαιν πράοιν 
Plural. 
N. A. πρᾶοι, πραεῖς ο πραεῖαι πραέα 
G. πραέων πραειῶν πραέων 
D. πράοις, πραέσι πραείαις πράοις, πραέσι 
Α, πράους πραείας πραέα 


Note 1. Most of the forms οἵ μέγας and πολύς are derived from stems 
in ο, μεγαλο- and πολλο-. Πολλός, ἡ, dv, is found in Homer and Herodo- 
tus, declined regularly throughout. In Homer, πολύς has forms πολέος, 
πολέες, πολέων, &c., which must not be confounded with Epic forms of 
πόλις (ὃ 53, 1, N. 8). 


Note 2. Πρᾶος has two stems, one mpdo- (written also mpgo-) from 
which the masculine and neuter are generally formed ; and one πραῦ (never 
mpav-) from which the feminine and some other forms come (ὃ 67, 2). 
There is an Epic form πρηύς (Lyric pads) coming from the latter stem. 
The forms belonging to the two stems differ in accent. 


Ν, 


\ 


064 ᾿ _INFLECTION. [8 71. 


COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 


I. Comparison by “τερος, -τᾶάτος, 


§ 71. Most adjectives add repos to the stem to form 
the comparative, and τατος to form the superlative. 
Stems in o with a short penult change o to w before repos 
and τατος. Sg. 


Kotdos (κουφο-), light, κουφότερος, lighter, κουφότατος, lightest. 
Zopos (codo-), wise, σοφώτερος, wiser, σοφώτατος, wisest. 

Σεμνός (σεμνο-), august, σεμνότερος, σεμνότατος. 

Πικρός (πικρο-), bitter, πικρότερος, πικρότατος. 

᾿οξύς (ὀξυ-), sharp, ὀξύτερος, ὀξύτατος. 

Μέλας (μελαν-), black, μελάντερος, μελάντατος. : 

᾿Αληθής (ἀληθεσ-), true, ἀληθέστερος, ἀληθέστατος. (§ 52, 1). 


Norte 1. Stems ino do not lengthen o to o if the penultimate 
vowel is followed by a mute and a liquid (§ 19, 3). See πικρός 
above. 


- Notre 2. Μέσος, middle, and a few other s, drop os and add aire- 
pos and airaros; as μέσος, μεσαίτερος, μεσαίτατος. 


Norte 3. Adjectives in oos drop os and add ἐστέρος and § έστατος, 
which are contracted with o to ova repos and ούστατος ; a8 (εὔνοος) 
εὔνους, well-disposed, εὐνούστερος, εὐνούστατος. 


Notre 4. Adjectives in ὧν add ἔστερος and έστατος ‘to-the stem; 
as σώφρων (σωφρον-), prudent, σωφρονέστερος, σωφρονέστατος. 


Notre 5. Adjectives in εἰς change final-evr- of the stem to ec-, 
and add τερος and τατος ; as χαρίεις (χαριεντ-), graceful, χαριέστερος, 
χαριέστατος. : 


. XI. Comparison by “ἴων, -ἰστος. 


ὃ 72. 1. Some adjectives in us and pos are compared 
by changing these endings to wy and wotos. Eg. 


Ἡδύς, sweet, ἡδίων, ἥδιστος. ᾿ 

Ταχύς, swift, ταχίων (commonly aaa § 17, 2, N.), πάχος. 
Αἰσχρός, base, αἰσχίων, αἴσχιστος. 

᾿Εχθρός, hostile, ἐχθίων, ἔχθιστος. 

Κυδρός (poet.), glorious, κυδίων, κύδιστος. 


ΝΌΤΕ. Some adjectives have both cov, ἐστος and repos, τατος. 


§ 19.] IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 65 


2. Comparatives in ἴων, neuter tov, are thus declined : — 


Singular. Dual. 
N. ἡδίων ἥδιον 
α. ἡδίονος ΟΝ, A. Υ. ἡδίονε 
D. ἡδίονι G. ἢ. ἡδιόνοιν 
Α. ἡδίονα ἡδίω ἥδιον Ἀπ τς 
Plural. 
N. ¥. ἡδίονες ἡδίους ἡδίονα ἡδίω 
"δ: ἡδιόνων 
D. ἡδίοσι ᾿ 
Α. ἡδίονας ἡδίους ἡδίονα ἡδίω 


Norte 1. The terminations -ova, -oves, -ovas may drop ν, and be 
contracted into -w and -ous (§ 47, N. 1). The vocative singular of 
these comparatives seems not to occur. For the recessive accent in 
the neuter singular, see § 25, 1, Note. 


Norte 2, The irregular comparatives in wy (§ 73) are declined 
like ἡδίων. | 
~3 


Ill. Irregular Comparison. 


§ 73. 1. The following are the most important cases of 
irregular comparison : — 


1. ἀγαθός, good, ἀμείνων (ὃ 16, 7), 


(ἀρείων), ἄριστος, 
βελτίων, βέλτιστος, 
(βέλτεροΞ), (βέλτατο:), 
κρείσσων or κρείττων (κρέσσων), κράτιστος, 
(φέρτεροΞ), . (φέρτατος, 
φέριστος), 
λῴων (λωίων, λωίτερος), λῷστος. 
2. κακός, bad, κακίων (κακώτεροΞ), κάκιστος, 
| χείρων, (χερείων), ΟΠ χίριστος, 
(χειρότερος, χερειότεροΞ), 
ἥσσων or ἥττων (ἕσσων), (ἥκιστος, rare) ; 
adv. ἥκιστα, 
8. καλός, beautiful, καλλίων, κάλλιστος. 
4. μέγας, great, ᾿ μείζων (μέζων, § 16, 7), . μέγιστος. 


5 


66 INFLECTION. [8 73. 


5. μικρός, small, μικρότερος, μικρότατος, 
(Hom. ἐλάχεια, 
fem. of ἐλαχύς), ἐλάσσων or ἐλάττων (8 16, 7), ἐλάχιστος, 


μείων (μεῖστος, rare). 
6. ὀλίγος, Jitéle, (ὑπ-ολίξζων, rather less), ὀλίγιστος. 
7. πένης (πενητ-), poor, πενέστερος, πενέστατος.- 
8. πολύς, much, πλείων or πλέων, πλεῖστος. 
9. ῥάδιος, casy, pdwv, ' ῥᾷστος, 
(Ion. ῥηίδιο5), (ῥηίτεροΞ), (ῥηίτατος, ῥήιστος). 
10. φίλος, dear, ὀ  ἈΔἀφίλτερος, φίλτατος, 
φιλαίτερος (rare), φιλαίτατος (rare). 


(φιλίων, rare), 
φιλώτερος (rare). 


Ionic or poetic forms are in ( ). 


Note. Irregularities in the comparison of the following words 
will be found in the Lexicon: — 


αἰσχρός, ἀλγεινός, ἅρπαξ, ἄφθονος, ἅ ἄχαρις, βαθύς, βλάξ. βραδύς, γε- 
ραιός, γλυκύς, ἐπιλήσμων, ἐπίχαρις, ἥσυχος, ἴδιος, ἴσος, λάλος, μάκαρ, 
μακρός, νέος, παλαιός, παχύς, πέπων, πίων, πλησίος, πρέσβυς, προὔργου, 
πρώιος, σπουδαῖος, σχολαῖος, ψευδής, ὠκύς. 


2. Some comparatives and superlatives have no positive, 
but their stem generally appears in an adverb or preposition. 
Lg. 


᾿Ανώτερος, upper, ἀνώτατος, uppermost, from ἄνω, up; πρότερος, 
former » πρῶτος OF πρώτιστος, Jirst, from πρό, before; κατώτερος, lower, 
κατώτατος, lowest, from κάτω, downward. 

See in the Lexicon d ἀγχότερος, ἀφάρτερος, κερδίων, ὁπλότερος, προσώ- 
τερος, ῥίγιον (neuter), ὑπέρτερος, ὕστερος, ὑψίων, φαάντερος, with their 
regular superlatives ; also ἔσχατος and κήδιστος. 


3. Comparatives and superlatives may be formed from 
nouns, and even from pronouns. 1}... 

Βασιλεύς, king, βασιλεύτερος, a greater king, βασιλεύτατος, the great- 
est king : κλέπτης. thief, κλεπτίστερος. κλεπτίστατος: κύων, dog OY] κύντερος, 


more impudent, κύντατος, most impudent. So αὐτός, self, αὐτότατος, his 
very self, ipsissimus. 


8 75.] ADVERBS AND THEIR COMPARISON. 67 


ADVERBS AND THEIR COMPARISON. 


§ 74, 1. Adverbs are regularly formed from. adjec- 
tives. Their form (including the.accent) is found by 
changing ν of the genitive plural masculine tos. Lg. 


Φίλως, dearly, from φίλος; δικαίως, justly (δίκαιος); σοφῶς, wisely 
(σοφός) ; ἡδέως, sweetly (ἡδύς, gen. plur. ἡδέων), ἀληθῶς, truly (ἀλη- 
θής, gen. plur. ἀληθέων, ἀληθῶν), σαφῶς (ἰοιΐο᾽ σαφέως), plainly 
(σαφής, gen. plur. σαφέων, σαφῶν) ; πάντως, wholly (πᾶς, gen. plur. 
πάντων). 


Note Adverbs are occasionally formed thus from participles; 
as διαφερόντω:, differently, from διαφέρων (διαφερόντων) ; τεταγμένως, 
regularly, from τεταγμένος (τάσσω, order). ‘ 


2. The neuter accusative of an adjective (either singu- 
lar or plural) may be used as an adverb. Lg. 


Πολύ and πολλά, much (πολύς) : μέγα or μεγάλα, greatly (μέγας); 
also μεγάλως, § 74, 1; μόνον, only (μόνος, alone). 


Note. Other forms of adverbs with various terminations will 
be learnt by practice. See § 129. 


§75. The neuter accusative singular of the com- 
parative of. an adjective forms the comparative of the 
corresponding adverb; and the neuter accusative plural 


of the superlative forms the superlative of the adverb. 
Lig. ; 


Σοφῶς (copds), wisely ; σοφώτερον, more wisely: σοφώτατα. most 
wisely. ᾿Αληθῶς (ἀληθής), truly; ἀληθέστερον, ἀληθέστατα. ‘Hdews 
(ἡδύς), sweetly, ἥδιον, ἥδιστα. Χαριέντως (χαρίεις), gracefully ; χαριέ- 
στερον, χαριέστατα. Σωφρόνως (σώφρων), prudently ; σωφρονέστερον, 
σωφρονέστατα. 


Norte 1. Other adverbs generally form ἃ comparative in τέρω, 
and a superlative in rarw; as ἄνω, above, ἀνωτέρω, ἀνωτάτω. 

A few comparatives derived from adjectives end in répws; as Be- 
βαιοτέρως, more firmly, for B:Badrepov, from βεβαίως. 


ΝΌΤΕ 2. Mada, much, very, has comparative μᾶλλον (for μαλιον, 
§ 16, 7), more, rather; superlative μάλιστα, most, especially. 


68 


INFLECTION. 


NUMERALS. 


[8 76. 


§ 76. The cardinal and ordinal numeral adjectives, 
and the numeral adverbs which occur, are as follows: — 


μα ee μι μα με : 
SD ὦ ὁ ὦ σι μα Ομ OO OATH om OCD DDH 


b 
μὰ 


Oo COND σι μ᾿ OO 
Ore (OSS Oo OS 


100 
200 
300 
400 


Sign. Cardinal. 
a’ εἷς, pla, ἕν, one 
β΄ δύο, two 
Ὑ τρεῖς, τρία 
δ΄ τέσσαρες, τέσσαρα 
ε'ὖ'Ἢ πέντε 
ς΄ Ἐξ 
ζ ἑἕἑπτά 
ἢ ὀκτώ 
θ΄ ἐννέα 
νι δέκα 
ια΄ ἕνδεκα 
ιβ΄ δώδεκα 
vy τρισκαίδεκα 
ιδ΄ τεσσαρεσκαίϑεκα 
ιε΄ πεντεκαίδεκα 
ις΄ ἑκκαίδεκα 
ιζ ἑπτακαίδεκα 
ιη΄ ὀκτωκαίδεκα 
ιθ΄ ἐννεακαίδεκα 
κ΄ εἴκοσι 

κα΄ εἷς καὶ εἴκοσι ΟΥ 

εἴκοσι εἷς 
λ΄ τριάκοντα 
μ΄ τεσσαρἄκοντα 
ν΄ πεντήκοντα 
ξ΄ ἑξήκοντα 
ο΄ ᾿ἑβδομήκοντα 
wT ὀγδοήκοντα 
ο΄ ἐνενήκοντα 
ρ΄ ἑκατόν 
σ΄ διακόσιοι, αι, α 


΄ 
τ 
ἣν 


τριακόσιοι, αι, α 
τετρακόσιοι, αι, α 


Ordinal. 


πρῶτος, first 
δεύτερος, second 
τρίτος. 
τέταρτος 
πέμπτος 

ἕκτος. 

ἕβδομος 

ὄγδοος 

ἔνατος 

δέκατος 
ἑνδέκατος 
δωδέκατος 
τρισκαιδέκατος 


'τεσσαρακαιδέκατος 


πεντεκαιδέκατος 
ἑκκαιδέκατος. 
ἑπτακαιδέκατος 
ὀκτωκαιδέκατος 
ἐννεακαιδέκατος 
εἰκοστός 


πρῶτος καὶ εἰκοστός 


τριᾶκοστός 
τεσσαρἄκοστός 
πεντηκοστός 
ἑξηκοστός 
ἑβδομηκοστός 
ὀγδοηκοστός 
ἐνενηκοστός 
ἑκατοστός 
διακοσιοστός 
τριακοσιοστός 
τετρακοσιοστός 


Adverb. 


ἅπαξ, once 
Sis, twice 
τρίς 
τετράκις 
πεντάκις 
ἑξάκις 
ἑπτάκις 
ὀκτάκις. 
ἐνάκις 
δεκάκις 
ἑνδεκάκις 


δωδεκάκις 


εἰκοσάκις 


τριᾶκοντάκις 
TETTUPAKOVTAKLS 
πεντηκοντάκις 
ἑξηκοντάκις 
ἑβδομηκοντάκις , 
ὀγδοηκοντάκις 
ἐνενηκοντάκις 
ἑκατοντάκις. 
διακοσιάκις 


§ 77.] NUMERALS, 69 
Sign. Cardinal. Ordinal. Adverb. 
500 φ΄ πεντἄκόσιοι,αι, α πεντακοσιοστός 
600 x’ ἑξάκόσιοι, αι, a ἑξακοσιοστός 
700 Ψψ΄ ἑπτάκόσιοι, αι, a ἑπτακοσιοστός 
800 ow ὀκτάκόσιοι, αι, a ὀκτακοσιοστός 
900 DF ἐνακόσιοι, αι, ἃ ἐνακοσιοστός 
1000 « χίλιοι, αι, α χιλιοστός χιλιάκις 
2000 B δισχίλιοι, αι, a δισχιλιοστός : 
8000 jy “τρισχίλιοι, αι, a τρισχιλιοστός 
pia } μύριοι, αι, a μυριοστός μυριάκις 


Ἀδνὸ 10,000, δύο μυριάδες, 30,000, or puptades, 30,000, &e. 
were used. ME : 


The dialects have the following peculiar forms: — 


1-- 4. See § 77, Note 1.: Epic rpiraros, rérparos. - 
12. Doric and Ionic δυώδεκα: Poetic δυοκαίδεκα. — 

20. Epic ἐείκοσι; Doric εἴκατι. 

30, 80, 200, 300. Lonic τριήκοντα, ὀγδώκοντα, διηκόσιοι, τριηκόσιοι. 
40. Herod. τεσσερήκοντα. 


Nore. 


§ 77. 1. The cardinal numbers εἷς, one, δύο, two, 
τρεῖς, three, and τέσσαρες (or τέτταρες), four, are thus 
declined : — : 

N. εἷς pla ἕν 

σ. ἑνός μιᾶς ἑνός N. A. δύο F 

D. » él μιᾷ ἑνί G. D. δυοῖν 

A. ἕνα μίαν ἕν : 

N. τρεῖς τρία τέσσαρες τέσσαα͵ 

G. TPLOV τεσσάρων 

D. τρισί τέσσαρσι 

A. τρεῖς Ἡ νὰ τέσσαρας τέσσαρα 
Note 1. Homer has fem. ta, ifs, &e., for μία; and ἴῳ for ἑνί. 


Homer has δύω for δύο, and forms doe, δοίαί (declined regularly). 
For δυεῖν, δυῶν. δυοῖσι, and other forms, see the Lexicon. Avo is 
sometimes indeclinable. Herodotus has τέσσερες, and the poets 
have τέτρᾶσι. 


19" , INFLECTION. [§ 77. 


Nore 2. The compounds οὐδείς aud μηδείς, no one, none, are de- 
clined like eis. Thus, οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν ; gen. οὐδενό.. οὐδεμιᾶς ; dat. 
οὐδενί, οὐδεμιᾷ . acc. οὐδένα, οὐδεμίαν, οὐδέν, &c. Plural forms some- 
times occur; as οὐδένες, οὐδένων. οὐδέσι, οὐδένας, μηδένες, KC. When 
οὐδέ or μηδέ is separated from εἷς (as by a preposition or by ἄν), the 
negative is more emphatic; as ἐξ οὐδενός, from no one; οὐδ᾽ ἐξ ἑνός, 
Jrom not even one. 


Nore 3. Both is expressed by ἄμφω, ambo, ἀμφοῖν; and by ἀμφό- 
repos, generally plural, ἀμφότεροι, a, a. 


2. The cardinal numbers from 5 to 100 are indeclinable. 
The higher numbers in wo and all the ordinals are declined 
regularly, like other adjectives in os. 


Note 1. When τρεῖς καὶ δέκα and τέσσαρες καὶ δέκα are used for 
13 and 14, the first part is declined. In ordinals we may say rpiros 
καὶ δέκατος, &c. 


Note 2. (a) In compound expressions like 21, 22, &c., 31, 32, 
&c., 121, 122, &c., the numbers can be connected by καί in either 
order; but if καί is omitted, the larger precedes. Thus, εἷς καὶ εἴκοσι, 
one and twenty, or εἴκοσι καὶ εἷς, twenty and one ; but (without καί) only 
εἴκοσι εἷς, twenty-one. 


(0) The numbers 18 and 19, 28 and 29, 38 and 39, &c. are often 
expressed by ἑνὸς (or δυοῖν) δέοντες εἴκοσι (τριάκοντα, τεσσαράκοντα, ὅθ.) ; 
as ἔτη ἑνὸς δέοντα τριάκοντα, 29 years. | 


Nore 3. With collective nouns in the singular, especially ἡ ἵππος, 
cavalry, the numerals in co sometimes appear in the singular; as 
τὴν διακοσίαν ἵππον, the (troop of ) 200 cavalry (200 horse); ἀσπὶς μυρία 
kat τετρακοσία (Xen. An. i. 7, 10), 10,400 shields (i.e. men with 
shields). 

Μύριοι means ten thousand ; μυρίοι, innumerable. Mupios sometimes 
has the latter sense; as μυρίος χρόνος, countless lime ; μυρία πενία, in- 
calculable poverty. For μυρία as numeral, see above. 


Note 4. The Greeks often expressed numbers by letters; the two obso- 
lete letters, Vaw and Koppa, and the character San, denoting 6, 90, and 900. 
(See § 1, N. 2.) The last letter in a numerical expression has an accent 
above. Thousands begin anew with α, with a stroke below. Thus, awéy’, 
1868; βχκε΄, 2625; dxe’, 4025; By’, 2003; gu’, 540; pd’, 104. (See § 76, 
second column.) : 


Note ὅ. The letters of the ordinary Greek alphabet are often used to 
number the books of the Zliad and Odyssey, each poein having twenty-four 
books. : ᾿ 


§ 79.] THE ARTICLE — PRONOUNS. . δ | 


THE ARTICLE. 


§ 78. The definite article ὁ (stem ro-), the, is thus de- 
clined : — 


Singular. Dual, ; Plural. 
N.S ἢ τό N. οἱ αἱ τά 
α. τοῦ τῆς τοῦ N. Α. τώ (τά) τώ |G, τῶν 
5. τῷ τῇ τῴ G. Ὁ. τοῖν (ταῖν) τοῖν Ὁ, τοῖς ταῖς τοῖς 
A. τὸν τήν τό A. τούς τάς τά 


Notre 1. The Greek has no indefinite article; but often the in- 
definite ris (§ 54) may be translated by a or an; as ἄνθρωπός τις, ἃ 
cerlain man, often simply @ man. 


Note 2. The feminine dual forms ra and ταῖν (especially ra) are 
rare, and τώ and row are generally used for all genders. (ὃ 138, 
N.5). The regular nominatives roi and ra: are Epic and Doric; 
and the article has the usual dialectic forms of the first and second 
declensions, as τοῖο, τοῖιν, τάων, τοῖσι, τῇσι; THs. 


PRONOUNS. 
Personal and Intensive Pronouns. . 


8 79, 1. The personal pronouns are ἐγώ, J, σύ, thou, 
and οὗ (genitive), of him, of her, of it. Αὐτός, himself, 
is used as a personal pronoun for him, her, it, &c. in the 
oblique cases, but never in the nominative. They are 
thus declined : — 


Singular. 
N. ἐγώ σύ a αὐτός αὐτή αὐτό 
G. ἐμοῦ, μοῦ σοῦ οὗ αὐτοῦ αὐτῆς αὐτοῦ 
Ὦ. ἐμοί, μοί σοί. ot αὐτῷ αὐτῇ αὐτῷ 
Α. ἐμέ, μέ σέ ἕ αὐτόν αὐτήν αὐτό 
| Dual. 
N. A. νώ σφώ (σφωέ) αὐτώ αὐτά αὐτώ 
G. D. νῷν σφῷν = (cuir) αὐτοῖν αὐταῖν αὐτοῖν 


72 INFLECTION. [§ 79. 


Plural. 
N. ἡμεῖς ὑμεῖς σφεῖς (σφέα) αὐτί αὐταί αὐτά 
α. ἡμῶν ὑμῶν σφῶν αὐτῶν αὐτῶν αὐτῶν 
D. ἡμῖν ὑμῖν σφίσι αὐτοῖς αὐταῖς αὐτοῖς 
A. ἡμᾶς ὑμᾶς σφᾶς (σφέα) αὐτούς αὐτάς αὐτά 


Norte 1. Αὐτός in the nominative of all numbers, and as an adjec- 
tive pronoun in the oblique cases, is inlensive, like ipse (§ 145, 1); 
except in 6 αὐτός, the same (8 79, ἊΣ In the oblique cases it is the 
ordinary personal pronoun of the third person (§ 145, 2). 


For the uses of οὗ, of, &c. see § 144,2. In Attic prose, σφωέ, 
σφωίν, σφέα, never occur; οὗ and ¢ (chiefly Epic) very rarely; oi, 
σφεῖς, σφῶν, σφίσι, σφᾶς, being the only common forms. The ora- 
tors seldom use this pronoun at all, and the tragedians use chiefly 
σφίν (not opi) and ode (Notes 2 and 3). 


Note 2. The following is the Ionic declension of ἐγώ, ov, and 
ov. The forms in ( ) are not used by Herodotus. 


Sing. N.. ἐγώ (ἐγών) σύ (τύνη) 
G. ἐμεῦ, ped, from ἐμέο σέο, σεῦ (20) εὖ 
(ἐμεῖο, ἐμέθεν) (σεῖο, σέθεν) (εἶο, ἕθεν) 
Ὁ. ἐμοί, μοί σοί, τοί (τεΐν) of (ἑοῖ) 
Α. ἐμέ, μέ σέ ἕ (éé) 
Dual. N. Α. (vdi, vd) (σφῶϊ, σφώ) (σφωέ) 
G. Ὁ. (νῶν) (σφῶϊν, σφῶν) (σφωνν) 
ίων. Ν. ἡμεῖς (ἄμμες) ὑμεῖς (ὔμμες) 
G. ἡμέων (ἡμείων) ὑμέων (ὑμείων) σφέων (σφείων) 
Ὁ. ἡμῖν (ἄμμι) ὑμῖν (ὕμμῷ σφίσι, σφί() 
Α. ἡμέας (ἄμμε) ὑμέας (ὄμμε) σφέας (σφεῖαΞ), σφέ 


Herodotus has also σφεῖς and σφέα in the plural of the third 
person, which are not found in Homer. 


Nore 3. Σφέ is used as both singular and plural, him, her, it, 
them, by the tragedians. 


Nore 4. The tragedians use the Doric accusative viv as a per- 
sonal pronoun in all genders, and in both singular and plural. The — 
Tonic form piv is used in all genders, but only in the singular. 


Nore 5. The poets sometimes shorten the final syllable of ἡμῖν, 
ἡμᾶς, ὑμῖν, ὑμᾶς, and σφᾶς. changing the circumflex to the acute, as 
ἡμίν, ἡμάς, &c.; and sometimes accenting ἧμιν, ἣμας, &c. 


Nore 6. Herodotus has αὐτέων in the feminine (not in the mas- 
culine or the neuter) for αὐτῶν (ὃ 39). See § 3, N. 3. The Ionic 
contracts ὁ αὐτός into wirds Or wirds, and τὸ αὐτό into τωὐτό (8:9). 


8 80.] REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. δ 18 


Notre 7. The Doric has ἐμίν (for Attic ἐμοί); duds, ἁμέων, ἁμίν, ἁμέ 
(for ἡμεῖς, ἡμῶν, ἡμῖν, ἡμᾶς); τύ (for σύ); τέο, τεῦ, τεῦς, reod (for σοῦ); τίν 
(for σοί); ὑμές and ὑμέ (for ὑμεῖς and ὑμᾶς); ἵν for of ; besides many of the 
Ionic and poetic forms already mentioned. 


2. Αὐτός preceded by the article means the same ; as 
ὁ αὐτὸς ἀνήρ, the same man ; τὸν αὐτὸν πόλεμον, the same 


war. (See § 142, 4, N. 6.) 


N OTE. Αὐτός is often contracted with the article ; as ταὐτοῦ for 
TOU αὐτοῦ: ταὐτῷ for τῷ αὐτῷ; ταὐτῇ for τῇ αὐτῇ (not to be con- 
founded with ταύτῃ from οὗτος). In the contracted form the neuter 


singular has ταὐτό or ταὐτόν. ΠΕ 


Reflexive Pronouns. 


§ 80. The reflexive pronouns are ἐμαυτοῦ, ἐμαυτῆς, 
of myself ; σεαυτοῦ, σεαυτῆς, of thyself; and ἑαυτοῦ, éav- 
τῆς, of himself, herself, itself. ‘They are thus declined: — 


SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
Mase. Fem. Mase. Fem. 
G. ἐμαυτοῦ - ἐμαυτῆς ἡμῶν αὐτῶν 
D. ἐμαυτῷ ἐμαυτῇ ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς ἡμῖν αὐταῖς 
Α. ἐμαυτόν ἐμαυτήν ἡμᾶς αὐτούς ἡμᾶς αὐτάς 
Mase. Fem. Mase. Fem. 
G.. σεαυτοῦ or σαυτοῦ σεαυτῆς or σαυτῆς ὑμῶν αὐτῶν 
D. σεαυτῷ οΥ σαυτῷ σεαυτῇ or σαυτῇ ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς ὑμῖν αὐταῖς 
A. σεαυτόν or σαῦτόν σεαυτήν or σαυτὴν ὑμᾶς αὐτούς ὑμᾶς αὐτάς 
Mase. Fem. Neut. Mase. Fem. Neut. 
G. ἑαυτοῦ ἑαυτῆς ἑαυτοῦ.. ἑαυτῶν ἑαυτῶν ἑαυτῶν 
D. ἑαυτῷ ἑαυτῇ ἑαυτῷ ἑαυτοῖς ἑαυταῖς ἑαυτοῖς 
Α. ἑαυτόν ἑαυτήν ἑαυτό ἑαυτούς ἑαυτάς ἑαυτά 
contracted into 
G. αὑτοῦ αὑτῆς αὑτοῦ αὑτῶν αὑτῶν αὑτῶν 
D. αὑτῷΩ: αὑτῇ αὑτῷ ᾿ αὑτοῖς αὑταῖς αὑτοῖς 
Α. αὑτόν αὑτήν αὑτό αὑτούς αὑτάς αὑτά 


The contracted forms αὑτοῦ, &e. must not be confounded with 
αὐτοῦ, &c. from αὐτός. For σφὼν αὐτῶν, &c. see Note. 


74 INFLECTION. (§ 81. 


Note. The reflexives are compounded of the personal pronouns 
and αὐτός, which appear separately in the plural of the first and 
second persons. In Homer they are separated in all persons and 
numbers; as σοὶ αὐτῷ. of αὐτῷ. € αὐτήν. Even in Attic prose σφῶν 
αὐτῶν, σφίσιν αὐτοῖς (αὐταῖς), σφᾶς αὐτούς (αὐτάς), often occur. He- 
rodotus has ἐμεωυτοῦ, σεωυτοῦ, ἑωυτοῦ. 


Reciprocal Pronoun. 


8 81. The reciprocal pronoun is ἀλλήλων, of one 
another, used only in the dual and plural. It is thus 
declined : — 

Dual. Plural. 


G. ἀλλήλοιν ἀλλήλαιν ἀλλήλοιν ἀλλήλων ἀλλήλων ἀλλήλων 
D. ἀλλήλοιν ἀλλήλαιν ἀλλήλοιν ἀλλήλοις ἀλλήλαις ἀλλήλοις 
Α. ἀλλήλω ἀλλήλα ἀλλήλω ἀλλήλους ἀλλήλας ἄλληλα 


f 


Possessive Pronouns. 


ὃ 82. The possessive pronouns are ἐμός, my, σός, thy, 
ἡμέτερος, OUT, ὑμέτερος, your, σφέτερος, their, and the 
poetic ds, his. They are declined like adjectives in os. 

Notre 1. Homer has dual possessives νωΐτερος, of us two, σφωΐ- 
repos, of you two; also reos (Doric) for σός, éds for ὅς, duos and ἀμός 


(a) for ἡμέτερος (in Attic poetry for ἐμός), buds (Ὁ) for ὑμέτερος, σφός ᾿ 
for σφέτερος. 
Norte 2. Ὅς not being used in Attic prose, his is there expressed 
by the genitive of αὐτός, as ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ, his father. 
i 


Demonstrative Pronouns. 


8 83. The demonstrative pronouns are οὗτος and ὅδε, 
this, and ἐκεῖνος, that. ‘They are thus declined : —_ 


Singular. 
N. οὗτος αὕτη τοῦτο ὅδε ἥδε τόδε 
G. τούτου ταύτης τούτου τοῦδε τῆσδε τοῦδε 
D. τούτῳ ταύτῃ τούτῳ τῷδε τῇδε τῷδε 
A. τοῦτον ταύτην τοῦτο τόνδε τήνδε τόδε 


§ 83. ] DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, - 75 


Dual. 
N. A. τούτω ταύτα τούτω τώδε τάδε τώδε 
α. D. τούτοιν ταύταιν τούτοιν τοῖνδε ταῖνδε τοῖνδε 
Plural. 
N. οὗτοι αὗται ταῦτα οἵδε αἵδε τάϑε 
G. τούτων τούτων τούτων τῶνδε τῶνδε τῶνδε 
D. τούτοις ταύταις τούτοις τοῖσδε ταῖσδε τοῖσδε 
A. τούτους ταύτας ταῦτα τούσδε τάσδε τάδε 
Singular. Plural. 
N. ἐκεῖνος ἐκείνη ἐκεῖνο N. ἐκεῖνοι ἐκεῖναι ἐκεῖνα 
G. ἐκείνου ἐκείνης ἐκείνου G. ἐκείνων ἐκείνων ἐκείνων 
D. ἐκείνῳ ἐκείνῃ ἐκείνῳ D. ἐκείνοις ἐκείναις ἐκείνοις 
Α. ἐκεῖνον ἐκείνην ἐκεῖνο Α. ἐκείνους ἐκείνας ἐκεῖνα 
Dual. 
N. A. ἐκείνω ἐκείνα ἐκείνω 
G. Ὁ. ἐκείνοιν ἐκείναιν ἐκείνοιν 


Note 1. Ἐκεῖνος is regular except in the neuter ἐκεῖνο. “Ode is 
merely the article ὁ with the inseparable particle -Se added. For 
its accent, see § 28, N. 3. 

Other demonstratives will be found among the pronominal adjec- 
tives (§ 87, 1). | 


Nore 2. The demonsitratives, including some adverbs (§ 87, 2), 
may be emphasized by the addition of long i, before which a short 
vowel is dropped. Thus οὑτοσί, αὑτηΐ, τουτί; ὁδί, ἡδί, τοδί ; τουτουί, 
ταυτί, τουτωνί; τοσουτοσί, ὧδί, οὑτωσί. 


Nore 8. Herodotus has τουτέων in the feminine (not in the mas- 
culine or the neuter) for τούτων. (For αὐτέων, see § 79, 1, N. 6.) 
Homer has τοΐσδεσσι or τοΐσδεσι for τοῖσδε. Κεῖνος is Ionic and 
poetic for ἐκεῖνος. 


76 INFLECTION. [8 84. 


Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns, 


ὃ 84, 1. The interrogative pronoun τίς, ti, who? 
which? what ? always takes the acute on the first syllable. 

The indefinite pronoun Tis, Ti, any one, some one, is en- 
clitic, and its proper accent belongs on the last syllable. 


2. These pronouns are thus declined : — 


INTERROGATIVE. INDEFINITE. 
Singular. 

N. τίς τί τὶς τὶ 

G. τίνος, τοῦ τινός, του 

Ὁ. “τίνι, τῷ τινί, τῳ 

A. τίνα τί τινά, τὶ 
Dual. 

N. A tive τινέ 

α. Ὁ. τίνοιν τινοῖν 
Plural. 

N tives τίνα τινές τινά 

G. τίνων ᾿ τινῶν 

D τίσι τισί 

Α τίνας. τίνα τινάς τινά 


For the indefinite plural τινά there is a form ἅττα (Ionic ἄσσα). 


ΝΟΤΕ 1.. Οὔτις and μήτις, poetic for οὐδείς and μηδείς, no one, are 
declined like ris. 


Nore 2. The acute accent of ris is never changed to the grave 
($ 23,1, Note).. The forms ris and τὶ of the indefinite pronoun 
seldom occur with the grave accent, as they are enclitic (§ 27). 
The Ionic has τέο and τεῦ for rod, τέῳ for τῷ, τέων for τίνων, and 
τέοισι for riot ; also the same forms as enclitics for tov, τῳ, &e. 


8. "AdXos, other, is declined like αὐτός (ὃ 79, 1), hav- 
ing ἄλλο in the neuter singular. 


ὃ 85. The indefinite δεῖνα, such a one, is sometimes 
indeclinable, and is sometimes declined as follows: — 


§ 86.] RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 77 
Singular. Plural. 
(All Genders.) (Masc.) ° 
Ἧι δεῖνα δεῖνες 
G. δεῖνος δείνων 
D. δεῖνι —— 
A. δεῖνα δεῖνας 
Relative Pronouns. 7 
8 86. The relative pronouns are és, 4, 8, who, and 
ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι, whoever. ‘They are thus declined : — 
Singular. Dual. Plural. 
N. ὅδ᾽ ἤ ὅ N. o at & 
G. οὗ ἧς οὗ NA 6 & © G. ὧν ὧν ὧν 
Ὁ. ᾧ ἡ ᾧ α. D. ον aly ον Ὁ. οἷς αἷς οἷς 
A. ὅν ἥν ὅ Α. ots ἅς ἅ 
Singular. 
Ν, ὅστις ἥτις ὅτι 
G. οὗτινος, ὅτου ἧστινος οὗτινος, ὅτου 
D. ᾧτινι, ὅτῳ ἥτινι ᾧτινι, ὅτῳ 
Α. ὅντινα . ἥντινα ὅ τι 
Dual. 
N. A. ὥτινε ἅτινε ὥτινε 
α. Ὁ. οἴντινοιν αἵντινοιν οἴντινοιν 
Plural. 
N. οἵτινες αἵτινες ἅτινα 
6. ὧντινων, ὅτων ὧντινων ὧντινων, ὅτων 
D. οἴστισι, ὅτοισι «= alo tics οἷστισι; ὅτοισι 
A. οὕστινας ἅστινας ἅτινα 
Note 1. Ὅστις is compounded of the relative ὅς and the indefi- 


nite ris, and is called the indejinile relative. 


Each part is declined 


separately. For the accent see § 28, N. 3. It has a plural form 


ἅττα (Ionic doa) ,from ἃ ἄττα (§ 84, 2), for ἅτινα. 


written (sometimes 6, τι) to distinguish it from 6 rt, that. 


Ὅ τι is thus 


18 INFLECTION. [8 87. 


Note 2. Homer has éov, és, for οὗ, fs. The following are the 
peculiar Homeric forms of ὅστις: --- 


Singular. Piural. 
N. ὅτις 8 ττι 
G. ὅτευ, ὅττεο, ὅττευ ὅτεων 
D. ὅτεῳ ὁτέοισι 
Α ὅτινα ᾿ὅ ττι ὅτινας 


-Herodotus has ὅτευ, ὅτεῳ, ὅτεων, ὁτέοισι, and ἅσσα (Note 1). 


PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 


ὃ 87, 1. There are many pronominal adjectives which cor- 
respond to each other in form and meaning. The following 
are the most important : — 


- Interrogative. Indefinite. Demonstrative. Relative. 
mwécos;howmuch? ποσός, of a cer- (récos), τοσόσδε, ὅσος, ὁπόσος, as 
quantus ? tain quantity. τοσοῦτος, 80 much, as many, 
much, tantus. quantus. 


ποῖος; of what ποιός, of a cer- (τοῖος), τοιόσδε, οἷος, ὁποῖος, ‘of 


kind ? qualis? tain kind. τοιοῦτος, such, which kind, 
talis. [such] as, qua- 
lis, 
πηλίκος; how old? (τηλίκος), τηλι- ἡλίκος, ὁπηλίκος, 
how large ? . κόσδε, τηλικοῦ- of which age or 
tos, so old or __ size, [as old] as, 
so large. [as large] as. 


πότερος ; which of πότερος (or more- ἕτερος, the one or ὁπότερος, which- 
the two. pds), one of two the other (of ever of the two. 
(rare). two). 
The pronouns τίς, ris, &c. form a corresponding series :— 


tls ; who? ris, anyone. ὅδε, οὗτος, this, ὅς, ὅστις, who, 
this one. which. 


Note. Técos and τοῖος seldom occur in Attic prose, τηλίκος never. 
Τοσόσδε, τοιόσδε, and τηλικόσδε are declined like τόσος and τοῖος ; as 
τοσόσδε, τοσήδε, τοσόνδε, &c., — τοιόσδε, τοιάδε (ἃ), τοιόνδε. (See ὃ 28, 
Note 8.) Τοσοῦτος, τοιοῦτος, and τηλικοῦτος are declined like οὗτος (omit- — 


§ 88.] VERBS. 79 


ting the first 7 in τούτου, τοῦτο, &c.), except that the neuter singular has 
o or ov; 85 Τοιοῦτος, τοιαύτη, τοιοῦτο oY τοιοῦτον ; gen. τοιούτου, τοιαύ- 
της, &c. 

2. Certain pronominal adverbs correspond to each other, 
like the adjectives given above. Such are the following : — 


Interrogative. Indefinite. Demonstrative. Relative. 


ποῦ; where? πού, somewhere. (ἔνθα), ἐνταῦθα, οὗ, ὅπου, where. 
-ἐκεῖ, there. ; 


πῇ; which way? π ἢ, some way, (τῇ), τῇδε, ταύτῃ, ἧ, ὅπῃ, which way, 


how ? somehow. this way, thus, as. 
ποῖ; whither ? mol, to some ἐκεῖσε, thither, ol, ὅποι, whither. 
place. 
πόθεν; whence? ποθέν, from (rodev), (ἔνθεν), ὅθεν, ὁπόθεν, 
some place. ἐκεῖθεν, thence. whence. 
πῶς; how? πώς, in some way, (rTws), (ds), ὧδε, ws, ὅπως, in which 
ag somehow. οὕτως, thus. way, as. 
πότε; when? ποτέ, at some τότε, then. ὅτε, ὁπότε, when. 
time. 
πηνίκα ; at what (rnvixa), τηνικά- ἡνίκα, ὁπηνίκα, at 
time ? δε, τηνικαῦτα, which time, 
at that time. when. 


Nore. There are no demonstratives corresponding to ποῦ and ποῖ, and 
equivalents of different form are given above. Forms which seldom or never 
occur in Attic prose are in ( ). Ἔνθα and ἔνθεν are relatives in prose, where, 
whence ; as demonstratives they appear chiefly in a few expressions like ἔνθα 
καὶ ἔνθα, here and there, ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν, on both sides. 

The indefinite adverbs are all enclitic (§ 27, 2.) “70 


| VERBS. BN | 
§ 88. 1. The Greek verb has three voices, the active, 
middle, and passive. 


Notre. The middle voice generally signifies that the subject 
performs an action: upon himself or for his own benefit (§ 199), but 
sometimes it is not distinguished from the active voice in meaning. 
The passive differs from the middle in form in only two tenses, the 
future and the aorist. 


80 INFLECTION. [§ 89. 


2. Deponent verbs are those which have no active 
voice, but are used in the middle or passive forms with 
an active sense. 


Notr. Deponents generally have the aorist and future of the 
middle form. A few, which have an aorist (sometimes a future) of 
the passive form, are called passive deponents; while the others are 
called middle deponents. . 

§ 89. There are five moods, the indicative, subjunc- 
tive, optative, imperative, and infinitive. To these are 
added, in the conjugation of the verb, participles of all 
the principal tenses. 


Note. The first four moods, as opposed to the infinitive, are 
called finite moods. The last four, as opposed to the indicative, are 
called dependent moods. 

§ 90, 1. There are seven tenses, the present, imper- 
fect, perfect, pluperfect, aorist, future, and future perfect. 
The imperfect and pluperfect are found only in the in- 
dicative. The future and future perfect are wanting in 

-the subjunctive and imperative. The future perfect be- 
longs regularly to the passive voice, but sometimes has 
the meaning of the active or middle. 


2. The present, perfect, future, and future perfect in- 
dicative are called primary (or principal) tenses; the. 
imperfect, pluperfect, and aorist indicative are called 
secondary (or historical) tenses. 


Note 1. Many verbs have tenses known as the second aorist (in 
all voices), the second perfect and pluperfect (active), and the second 
future (passive). These tenses are generally of more primitive forma- 
tion than the first (or ordinary) aorist, perfect, ἕο. Very few verbs 
have both forms in any tense; when this occurs, the two forms gen-- 
erally differ in meaning (§ 92, δ). : 


Note 2. The aorist corresponds to the indefinite or historical per- 
fect in Latin, and the Greek perfect corresponds generally to the 
English perfect or to the definite perfect in Latin. 


Note 3. No Greek verb is in use in all these tenses, and the paradigm 
of sag regular verb (§ 96), therefore, includes parts of three different 
verbs. 


§ 92.] TENSE STEMS. 81 


§ 91. There are three numbers, as in nouns, the singu- 
lar, the dual, and the plural. 

In each tense of the indicative, subjunctive, and opta- 
tive, there are three persons in each number, the first, 
the second, and the third; in each tense of the impera- 
tive there are two, the second and the third. 


Notre. The first person dual is the same as the first person plural, ex- 


cept in a very few poetic forms (§ 113, N. 3). This person is therefore 
omitted in the paradigms. 


Tense Stems. 


§ 92. 1. Ina verb which has but one stem, like Avw, the 
stem is the fundamental part which appears in all forms of the 
verb (§ 32, 2). In λύω this fixed part is Av-, which is seen 
equally (though with change in the quantity of v) in Av-o, 
é-At-ov, λύ-σω, ἔλῦ-σα, €E-Ad-Ka, ἐλε-λὕ-κειν, A€-AT-pat, ἐλε-λῦ-μην, 
ἐ-λύ-θην, λῦ-θήσομαι. So in λέγ-ω, πλέκ-ω. | 


2. The stem which is the basis of the present and imper- 
fect, however, is often not the same as the stem which appears 
in some or all of the other tenses. Thus in λείτω (§ 95), we 
find the stem λειπ- in most of the tenses; but in the second 
aorists ἔλιπον and é-Aur-dunv we find the stem λίπ-Ὄ In φαίνω 
(§ 95) we have φαιν- only in the present and imperfect, and a 
stem φἄν- (sometimes in the form ¢y-) as the basis of the 
other tenses. Again, in μανθάνω, learn, we have the stem μᾶθ- 
in ἔμαθον ; and in λαμβάνω, take, we have λᾶβ- in ἔλαβον. (See 
the Catalogue of Verbs.) As these stems Air-, φᾶν-, μᾶθ-, 
λᾶβ-, are simpler and more primitive than λειπ-, φαιν-, pavGar-, 
λαμβαν-, they are called the simple stems of these verbs. 


Notre. The simple stem, or (in verbs like Av-w, A¢y-w) the sin- 
gle stem, is often identical with the root (§ 32, 2, Note); as λῖπ-, 
λᾶβ-, Χυ-, Aey-, wAex-. In other verbs the stem is formed by adding 
a suffix to the root; as in τιμάτω the single stem τιμα- (the same as 
that of the noun τιμή, § 37, 1) is formed from the root τι- by adding 
pa; 80 in φαίνω the simple stem φαν- is itself derived from the root 
ga-. The term simple stem or stem (if-there is but one) denotes the 


6 


82 _INFLECTION. [§ 92. 


simplest form which appears in the conjugation of a verb, whether 
it is the same as the root or not. 


8. The stems of verbs are called vowel stems or consonant 
stems, and the latter are called mute stems (including labial, 
palatal, and lingual stems) or liguid stems, according to their 
final letter. ‘Thus we name the stems of φιλέω (dirc-), λείπω 
(λειπ-, λἵπ-), τρίβω (τρὶβ-), γράφω (ypad-), πλέκω (πλεκ-), 
φεύγω (φευγ-. Piy-), πείθω {πειθ-, πἴθ-), φαίνω (φαιν-, φᾶἄν-), 
στέλλω (στελλ-; στελ-). 

Notre. A verb which has a vowel stem in all its tenses is called 


a pure verb; and one which has a mute stem or a liquid stem in all its 
tenses is called a mute or a liquid verb. 


4. It will be seen by the synopsis (§ 95), that even the sin- 
gle stem Av- appears in several modified forms in different tenses 
of λύω ; as Av-, Avo-, AeAvK-, and λυθε- (OY AvOy-) enlarged to 
λυθησ-. In φαίνω the simple stem φὰν- appears also as ¢dyp-, 
πεφαν-, φανθε- (or φανθη-). pave(y)-, and φανησ-. In λείπω we . 
find λειψ-, λελειπ-2 λειφθε(η)-; and λιπ- is modified in λε-λοιπ-. 
The form of stem which belongs to each tense (or group of 
tenses) is called a tense stem, and the forms of the verb which 
are based upon it constitute a tense system. 


The following tense stems! are distinguished in the Greek 
verb : — 


I. The Present stem, of the present and imperfect of all 
voices ; as Av- in Av-w, €&-Av-ov, λύτ-ομαι, ἐ-λυτόμην ; φαιν- in φαίν-ω, 
ἔφαιν-ον, &c. ; λειπ- in λείπ-ω, ἔλειπ-ον, λείπ-ομαι, &C. 


II. Fhe Future stem, of the future active and middle; as 
Aio-, in Avo-w, λύσ-ομαι ; λειψ- in λείψ-ω, λείψ-ομαι ; Pave- in 
(pave-w) φανῶ, (φανέ-ομαι) φανοῦμαι. The last form (in ε) be- 
longs to liquid stems. 


1 The term tense stem is here used, in conformity with general usage in 
elementary works, to denote the fixed form which (with certain internal 
modifications) is the basis of a tense. Strictly, the present stem of λέγω is 
λεγ- ++ a variable vowel (0 or €) ; the aorist stem of λύω is λυσ- + ἃ OF ε, 
&c.: see § 112, 4. This variable element is not included in the tense stems 
as they are here given. 


J 


§ 92.] TENSE STEMS. ae 


III. The First-Aorist stem, of the aorist active and mid- » 
dle; as λῦσ- in &Avo-a, ἐ-λυσ-ά-μην ; φην- in Epyv-a, ἐ-τφην-άμην. 
The last form (without 7) belongs to liquid stems. 


IV. The Perrect stem, of the perfect, pluperfect, and fu- 
ture perfect. Of this there are four forms: (a) The Perfect- 
Middle stem; as λελῦ- in λέλυ-μαι and ἐλελύ-μην, λελειπ- in 
λέλειμ-μαι and ἐλελείμ-μην (ὃ 16, 3), πεφᾶν- in πέφασ-μαι and 
ἐπεφάσ-μην (8 16,6, N. 4). (6) The Perfect-Active stem; as 
λελῦ-κ- in λέλυκ-α and ἐ-λελύκ-ειν, πεφαν-κ- (ὃ 16, 5) in πέφαγ-κα 
and ἐ-πεφάγ-κειν. (6) The Future-Perfect stem; as λελῦ-σ- in 
λελύσ-ομαι, λελειψ- in λελείψτομαι. (4) The Second-Perfect stem ; - 
as λελοιπ- in λέλοιπ-α and ἐ-λελοίπ-ειν, πεφην- in πέφην-α and 
ἐ-πεφήν-ειν. 


V. The Seconp-Aorist stem, of the second aorist active and 
middle ; as Atw- in ἔλιπον and ἐ-λιπ-όμην. 


VI. The Fist Passrve stem, of the first aorist and the first 
future passive ; as (a) λυθε- (or AvOy-) in ἐετλύθη-ν and (λυθέω) 
λυθῶ (subj.), λειφθε(η)- in ἐλείφθη-ν and (λειφθέ-ω) λειφθῶ 
(subj.), φανθε(η)- in ἐφάνθη-ν and (davbé-w) φανθῶ (subj.) ; 
(ὁ) rvOyo- in λυθήσ-ομαι, λειφθησ- in λειφθήσ-ομαι. 


VII. The Sreconp Passtve stem, of the second aorist and 
the second future passive; as (a) φᾶνε(η) in ἐφάνη-ν and 
(φανέ-ω) φανῶ (subj.) ; (Ὁ) φανησ- in φανήσ-ομαι. 

Note. The three verbs λύω, λείπω, and φαίνω, from which the preced- 


ing examples are taken, give a general idea of the most common forms which 
the seven tense stems assume. 


5. The principal parts of a Greek verb (by giving which we 
describe the verb) are the first person singular of the present, ° 
future, first aorist, and (first or second) perfect indicative 
active, the perfect and (first or second) aorist indicative pas- 
sive, with the second aorist Sainte or middle) when one 
occurs. i.g. 

Ava, λύσω, ἔλῦσα, MAVxa, AEAB par: ἐλύθην. 

Λείπω, λείψω, λέλοιπα, λέλειμμαι, ἐλείφθην, ἔλιπον. 

᾿ Paiva, Hava, ἔφηνα, πέφαγκα (and πέφηνα), πέφασμαι, ἐφάνθην (and 
ἐφάνην). 


84 INFLECTION. , [§ 98. 


Πράσσω, do, πράξω, ἔπραξα, πέπρᾶχα (2 Ὁ: πέπρᾶγα); πέπραγμαι, 
ἐπράχθην. 

Στέλλω, send, στελῶ, ἔστειλα, ἔσταλκα, ἔσταλμαι, ἐστἄλην. 

We thus give every tense system which is in use, with two tenses 
formed from the perfect stem. Verbs with two perfects active, like 
πράσσω, or with two aorists passive, like φαίνω, are very rare. 

6. In deponent verbs the principal parts are the present, 
future, perfect, and aorist (or aorists) indicative. L.9. 

Βούλομαι, wish, βουλήσομαι, βεβούλημαι, ἐβουλήθην. 

Γίγνομαι, become, γενήσομαι, γεγένημαι, ἐγενόμην. 

(Δἰδέομαι) αἰδοῦμαι, respect, αἰδέσομαι, ἤδεσμαι, ἠδέσθην. 

Σκέπτομαι, view, σκέψομαι, ἔσκεμμαι, ἐσκεψάμην. 

we 
Conjugation. 

§ 93. 1. To conjugate a verb is to give all its voices, 

moods, tenses, numbers, and persons in their proper order. 


2. These various parts of the verb are formed as 
follows : — 

(a). By modifications of the stem itself in forming the dif- 
ferent tense stems (8 92, 4). These are explained in §§ 107-111. 

(δ). In all cases, by adding certain syllables to the tense 
stems ; as in λύ-ομεν, λύσ-ετε, λέλυ-ται, λελύκ-ατε. These sylla- 
bles and their composition are explained in §§ 112-117. 

(c). In the secondary tenses of the indicative, by also pre- 
fixing « to the tense stem (if this begins with a consonant), or 
lengthening its initial vowel (if it begins with a short vowel) ; 
as in ἔλυ-ον, ἔλυσ-ε, é-pyv-aro, ἐ-λελύκ-ειν, ANC iN HKov-ov, ἤκουσ-α, 
imperfect and aorist of ἀκούω, to hear. This prefix or length- 
ening does not belong to the tense stem, but disappears in the 
dependent moods and in the participle. | 


A prefix, seen in λε- of λέλυκα and λέλειμμαι, in πε- Of πέ- 
φασμαι, and ε of ἔσταλμαι (ὃ 97, 4), for which a lengthening of 
the initial vowel is found in ἤλλαγμαι (ἀλλαγ-) from ἀλλάσσω 
(§ 97, 4), belongs to the perfect tense stem, and remains in — 
all the moods and in the participle. 


These prefixes and lengthenings (2), called augment (increase), 
are explained in 88 99-106. 


§ 95.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN a. 85 


3. There are two principal forms of conjugation of 
Greek verbs, that of verbs in ὦ and that of verbs 
‘Im μι. 


Nore. Verbs in μὲ forma small class, compared with those in w, and are 
distinguished in their inflection almost exclusively in the-present and second- 
aorist systems, in the other systems agreeing with verbs in w. The conju- 
gation of the latter is therefore given first, and under this head are stated 
the general principles which belong equally to both conjugations. 


CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN . 


§ 94. The present stem of a verb in w is found by drop- 
ping ὦ of the present indicative active, or ομαι of the present 
indicative middle ; as λύω (Av-), λείπω (λειπ-), πράσσω (πρασσ-) ; 


βούλομαι (Bovd-), γίγνομαι (γιγν-). 


Notre. The simple stem, when there is one distinct from the present 
stem, must be learnt by observation and by familiarity with the principles 
upon which the present stem is formed from the simple stem (§ 108). 


§ 95. 1. The following synopses include : — 
I. All the tenses of Avw, loose. 


II. All the tenses of λείπω, leave; the second perfect and 
pluperfect active and the second aorist active and middle be- 
ing in heavy-faced type. 


‘II. All the tenses of φαίνω, show ; the future. and aorist 
active and middle and the second aorist and second future 
passive being in heavy-faced type. 


The synopsis of "λύω, with the forms in heavier type in the synop- 
ses of λείπω and daive, will thus show the full conjugation of the verb 
in w; and only these forms are inflected in ὃ 96. For the peculiar 
inflection of the perfect and pluperfect middle and passive of verbs 
with consonant stems, see § 97. 


Note. The paradigms in § 96 include the perfect imperative active of 
how, λείπω, and φαίνω, although it is hardly possible that this tense can 
actually have been formed in any of these verbs. As it occurs, however, in 
some verbs (§ 118, 2, Note), it is given here to complete the illustration of 
the forms. For the perfect subjunctive and optative active, which are 
more common in periphrastic forms, see § 118, 2. 

For the quantity of v in λύω, see § 109, 1, N. 1. 


Tense-stem. 


I. \w- 


OS “hay 
IL λῦσ- 


TY, (Ὁ) λελῦ-κ- 


I. dv- 


II. λῦσ- 
III. λῦσ- 


IV. (a) λελῦ- 


he, 
IV. (a) λελὺῦ- 


IV. (ὃ λελῦ-σ- 
VI. (@) λύθε(η)- 
VI. (Ὁ) λύθη-σ- 


| 


| 


Perfect and Pluperfect 


Future Perfect λελύσομαι 


Aorist 


Future 


ἐλύθην 


λυθήσομαι 


; INFLECTION. [8 95. 
I. Avo. 
ACTIVE VOICE. 
Indicative. Subjunctive. 
Present Avo Avo 
Imperfect ἔλυον΄ 
Future τ λύσω 
Aorist Avra λύσω 
Perfect λέλυκα Aah Sites: τος 
λελυκὼς ὦ 

Pluperfect ἐλελύκειν᾽ 

MIDDLE VOICE. 
Present λύομαι λύωμαι 
Imperfect ἐλνόμην 
Future λύσομαι 
Aorist ἐλυσάμην λύσωμαι 
Perfect λέλυμαι λελυμένος ὦ 
Pluperfect ᾿ἐλελύμην 

PASSIVE VOICE, 
Present and Imperfect Same as in Middle. 


λυθῶ (for λυθέω) 


8 95.] 


Ορίέαϊίῥυθ. 
λύοιμι 


λύσοιμι 


λύσαιμι 


λελύκοιμν OF 
λελυκὼς εἴην 


λυοίμην 


λυσοίμην 
λυσαίμην 
λελυμένος εἴην 


λελυσοίμην 
λυθείην 


λυθησοίμην 


CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN ὦ. 


I. λύω. 
- ACTIVE VOICE. 


Infinitive. 


Imperative, 

Ate λύειν 
λύσειν 

λῦσον λῦσαι 


[λέλυκε, 895,1, Ν.1 λελυκέναι 


MIDDLE VOICE. 


λύου λύεσθαι 
λύσεσθαι 

λῦσαι λύσασθαι 

λέλυσο λελύσθαι 


PASSIVE VOICE. 


edrtorer Bar 
λυθῆναι 
λυθήσεσθαι 


λύθητι 


87 


Participle. 
λύων 


λύσων 


λύσας 
λελυκώς 


λυσόμενος 


χυνδιένον 


λελυσόμενος 
λυθείς 
λυθησόμενος 


88 


II. 
ΙΝ. 


VI. 


Tense-stem. 


. Xeur “7 


. λειψ- 


for λειπ-σ- 


. [λειψ-} 


. (α) λελοίὶπ- 


(§ 109, 3) 


Xur- 


. λειπ- 


λειψ- 


(@) λελειπ- 
As Passive. 


Xur- 


. Aeurr- 
. (α) λελειπ- 


. (c) λελειψ- 
for λελειπ-σ- 


INFLECTION. 


II. λείπω (λυιπ-). 


ACTIVE VOICE, 


Present 
Imperfect 


Future 
Aorist 


2 Perfect 


Indicative, 


λείπω 
ἔλειπον 


λείψω 
[ἔλειψα, &e.] 


λέλοιπα 


2 Pluperfect ἐλελοίπειν 


2 Aorist 


ἔλιπον 


MIDDLE VOICE. 


Present 
Imperfect 


Future 


Perfect 
Pluperfect 


2 Aorist 


PASSIVE VOICE. 


Present and Imperfect 
Perfect and Pluperfect 


Fut. Perf. 


) λειφθε(ὴη)- ; 
“ 1 mig Aorist 


VI. (ὃ) λειφθη-σ- Future 


λείπομαι 
ἐλειπόμην 


λείψομαι 


[8 95. 


Subjunctive. 
λείπω 


Not in good use. 


λελοίπω or 
λελοιπὼς ὦ 


λίπω 


λείπωμαι 


λέλειμμαι (§ 16, 8) λελειμμένος ὦ 


ἐλελείμμην 


ἐλιπόμην 


λελείψομαι 


ἐλείφθην 


λειφθήσομαι 


λίπωμαι 


ἰ Same as in Middle. 


λειφθῶ (for λειφθέω) 


8 95.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN Q. 


ΤΙ. λείπω (Aur-). 


ACTIVE VOICE. 


89 


Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 
λείποιμι ᾿ λεῖπε λείπειν λείπων 
λείψοιμι λείψειν, λείψων 
λελοίποιμι or [ςλέλοιπε, § 95, N.] λελοιπέναι λελοιπώς 
λελοιπὼς εἴην 
λίποιμυ λίπε λιπεῖν λιπών 
MIDDLE VOICE. 
λειποίμην λείπου λείπεσθαι λειπόμενος 
λειψοίμην λείψεσθαι λειψόμενος 
λελειμμένος εἴην λέλειψο λελεῖφθαι (8 16, 1& 4) λελειμμένος 
λιποίμην λιποῦ ᾿ λιπέσθαι λιπόμενος 
PASSIVE VOICE. 
λελειψοίμην λελείψεσθαι λελειψόμενος 
λειφθείην λείφθητι. λειφθῆναι λειφθείς 
λειφθησοΐμην λειφθήσεσθαι λειφθησόμενος 


90 ᾿ς INFLECTION. [8 95. 


III. φαίνω (pav-). 


ACTIVE VOICE. 


Tense-stem. Indicative. Subjunctive. 
ee eee tee. eras 
11. dave- Future (φᾶνέω) pave 
Ill. φην- Aorist ἔφηνα φήνω 


ἐφά 
IV. (Ὁ) πεφαγκ- for { Perfect πέφαγκα Peeled. 


mepav-k-($16,5) ( Pluperfect ἐπεφάγκειν 


IV. (ὦ) πέφην- 2 Perfect πέφηνα Fela 
(§ 109, 3) 2 Pluperf. ἐπεφήνειν 
MIDDLE VOICE. 
ὶ Present ᾧφαίνομαι φαίνωμαι 
ΠΥ Imperfect ἐφαινόμην 
Il. φᾶνε- Future (φὰνέομαι) φανοῦμαν 
III. φην- Aorist ἐφηνάμην φήνωμαι 
f Perfect πσπέφασμαι πεφασμένος ὦ 
ΟΝ Pluperfect ἐπεφάσμην 
PASSIVE VOICE. 
I. φαυ- Present and Imperfect 5 a eat 
IV. (a) πεῴφαν- Perfect and Pluperfect een eee : 
VI. @) φανθε(- Aorist ἐφάνθην φανθῶ (for φανθέω) 
VI. (0) Future Wanting. 
VII. (a) pave(n)- 2 Aorist ἐφάνην φανῶ (for φανέω) 


VII. (Ὁ) φανησ- 2 Future φανήσομαι 


8 95.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN ὦ. 91 
III. φαίνω (φαν-). , 
ACTIVE VOICE. ἢ 
Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. 
φαίνοιμι φαῖνε φαίνειν 
(φανέοιμι) φανοῖμι (φανέειν) φανεῖν (φανέων) φανῶν 
or (φανεοίην) φανοίην 
φήναιμι φῆνον φῆναι φήνας 
πεφάγκοιμι or [πέφαγκε, §95, N.] πεφαγκέναι πεφαγκώς 
πεφαγκὼς εἴην 
[πέφηνε, 8 95, Ν.] πεφηνέναι πεφηνώς 


πεφήνοιμι ΟΥ 
πεφηνὼς εἴην 


MIDDLE VOICE. 


φαινοίμην φαίνου φαίνεσθαι PTR 
ἐεσθ 
(φανεοίμην) φανοίμην ὁ πονέ νον become 
φηναίμην φῆναι φήνασθαι φηνάμενος 
πεφασμένος εἴην πέφανσο πεφάνθαι (8 16, 4) πεφασμένος 
PASSIVE VOICE. 

φανθεΐην φάνθητι φανθῆναι pavbels 
φανείην φάνηθι φανῆναι φανείς 
φανησοίμην φανήσεσθαι φανησόμενος 


92 INFLECTION. [8 95. 


2. The following table shows the meaning of each tense of 
Avw, λείπω, and φαίνω, in the indicative, imperative, infinitive, 
and participle of the. active voice : — 


I. Avo. 
Indicative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 
Pres. I loose oram Loose thou. To loose or to be Loosing. 
. loosing. loosing. 
Imp. I loosed or 
was loosing. 
Fut. J shall loose. To be about to About to loose. 
loose. 
Aor. Iloosed. Loose thou. To loose or to Having loosed 
(§ 202, 1.) have loosed. or loosing. 


᾿ς Perf. Ihaveloosed. (ὃ 118, 2, Ν.) Tohave loosed. Having loosed. 
Plup. I had loosed. | . 


The middle of Avw commonly means to release for one’s self, or 
to release some one belonging to one’s self, hence to ransom (a captive) 
or to deliver (one’s friends from danger). See § 199, 3. 

In the passive the tenses are changed merely to suit that voice; 
as I am loosed, I was loosed, I shall be loosed, I have been loosed, &c. 
The future perfect passive means I shall have been loosed (i.e. before 
some future event referred to). 


II. Λείπω. 
ACTIVE VOICE. 
Indicative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 

Pres. Jileave oram Leave thou. To leave or to Leaving. 

leaving. be leaving. 
Imperf. J left or was 

leaving. 
Fut. shall leave. To be about to About to leave. 

leave. . 


2 Perf. 7 have left (some- (ὃ 118, 2, Ν.) 70 have left. . Having left. 
times I have 


Jailed or am 

wanting). 
2 Plup. 1 had left. 
2 Aor. J left. Leave thou. Toleaveorto Having left or 


(§ 202, 1.) have left. leaving. 


The passive of λείπω is used in all tenses, with the meanings 
I am lefi, I was left, I have been left, I had been left, I shall have been 
lef, 1 was left, 1 shall be left. It also means J am inferior (left behind). 


TENSES. 93 


§ 95.] 


The middle of λείπω means properly to remain (leave one’s self), in 
which sense it differs little (or not at all) from the passive. But the 
2nd.aor. ἐλιπόμην often means J left for myself (as a memorial or monu- 
ment): so with the present and future middle in composition. Ἔλιε- 
πόμην in Homer sometimes means J was left behind or was inferior, 


like the passive. 


Ill. Φαίνω. 


Indicative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 
Pres. J show or am Show thou. To show. Showing. 
showing. 
Imperf. I showed or was 
showing. 
Fut. 1 shall show. To be about to About to show. 
show. 
Aor. I showed. Show thou. To show or to Having shown 
(§ 202, 1.) have shown. or showing. 
1 Perf. TI have shown. (8 118, 2, N.) To have shown. Having shown. 
1 Plup. I had shown. : 
2 Perf. I haveappeared. (§118,2,N.) To have ap- Having ap- 
peared. peared. 
2 Plup. I had appeared. 


The passive of φαίνω means properly to be shown or made evident ; 
the middle, to appear (show one’s self). But these two meanings are 
often hard to distinguish, and it is therefore sometimes impossible 
to decide whether φαίνομαι, πέφασμαι, &c. are passive or middle. The 
2nd fut. pass. φανήσομαι, I shall appear or be shown, does not differ 
in sense from the fut. mid. φανοῦμαι; but ἐφάνθην is generally pas- 
sive, I was shown, while ἐφάνην is I appeared. ‘The aor. mid. ἐφηνά- 
pnp is transitive, 7 showed ; it is rare and poetic in the simple form, 
but ἀπεφηνάμην is common in the meaning J declared. 


Notre. The meaning of the various forms of the subjunctive 
and optative cannot be fully understood until the constructions are 
explained in the Syntax. But the following examples will make 
them clearer than a mere translation of the forms, some of which 
(e.g. the future optative) cannot be used alone: — 

Λύωμεν (or λύσωμεν) αὐτόν, let us loose him, μὴ λύσης αὐτόν, do not 
loose him. ᾿Ἐὰν λύω (or λύσω) αὐτὸν, χαιρήσει, if 1 (shull) loose him, 
he will rejoice. "Ἔρχομαι, ἵνα αὐτὸν λύω (or λύσω), J am coming that I 
may loose him. Ete λύοιμι (or λύσαιμι) αὐτόν, O that I may loose him. 
Εἰ λύοιμε (Or λύσαιμι) αὐτὸν, χαίροι ἄν, if 1 should loose him, he would 
rejoice. Ἦλθον ἵνα αὐτὸν λύοιμι (or λύσαιμι), L came that I might loose 
him. Eimov ὅτι αὐτὸν λύοιμι, 1 said that I was loosing him; εἶπον ὅτι 
αὐτὸν λύσαιμι, I said that I had loosed him} εἶπον ὅτι αὐτὸν λύσοιμι, 1 
said that would loose him. For the difference between the present 
and aorist in these moods, see § 202, 1; for the perfect, see § 202, 2. 


94 


INFLECTION. 


[§ 96. 


§ 96. Ave in all its tenses, and λείπσω and daiva in 


Indicative. 


Avo 
Aves 
λύει 
λύετον 
λύετον 


λύομεν. 


. “λύετε 


λύουσι 


ἔλυον 
ἔλυες 
ἔλυε 


ἐλύετον 
ἐλνέτην 


ἐλύομεν 
ἐλύετε 


ἔλνυον 


λύσω 
λύσεις 
λύσει 


λύσετον 
λύσετον 


λύσομεν 


λύσετε 
λύσουσι 


PRESENT. 


Subjunctive. 


Avo 
λύῃ 
λύῃ 
λύητον 
λύητον 


λύωμεν 
λύητε 
λύωσι 


IMPERFECT. 


FUTURE. 


I. λύω (λυ), 
Active 


Optative. 


Adore 
λύοις ’ 
λύοι 


λύοιτον 
λυοίτην 


λύοιμεν 
λύοιτε 
λύοιεν 


λύσοιμι 
λύσοι 
λύσοιτον 


λυσοίτην 
λύσοιμεν 


λύσοιτε 
λύσοιεν 


8 96.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN Ω. 95 


the tenses above mentioned (§ 95), are thus inflected : — 


to loose. 
Voice. 
PRESENT. 
Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 
s Ἢ Ade λύειν λύων, λύουσα, 
"13. λνέτω λῦον (8 68) 
2. λύετον 
* 3. Avérov 
Ῥ 3 λύετε 
"U3. λνέτωσαν 
or λνυόντων 
FUTURE. 
λύσειν λύσων, λύσουσα, 


λῦσον (8 68) 


96 


INFLECTION. [8 96. 
Active Voice of 
AORIST. | 
Indicative. Subjunetive. Optative. 
ἔλυσα λύσω λύσαιμι 
ἔλυσας λύσῃς λύσαις, λύσειας 
ἔλυσε λύσῃ λύσαι, λύσειε 
ἐλύσατον λύσητον λύσαιτον 
ἐλυσάτην λύσητον λυσαίτην 
ἐλύσαμεν λύσωμεν «λύσαιμεν 
ἐλύσατε λύσητε λύσαιτε 
ἔλυσαν λύσωσι λύσαιεν, λύσειαν 
PERFECT. 
λέλυκα λελύκω (8 9ὅ,1, N.) λελύκοιμι (§95, 1,N.) 
λέλυκας᾽ λελύκῃς λελύκοις 
λέλυκε λελύκῃ λελύκοι 
λελύκατον λελύκητον λελύκοιτον 
λελύκατον λελύκητον. λελυκοίτην 
λελύκαμεν λελύκωμεν λελύκοιμεν 
λελύκατε λελύκητε λελύκοιτε 
λελύκασι λελύκωσι λελύκοιεν 
PLUPERFECT. - 
ἐλελύκειν 
ἐλελύκεις 
ἐλελυκει 
ἐλελύκειτον 
ἐλελυκείτην 
ἐλελύκειμεν 
ἐλελύκειτε 
ἐλελύκεσαν 


or ἐλελύκεισαν 


8 96.] 


CONJUGATION OF VERBS 


λύω (continued), 


2. 
8. ἐν 


AORIST. 


Imperative. Infinitive, 
λῦσον λῦσαι 


λυσάτω 


λύσάτον 
λυσάτων 
λύσατε 
λυσάτωσαν 

or λυσάντων 


PERFECT. 


λέλυκε ($95, 1, N.) λελυκέναι 
λελυκέτω 


λελύκετον 
λελυκέτων 


λελύκετε 
λελυκέτωσαν 


an ‘ 


IN 2. 97 


Participle. 


λύσας, λύσασα, 
λῦσαν (§ 68) 


λελυκώς, λελυκυΐα, 
λελυκός (8 68) 


98 


ΙΝ FLECTION i 
PRESENT. 
Indicative. Subjwnetive. 
λύομαι λύωμαι 
λύῃ, λύει λύῃ 
λύεταν λύηται 
λύεσθον λύησθον 
λύεσθον λύησθον 
λυόμεθα λυώμεθα 
λύεσθε λύησθε 
λύονται λύωνται 
IMPERFECT. 
ἐλυόμην 
ἐλύου 
ἐλύετο 
ἐλύεσθον 
ἐλυέσθην 
ἐλνόμεθα 
ἐλύεσθε 
ἐλύοντο 
FUTURE. 
λύσομαι 
λύσῃ, λύσει 
λύσεται 
λύσεσθον 
λύσεσθον 
λυσόμεθα 
λύσεσθε 
λύσονται 


[$ 96. 


λύω 


Middle 


Optative. 


Avoluny 
λύοιο 
λύοιτο 


λύοισϑον 


λνοίσθην 


λυοίμεθα 
λύοισθε 
λύοιντο 


λυσοίμην 
λύσοιο 
λύσοιτο 


λύσοισθον 
λυσοίσθην 


λυσοίμεθα 
λύσοισθε 
λύσοιντο 


8 96.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN 9. 99 


(continued), 
Voice. : 
PRESENT. 
Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 
5, ἱ 2. λύου λύεσθαι λυόμενος, λυομένη, 
3. λνέσθω λυόμενον (§ 62, 3.) 
ἢ {3 λύεσθον 
4 8, λυέσθων 
1. λύεσθε | 
P.42. Avérbocav d 
- or λυέσθων 
FUTURE. 


λύσεσθαι ς λυσόμενος, -Ἤ; -ον 
: (§ 62, 3.) 


100 


Indicative. 


ἐλυσάμην 
ἐλύσω 
ἐλύσατο 


ἐλύσασθον 
ἐλυσάσθην 


ἐλυσάμεθα 
ἐλύσασθε 
ἐλύσαντο 


λέλυμαι 
λέλυσαι 
λέλνται 


λέλυσθον 
λέλυσθον 


λελύμεθα 
λέλυσθε 
λέλυνται 


ἐλελύμην 
ἐλέλυσο 
ἐλέλυτο 


ἐλέλυσθον 
ἐλελύσθην 


ἐλελύμεθα 
ἐλέλυσθε 
ἐλέλυντο 


INFLECTION, 


AORIST. 


Subjunctive. 


λύσωμαι 
λύσῃ 
λύσηται 
λύσησθον 
λύσησθον 
λυσώμεθα 


λύσησθε 
λύσωνται 


PERFECT. 


λελυμένος ὦ 
λελυμένος ἧς 
λελυμένος ἢ 


λελυμένω ἦτον 
λελυμένω ἦτον 


λελυμένοι ὦμεν 
λελυμένοι Fre 
λελυμένοι ὦσι 


PLUPERFECT. 


[ξ 96. 
λύω 


Middle 


Optative. - 


λυσαίμην 
λύσαιο 
λύσαιτο 


λύσαισθον 
λυσαίσθην 


λυσαίμεθα 
λύσαισθε 
λύσαιντο 


λελυμένος εἴην 
λελυμένος εἴης 
λελυμένος εἴη 


λελυμένω εἴητον or εἶτον 
λελυμένω εἰήτην or εἴτην 


λελυμένοι εἴημεν or elev 
λελυμένοι εἴητε or etre 
λελυμένοι εἴησαν or εἶεν 


§ 96.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN 2. 101 


(continued). 
Voice. 
AORIST. 
Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 
2. λῦσαι λύσασθαι λυσάμενος, -Ἡ, τὸν 
5, 8, λυσάσθω ες (δ 62, 3) 
2. λύσασθον 
D 3. λυσάσθων 
2. λύσασθε 
Bs 3 λωυσάσθωσαν 
or λυσάσθων 
PERFECT, 
P 3 2. λέλυσο λελύσθαι λελνυ , "Ἤ, τον 
"23. λελύσθω ας (8 62, 8) 
D i 2. λέλυσθον 
"48, λελύσθων 


3. λελύσθωσαν ~ 


2. λέλυσθε 
P. 
or λελύσθων 


102 


INFLECTION. 


Present, 


FUTURE PERFECT. 


Indicative. Subjunctive. 
λελύσομαι 
. λελύσῃ, λελύσει 
λελύσεται 
λελύσεσθον 
λελύσεσθον 
λελυσόμεθα 
λελύσεσθε 
λελύσονται 
AORIST. 
ἐλύθην λυθῶ 
ἐλύθης λυθῇς 
ἐλύθη λυθῇ 
ἐλύθητον λυθῆτον 
ἐλυθήτην ᾿ λυθῆτον 
ἐλύθημεν λυθῶμεν 
ἐλύθητε λυθῆτε 
ἐλύθησαν λυθῶσι 
FUTURE. 
λυθήσομαι 
λυθήσῃ, λυθήσει 
λυθήσεται 
λυθήσεσθον 
λυθήσεσθον 
λυθησόμεθα 
λυθήσεσθε 
λυθήσονται 


[§ 96. 
Ato 
Passive 


Imperfect, Perfect, and 


Optative. 


λελυσοίμην 
λελύσοιο 
λελύσοιτο 


λελύσοισθον 
λελυσοίσθην 


λελυσοίμεθα 
λελύσοισθε 
λελύσοιντο 


λυθείην 
λυθείης 
λυθείη 


λυθείητον, λυθεῖτον 
λυθειήτην, λυθείτην 


λυθείημεν, λυθεῖμεν 
λυθείητε, λυθεῖτε 
λυθείησαν, λυθεῖεν 


λυθησοίμην 
λυθήσοιο 


λυθήσοιτο 


λυθήσοισθον 
λυθησοίσθην \ 
λυθησοίμεθα 
λυθήσοισθε 
λυθήσοιντο 


§ 96.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN ἢ, . 109. 


(continued), 
Voice. 


Pluperfect Passive, same as Middle. 


FUTURE PERFECT. 


Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 
λελύσεσθαι λελυσόμενος, -ἢ, -ον 
(§ 62, 3) 
AORIST. 
s ἷ 2. λύθητι λυθῆναι λυθείς, λυθεῖσα, λυθέν 
“U3. λυθήτω - (8 68) 
D ἐπ λύθητον 
"U3. λυθήτων 
"U3. λυθήτωσαν / 
or λυθέντων 
FUTURE. 
λυθήσεσθαι λυθησόμενος, -ἢ, -ον 


(§ 62, 3) 


104 


Indicative. 


λέλοιπα 
λέλοιπας 
λέλοιπε 


λελοίπατον 
8. λελοίπατον 


λελοίπαμεν 
λελοίπατε 
λελοίπασι 


ἐλελοίπειν 
ἐλελοίπεις 
ἐλελοίπει 


. ἐλελοίπειτον 
ἐλελοιπείτην 


ἐλελοίπειμεν 
ἐλελοίπειτε 
ἐλελοίπεσαν 


ΓΝΕΙΕΟΤΊΟΝ, 


SECOND PERFECT. 


Subjunctive. 


λελοίπω 
λελοίπῃς 
λελοίπῃ 


λελοίπητον 
λελοίπητον 


λελοίπωμεν 
λελοίπητε 
λελοίπωσι 


SECOND PLUPERFECT. 


or ἐλελοίπεισαν 


ἔλιπον 
ἔλιπες 
ἔλιπε 


ἐλίπετον 
ἐλιπέτην 


ἐλίπομεν 
ἐλίπετε 
ἔλυπον 


SECOND AORIST. 


λίπω 
λίπῃς 
λίπῃ 
λίπητον 
λίπητον 


λίπωμεν 
λίπητε 
λίπωσι 


[8 96. 
IL λείπω 


Active 


Optative, 


λελοίποιμι 
λελοίποις 
λελοίποι 


λελοίποιτον 
λελοιποίτην 


λελοίποιμεν 
λελοίποιτε 
λελοίποιεν 


λίποιμι 
λίποις ᾿ 
λίποι 


λίπουτον 
λιποίτην 


λίποιμεν 
λίποιτε 
λίποιεν 


§ 96.} CONJUGATION OF VERBS ΙΝ Q. 105 


(rca j, to leave. 


Voice. 
SECOND PERFECT. 


Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 


λέλοιπε ᾿ λελοιπέναι λελοιπώς, λελοιπυῖα, 
λελοιπέτω λελοιπός (8 68) 


λελοιπέτων 


λελοίπετε 


2 
3 
D. 2. ‘Navobreroy 
3 
2 
8, λελοιπέτωσαν 


SECOND AORIST. 


S. Ἷ 2. λίπε λιπεῖν λιπών, λιποῦσα, λιπόν 
8. λιπέτω (8 68) 
D + λίπετον . 
"U3. λιπέτων 
P. 2; λίπετε 


8. λιπέτωσαν 
or λιπόντων 


INFLECTION. 


. (pavéere) 


φανεῖτε 


φανοῦσι 


106 [8 96. 
as λείπω 
Middle 
SECOND AORIST. 
Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. 
( 1. ἐλιπόμην λίπωμαιν λιποίμην 
5. i ἐλίπου λίπῃ λίποιο 
8, ἐλίπετο λίπηται λίποιτο 
Ὁ. (2. ἐλίπεσθον λίπησθον λίποισθον 
15 ἐλιπέσθην λίπησθον λιποίσθην 
Ἱ. ἐλιπόμεθα λιπώμεθα λιποίμεθα. 
P. 42. ἐλίπεσθε λίπησθε λίποισθε 
8, ἐλίποντο λίπωνται λίποιντο 
ae Stl, datye 
Active 
FUTURE. 
Indicutive. Optative. 
1. (davéw) φανῶ (φανέοιμι) - φανοῖμι, or (φανεοίην φανοίην 
8. «2. (φανέει) φφανεῖς (φανέοιὉ) φανοῖς, οἵ (φανεοίη5) φανοίης 
8. (φανέε) φανεῖ (pavéor) φανοῖ, or (φανεοίη͵Ώ φανοίη 
D (pavéerov) φανεῖτον (pavéotrov) avotrov, or (φανεοίητον) φανοίητον 
"U3. (φανέετον) φανεῖτον (φανεοίτην) φανοίτην, or (φανεοιήτην) φανοιήτην 
. (φανέομεν) φανοῦμεν (φανέοιμεν) φανοῖμεν, or (φανεοίημεν) φανοίημεν 


(φανέοιτε) φανοῖτε, or (φανεοίητε) φανοίητε 
(φανέοιεν) φανοῖεν, or (φανεοίησαν) φανοίησαν 


; (φανέουσὴ 


Indicative. 


ἔφηνα 
ἔφηνας 
ἔφηνε 
ἐφήνατον 
ἐφηνάτην 


ἐφήναμεν 
ἐφήνατε 


ἔφηναν 


AORIST. 

Subjunctive. Optative. 
φήνω φήναιμι 
φήνῃς φήναις or φήνειας 
φήνῃ φήναι or φήνειε 
φήνητον φήναιτον 
φήνητον φηναίτην 
φήνωμεν φήναιμεν 
φήνητε φήναιτε 
φήνωσι φήναιεν or φήνειαν 


8 96.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN ©. 107 
(continued). 
Voice. 
SECOND AORIST. 
Imperative. Infinitive. Participle, 
S. ἱ 2, λιποῦ λιπέσθαι λιπόμενος, —y, -ον 
8. λιπέσθω (§ 62, 3) 
D {2 λίπεσθον 
"U3. λιπέσθων 
p. 42 λίπεσθε 
"U3. λιπέσθωσαν 
or λιπέσθων 
(pav-), to show. 
Voice. 
FUTURE. 
Infinitive. Participle. 
(pavéew) φανεῖν (gavéwy) φανῶν 
(§ 69) 
AORIST. 
Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 
8. {* φῆνον φῆναι φήνας, φήνασα, φῆναν 
8. φηνάτω (8 68) 
D. | 2. φήνατον 
8. φηνάτων 
Ρ. ἣν φήνατε 
8, φηνάτωσαν 


or φηνάντων 


.108 INFLECTION. § 96. 
φαίνω 
Middie 
FUTURE. : 
Indicative. Optative. 
1. (φανέομαι) φανοῦμαι (φανεοίμην) φανοίμην 
S. 2 (pavén, pavéer) φανῇ, φανεῖ (pavéowo) φανοῖο 
3. (φανέεται) φανεῖται (φανέοιτο)͵ φανοῖτο 
Ὁ. § 2 (φανέεσθον) φανεῖσθον (φανέοισθον) φανοῖσθον 
: ; 3. (pavéecOov) φανεῖσθον (φανεοίσθην) φανοίσθην 
1. (φανεόμεθα) φανούμεθα (φανεοίμεθα) φανοίμεθα 
Ῥ, Ἢ (φανέεσθε) φανεῖσθε (φανέοισθε) φανοῖσθε 
8. (φανέοντα) φανοῦνται (pavéowro) φανοῖντο 
AORIST. 
Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. 
1, ἐφηνάμην φήνωμαι φηναίμην 
8.42. ἐφήνω φήνῃ φήναιο 
8. ἐφήνατο φήνηται φήναιτο 
D 3 2. ἐφήνασθον φήνησθον φήναισθον 
"23. ἐφηνάσθην φήνησθον φηναίσθην 
A; ἐφηνάμεθα φηνώμεθα φηναίμεθα 
r. ς ἐφήνασθε φήνησθε φήναισθε 
8. ἐφήναντο φήνωνται φήναιντο 
4 Passive 
SECOND AORIST. 
1, ἐφάνην φανῶ φανείην 
5. : ἐφάνης φανῇς φανείης 
8. ἐφάνη φανῇ φανείη 
D / 2. ἐφάνητον φανῆτον φανείητον or φανεῖτον 
"U3. ἐφανήτην φανῆτον φανειήτην or φανείτην 
1, ἐφάνημεν φανῶμεν φανείημεν or φανεῖμεν 
P.42. ἐφάνητε φανῆτε φανείητε or φανεῖτε 
ὃ. ἐφάνησαν φανῶσι φανείησαν or φανεῖεν 


§ 96.1 CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN Ω, 109 


(continued). 
Voice. 
FUTURE. 
Infinitive. Participle. 
(φανέεσθαι) φανεῖσθαι ; (φανεόμενος) φανούμενος, --, -ον 
- § 62, 3) 
Ὁ 
AORIST. 
Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 
Ω, { 9, φῆναι φήνασθαι φηνάμενος, --ἢ, -ον 
3. φηνάσθω (δ 62, 8) 
D. 2. φήνασθον 
3. φηνάσθων 
Ῥ, ; 2. φήνασθε 
3. φηνάσθωσαν 
or φηνάσθων 
Voice, 
SECOND AORIST. 
g. ἱ 2. φάνηθι φανῆναι φανείς, φανεῖσα, φανέν 
5. τω ο΄ (8608) 
D. ; 3. φάνητον 
3. φανήτων 
Ῥ, 13 φάνητε 
9. φανήτωσαν 


or φανέντων 


110 INFLECTION. [8 96. 


: φαίνω (continued). 
SECOND FUTURE PASSIVE. 
Indicative. Optative. Infinitive. Participle. 
4: φανήσομαι φανησοίμην φανήσεσθαι φανησόμενος, 
5. “2. φανήσῃ, φανήσει φανήσοιο =n, -ον (§ 62, 8) 
3. φανήσεται φανήσοιτο 


D φανήσεσθον φανήσοισθον 
"23. φανήσεσθον φανησοίσθην 


1. φανησόμεθα φανησοίμεθα a 
P. “2. φανήσεσθε φανήσοισθε 
3. φανήσονται φανήσοιντο 


Note 1. The uncontracted forms of the future active and middle 
of φαίνω, enclosed in (_ ) above, and of other futures with liquid 
stems, are not Attic, but are found in Homer and Herodotus. So 
with some of the uncontracted forms of the aorist subjunctive passive 
in ew, &c. 


Nore 2. The tenses of λείπω and φαίνω which are not inflected 
above follow the corresponding tenses of Avw ; except the perfect 
and pluperfect middle, for which see ὃ 97. Λέλειμ-μαι is inflected 
like τέτριμ-μαι (8 97, 3), and πέφασ-μαι is inflected in § 97, 4. 


Note 8. Some of the dissyllabic forms of λύω do not show the 
accent so well as corresponding forms with three or more syllables. 
The correct accent will be seen in the following forms of κωλύω, to 
hinder : — 


Pres. Imp. Act. Aor. Opt. Act. Aor. Imp. Act. Aor. Imp. Mid. 


Kove κωλύσαιμι κώλυσον  κώλυσαι 

κωλυέτω κωλύσαις or -ὕύσειας κωλυσάτω κωλυσάσθω 

κωλύετον κωλύσαι or -ὕσειε: κωλύσατον κωλύσασθον 
&c. &e. &c. &e. 


Aor. Infin. Act. κωλῦσαι. 


The three forms κωλύσαι, κωλῦσαι, and κώλυσαι (λύσαι, λῦσαι, and 
λῦσαι) are distinguished in form only by the accent. See § 26, with 
ΟΝ, 3 (1) ; and § 22, N. 1. 


ΩΣ 


§ 97.] PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT hes , UPN 


Δ 
Perfect and Pluperfect Middle and Passive of Verk 
Consonant Stems, δῷ 

§ 97. 1. In the perfect and pluperfect wailed an 
sive, many euphonic changes (δ 16) occur when a final 
consonant of the stem comes before an initial p, τ, o, or 
σθ of the ending (ὃ 118). 

2. When the stem ends in a consonant, the third person 
plural of these tenses is formed by the perfect participle 
and εἰσί, are, and ἦσαν, were, the present and imperfect | 
of εἰμί, be (δ 127). 

3. These tenses of τρίβω (stem τριβ-), rub, πλέκω 
(πλεκ-), weave, πείθω {(πειθ-), persuade, and στέλλω 
(στελλ-, στελ-, σταλ-), send, are thus inflected : — 7 


Perfect Indicative. 


. τέτριμμαι πέπλεγμαι πέπεισμαι ἔσταλμαι 
S. <2. τέτριψαι πέπλεξαι πέπεισαι ἔσταλσαι 
. τέτριπται πέπλεκται πέπεισται ἔσταλται 
D j . πέτριφθον, πέπλεχθον πέπεισθον ἔσταλθον 
4 8, τέτριφθον πέπλεχθον πέπεισθον ἔσταλθον 
1, τετρίμμεθα πεπλέγμεθα πεπείσμεθα ἐστάλμεθα 
P. +2. τέτριφθε πέπλεχθε πέπεισθε ἔσταλθε 
3. τετριμμένοι πεπλεγμένοι πεπεισμένοι ἐσταλμένοι 
εἰσί εἰσί εἰσί εἰσί 
Perfect Subjunctive and Optative. Po 
Subj. τετριμμένος ὦ πεπλεγμένος ὦ πεπεισμένος ὦ ἐσταλμένος ὦ | 
Opt. ” εἴην 29 εἴην ΠῚ ᾿ εἴην 3) εἴην 
Perfect Imperative. 
5 Ἢ τέτριψο πέπλεξο πέπεισο ἔσταλσο 
᾿ (3. τετρίφθω πεπλέχθω πεπείσθω ἐστάλθω 
D. ἱ 2. τέτριφθον πέπλεχθον πέπεισθον ἔσταλθον 
3. τετρίφθων πεπλέχθων πεπείσθων ἐστάλθων 
Ῥ Ἢ τέτριφθε πέπλεχθε πέπεισθε ἔσταλθε 
᾿ (8. τετρίφθωσαν πεπλέχθωσαν πεπείσθωσαν ἐστάλθωσαν 
or τετρίξφθων οἵ πεπλέχθων or πεπείσθων 


or ἐστάλθων 


112 _INFLECTION. [8 97. 
Ferfect Infinitive and Participle. 
Infinitive τετρῖφθαι πεπλέχθαι πεπεῖσθαι ἐστάλθαι 
Partwiple τετριμμένος πεπλεγμένος πεπεισμένος ἐσταλμένος 
Pluperfect Indicative. 
ο (1. ἐτετρίμμην ἐπεπλέγμην ἐπεπείσμην ἐστάλμην 
S. 4 2. ἐτέτριψο ἐπέπλεξο ἐπέπεισο ἔσταλσο 
8. ἐτέτριπτο ἐπέπλεκτο ἐπέπειστο ἔσταλτο 
ἜΣ ἐτέτριφθον ἐπέπλεχθον ἐπέπεισθον ἔσταλθον 
νυν Atay «+ ἐνῥελέχθήν. 7: ἐκοιείαϑην γ.. ϑδοίμάλθην 
1. ἐτετρίμμεθα ἐπεπλέγμεθα ἐπεπείσμεθα ἐστάλμεθα 
P. ὁ 2. ἐτέτριφθε ἐπέπλεχθε ἐπέπεισθε ἔσταλθε 
4, τετριμμένοι πεπλεγμένοι πεπεισμένοι ἐσταλμένοι 
ἦσαν ἦσαν ἦσαν ἦσαν “«" 


4, ‘The same tenses of (τελέω) τελώ, (stem τελε-, ὃ 109, 
2), finish, φαίνω (pav-), show, ἀλλάσσω (ἀλλᾶγ-), exchange, 
and ἐλέγχω (€Acyyx-), convict, are thus inflected : — 


Perfect Indicative. 


1. reréXeo pat πέφασμαι ἤλλαγμαι ἐλήλεγμας 
8. 2. τετέλεσαι πέφανσαι ἤλλαξαι ἐλήλεγξαι 
᾿ς δ, τετέλεσται πέφανται ἤλλακται ἐλήλεγκται 
7 3 τετέλεσθον πέφανθον ἤλλαχθον ἐλήλεγχθον 
(3. τετέλεσθον πέφανθον ἤλλαχθον ἐλήλεγχθον 
ἱ 1. τετελέσμεθα πεφάσμεθα ἠλλάγμεθα ἐληλέγμεθα 
ss \2 τετέλεσθε πέφανθε ἤλλαχθε ἐλήλεγχθε 
8, τετελεσμένοιυ πεφασμένοι ἠλλαγμένοι ἐληλεγμένοι 
᾿ εἰσί εἰσί εἰσί εἰσί 


Perfect Subjunctive and Optative. 


wereherpévos ὦ πεφασμένος ὦ ἠλλαγμένος ὦ ἐληλεγμένος ὦ 
Opt. ὁ, εἴην 29 εἴην 3 εἴην ᾽) εἴην: 
Perfect Imperative. 
5 ἷ 2. τετέλεσο πέφανσο ἤλλαξο ἐλήλεγξο 
᾿ (3. τετελέσθω πεφάνθω ἠλλάχθω ἐληλέγχθω 
D ἐν τετέλεσϑον πέφανθον ἤλλαχθον ἐλήλεγχθον 
᾿ὁὶ 8. τετελέσθων πεφάνθων ἠλλάχθων ἐληλέγχθων 
Ῥ : τετέλεσθε πέφανθε ἤλλαχθε ἐλήλεγχθε 
4.8, τετελέσθωσαν πεφάνθωσαν ἠλλάχθωσαν ἐληλέγχθωσαν 
or τετελέσθων or πεφάνθων or ἠλλάχθων οἵ ἐληλέγχθων 


- 


8971] PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE. 113. 
_ Perfect Infinitive and Participle. 
Inf. τετελέσθαι πεφάνθαι Ἐἠλλάχθαι ἐληλέγχθαι 
Part. τετελεσμένος πεφασμένος ἠλλαγμένος ἐληλεγμένος 
Pruperfect’ Tidictbive, °° 
\2 ἐτετελέσμην ἔπεφάσμην. ἠλλάγμην ἐληλέγμην 
PY ENS 


. ἐτετέλεσο ἔπέφανσο ἤλλαξο ἐλήλεγξο 

8. ἐτετέλεστο ἔπέφαντο ἤλλακτο,ο: σ᾽ ἐλήλεγκτο 
D ὡς ἐτετέλεσθον ἔπέφανθον ἤλλαχθον ἐλήλεγχθον 
03, ἐτετελέσθην ἐπεφάνθην ἠλλάχθην ἐληλέγχθην 
1. ἐτετελέσμεθα ἔπεφάσμεθα ἠλλάγμεθϑα ἐληλέγμεθα 

P ὃ: ἐτετέλεσθε ἐπέφανθε ἤλλαχθε Andrey Ge 
3. τετελεσμένου  πεφασμένοι ἠλλαγμένοι ἐληλεγμένοι 

ἦσαν ἦσαν ἦσαν ἦσαν 


Note 1. The regular third person plural in these tenses (τετριβ-. 
yrat, ἐπεπλεκ-ντο, &c. formed like λέλυ-νται, ἐλέλυ-ντο) could not be 
pronounced. The periphrastic form is necessary also when σ is 
added to a vowel stem in these tenses (8 109, 2), as in τετέλεσ-μαι. 
On the other hand, when final ν of a stem is dropped in these tenses 
(§ 109, 6), the regular forms in vrae and ντὸ are used; as κλίνω, 
κέκλι-μαι, κέκλινται (NOt κεκλιμένοι εἰσί). 


Notre 2. The euphonic changes in these tenses follow the prin- 
ciples stated in § 16, 1-4. Thus τέτριμ-μαι is for τετριβ-μαι (§ 16, 3); 
τέτριψαι for τετριβ-σαι (§ 16, 2); τέτριπ-ται for τετριβ-ται (δ 16, 1); 
τέτριφ-θον for τετριβ-σθον, τετριβ-θον (§ 16,4 and 1). So πέπλεγ-μαι 
is for πεπλεκ-μαι (816, 3); πέπλεχ-θον for πεπλεκ-σθον (δ 16, 4 and 1). 
Πέπεισ-μαι is for πεπειθ-μαι (8 16, 3); πέπει-σαι for πεπειθ-σαι (§ 16, 
2); πέπεισ-ται for πεπειθ-ται (§ 16, 1); πέπεισ-θον for πεπειθ-σθον 
(ἢ 16,4 and 1). ἜἜσταλ-θον is for ἐσταλ-σθον (8 16, 4); ἔσταλ-θε 
for ἐσταλ-σθε. ; 

In reréXe-o-pat, σ is added to the stem before μ and τ (§ 109, 2), 

the stem remaining pure before o; lingual stems change the lingual 
(τ, 8; 6) to o before μ and τ (8 16, 1 and 8) and before 6 (for σθ, 
§ 16,4); these two classes of verbs therefore inflect these tenses 
alike, though on different principles. On the other hand, the o 
before μ in πέφασμαι and ἐπεφάσμην is a substitute for ν of the stem 
(§ 16, 6, N. 4); which » reappears before all other letters, causing 
the σ of o@ to be dropped in σθον, ce, &c. (§ 16, 4). In the. fol- 
lowing comparison the distinction is shown by the hyphens: — 


τετέλε-σ-μαι πέπεισ-μαι πέφασ-μαι 

τετέλε-σαι πέπει-σαι πέφαν-σαι 

τετέλε-σ-ται πέπεισ-ται πέφαν-ται 
_ τετέλε-σθε πέπεισ-θε πέφαν-θε 


ae 


114 . " INFLECTION. - [8 97. 


In ἤλλαγ-μαι no change was required (§ 16, 3); ἤλλα-ξαι is for 
ἤλλαγ-σαι (ἢ 16, 2); ἤλλακ-ται for ἠλλαγ-ται (§ 16, 1); ἤλλαχ-θον for 
᾿ἤλλαγ-σθον (8 16, 4 and 1), cf. πέπλεχ-θον (above). In ἐλήλεγοεμαι, : 
Ὑγμ (for yxp, ὃ 16, 3) drops one γ (ἢ 16, 3, Note); ἐλήλεγξαι and 
ἐλήλεγκ-ται are for ἐληλεγχ-σαι and ἐληλεγχ-ται (ὃ 16, 1, 2); ἐλήλεγχ- 
Oe is for ἐληλεγχ-σθε (ὃ 10, 4); see also § 102. 


_ Note 3. (a) All perfect-middle stems ending in a labial inflect 
these tenses like τέτριμ-μαι, &c.; as λείπω, λέλειμ-μαι; γράφω (ypad-), 
write, γέγραμ-μαι (§ 16, 3); ῥίπτω (ῥιφ-), throw, ἔρριμ-μαι. But 
when final μπ of the stem is reduced to p» before μ (§ 16, 3, Note), 
the original πὶ recurs before other consonants; as κάμπτω (xaur-), 
bend, κέκαμ-μαι, κέκαμψαι, κέκαμπ-ται, κέκαμφ-θε; πέμπω (πεμπ-), send, 
᾿'πέπεμ-μαι, πέπεμψαι, πέπεμπ-ται, πέπεμφ-θε: Compare with the latter 
πέπεμ-μαι from πέσσω (πεπ-), cook, inflected πέπεψαι, πέπεπ-ται, 
πέπεφ-θε, το. 


(>) All ending in a palatal inflect these tenses like πέπλεγ-μαι and 
ἤλλαγιμαι; aS πράσσω (mpay-), do, πέπραγ-μαι; ταράσσω (rapay-), 
confuse, τετάραγ-μαι; φυλάσσω (φυλᾶκ-), πεφύλαγ-μαι. But when 
before » represents yy, aS in ἐλήλεγ-μαι from ἐλέγχ-ω (end of N. 2), 
the second palatal of the stem recurs before other consonants. 


(c) All ending in a lingual mute inflect these tenses like πέπεισ- 
pa, &c.; as φράζω (φρᾶδ-), tell, πέφρασ-μαι, πέφρα-σαι, πέφραστ-ται; 
ἐθίζω (ἐθὶδ-Ὑ, accuslom, εἴθισ-μαι, εἴθι-σαι, εἴθισ-ται, εἴθισ-θε, εἰθίσ-θαι; 
pluf. εἰθίσ-μην, εἴθι-σο, εἴθισ-το; σπένδω (σπενδ-), pour, ἔσπεισ-μαι 
(§ 16, 6), for ἐσπενδ-μαι, ἐσπενσ-μαι (§ 10, 8), ἔσπει-σαι, ἔσπεισ-ται, 
ἔσπεισ-θε. : , 


(1) Most ending in ν (those in ἄν- and ὕν- of verbs in aww or 
dv) are inflected like πέφασ-μαι, changing v to o before μ (δ 16, 6, 
N. 4), and retaining ν elsewhere; as ὑφαίνω (ὑφᾶν-), weave, ὕφασ-μαι, 
ὕφαν-σαι, ὕφαν-ται, ὕφαν-θε, ὑφάν Gar; σημαίνω (σημᾶν-), show, σεσή- 
᾿ς μασ-μαι; μιαίνω (μιᾶν-), pollute, μεμίασ-μαι. Rarely such a » becomes 
p. as in ὀξύντ-ω, sharpen, ὥξυμ-μαι (later ὥξυσ-μαι); and even then 
the ν recurs before other consonants, as ὥξυν-σαι, ὦξυν-ται. 

When final ν of a stem is dropped (8 109, 6), as in κλίνω, bend, 
κέκλι-μαι; the stem becomes a vowel-stem, and- is inflected like 
λέλυ-μαι. 


. (6) Those ending in Δ or p are inflected like ἔσταλ-μαι;; as ἀγγέλλω 
(ayyed-), announce, ifyyed-pat; αἴρω (ap-), raise, ἦρ-μαι : ἐγείρω (eyep-). 
rouse, €ynyep-pat; πείρω (mep-), pierce, πέπαρ-μαι (§ 109, 4); no 
change being made except the dropping of ¢@ in o@ after A or p 
(8 16, 4), as in ἤγγελ-θε and ἐγηγέρ-θαι. 


\ 


§ 98.] 


present and imperfect. 


CONTRACT VERBS. 


Contract Verbs. 


115 


§ 98. Verbs in aa, ew, and ow are contracted in the 


These tenses of τιμώω (Tima-), 


honor, piréw (dire-), love, and δηλόω (δηλο-), manifest, 


are thus inflected : — 


2 


. (τιμάω) 

. (τιμάεις) 
. (τιμάει) 

. (τἱμάετον) 
. (τιμάετον) 
. {τιμάομεν) 
. (τιμάετε) 
. (τιμάουσι) 


. {(τιμάω) 
. (τιμάῃς) 
. (τιμάῃ) 
. {(τιμάητον) 
. {τιμάητον) 
3. 


Pe 
3. 
1, 
B. 4 2. 
3 


(τιμάωμεν) 
(τιμάητε) 
(τιμάωσὼ 


(τιμάοιμι) 
(τιμάοις) 
(τιμάοι). 
(τιμάοιτονῚ 


; i 3. (τιμαοίτην) 


1. 
P. 42. 
ὃ. 


(τιμάοιμεν) 
(τιμάοιτε) 
(τιμάοιεν) 


τιμῶ 
τιμᾷς 
τιμᾷ 
τιμᾶτον 
τιμᾶτον 
τιμῶμεν 
τιμᾶτε 


τιμῶσι 


τιμῶ 
τιμᾷς 
τιμᾷ. 
τιμᾶτον 
τιμᾶτον 
τιμῶμεν 
τιμᾶτε 
τιμῶσι 


ACTIVE. 


Present Indicative. 


(φιλέω) 
(φιλέει5) 
(φιλέει) 
(φιλέετον) 
(φιλέετον) 
(φιλέομεν) 
(φιλέετε) 
(φιλέουσι) 


(φιλέω) 
(φιλέῃς) 
(φιλέῃ) 
(φιλέητον) 
(φιλέητον) 
(φιλέωμεν) 
(φιλέητε) 
(piréwor) 


φιλώ 
φιλεῖς 
φιλεῖ 
φιλεῖτον 
φιλεῖτον 
φιλοῦμεν 
φιλεῖτε 
φιλοῦσι 


Present Subjunctive. 


Piro 
φιλῇς 
φιλῇ. 
φιλῆτον 
φιλῆτον 
φιλῶμεν 
φιλῆτε. 
φιλῶσι 


Present Optative. 


(φιλέοιμι) 
(φιλέοις) 
(φιλέοι) 
(φιλέοιτον) 
(φιλεοίτην) 
(φιλέοιμεν) 
(φιλέοιτε) 
(φιλέοιεν) 


φιλοῖμι 
φιλοῖς 
φιλοῖ 
φιλοῦτον 
φιλοίτην 


φιλοῖμεν᾽ 


φιλοῖτε 
φιλοῖεν 


(δηλόω) 
(δηλόει5) 
(δηλόει) 
(δηλόετον) 
(δηλόετον) 
(δηλόομεν) 
(δηλόετε) 
(δηλόουσι) 


(δηλόω) 
(δηλόῃς) 
(δηλόῃ) 
(δηλόητον) 
(δηλόητον) 
(δηλόωμεν) 
(δηλόητε) 
(δηλόωσι) 


(δηλόοιμῷ 
(δηλόοιΞ) 
(δηλόοι) 
(δηλόοιτον) 
(δηλοοίτηνῚ 
(δηλόοιμεν) 
(δηλόοιτε) 


(δηλόοιεν) 


ϑηλῶ 
δηλοῖς 
δηλοῖ 
ϑηλοῦτον 
δηλοῦτον 
δηλοῦμεν 
δηλοῦτε 
δηλοῦσι 


δηλῶ 
δηλοῖς 
δηλοῖ 
ϑηλῶτον 
δηλῶτον 
δηλῶμεν 
δηλῶτε 
δηλῶσι 


δηλοῖμι 
δηλοῖς 
δηλοῖ 
δϑηλοῖτον 
δηλοίτην 
δηλοῖμεν 
δηλοῖτε 
δηλοῖεν 


INFLECTION. [8 98. 


or οὗ or } 

- (τιμαοίην) τιμῴην (φιλεοίην) φιλοίην (δηλοοίην) δηλοίην 

. (τιμαοίη) τιμῴης (φιλεοίη) φιλοίης «(δηλοοίης) ϑηλοίης 

. (τιμαοίη) τιμῴη (φιλεοίη) φιλοίη (δηλοοίη) ϑηλοίη 

« (τιμαοίητον) τιμῴητον (φιλεοίητον) φιλοίητον (δηλοοίητον) δηλοίητον 
. (τιμαοιήτην) τιμῳήτην (φιλεοιήτην) φιλοιήτην (δηλοοιήτην) δηλοιήτην 
- (τιμαοίημεν) τιμῴημεν (φιλεοίημεν) φιλοίημεν (δηλοοίημεν) δηλοίημεν 

. (Τιμαοίητε) τιμῴητε ἀ(φιλεοίητε) φιλοίητε (δηλοοίητε) δηλοίητε 

.« [τιμαοίησαν τιμῴησαν] (φιλεοίησαν) φιλοίησαν [δηλοοίησαν δηλοίησαν 


Present Imperative. 
. (τίμαε) τίμα (φίλεε) φίλει (δήλοε) δήλου 
. (τιμαέτω τιμάτω (φιλεέτωΣ φιλείτω (δηλοέτω) δηλούτω 


. (τιμάετον) τιμᾶτον (φιλέετον) φιλεῖτον (δηλόετον) δηλοῦτον 
. (τιμαέτων) τιμάτων (φιλεέτων) φιλείτων (δηλοέτων) δηλούτων 


. (τιμάετε) τιμᾶτε (φιλέετε) φιλεῖτε (δηλόετε) δηλοῦτε 


.«, (τιμαέτωσαν) τιμάτωσαν eye) weer. (δηλοέτωσαν) δηλούτωσαν 
or 


or or or 
(τιμαόντων) τιμώντων (φιλεύντων) λον (δηλοόντων) δηλούντων 


Present Infinitive. 


(τιμάειν) τιμᾶν (φιλέειν) φιλεῖν (δηλόειν) δηλοῦν . 


Present Participle (see § 69). 
(τιμάων) τιμῶν (φιλέων) φιλῶν (δηλόων) δηλῶν 


Imperfect. 


. (ἐτίμαον) ἐτίμων —(édireov”) ἐφίλουν «(ἐδήλοον) ἐδήλουν 

. (ἐτίμαες) ἐτίμας (ἐφίλεες) ἐφίλεις (ἐδήλοες) ἐδήλους 

. (ἐτίμαε) ἐτίμα (ἐφίλεε) ἐφίλει (ἐδήλοε) ἐδήλου 

. (ἐτιμάετον) ἐτιμᾶτον (ἐφιλέετον) ἐφιλεῖτον (ἐδηλόετον) ἐδηλοῦτον 
- (ἐτιμαέτην) ἐτιμάτην (ἐφιλεέτην) ἐφιλείτην (ἐδηλοέτην) ἐδηλούτην 
. (ἐτιμάομεν) ἐτιμῶμεν (ἐφιλέομεν) ἐφιλοῦμεν (ἐδηλόομεν) ἐδηλοῦμεν 
. (ἐτιμάετε) ἐτιμᾶτε (ἐφιλέετε) ἐφιλεῖτε (ἐδηλόετε) ἐξηλοῦτε 
. (ἐτίμαον). ἐτίμων (ἐφίλεον) ἐφίλουν᾽ἠ (ἐδήλοον) ἐδήλουν 


§ 98.] 


. (τιμάομαι) 
. (τιμάῃ,τιμάειγτιμᾷ, 
. (τιμάεται) 

. (τιμάεσθον) 
.. (ryder Gov) 
. (τιμαόμεθα) 
. (ryder Oe) 

. (τιμάονται) 


. (τιμάωμαι) 
. (τιμάῃ) 

» (τιμάηται) 

. (τιμάησθονῚὴ 
. (τιμάησθον) 
. (τιμαώμεθα) 
» (τιμάησθε). 


(τιμάωνται) 


. (τιμαοίμην) 
. (τιμάοιο) 
. (τσιμάοιτο) 


CONTRACT VERBS. 


PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 


τιμῶμαι 


τιμᾶται 
τιμᾶσθον 
τιμᾶσθον 
τιμώμεθα 
τιμᾶσθε 
τιμῶνται 


τιμῶμαι 
τιμᾷ 
τιμᾶται 
τιμᾶσθον 
τιμᾶσθον 
τιμώμεθα 
τιμᾶσθε 
τιμῶνται 


τιμῴμην 
τιμῷο 
τιμῷτο 


,. (τιμάοισθον) τιμῷσθον 
. (τιμαοίσθην) τιμῴσθην 
. (τιμαοίμεθα) τιμῴμεθα 
. (τιμάοισθε) τιμῷσθε 
.« (τιμάοιντο) τιμῷντο 


Present Indicative. 


(φιλέομαι) φιλοῦμαι 
(φιλέμιφιλέευ)φιλῇ, φιλεῖ 
(φιλέετα) φιλεῖται. 
(φιλέεσθον) φιλεῖσθον 
(φιλέεσθον) φιλεῖσθον 


(φιλεόμεθα) φιλούμεθα ᾿ 


(φιλέεσθε) φιλεῖσθε 
(φιλέονται) φιλοῦνται 


Present Subjunctive. 

(prréwpar) φιλῶμαι 
(pedég) φιλῇ 

(φιλέητα) φιλῆται 
(φιλέησθον) φιλῆσθον 
(φιλέησθον) φιλῆσθον 
(φιλεώμεθα) φιλώμεθα 


᾿ (φιλέησθε) φιλῆσθε 


(φιλέωνται) φιλῶνται 


Present Optative. 
(φιλεοίμην) φιλοίμην 
(φιλέοι) φιλοῖο 
(φιλέοιτο) φιλοῖτο 
(φιλέοισθον) φιλοῖσθον 
(φιλεοίσθην) φιλοίσθην 
(φιλεοίμεθα) φιλοίμεθα 
(φιλέοισθε) φιλοῖσθε 
(φιλέοιντο) φιλοῖντο 


Present Imperative. 


(δηλόομαι) 


117 


δηλοῦμαι 


(δηλόῃ,δηλόει)δηλοῖ 


(δηλόεται) 
(δηλόεσθον) 
(δηλόεσθον) 
(δηλοόμεθα) 
(δηλόεσθε) 
(δηλόονται) 


(δηλόωμαι) 
(δηλόῃ) 
(δηλόηται) 
(δηλόησθον) 
(δηλόησθον) 


δηλοῦται 
δηλοῦσθον 
δηλοῦσθον 
δηλούμεθα 
δηλοῦσθε 
δηλοῦνται 


δηλῶμαι 
δηλοῖ 
δηλῶται 
δηλῶσθον 
δϑηλῶσθον 


(δηλοώμεθα) ϑδηλώμεθα 


(δηλόησθε) 


δηλῶσθε 


(δηλόωνται) δηλῶνται 


(δηλοοίμην) δηλοίμην 
(δηλόοιο) δηλοῖο 
(δηλόοιτο) δηλοῖτο 


(δηλόοισθον) δηλοῖσθον 
(δηλοοίσθην) δηλοίσθην 
(δηλοοίμεθα) δηλοίμεθα 


᾿(δηλόοισθε) δηλοῖσθε 


(δηλόοιντο) ὃδμλοῖντο 


5 ἱ 2. (τιμάου) τιμῶ (φιλέου) φιλοῦ (δηλόου) δηλοῦ 
" (3. (τιμαέσθω) τιμάσθω (φιλεέσθω) φιλείσθω (δηλοέσθω) δηλούσθϑω 
Ρ ἷ 2. (τιμάεσθον) τιμᾶσθον (φιλέεσθον) φιλεῖσθον (δηλόεσθον)Ὶ δηλοῦσθον 
᾿ (8. (τιμαέσθων) τιμάσθων (φιλεέσθων) φιλείσθων (δηλοέσθων) δηλούσθων 
2. (τιμάεσθε) τιμᾶσθε (φιλέεσθε) φιλεῖσθε (δηλόεσθε) δϑδηλοῦσθε 
Pp, ἡ 8. (σγιμαέσθω- τιμάσθωσαν (φιλεέσθω- φμοίσθνσαν (δηλοέσθω- Epa teens 
Ἶ σαν ΟΥ̓ or gay or σαν or 
τιμαέσθων) τιμάσθων Lares γα φιλέίσθων δηλοέσθων) ϑηλούσθων 


118 


(τιμάεσθαι) τιμᾶσθαι 


(τιμαόμενος) τιμώμενος 


. (ἐτιμαόμην) ἐτιμώμην 
. (ἐτιμάου) ἐτιμῶ 

- (ἐτιμάετο) ἐτιμᾶτο 

. (ἐτιμάεσθον) ἐτιμᾶσθον 
. (ἐτιμαέσθην) ἐτιμάσθην 
. (ἐτιμαόμεθα) ἐτιμώμεθα 


(ἐτιμάεσθε) ἐτιμᾶσθε 


. (ἐτιμάοντο) ἐτιμῶντο 


INFLECTION. 


Present Infinitive. 
(piréecOar) φιλεῖσθαι 


Present Participle. - 
(φιλεόμενος) φιλούμενος 


Imperfect. 
(ἐφιλεόμην) ἐφιλούμην 
(ἐφιλέου) ὀἐφιλοῦ 
(ἐφιλέετο) ἐφιλεῖτο 
(ἐφιλέεσθον) ἐφιλεῖσθον 
(ἐφιλεέσθην) ἐφιλείσθην 
(ἐφιλεόμεθα) ἐφιλούμεθα 
(ἐφιλέεσθε) ἐφιλεῖσθε 
(ἐφιλέοντο) ἐφιλοῦντο 


[8 98. 


(δηλόεσθαι) δηλοῦσθαν 


(SnAoduevos) δηλούμενος 


(ἐδηλοόμην) ἐδηλούμην 
(ἐδηλόου) ἐδηλοῦ 
(ἐδηλόετο) ἐδηλοῦτο 
(ἐδηλόεσθον) ἐδηλοῦσθον 
(ἐδηλοέσθην) ἐδηλούσθην 
(ἐδηλοόμεθα) ἐδηλούμεθα 
(ἐδηλόεσθε) ἐδηλοῦσθε 
(ἐδηλόοντο) ἐδηλοῦντο 


REMARK. The uncontracted forms of these tenses are never used in 
Attic Greek. Those of verbs in aw sometimes occur in Homer; those of 
verbs in ew are common in Homer and Herodotus; but those of verbs in 
ow are never used. For dialectic forms of these verbs, see § 120. 


Notre 1. Dissyllabic verbs in ew contract only ee and ee. Thus 
πλέω, sail, has pres. πλέω, πλεῖς, πλεῖ, πλεῖτον, πλέομεν, πλεῖτε, πλέουσι; 
imperf. ἔπλεον, ἔπλεις, ἔπλει, &c.; infin. πλεῖν; partic. πλέων. : 

Δέω, bind, is the only exception, and is contracted in most forms; 
as δοῦσι, δοῦμαι, δοῦνται, ἔδουν, partic. δῶν, δοῦν. Δέω, to want, is 
contracted like πλέω. 


Nore 2. A few verbs in aw have ἡ for a in the contracted forms; 
as διψάω, διψῶ, thirst, διψῆς, Supp, διψῆτε ; imperf. ἐδίψων, ἐδίψης, 
ἐδίψη; infin. διψῆν. So (da, live, κνάω, scrape, πεινάω, hunger, σμάω, 
smear, xpaw, give oracles, with χράομαι, and de, rub. 


Notre 3. ιγόω, shiver, has infinitive ῥιγῶν (with ῥιγοῦν), and 


other similar forms in o. ‘Idpdéw, sweat, has ἱδρῶσι, ἱδρῴη, idpav- 
τι, &c. 


Notre 4. The third person singular of the imperfect active does ; 


not take ν movable in the contracted form; thus ἐφίλεε or ἐφίλεεν 
gives ἐφίλει (never ἐφίλειν). Except ἐχρῆν or χρῆν (for ἔχραεν, see 
Note 2), and a very few poetic forms. 

Note 5. The present infinitive active of verbs: in aw and o@ (in 
ay and ody, not ᾷν and oir) is probably contracted from forms in aev 
and oev. The infinitive in ev is Doric (8 119, 14, c). See § 9, 4, 
N.\2. 


Nort 6. The optative active in οἰησαν is very rare, and perhaps was 
never used except (contracted) in verbs in ew. (See § 115, 4.) 


¥ 


§ 100.]  AUGMENT. — ig 


AUGMENT. 


§ 99. 1. In the secondary tenses of the indicative, 
and in the perfect. and future perfect of all the moods and 
the participle, the stem of the verb reeeives an augment 
(i.e. increase) at the beginning. 

2. There are three kinds of augment, syllabic augment, 7 
temporal augment, and reduplication. . 


(a) The syllabic augment prefixes e to verbs ἐῶ 
with a consonant; as λύω, ἔλυον. 


(6) The temporal augment lengthens the “first syllable 
of verbs begining with a vowel or a diphthong ; ; as ἄγω, 
lead, ἦγον ; οἰκέω, οἰκῶ, dwell, ὥκησα. 


(6) The reduplication prefixes the initial consonant fol- 
lowed by ε in forming the perfect stem of verbs beginning 
with a consonant; as λύω, λέλυκα; γράφω, write, ἮΡ 
γραφα. For Attic reduplication, see ὃ 102. 

Remark. There is an important distinction between the aug- 
ment of the imperfect and aorist, which does not belong to the 
tense stem and never appears except in the indicative, and the redu- 
| Εν or other augment of the perfect and future perfect, which 


elongs to the perfect stem, and is therefore retained in all the 
moods and the participle. 


Imperfect and Aorist Indicative. 


§ 100. 1. The imperfect and aorist indicative of 
verbs beginning with a consonant have the syllabic 
augment ε. Hy. 


Λύω, ἔλυον, ἔλυσα, ἐλυόμην, ἐλυσάμην, ἐλύδην: ypad--, write, ἔγραφον, 
ἔγραψα, ἐγράφην; ῥίπτω, throw, ἔρριπτον, ἐρρίφην (ἴοι ρρ 866 8 15,2). 

For the pluperfect of these ver bs, see § 101, 4.. 

2. The imperfect and aorist indicative of verbs begin- 
ning with a short vowel have the temporal augment, 
which lengthens the initial vowel; ἅ and e become η, and 
t, ος v become ἴ, o, ὕ. ἘΣ 


120 τ INFLECTION. f§ 101. 


"Aya, lead, ἦγον, ἤχθην ; ἐλαύνω, drive, ἤλαυνον ; ἱκετεύω (Ὦ), implore, 
ἱκέτευον (@), ἱκέτευσα (1); ὀνειδίζω, reproach, ὠνείδιζον ; ὑβρίζω (ὕ), 
insult, ὑβρίσθην() ; ἀκολουθέω, accompany, ἠκολούθησα; ὀρθόω, erect, 
ὥρθωσα. 


For the augment of verbs beginning with a diphthong, see ὃ 108. 


Nore 1. If the initial vowel is already long, no change takes 
place in it, except that ἃ generally. becomes η by augment; as 
ἀθλέω (a6- contr. from ‘deO-), struggle, ἤθλησα. Both ἃ and ἡ are 
found in ἀναλίσκω and dvaddw; see also diw (poetic), hear. 


Norte 2. Βούλομαι, wish, δύναμαι, be able, and μέλλω, intend, often 
add the temporal augment to the syllabic; as ἐβουλόμην or ἠβουλό- 
μην, ἐβουλήθην or ἠβουλήθην; ἐδυνάμην or ἠδυνάμην, ἐδυνήθην or ἠδυνή- 
θην; ἔμελλον OF ἤμελλον. 


Note 3. The second aorist active and middle in all the moods 
and the participle sometimes has a reduplication in Homer; as πέ- 
—dpadoy from pda, tell; πέπιθον from πείθω (ni O-), persuade ; τε- 
ταρπόμην (8 109, 4, Ν. 1) from τέρπω, delight ; κεκλόμην and κεκλόμενος 
(8 109, 7, 6) from κέλομαι; command ; ἤραρον from ἀραρίσκω (ap-), join; 
ὥρορον from ὄρνυμι (dp-), rouse ; πεπαλὼών (partic.) from πάλλω (πᾶλ-), 
shake ; κεκάμω (subj) from κάμνω (κἄμ-), 80 λελάχω from λαγχάνω; 
πεφιδέσθαι, inf. from φείδομαι (Pid-), spare, 80 λε-λαθέσθαι, λε-λαβέσθαι. 
In the indicative a syllabic augment may be prefixed to the redupli- 
cation; as ἐκεκλόμην, ἔπεφνον (from φεν-), ἐπέφραδον. 


Note 4. “Aya, lead, has a second aorist with Attic reduplication 
(8 102), ἤγαγον (dy-ay-), which adds the temporal augment in the 
indicative, subj. ἀγάγω, opt. ἀγάγοιμι, inf. ἀγαγεῖν, part. ἀγαγών; 
mid. ἠγαγόμην, ἀγάγωμαι, &c.,— all in Attic prose. See also the ao- 
rists ἤνεγκα and ἤνεγκον (from stem ἐνεκ-, év-ever-, ἐνεγκ-) Of φέρω; 
ἄλαλκον (for add-adex-ov) of ἀλέξω, ward off; and ἐνένιπον of ἐνίπτω 
(ἐνιπ-). chide. | 

Note 5. In Homer a liquid (especially A) may be doubled like p 
(§ 15, 2), after the augment ε; as ἔλλαχον for ἔλαχον. So sometimes 
σὶ aS ἐσσείοντο from σείω. 


Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect. 


§ 101. 1. Most verbs beginning with a consonant 
augment the perfect and future perfect in all their forms 
by prefixing that consonant followed by ε. This is called 
reduplication. Μ΄. 


Ada, dé-Avea, Xé-Avpat, λε-λυκέναι, λε-λυκώς, λε-λυμένος; γράφω, ye- 
γραφα, γε-γράφθαι. So θύω, sacrifice, ré-Ouxa (§ 17,2); φαίνω (par-), 
show, πέτφασμαι, πε-φάνθαι; χαίνω, gape, Ké-xnva. 


5101. AUGMENT. 121 


Norte. Five verbs have e as augment in the perfect instead of 
the reduplication: λαγχάνω (AGy-), obtain by lot, εἴληχα, εἴληγμαι; dap- 
Bava (AGB-), take, εἴληφα, εἴλημμαι (poet. λέλημμαι) ; λέγω, collect, in 
compos., -eiAoxa, -εἴλεγμαι With -λέλεγμαι (δια-λέγομαι, discuss, has &-' 
είλεγμαι) ; μείρομαι (μερ-), obtain part, εἵμαρται, itis fated ; stem (fe-), 
εἴρηκα, have said, εἴρημαι, fut. pf. εἰρήσομαι (see εἶπον). See also 2a. 

An irregular reduplication appears in Homeric δείδοικα and δεί- 
δια, from δείδω, fear. 


2. Verbs beginning with two consonants (except a 
mute and a liquid), with a double consonant (ζ, & yw), or 
with p have the simple syllabic augment ε in all forms of 
the perfect and future perfect. Fg. | 

Στέλλω, send, ἔσταλκα; ζητέω, seek, ἐζήτηκα; ψεύδω, lie, ἔψευσμαι, 
ἐψευσμένος ; ῥίπτω, throw, ἔρριμμαι, ἐρρίφθαι (for pp see § 15, 2). 


ΝΟΤΕ 1. Verbs beginning with γν, and some others beginning 
with a mute and a liquid, take ε instead of the reduplication; as γνω- 
ρίζω, recognize, ἐγνώρικα; γιγνώσκω (yvo-), know, ἔγνωκα; but κλείω, 
shut, κέκλεικα (regularly). 


Nore 2. Μιμνήσκω (pva-), remind, has μέμνημαι (memini), remem- 
ber, and xrdopat, acquire, has both κέκτημαι and ἔκτημαι, possess. See 
also Homer. pf. pass. of ῥίπτω and ῥυπόω. 

3. Verbs beginning with a short vowel have the tem- 
poral augment in all forms of the perfect and future 
perfect. Lg. 


“Aye, lead, ἦχα, ἦγμαι, ἠγμένος ; ἀκολουθέω, follow, ἠκολούθηκα, nKo- 
λουθηκέναι; ὀρθόω, erect, ὥρθωμαι; ὁρίζω, bound, ὥρικα, ὥρισμαι; ἀτιμόω, 
dishonor, ἠτίμωκα, ἠτίμωμαι, fut. pf. ἠτιμώσομαι; the fut. pf. is very 
rare in verbs which have the temporal augment. 


4. When the perfect has the reduplication, the pluper- 
fect generally prefixes to this the syllabic augment ε. 
But when the perfect has the syllabic augment e (or e) 
or the temporal augment, the pluperfect and the perfect 
are augmented alike. Hg. 


Ave, λέλυκα. ἐλελύκειν, λέλυμαι, ἐλελύμην; στέλλω, ἔσταλκα, ἐστάλ- 
kewv, ἔσταλμαι, ἐστάλμην ; λαμβάνω. εἴληφα, εἰλήφειν ; ἀγγέλλω, announce, 
ἤγγελκα, ἠγγέλκειν, ἤγγελμαι, ἠγγέλμην. 

Nore. The reduplicated pluperfect sometimes omits the addi- 
tional syllabic augment; as πεπόνθεσαν, πεπτώκεσαν. 


122 . ἸΧΡΙΒΌΤΙΟΝ.. [8 102. 


Attic Reduplication. 


8 102. Some verbs beginning with a, e, or o augment 
the perfect and pluperfect by prefixing their first two 
letters to the common temporal augment. - This is called 

the Attic reduplication. ἈΠ. | 


᾿Δρόω, plough, ἀρ- ἤρομαι; ἐμέω, vomit, ἐμήμεκα; ; ἐλέγχω, prove, ἐλή- 
Aeypat, ἐληλέγμην ; ἐλαύνω (ἐλα-), drive, waahaxé. ἐλήλαμαι; ἀκούω, hear, 
ἀκήκοα (§ 110, [V. d, Ν. 1). 

Other verbs which have the Attic reduplication are ἀγείρω, ἀλείφω, 
ἀλέω, ἐγείρω, ἐρείδω, ἔρχομαι, ἐσθίω, ὄλλυμι, 6 ὄμνυμι, ὀρύττω, φέρω. See 
also, | for Tonic or poetic forms, αἱρέω, ἀλάομαι. ἀλυκτέω, ἀραρίσκω, ἐρεί- 
πω, ἔχω, ἠμύω, (ὀδυ-) ὀδώδυσμαι, ὄζω, ὁράω (ὄπωπα), ὀρέγω. ὄρνυμι. 
The Attic reduplication (so called by the Greek grammarians) 1s not 
peculiarly Attic, and is found in Homer. 


Nortel. ᾿Εγείρω (ἐγερ- ), rouse, has 2 perf. ἐγρ-ήγορα (for ἐ ey-nyop-a, 
cf. § 109, 3), but é ey ἤγερμαι. For the Attic reduplication in ἤγαγον, 
2 aor. of ἄγω, in ἤνεγκα and ἤνεγκον of φέρω, and in Homeric ἄλαλκον 
of ἀλέξω, see ὃ 100, 2, N. 4. 


Note 2. The pluperfect rar ely takes an augment i in addition to 
the Attic reduplication. But ἀκούω, hear, ἀκήκοα, generally has ἢ ἤκη- 
KEL in Attic; and dr-wdor\a (of ἀπ-όλλυμι, ἀπ-όλωλα), ὠμωμόκει 
(of ὄμνυμε, ὀμώμοκα), and δι-ωρώρυκτο (of δι-ορύσσω. δι-ορώρυγμαι) 
occur in Attic prose. See Homeric pluperfects οὗ ἐλαύνω and ἐρείδω. 


Augment of Diphthongs. 


§ 103. Verbs beginning with a diphthong take the 
temporal augment on the first vowel of the diphthong, 
at or a becoming y, οὐ becoming ». LH.g. 


Αἰτέω, ask, ἤτησα; οἰκέω, dwell, ᾧκησα, φκημένος ; αὐξάνω, increase, 
ηὔξησα, νἀ δήμμε ηὐξήθην ; ada, sing, ᾿ἦδον. 


ΝΟΤΕ. Ov is never augmented. Ez and ev are generally without 
augment ; but MSS. and editors differ in regard to many forms, as 
εἴκασα OY ἤκασα (εἰκάζω, liken), εὗδον or ηὗδον (εὕδω, sleep), εὕρηκα and 
εὑρέθην or ηὕρηκα and ηὑρέθην (εὑρίσκω. find), εὐξάμην or ηὐξάμην (€v- 
xoua, pray). Editions vary also in the augment of avaive, dry, an 
of some verbs beginning with οἱ, as οἰακοστροφέω, steer. 


§ 105.] | AUGMENT. 128 


Syllabie Augment before a Vowel. 


§ 104. Some verbs beginning with a vowel take the syl- 
labic augment, as if they began with a consonant. When ε 
follows the augment, ce is contracted into e. .9. 


+ 
᾿Ωθέω (ὠὧθ-), push, ἕωσα, ἔωσμαι, ἐώσθην; ἁλίσκομαι, be captured, 
ἑάλωκα, 2 aor. ἑάλων (Or ἥλων) ; ἄγνυμι (ay-), break, ἔαξα, 2 pt. gaya; 
ἔρδω, do, Ionic, 2 pf. gopya; ὠνέομαι, buy, ἐωνούμην, &c.; ἐθίζω, accus- 
tom, εἴθίσα, εἴθῖκα (from ἐεθ-); ἐάω, permit, εἴᾶσα, εἴᾶκα. 


These verbs are, further, ἑλίσσω, ἕλκω, ἔπω, ἐργάζομαι, ἕρπω or 
ἑρπΐύζω,. ἑστιάω, ἔχω, ἴημι (€é-), with the aorists εἶδον and εἷλον (αἱρέω), 
the perfects εἴωθα (Feé-, ὧθ- for Εωθ-) and ἔοικα (ix-), aud plpf. εἱστή- 
xe (for éeor-) of ἵστημι. See also Ionic and poetic forms under 
ἁνδάνω, ἅπτω, εἴδομαι, εἴλω, εἶπον, εἴρω, ἔλπω, ἕννυμι, ἵζω, and ἕζομαι. 


Note 1. ‘Opda, see, and ἀν-οίγω. open, generally take the tempo- 
ral augment after the syllabic; as ἑώρων, ἑώμᾶκα (or édpaxa), ἑώὠρᾶμαι:; 
av-ewyov, ἀν-έῳξα (rarely ἤνοιγον, ἤνοιξα, ὃ 105, N. 3). Homer has 
ἑήνδανον from ἁνδάνω, please: ἐῳνοχόει imp. οἱ oivoxogw, pour wine ; 
ἀνὰ 2 plpf. ἐώλπει and ἐώργει trom ἔλπω and ἔρδω. ἉἙορτάζω, keep 

oliday (Hdt. ὁρτάζω) has Attic imp. éwpragov. | 


- .Nore2. This form. of augment is explained on the supposition that 
these verbs originally began with the consonant F or some other consonant, 
which was afterwards dropped: thus εἶδον, saw, is for ἐξιδον (cf. Latin | 
vid-t) ; ἔοργα is for FeFopya, from stem Fepy- (δ 110, 1V. ἃ), cf. Eng. work 

(German Werk) ; and ἕρπω, creep, is for στερπω (cf. Latin serpo). 


Augment of Compound Verbs. 


§ 105. 1. In compound verbs, the augment follows 
the preposition. Prepositions (except περί and πρό) 
drop a final vowel before the augment ε. E.g. | 

Προσ-γράφω, προσ-έγραφον, mpoo-yeypapa; εἰσ-άγω, εἰσ-ἣγον (8 26, 
N. 1); ἐκ-βάλλω, ἐξέβαλλον (8 13; 2); συλ-λέγω, συν-έλεγον; συμ- 
πλέκω, συν-έπλεκον (8 16,5); συγ-χέω, συν-έχεον, συγ-κέχυκα; συσκευάζω, 
συν-εσκεύαζον (ὃ 16, 6, N. 3); ἀπο-βάλλω, ἀπ-έβαλλον ; --- but περι- 
έβαλλον and προ-έλεγον. See § 131, 7. 


Note 1. Ipé may be contracted with the augment; as προὔλεγον 
and προὔβαινον, for προέλεγον and προέβαινον. 


Norte 2. Some verbs not themselves compounds, but derived from 
nouns or adjectives: compounded with prepositions (called indirect 


124 INFLECTION. [§ 106. 


compounds), are augmented after the preposition; as ὑποπτεύω (from 
ὕποπτος), suspect, ὑπώπτευον, as if the verb were from ὑπό and 
ὀπτεύω; ἀπολογέομαι, defend one’s self, ἀπ-ελογησάμην ; see also ἐκκλη- 
σιάζω. Παρανομέω, transgress law, παρηνόμουν, &c. is very irregular. 
Karnyopéw (from κατήγορος), accuse, has κατηγόρουν (not ἐκατηγόρουν). 
See διαιτάω and διᾶκονέω in the Catalogue of Verbs. 


Note 3. <A few verbs take the augment before the preposition, 
and others have both augments; as καθέζομαι, sit, ἐκαθέζετο; καθίζω, 
ἐκάθιζον ; καθεύδω, sleep, ἐκάθευδον and καθηῦδον (Ep. καθεῦδον) ; ἀνέχω, 
ἠνειχόμην, ἠνεσχόμην (or ἠνσχόμην). See ἀφίημι, ἀμφιέννυμι, ἀμφι- 

νοέω, ἀμπίσχομαι, ἐνοχλέω, and ἀμφισβητέω, dispute, ἡμφισβήτουν and 
ἠμφεσβήτουν (as if the last part were -σβητεω). 


2. Indirect compounds of dve-, zl, and occasionally those 
of εὖ, well, are augmented after the adverb, if the following 
part begins with a vowel. Δ... 


Δυσαρεστέω, be displeased, δυσηρέστουν; evepyeréw, do good, εὐηργέ- 
Tyka (OF edcepy-). 

Note. In other cases, compounds of δυσ- are augmented at the 
beginning, and those of ed generally omit the augment. 


3. Other indirect compounds are augmented at the begin- 
ning. See, however, ὁδοποιέω. - 


Omission of Augment. 


8 106. 1. In the imperfect and aorist, the temporal aug- 
ment is often omitted by Herodotus; as in ἀμείβετο and ἀμεί- 
waro (for ἠμείβετο and ἠμείψατο) ; and both temporal and 
syllabic augment by the Epic and Lyric poets, as in ὁμίλεον, 
ἔχον, Saxe (for ὡμίλεον, εἶχον, ἔδωκε). 


Norse. The reduplication or augment of the perfect stem is very rarely 
omitted. But Homer has déyarac for δεδέχαται, from δέχομαι, receive ; 
and Herodotus occasionally omits the temporal augment, as in καταρρώδη- 
kas (for xar-npp-), and he makes ἐπαλιλλόγητο as plpf. of παλιλλογέω, 
repeat. 


2. The Attic poets sometimes omit the augment in (lyric) choral pas- 
sages, seldom in the dialogue of the drama. In Attic prose we have χρῆν 
for ἐχρῆν (impf. of χρή), must. 


if 


os 


' 
νυ 


§ 108.] ἶ VERBAL ST 


Formation of the Present Stem from the Simple Stem. 


§ 107. That we may know to what present any verbal 
form is to be referred, we must understand the relations which 
exist in different classes of verbs between the present stem 
and the simple stem (ὃ 92, 2). When these are not identical 
(as they are in Avw), the present stem is generally an enlarged 
form of the simple stem; as in κόπτ-ω (xor-), strike, μανθάν-ω 
(μαθ-), learn, Soxé-w (dox-), believe. In a few very irregular 
verbs, however, there is no connection to be seen between the 
present stem and the stem or stems which are in use in other 
tenses; as in φέρω (dep-), bear, fut. οἴσω (oi-), aor. ἤνεγκα 
(éveyx-). 


§ 108. Verbs in w are divided into eight classes with 
reference to the formation of the present stem from the simple 
stem. 


I. First Crass. (Stem unchanged.) Here the present is 
formed directly from thé"single stem of the verb; as in Av-a, 
loose, Néy-w, say, TAEK-w, Weave, ay-w, lead, ypad-w, write. 


Notre. The pure verbs of this class which irregularly retain a short 
vowel in certain tenses are given in ὃ 109, 1, N. 2; those which insert ¢ 
in certain tenses, in ὃ 109, 2 ; and the verbs which add e to the stem in 
some or all tenses not of the present system (as βούλομαι), in § 109, 8. 
These and other verbs of this class which are peculiar in their inflection will 
be found in the Catalogue of Verbs. 


II. Seconp Crass. (Lengthened Stems.) 1. This includes 
all verbs with mute simple stems which form the present stem 
by lengthening a short vowel, & to η; . to εἰ (sometimes to 1); 
ὕ to εὖ (sometimes to Ὁ) ; as τήκτ-ω (rax-), melt, λείπ-ὦ (Aiz-), 
leave, pevy-w (piy-), flee, τρίβ-ω (rpiB-), rub, ψύχ-ω (ψῦχο), 
cool, 

Here belong, further, κήδω (κἄδ-). λήθω (AGO-), σήπω (car-), ἀλεί- 
φω (ἀλὶφ-). ἐρείπω (ἐρἴπ-). πείθω (πῖθ-). στείβω (aTiB-), στείχω (στῖχ-) ᾿ 
φείδομαι (φιδ-), θλίβω (θλὶβ-), πνίγω (mviy-), πεύθομα! (πῦθ-), τεύχω 


126 INFLECTION. 3 [ξ 108. 


(rix-), Tipe (rup-), φρύγω (ppiy-); with Ionic or poetic ἐρείκω 
(ἐρῖκ.), ἐρεύγομαι (epiy-), κεύθω (κῦθ-), τμήγω (τμᾶγ-), and (θἄπ- or 
τἄφ-) stem οἱ τέθηπα and ἔτἄφον ; see also εἴκω (ἰκ-). Τρώγω (τρᾶγ-) 
irregularly lengthens ἄ to ὠ. 


2. Six verbs in ew with stems in ὕ belong by formation to 
this class. These originally lengthened ὕ to ev, which became 
eF (§ 1, N. 2) before a vowel, and finally dropped F and left «; 
as wAU-, πλευ-, πλεξω, TAE-w, Sail. 


These verbs are θέω (-), run, véw (vi-), swim, πλέω (TAV-), sail, 
πνέω (πνῦ-), breathe, péw (pv-), flow, xéw (xv-), pour. The poetic 
σεύω (ov-), urge, has this formation, with ev retained. 


Notre. Verbs of the second class have the lengthened stem, as 
τηκ- ἴῃ τήκω. vev- in (veFw) νέω, in all tenses except in the second per- 
fect, second aorist, and second passive tense systeras; as φεύγω, φεύ- 
ἕομαι, ἔφυγον; τήκω, THE®, τέτηκα, ἐτάκην; pew (for peFo), ῥεύσομαι, 
ἐρρύην. Exceptions are the perfect middle of ἀλείφω, ἐρείκω, ἐρείπω, 
στείβω, τεύχω, the perfect active of ῥέω and τρίβω, and most tenses of 
xéo and gevw. The lengthened stem of the second perfect (as in τέ- 


τηκα, λέλοιπα, &c.) is explained on the general principle, § 109, 3. 


III. Turrp Crass. (Verbs in πτω, or T Class.) Simple labial 
(7, 8, φ) stems generally add 7, and thus form the present in 
mw (8 16,1); as κόπτιω (Koz-), εμέ, βλάπτ-ω (BAafB-), hurt, 
ῥίπτ-ω (ῥιφ-). throw. | 

Tere the exact form of the simple stem cannot be determined 
from the present. Thus, in the examples above given, the stem is to 
be found in the second aorists ἐκόπην, ἐβλάβην, and ἐρρίφην; and in 
καλύπτω (kadvB-), cover, it is seen in KadvB-n, hut. 

The verbs of this class are ἅπττω (ἀφ-). βάπτ-ω (βῆφ-), βλάπτ-ω 
(βλᾶβ-), θάπτ-ω (τἄφ-), Opimr-w (τρῦφ-), καλύπτ-ω (KahvB-), κάμπτ-ω 
(καμπ-), κλέπτ-ω (κλεπ-), κόπττω (κοπ-), κρύπτ-τω (κρῦβ- or Kpup-), 
κύπττω (Kip-), ῥάπττω (ῥᾶφ-), ῥίπτ-ω (ῥῖφ-), σκάπτ-ω (σκαφ-), σκέ- 
πτομαι (σκεπ-), σκήπτω (oKnT-), σκώπτω (oKoT-), τύπτω (τῦὔπ-), With 
Homeric and poetic γνάμπτω (γναμπ-), ἐνίπτω (ἐνΐπ-), and μάρπτω 
(μαρπ-). Τίκτω (rex-), probably for τεκττω, belongs here. 


IV. Fourty Crass. (Jota Class.) This includes all verbs 
in which occur any of the euphonic changes arising from the 
addition of « to the simple stem in forming the present stem 
(§$ 16, 7). There are three divisions : — : 

1. (Verbs in cow or rrw and ζω.) (a) Presents in cow {(ττω) 
generally come from palatal stems, x, y, or x with « becoming 


ε18.΄͵' VERBAL STEMS. 3 127 


oo (rr). These have futures in ἕω; as πράσσω (πρᾶγ-), do, 
fut. πράξω; μαλάσσω (μαλᾶκ-, seen in μαλακός), soften, fut. pa- 
λάξω; ταράσσω (rapax-, seen in rapayy), εἰς pa fut. rapagw. 
See § 16, 7 (a). 

See also κηρύσσω (knpik-), φυλάσσω (φυλᾶκ- a πτήσσω (πτηκ-), 
φρίσσω (φρῖκ-), ἀλλάσσω (ἀλλᾶἄγ-), μάσσω (μᾶγ-), τάσσω vin 


πλήσσω (σληγ- ), ὀρύσσω (ὀρῦχ-), in the Catalogue, and many other 
verbs in σσω.} 


Note. A few presents i in gow (rr@) come from lingual stems, 
and have futures in σω; as ἐρέσσω, row (from stem éper-, seen in 
ἐρέτης, rower), aor. ἤρεσα (ὃ 16, 2). So also ἁρμόττω (fut. ἁρμόσω), 
βλίττω (μελιτ-, ὃ 14, Ν. 1), λίσσομαι Qur-), πάσσω. πλάσσω, πτίσσω, 
with ἀφάσσω (Hat. ), and poetic ἱμάσσω, κορύσσω (xopv6-), νίσσομαι. 

One has a labial stem, πέσσω {(πεπ-), cook, fut. πέψω. 


(6) Presents in ζω may come from stems in ὃ and have fu- 
tures in ow, or from stems in y (or yy) and have futures in ἕω; 
as φράζω (φρᾶδ-), say, fut. φράσω, 2 aor. (Epic) πέφραδον ; κο- 
μίζω (xopid-, seen in xoutdy), carry, fut. κομίσω ; ῥέζω (pey-), do, 
poetic, fut. ῥέξω ; κλάζω (kAayy-, compare clango), scream, fut. 
κλάγξω. See ὃ 16, 7 (Ὁ). 

See also ἁρπάζω (ἁρπᾶδ-), θαυμάζω (Oavpiid-), ἐρίζω (ept8-), if 
(id-), νομίζω (voptd-), ὄζω (66-), πελάζω (πελᾶἄδ-), σώζω (σωδ-). χάζω 
(χἄδ-) ; κράζω (κρᾶγ -), σφάζω (σφᾶγ-). μύζω (μυγ-), grumble; σαλπίζω 
(odheeeyyes with | onic or eres βαστάζω (βαστἄδ-), κρίζω (xpty-), 
τρίζω (τριγ-), πλάζω (πλαγγ-); & 

Nore 1. Some verbs in ζω have stems both in ὃ and yi as παίζω 


(παιδ-, παιγ-). play, fut. παιξοῦμαι (§ ΤΗΝ “» aor. ἔπαισα. See 
also poetic forms of ἁρπάζω and vaca. 


Nore 2. Νίζω (viB-), wash, has a labial stem. 


2. (Verbs with lengthened Liquid Stems.) (ec) Presents in 
λλω are formed from simple stems in A with added 1, Av becom- 
ing AA; as στέλλω, send, for ored-t-w; ἀγγέλλω, announce, for 
ἀγγελ-ι-ω; σφάλλω, trip up, for σφαλ-ιτω. See § 16, 7 (ὁ). 

See also βάλλω (BaA-), θάλλω (AGA-), ὀκέλλω (ὀκελ- ᾿ πάλλω ὠὰ ); 
σκέλλω (σκελ-), τέλλω (TEA-), ἅλλομαι (ἀλ-), Kc. 

(4) Presents in awa, eww, αἰρω, and eipw are formed from 
simple stems in ἄν, ev, ἄρ, and ep, with added 1, which, after 


1. The lists of verbs of the fourth class are not complete, while those 
of the other classes which are given contain all the verbs in common use. 


128 INFLECTION. . : [8 108: 


metathesis, is contracted with the preceding vowel; as φαίνω, 
show, for dav-i-w, fut. φἄνῶ ; κτείνω, kill, for xrev-t-w ; αἴρω, raise, 
for dp-t-w; σπείρω, sow, for orep-i-w. See § 16, 7 (d). 

~—. Those in We, ὕνω, and ὕρω may be formed in the same way 
from simple stems in ἵν, tv, and vp, w becoming τ, and vi be- 
coming 3; as κρίνω, judge, for xpiv-.-a, fut. κρινῶ ; ἀμύνω, ward 
off, for dpiv-r-w, fut. dptvd; σύρω, draw, for cip-i-w: 

See also evppaiva (evppav-), κερδαίνω (κερδᾶν-), μιαίνω (μιᾶν-), En! 
paive (ξηρᾶν-), σημαίνω (σημᾶν-), ὑφαίνω (ὑφᾶν-), τείνω (rev-), poetic 
θείνω (θεν-), γείνομαι st σαίρω (σἄρ-), χαίρω (χᾶρ- ), ἐγείρω (ἐγερ- -), 
κείρω (κερ- iS , φθείρω (φθερ-),. κλίνω (κλὶν-), πλύνω (πλῦν-), ὀξύνω 
(ὀξῦν-), αἰσχύνω (αἰσχὕν-), ὀλοφύρομαι (ὀλοφῦρ-), &c. 

Notel. ᾿Ὀφείλω (ὀφελ-), be obliged, owe, follows the analogy of 
stems in ev, to avoid confusion with ὀφέλλω (dped-), increase ; but in 


Homer it has a regular form ὀφέλλω. Homer has εἴλομαι; press, from 
stem €A-. 


Norte 2. Verbs of this division (2) regularly have futures and 
aorists active and middle of. the liquid form (§ 110, II. 2). For 
exceptions (in poetry), see ὃ 110, II. N. 4. 


Note 3. Many verbs with liquid stems do not belong to this 
class; as δέμω and δέρῃ ἢ in Class 1. For Baive, &c: in Class 5, see V. 
Note 1. 


3. ‘okies Vowel Stems.) (e) Here belong two verbs 
in aw with stems in av, καίω, burn, and κλαίω, weep (Attic also 
kaw and kAdw). These stems xav- and κλαυ- (seen in καύσω 
and κλαύσομαι) became xafi- and «AaFi-, whence καὶ- and κλαι- 


(see IT. 2). 

ΟΠ Nore. The Epic forms other present stems in this way ; so dalw (da-), 
burn, μαίομαι (ua-), seck, ναίω (va-), inhabit, ὀπυίω (ὀπυ-), marry, and per- 
haps δαίομαι, divide. 

V. Firrs Crass. (N Class.) 1. Some simple stems are 
strengthened in the present by adding v; as d@av-w (φθᾶ-), 
antectpate ; ; Tiv-w (τι-). pay ; φθίν-ω (φθ.:), waste ; daxv-w (δᾶκ-) 9 
bite ; κάμν-ω (κἄμ-). be weary; τέμν-ω (τεμ-): cut. 


So Baive (Ba-, βᾶν-, Note 1), πίνω (m-, see also VITI.), δύνω (with 
δύω), Hom. θύνω (with θύω), rush ; for ἐλαύνω (€da-), see N. 2. 


2. Some consonant stems add av; ἁμαρτάν-ω (duapr-), err ; 
αἰσθάν-ομαι (aic6-), perceive ; BAarrdav-w (BAact-), sprout. 


§ 108.] | VERBAL STEMS. 129 


If the last vowel of the simple stem is short, v (μ or y be- 
fore a labial or a palatal, § 16, 5) is inserted after the vowel ; 
as λανθάν-ω (λᾶθ-, AavO-) , escape notice ; λαμβάν-ω (AGB- Aap B-), 
take; θιγγάνω (Oty-, Oryy-), touch. 

So avéav-w (with avé-o), δαρθάν-ω (Sap6-), ἀπ-εχθάνομαι (ἐχθ-), 
ἱζάν-ω (with i¢-@), poetic κιχάν-ω (kty-), οἰδάν-ω (with οἰδ-έω, Class 7), 
ὀλισθάν-ω (ὀλισθ-), ὀσφραίντομαι (dogp-, N. 1), ὀφλισκάν-ω (ὀφλ-, 
ὀφλισκ-, Υ1.), with poetic ἀλιταίν-ομαι (adir-, Ν. 1), ἀχφάν-ω (ἀλφ-), 
ἐριδαίνω (epid-). With inserted ν, y, or p, ἁνδάν-ω (ἀδ-), Aayxav-w 
(Adx-), pavOav-w (μᾶθ-), πυνθάν-ομαι (πῦθ-), τυγχάν-ω (Tvx-), With po- 
etic yavdave (χἄδ-), ἐρυγγάν-ω (€pvy-). 


3. A few stems add ve: Buvé-w (with Bv-w), stop up, ixvé-opat 
(with ix-w), come, κυνέτω (xv-), kiss; also ἀμπ-ισχνέτομαι, have 
on, and tr-wryvé-op.o1, promise, from tox-w (VIII.). 


4. Some stems add vv (after a vowel, vvv): these form the 
second class (in vip) of verbs in μι, as δείκνυ-μι (Sdeux-), 
show, κεράννυ-μι (kepa-), mix, and are enumerated in ὃ 125, 5. 
Some of these have also the present in νυω (8 122, N. 5). 


Note 1. Βαίνω (Ba-, Bav-), go, and ὀσφραίνομαι (dogp-, ὀσφρᾶν-), 
smell, not only add ν or ay, but lengthen ἄν to aw on the principle of 
Class 4. They belong here, however, because they do not have the 
inflection of liquid verbs (IV. 2, Note 2). See also κερδαίνω, Hom. 
ἀλιταίνομαι (ἀλιτ-, ἀλιτᾶν-) and ἐριδαίνω, with paivw and rerpaivo. 
Aapvaw (dap-), subdue, adds va. 

Nore 2. ᾿Ἐλαύνω (éda-), drive, is irregular in the present stem 
(probably for ἔλα-νυτω). ολ-λυ-με (dA-), destroy, adds λυ instead: of 
vu (perhaps by assimilation) to the stem dA- in the present. 


VI. Srxtu Crass. (Verbs in oxw.) These add ox or (after 
a consonant) crx to the simple stem to form the stem of the 
present ; as γηρά-σκω (ynpa-), grow old, cip-icxw (eip-), find, 
ἀρέ-σκω (dpe-), please, orep-icxw (orep-), deprive. 


These verbs are, further, ἁλ-ίσκομαι, ἀμβλ-ίσκῳ, ἀμπλακ-ίσκω 
(poetic), ἀναλ-ίσκω, ἀπαφ-ίσκω (poet.), ἀραρ-ίσκῳ (poet.), βά-σκω, 
βι-βρώ-σκω (Bpo-), βιώ-σκομαι (βιο-), βλώ-σκω (μολ-. BAo-), γεγων-ίσκω, 
γι-γνώ-σκω (yvo-), δι-δράσσκω (δρα-), ἐπαυρ-ίσκω (poet, ), ἡβά-σκω, θνή- 
σκω (Oav-, θνα-), θρώ-σκω (Aop-, Ope-), ἱλά-σκομαι, μεθύ-σκω, μι-μνή-σκω 
(μνἅ-), πι-πί-τσκω (lon. and Pind.), πι-πρά-σκω, τι-τρῴώ-σκω (τρο-); φά- 
σκω, χά-σκω. See also the verbs in N. 8, and ὀφλισκάνω. 

Note 1. Many verbs of this class reduplicate the present stem 
(§ 109, 7, 6) by prefixing its initial consonant with 4, as γι-γνώ-σκω 
(yvo-). *Ap-ap-ioxe (dp-ap-) has an Attic reduplication (§ 102, N. 1). 

9 


130 INFLECTION. [§ 108. 


Note2. Stems in o lengthen o to w before σκω, as in γιγνώσκω; 
and some in ἅ lengthen a toy, as in μιμνήσκω (μνᾶἄ-) and θνήσκω (θᾶν-; 
6va-, § 109, 7, a). 


Nore 3. Three verbs, ἀλύ-σκω (ἀλῦκ-), avoid, διδά-σκω (διδῶχ-), teach, 
and λά-σκω (Adx-), speak, omit x or x before oxw instead of inserting «. So 
Homeric ἐίσκω or ἔσκω (ἐϊκ- or ἐκ-). 


Nore 4. These verbs, from their ending oxw, are often called inceptive 
verbs, although few of them have any inceptive meaning. 


VII. Seventu Crass. (E Class.) A few simple stems 
add ¢« to form the present stem; as doxé-w (dox-), seem, fut. 
δόξω; ὠθέτω (d0-), push, fut. dow (8 16, 2); γαμέ-ω (ydp-), 
marry, fut. (γαμέω) γαμῶ. 


These verbs are, further, γεγωνέω. γηθέω, κτυπέω, κυρέω, μαρτυρέω 
(with μαρτύρομαι), ῥιπτέω (with ῥίπτω), φιλέω (v. Epic forms); aud 
poetic δατέομαι, δουπέω, εἰλέω, ἐπαυρέω, kevTéw, πατέομαι, ῥιγέω, στυγέω͵͵ 
τορέω, and χραισμέω. See also πεκτέω (πεκ-; πεκτ-). 

Most verbs in ew belong to the first class, as ποιέω (ποιε-). 


_. Norse. A few chiefly poetic verbs form present stems by adding a in 
the same way to the simple stem: see βρυχάομαι, yodw, δηριάω, μηκάομαι, 
μητιάω, μυκάομαι. 


VIII. Erauta Crass. (Mixed Class.) This includes the 
few irregular verbs in which any of the tense stems are so 
essentially different from others, or which are otherwise so 
peculiar in formation, that they cannot be brought under any 
of the preceding classes. They are the following : — 


aipéw (é\-), take, fut. aipnow, 2 aor. εἷλον. 

ἀλέξω (ddex-), ward off, fut. ἀλεξήσω (ὃ 109, 8), ἀλεξήσομαι, and 
ἀλέξομαι; 2 a ἄλαλκον (Hom.) τος idannee (8 100, 2, ἐν ἫΝ 

ίγνομαι (γεν- OY yv-, γενε-, ya-), become, for γι-γενομαι, fut. γενή- 

ropa 2 nor. ἐγενόμην, οἷ pf. Rta (§ 109, 3) qth γεγάασι, &c. 
" ἔθω (ὦ, Εωθ-, ὧθ-), be accustomed, 2 pf. εἴωθα, 2 plpf. εἰώθειν. 

εἶδον (Fid-, ἰδ-), saw, vidi, 2 aorist (no present act.); 2 pf. οἶδα, 
know (§ 127). Mid. εἴδομαι (poetic). 
᾿ς εἶπον (ceim-, ép-, pe-), spoke, 2 aor. (no pres.); fut. (ἐρέω) ἐρῶ, pf. 
εἴςρητκα. The stem εἰπ- is for é-em (orig. ἔε- ἔεπ-), and ἐρ- (pe-) is for 
Fep- (Fpe-), seen in Lat. ver-bum (§ 109, 7, a). So ἐν-έπω. 
3 ἔρχομαι (ἐλὕθ- or ἐλθ-, ἐλευθ-), yo, fut. ἐλεύσομαι (poet.), 2 aor. 

λθον. 

Ἶ ἔρδω (ἐργ-). work, poetic, fut. ἔρξω; by metathesis ἐργ- becomes 
pey- in ῥέξω (Class 4), Originally the stem was Fepy-, as in ἔργον, 
work, German Werk. 


§ 109.] MODIFICATION OF VERBAL STEMS. 131 


ἐσθίω (ἐδ-, piy-), eat, fut. ἔδομαι, 2 aor. ἔφαγον. : 

ἔπω (Attic only in comp.), be about; mid. ἕπομαι, follow (σεπ- or 
on-, én-), fut. ἔψομαι, 2 aor. ἑσπόμην. 

ἔχω (σεχ- or σχ-: cxe-), have, fut. ἕξω or σχήσω, 2 aor. ἔσχον (for 
€-cex-ov). Also ἴσχω (for σι-σεχ-ω). 

ὁράω (ὀπ-), see, fut. ὄψομαι, pt. ἑώρακα. See εἶδον. 
‘ πάσχω (πᾶθ-, πενθ-), suffer, tut. πείσομαι, 2 pf. πέπονθα, 2 aor. ἔπα- 

ov. 

πίνω (mt-, ro-), drink, fut. πίομαι, pf. πέπωκα, 2 aor. ἔπιον. 

πίπτω (πετ-. πτο-), fall, for πι-πετ-ω, fut. πεσοῦμαι, pl. πέ-πτω-κα, 
2 aor. ἔπεσον (Dor. ἔπετον). 

τρέχω (δρᾶμ-, Spapue-), run, fut. δραμοῦμαι, pf. δεδράμηκα, 2 aor. 

. ἔδραμον. : 

φέρω (oi-, évex-, by redupl. and syne. ἐν-ενεκ, eveyk-), bear, fero; 
fut. οἴσω, aor. ἤνεγκα (§ 109, 7, ὃ), pf ἐν-ήνοχ-α (δ 109, 3, N. 2), ἐν- 
nvey-pat, A0r. p. ἠνέχθην. 

For full forms of these verbs, see the Catalogue. 


Norte. Occasional Homeric or poetic irregular forms appear even in 
some verbs of the first seven classes. See ἀκαχίζω and xavddyw in the 
Catalogue. - 

Modification of Verbal Stems. 

Remark. This section includes all those modifications of the 
stem which follow recognized principles, or which occur in so many 
verbs that they deserve special notice. For example, the change 
from τιμᾶ- in τιμάω to τιμη- in τιμήσω, that from στεργ- in στέργω to 
ἐστοργ- in 2 Ῥῇ. ἔστοργα. that from ored- (stem of στέλλω) to στειλ- in 
ἔστειλα and ἐστἄλ- in ἔσταλ-κα, and that from Bad- (stem of βάλλω) 
to BeBAn- (for βεβλᾶ-) in βέβληκα, all follow definite principles; while 
that from m- to πο- in πίνω and that from πᾶθ- to πενθ- in πάσχω 
(ὃ 108, VIII.) are mere irregularities. ! | 

ee ᾿ Ps 

§ 109. 1. Most stems ending in a short vowel 
lengthen this vowel in all tenses formed from these 
stems, except the present and imperfect. A and ε be- 
come ἡ, and o becomes w; but when a follows ε, ¢, or p, 
it becomes a. Fg. 

Τιμάω (re ἅ-), honor, τιμή: σω, ἐτίμη-σα, τετίμη-κα, τετίμη-μαι, ἐτιμή-" 
θην. φιλέω (φιλε-), love, φιλήσω, ἐφίλησα, πεφίληκα, πεφίλημαι, ἐφιλή- 
θην, dow (δηλο-), show, δηλώσω, &e.; so riw, τίσω (i); δακρύω, 
δακρύσω (v). But ἐάω, ἐάσω (ἃ); ἰάομαι, ἰάσομαι (a) } Spdw, δράσω (a), 
ἔδρᾶσα. δέδρᾶακα. 

_ This applies also to stems which become vowel stems by metathe- 
sis (§ 109, 7), as βάλλω (Bad-, Bda-), throw, pf. βέβλη-κα; κάμνω (κἄμ-ν 


132 INFLECTION. [§ 109. 


κμᾶ-), labor, xéxun-ka; or by adding ε (8 109, 8), as βούλομαι (BovaA-, 
BovAe-), wish, βουλή-σομαι, BeBovdrn-pat, ἐβουλή-θην. 


Note 1. Ava, loose, generally has v in Attic poetry in the pres- 
ent and imperfect (generally ὕ in Homer); in other tenses it has 
v only in the future and aorist active and middle and in the future 
perfect. ᾿Ἀκροάομαι, hear, has dxpoacopa, &c.; χράω, give oracles, 
lengthens ἅ to ἡ; as χρήσω, &c. So τρήσω and ἔτρησα from stem 
Tpa-; see τετραίνω, bore. 


Notre 2. Some vowel stems retain the. short vowel, contrary to 
the generat rule (§ 109, 1); as γελἄω, laugh, yehacopat, ἐγέλἄσα; 
ἀρκέω, suffice, ἀρκέσω, ἤρκεσα; μάχομαι (paye-), fight, μαχέσομαι (lon.), 
ἐμαχεσάμην. »--  -- 

(a) This occurs in the following verbs: (pure verbs) ἄγαμαι, αἰδέο- 
μαι, ἀκέομαι, ἀλέω, ἀνύω, ἀρκέω, ἀρόω, ἀρύω, γελάω, ἑἕλκύω (V. ἕλκω), 
ἐμέω, ἐράω, ζέω, θλάω, κλάω, break, ξέω, πτύω, σπάω, τελέω, τρέω, φλάω, 
χαλάω; and Epic ἀκηδέω, κοτέω, λοέω, νεικέω, and the stems (ἀᾶ-) and 
(de-); — (other verbs with vowel stems) ἀρέσκω (dpe-), ἄχθομαι 
(ἀχθε-), ἐλαύνω (€Aa-), ἱλάσκομαι (1AG-), μεθύσκω (μεθῦὕ-) ; also all verbs 
in avvys and evvyu, with stems in ἅ and ε (given in ὃ 125, 5), with 
ὄλλυμι (ὄλε-) and ὄμνυμι (ὀμο-). 

(0) The final vowel of the stem is variable in quantity in differ- 
ent tenses in the following verbs: (pure verbs) αἰνέω, aipéw, δέω, bind, 
δύω (v. δύνω), ἐρύω (Epic), θύω, sacrifice, καλέω, Avo, μύω, ποθέω, πο- 
vew;— (other verbs) βαίνω (Ba-), εὑρίσκω (εὗρ-, εὑρε-), μάχομαι 
(μαχε-), πίνω (πΐ-; πο-), φθάνω (φθᾶ-), φθίνω (POi-). 


2. Many vowel stems have o added, before all endings 
not beginning with o, in the perfect middle and first passive 
tense systems. 1.0. 


Τελέω, finish, τετέλε-σ-μαι, ἐτετελέσμην, ἐτελέσθην (§ 97, 4); γελάω, 
laugh, ἐγελά-σ-θην, γελασθῆναι; xpaw, give oracles, χρήσω, κέχρη-σ-μαι; 
ἐχρήσθην. 

xe occurs in all the verbs included in 1, N. 2 (a), except dpda, 

so far as they form these tenses, and in the following: ἀκούω, δράω, 
θραύω, κελεύω, κλείω (κλήω), κνάω, κναίω, κρούω, κυλίω, λεύω, νέω, heap, 
ξύω, παίω, παλαίω, παύω, πρίω, σείω, τίνω, ὕω, χόω, χράω, x iw, and po- 
etic paiw. Some, however, have forms both with and without σ. See 
the Dasslorus. 


3. In the second perfect the simple stem generally changes 
e to o, and lengthens other short vowels, & to y (after p to ἃ)» 
otow,ttoo,anditoe. L#.g. 

Srépy-w, love, ἔστοργα; γίγνομαι (yev-), become, γέγονα, ἐγεγόνειν; 
τίκτω (rex-), bring forth, τέτοκα; φαίνω (par-), πέφηνα; κράζω (Kpity-), _ 
cry, κέκρᾶγα; τήκω (τἄκ-), mell, τέτηκα, ἐτετήκειν; λείπω (λἵπ-), λέλοιπα, 


§ 109.] MODIFICATION OF VERBAL STEMS. 133 


ἐλελοίπειν ; φεύγω (φῦὕγ-), flee, πέφευγα, ἐπεφεύγειν. So ἐγείρω (eyep-), 
rouse, ἐγρήγορα (ὃ 102, N. 1). 

Norte 1. Πράσσω (mpay-), do, has mémpaya (8 110, IV. (ὦ), N. 2). 
ἜἜθω (€6-), am accustomed, has irregularly εἴωθα (ὧθ- for Εωθ-, § 104); 
and pyyvupe (pay-) has éppwya (pay-), cl. τρώγω (rpay-), ὃ 108, 11. 

Note 2. This change of ε to o occurs even in some first perfects 
which aspirate the final consonant of the stem (§ 110, IV. b): these 
are κέκλοφα, from κλέπτω (κλᾶπ-), steal ; ethoxa, from λέγτ-ω, collect ; 
πέπομφα from πέμπ-ω, send ; τέτροφα (sometimes rérpada) from τρέπ-ω, 
turn; rérpoda (perhaps second pertect), from τρέφ-ω, nourish. Sor be- 
comes oz in δέδοικα (δι-), fear. In τίθημι (Ge-), put, ε becomes εἰ in ré- 
θεικα and τέθειμαι; compare πίνω (πι-)» drink, πέπωκα and πέπομαι (πο-). 


4. In simple liquid stems of one syllable, ε is generally 
changed to asin the perfect active, perfect middle, and second 
passive systems. .9. 


Στέλλω (ored-), send, ἔσταλκα, ἔσταλμαι, ἐστάλην, στἄλήσομαι:; κείρω 
(κερ-), shear, κέκαρμαι, ἐκάρην (Ion.); σπείρω (σπερ-), sow, ἔσπαρμαι; 
ἐσπάρην. So in δέρω, κτείνω, μείρομαι, τέλλω, aud φθείρω. 


Note 1. The same change οὗ ε to a (after p) occurs in στρέφω, 
turn, ἔστραμμαι, ἐστράφην, στραφήσομαι (but 1 aor. ἐστρέφθην, rare); 
τρέπω, turn, τέτραφα (generally rerpoda), τέτραμμαι, ἐτράπην (but 
ἐτρέφθην, Ion. ἐτράφθην) : τρέφω, nourish, τέτροφα (late rérpada), 
τέθραμμαι, ἐτράφην (but ἐθρέφθην) ; also in the second aorist passive 
of κλέπτω, steal, πλέκω, weave, and τέρπω, delight, ἐκλάπην, ἐπλάκην, 
and (Epic) ἐτάρπην (1 aor. ἐκλέφθην, ἐπλέχθην, ἐτέρφθην, rarely Epic 
ἐτάρφθην). It occurs, further, in the second aorist (active or mid- 
dle) of κτείνω, kill, τέμνω, cut, τρέπω, and τέρπω ; viz., in ἔκτανον 
(poet.), ἔταμον, ἐταμόμην, ἔτραπον, ἐτραπόμην, τεταρπόμην (Hom.); also 
in several Homeris and poetic forms (see δέρκομαι, πέρθω, and πτήσ- 
ow). 

Note 2. The first passive system rarely appears in verbs with 
monosyllabic liquid stems. Teivw (rev-), stretch, in which rev- drops 
ν in this system (8 109, 6), changes ε to d in ἐτάθην and ἐκ-ταθήσο- 
μαι. 


5. Liquid stems lengthen their last vowel in the aorist 
active and middle; as στέλλω (στελ-), ἔστειλα. See ὃ 110, 
III. 2, and the examples. 


6. Four verbs in vw drop v of the stem in the perfect and 
first passive systems, and thus have vowel stems in these 
forms : — κρίνω (xpiv-), separate, xéxpixa, κέκρϊμαι, ἐκρίθην ; κλίνω 
(kAiv-), incline, κέκλικα, κέκλιμαι, ἐκλίθην ; πλύνω (πλῦν-), wash, 
πέπλῦμαι, ἐπλύθην ; τείνω (rev-), stretch, τέτἄᾶκα (§ 109, 4), τέτα- 


184 ἷ INFLECTION. [§ 109. 


μαι, ἐτάθην, ἐκ-ταθήσομαι. So κτείνω in some poetic forms: see 
also κερδαίνω. | 


Note. When final ν of a stem is not thus dropped, it becomes 
“Seaape κα (§ 16, 5), and generally becomes o before pa: (ἢ 16, 6, 


4); as φαίνω (pav-), πέφαγκα, πέφασμαι, ἐφάνθην. 

7. (a) The stem sometimes suffers metathesis (8 14, 1): 
(1) in the present, as θνήσκω (θᾶν-, Ova-), die, (δ 108, VI. N. . 
2); (2) in other tenses, as βάλλω (BaA-, BAG-), throw, βέβλη- 
κα, βέβλημαι, ἐβλήθην ; δέρκομαι (Sepx-), see (poetic), 2 aor. 
Spaxov (dpax-, § 109, 4, N. 1). 

(Ὁ) Sometimes syncope (8 14, 2): (1) in the present, as 
γίγνομαι (yev-), become, for γιτγεντομαι ; (2) in the second ao- 
rist, as ἐπτόμην for ἐ-πεττομην ; (3) in the perfect, as πετάννυμι 
(πετἄ-), expand, πέπτἄμαι for πε-πετα-μαι. 

_ (6) Sometimes reduplication (besides the regular reduplica- 
tion of the perfect stem): (1) in the present, especially in 
verbs of the sixth class and in verbs in μι (ὃ 121, 3), as γι- 
γνώσκω, know, yi-yvopa, ἵ-στημι; (2) in the second aorist, as 
πείθω (ni0-), persuade, πέ-πῖθον (Ep.). Attic redupl. in ἄγω, 
lead, ἤγαγον (ἀγ-αγ-) ; see dpapicxw. ὃ 110, V. N. 2; § 100, 
Notes 3 and 4. 


8. E is sometimes added to the present stem, sometimes 
to the simple stem, making a new stem in ε. From this some 
verbs form special tenses; and others form all their tenses 
except the present, imperfect, second perfect, and second 


— aorists (δ 90, Ν, 1). Ag. 


Βούλομαι (BovA-), wish, βουλήσομαι (Bovre-, ὃ 109, 1), ἄς. ; αἰσθά- 
νομαι (αἰσθ-), perceive, αἰσθήσομαι (aicbe-), ἤσθημαι; μένω (μεν-), 
remain, μεμένηκα (μενε-) ; μάχομαι (μαχ-), fight, fut. (μαχέ-ομαι) μαχοῦ- 
μαι, ἐμαχεσάμην, μεμάχημαι; χαίρω (χἄρ-), rejoice, χαιρήσω (χαιρε-), 
κεχάρηκα (xape-). 

(a) The following have the stem in e, in all tenses except those 
mentioned ; (1) formed from the present stem: ἀλέξω, ἄλθομαι (Ion.), 
ἄχθομαι, βούλομαι, βόσκω, δέω, want, ἐθέλω and θέλω, ἔρομαι and εἴρο- 
μαι (lon.), ἔρρω, εὕδω, ἕψω, κέλομαι (poet.), μάχομαι, μέδομαι (poet.), 
μέλλω, μέλω, μύζω, suck, οἴομαι, οἴχομαι. ὀφείλω, πέτομαι; (2) formed 
from the simple stem: αἰσθάνομαι (aic6-), ἁμαρτάνω (duapt-), ἁνδάνω 
(48-), ἀπ-εχθάνομαι (-εχθ-), αὐξάνω (avé-), βλαστάνω (βλαστ-). εὑρίσκω 
(εὑρ-), κιχάνω (κιχ-), λάσκω (Aak-), μανθάνω (μαθ-), ὀλισθάνω (ὀλισθ-), 


8 110.] FORMATION OF TENSE STEMS. 135 


ὄλλυμι (GA-), ὀφλισκάψω (ὀφλ-) ; see poetic ἀμπλακίσκω and ἀπαφίσκω, 
and the stem (δα-). 


(6) The following have the stem in ε in special tenses; (1) formed 
from the present stem: διδάσκω, καθίζω, κλαίω, μένω, νέμω, Taiw, πέτο- 
μαι. τύπτω ; (2) formed from the simple stem: δαρθάνω (δαρθ-), κήδω 
(κὰδ-), ὀσφραίνομαι (ὀσῴφρ-), πείθω (πῖθ-), ῥέω (ῥὕ-), στείβω (oriB-), 
τυγχάνω (τυχ-), χάζω (χᾶἄδ ); see also γίγνομαι, ἔχω, τρέχω. Χαίρω 
(xap-) forms both χαιρε- and χαρε-. 

Nore. In ὄμνυμι, swear, the stem du- is enlarged to ὀμο- in some 
tenses, as in @po-ca; in ἁλίσκομαι, be captured, ἀλ- is enlarged to 
ἁλο-, aS in ἁλώσομαι. So τρύχω, exhaust, τρυχώσω. So ‘probably οἴχο- 


pat, be gone, has stem οἶχο- for oixe-in the perfect οἴχω-κα (cb. Ion. 
οἴχη-μαι). 


Formation of Tense Stems, 


Remark. This section explains the formation of the seven 
tense stems enumerated in § 92, 4. They are generally formed 
from the simple stem of the verb (when this is distinct from 
the present stem). But verbs of the second class commonly 
have the lengthened stem (§ 108, II. Note) in all tenses 
except in the second perfect, second aorist, and second pas- 
sive tense systems. The verbs enumerated in § 109, 8 form 
some tenses from stems lengthened by adding «. The stem 
may be modified in different tenses as has been explained in 
§ 109. 


™~ S920, «I. (Present Stem.) The present stem is the stem 
of the present and imperfect in all the voices. 


The principles on which it is derived from the simple stem, when 
they are not identical, are explained in § 108. 


II. (Future Stem.) 1. Vowel and mute stems add o to 
form the stem of the future active and middle. These vowel 
stems lengthen a short vowel (§ 109, 1); 7, 8, ¢ with o be- 
come 3 x, γι x with o become £; τ, ὃ, 6 before o are dropped 
(ξ 16,2). Eg. | 


Τιμάω. honor, τιμήσω; δράω, do, δράσω; κόπτω (κοπ-), cut, κόψω; 
᾿Βλάπτω (BraB-), hurt, βλάψω, βλάψομαι;; γράφω, write, γράψω, γράψο- 
μαι; πλέκω, (wist, πλέξω; πράσσω (πρᾶγ-); do, πράξω, πράξομαι; ταράσ- 
ow (ταρᾶχ-), confuse, ταράξω, ταράξομαι; φράζω (φραδ-), tell, φράσω 
(for φραδ-σω); πείθω, persuade, πείσω (for πειθ-σω). So σπένδω, 


186 ἥν, INFLECTION. [8 110. 


pour, σπείσω (for onevd cw, ὃ 16, 2 and 6, N. 1); τρέφω, nourish, 
θρέψω, θρέψομαι (ὃ 17, 2, Note). 

2. Liquid stems add ε (in place of σὴ to form the future 
stem; this ε is contracted with ὦ and opa to ὦ and οὔμαι. 
fig. . 


Φαίνω (pav-), show, fut. (φανέ-ω) pavd, (φανέ-ομαι) φανοῦμαι; στέλ-᾿ 
Aw (στελ-), send, (στελέ-ω) στελῶ, (στελέ-ομαι) στελοῦμαι; νέμω, divide, 
(νεμέ-ω) νεμῶ; κρίνω (κρὶν-), Judge, (κρϊνέ-ω) κρὶνῶ. " ᾿ 

Nortel. (Aitie Future.) (a) The futures of καλέω, call, and 
τελέω, finish, καλέσω and τελέσω (ὃ 109, 1, N. 2), drop o of the future 
stem, and contract. καλε- and rede- with and ομαι, making καλῶ, 
καλοῦμαι, τελῶ and (poetic) τελοῦμαι. These futures have the same 
forms as the presents. So ὄλλυμι (ὀλ-, dde-), destroy, has fut. ὀλέσω 
(Hom.), ὀλέω (Hdt.), ὀλῶ (Attic). | 

So μαχέσομαι, Homeric future of μάχομαι (paxe-), fight, becomes 
μαχοῦμαι in Attic. Καθέζομαι (€6-), sit, has καθεδοῦμαι. 

(Ὁ) In like manner, futures in Gow from verbs in ἀννυμι (stems in 
a), some in eow from verbs in ἐννυμι (stems in e), and some in ἄσω 
from verbs in αζω (stems in 4), drop o and contract aw and ew to 
@. Thus σκεδάννυμι (oxeda-), scatter, σκεδάσω, (σκεδάω) σκεδῶ; στο- 
ρέννυμι (στορε-), spread, στορέσω, (στορέω) στορῶ; βιβάζω (βιβἄδ-), 
cause to go, βιβάσω, (βιβάω) BiBd.' So ἐλαύνω (ἐλα-), drive (8 108, V. 
N. 2), ἐλάσω, (ἐλάω) ἐλῶ. For fut. Ado, κρεμόω, &c., in Homer, see 
§ 120, 1, (4). : 

(c) Futures in tow and tooua from verbs in ἐζω (%-) of more than 
two syllables regularly drop o and insert εἰ then veo and ceowa are 
contracted to w and todpar; as κομίζω, carry, κομίσω, (κομιέω) κομιῶ, 
κομίσομαι, (κομιέομαι) Koptodpat, inflected like φιλῶ, φιλοῦμαι (§ 98). 
See § 120, 2, (a). 

d) Though these forms of future are called Attic, because the 
Attic dialect seldom uses any others in these tenses, they are yet 
found in other dialects and even in Homer, while the Attic occa- 
sionally uses the full forms in oa. 


Nore 2. (Doric Future.) A few verbs sometimes add ¢ to o in 
the stem of the future middle, and contract σέομαι to σοῦμαι. These 
are πλέω, sail, πλευσοῦμαι (§ 108, 11. 2); πνέω, breathe, πνευσοῦμαι; 
véw, Swim, νευσοῦμαι; κλαίω, weep, κλαυσοῦμαι (8 108, IV. 3); φεύγω, 
flee, φευξοῦμαι; πίπτω, fall, πεσοῦμαι. See also παίζω and πυνθάνο- 

at. 
& The Doric forms middle futures like these, and also active futures 
in céw contracted σῶ (§ 119, 6). These few are used in Attic with 
the regular futures πλεύσομαι, πνεύσομαι, κλαύσομαι, φεύξομαι (but 
never πέσομαι). 


Nore 8. A few irregular futures drop σ of the stem, which thus 
has the appearance of a present stem. Such are χέω and χέομαι, 


§ 110.] FORMATION OF TENSE STEMS. 137 


fut. of χέω, pour; ἔδομαι, from ἐσθίω (€6-), eat; πίομαι, from πίνω 
(ni-), drink. 

Nore 4. A few liquid stems add o like mute stems; κέλλω (keA-), 
land, κέλσω; Kip, meet, κύρσω; θέρομαι, be warmed, Oépoopar; all po- 
etic: so φθείρω (pbep-), destroy, Ep. fut. φθέρσω. 


III. (First Aorist Stem.) 1. Vowel and mute stems add o 
to form the stem of the first aorist active and middle. The 
lengthening of a final vowel of the stem and the euphonic 
changes of mutes before o are the same as in the future 
stem. #.9. 

Τιμάω, ἐτίμησα, ἐτιμησάμην; δράω, ἔδρᾶσα; κόπτω, ἔκοψα, ἐκοψάμην; 
βλάπτω, ἔβλαψα; γράφω, ἔγραψα, ἐγραψάμην ; πλέκω, ἔπλεξα, ἐπλεξά- 
μην; πράσσω, IY μα ἐπραξάμην; ταράσσω, ἐτάραξα; φράζω, ἔφρασα (for 
éppad-ca) ; πείθω, ἔπεισα (§ 108, 11. Note) ; σπένδω, ἔσπεισα (ἴον ἐσπενὸ- 
σα); τρέφω, ἔθρεψα, ἐθρεψάμην (§ 17, 2, Note); τήκω, melt, ἔτηξα 
(8. 108, 11. Note); πλέω, sail, ἔπλευσα (§ 108, II. 2). 

Nore 1. Three verbs in μι, δίδωμι (So-), give, ἴημι (€é-), send, and 
τίθημι (6e-), put, form the aorist stem by adding « instead of a, giv- 
ing ἔδωκα, ἧκα, ἔθηκα. These forms are seldom used except in the 
indicative active, and are most common in the singular, where the 
second aorists ἔδων, fv, ἔθην, are not in use. (See ὃ 122, N. 1.) Even 
ἡκάμην and ἐθηκάμην occur, the latter not in Attic Greek. 


Nore 2. Χέω, pour, has aorists ἔχεα (Hom. éyeva) and éyeduny, 
corresponding to the futures χέω and χέομαι (II. ἮΝ. 8). Εἶπον, said, 
has also first aorist εἶπα; and φέρω, bear, has ἤνεγκ-α (from stem 
eveyk-). 

For Homeric aorists like ἐβήσετο, ἐδύσετο, ttov, &c., see § 119, 8. 


2. Liquid stems form the first aorist stem by lengthening 
their last vowel, a to ἡ (aftercorptoa) andetoae. L.g. 


; Paiva (φᾶἄν-), ἔφην-α, ἐφηνάμην (rare); στέλλω (στελ-), ἔστειλ-α, 
ἐστειλ-άμην ; ἀγγέλλω (ἀγγελ-), announce, ἤγγειλα, ἠγγειλάμην; περαίνω 
(περᾶν"), finish, ἐπέρᾶνα; μιαίνω(μιᾶν-), stain, éuiava; νέμω, divide, ἔνειμα, 
ἐνειμάμην;; κρίνω, judge, expwa; ἀμύνω, kecp off, ἤμῦνα, nudvaunv; φθείρω 
(φθερ-), destroy, ἔφθειρα. Compare the futures in II. 2... 

Note 1. A few liquid stems lengthen ἄν to ἄν irregularly; as 
κερδαίνω, gain, ἐκέρδᾶνα. A few lengthen pay to ρην; as τετραίνω, bore, 
ἐτέτρηνα. : 

Nore 2. Αἴρω (ἅρ-), raise, and ἅλλομαι (aA-), leap, have ἦρα, ἠρά- 
μην, ἡλάμην (augmented); but ἃ in the other moods, as dpa, ἄρας, ἄρω- 
μαι, ἀραίμην, ἁλάμενος (all with a). 


IV. (Perfect Stem.) . (a) Perfect Middle Stem. The stem 
of the perfect and pluperfect middle and passive consists of 


138 INFLECTION. | [§ 110. 


the simple stem (in verbs of the second class, of the present 
stem) with the required reduplication or augment prefixed ; as 
Av-w, λέλυμαι, ἐλελύμην ; λείπ-ω, λελειπ- (§ 108, 11. Note), λέ- 
λειμμαι; ἐλελείμμην. 


The stem may be modified (8 109) as follows: — 

(1) A short final vowel is regularly =p: rl as φιλέ-ω, πεφί- 
λημαι, ἐπεφιλήμην; δρἄω, δέδρᾶμαι. (§ 109,1 

(2) Some vowel stems add o; τελέ-ω, ‘ilniinsi (3 109, 2 

(3) Most monosyllabic liquid stems and some others ine: e to 
a; as στέλλω (στελ-), ἔσταλμαι, ἐστάλμην. (ὃ 109, 4). 

(4) A few stems in ν drop ν, and others change ν tog. ($109, 6.) 

(5) Metathesis sometimes occurs; as βάλλω (βᾶλ-), throw, βέ- 
βληΐμαι (βλᾶ-). ( 109, 7.) 


For the euphonic changes made in consonant stems on adding the end- 
ings, see § 97, N. 2 


(6) Perfect Active Stem. The stem of the first perfect and 
pluperfect active is formed by adding κ to the reduplicated or 
augmented simple or present stem (ὃ 108, II. Note), except 
when this ends in a labial or palatal mute. Stems ending in 
x or 8, κ or y, aspirate these letters, making them φ or x, while 
final @ and x remain unchanged. L.g. » 


Avo, λελυκ-, λέλυκα, ἔλελύκειν; νέω (νυ-, veF-), swim, νένευκα; πείθω, 
persuade, πέπεικα (for πε-πειθ-κα). Κόπτω (xor-), cut, κέκοφα; βλάπτω 
(βλὰβ- -), hurt, βέβλᾶφα; πτήσσω (πτηκ-), cower, ἔπτηχα: πράσσω (mpay-), 
do, mémpaya, ἐπεπράχειν: γράφω, write, γέγρἄᾶφα, ἐγεγράφειν:; re 
Wek: ), dig, ὀρώρυχα. So κομίζω (xopid-), carry, κεκόμϊκα (8 16, 1, 


This stem may be modified (§ 109) in various ways: — 


(ly) A age final vowel is regularly lengthened; as φιλέω, πεφί- 
Anka. (8 109, 1.) 


(2) Most monosyllabic liquid stems and some others change e to 
a; aS στέλλω (στελ-), ἔσταλκα, ἐστάλκειν. (§ 109, 4.) 


(3) A few lingual and palatal stems change e to o, as in the sec- 
ond perfect. (§ ‘109, 3, N. 2.) 


(4) A few stems in ν drop v, and become vowel stems. (§ 109, 6.) 


(5) Metathesis sometimes occurs; as βάλλω (βᾶλ-, βλᾶἄ-), βέ- 
Brea. (ὁ 100, 7, a.) 


8 110.] FORMATION OF TENSE STEMS. 189 


Norte. The only form of first perfect found in Homer is that in xa of 
verbs having vowel stems. The perfect in xa of liquid and lingual stems, 
and the aspirated perfects of labial and palatal stems, belong to a later 
development of the language. 


(c) Future Perfect Stem. The stem of the future perfect is 
formed by adding o to the stem of the perfect middle ; as Aedv-, 


Aedvo-, λελύσομαι ; ypad-, yeypad-, yeypaw-, γεγράψομαι ; λειπ-:; 
Ache, λελειψ-») λελείψομαι ; πράσσω (πρᾶγ-), πεπρᾶγ-; πεπραξ-; 
πεπράξομαι. 


Note 1. The future perfect is found in only a small number of 
verbs. Its stem, when a consonant precedes a, is subject to all the 
euphonic changes noticed in the future stem (§ 110, 11. 1). 


Note 2. Two verbs have a special form in Attic Greek for the 
future perfect active; θνήσκω, die, has τεθνήξω, shall be dead, formed 
from τεθνηκ-, the stem of perf. τέθνηκα, am dead ; and torn, set, has 
ἑστήξω, shall stand, from ἑστηκ-, stem of perf. ἕστηκα, stand. In 
Homer, we have also κεχἄρήσω and κεχαρήσομαι, from χαίρω (xap-), 
rejoice; and κεκαδήσω; (irreg.) from χάζω (xad-), yield. 


(d) Second Perfect Stem. The stem of the second perfect 
and pluperfect is always the simple stem with the redupli- 
cation (or augment) prefixed. The stem is generally modified 
by changing « to o, or by lengthening other short vowels. 
See 8 109, 3, with the examples. 


For second perfects and pluperfects of the pr-form, see ὃ 124. 


Note 1. Vowel stems do not form second perfects; dxov-a, hear, 
is only an apparent exception, as ἀκήκοα is for dx-nxoF-a with F omit- 
ted (§ 102). 


Note 2. Few verbs have both a first and a second perfect. In 
πράσσω (mpay-), do, we have πέπρᾶχα, have done, and πέπρᾶγα, fare 
(well or ill); 80 dv-otyw, open, ἀν-έῳχα (trans.), ἀν-έῳγα (intrans.). 


Nore 3. The second perfect stem appears especially in the Homeric 
dialect, which has many second perfects not found in Attic ; as προ-βέβουλα 
from βούλομαι, wish, μέμηλα from pédw, concern, Homer has many varie- 
ties of the 2 perfect participle of the sui-form ; in ἄώς, gen. a@ros (some- 
times adros), fem. dvia, as γεγαώς, BeBaws ; in nws, gen. NWTOS OF ηότος, fem. 
quia, as τεθνηώς, τεθνηῶτος or -dros, τεθνηυῖα. Herodotus has eds, εῶσᾶ; 
eds, gen. εῶτος, edons, as ἑστεώς, &c., some forms of which (6.9. ἑστεῶτα, 
τεθνεῶτι) occur in Homer. The Attic contracts ads, adca, ads, to ws, 
doa, és (§ 69, N.), gen. Gros, dons, &c., but leaves τεθνεώς (of θνήσκω) 
uncontracted. 

Norse 4. The stem of the feminine of the second perfect participle in 


Homer often has a short vowel when the other genders have a long one; as 
dpnpws, apdpuia; τεθηλώς, τεθᾶλυϊα. 


140 INFLECTION. [§ 110. 


V. (Second Aorist Stem.) The stem of the second aorist. 
active and middle is the simple stem of the verb, to which the 
second aorist stands in the same relation in which the imper- 
fect stands to the present stem; as λείπω (Aiz-), 2 aor. ἔλϊπον, 
ἐλιπόμην (impf. ἔλειπον, ἐλειπόμην) ; λαμβάνω (AGB-), take, 2 aor. 
ἔλαβον, ἐλαβόμην. 


Notre 1. A few second aorist stems change ε to a; as τέμνω 
(reu-), cut, ἔταμον, ἐταμόμην. See ὃ 109, 4, N. 1. 


Notre 2. <A few stems are syncopated (§ 109, 7); as méropa 
(wer-), fly, 2 aor. m. ἐπτόμην for ἐπετ-ομην; ἐγείρω (eyep-), rouse, ἦγρό- 
μὴν for ἠγερ-ομην;- ἦλθον, went, from stem ἐλῦθ-, for ἤλυθον (Hom.); 
ἕπομαι (σεπ-), follow, ἑσπόμην, for ἑσεπ-ομην; ἔχω (σεχ-); have, ἔσχον 
for ἐσσεχτον. So the Homeric ἐκεκλόμην, for ἐ-κε-κελτ-ομην, OF κεκλόμην, 
from κέλομαι, command ; ἄλαλκον, for dd-adex-ov, from ἀλέξω (ἀλεκ-), 
ward off: for these and other reduplicated second aorists, see § 100, 
Notes 3 and 4. 


Norte 8. For second aorists of the ju-form, like ἔβην, see ὃ 125, 3. 


VI. (First Passive Stem.) The stem of the first aorist pas- 
sive is formed by adding θε to the stem as it appears (omit- 
ting the reduplication or augment) in the perfect middle or 
passive, with all its modifications (IV. a): in the indicative, 
imperative, and infinitive, θε becomes θη. In the future pas- 
sive σ is added to θη; making the stem in θησ. £.g. 


Ave, λέλυ-μαι, ἐλύθην (λυθη-), (AvOE-w) AVG, AvOe-inv, λυθῆ-ναι, λυ- 
θείς (AvOe-vt-), λυθήσ-ομαι; πράσσω (πρᾶγ-), πέπραγ-μαι, ἐπράχ-θην 
(§ 16, 1), πραχθήσ-ομαι; πείθω, persuade, πέπεισ-μαι (§ 16, 3; § 108, 
II. Note), ἐπείσθην, πεισθήσομαι; φιλέω, πε-φίλη:μαι (§ 109, 1), ἐφιλή- 
θην; τιμάω, τε-τίμη-μαι. ἐτιμήθην, τιμηθήσομαι; τελέω, τετέλε-σ-μαι (§ 109, 
2), ἐτελέσ-θην, τελεσθήσομαι; κλίνω, κέκλι-μαι (§ 109, 6), ἐκλί-θην, κλι- 
θήσομαι; τείνω (rev-), τέτα-μαι (§ 109, 4 and 6), ἐτάθην, ἐκ-ταθήσομαι. 


ΝΟΤΕῚ. Tpérw has τέτραμμαι, ἐτρέφθην (Ion. ἐτράφθην); τρέφω has 
τέθραμμαι, ἐθρέφθην ; and στρέφω has ἔστραμμαι, with (rare) ἐστρέφθην 
(lon. and Dor. ἐστράφθην). Φαίνω has πέφασμαι (ὃ 16, 6, N. 4), but 
ἐφάνθην. 


Nore 2. Ν is added in Homer to some vowel stems before @ of the ao- 
rist passive ; as ἱδρύω, ercct, ἵδρῦμαι, ἱδρύν-θην (Attic ἱδρύθην). So Hom. ἐκλίν- 
θην and éxpivOny (δ 109, 6). 


Note 3. For ἐτέθην (for ἐθε-θηνῚ, from τίθημι (θε-), and ἐτύθην (for ἐθυ- 
θην) from θύω, sacrifice, see ὃ 17, 2, Note. We have, however, ἐθρέφθην and 
τεθράφ-θαι from τρέφω, nourish, perhaps to distinguish these forms from 
ἐτρέφθην and τετράφθαι from τρέπῳ, turn. 


second future passive σ is added to this ἡ, maki 
in no. The only regular modification of the stem 


111.) FORMATION OF TENSE STEMS. 141 


VII. (Second Passive Stem.) The stem of the second aorist 
passive is formed by adding ε to the simple stem: in the 
indicative, imperative, and infinitive, « becomes ἡ. In. the 


of « to & explained in§ 109, 4. Hg. 


ἀὶ ὁ + 
Βλάπτω (βλἄβ.), hurt, ἐβλάβην, βλαβήσομαι; γράφω, wWrite/ ἐγράφην, 
γρἄφήσομαι; ῥίπτω (pip-), throw, ἐρρίφην ; φαίνω (φᾶἄν-), show, ἐφάνην, 
φᾶἄνήσομαι; στρέφω, turn, ἐστράφην, στρἄφησομαι; τέρπω, amuse; ἐτάρ- 
anv (Hom.) with subj., by metathesis, τρᾶπ-είω. A 
in § 109, 4, and N. 1. 


᾿ 
II, 
III. 


IV. 


Vy. 


VI 


Vik: 


the stem 
fhe change ~~ 


See the examples ΝῚ 


“eneees - 


Notre 1. The simple stem of verbs of the second class, which 
seldom appears in other tenses (8 108, ITI. Note), is seen in the 
second passive system; as σήπω (σἄπ-). corrupt, ἐσάπην, σἄπήσομαι; 
τήκω (τἄκ-), mell, ἐτάκην; pew (pi-), flow, ἐρρύην, pinoopar; ἐρείπω 
(€pin-), throw down, npimny (poetic), but 1 aor. ἠρείφθην (ἐρειπ-). 


Note 2. Πλήσσω (mAny-), strike, has 2 aor. pass. ἐπλήγην, but in 
composition ἐξ-επλἄγην and κατ-επλἄγην (as if from a stem πλἄγ-). 


Note 3. The only verb which has both the 2 aor. passive and 
the 2 aor. active is τρέπω, (urn, which has all the six aorists. 


§ 111. The following table shows the seven tense stems 
(so far as they exist) of Avw, λείπω (Aiz-), πράσσω (πρᾶγ-): 
φαίνω (φᾶν-), and στέλλω (στελ-). 


Present (all voices). 
Future Act. & Mid. 
Aorist Act. & Mid. 


(a.) Mid. 
(b.) Act. 
(c.) Fut. P. 
(d.) 2 Perf. 


2d Aor. Act. & Mid. 


First ) (a.) 1 Aor. 
* (Pass.) (6.) 1 Fut. 


2d )(a.) 2 Aor. 
Pass.) (b.) 2 Fut. 


Perfect | 


λυ- λειπ- πρασσ- 
λυσ- λειψ- πραξ- 
λῦσ- πραξ- 
λελῦ- λελειπ- πεπραγ- 
λελῦκ- πεπρᾶαχ- 


λελῦσ- λελειψ- πεπραξ- 


λελοιπ- πεπραγ- 


λῖπ- 


φαιν- στελλ- 
φἄνε- στελε- 
φην- στειλ- 
mepav- ἐστᾶλ.- 
πεφαγκ- ἐστάλκ- 
πεφην- 


λύὕθε(η)- λειφθε(η)- πραχθε(η)- φανθε(η)- 


λύθησ- λειφθησ- πραχθησ- 


φάνε(η)- στἄλε(η)- 
φἄνησ- στάἄλησ- 


142 ᾿ INFLECTION. [8 112. 


PERSONAL ENDINGS. 


ο 8112, 1. The endings which are peculiar to the different 

persons of the verb are called personal endings. ‘These have 
one form for the active voice, and another for the passive and 
middle; but the aorist passive has the endings of the active 
voice. 


2. The personal endings, which are most distinctly 
preserved in verbs in μὲ and other primitive forms, are as 
follows : — 


ACTIVE. PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 

Primary Tenses. Secondary Tenses. Primary Tenses. Secondary Tenses. 
Sing. 1. μὲ or — vor —_ μαι μην 

2. 5 (σὺ ς σαι σο 

8. σι (τι) or — — ται το 
Dual 2. τον τον σθον σθον 

3. TOV τὴν σθον σθην 
Plur. 1. μεν (pes) μεν (μες) μεθα μεθα 

2. τε τε σθε σθε 

8. vos (ντι) v or σὰν νται ντο 


Nore. The active endings μι and o in the first and third person 
singular are not used in the indicative except in verbs in ps, verbs 
in having no endings in these persons. The original ending σι of 
the second person singular is found only in the Epic ἐσ-σί, thou art, 
in all other verbs being reduced to σ. In the third person singular 
τι is Doric, as τίθη-τι for τίθησι; and it is preserved in Attic in ἐσ-τί; 
he is. In the first person plural pes is Doric. In the third person 
plural νσι always drops ν and lengthens the preceding vowel, as in 
λύουσι for λυο-νσι (ὃ 16, 6); the original form ντι is Doric, as φέροντι 
for φέρουσι (Lat. ferunt). The perfect indicative active of all verbs, 
and the present indicative active of verbs in μὲ (8 121, 2, αν, have 
σι (for aver) in the third person plural.} 


1 Among the original active endings, inherited from the parent language 
of the Greek, Latin, Sanskrit, German, &c., were su, σι, τι, in the singular, 
and yrc in the third person plural. In the past tenses, these were first 
shortened by dropping 1, and became μ, s, 7, and v7, in which form they 
appear in Latin, as in era-m, era-s, era-t, era-nt. In μι, σι, and τι, and 
in the original μὲς in the first person plural (compare Latin mus), we see 


§ 112.] PERSONAL ENDINGS. 148 


3. In the perfect and pluperfect passive and middle, and 
in both aorists passive (except in the subjunctive and opta- 
tive), the endings are added directly to the tense stem; as 
λέλυ-μαι, λέλυ-σαι, λέλυ-ται, λέλυ-νται, ἐ-λελύ-μην ; €-AVOy-v, 
ἐ-λύθη-ς, ἐ-λύθη, ἐ-χύθη-σαν (8 111). 

So also in verbs in μι, in most of the forms which are 
peculiar to that conjugation (8 121, 1); as φα-μέν, φα-τέ, from 
φημί (φᾶ-), say; ἵστα-μαι, ἵστα-σαι, ἵστα-ται, ἵστα-νται, from 
ἵστημι, set (δ 128). | 

4. In other parts of the verb the tense stem appears in a 
prolonged form, consisting of the fixed portion and a variable 
vowel (sometimes a diphthong), to which the endings are 
affixed. ‘This formation will be seen by a comparison of the 
present indicative middle of τίθημι {τιθε-) with that of φιλέω. 
(φιλε-) in its uncontracted (Ionic) form : — 


τίθε-μαι φιλέ-ο-μαι τιθέ-μεθα φιλε-ό-μεθα 
τίθε-σαι φιλέ-ε-(σ)αν τίθε-σθε φιλέ-ε-σθε 
τίθε-ται φιλέ-ε-ται τίθε-νται φιλέ-ο-νται 
τίθε-σθον φιλέ-ε-σθον (For τίθημι see § 123.) 


Compare also the perfect Aé€-Av-yat, λέελυ-ται, A€-Av-o Ge, 
Aé-Av-vrat (8 112, 3), with the present λύτο-μαι, λύ-ε-ται, λύ-ε- 


the roots of the personal pronouns, J, thou, he, and we (compare μέ, σέ, τόν, 
and the Epic ἄμ-μες), which were originally appended to the verbal root, 
instead of being prefixed as in English. These forms therefore really 
include the pronoun, which is commonly said to be omitted. 

A comparison of the various forms of the present indicative of the prim- 
itive verb be (whose original stem is as-, in Greek and Latin es-), as it 
appears in Sanskrit, the older Greek, Latin, Old Slavic, and Lithuanian 
(the most primitive modern language, stil/ spoken on the Baltic), will illus- 
trate the Greek verbal endings. 


Singular. 
Sanskrit. Greek. Latin. Old Slavic. Lithuanian. 

1. as-mi ἐμ-μί (for éo-pr) ζ[6]5-πὶ yes-m’ es-mi 

2. asi ἐσ-σί 65 . yesi esi 

3. as-ti ἐσ-τί es-t yes-t’ es-ti 
Plural. 

1. s-mas ἐσ-μέν (Dor. εἰμές) [e]s-u-mus yes-mi es-me 

2. s-tha ἐσ-τέ es-tis yes-te es-te 


3. s-a-nti ἐ-ντί (Doric) [e]s-u-nt s-u-t’ es-ti 


144 INFLECTION. [§ 113. 


σθε, λύ-τοτνται. The vowel which thus completes the stem 
is called a connecting vowel;+ and it appears (sometimes 
with o and ε lengthened to w and εἰ even when the ending 
is dropped (8 113, 1), as in λέγω (for λεγο-μι) and λέγει (for ἡ 
λεγε-τι). 


Indicative. 


$118. 1. The original connecting vowel in the indicative 
of verbs in w (except in the aorist active and middle, and 
the perfect and pluperfect active) was o before p or v, and 
elsewhere «. In the singular of the present and future 
active, when pc and τι were dropped and ot became o 
(§ 112, 2, dee a the primitive o and ε were lengthened 
into w and e.? 

The connecting vowel is a ‘in all persons of the first aorist 
middle; also in the perfect and first aorist active, except 


1 The name ‘‘ connecting vowel” belongs to the doctrine formerly held, 
by which this vowel was made a third element in the formation of the verb, 
distinct from both the stem and the ending. The more correct view con- _ 
siders it a part of the tense stem, which thus consists of the fixed portion 
(e.g. Ney-, λυ-, λειπ-, in the present) and a vowel sound which varies accord- 
ing to the following letter (6.9. λεγο- or Aeye-). In the original language 
it was uniformly a, as it appears in the Sanskrit bhara-mi (below). In an 
elementary work, it is more convenient to treat this variable formative 
suffix separately, so that the tense stems are given (as in § 95) in their 
shorter forms (λυ-, λειπ-, &c.). 


2 The supposed original forms of the present indicative of λέγω and the 
Latin Zego are thus given by G. Curtius (Griechisches Verbum, I. p. 200). 
The actual forms of the Sanskrit present bharami, I bear (= φέρω, Sero), 
are given on the right, and the Attic forms of λέγω on the left. 


Attic Greek. ' Primitive Greek. Primitive Latin. Sanskrit. 
λέγω λεγο-μι lego-m (i) bhara-mi 
λέγεις ο λεγε-σι lege-s(i) bhara-si 
λέγει λεγε-τι lege-t(i) bhara-ti 
λέγο-μεν λεγο-μες lego-mas bhara-mas 
λέγε-τε λεγε-τε lege-tes bhara-tha 
λέγουσι λεγο-ντι lego-nt(i) bhara-nti 


for Seicans (§ 16, 6) 


From λεγο-μὲ comes λέγω, from λεγε-σι comes λέγεις, and from λεγε-τι 
comes λέγει for λεγειτ (ὃ 7). 


§ 118.} PERSONAL ENDINGS. 145 


in the third person singular where it is ε. In the plu- 
perfect active it is εἰ; but in the third person plural it is 
ε (rarely εἰ). ᾿ 

2. The personal endings of the indicative, as they appear 


in verbs in ὦ united with the connecting vowels, are as . 
follows :— 


I, ACTIVE. 
Pres. ἃ Fut, Perf, Aor. “Impf. & 2 Aor. Plup. 
li ὦ ᾿ ἅ ον ειν 
S. “9.2. εἰς ἅς ες εἰς 
3. εἰ € Ε ει 
D ze erov ἅτον ετον εἰτον 
3. erov ἅτον ἅτην emmy εἰτὴν 
1. ομεν ἅμεν ομεν εἰμεν 
P. 4 2. ere ἅτε ετε εἰτε 
8. ουσι ace ay ov ray 
(for over) (for avo) or εἰσαν 
II. PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
Pres., Fut., anal Impf. Pass. & Mid., Aor. Middle Ν 
Fut. Perf. & 2 Aor. Middle. " - ‘ 
ιν ομαι ομην ᾿ἅμην 
S. 42. ἢ or εὖ (for erat, ea) ov (for ἐσ, εο) w (for aco, ao) 
3. εται ετο ἅτο 
p ; 2. eo Boy εσϑον ασϑον 
“es εσϑον εἐσθην acOnv 
1. ομεθα ομεθα | ἄμεθα 
P. 42 εσθε εσθε ασϑε 
3. ovTat οντο αντο 


By adding these terminations to the unprolonged tense 
stems as they are given in § 111, all the tenses of the in- 
dicative, except those included in § 112, 3, may be formed. 
The latter may be formed by adding the personal endings 
given in § 112, 2 directly to the tense stems. 

Note 1. The endings oa and ao in the second person singular of 
the passive and middle drop o after a connecting vowel (§ 16, 4, N.), 

10 


146 τς INFLECTION. [8 114. 


and are then contracted with the connecting vowel (8 9, 4, N. 1). 
Thus, Avy or λύει is for Avera, λύεαι; ἐλύου is for ἐλυεσο, ἐλύεο; 
ἐλύσω (aorist middle) is for ἐλυσασυ, ékvoao. The uncontracted 
forms (without 7) are common in Ionic Greek (§ 119, 2). 


Notre 2. The second persons βούλει (of βούλομαι, wish), οἴει (of 
οἴομαι, think), and ὄψει (of ὄψομαι, fut. of dpdw, see) have no forms 
in 7- 

Nore 8. A first person dual in peOoy is found very rarely in 
poetry; as λελείμμεθον (pf. pass. of λείπω). 


Notre 4. The Attic writers sometimes have ἡ (contracted from 
the Ionic ea, § 119, 4) for ew in the first person singular of the 
pluperfect active, as ἐμεμαθήκη. 


Note 5. In Homer τὸν and cov are sometimes used for την and 
σθην in the dual. This occurs rarely in the Attic poets, who some- 
times have τὴν for τὸν in the second person. The latter is found 
occasionally even in prose. 


Subjunctive. 


§ 114. The Subjunctive has the primary endings with 
long connecting vowels, w, y, and y, for ὦ (or o), ε, and εἰ of 
the indicative, as follows : — 


ACTIVE. | PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. | 
Sing. Dual. Plural. Sing. Dual. Plural. 
1. @ ape ωμαι ὠμεθα 
2 ys τον NTE n (for noo, nat) ynobov node 


ὃ. OY τον wor (for aver) | ται ἢσθον ωνται 


For the perfect subjunctive passive and middle see 8 118, 1. 


Nore 1. The aorist passive subjunctive (both first and second), 
which does not omit the connecting vowel (8 112, 3), has the active 
terminations (ἢ 114) contracted with final e of the stem; as λυθέ-ω, 
Avda; φανέ-ης, φανῇς ; σταλέ-ῃ, σταλῇ. 

Nore 2. The subjunctive of verbs in nus and wpe has the above 
terminations contracted with preceding ε or o of the stem; as τιθῶ 
(for τιθε- ὦ), διδῶμαι (for διδοτωμαι). θῶμεν and θῶνται (Ion. θέωμεν, 
θέωνται). See § 122, N. 4; 8 126, 7 (a). 


Optative. 


8 115. The optative has the secondary personal endings 
(δ 112, 2), preceded by a modal sign ἐ or wy (ce before final v 
of the third person plural). 


8 115.] PERSONAL ENDINGS. 147 


1. Verbs in ὦ have a connecting vowel o (in the first aorist 
active and middle, a) in the optative. This is contracted with 
e (or ve), making ot or a (ove or ate). The first person singu- 
lar active has the ending μὲ for v (8 112, 2), except in some 
contract forms (see 4). Adding the endings we have 


ACTIVE. PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 

Sing. Dual. Plural. Sing. Dual. Plural. 
1. οιμι οιμεν οιμὴν οιμεθα 
2. ow οἴτον οἱτε ovo (for ooo) οιἰσθον οισθε 
3. οι ourny ovev oLTo οισθην οιντο 

Aorist ACTIVE. Aorist MIDDLE. 

1. αἱμι cupev αιμὴν αιμεθα 
2. αις aLTov auTe ato (for arco) atcbov aoe 
3. αι αιτὴν αιεν αιτο αισθην atyTo 


For periphrastic forms of the perfect optative see ὃ 118,1. For 
the aorist passive see below, 8. 


2. In the present and second aorist middle of verbs in nye 
and wy, the final vowel of the tense stem (a, ε, or o) is con- 
tracted with « into at, εἰ, or οἱ, to which the simple endings μὴν, 
&e. are added; as ἵστα-ι-μην, ἱσταίμην ; θειι-μην, θείμην ; δο-ι- 
μὴν, δοίμην. (See § 122, N. 4.) See also the cases of per- 
fect optative middle in ἡμὴν in ὃ 118, 1, Note. 


3. The present and second aorist active of the pu-form 
(§ 121, 1), and both aorists passive in all verbs, have the 
ending ν in the first person singular and σὰν in the third per- 
son plural. Here the modal sign is wy, with which a, ε, or o of 
the stem is contracted to aw, ey, or on; as ἱστα-ιη-ν, ἱσταίην 5 
στατιη-μεν, σταίημεν ; λυθε-ιη-ν, λυθείην ; δο-ιη-ν, δοίην. 

In the dual and plural, forms with « for cy, and tev for τησαν 
in the third person plural, are much more common than the 
longer forms; as σταῖμεν, σταῖεν, for σταΐημεν, σταίησαν. (See 
§ 123, 2.) 


4. In the present active of contract verbs, forms in om, 
owns, ov (for o-t-nv, &c.) are more common in the singular than 
the regular forms in ops, os, οἱ (see 1), but less common in > 


148 INFLECTION. [8 116. 


the dual and plural: the third person plural in οἰησαν is very 
rare. 

Both the forms in ony and those in own. are contracted with 
a of the tense stem to wn and wp, and with ε or o to omy and 
οιμι ; AS τιμα-ο-ιη-ν, τιμαοίην, τιμῴην ; φιλε-ο-ιη-ν, φιλεοίην, φι- 
Aoinv; δηλο-ο-ἰη-ν, δηλοοίην, δηλοίην ; τιμα-ο-ἰ-μι, τιμάοιμι, τιμῷμι; 
φιλεο-ι-μι, φιλέοιμι, φιλοῖμι; δηλο-ο-ι-μι, δηλόοιμι, δηλοῖμι. (See 
§ 98.) 

ΝΟΤΕ 1. A few verbs have omy in the second perfect optative; 
as ἐκπέφευγα, ἐκπεφευγοίην. The second aorist optative of ἔχω, have, 
is σχοίην (σχοῖμιε in composition). 

Note 2. The Attic cage gt uses the Aeolic terminations e:as, 


eve, and evav, for ats, at, acev, in the aorist optative active. See Ave 
and φαίνω in § 96. 


Imperative. x4 


| 


§ 116. 1. The personal endings of the imperative are as 
follows : — 


ACTIVE. . PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
Sing. Dual. Plural. Singe Dual. Plural. 
2. O®.or— τὸν τε co σθον σθε 
ὃ. Te των τωσαν Or ντων σθω σθων σθωσαν or σθων 


θι is always dropped after a connecting vowel. 


2. The regular connecting vowel of the imperative is ε; 
but before vit is o. In the aorist active and middle it is a. 
But the second person singular in the aorist active ends in ov, 
and in the aorist middle in a. The endings united with the 
connecting vowels are as follows : — 


ACTIVE. PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
Sing. Dual. Plural. Sing. Dual. Plural. 
24 erov _ ere ov (for x0, €0) εσθον εσθε 
8. ere €Tov ετωσαν ἐσϑω ἔσθων εἐσθωσαν 
or οντων Σ or ἐσθων 
Aorist ACTIVE. AorisT MIDDLE. 
9. ὃν arov are “Soe aclov ασθε 
3. are ατωὼν ατωσαν ασϑω ᾿ς ἄσθὼν αἀσθωσαν 
or ἀντων or αἀσθων 


§ 117.] PERSONAL ENDINGS. 149 


3. The first aorist passive adds the ordinary active termina- 
tions (θι, τω, &c.) directly to θη of the tense stem, after which 
6 becomes τι (8 17, 3); as λύθη-τι, λυθή-τω, KC. 

The second aorist passive adds the same terminations to 7 
of the tense stem (@ being retained) ; as φάνη-θι, φανήττω ; 
στάλη-θι, σταλή-τω, &C. β 

Both aorists have evrwv in the third person plural. 


Norse. For the form of the imperative in verbs in μὲ, see § 121, 2, 
(5) and (c). 


The Infinitive, Participle, and Verbal Adjectives. 


8 117. 1. The terminations of the infinitive of verbs in w 
(including connecting vowels) are as follows : — 


Present and Future Active ει-ν 

Second Aorist Active έει-ν (cont. εἶν) 
Perfect Active έναι 

Aorist Active αι 

Aor. Pass. (no connecting vowel) ναὶ 

Perf. Pass. and Mid. ,, σθαι 

Aorist Middle α-σθαι 

Other tenses, Pass. and Mid.  εεοεςσθαι. 


All pi-forms add. vou (act.) or σθαι (pass. and mid.) di- 
rectly to the tense stem. | 


2. The stem of the active participle ends in vr (τ in the 
perfect), which is joined to the tense stem by o (a in the ao- 
rist) ; except in the aorist passive (ὃ 112, 1) and in pu-forms, 
which add vr directly to the stem. 

The passive and middle participle ends in pevos (stem 
pevo-), Which is preceded by o (a in the aorist middle); ex- 
cept in the perfect and in p-forms, which add μενος directly 
to the tense stem. 


Norte. Participial stems in yr add oa to form the stem of the 
feminine; as Avovr-ca, λύουσα; ἵσταντ-σα, ἱστᾶσα; λυθεντ-σα, λυθεῖσα. 
(8 16, 6, Ν. 1.) Perfects in ὡς, dros ὥς in νὴ have an irregular 
feminine in via. Participles in μενος form the feminine in μένη. 

For the declension of participles, see §§ 62, 68, 69. 


ν 


1δ0 INFLECTION. [§ 118. 


3. The stem of the verbal adjectives in ros and τεὸς is 
formed by adding το- or reo- to the stem of the verb, which 
has the same form here as in the aorist passive (with the ne- 
cessary change of ¢ and x to π and x, ὃ 16, 1); as λυτός, 
λυτέος (stems Av-ro-, Av-reo-) ; τριπτός, πειστέος (Stems τριπ-το-; 
πεισ-τεο-) ; τακτός, τακτέος, from τάσσω (stem ταγ-), A0r. pass. 
ἐτάχ-θην. 


Note 1. The verbal in ros is sometimes equivalent to a perfect 
passive participle, as xpirds, decided, τακτός, ordered; and some- 
times expresses capability, as λυτός, capable of being loosed, ἀκουστός, 
audible. 


Note 2. The verbal in τεὸς is equivalent to a future passive par- 
ticiple (the Latin participle in dus); as λυτέος, that must be loosed, 
solvendus ; τιμητέος, to be honored, honorandus. 

For the impersonal use-of the neuter in τεὸν in an active sense, 
see Syntax, § 281, 2. 


“ 1, . PERIPHRASTIC FORMS. 


‘/§ 118. 1. The perfect subjunctive and optative middle 
and passive is generally formed by the perfect participle with 
ὦ and εἴην, the subjunctive and optative of εἰμί, be; as λελυμέ- 
vos (-n, -ov) ὦ, λελυμένος (-7, -ov) εἴην. See the paradigms. 


Norte. A few verbs with vowel stems form these tenses directly 
from the stem: κτά-ομαι, κτῶμαι, acquire, pf. κέκτημαι, possess ; subj. 
κεκτῶμαι (for κε-κτα- μαι), κεκτῇ; κεκτῆται; Opt. κεκτῴμην (for κε-κτα- 
oun), κεκτῷο, κεκτῷτο, and κεκτήμην (for κεκτη-ἐ-μην, ὃ 115, 2), κεκτῇο, 
KEKTHTO, κεκτήμεθα: --- μιμνήσκω (μνα-}), remind, pf. μέμνημαι, remember : 
subj. μεμνῶμαι, μεμνώμεθα (Hdt. μεμνεώμεθα) ; opt. μεμνῴμην (Hom. 
μεμνέῳτο);, OY μεμνήμην. So poetic κεκλήμην (for κεκλη-ι-μην) Of καλέω, 
aud Homeric λελῦτο (for AeAv-t-ro) Or λελῦντο Of λύω. See also pr. 
opt. dawiro of δαίνυμι. 


2. The perfect subjunctive and optative active is more fre- 
quently expressed by the perfect active participle with ὦ and 
εἴην than by the special forms given in the paradigms ; as A«Av- 
Kas ὦ and λελυκὼς εἴην for λελύκω and λελύκοιμι. 


Note. The perfect imperative can be expressed by the perfect 
puticiple and ἴσθι, ἔστω, &c.; as εἰρηκὼς ἔστω, let him have spoken 
(before a given time) ; εἰρημένον ἔστω (§ 202, 2, N. 1). The forms 
like λέλυκε; λέλοιπε, &C. were probably used only when the perfect | 
had the meaning of the present; as χάσκω (xay-), gape, pf. κέχηνα, 
imper. κεχήνατε, gape. (See § 95, 1, Note.) 


§ 119.] DIALECTIC AND POETIC FORMS OF VERBS INQ. 151 


3. The future perfect active, for which very few verbs have 
a special form (8 110, IV. 6, N. 2), is generally expressed b 
the perfect participle with ἔσομαι (future of εἰμί, be); as pay 
τες ἐσόμεθα, we shall have learnt. 


4. Even the perfect and pluperfect indicative are occasion- 
ally expressed by the perfect participle and εἰμί; as γεγονώς 


ἐστι for γέγονε, πεποιηκὼς ἦν for ἐπεποιήκει. 


5. The periphrastic third person plural of the perfect and 
pluperfect indicative middle and passive, formed by the parti- 
ciple and εἰσί and ἦσαν, is necessary when the stem ends in a 
consonant (§ 97, 2). The participle may be used in all gen- 
ders ; as οὗτοι λελειμμένοι εἰσί, these (men) have been left; αὗται 
'λελειμμέναι εἰσί; ταῦτα λελειμμένα ἐστί (8 185, 2). . 


Note. Here, however, the Ionic endings ara and aro for νταὶ 
and vro (ὃ 119, 3) are occasionally used even in Attic prose; as re- - 
τάχ-αται and érerax-aro (Thucyd.) for τεταγμένοι εἰσί and ἦσαν. 


6. A periphrastic future is sometimes formed by μέλλω, tn- 
tend, be about (to do), and the present or future (seldom the 
aorist) infinitive ; as μέλλομεν τοῦτο ποιεῖν (OF ποιήσειν) ; we are 
about to do this. (See § 202, 3, Note.) 


DIALECTIC AND POETIC FORMS OF VERBS IN 12. 


8 119. 1. The Doric has the personal endings pes for μεν, τᾶν 
for την, pav for pny, οντι for ovat, wvrt for wot, ἀντι for aor. The poets 
have μεσθα for μεθα. 


2. When σ is dropped in σαι and go of the second person (§ 113, 
2, N. 1), Homer often keeps the uncontracted forms eat, nat, ao, εο. 
Herodotus always has eat and ao, but generally y for na. In both 
Homer and Hdt. eo may become ev. In Homer oa and go some- 
times drop o even in the perf. and pluperf.; as μέμνηαι for μέμνησαι; 
ἔσσυο for ἔσσυσο; sometimes o is doubled, as in κέκασσαι (κέκασμαι). 


3. The Ionic has ara: and aro for νται and ντὸ in the third person 
plural of the perfect and pluperfect, and aro for vro in the optative. 
Before these endings m, 8, x, and y are aspirated (, x); aS κρύπτω 
(kpuB-), κεκρύφ-αται; λέγω, λελέχ-αται, AeAex-ato. Hdt. shortens ἡ to 
€ γέ αται and aro; as οἰκέ-αται (pf. οἵ οἰκέω), Att. ᾧκη-νται; ἐτετι- 
pe-aro (plpf. οὗ τιμάω), Att. ἐτετίμη-ντος Hom. rarely inserts ὃ be-. 
tween the vowel of a stem and ara: or aro (see ἐλαύνω and paiva). 


152 τς INFLECTION. | ᾿ς [8 119. 


These forms sometimes occur in Attic (§ 118, 5, Note). Hdt. has 
ara and aro also in the present and imperfect of verbs in μι. 


4. Homer and Herodotus have ea, eas, ee(v), for Attic εἰν; εἰς, εἰ, 
in the pluperfect active, as ἐτεθήπεα ; whence comes the (especially 
older) Attic 1st pers. in ἡ, as ἐμεμαθήκη (ὃ 118, 2, N. 4). 


5. Homer and Herodotus generally have the uncontracted forms 
of the future (in ew and εομαι) of liquid stems; as pevéw, Attic μενῶ. 
When they are contracted, they follow the analogy of verbs in ew 
(§ 120, 2, a). 

6. The Doric has σέω, σέομαι (contracted σῶ, σοῦμαι or σεῦμαι) for 
oo, cova in the future. The Attic has σοῦμαι in the future middle 
of a few verbs (§ 110, II., N. 2). 


7. In Homer σ᾽ is sometimes doubled after a short vowel in the 
future and aorist, as τελέω, τελέσσω; καλέω, ἐκάλεσσα; κομίζω, fut. 
κομίσω (8 110, 11., N. 1, c), Hom. ἐκόμισσα, ἐκομισσάμην. Ὁ 


8. In Homer aorists with σ᾽ sometimes have the inflection of sec- 
ond aorists; as ἷξον, i£es, from ixvéopat, come ; ἐβήσετο (more common 
-than ἐβήσατο) from βαίνω, go. 


9. In Homer σαν of the aor. pass. indic. often becomes ev; as 
ὥρμηθεν for ὡρμήθησαν, from ὁρμάω, urge. So in the 2nd aor. act. of 
verbs in μὲ (§ 126, 4). 


10. Homer and Herodotus have iterative endings oxov and σκομὴν 
in the imperfect, and in the second aorist active aud middle. Hom. 
has them also in the first aorist. ‘These are added to the tense stem, 
with ¢ (a in first aorist) inserted after a preceding consonant; as 
ἔχω, imp. ἔχ-εσκον; ἐρύω, 1 aor. ἐρύσ-ασκε; φεύγω (φυγ-), 2 aor. φύγε- 
σκον. Verbs in ew have ε-εσκον or εσκον in the imperfect; as καλέε- 
σκον, πωλέσκετο; Verbs in aw have α-ασκον OF ασκον; aS yodacke, 
νικάσκομεν. Rarely other verbs have ασκον in the imperfect; as 
κρύπτασκον from κρύπτω. ' 

These forms are confined to the indicative, and they generally (in 
Hdt. always) omit the augment. ‘They denote repetition; as πω- 
λέσκετο, he went (regularly). 

For pt-forms with these endings see ὃ 126, 5. 


11. Some verbs have poetic stems, made by adding 6 preceded by 
a vowel (generally a or e) to the present or the second aorist tense 
stem; as ἀμυναθ-, dioxad-, φλεγεθ-, from dpive, ward off, διώκω, pur- 
sue, prey, burn. From these special stems are formed — sometimes 
presents, as φλεγέθω ; sometimes imperfects, as ἐδιώκαθον ; sometimes 
second aorists, as ἔσχεθον (cx-); and also subjunctives and opta- 
tives, as εἰκάθω, εἰκάθοιμι, ἀμυνάθοιτο; imperatives, as ἀμυνάθατε, ἀμυ- 
νάθου; infinitives, as ἀμυνάθειν. διωκάθειν, σχεθέειν, σχέθειν OF σχεθεῖν; 
and participles, as εἰκάθων, σχέθων or σχεθών. As few of these stems 
form a present indicative, many scholars consider ἐδιώκαθον, ἔργαθον, 


8 119.] DIALECTIC AND POETIC FORMS OF VERBS IN Q. 153 


&c., with the subjunctives, &c.second aorists, and accent the infini- 
tives and participles διωκαθεῖν, ἀμυναθεῖν, εἰκαθεῖν, εἰκαθών, &c., 
although the traditional accent is on the penult. 

See in the Lexicon ἀλκάθειν, ἀμυνάθω, διωκάθω, εἰκάθειν, ἐργάθειν, 
ἠερέθομαι, ἠγερέθομαι, μετακιάθω, σχέθω, φθινύθω, φλεγέθω. 


12. (Subjunctive.) (a) In Homer the subjunctive (especially in 
the 1st aor. act. and mid.) often has the short connecting vowels e 
and o (Attic 7 and w), yet never in the singular of the active voice 
nor in the third person plural; as ἐρύσσομεν, ἀλγήσετε, μυθήσομαι, 
εὔξεαι, δηλήσεται, ἀμείψεται, ἐγείρομεν, ipeiperat. 


(Ὁ) In both aor. pass. subjunctives Herodotus generally has the 
uncontracted forms in ew, ewapev, ewor, but contracts en (or en) to ἡ 
(or 7); as ἀφαιρεθέω (Att. -θῶ), φανέωσι (Att. -ὥσι), but φανῇ. 


(c) In the 2nd aor. pass. subj. of some verbs, Homer lengthens 
ew, ens, €n, tO et, εἰῃς (Or ns), etn (or nn), and has εἰομεν, εἰετε, for 
εωμεν, entre; aS δαμείω (from ἐδάμην, 2nd aor. p. of δαμνάω, subdue), 
Sapeins or δαμήῃς, Sapein Or δαμήῃ. δαμείετε ; τραπείομεν (from ἐτάρπην 
of τέρπω, amuse). This is more fully developed in the 2nd aor. act. 
of the pi-form (§ 126, 7, δ). 


(d) In the subj. active Homer often has wm, ῃσθα (or naa), nor; 
as ἐθέλωμι, ἐθέλῃσθα, ἐθέλῃσι. , 


18. (Optative.) The Aeolic forms of the aor. opt. act., esas, εἰε; 
evav (given in the paradigms of λύω and φαίνω), are the common forms 
in all dialects; the Aeolic has also first persons in ea and εἰμεν. 

Homer sometimes has o76a in the 2nd person for os; as κλαί- 
oa. For aro (for vro) see above, 3. 


14. (Infinitive.) (a) Homer often has ἐ-μεναι and e-pew for et-v 
in the infinitive active; as ἀμυνέμεναι, ἀμυνέμεν (Attic ἀμύνειν) ; ἐλθέ- 
μεναι, ἐλθέμεν (ἐλθεῖν) ; ἀξέμεναι, ἀξέμεν (ἄξειν). For the perfect (only 
of the μι-ίογτη, § 125, 4) see § 126, 9: the inf. in έναι does not occur 
in Homer. So Hom. μεναι, Dor. μεν, in the aor. pass.; aS ὁμοιωθή- 
μεναι, δαή-μεναι (also δαῆναι), Hom.; αἰσχυνθῆμεν, Pind. | 


(>) Homer often has the uncontracted 2nd aor. inf. act. in ee; 
as ἰδέειν. 


(c) The Doric has ev (§ 98, N. 5) and the Aeolic nv for ew in the 
infin.; Doric also ἣν for ἕειν or civ; thus ἀεῖδεν and yapvev (Dor.) for 
ἀείδειν and ynpvew; φέρην and ἔχην (Aeol.) for φέρειν and ἔχειν; εἰπῆν 
(Dor.), εἴπην (Acol.), for εἰπεῖν. 


15. (Participle.) The Doric and Aeolic have oa for ουσα, and 
ais, atoa for ag, aca, in the participle; as ἔχοισα, θρέψαις, θρέψαισα. 


154 INFLECTION. [8 120. 


Special Forms of Contract Verbs. 


§ 120. The present and imperfect of verbs in aw, ew, and ow 
have the following dialectic peculiarities : — 


1. (Verbs in aw.) (a) In Homer verbs in aw are often contracted 
as in Attic. In a few cases they remain uncontracted; sometimes 
without change, as vaterdovot, ναιετάων, from ναιετάω, dwell; some- 
times with a, as in πεινάω, hunger, διψάω, thirst ; sometimes with εὸν 
for ἄον in the imperfect, as pevoiveoy from μενοινάω, long for. 


(Ὁ) Commonly, when they are not contracted in Homer, the two 
vowels (or the vowel and diphthong) which elsewhere are contracted 
are assimilated, so as to give a Aoible A oradouble O sound. The 
second syllable, if it is short by nature or has a diphthong with. a 
short initial vowel, is generally prolonged; sometimes the former 
syllable; rarely both. We thus have aa (sometimes Ga) for ae or ἄη 
(aq for Gee or &), and ow (sometimes wo or we) for do or tw (o@ 
for Gor) : 


ὁρᾶᾳς for δράεις 

épda. >> Opder or ὁράῃ 

Spdacbe ,, δράεσθε 

ὁράασθαι ,, ὁράεσθαι 

μνάασθαι ,, μνἄεσθαι 

ὁράαν », Opdew (Dor. ὁράεν) 
ὁρόω ,»(| ὁράω 

ὁρόωσι »γ{. ὁράουσι (ἰ.6. ὁραονσι) 
ὁρόωσα », ὁράουσα (.6. ὁραοντ-σα, § 117, 2, N.) 
ὁρόφεν »» ὁράοιεν 

Spdwvrat ,, ὁράονται 

αἰτιόῳο »9 αἰτιάοιο 


The lengthening of the former vowel occurs only when the word 


could not otherwise stand in the Homeric verse; as in ἡβώοντες for 
ἡβἄοντες, ἡβώοιμι for ἡβἄοιμι, μνάασθαι for μνἄεσθαι, μνώοντο for 
(€)uvaovto. In this case the second vowel or diphthong is not 
lengthened (see the examples above) ; except in a final syllable, as 
in pevowaa (for -dev), or When woa or wot comes from οντσα or ovat, 
as in ἡβώωσα, δρώωσι, for ἡβᾶἅ-οντσα, Spa-ovet. 

This assimilation never occurs unless the second vowel is long 
either by nature or by position; thus dpdopev, ὁράετε, ὁραέτω cannot 
become ὁροωμεν, ὅραατε, dpaaro. It extends also to the so-called 
Attic futures in aca, dw, 6 (§ 110, II. Note 1, δ); as ἐλόω, ἐλόωσι, 
κρεμόω, δαμάᾳ, δαμόωσι, for ἐλάσω (ἐλάω), το. 


(c) The Doric contracts ae and ay to n; this occurs in the dual of 
a few imperfects in Homer, as προσαυδήτην (from mpocavdaw), φοι- 


§ 120.] SPECIAL FORMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 155 


τήτην (φοιτάω), συλήτην (cvAdw). So Hom. dpya (or ὁρῆαι) for 
ὁράεαι (Attic ὁρᾷ) in the pres. ind. middle of ὁράω. See 2 (d). 


(4) Herodotus sometimes changes aw, ao, and aov to ew, eo, and 
cov, especially in ὁράω, eipwrdw, and doirdw; as ὁρέω, ὁρέοντες, ὁρέουσι, 
εἰρώτεον, époireov. ‘These forms are generally uncontracted; but co 
and eov sometimes become ev (2, a), as εἰρώτευν. 

In other cases Herodotus contracts verbs in aw regularly, 


(6) In Homer, e-pevae (§ 119, 14, a) in the pres. infin. act. of 
verbs in aw and ew becomes ἡμεναι by contracting ε with a or e of 
the stem (1, 6); as yonpevat (yodw) for yoe-epevar, πεινήμεναι (πεινάω). 
See 2 (d). 


2. (Verbs in ew.) (a) Verbs in ew generally remain uncontracted 
in both Homer and Herodotus. But Homer sometimes contracts ee 
or eet to et, aS τάρβει (rapBee); and both Homer and Herodotus some- 
times contract eo or eov to ev (Hdt. especially in dyvoéw, διανοέομαι, 
θηέομαι, νοέω, ποιέω); “88 ποιεῦσι, ἀγνοεῦντες, διανοεῦντο. So in the 
Attic futures in tow, ἴσομαι (ἢ 110, II. Note 1, 6), as κομιεύμεθα 
(Iidt.). Hdt. has generally δεῖ, must, but impf. ἔδεε. 


(>) Homer sometimes drops ε in eae and eo (for eoat, evo, § 119, 
2) after ε, thus changing éeac and éeo to ea and €o, as μυθέαι for 
μυθέεαι (from μυθέομαι), ἀποαιρέο (for ἀποαιρέεο) ; but he oftener con- 
tracts éeac and ¢eo to cia and eto, as μυθεῖαι, αἰδεῖο (for aidéeo). He- 
rodotus sometimes drops the second ε in ée0; as φοβέο (also φοβεῦ), 
αἰτέο, ἐξηγέο. 


(c) In Homer, final ε of the stem is often lengthened into «; as” 
νεικείω, mveiw, LOY νεικέω, πνέω. So in ἐτελεί-ετο from τελέω, τελείω. 
A similar change takes place in ew of the 2nd aor. passive subjunc- 
tive (§ 119, 12, c). . 


(7) Homer has a present infinitive in nwevac for ἐ-εμεναι (1, 6), as 
φιλήμεναι (φιλέω) for aug καλήμεναι (καλέω). So φορῆναι 
(φορέ-ειν) from φορέω. Homer has Doric contraction in the duals 
ὁμαρτήτην (ὁμαρτέω) and ἀπειλήτην (ἀπειλέω). See 1 (ὁ). 


3. (Verbs in ow.) (a) Verbs in ow are always contracted in He- 
rodotus, but he sometimes has ev (for ov) from oo or oov, especially 
in δικαιόω, think just ; as ἐδικαίευν, δικαιεῦντος, δικαιεῦσι. 


(ὁ) They are always contracted in Homer, except in the few cases 
in which forms in ow or wo occur resembling those made by assimi- 
lation in verbs in aw (1, δ); as ἀρόωσι (from ἀρόω, plough); δηιόφεν 
= eae) δηιόωντο (from δηιόω); ἱδρώουσα and idpwovra (from 

pow . 


156 τς INFLECTION. [§ 121. 


CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI. 


Remark. The peculiar inflection of verbs in μι affects only the 
tenses formed from the present and second aorist stems, and in a 
few verbs those formed from the second perfect stem. Most of the 
second aorists and perfects here included do not belong to presents 
in με, but are irregular forms of verbs in @; as ἔβην (Baiva), ἔγνων 
(γιγνώσκω), ἐπτάμην (πέτομαι), and τέθναμεν, τεθναίην, τεθνάναι (2nd per- 
fect of θνήσκω). See § 125, 3 and 4. © 

Tenses thus inflected are called yu-forms. In other tenses verbs 
in μὲ are inflected like verbs in ὦ (§ 123, 3). No single verb exhibits 
all the pu-forms. 


8 121. 1. In the present and imperfect of verbs in μι, 
and in all other tenses which have the p.-form of inflection, 
the endings (§ 112, 2) are added directly to the tense stem, 
except in the subjunctive and optative. The tense stem 
almost always ends in a vowel, which, if short, is lengthened 
(Note 1) in the singular of the present and imperfect indica- 
tive active, and generally in all forms of the second aorist 
indicative, imperative, and infinitive active. Thus φη-μί, 
φη-σί, φἄ-μέν, φἄ-τέ, from stem φἄ- ; cf. λύτο-μεν, λύ-ε-τε, from 
stem Av-. See § 112, 4. 


Note 1. Here a and ε are lengthened to 7; 0 to w, and ὕ toa. 
But in the second aorist, ἅ after p becomes Gin ἔδρᾶν, ε becomes εἰ 
in the infinitives θεῖναι and εἶναι, and o becomes ov in δοῦναι. (See 
§ 125, 3, Notes 1 and 2.) 


Norte 2.- The only verbs in μὲ with consonant present stems are 
the irregular εἰμί, be, and fat, sit (§ 127). See also οἶδα (§ 127, 
vii.), and a few poetic second aorists and perfects (§ 125, 3 and 4). 


2. The following peculiarities in the endings are to be 
noticed in these forms : — 


(a) The endings μὲ and σι (§ 112, 2, N.) are retained in the first 
and third persons singular of the present indicative active; as φη-μί; 


φη-σί. 


(Ὁ) Θι is retained in the second aorist imperative active (§ 116, 1) 
after a long vowel, as in στῆθι, βῆθι; but it is changed to ς in θές, 
δός, €s, and σχές. Τὺ is rare in the present, as φαθί, ἴθι. The 
present commonly omits 6:, and lengthens the preceding vowel (a. ε, 
0, OY ¥) to ἡ, εἰ, ov, OF ὕ; as ἵστη (for ἱστα-θι), τίθει, δίδου, δείκνῦ. 


(See § 123.) 


§ 122.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN ΜΙ. 157 


(c) Inthe second person singular passive and middle, ca: and oo 
are retained (see, however, § 122, N. 3); except in the second aorist 
middle and in the subjunctive and optative, which drop o and are 
contracted (§ 114, N. 2; § 115, 2, 3). In the present imperative 
both forms in go and contracted forms in @ or ov (for dco, eco, οσο) 
occur, ὕσο being always retained. | 


(d) In the third person plural of the present indicative active, a 
is prefixed to the ending voi, making dou (8 16, 6), which is con- 
tracted with a (but not with e, 0, or v) of the stem; as ἱστᾶσι (for 
icra-avor), but τιθέ-ἄσι, διδό-ἄσι, δεικνύτᾶσι. Contracted forms in εἶσι; 
over, and ὕσι, from stems in ε, ο, and v, are regular in Ionic, but rare 
in Attic. In the third person plural, the imperfect and second aorist 
active have σαν, and the optative active has ἐη-σαν or te-v. 


(e) The infinitive active adds va: to the tense stem; as iord-vat, 
τιθέ-ναι, Sov-vat, θεῖ-ναι. 


(7) The participle active (with stem in avr, evr, ovr, or wvr) forms 
the nominative in ἄς, εἰς, ovs, or os. 


3. Some verbs in yye and wpe reduplicate the stem in the 
present and imperfect by prefixing its initial consonant with : ; 
as δίέδω-μι (do-), give, τίτθη-μι (θε-). put, for θι-θη-μι (§ 17, 2). 
From stem ora- we have ἵσστη-μι, set, for σιτ-στη-μι; and from 
é- we have i-n-yu (i-j-pr). See ὃ 125, 2. 


§ 129. There are two classes of verbs which have this 
inflection : — | 


1. First, verbs in μὲ which have the simple stem or the re- 
duplicated simple stem (§ 121, 3) in the present; and all the 
second aorists and second perfects and pluperfects of the pr 
form. This includes all verbs in μι and wpe (from stems in 
a, ε, and o). 

2. Secondly, verbs in νυμι, which (with one exception) have 
the pt-form only in the present and imperfect. These add vi 
(after a vowel, vt) to the simple stem to form the present 
stem; as detx-, δεικνῦ-, δείκνῦ-μι, δείκνῦ-ς, Seixvi-or, but δείκνῦμεν, 
δείκνύῦτε (§ 121, 1). | 

They thus belong, by the formation of the present stem, to the 


fifth class of verbs in  (§ 108, V. 4), and some of them (as δείκνυ- 
μι) use the present in νύω (see Note 5). : 


Nore 1. Some verbs in ἡμέ and wy have forms which follow the 
inflection of verbs in w. Especially, in the imperfect of τίθημι and 


1.8. INFLECTION. [8 123. 


δίδωμι, ἐτίθεις and ἐτίθει (as if from ridéw), and ἐδίδουν, ἐδίδους, ἐδί. 
δου (as if from διδόω), are much more common than the regular 
forms in nv and wy. So in the second aorist, the forms [é6nv, €6ns, 
ἔθη) and [ἔδων, ἔδως, ἔδω] never occur; and in their place the first 
aorists in κα, ἔθηκα and ἔδωκα (8 110, III. 1, N. 1) are used in the sin- 
gular, while the second aorist forms ἔθετον, &c., ἔδοτον, &c., are gen- 
erally used in the dual and plural. See also ine (ὃ 127), where ἧκα 
is used in the same way. 

Further, in the optative middle, τιθοίμην, τιθοῖο, τιθοῖτο, &c. (also 
accented τίθοιο, τίθοιτο, &c.) and (in composition) θοίμην, Goto, θοῖτο, 
&e. (also accented σύν-θοιτο, πρόσ-θοισθε, &c.) occur with the regular 
τιθείμην, θείμην, &c. See also πρόοιτο, &c., under inp (§ 127). 


Norte 2. -A few deponent verbs accent the subjunctive and opta- 
tive as if there were no contraction. Such are δύναμαι, ἐπίσταμαι, κρέ- 
papa, ἐπριάμην (ὃ 123); as δύνωμαι, δύναιτο (not δυνῶμαι, δυναῖτο) ; and 
sometimes other verbs in yu. The infinitive πρίασθαι is accented like 
a first aorist. 


Note 3. Avvaya and ἐπίσταμαι generally have ἐδύνω (or ἠδύνω) 
and ἠπίστω, for ἐδύνασο and ἠπίστασο, in the second person singular 
of the imperfect. 


Note 4. For the formation of the subjunctive and optative of 
verbs in nus and wp, see ὃ 114, N. 2, and 8 115, 2 and 3. But the 
contracted subjunctive from stems in a has ὦ, jjs, 9, Χο. (act.), and 
Gpat, 7, nra, &c. (mid.), as if from stems in εἰ which stems are 
found in Ionic, as in ore-w-pev, στέτω-σι (Attic στῶμεν, στῶσι). See 
§ 126, 7 (a). 

Nore 5. Verbs in yyy form the subjunctive and optative like 
verbs in w; as δεικνύτ-ω, δεικνύ-οιμι, Secxvd-wpat, δεικνυ-οίμην. In other 
moods forms of verbs in vv often occur; as δεικνύουσι, ὀμνύουσι. 

Note 6. Only one verb in νυμι, σβέννυμι (σβε-), quench, has a 
second aorist active; and this, ἔσβην, was quenched, with infin. σβῆ- 
ναι and (Ion.) part. oBeis, is formed from the simple stem in e 
(§ 125, 3). 


§ 123. 1. The following is a synopsis of torn, set, 
(stem στἄ-), τίθημι, put (stem θε-), δίδωμι, give (stem 
δο-), and δείκνῦμει, show (stem δεικ-, present stem δεικνῦ-)), 
in the present and second aorist systems. 


As tornu wants the second aorist middle, ἐπριάμην, J bought (from 
a stem mpia- which has no present), is added. As deixyvps wants the 
second aorist (8. 122, N. 6), ἔδῦν, 1 entered (from δύω, formed as if 
from δυ-μι), is added in the active voice. No second aorist middle 
in vuny occurs, except in scattered poetic forms (see Ava, mvéw, ceva, 
and yéw). Ἔδυν has no aorist optative in Attic; but two forms of 
an ola optative δύην (for dv-m-v) occur in Homer, viz. δύῃ and 
ἐκδῦμεν. 


8 123.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI. 159 


ACTIVE. 


Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 


tornp. ἱστῶ ἱσταίην tory ἱστάναι tords 
τίθημι τιθῶ τιθείην τίθει τιθέναι τιθείς 


ἫΝ SiSop. διδῶ διδοίην δίδου διδόναι διδούς 
δείκνυμι δεικνύω δεικνύοιμν δείκννυ δεικνύναι δεικνύς 
ἵστην 

Imp. J ἐτίθην 
ἐδίδουν 
ἐδείκνυν 
ἔστην στῶ σταίην στῆθι στῆναι στάς 

2 Aor. (ἔθην) θῶ θείην θές θεῖναι θείς 
(ἔδων) ϑῶ δοίην δός δοῦναι δούς 
ἔδὺν ϑύω 


δῦθι δῦναι Sts 


PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. — 


ἵστᾶμαι ἱστῶμαι ἱσταίμην ἵστάσο ἵστασθαι ἱστάμενος 
Pres, τίθεμαι τιθῶμαι τιθείμην τίθεσο τίθεσθαι τιθέμενος 

δίδομαι διϑῶμαι διδοίμην δίδοσο δίδοσθαι διδόμενος 

δείκνῦὕμαι δεικνύωμαι δεικνυοίμην δείκνῦσο δείκνυσθαι δεικνύμενος 


ἱστάμην 
Imp. ἐτιθέμην 

ἐδιδόμην 

ἐδεικνύμην 


ἐπριάμην πρίωμα. πριαίμην πρίω πρίασθαι πριάμενος ᾿ 
ae ἐθέμην θῶμα θείμν θοῦ θέσθαι θέμενος 
: ἐδόμην Sapar δοίμην δοῦ ϑόσθαι δόμενος 


2. The peculiar forms of these verbs, which are in- 
cluded in the synopsis, are thus inflected : — 


160 


Sing. 
Dual 


Plur, 


Sing. 


Dual 


Plur. 


Sing. 
Dual 


Plur. 


y 
ἴστημι 
ἵστης 
ἵστησι 


ἴστἄτον 
ἵστατον 


ἵστᾶμεν 
ἵστατε 
ἱστᾶσι 


INFLECTION. 


ACTIVE VOICE. 


Present Indicative. 


τίθημι 
τίθης 
τίθησι 


τίθετον 
τίθετον 


τίθεμεν 
τίθετε 


τιθέασι 


Imperfect. 


ἐτίθην 
ἐτίθης, ἐτίθεις 
ἐτίθη, ἐτίθει 

(8 122, N. 1) 


ἐτίθετον 
ἐτιθέτην 
ἐτίθεμεν 


ἐτίθετε 
ἐτίθεσαν 


δίδωμι 
δίδως 


δίδωσι 


δίδοτον 
δίϑδοτον 


δίδομεν 
δίδοτε 
διδόασι 


(ἐδίδων) ἐδίδουν 

(ἐδίδως) ἐδίδους 

(ἐδίδω) ἐδίδου 
(8 122, N. 2)" 


ἐδίδοτον 
ἐδιδότην 


ἐδίδομεν 
ἐδίδοτε 
ἐδίδοσαν 


Present Subjunctive. 


τιθῶ 
τιθῇς 
τιθῇ 
τιθῆτον 
᾿ς σιθῆτον. 


τιθῶμεν 


τιθῆτε 


τιθῶσι 


διδῶ 
διδῷς 
διδῷ 
ϑιδῶτον 
διδῶτον 


διδῶμεν 
διδώτε 
διδῶσι 


[8 128. 


δείκνυμι 
δείκνυς 
δείκνυσι 


δείκνὕτον 
δείκνυτον 


Selxvdpev 
Selxvure 


δεικνύασι 


ἐδείκνῦν 
ἐδείκνυς 
ἐδείκνυ | 


ἐδείκνυτον 
ἐδεικνύτην 


ἐδείκνυμεν 
ἐδείκνυτε 
ἐδείκνυσαν 


δεικνύω 
δεικνύῃς 
δεικνύῃ 


δεικνύητον 
δεικνύητον 


δεικνύωμεν 


δεικνύητε 
δεικνύωσι 


§ 123.] 
1. 
Sing. “2. 
3: 
9 
Dual . 
γα: 1% 
τ 
Plur. 2 
8, 
Dual 2 
8, 
1. 
Plur. 2 
3. 
2. 
Sing, 
ice Ἢ 
Dual 45 
8, 
Plur. Jf? 
3. 


Dual , 2. 
3. 
1. 
Plur. 2; 
3. 


CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI. 


ἱσταίην τιθείην διδοίην 
ἱσταίης τιθείης διδοίης 
ἱσταίη τιθείη διδοίη 
ἱσταίητον τιθείητον διδοίητον 
ἱσταιήτην τιθειήτην διδοιήτην 
ἱσταίημεν τιθείημεν διδοίημεν 
ἱσταίητε τιθείητε διδοίητε 
ἱσταίΐησαν τιθείησαν διδοίησαν 
Or thus contracted : --- 
ἱσταῖτον τιθεῖτον διδοῖτον 
ἱσταίτην  πτιθείτην διδοίτην 
ἱσταῖμεν τιθεϊμεν' διδοῖμεν 
ἱσταῖτε τιθεῦῖτε διδοῖῦτε 
ἱσταῖεν τιθεῖεν διδοῖεν 
Present Imperative. 
tory τίθει δίδου 
ἱστἄάτω τιθέτω διδότω 
ἵστᾶτον τίθετον δίδοτον 
ἱστάτων τιθέτων διδότων 
ἵστατε τίθετε δίδοτε 
ἱστάτωσαν τιθέτωσαν διδότωσαν 
or ἱστάντων or τιθέντων or διδόντων 
Present Infinitive. 
ἱστάναι τιθέναι διδόναι 
Present Participle. 
ἱστάς τιθείς διδούς 
Second Aorist Indicative. 
ἔστην (ἔθην) (€5wv) 
ἔστης (ἔθης) (ἔδως) 
ἔστη (ἔθη) (ἔδω) 

(8 122, N. 1) (§ 122, N. 1) 
ἔστητον ἔθετον. ἔδοτον 
ἐστήτην ἐθέτην ἐδότην 
ἔστημεν ἔθεμεν ἔδομεν 
ἔστητε ἔθετε ἔδοτε 
ἔστησαν ἔθεσαν ἔδοσαν 


Present Optative. 


11 


161 


δεικνύοιμι 
δεικνύους 
δεικνύοι 


δεικνύουτον 
δεικνυοίτην 


δεικνύοιμεν 
᾿ϑεικνύοιτε 
ϑεικνύοιεν 


ϑείκνῦ 
δεικνύτω 


δείκνῦὕτον 
δεικνύτων 


δείκνυτε 
ϑεικνύτωσαν 
or δεικνύντων 


δεικνύναι 
δεικνύς 


ἔδυν 
ἔδυς 
ἔδυ 


ἔδυτον 


ἐδύτην 


᾿ ἔδῦμεν 


ἔδυτε 


ἔδυσαν 


162 


Sing. 
Dual 


Plur. 


Sing. 
Dual 


Plur. 


Ε 
Ὁ, 
Ts 


Plur. ' 


Sing. 
Dual ; j 
Plur. ἷ 


RIA ΛΡΜ “ὠλ»- RAAB MA LL 


SPR SPN Op 


ad 


INFLECTION. 


Second Aorist Subjunctive. 


ere eS "3 


σταῖτον 
σταίτην 
σταῖμεν 
σταῖτε 


~ 


σταιεν 


στῶ ᾿ς θῶ δῶ 
στῇς θῇς δῷς, 
στῇ θῇ δῷ 
στῆτον θῆτον δῶτον 
στῆτον θῆτον δῶτον 
στῶμεν θῶμεν δῶμεν 
στῆτε θῆτε δῶτε 
στῶσι θῶσι δῶσι 
Second Aorist Optative. 
σταίην θείην ; δοίην 
σταίης θείης δοίης 
σταίη θείη δοίη 
σταίητον θείητον δοίητον 
σταιήτην θειήτην δοιήτην 
σταίημεν θείημεν δοίημεν 
σταίητε θείητε Solnre 
σταίησαν θείησαν δοίησαν 


Or thus contracted :— 


θεῖτον 
θείτην 
θεῖμεν 
θεῖτε 
θεῖεν 


δοῖτον 
ϑοίτην 
Sotpev 
Sotre 


δοῖεν 


Second Aorist Imperative. 


στῆθι 
στήτω. 
στῆτον 
στήτων 
στῆτε 
στήτωσαν 


θές 
θέτω 
θέτον 
θέτων 


θέτε 


θέτωσαν 
or στάντων or θέντων 


δός 

ϑότω 

ϑότον 

δότων 

δότε 

δότωσαν 
or ϑόντων 


Second Aorist Infinitive. 


στῆναι 


στάς 


θεῖναι 


θείς 


δοῦναι 


Second Aorist ‘Participle. 


Sovs 


[8 123. 


δύω 
δύῃς 
δύῃ 
δύητον 
δύητον 
δύωμεν 
δύητε 
ϑύωσι 


δῦθι 
δύτω 
δῦτον 


. δύτων 


δῦτε 
ϑύτωσαν 


or δύντων 


δῦναι 


δύς 


8 123.] 


Fi a »σ- Ὁ ET 


Fa te as (ee arte EE ge PAO HSI Oe" 


ἰδ Se 


oo bo 
. . 


g2 PO Pt go pO 98 PO ταὶ 


9 alt ge ake ST wel oad ne 


FP rrp Sher 


CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI. 


PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
Present Indicative. 


ἵσταμαι 
ἵστασαι 
ἵσταται 
ἵστασθον 
torac boy 
ἱστάμεθα 
ἵστασθε 


ἵστανται 


ἱστάμην 
ἵστασο 
ἵστατο 
ἵστασθον 
ἱστάσθην 
ἱστάμεθα 
ἵστασθε 
ἵσταντο 


ἱστῶμαν 


τ torq Ὁ 


ἱστῆται 
ἱστῆσθον 
ἱστῆσθον 
ἱστώμεθα 
ἱστῆσθε 


ἱστῶνται 


ἱσταίμην 
ἱσταῖο 
ἱσταῖτο 
ἱσταῖσθον 
ἱσταίσθην 
ἱσταίμεθα 
ἱσταῖσθε 
ἱσταῖντο 


τίθεμαι δίδομαι 
τίθεσαι δίδοσαι 
τίθεται δίδοται 
τίθεσθον δίδοσθον 
τίθεσθον δίδοσθον 
τιθέμεθα διδόμεθα 
τίθεσθε δίδοσθε 
τίθενται δίδονται 
Imperfect. 
ἐτιθέμην ἐδιδόμην 
ἐτίθεσο ἐδίδοσο 
ἐτίθετο ἐδίδοτο 
ἐτίθεσθον ἐδίδοσθον 
ἐτιθέσθην ἐδιδόσθην 
ἐτιθέμεθα ἐδιδόμεθα 
ἐτίθεσθε ἐδίδοσθε 
ἐτίθεντο ἐδίδοντο 
Present Subjunctive. 
τιθῶμαι διδῶμαι 
τιθῇ διδῷ 
τιθῆται διδῶται 
΄τιθῆσθον διδῶσθον 
τιθῆσθον διδῶσθον 
τιθώμεθα διδώμεθα 
τιθῆσθε διδῶσθε 
τιθῶνται διδῶνται 


Present Optative. 


τιθείμην 
τιθεῖο 
τεθεῦτο 
τιθεῖσθον 
τιθείσθην 
τιθείμεθα 
τιθεῖσθε 
τιθεῖντο 


διδοίμην 
διδοῖο 
διδοῖτο 
διδοῖσθον 
διδοίσθην 
διδοίμεθα 
διδοῖσθε 
διδοῖντο 


163 


3 δείκνυμαι 


δείκνυσαι 
δείκνυται 


δείκνυσθον 
δείκνυσθον 
δεικνύμεθα 
δείκνυσθε 

δείκνυνται 


ἐδεικνύμην 
ἐδείκνυσο 
ἐδείκνυτο 
ἐδείκνυσθον 
ἐδεικνύσθην 
ἐδεικνύμεθα, 
ἐδείκνυσθε 
ἐδείκνυντο 


δεικνύωμαι 
δεικνύῃ 
δεικνύηται 
δεικνύησθον 
ϑεικνύησθον 
δεικνυώμεθα 
ϑεικνύησθε 
Sexviovrar 


δεικνυοίμην 
δεικνύοιο 
δεικνύοιτο 
δεικνύοισθον 
δεικνυοίσθην 
δεικνυοίμεθα 
δεικνύοισθε 
δεικνύοιντο 


164 


Dual ‘3 
Se 

ΕΠ, $e 
3, 


Sing. 


Dual 


Plur. 


Sing. 


Dual 


Plur. 


INFLECTION. 


Present Imperative. 


ἵστᾶσο τίθεσο δίδοσο 
or ἵστω or τίθου or δίδου 
ἱστάσθω τιθέσθω διδόσθω 
ἵστασθον τίθεσθον δίδοσθον 
ἱστάσθων τιθέσθων διδόσθων 
ἵστασθε τίθεσθε δίδοσθε 
ἱστάσθωσαν τιθέσθωσαν διδόσθωσαν 
ΟΥ ἱστάσθων οἵ τιθέσθων or διδόσϑων 
Present Infinitive. 
ἵστασθαι τίθεσθαι δίδοσθαι 
Present Participle. 
ἱστάμενος τιθέμενος διδόμενος 


Second Aorist Middle Indicative, 


ἐπριάμην ἐθέμην ἐδόμην 
ἐπρίω ᾿ ἔθου ἔδου 
ἐπρίατο ἔθετο ἔδοτο 
ἐπρίασθον ἔθεσθον ἔδοσθον 
ἐπριάσθην ἐθέσθην ἐδόσθην 
ἐπριάμεθα ἐθέμεθα ἐδόμεθα 
ἐπρίασθε ἔθεσθε ἔδοσθε 
ἔπρίαντο ἔθεντο ἔδοντο 


Second Aorist Middle Subjunctive. | 


πρίωμαι θῶμαι ϑῶμαι 
πρίῃ θῃ δῷ 
πρίηται θῆται Sarat 
πρίησθον θῆσθον δῶσθον 
πρίησθον θῆσθον δῶσθον 
πριώμεθα θώμεθα δώμεθα 
πρίησθε θῆσθε ϑῶσθε 
πρίωνται θῶνται 


[8 128. 


ϑείκνῦσο 


δεικνύσθω 


δϑείκνυσθον 
δεικνύσθων 


δείκνυσθε 
δεικνύσθωσαν 
or δεικνύσθων 


δείκνυσθαι 


δεικνύμενος 


§ 123.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI. 165 


Second Aorist Middle Optative. 


1, πριαίμην θείμην δοίμην 
Sing. “1.2. πρίαιο θεῖο Soto 
3. πρίαιτο θεῖτο δοῖτο 
Dual 52: πρίαισθον θεῖσθον δοῖσθον 
3. πριαίσθην θείσθην δοίσθην 
1. πριαίμεθα θείμεθα -. δοίμεθα 
Plur. 42. πρίαισθε θεῖσθε ϑοῖσθε 
3. πρίαιντο θεῖντο ϑοῖντο 
Second Aorist Middle Imperative. 
. 2. πρίω θοῦ δοῦ 
Sing. Ρ 
oe ἐξ πριάσθω θέσθω ᾿ 8608 
Dual 42 πρίασθον θέσθον δόσθον 
3. πριάσθων θέσθων ϑόσθων 
2. σπρίασθε θέσθε δόσθε 
Plur. 43. πριάσθωσαν θέσθωσαν δόσθωσαν 
or πριάσθων or θέσθων ΟΥ δόσθων 


Second Aorist Middle Infinitive. 
πρίασθαι θέσθαι δόσθαι 
Second Aorist Middle Participle 
πριάμενος θέμενος ϑόμενος 


3. The following is a full synopsis of the indicative of 
ἵστημι, τίθημι, δίδωμι, and δείκνυμι, in all the voices: — 


ACTIVE. 
Pres. ἵστημι, τίθημι, δίδωμι, δείκνυμι, 
Set place give show 
Imperf. ἵστην. ἐτίθην ἐδίδουν ἐδείκνυν 
Fut. στήσω θήσω δώσω. δείξω 


1. ἔστησα, sete (1. ἔθηκα 1. ἔδωκα ; 
Aor. 2. ἔστην, stood “ 2. Werov, &c. 2. Borov,&c. 1. Baka 


in dualand plur. Cin dual and plur. 


166 INFLECTION, [8 128. 


{ 1, ἔστηκα 

2. ἕστατον, &c. ᾿ 
Ρ ἡ ’ 

er in dual and plur. 1. τέθεικα 1, δέδωκα 1. δέδειχα 


stand 


Plupf. < 2. ἕστατον, &c. 
in dual and plur. 
stood 


1. ἑστήκειν 
or εἱστήκειν 
1. ἐτεθείκειν 1. ἐδεδώκειν 1. ἐδεδείχειν 


Fut. Perf. ἑστήξω, shall stand 
§ 110, IV. (ὦ Ν. 2. 


* MIDDLE. 


Pres, lordpar, stand τίθεμαι (trans.) δίδομαι — Selevipar(trans.) 


Impf. ἱστάμην ἐτιθέμην ἐδιδόμην ἐδεικνύμην 

Fut. στήσομαι. ϑήσομαι -δώσομαι -δείξομαι 

1 Aor. ἐστησάμην (trans.) ἐθηκάμην (not Attic) ἐδειξάμην 

2 Aor. ἐθέμην. «ἐδόμην 

Perf. ἔἕστᾶμαι (as pass.) τέθειμαι ; δέδομαι ᾿ ϑέδειγμαι 

Plupf. (?) (?) ἐδεδόμην ἐδεδείγμην 
PASSIVE. 


Present, Imperfect, Perfect, Pluperfect : as in Middle. 

Aor. ἐστάθην ἐτέθην ἐδόθ"ην ἐδείχθην 

Fut. σταἀθήσομαι τεθήσομαι ϑοθήσομαι δειχθήσομαι 
Fut. Pf. ἑστήξομαι, shall stand, , (δεδείξομαι, late) 


8124] SECOND PERF. AND PLUPERF. OF MI-FORM. 167 


Second Perfect and Pluperfect of the MI-form. 


§ 124. 1. A few second perfects and pluperfects are in- 
flected like the present and imperfect of verbs in μι. But: they 
are never used in the singular of the indicative, the forms _ 
(rraa), (τέθναα), (yéyaa), &c. being imaginary. The partici- 
ple is formed in ws, wora, os, Which is contracted with a preced- 
ing a to ds, doa, ds (irregular for ws). 


2. The principal verbs which have these forms in Attic 
prose are βαίνω, go, 2 perf. infin. βεβάναι ; θνήσκω, die, τεθνάναι ; 
and ἵστημι, set, ἑστάναι, with stems ina. All these have ογᾶϊ- 
nary perfects, BéBnxa, τέθνηκα, ἕστηκα, Which are always used 
in the singular of the indicative: The second perfect and plu- 
perfect of ἵστημι (στα-) are thus inflected : — 


SECOND PERFECT. 


Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative, Imperative. 
1, ἑστῶ ἑσταίην 

Sing. 12 ----  Ἀἕστῇς ἑσταίης ἕστἄθι 
3. - ἑστῇ ἑσταίη ἑστάτω 


Dual {* ἕστᾶτον ἑστῆτον éoralnrovor-airoy ἕστατον 
3. ἕστατον ἑστῆτον ἑσταιήτην οἵ -αἴτην ἑστάτων 


2. ἕστατε ἑστῆτε ἑσταίητε or -aire ἕστατε 
ἑστᾶσ.ι ἑστῶσι ἑσταίησαν or -atev ἐἑστάτωσαν 
or ἑστάντων 


1, ἕσταμεν ἑστῶμεν ἑσταίημεν or -αἷμεν 
Plur. 


Infinitive. ἑστάναι. Participle. (Hom. ἑσταώς, ἑσταῶσα, ἑσταός), | 
Att. contr. ἑστώς, ἑστῶσα, ἑστός (Ionic also -εώς,-εῶσα, -εόξ ; Ep. -ηός). 
See § 110, IV. (2), N. 8. For the inflection, see § 69, Note. 


SECOND PLUPERFECT. | 


Dual. torarov, ἑστάτην. 
Plural. ἕσταμεν, rate, ἕστασαν, 


Nore. For an enumeration of these forms, see § 125, 4. 


168 INFLECTION. ; [8 125. 


Enumeration of the MI-forms. 


§ 125. The forms which have this inflection are as fol- 
lows : — 


1. Verbs in pu with the simple stem in the present. These 
are the irregular εἰμί, be, εἶμι, go, φημί, say, κεῖμαι, lie, and 
ἧμαι, sit, all of which are inflected in ὃ 127; with ἦμι, say, χρή, 
ought, and the, deponents ἄγαμαι, δύναμαι, ἐπίσταμαι, ἔραμαι, κρέ- 
μαμαι. 

See these in the Catalogue, and also Ionic or poetic (chiefly 
Homeric) forms under ἄημι, δέαμαι, δίεμαι, δίζημαι, ἔδω, Anus, κιχάνω, 
ὄνομαι, ῥύομαι and ἐρύομαι, στεῦμαι, φέρω; also δάμνημι, κίρνημι, κρή- 
μνημι; μάρναμαι, πέρνημι; πίλναμαι, πίτνημι, σκίδνημι ANd κίδνημι. 


2. Verbs in μὲ with reduplicated present stems (8 121, 3). 
These are ἵστημι, τίθημι, and δίδωμι, inflected in ὃ 123, ty, 
inflected in ὃ 127, δίδημι, rare for δέω, bind, κίχρημι (xpa-) , lend, 
ὀνίνημι (dva-), benefit, πίμπλημι (πλᾶ-), fill, πίμπρημι (πρᾶ-ν), 
burn. 

See also ἵπταμαι (late), and Hom. βιβάς, striding, present partici- 
ple of rare βίβημι. 

Note 1. Πίμπλημι and πίμπρημι insert p before πὶ but the μ 


generally disappears after μ (for v) in ἐμ-πίπλημι and ἐμ-πίπρημι; but 
not after ν itself, as in ἐν-επίμπλασαν. 


Note 2. ᾿ὈΟνίνημε is probably for éy-ovn-ps, by Attic reduplication 
from stem ὀνα-. 


3. Second Aorists of the ys-Form. 'The only second aorists 
formed from verbs in μὲ are those of type (8 127), of ἵστημι, 
τίθημι, and δίδωμι (8 123), of σβέννυμι (8 122, N. 6); with 
ἐπριάμην (8 123, 1), the irregular ὠνήμην (rarely ὠνάμην), of 
ὀνίνημι, and ἐπλήμην (poetic) of πέίμπλημι. 

See the last two in the Catalogue, and also Homeric aorist mid- 
dle forms of μίγνυμι, ὄρνυμι, and πήγνυμι. 


The second aorists of this form belonging to verbs in ὦ are the 
following: — 


Baivw (Ba-), go. ἔβην, B&, Bain, βῆθι, βῆναι, Bas. : 
Πέτομαι {πτα-, πτε-). fly: act. (poetic) ἔπτην, (πτῶ. late), mrainy; 
(πτῆθι, πτῆναι, late), πτάς. Mid. ἐπτάμην, πτάσθαι, πτάμενος. : 


8 126ὅ.] ENUMERATION OF THE MI-FORMS. 169 


[TAdo] (rAa-), endure: ἔτλην, TAG, TAainv, τλῆθι, τλῆναι, TAGS. 

Φθάνω (pba-), anticipate: ἔφθην, φθῶ, φθαίην, φθῆναι, φθάς. 

Διδράσκω (δρα-), run: ἔδρᾶν, ἔδρᾶς, ἔδρᾶ, &e., δρῶ, δρᾷς, δρᾷ, &c., 
δραίην, δρᾶναι, Spas. Only in composition. (See Note 1.) 

Κτείνω (κτα-, κτεν-), kill: act. (poetic) ἔκτᾶν, Exras, exra, ἔκτἄμεν 
(3 pl. ἔκτἄν, subj. κτέωμεν, inf. κτάμεναι, κτάμεν, Hom.), rds. Mid. 
(Hom.) ἐκτάμην. was killed, κτάσθαι, κτάμενος. 

᾿Αλίσκομαι (dd-), be taken: ἑάλων or ἥλων, was taken, dda, ἁλοίην, 
ἁλῶναι, ἁλούς. (See Note 2.) 

Βιόω (βιο-), live: ἐβίων, Bid, βιῴην (not -oinv), βιῶναι, βιούς (Hom. 
imper. βιώτω). 

Γιγνώσκω (yvo-), know: ἔγνων, γνῶ, γνοίην, γνῶθι, γνῶναι, γνούς, 

Δύω (δυ-), enter: ἔδῦν, entered, δύω, (opt. 8 129, 1,) δῦθι, δῦναι, dus 

123). 
: pie (φυ-), produce: ἔφῦν, was produced, am, pia, φῦναι, dis (like 
ἔδυν). 

‘Aad to. these the single forms, γηράναι (ynpas, Hom.) of γηράσκω, 
grow old ; ἀπο-σκλῆναι, of ἀποσκέλλω, dry up; σχές, imperat. of ἔχω, 
have ; πῖθι, imperat. of πίνω, drink. 


See also in the Catalogue Homeric ju-forms of the following 
verbs: ἀπαυράω, dw, βάλλω, βιβρώσκω, κλύω, κτίζω, AVw, οὐτάω, πελάξω, 
πλώω, πνέω, πτήσσω; σεύω, φθίνω, χέω; and of these (with consonant 
stems), ἅλλομαι, ἀραρίσκω, γέντο (γεν-), δέχομαι, λέγω (λεχ-) ἐλέγμην, 
πάλλω, πέρθω. 


Notre 1. Second aorists in ἣν or ἀμὴν from stems in a are in- 
flected like ἔστην or ἐπριάμην ; but ἔδρᾶν substitutes ἃ (after p) for n, 
and. éxray is irregular. 

Notre 2. The second aorists of τίθημι, type, and δίδωμι do not 
lengthen e or o of the stem (§ 121, 1) in the indicative (dual and 
plural) or imperative (εἶτον, εἷμεν, &c. being augmented): in the 
infinitive they have θεῖναι, εἷναι, and δοῦναι (8 126, 9), and in the 
imperative θές, és, and δός (§ 121, 2, δ). The other stems in e have 
ἔσβην (-ns, -n) and σβῆναι (8 122, N. 6), and ἀποσκλῆναι. The other 
stems in o are inflected like ἔγνων, as follows: — 

Indic. ἔγνων, ἔγνως, ἔγνω, ἔγνωτον, ἐγνώτην, ἔγνωμεν, ἔγνωτε, ἔγνωσαν. 
Subj. γνῶ (like 66). Opt. γνοίην (like δοίην). Imperat. γνῶθι, γνώτω, 
γνῶτον, γνώτων, γνῶτε, γνώτωσαν or γνόντων. Inf. γνῶναι. Part. 


γνούς (like δούς). The optative βιῴην is irregular. 


4. Second Perfects and Pluperfects of the yi-Form. The 
following verbs have these forms in Attic Greek, even in 
prose : — 


Ἵστημι (ora-); see ὃ 123, 2 (paradigm). 
Βαίνω (βα-), go; 2 pf. βεβᾶσι (Hom. BeBdaor), subj. βεβῶσι, inf. 
BeBavac (Hom. βεβάμεν), part. βεβώς (Hom. -aws); 2 plup. (Hom. 


BeBacar). 


110 INFLECTION. . [8 126. 


Tiyvopat (yev-, ya-), become, 2 pf. γέγονα, am; (Hom. 2 pf. γεγάασι, 
inf. yeyapev, yeyaws), Att. γεγώς (poetic). 

Θνήσκω (θαν-, θνα-), die ἢ pf. τέθνατον, τέθναμεν, τέθνατε, τεθνᾶσι, 
opt. τεθναίην, imper. τέθναθι, τεθνάτω, inf. τεθνάναι (Hom. τεθνάμεναι 
or -νάμεν), part. τεθνεώς (Hom. τεθνηώς), 2 plup. ἐτέθνασαν. 

Δείδω (d:-), Epic in pres., fear, Attic 2 pf. δέδια (Hom. δείδια), 
2 plup. ἐδεδίειν, both regular in indic., also 2 pf. δέδιμεν, δέδιτε, 2 plup. 
ededicav; subj. dedin, δεδίωσι, opt. dSedvein, imper. δέδζθι, inf. δεδιέναι, 
part. δεδιώς. (Hom. 2 pf. δείδιμεν, imper. δείδιθι, δείδιτε, inf. δειδίμεν, 
part. δειδιώς, plup. ἐδείδιμεν, ἐδείδισαν.) 

ΓΕϊκω] (ἰκ-, εἰκ-), 2 pf. ἔοικα, seem; also 2 pf. ἔοιγμεν, εἴξᾶσι (for 
ἐοίκασι), part. εἰκώς (Hom. 2 pf. ἔικτον, 2 plup. ἐίκτην), used with the 
regular forms of ἔοικα, ἐῴκειν (see Catalogue). 

Οἶδα (ἰδ-), know ; see ὃ 127 (paradigm). | 

See also poetic, chiefly Homeric, forms under the following verbs 
in the Catalogue: ἀνώγω, βιβρώσκω, ἐγείρω, ἔρχομαι, (καφ-), κράζω, 


μαίομαι, πάσχω, πείθω, πίπτω, τλάω], pve. 


5. Verbs in νυμι, with νυ (after a vowel, ννυ) added to the 
verb stem in the present. These are all inflected like δείκνυμι 
(§ 123), and, with the exception of σβέννυμι, quench (ὃ 122, 
N. 6), have no p-forms except in the present and imperfect. 
The following belong to this class : — 


(Stems in a), κερά-ννυμι, κρεμά-ννυμι, πετά-ννυμι, σκεδά-ννυμι; (stems 
in ε), ἔ-ννυμι, κορέ-ννυμι, oBé-vvvpt, στορέ-ννυμι; (Stems in @), ζώ-ννυμι, 
ῥώ-ννυμι, στρώ-ννυμι ; (consonant stems), ἄγ-νυμι, dp-vupat, δείκ-νυμι 
(δ 123), εἴργ-νυμι, ζεύγ-νυμι. ἀπο-κτίν-νυμι (v. κτείνω), μίγτ-νυμι, οἴγ-νυμι, 
ὄλ-λυμι (δ 108, V. 4, N. 2), ὄμ-νυμι, ὀμόργ-νυμι, ὄρ-:νυμι, πήγ-νυμι (παγ-), 
πτάρ-νυμαι, ῥήγ-νυμι ay’) στόρ-νυμι, φράγ-νυμι. See these in the 
Catalogue, and also Ionic or poetic (chiefly Homeric) forms under 
αἴνυμαι, ἄχνυμαι, γάνυμαι, δαίνυμι, kaivvpat, κίνυμαι, ὀρέγ-νυμι, τάνυμαι (v. 
τείνω), τίνυμαι (υ. τίνω). 


Dialectic Forms of Verbs in MI. 


8 126, 1. Homer and Herodotus have many forms (some 
doubtful) in which verbs in nyc (with stems in e) and wu have the 
inflection of verbs in ew and ow; as τιθεῖ, διδοῖς, διδοῖ. So in com- 
pounds of ins, as ἀνίεις (or ἀνιεῖς), μεθίει (or -et) in pres., and προΐειν, 
mpoiets, ἀνίει, in impf. Hom. has imperat. καθ-ίστα (Attic -n). Herod. 
has iora (for ἵστησι), ὑπερ-ετίθεα and mpo-eribee in impf., and προσ- 
θέοιτο (for -θεῖτο), &c. in opt. For ἐδίδουν, &c. and ἐτίθεις, ἐτίθει (also 
Attic), see § 122, 2, N. 1. 


ες Tn the Aeolic dialect most verbs in aw, ew, and o@ take the 
form in μι; as Pinus (with φίλεισθα, φίλει), in Sappho, for φιλέω, 
fe. ; ὅρημι, κάλημι, αἴνημι. 


§ 126.] DIALECTIC FORMS OF VERBS IN MI. 171 


3. A few verbs in Hom. and Hdt. drop o in ca and go of the 
second person after a vowel; as imperat. παρίσταο (for -ago) and 
impf. ἐμάρναο (Hom.); ἐξεπίστεαι (for -ασαι) with change of a to e 
(Hdt.). So θέο, imperat. for deco (Att. θοῦ). and ἔνθεο (Hom.). 


4. The Doric has τι, vre for ot, vot. Homer sometimes has σθα 
for o in 2 pers. sing., as δίδωσθα (δίδοισθα or διδοῖσθα), τίθησθα; v for 
σαν (with preceding vowel short) in 3 pers. plur., as éoray (for ἔστη- 
σαν), tev (for ἵεσαν), πρότιθεν (for προετίθεσαν); see § 119, 9. He some- 
times has & in the pres. imperat. act., as δίδωθι, ὄρνυθι (§ 121, 2, ὃ). 


5. Herod. sometimes has arat, aro for vrat, ντὸ in the present and 
imperfect of verbs in μὲ, with a preceding a changed to e; as προτι- 
θέαται (for -evrat), ἐδυνέατο (for -avro). For the iterative endings σκον, 
σκομην, see ὃ 119, 10; these are added directly to the stem of verbs 
in pu, as ἵστα-σκον, δό-σκον, ζωννύ-σκετο, ἔ-σκον (εἰμί, be). 


6. Some verbs with consonant stems have a 2 aor. mid. of the με- 
form in Homer; as ἄλ-το, ἄλ-μενος, from ἅλλομαι, leap; ὦρ-το, with 
imperat. ὄρσεο, ὄρσευ, ὄρσο, from ὄρνυμι, rouse. So πήγνυμι (ἔπηκτο). 
See § 125, 3. 


7. (a) Herodotus sometimes leaves ew uncontracted in the sub- 
junctive of verbs in nus; as θέωμεν (Att. θῶμεν), διαθέωνται (-θῶνται), 
ἀπ-ιέωσι (Att. ἀφ-ιῶσι, from ἀφ-ίημι). He forms the subj. with ew 
in the plural also from stems in a; as ἀπο-στέ-ωσι (-στῶσι), ἐπιστέ- 
ὠνται (for ἐπιστα-ονται, Att. ἐπίστωνται). Homer sometimes has 
these forms with ew; as θέωμεν, στέωμεν. 


(Ὁ) Generally, when the 2 aor. subj. act. is uncontracted in 
Homer, the final vowel of the stem is lengthened, ε (or a) to εἰ or 
n, 0 to ὦ, while the connecting vowels n and ὦ are shortened to ε and 
o in ἔχω dual and plural, except before σι (for vor). Thus we find 
in Homer: — 


(Stems in a.) θείῃς, θήῃς 
βείω (Attic βῶ for Ba-w) θείῃ, θήῃ, ἀν-ἤῃ 
στήῃς θείομεν 
στήῃ, βήῃ, βέῃ, φθήῃ (Stems in 0.) 
στήετον : γνώω 
στήομεν, στείομεν, στέωμεν γνώῃς 
στήωσι, στείωσι, φθέωσι γνώῃ, δώῃ, δώῃσιν 
γνώομεν, δώομεν 
(Stems in ¢.) γνώωσι, δώωσι 
θείω, ἐφ-είω See also ὃ 119, 12 (ὁ). 


(c) A few cases of the middle inflected as in (2) occur.in Homer; 
as BAn-era (v. βάλλω), ἅλ-εται (ἅλλομαι), ἀπο-θείομαι, κατα-θείομαι; SO 
κατα-θῆαι (Hesiod) for xarade-na (Att. καταθῆ). 


112 ; INFLECTION. [§ 127. 


8. For Homeric optatives of δαίνυμι, δύω, Ava, and Pbivw, — διανῦτο, 
δύη, and δῦμεν, λελῦτο OF λελῦντο, φθίμην (for φθι-ιμην), ---- see those 
᾿ yerbs in the Catalogue, and § 118, 1, Note. 


9. Homer has μεναι or μὲν (the latter only after a short vowel) 
for va in the infinitive. The final vowel, of the stem is rarely 
lengthened in the present; as τιθέ-μεναι, rarely τιθή-μεναι. In the 
“2 aor. act. the vowel is regularly long (8 121, 1), as στή-μεναι; γνώ- 
pevac; but τίθημι and δίδωμι (§ 125, 3, N. 2) have θέ-μεναι and δό- 
μεναι. For ἡ-μεναι in the aor. pass. infin. see § 119, 14. In the 
perfect of the pi-form (§ 125, 4), we have ἑστἄςμεναι, ἑστἄ-μεν, 
τεθνἄμεναι, τεθνἄμεν. 


10. Homer rarely has ἡμενος for ἐμενος in the participle. For 
perf. part. in ὡς (ews, nos), see ὃ 110, LV. (d), N. 3. 


Irregular Verbs of the MI-Form. 
§ 127, The verbs εἰμί, be, εἶμι, go, ἴημι, send, φημί, say, 


ἦμαι, sit, κεῖμαι, lie, and the second perfect οἶδα, know, are 
thus inflected. 


I. Eiué (stem ἐσ-, Latin es-se), be. 


PRESENT. 
Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. Imperative, 
Lie ΤΆ εἴην 
Sing. 42. εἶ ais εἴης ἴσϑι 
8. ἐστί ἢ εἴη ἔστω 
Dual Ἷ 2. - ἐστόν ἧτον εἴητον, τον ἔστον 
ὑγρῷ 8. ἐστόν ἦτον εἰήτην, εἴτην ἔστων 
Ὶ. ἐσμέν᾽ ὦμεν εἴημεν, εἶμεν 
Plur. 92. ἐστέ . ἥτε εἴητε, εἶτε ἔστε 
8. εἰσί ὦσι εἴησαν, εἶεν ἔστωσαν, 
ι ἔστων, ὄντων 
Infinitive. εἶναι. Partie. ὦν, οὖσα, ὄν, 


gen. ὄντος, οὔσης, &C. 


8 127.} VERBS IN MI. 173 


IMPERFECT. FUTURE INDIC. 
1. ἦν οἵ ἢ ἔσομαι 
Sing 42. ἦσθα toy, ἔσει 
3. fv > ἔσται 
Dual 2. f ἦἧστον or ἦτον ἔσεσθον 
ΐ 8. ἤστην or ἤτην ἔσεσθον 
1. ἦμεν ἐσόμεθα 
Plur. 42. fre or hore ἔσεσθε 
8. ἦσαν ἔσονται 


Fut. Opt. ἐσοίμην, ἔσοιο, ἔσοιτο, &e. regular. 

Fut. Infin.*érecOau. Fut. Partie. ἐσόμενος. 

Verb. Adj. ἐστέον (συν-εστέον). 

An imperfect middle ἤμην, was, rarely occurs. ‘ 

Nore 1. In compounds of εἰμί (as in those of εἶμι) the partici- 
ple keeps the accent of the simple form; as παρών, παροῦσα, παρόν, 
συνόντες, συνοῦσι, συνόντων. So in the subjunctive, where ὦ is con- ἡ 


tracted from Ionic ἔω; as mapa, παρῇς, &c. So παρέσται (for παρέ- 
erat). 


Nore 2. Dratects. Pres. Indic. Aeolic ἐμμί, the most primi- 
tive form, nearest to ἐσ-μὲ (see foot-note on p. 143). Ionic εἷς, 
Hom. ἐσσί (for εἶ) ; lonic εἰμέν (for ἐσμέν) ; Ionic ἔᾶσι; Doric évri (for 
εἰσί). 

Imperf. Hom. ἦα, ἔα, gov (in 1 pers. sing.); ἔησθα (2 pers.); fev, 
ἔην, ἤην (3 pers.); ἔσαν (for ἦσαν). Hdt. ἔα, gas, €are. Later ἧς for 
ἦσθα. Ionic (iterative) ἔσκον. 

Future. Hom. ἔσσομαι, &c., with ἐσσεῖται; Dor. ἐσσῇ, ἐσσοῦνται; 
Hom. ἔσεται. 

Subj. Ionic ἔω, &c., ἔωσι; Hom. also εἴω. 

Opt. Ionic ἔοις, ἔοι. | 

Imper. Hom. ἔσ-σο (the regular form, ὃ 116, 1). 

Infin. Hom. ἔμμεναι, ἔμεναι, ἔμεν; Dor. ἦμεν or εἶμεν; Lyric ἔμ- 
μεν. x 
Partic. Ionic ἐών, ἐοῦσα; ἐόν. 


174 INFLECTION. [8 127. 


II. Eiws (stem i-, Latin 7-re), go. 


PRESENT. 
Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. Imperative. 
᾿ Ὶ, εἶμι ἴω ἰοίην (ἴοιμι) 
Sing. 42. εἶ ἴῃς ἴοις ἴθι 
8. εἶσι ἴῃ tou ἴτω 
2. ἵτον ἴητον ἴοιτον trov 
Dual 
νι: | trov ἴητον ἰοίτην ὕτων 
1. ἵμεν ἴωμεν ” ἴοιμεν | 
Plur 2. tre inte toute tre 
3. aor ἴωσι ἴοιεν ὕτωσαν or ἰόντων 
Infinitive. ἰέναι. Partic. ἰών, ἰοῦσα, ἰόν, 
gen. ἰόντος, ἰούσης, ὅσο. 
IMPERFECT. 
Sing. Dual. ' Plural. 
1. qev or fa ες ἤειμεν or ἦμεν 
2. Yes or ἤεισθα ἤευτον or ἦτον ἤευτε or ἦτε 
8, “ἤει or ἥειν ὑείτην or tira ἤεσαν or ἦσαν 


Verb. Adj. irés, ἱτέον, ἰτητέον. 
Future εἴσομαι and aorist εἰσάμην (or ἐεισάμην) are Homeric. 


Norr1. In compounds the participle has the accent of the simple 
form; 88. παριών, παριοῦσα; παριόντος, παριοῦσι. (See I. Note 1.) 


Nore 2. The present εἶμι generally has a future sense, shall go, 
taking the place of a future of ἔρχομαι, whose future ἐλεύσομαι is not 
often used in Attic prose. 


Note 3. Dratects.. Pres. Ind. Hom. εἶσθα for εἶ. Imperf. 
Hom. ἤϊα, ἤϊον Gn 1 pers. sing. di, ἤϊε, ne, te (in 3 pers.); ἴ ἴτην (in 
dual) ; ἤομεν, ἤϊον, ἤϊσαν (ἦσαν), ἴσαν (in plural).. Hdt. ἤϊα, ἤϊε, 
ἤϊσαν. 

Subj. Hom. ἴησθα, ἴησι. Opt. Hom. ἰείη (for ἴοι). Infin. Hom. 
t-pevat, or t-yev (for ἐ-έναι), rarely ἴμμεναι. 


§ 197.] “VERBS IN MI. || τ ke 175. 


\7 
III. ἽἜημι (stem é-), send. iy 


{34 


(Fut. jow, Aor. ἧκα, Perf. eixa, Perf. Pass. ant r 
Aor. Pass. εἴθην). 


ACTIVE. 
Present. 


Indic. ins, inflected like τίθημι ; but 3 pers. plur. for. 
Subj. id, ifs, tj, ἄς. Opt. ἱείην, ieins, tein, &e. (See 
N. 1.) | 


Imper. ἵει, iérw, &e. Infin. ἱέναι. Partie. ἵἱείς. 


7 Imperfect. 
tew, tes, ἵει ; terov, ἱέτην ; ἵεμεν, tere, ἵεσαν. Also iy (in 
npinv, ὃ 105, 1, N. 3), and ἴῃ (Hom.). See ἀφίημι. 
Future. 
How, noes, ἥσει, &c., regular. 


| First Aorist. =.) 
HKa, ἧκας, ἧκε, &C., Only in indicative. 


Perfect (in compos.). 
elxa, elas, εἶκε) &C. 


Second Aorist (generally in compos.). 
Indic. No singular: Dual, εἶτον, εἵτην : Plur. εἶμεν, etre, 
εἷσαν. 
Subj. &, ἧς. ἦ ; ἧτον, ἧτον ; Gpev, Fre, dor. 
Opt. <inv, eins, εἵη ; εἵἴητον, εἱήτην ; εἵημεν OF εἷμεν, εἵητε OF 
εἶἷτε, εἵησαν ΟΥ̓ εἶεν. 


Imper. ἕς, ἕτω ; ἕτον, ἕτων ; Ere, ἔἕτωσαν ΟΥ̓ ἕντων. 
Infin. εἷναι.  αγίϊο. «is, εἶσα; ἕν. 


PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 


Present. 


Indic. tenor. - Subj. idpor. Opt. ἱείμην. Imper. ἵεσο or tov. 
Infin. ἵεσθαι. Partic. ἱέμενος. (All regular like τίθεμαι, &e.) 


176 INFLECTION. | [§ 127. 


Imperfect. 
ieunv, inflected regularly like ἐτιθέμην. 
Fut. Middle (tn compos.). First Aorist Middle (in compos.) 
ἥσομαι, &C.. ἡκάμην (only in Indic.). 


Perfect and Pluperfect (in compos.). 
Perf. Ind. cia. Imperat. <cicOw. Inf. εἶσθαι. Partic. εἷμέ- 
vos. 
Plup. εἵμην, εἷἶσο, εἶτο, &e. 
Second Aorist Middle (generally in compos.). 
Ind. εἵμην, eico, εἶτο ; εἷσθον, εἵσθην ; εἵμεθα, εἷσθε, εἷντο. 
Subj. Guyot, ἧ, ἧται; ἧσθον : ὥμεθα, ἧσθε, ὧνται. 
Opt. εἵμην, cio, εἶτο; εἶσθον, εἴσθην ; εἵμεθα, εἶσθε, εἷντο. 


(See N. 1.) = 
Imper. οὗ, 2600; ἕσθον, ἔσθων ; ἕσθε, ἔσθωσαν or ἕσθων. 
Infin. ἕσθαι. Partic. ἕμενος. 


Aorist Passive (in compos.). 
Ind. εἴθην (augmented). Subj. £60. Part. ἑθείς. 
Future Passive (in compos.). | Verb. Adj. 


ἑθήσομαι, &c. ἑτός, €réos. 


Nott 1. The optatives = na and ἀφίοιεν, for ἀφιείητε and ἀφι- 

εἴεν, and πρόοιτο, πρόοϊσθε, aNd πρόοιντο (also accented mpooiro, &c.), 
for mpoeiro, προεῖσθε, and προεῖντο, sometimes occur. For similar 
forms of τίθημι, see § 122, N. 1, 


Note 2. Dratects. Hom. aor. ἕηκα for ἧκα; ἕμεν for εἶναι; 
oe σ 3 . . 
ἔσαν, ἕμην, ἕντο, &c., by omission of augment, for εἷσαν, εἵμην, eivro, 
&c., in indicative. In dvinw, Hom. fut. ἀνέσω. 


IV. Φημί (stem φᾶ-). say. 
: Present. 
Indic. φημί, dys, φησί; pardv, φατόν; φᾶμέν, paré, Paci. 
Subj. φῶ, φῇς. φῇ: &e. Opt. φαίην, φαίης, φαίη, &e. 
Imper. φάθι or φαθί, φάτω ; φάτον, φάτων, &e. 
Infin. φάναι. αγέΐο. (not Attic) dds, daca, φάν; gen. 
φάντος, φάσης, ζο. (8 25, 3, N. 2). : 


§ 127.] VERBS IN MI. 177 


Imperfect. 
ἔφην, ἔφησθα or ἔφης, ἔφη ; ἔφατον, ἐφάτην ; ἔφαμεν, ἔφατε, 
ἔφασαν. 
Future. Aorist. 
φήσω, φήσειν, φήσων. ἔφησα, φήσω, φήσαιμι, φῆσαι; φήσας. 
Verbal Adj. φατός, φατέος. 7 


A perfect passive imperative πεφάσθω occurs, with participle 
πεφασμένος. 
Nore 1. Drarects. Pres. Ind. Doric papi, pari, φαντί; Hom. 


φῇσθα for φής. Inf. poet. φάμεν. Impf. Hom. φῆν, pis or φῆσθα, 
ἢ (Dorie ἔφα and da), ἔφαν and day (for ἔφασαν and φάσαν). Aor. 
orle pace for ἔφησε. , 
_ Nore 2. Homer has some middle forms of φημί; pres. imperat. 
pao, φάσθω, pacbe; infin. φάσθαι; partic. φάμενος ; imperfect ἐφάμην 


or φάμην, ἔφατο or φάτο, ἔφαντο and φάντο. Doric ful. φᾶσομαι. 
These all have an active sense. 


V. “Hyae (stem 7o-), sit. 
(Chiefly poetic in simple form: in Attic prose κάθ-ημαι is 
generally used.) 
Present (with form of Perfect). 
Ind. fpat, joa, ἧσται ; ἧσθον ; ἥμεθα, ἧσθε, ἧνται,. LImperat. 
ἧσο, ἥσθω, ἕο. Inf. ἧσθαι. Partic. ἥμενος. 
Imperfect (with form of Pluperfect). 
ἥμην, ἦσο, ἧστο ; ἧσθον, ἥσθην ; ἥμεθα, ἧσθε, ἧντο. 
Κάθημαι is thus inflected ---. 


Present. 


Ind. κάθημαι, κάθησαι, κάθηται (not καθ-ησται) ; κάθησθον ; 
καθήμεθα, κάθησθε, κάθηνται. Subj. καθῶμαι, καθῇ, καθῆται, &e. 
Opt. καθοίμην, καθοῖο, καθοῖτο, &e. Imperat. κάθησο (in οοπι- 
edy, κάθου), καθήσθω, ὅζο. Inf. καθῆσθαι. Partie. καθήμενος. 

12 


178 INFLECTION. : [8 127. 


Imperfect. 


ἐκαθήμην, ἐκάθησο, ἐκάθητο, &¢., also καθήμην, καθῆσο; καθῆστο 
and καθῆτο, ζο. 


ΝΟΤΕ. ΙΑ ΕΟΥΒ. Homer has ἕαται and εἵαται (for nvrat), € ἕατο 


and εἵατο (for ἧντο). Hdt. has κάτησαι, κατῆστο, κατέαται, κατέατο, 
and ἐκατέατο. 


VI. Ketpau (stem κει-, xe-), lie. 
A, 


Present (with form of Perfect). Indic. κεῖμαι, κεῖσαι, κεῖται : 
κεῖσθον ; κείμεθα, κεῖσθε, κεῖνται. Subj. and Opt. These forms 
occur: κέηται, δια-κέησθε, κέοιτο, προσ-κέοιντο. gente κεῖσο, 
κείσθω, &C. Ῥυΐη. κεῖσθαι. Partic. κείμενος. 

Imperf. ἐκείμην, ἔκεισο, ἔκειτο ; ἔκεισθον, dxelaOiny ; 3 ἐκείμεθα, 

ἔκεισθε, ἔκειντο. 
Future. κείσομαι, regular. 


Nore. DrIALects. Homer has κέαται, κείαται, and κέονται, for 
κεῖνται; κέσκετο for ἔκειτο; κέατο and κείατο for ἔκειντο; subj. κῆται. 
Hat. has κέεται, κέεσθαι, and ἐ ἐκέετο, for κεῖται, &c.; and always κέαται 
and ἐκέατο for κεῖνται and ἔκειντο. 


“VII. Οἶδα (stem i6-), know. 


(Οἶδα is a second perfect of the stem ἰδ- : see εἶδον in Cata- 
- logue and ὃ 125, 4). 


SECOND PERFECT. 


Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. Imperative. 
1. οἶδα εἰδῶ εἰδείην 
Sing. +42. οἶσθα εἰδῇς εἰδείης ἴσθι 
3. οἶδε — εἰδῇ εἰδείη ἴστω 
; ἴστον &e. . &e. ἴστον 
Dual ἴστον regular. regular | ἵστων 
1. ἴσμεν | 
Plur. + 2. ἴστε 3 ἴστε 
8. ἴσασι ἱ ἴστωσαν 
Infinitive. εἰδέναι. Participle. εἰδώς, εἰδυῖα, εἰδός, 


gen. εἰδότος, εἰδυίας (§ 68). 


8 127.] VERBS IN ΜΙ. 179 


SECOND PLUPERFECT. 


Sing. Dual. Plural. 


1. dev or ἤδη, ἤδειμεν or ἦσμεν 
2. ἤδεισθα or ἤδησθα  ἤδειτον οὐ ἧστον ἤδειτε or fore 


ἤδεις or ἤδης 
8. ἤδει(ν) or ἤδη ἠδείτην or ἤστην ἤδεσαν or ἦσαν 
Future. εἴσομαι, &., regular. Verbal Adj. ἰστέον. 


Note. The Ionic occasionally has the regular forms οἶδας, οἴδα- 
per ees and very often ἴδμεν for ἴσμεν. Tonic fut. εἰδήσω (rare 
in Attic). 
Tosti’ Pike: ἤδεε, ἠδέατε, Hom. ἠείδης, ἠείδη, ἴσαν, in pluperfect. 
The Attic poets have ἤδεμεν and ἤδετε (like ἤδεσαν). oe 

Hom. εἴδομεν, &c. for εἰδῶμεν in subj.; ἴδμεναι and ἴδμεν in infin. ; 
ἰδυῖα for εἰδυῖα in the participle. 

Aeolic irra for ἴστω in imperative. 
Doric ἴσαντι for ἴσασι: see ἴσαμι. 


PART III. 


FORMATION OF WORDS. 


8 128, 1. (Simple and Compound Words.) A simple word 
is formed from a single stem; as λόγος (stem Acy-), speech, 
γράφω (ypad-), write. A compound word is formed by com- 
bining two or more stems; as λογο-γράφος (Aocyo-, γραῷ -)y 
writer of speeches. 


2. (Verbals and Denominatives.) (a) When a noun or 
adjective is formed directly from a root (§ 32, Note), or from 
a stem which appears as the stem of a verb, it is called a ver- 
bal or primitive; as ἀρχή (stem dpyxa-), beginning, formed from 
dpx-, Stem of dpyw; γραφεύς (γραφευ-), writer, ypadis (γραφιδ-), 
style (for writing), γραμμή (ypappa- for ypad-pya), line, (3, N. 
2), γράμμα (ypappar-), written document, γραφικός (γραφικο-), 
able to write, all from γραφ-, stem of γράφω, write; ποιη-τής͵ 
poet (maker), ποίη-σις, poesy, ποίη-μα, poem, ποιη-τικός, able to 
make, from ποιε-2 stem of ποιέω, make: 50 δίκη (dixa-), justice, 
from the root d:x-, κακός, bad, from κακ-. See § 128, 3. 


(6) When a noun, adjective, or verb is formed from the 
stem of a noun or adjective, it is called a denominative or 
derivative; as βασιλεία, κθιφαόρι, from βασιλε(υ)- (§ 53, 8, 
N. 1) ; ἀρχαῖος, ancient, from dpxa- (stem of ἀρχή) ; δικαιο- 
σύνη, justice, from δικαιο- ; τιμά-ω, ‘esas from tipa-, stem of 
the noun τιμή. 


§ 128. ] FORMATION OF WORDS. | 181 


Nore. The name verbal is applied to the primitive words in (a) be- 
cause generally their root or stem actually occurs asa verb stem. This, 
however, does not show that the noun (or adjective) is derived from the 
verb, but merely that both have the same root or stem.!_ The name applies 
even to nouns or adjectives derived from a verb stem which is itself derived 
from a noun stem (2, ὁ); as αὐλητής, flute-player, from αὐλε-, the stem of 
πὐλέω, play the flute; the latter, however, is formed from the stem of 
κὐλό-ς, flute (§ 130, N. 2). 


3. (Suffixes.) Roots or stems are developed into new stems 
by the addition of syllables (not themselves stems) called 
suffixes. Thus in § 128, 2, final a- in dpya-, ev- in ypadev-, ιδ- 
In ypadid-, μα- in γραμμα-, ματ- in ypappat-, ικο- in γραφικο-» 
&c. are suffixes. 


Note 1. Rarely a noun stem has no suffix, and is identical with the 


verk stem; as in φύλαξ, a guard, from stem φυλακ-, seen also in φυλάσσω, 
1 guard (§ 108, IV.). 


Nore 2. The final consonant of a stem is subject to the same euphonic 
changes before a suffix as before an ending (δ 16); as in γράμ-μα for γραφ- 
μα (8 16, 3), λέξις for λεγ-σις (§ 16, 2), δικασ-τής for δικαδ-τὴς (§ 16, 1), 


Norte 3. A final vowel of the stem may be contracted with a vowel of 
the ‘suffix; as in ἀρχαῖος, ancient, from dpxa- and co-s (δ 129, 12). But 
such a vowel is sometimes dropped, as in οὐράν-ιος, heavenly, from ovpavo- 
and wo-s, βασιλ-ικός, kingly, from βασιλε(υ)- and txo-s. The vowel is some- 
times changed ; especially from o to ε in denominative verbs (ὃ 130, N. 2), 
as in oixé-w, dwell (oixo-s, house),— cf. oixé-rns, house-servant, and οἰκεῖος 
(oixe-cos, ὃ 129, 12), domestic ; — sometimes from a to w, as in στρατιώ-Της, 
soldier (στρατια-), Σικελιώ-της, Sicilian (Σικελια-). 


Norse 4. Many vowel stems (especially verb stems) lengthen their final 
vowel before a consonant of the suffix, as in verbs (δ 109, 1); as ποίη-μα, 
ποίη-σις, ποιη-τικύς, ποιη-τής, from moe-. Many add o before » and 7 of a 
suffix, as in the perfect and aorist passive (§ 109, 2); as κελευ-σ-τής, com- 
mander, κέλευ-σ-μα, command, from κελευ- (κελεύω), κεκέλευ-σ-μαι. 


ΝΌΤΕ 5. In many verbal nouns and adjectives, especially those in os 
and ἡ, the interior vowel of the stem is lengthened or otherwise modified, 
as it is in the second perfect (§ 109, 3). A change of ε to ο is especially 
common. Thus λήϑη, forgetfulness, from λᾶθ- (cf. λέληθα); γόνος, offspring, 
from γεν- (cf. γέγονα); λοιπός, remaining, from λιπ- (cf. λέλοιπα); στοργή, 
affection, from στεργ- (cf. ἔστοργα); πομπή, sending, from πεμπ- (cf. πέ- 
πομφα, ὃ 109, 8, N. 2); τρόπος, turn, from tper-; φλόξ, flame, gen. pdroy- 
és, from φλεγ-- So also in adverbs; see συλ-λήβ-δην, ὃ 129, 18, (0). 


1 The root γραφ- contains only the general idea write, not as yet devel- 
oped into a noun, adjective, or verb. By adding a it becomes ypaga-, the 
stem of the noun γραφή, a writing, which stem is modified by case-endings 
to ypada-l, γραφά-ς, &e. (§ 45, 2, Note). By adding o or e (the so-called 
connecting vowel, § 112, 4) it is developed into ypago(e)-, the full form of 
the present stem of the verb γράφω, write, which is modified by personal 
endings to γράφο-μεν, we write, Ὑράφε-τε, you write, &c. 


\ 
εἾ 


182 - FORMATION OF WORDS. 1§ 129. 


FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS. 
I.—NOUNS, ADJECTIVES, AND ADVERBS. 


§ 129. The chief suffixes by which the stems of nouns, 
adjectives, and adverbs are formed are as follows : — 


NOUNS. 

1. The simplest and most common suffixes are 9- (nom. os or or) 
and a- (nom. aor 7). Nouns thus formed have a great variety of 
meanings; as Adyo-s (Aoy-o-), speech, from λεγ- (stem of λέγω, ὃ 128, 
8, N. δ); μάχ-η (wax-a-), battle, from pax- (stem of μάχομαι, fight) ; 
τρόπος, turn, frem τρεπ- (stem of τρέπω, turn); στόλος, expedition, 
στολή, equipment, from στεὰλ- (stem of στέλλω, send). 


2. (Agent.) The following suffixes denote the agent in verbals, 
and the person concerned with anything in denominatives : — 

(a) ev- (nom. evs): γραφ-εύ-ς, writer, from γραφ- (γράφω); yov-ev-s, 
parent, from yev-; ἱππ-εύ-ς, horseman, from ἱππο- (ἵππος) ; πορθμ-εύ-ς, 
Serryman (πορθμό-ς, ferry). See 8 128, 3, Notes 3 and 5. 

Notr. A few nouns in evs have feminines in ed (with recessive accent, 
ὃ 25, 1, N.); as βασίλεια, queen (cf. 3, N. 2). 

(Ὁ) τηρ- (nom: tp): σωτήρ, saviour, from σω- (cho, σώζω, save). 

top- (nom. τωρ) : ῥήτωρ, orator, from ῥε- (ἐρέω, ἐρῶ, shall say). 

τα- (nom. της): ποιητής, poet (maker), from ποιε- (ποιέω) ; ὀρχη- 
στής, dancer, from ὀρχε- (ὀρχέομαι, dance); ἱππότης, horseman, from 
ἵππο- (ἵππος, horse). 

To these correspond the following feminine forms: — 

τειρα- (NOM. τειρᾶ) : σώτειρα, fem. of σωτήρ. 

τρια- (NOM. τριᾶ) : ποιήτρια, poetess ; ὀρχήστρια, dancing-girl. 

τριδ- (nom. τρίς) : ὀρχηστρίς, dancing-girl, gen. -idos. 

τιδ- (nom. τις): προφῆτις, prophetess ; οἰκέτις, female servant. 


Nore. Verbals in ryp and rps are oxytone: those in τωρ, τρια, and 
reipa have recessive accent (§ 25, 1, N.). 


3. (Action). These suffixes denote action (in verbals only): — 
7 τι- (nom. ris, fem.): πίσ-τις, belief, from πιθ- (πείθω, believe). 
σι- (nom. σις, fem.): λύ-σις, loosing, from λυ- (Ava). 
σια- (nom. ova, fem.); δοκιμα-σία, testing, (δοκιμάζω, test). 
po- (nom. μός, Masc.): σπασ-μός, spasm (σπά-ω, draw, § 128, 3, N. 4). 


Pa 
Ζ 


8.129.] FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS. . 183 


Note 1. The suffix wa- (nom. μη, fem.) has the same force as simple 


a- (§ 129, 1); as γνώμη, knowledge (yvo-), τόλμη, daring (τολμα- -), ὀδμή, 
odor (dw, ὁδ.). 


Norte 2. From stems in ev (eF) of verbs in evw come nouns in ela de- 
noting action; as βασιλεία, kingly power, kingdom, παιδεία, education (cf. 
2, a, Note). 

4. (Result.) These suffixes denote the result of an action (in 
verbals only) :— 

par- (nom. pa, neut.): mpay-pa, thing, act, from mpay- (πράσσω, 
do); ῥῆμα, saying (thing said), from pe- (fut. ἐρῶ) ; τμῆ-μα, section, 
gen. τμήματος, from tpe-, τεμ- (τέμνω, cul). 

ex- (nom. os, neut.): λάχος (Aaxeo-), lot, from λαχ- (λαγχάνω, gain 
by lot); ἔθος (ebea-), custom, from ἐθ- (εἴωθα, am accustomed) ; γένος. 
(yeveo-), race, from γεν- (γέγονα, ὃ 128, ὃ, N. 5). 

Norse. Denominatives in os (stem in εσ-), denote quality (see 7). 

5. (Means or Instrument.) This is denoted by 


tpo- (nom. τρον, Latin trum): ἄρο-τρον, plough, aratrum, from dpo- 
(ἀρόω, plough) ; λύ-τρον, ransom, from λυ- (Av) ; λοῦ-τρον, bath, from 
λου- (λούω, wash). 

Nore. The feminine in τρᾶ sometimes denotes an instrument, as χύτρα, 
earthen pot, from χυ- (xéw, pour); ξύ-σ-τρα, scraper, from ξυ- (ξύω, scrape) ; 
sometimes other relations, e.g. place, as παλαί-σ-τρα, place for wrestling, 
from madat- (παλαίω, wrestle, § 109, 2). 

6. (Place.) This is denoted by these suffixes: — 

τήριο- (NOM. τήριον, Only verbals): δικασ-τήριον, court-house, from 
dixad- (δικάζω, judge). 

eo- (nom. eiov, only denom.): κουρεῖον, barber’s shop, from xov- 
pev-s, barber ; so Aoy-etov (λόγος), speaking-place, Μουσ-εῖον (Μοῦσα), 
haunt of the “Muses. 

wy- (nom. ὦν, masc., only denom.): ἀνδρών, men’s apartment, from 
ἀνήρ, gen. dvdp-ds, man ; ἀμπελών, vineyard, from ἄμπελος, vine. 

7. (Quality.) Nouns denoting quality are formed from adjective 
stems by these suffixes: — 

Tyr (nom. rns, fem.): ved-rns (eornr-), youth, from véo-s, young ; 
ἰσότης (ἰσοτητ-), equality, from ἴσο-ς, equal (cf. Latin veritas, gen. 
veri-tdtis, virtus, gen. vir-titis). 

συνα- (nom. σύνη, fem.): δικαιο-σύνη, justice, from δίκαιο-ς, just ; 
σωφρο-σύνη, continence, from σώφρων (cwdpov-), continent. 

ta- (nom. ca, fem.): σοφ-ία, wisdom (σοφός), κακία, vice (κακός), 
ἀλήθεια, truth, from ἀληθεσ- (ἀληθής, true). See Note. 

eo- (nom. os, neut. 3 decl.): rday-os, speed (ταχύς, swift), Bap-os, 
weight (βαρύς, heavy). See § 128, 3, N. 8; § 129, +, Note. 


184 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 129. 


Nore. Adjective stems in ec- drop σ (8 16,.4, N.), and those m oo 
drop ὁ before the suffix va ; as in ἀλήθεια (above), and εὔνοια, good-will, from - 
eUvoo-s, εὔνους. ; 

8. (Diminutives). These are formed from noun stems by the fol- 
lowing suffixes: — 

vo- (NOM. cov, neut.): παιδ-ίον, little child, from παιδ- (παῖς, child) ; 
κηπ-ίον, little garden (κῆπος). Sometimes also ιδιο-, ἄριο-, vBpto-, υλλιο- 
(all with nom. in tov); οἰκ-ίδιον, little house (οἶκος) ; παιδ-άριον, little 
child ;. μελ-ύδριον, little song (μέλος) ; ἐπ-ύλλιον, little verse, versicle, 
Latin versiculus (ἔπος). Here final eo- of the stem is dropped. 

ισκο- (nom. ίσκος, masc.) and wKa- (nom. ioxy, fem.): παιδίσκος, 
young boy, παιδίσκη, young girl ; 80 νεανίσκος, νεανίσκη. 

Nors. Diminutives sometimes express endearment, and sometimes con- 
tempt ; as πατρίδιον, papa (πατήρ, father), Σωκρατίδιον, Ἐὐριπίδιον. 

9. (Patronymics.) ‘These denote descent from a parent or ances- 


tor (generally a father), and are formed from proper names by the 
following suffixes: — 


Sa- (nom. dys, masc. parox.) and §- (nom. s for ds, fem. oxy- 
tone); after a consonant ιδα- and ιδ- (nom. ἔδης and i's). 

(a) Stems of the first declension (in a) add da- and 6- directly; — 
as Boped-dns, son of Boreas, and Boped-s, gen. Βορεά-δος, daughter of 
Boreas, from Βορέας, Boreas. . 

(0) Stems of the second declension drop the final o and add ιδα- 
and 18-; as Πριαμ-ίδης, son of Priam; ἹΤριαμ-ίς, gen. Πριαμίδος, daugh- 
ter of Priam, from Upiapo-s. Except those in wo-, which change o to 
a, making nominatives in ἰάδης and tds; as Θεστιάδης and Θεστιάς, 
son and daughter of Thestius (Θέστιο-ς). 

(c) Stems of the third declension add εδα- and .8-, those in εὖ 
dropping v before 1; as Κεκροπ-ίδης, son (or descendant) of Cecrops, 
Kexpor-is, gen. (80s, daughter of Cecrops, from Κέκροψ, gen. Κέκροπ- 
os; ᾿Ατρείδης (Hom. ᾿Ατρεΐδης), son of Atreus, from ’Arpev-s, gen. 
’Arpé-ws; Πηλείδης (Hom. Πηλεΐδης), son of ‘Peleus, from Πηλεύςς, 
gen. Πηλέ-ως, Hom. also ἸΠηληιάδης, as if from ἃ form Πηλήιος (0). 

Nor. Occasionally patronymics are formed by the suffix tov- or twv- 
(nom. tav); as Κρονίων, gen. Κρονίωνος or Kpoviovos (to suit the metre), son 
of ‘Kronos (Kpévo-s). 

10. (Gentiles.) These designate a person as belonging to some 
country ΟΥ town, and are formed by the following suffixes: — 

ev- (nom. evs, masc.): Ἐρετριεύς, Eretrian (Eperpia) ; Μεγαρεύς, 
Megarian (Μέγαρα, pl.); Κολωνεύς, of Colonos (Kodwvd-s). 

τα- (nom. τῆς; Masc. parox.): Teyed-rns, of Tegea (Teyéa), Ἤπει-.. 
ρώ-της, of Epirus (Ἤπειρος), Σικελιώ-της, Sicilian (Σικελία). See 
§ 128, 3, N. 3. 


§ 129.] FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS. 185 


Note. Feminine stems in ιδ-- (nom. fs, gen. (dos) correspond to mascu- 
lines in ev-; as Meyapis, Megarian woman ; and feminines in τιδ-- (nom. 
τις, gen. τιδος), to masculines in Ta-, as Σικεχιῶ-τις, Sicilian woman. 


+ 


ADJECTIVES. 


11. The simplest suffixes by which adjectives (like nouns) are 

formed from roots or stems are o- and a- (nom. mase. os; fem. 7, a, 
or os; neut. ov): σοφ-ός, σοφή, σοφόν, wise ; κακ-ός, bad ; λοιπ-ός, re- 
maining (Aum-, Aour-, ὃ 128, 3, N. 5). 

12. Adjectives signifying belonging or related in any way to a per- 
son or thing are formed from noun stems by the suffix vo- (nom. tos): - 
οὐράν-ιος, heavenly (odpavd-s), οἰκεῖος, domestic (see ὃ 128, 8, N. 3), δέ- 
καιος, just (δικα-), ᾿Αθηναῖος, Athenian ( Αθῆναι, stem ’A@nva-). 

13. (a) Verbals denoting ability or fitness are formed by ικο- 
(nom. ικός), sometimes τικο- {(τικός): ἀρχ-ικός, fit to rule (ἄρχω), 
γραφικός, capable of writing or painting (γράφω), βουλευ-τικός, able to 
advise (BovAedw), πρακ-τικός, fit fur action (practical), from πρᾶγ- 
(πράσσω). 

(0) Denominatives thus formed denote relation, like adjectives ἴῃ 
tos (12); πολεμ-ικός, of war, warlike (πόλεμος), BactA-tkds, kingly (Ba- 
σιλεύς), φυσικός, natural (φύσις). : 

14, Adjectives denoting material are formed by wo- (nom. wos, 
proparox.), as Aid-wos, of stone (Aidos);— and εο- (nom. eos, contr. 
ous), aS χρύσεος, χρυσοῦς, golden (χρυσός). 

Nore. Adjectives in wés (oxytone) denote time, as ἐαρινός, vernal (ἔαρ, 
spring), νυκτερινός, by night (νύξ, night, νύκτερος, by night). 

15. Those denoting fulness (chiefly poetic) are formed by evr- 
(nom. eis, εσσα; ev); χαρίεις, graceful (χάρις), gen. χαρίεντος ; ὑλήεις, — 
woody ; Latin gratiosus, silvosus. 

16. Inclination or tendency is expressed by pov- (nom. μων, pov); 
μνήμων, mindful (μνήμη, memory), τλή-μων, enduring (thd, endure), 
ἐπιλήσμων, forgelful (Aab-, NavOdvw). 

17. Other adjectives with various meanings are formed by va- 
rious suffixes besides the simple o- (11), as vo-, Xo, po-, μό-, OF σιμο-», 
all with nom. in os; εσ-- with nom. in ns, es. Some of these are dis- 
tinguished by an active or a passive meaning; as δειλός, timid, det- 
νός, terrible, (8e-, fear); sometimes the same adjective has both 
Seuses; as φοβερός, frightful and afraid. 

Adjectives in ns are generally compounds (§ 181, 6); a few are 
simple, as Ψευδ-ής, false. 

Nors. For verbal adjective in ros and reos, see ὃ 117, 3. 


ae 
- 


186 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 130. 


ADVERBS. 


18. Most adverbs are formed from adjectives, as is explained in 
§§ 74, 75. 

Adverbs may be formed also from the stems of nouns or verbs 
by the following suffixes: — 

(a) 86v (or δά), ηδόν : ἀνα-φαν-δόν, openly (dva-paivw, pay-), poet. 
also ἀναφανδά; κυν-ηδόν, like a dog (κύων, gen. κυνός). 

(Ὁ) ϑὴν or &8yv: κρύβ-δην, secretly (κρύπτω, conceal); συλλήβ-δην, 
collectively (συλλαμβάνω, λᾶβ-, ὃ 128, ὃ, N. 5); σπορ-άδην, scatieredly 
(σπείρω, sow, scatter, stem σπερ-) ἀνέ-δην, profusely (ἀν-ίημι, let out, 
stem €-). 

(c) τί : dvopac-ri, by name (ὀνομάζω, δ 16, 1); ἑλληνισ-τί, in Greek 
(ἑλληνίζω). 

See also the local endings θι, θεν, δε, &c., § 61. 


II. DENOMINATIVE VERBS. 


8 180, A verb whose stem is derived from the stem of a 
noun or adjective is called a denominative (§ 128, 2, 6). The 
following are the principal terminations of such verbs in the 
present indicative active : — 

. ἄω (stem in a-): τιμάω, honor, from noun τιμή {τιμα-}. honor. 
- ew (ε-) : ἀριθμέω, count, from ἀριθμός, number (Note 2). 

- ow (0-): μισθόω, let for hire, from μισθό-ς, pay. 

- evw (ev-): βασιλεύω, be king, from βασιλεύ-ς, king. 

- afew (ad-): δικάζω, judge, from δίκη (δικα-), justice. 

- ufo (cd-): ἐλπίζω, hope, from ἐλπίς (ἐλπιδ-), hope. 


.« ave (ἄν-) : σημαίνω, signify, from σῆμα (σηματ-), sign. 
. tvw (ὕν-) : ἡδύνω, sweeten, from ἡδύ-ς, sweet. 


ON®apowne 


For the relations of the present to the simple stem, see § 108. 


Note 1. Desiderative verbs, expressing a desire to do anything, are 
sometimes formed from other verbs and from nouns by the ending ceww (stem 
in σει-), sometimes aw or caw (a- or ta-); as δρα-σείω, desire to do (dpd-w); 
yera-celw, desire to laugh (yedd-w); pov-dw, be blood-thirsty (φόνος); κλαυ- 
σ-ιάω, desire to weep (κλαίω, stem κλαυ-), ὃ 128, 3, N. 4. 


Nore 2. The final letter or syllable of the stem from which a denomina- 
tive verb is formed is specially subject to modification (δ 128, 3, N. 8). Thus 
many verbs in ew come from stems in 0, as φιλέ-ω, love (pido-s). Some come 
from stems in -εσ (§ 52, 1), dropping eo ; as εὐτυχέω, be fortunate, from 
εὐτυχής (εὐτυχεσ-), fortunate. 


§ 131.] COMPOUND WORDS. 187. 


» 


Note 8. Verbs formed from the same noun stem with different end- 
ings sometimes have different meanings ; as πολεμέω and (poetic) πολεμίζω, 
make war, πολεμόω, make hostile, both from πόλεμο-ς, war ; δουλόω, en- 
slave, δουλεύω, be a slave, from δοῦλο-ς, slave. 


COMPOUND WORDS. 


8 131. Ina compound word we have to consider (a) the 
first part of the compound, (6) the last part, and (6) the mean- 
ing of the whole. 


REMARK. The modifications which are necessary when a compound con. 
sists of more than two parts wiil suggest themselves at once. 


(A.) First Part oF A Compounp Worp. 


1. When the first part of a compound is a noun or adjec- 
tive, only its stem appears in the compound. 

Before a consonant, stems of the first declension generally 
change final « to 0; those of the second declension retain 0; 
and those of the third add o. Before a vowel, stems of the 
first and second declensions dropaoro. fg. 

Θαλασσο-κράτωρ (Gadacca-), ruler of the sea, χορο-διδάσκαλος (xopo-), 
chorus-teacher, matdo-rpiBns (παιδ-), trainer of boys (in gymnastics), 
κεφαλ-αλγής (xepada-), causing headache, χορ-ηγός (xopo-), (orig.) 
chorus-director ; 80 ἰχθυο-φάγος (ixOv-), fish-ealer, φυσιο-λόγος, enquir- 
ing into nature. 

Nore. There are many exceptions. Sometimes 7 takes the place of 0; 
as χοη-φόρος (xo, Libation), bringer of libations, ἐλαφη- βόλος (€dadgo-s), 
deer-slayer. Stems in eo (δ 52, 1) often change eo to 0; as τειχο-μαχία 
(τειχεσ-), wall-fighting. The stems of vais, ship, and Bois, ox, generally 
appear without_change (vav- and fov-); as ναυ-μαχία, sea-fight, βου-κόλος, 


herdsman. Sometimes a noun appears in one of its cases, as if it were a 
distinct word ; as νεώσ-οικος, ship-house, ναυσί-πορος, traversed by ships. 


2. Compounds of which the first part is a verb are chiefly 
poetic. . 


(a) Here the verb stem sometimes appears without change 
before a vowel, and with ε, 1, or o added before a conse- 
nant. E.g. 

TleiO-apxos, obedient to authority ; μεν-ε-πτόλεμος, steadfast in bat- 
ile ; aoe master-builder ; λιπ-ότ-γαμος; marriage-leaving (adul- 
lérous). 


188 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 131. 


(>) Sometimes o is added to the verb stem (generally σι 
before a consonant). £.9. 

Πλήξοιππος (πληγ-); horse-lashing ; λυσί-πονος, toil-relieving ; στρε- 
ψί-δικος (orpep-), Justice-twisting ; τερψί-νοος (repm-), soul-delighting. 

3. A preposition or an adverb may be the first part of a 
compound word; as in προ-βάλλω, throw before, ἀει- λογία, con- 
tinual talking, εὐ-γενής, well-born. But no changes in form occur 
in these, except when a final vowel is elided (§ 12, 2), or when 
πρό contracts o with a following « or o into ov, as in προὔχω 
᾿ (πρό, ἔχω), hold before ; προὔργου (πρό, ἔργου). forward, φροῦδος 
(πρό, 680s), gone (cf. ὃ 17,2, Note). Euphonic changes occur 
here as usual; as in ἐγχώριος (ἐν and χώρα, § 16, 5). 

4. The following inseparable particles are used only as 
prefixes : — 

(a) av- (a- before a consonant), called alpha privative, pre- 
fixed to nouns and adjectives, rarely to verbs, with a negative 
force, like English un-, Latin ¢n-; as ἀν-ελεύθερος, unfree, av- 
αιδής, shameless, ἀν-ὅμοιος, unlike, ἄ-παις, childless, ἄ-γραφος, un- 
written, ἄ-θεος, godless. : 

(Ὁ) dvo-, ill (opposed to εὖ, well), denoting difficulty o 
trouble ; as δύσ-πορος., hard to pass (opposed to εὔ-πορος) ; δυσ- 
Tuxys, unfortunate (opposed to εὐ-τυχής). 

(c) νη- (Latin ne), a poetic negative prefix; as vy-rowos, 
unavenged ; vn-peptys, unerring. 

(4) ἡμι- (Latin semi-), half; as ἡμέξθεος, demigod. 

Nore 1. A few intensive prefixes are found in poetry, —dpt-, ἐρι-, da-, 
§a-, as ἀρί-γνωτος, well-known ; δα-φοινός, bloody. 


Norge 2. The prefix a- is sometimes copulative (denoting wnion) ; as 
in d-doxos, bedfellow (from λέχος). 


(B.) Last Part or a Compounp Worp. 


5. At the beginning of the last part of a compound noun 
or adjective, a, «, or o (unless it is lengthened by position) is 
generally lengthened to 7 orw. Eg. 

_ Στρατ-ηγός (στρατό-ς, ἄγω), general ; ὑπ-ήκοος (ὑπό, ἀκούων, obe- 
dient; κατ-ηρεφής (κατά, ἐρέφω), covered ; ἐπ-ώνυμος (ἐπί, ὄνομαν, nam- — 


eh named for; κατ-ήγορος (κατά, and stem of ἀγορά), accuser. (See 
2-) 
? 


8.182.} COMPOUND WORDs. Saas 


6. The last part of a compound noun or adjective may be 
changed in form when a suffix is added (§ 129). This takes 
place especially in compound adjectives, and when an abstract 
noun forms the last part of a compound noun. £.g. 

Φιλό-τιμος (τιμή), honor-loving ; πολυ-πράγμων (mpaypa), meddle- 
some ; αὐτ-άρκης (αὐτός, ἀρκέω, suffice), self-sufficient ; dv-adns (aidéo- 
par), shameless ; κακο-ήθης (ἦθος), wl-disposed ; ----λιθο-βολία (λίθος, 
Born), stone-throwing , ναυ-μαχία (ναῦς, μάχη), sea-fight. 


Compound adjectives in ns are especially frequent (§ 129, 17). 

Norr. An abstract noun compounded with a preposition may retain 
its form ; as προ-βουλή, forethought. : | 

7. A compound verb can be formed directly only by prefix- 
ing a preposition to a verb; as προσ-άγω, bring to. Indirect 
compounds (denominatives) are formed from compound nouns 
or adjectives, which themselves may be compounded in various 
ways. Δ. 


AvboBoréw, throw stones, denom. from λεθο-βόλος, stone-thrower ; 
τατηγορέω, accuse, from κατ-ήγορος, accuser (cf. 5). See 8 105, 
1, N. 2. 


(C.) Meranine or Compounps. 


§ 182, Compound nouns and adjectives are of three 
classes, distinguished by the relation of the parts of the com- 
pound to each other and to the whole. 


1. Objective compounds are those composed of a noun and 
a verb, adjective, or preposition, in which the noun stands to 
the other part in some relation (commonly that of object) which 
could be expressed by an oblique case of the noun. £.g. 


Aoyo-ypados, speech-writer (λόγους γράφων); μισ-άνθρωπος, man- 
hating (μισῶν ἀνθρώπους) ; στρατ-ηγός, general (army-leading, στρατὸν 
ἄγων) ; ἀξιό-λογος, worthy of mention (ἄξιος Adyov) ; ἁμαρτ-ί-νοος, erring 
in mind (ἁμαρτὼν vod); ἰσό-θεος, godlike (ἴσος bed); τερπ-ι-κέραυνος, te- 
lighting in thunder (τερπόμενος κεραυνῷ) : διο-τρεφής, reared by Zeus 
(cf. διι-πετής, fallen or sent from Zeus, and Διι-τρεφής, a proper name). 
So with a preposition: ἐγ-χώριος, native (ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ); ἐφ-ίππιος, be- 
longing on a horse (ἐφ᾽ ἵππῳ). 


Note. When the last part of an objective compound is a transitive ver- 
bal in os formed by the suffix ο- (§ 129, 1), it generally accents the penult 
if this is short, otherwise the last syllable. But if the last part is intran- 


190 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 132. 


sitive or passive (in sense), the accent is recessive. Thus λογο-γράφος, 
speech-writer ; λιθο-βόλος, thrower of stones, but λιθό-βολος, pelted with 
stones ; μητρο-κτόνος, matricide, matricidal ;, orpar-nyds, general ; oyo- 
ποιός, story-maker. 


2. Determinative compounds are nouns or adjectives in 
which the first part, generally as adjective or adverb, quali- 
fies (or determines) the second part. £.g9. 


᾿Ακρό-πολις, citadel (axpa πόλις) ; peo-nuBpia (μεσὴ ἡμέρα, ὃ 14, 2, 
N. 1), mid-day; ψευδό-μαντις, false prophet ; ὁμό-δουλος, fellow-slave 
(ὁμοῦ δουλεύων) ; δυσ-μαθής, learning with difficulty; ὠκυ-πέτης, swift- 
Slying ; ἀμφι-θέατρον, amphitheatre (theatre extending all round); 
ἄ-γραφος, unwritten. Here belong adjectives like μελι-ηδής (ἡδύς); 
honey-sweet, ’Apni-Ooos, swift as Ares (Ares-swift). 


Notre. Here belong a few compounds sometimes called copulative, 
made of two nouns or two adjectives, and signifying a combination of the 
two things or qualities. Strictly, the first part limits the last, like an 
adjective or adverb. Such are ἰατρό-μαντις, physician-prophet (a prophet 
who is also a physician); ξιφο-μάχαιρα, sword-sabre ; ἀνδρό-παις, man-child ; 
γλυκύ-πικρος, sweetly bitter ; θεό-ταυρος (of Zeus changed to a bull). 


3. Possessive or attributive compounds are adjectives in which 
the first part qualifies the second (as in determinatives), and 
the whole denotes a quality or attribute belonging to some 
person or thing. L.g. 


᾿Αργυρό-τοξος, with silver bow (ἀργυροῦν τόξον ἔχων) ; κακο-δαίμων, 
ill-fated (κακὸν δαίμονα ἔχων); πικρό-γαμος, wretchedly married (πικρὸν 
ἅμον ἔχων) ; dud-vopos, having the same laws; ἑκατογ-κέφαλος, hundred- 
eaded ; Sexa-erns, of ten years (duration); ἀγαθο-ειδής, having the 
appearance (εἶδος) of good ; ἔν-θεος, inspired (having God within); 
ὠκύ-πους, swift-footed (ὠκεῖς πόδας ἔχων), ---- but ποδ-ώκης (πόδας ὠκύς), 
foot-swift, is a determinative. 


Remark. In compound verbs, the original, verb remains the funda- 
mental part, modified more or less in meaning by the preposition prefixed. 
Other compounds than those here mentioned present no difficulties in re- 
spect to meaning. 


PART IV. 


SYNTAX. 


DEFINITIONS. 


§ 133, 1. Every sentence must contain two parts, a 
subject and a predicate. The subject is that of which 
something is stated. The predicate is that which is 
stated of the subject. Thus in the sentence Aapeios 
βασιλεύει, Darius is king, Δαρεῖος is the subject and 
βασιλεύει is the predicate. 

Nore 1. When any part of εἰμί, be, connects the subject with a 
following noun or adjective, the verb is called the copula (i. e. means 
of coupling), and what follows is called the predicate; as Δαρεῖός 
ἐστι βασιλεύς, Darius is king, Σόλων ἐστὶ σοφός, Solon is wise, where 
ἐστί is the copula. (See § 136, Rem.) | 


Εἰμί, however, can form a complete predicate, as in εἰσὶ θεοί, God 
exist ; it is then called the substantive verb. 


Note 2. The simple subject and predicate may each be modified 
by additional words or clauses; as Κῦρος, ἀκούσας ἃ εἶπεν, εἰσῆλθεν 
els τὴν πόλιν, Cyrus, on hearing what he said, went into the city, where 
Κῦρος, ἀκούσας ἃ εἶπεν, is the modified subject, and the rest is the 
modified predicate. 


2. That upon which the action of a verb is exerted is 
called the object. The object may be either direct or 
indirect : thus, in ἔδωκε τὰ χρήματα τῷ ἀνδρί, he gave the 


money to the man, χρήματα is the direct object and ἀνδρί 
is the indirect (or remote) object. 


192 SYNTAX. [§ 134. 


Note. Some verbs, called transitive, generally need the addition 
of an object to complete the sense. Others, called intransitive, admit 
no such addition; as ἀπῆλθον, 1 departed. | : 


SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 


SUBJECT. 


8 134, 1. The subject of a finite verb is in the nomi- 
native ; as ὁ ἀνὴρ ἦλθεν, the man came. 


A verb in a finite mood is called a finite verb (§ 89). 


2. The subject of the infinitive mood is in the ac- 
cusative ; as λέγουσι τοὺς ἄνδρας ἀπελθεῖν, they say that 
the men went away. 


3. But the subject of the infinitive is generally omitted 
when it is the same as the subject or the object of the 
leading verb; as βούλεται ἀπελθεῖν, he wishes to go away; 
φησὶ γράφειν, he says that he is writing; παραινοῦμέν 
σοι μένειν, We advise you to remain. 


So when it is the same with any important adjunct of the lead- 
ing verb; as κακούργου ἐστὶ κριθέντ᾽ ἀποθανεῖν, it is like a malefactor to 
die by sentence of the law (8 188, N. 8, δ). 


Note 1. The subject nominative of the first or second person is 
omitted, except when special emphasis is required, (See foot-note, 
page 143.) 


The nominative of the third person is omitted: — 
(a) When it is expressed or implied in the context; 


(ὁ) When it is a general word for persons; as λέγουσι, they say, 
it is said ; 

(c) When it is indefinite; as in ὀψὲ ἦν, it was late; καλῶς ἔχει, it is 
well ; δηλοῖ, it is evident (the case shows): so in the impersonal con- 
struction with the verbal in réov, as in πειστέον (ἐστὶ) τῷ νόμῳ, we 
must obey the law (§ 281, 2). 


. (ὦ) When the verb implies its own subject,.as κηρύσσει, the her- 

ald (κῆρυξ) proclaims, ἐσάλπιγξε, the trumpeter sounded the trumpet, 
κωλύει, a hindrance occurs. In passive expressions like παρεσκεύ- 
ασταί pot, preparation has been made by me (1 am prepared), like ven- 
tum est in Latin, the subject is really the idea of preparation, &c, 
contained in the verb. See § 198. 


§ 135.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 193 


(6) With verbs like det, it rains, ἀστράπτει, it lightens, σείει, there is 
an earthquake (it shakes), where, however, some subject like Ζεύς or 
θεός was originally supplied. 


e 


Nore 2. Many verbs in the third person singular have an infini- 
tive or a sentence as their subject. These are called impersonal verbs. 
Such are πρέπει and προσήκει, it is proper, ἔνεστι and ἔξεστι, it is possi- 
ble, δοκεῖ, it seems good, συμβαίνει, it happens, and the like; as ἔξεστιν 
ὑμῖν τοῦτο ποιεῖν, it is in your power to do this (to do this is possible for 
you). So also det and χρή, it is required, we ought ; as δεῖ ἡμᾶς ἀπελ- 
θεῖν, we must go away (here, however, the infinitive might be consid- 
ered an object, and δεῖ and χρή might be classed under Note 1 (c); 
f.-9 172, IN 2). 

The name impersonal is applied with still greater propriety 
(though less frequently) to the verbs included in (6) and (d) of 
Note 1. 


Subject Nominative and Verb. 


$185. 1. A verb agrees with its subject nominative 
in number and person; as (ἐγὼ) λέγω, L say, οὗτος λέγει, 
this man says, ot ἄνδρες λέγουσιν, the men say. 


2. But a nominative in the neuter plural regularly 
takes a singular verb; as ταῦτα ἐγένετο, these things hap- 
pened, τὰ οἰκήματα ἔπεσεν, the buildings fell. So ἀδύ- 
vata ἐστι (or ἀδύνατόν ἐστι), it is impossible. 


But exceptions sometimes occur, especially with nouns denoting 
persons. Several are found in Xenophon. 


3. A singular collective noun may take a plural verb; 
as τὸ πλῆθος ἐψηφίσαντο. πολεμεῖν, the majority voted 
for war. 


Notre 1. When several subjects are connected by and, they gen- 
erally have a plural verb. But the verb often agrees with one of 
the subjects (generally the nearest), and 1s understood with the 
rest. The latter generally happens when they are connected by or 
or nor. E.g. 


Ξυμφωνοῦμεν ἐγὼ καὶ ὑμεῖς, Land you agree: σοφοὶ ἐγὼ καὶ σὺ ἦμεν, 
T and you were wise; καὶ σὺ καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ παρῆστε, both you and your 
brothers were present. ᾿Ἐμὲ οὔτε καιρὸς . .. οὔτ᾽ ἐλπὶς οὔτε φόβος 
οὔτ᾽ ἄλλο οὐδὲν ἐπῆρεν. 
13 


194 SYNTAX. [8 136, 


Note 2. (f the subjects are of different persons, the verb is in 
the first person rather than the second, and in the second rather than 
the third. (See examples under N. 1.) 


‘ Notes 3. A verb in the dual may follow two subjects in the sin- 
gular, or even a plural subject denoting two persons or things. But 
even a subject in the dual may have a verb in the plural. (See 1]. 
iv. 453; v. 10, 275; xvi. 218.) 


Nore 4. Sometimes a verb agrees with the predicate nomina- 
tive; as ai χορηγίαι ἱκανὸν εὐδαιμονίας σημεῖόν ἐστιν; the payments 
Sor choruses are a sufficient sign of prosperily. 


Nore 5. Rarely a singular verb has a masculine or feminine sub- 
ject in the plural; as ἔστι δὲ ἑπτὰ στάδιοι ἐξ ᾿Αβύδου ἐς τὴν ἀπαντίον, 
and there is a distance of seven stades from Abydos to the opposile coast. 
In such cases the subject follows the verb, and its plural form seems 
to have arisen from an afterthought. 

See also the phrases ἔστιν οἵ, &c., § 152, N. 2. 


PREDICATE NOUN AND ADJECTIVE. 


§ 186. With verbs signifying to be, to become, to ap- 
pear, to be named, chosen, considered, and the like, a 
noun or adjective in the predicate is in the same case as 
the subject. H.g. | 


Οὗτός ἐστι βασιλεύς, this man is king; ᾿Αλέξανδρος θεὸ ς ὠνομά- 
ζετο, Alexander was named a God ; ἡρέθη στρατηγός, he was chosen 
general ; ἡ πόλις φρούριον κατέστη, the city became a fortress ; οὗτός 
ἐστιν εὐδαίμων, this man is happy; ἡ πόλις μεγάλη ἐγένετο, the city be- 
came great ; ηὔξηται μέγας, he has grown (to be) great. 


ReMArkK. The verbs which are here included with the copula 
εἰμί (§ 133, 1, N. 1) are called copulative yerbs. The predicate 
nominative with the passive verbs of this class represents the predi- 
cate accusative of the active construction (§ 166). 


Note 1. The predicate adjective agrees with the subject in gen- 
der and number as well as in case (§ 138, Remark). 


_ Notre 2. The predicate of an infinitive with its subject accusa- 
tive expressed (ὃ 134, 2) is in the accusative; as βούλεται τὸν υἱὸν 
εἶναι σοφόν, he wishes his son to be wise. So when the participle is 
used like the infinitive in indirect discourse (§ 280); as ἤδεσαν τὸν 
Κῦρον βασιλέα γενόμενον, they knew that Cyrus had become king. 


_ Note 3. (a) When the subject of εἶναι or of a copulative infini- 
tive is omitted because it refers to the same person or thing as.a 


§ 137.] APPOSITION. 193 


nominative, genitive, or dative connected with the leading verb 
(§ 134, 3), a predicate noun or adjective which belongs to the omit- 
ted subject is generally assimilated in case to the preceding nomina- 
tive, genitive, or dative. But it may stand in the accusative instead 
of being assimilated to a genitive or dative; especially a predicate 
noun is very seldom assimilated to a genitive. E.g. 


(Nom.) Βούλεται σοφὸς εἶναι, he wishes to be wise; 6 ᾿Αλέξανδρος 
ἔφασκεν εἶναι Διὸς υἱός, Alexander asserted that he was a son of Zeus. 

(Gen.) Κύρου ἐδέοντο ὡς προθυμοτάτου γενέσθαι, they asked 
Cyrus to be as devoted to them as possible; but (with a noun) ᾿Αθη- 
ναίων ἐδεήθησαν σφίσι βοηθοὺς γενέσθαι, they asked the Athenians to 
become their helpers. 

(Dat.) viv σοι ἔξεστιν ἀνδρὶ γενέσθαι, it is now in your power to 
show yourself a man; πρέπει σοι εἶναι προθύμῳ,, it becomes you to be 
zealous ; but also συμφέρει αὐτοῖς φίλου ς εἶναι, it is for their interest 
to be friends. 

(b) So when -a participle (in any case) represents the leading 
verb,and its noun the leading subject; as ἦλθον ἐπί τινα τῶν δοκούν- 
των εἶναι σοφῶν, I went to one of those who seemed to be wise ; πολλοὶ 
τῶν προσποιησαμένων εἶναι σοφιστῶν. many of those who professed to 
be sophists. So τοῖς δοκοῦσιν εἶναι σοφοῖς. 


Note 4. The same principle (N. 3) applies to the predicate of . 
ὧν or of the participle of a copulative verb; as ἤδεσαν σοφ οἱ ὄντες, 
they knew that they were wise (but ἤδεσαν τούτους σοφοὺς ὄντας, they 
knew that these men were wise). See Note 2. : 


Nore 5. For the application of the same principle to all adjective words 
which refer to the omitted subject of an infinitive, see § 138, N. 8. 


APPOSITION, 


δ 187. A noun annexed to another noun to describe 
it, and denoting the same person or thing, agrees with it 
in case. This is called apposition. Eg. 


Δαρεῖος ὁ βασιλεύς, Darius the king. ᾿Αθῆναι, μεγάλη πόλις, Athens, 
a great city. Ὑμᾶς τοὺς σοφούς, you, the wise ones. Ἡμῶν τῶν ᾽Αθη- 
ναίων, of us, the Athenians. Θεμιστοκλῆς ἥκω (sc. ἐγώ), 1 Themisto- 
cles am come. Φιλήσιος καὶ Λύκων οἱ ᾿Αχαιοί, Philesius and Lycon, the 
Achaeans. 


Nore 1. Possessive pronouns and adjectives may have a geni- 
_ tive in apposition with a genitive which they imply; as ὁ ἐμὸς τοῦ 
ταλαιπώρου Bios, the life of me, miserable one; ᾿Αθηναῖος dv, πόλεως τῆς 
μεγίστης, being (a citizen) of Athens, the greatest city. So τὰ ὑμέτερα 
αὐτῶν (for τὰ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν), your own (8 147, N. 4). 


196 SYNTAX. [§ 138. 


Note 2. Anoun which might stand in the partitive genitive 
(§ 168) sometimes takes the case of the words denoting its parts, 
especially when the latter include the whole of the former; as οἰκίαι 
ai μὲν πολλαὶ πεπτώκεσαν, ὀλίγαι δὲ περιῆσαν, most of the houses had 
fallen, but a few remained (where we might have τῶν οἰκιῶν). So οὗ- 
τοι ἄλλος ἄλλο λέγει. This is called partitive apposition. 


Nore 3. A noun may be in apposition with a whole sentence, 
being in the nominative or accusative as it is more closely con- 
nected in thought with the subject or with the object of the sen- 
tence; as κεῖνται πεσόντες, πίστις οὐ σμικρὰ πόλει. they lie prostrate, — 
no small (cause of) confidence to the city ; “Ἑλένην κτάνωμεν. Μενέλεῳ 
λύπην πικράν, let us kill Helen, (which will be) a bitter grief to Menelaus. 


Notre 4. A noun may be in apposition with the subject or the 
object of a sentence, where we use as or a like word; as ἵπποι ἤγοντο 
θύματα τῷ Ἡλίῳ, horses were brought as offerings to the Sun (in 
active, ἵππους ἄγειν θύματα, lo bring horses as offerings); συμμάχους 
ἕξεις θεούς, you will have Gods as allies. So τυχεῖν τινος φίλου, to 
gain some one as a friend; χρῶμαι τούτῳ φίλῳ, I treat him as a friend. 
So τίνος διδάσκαλοι ἥκετε; aus teachers of what are you come? See 
§ 166, Note 2. ff 


AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 


§ 138. Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender, 
number, and case. This applies also to the article and 
to adjective pronouns and participles. Μ΄. 


ὋὉ σοφὸς ἀνήρ, the wise man; τοῦ σοφοῦ ἀνδρός, τῷ σοφῷ ἀνδρί, τὸν 
σοφὸν ἄνδρα, τῶν σοφῶν ἀνδρῶν, ἕο. Οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ, this man; τούτου 
τοῦ ἀνδρός, τούτων τῶν ἀνδρῶν. Αἱ πρὸ τοῦ στόματος νῆες ναυμαχοῦσαι, 
the ships engaged in battle before the mouth (of the harbor). It includes 
predicate adjectives with copulative verbs, the case of which has 
already been considered (§ 136); as ai ἄρισται δοκοῦσαι εἶναι φύσεις, 
the natures which seem to be best. 


Remark. The adjective may be either aitributive or predicate. 
An attributive adjective simply qualifies the noun, without the inter- 
vention of a verb (like all the adjectives above, except ἄρισται). The 
predicate adjective may be connected with its noun by the copula 
(§ 133, 1, N. 1), or by a copulative verb (8 136); as ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς 
ἐστιν, the man is good ; καλεῖται ἀγαθός, he is called good: or it may 
stand to its noun in any relation which implies some part of εἰμί; 
as mrnvas διώκεις Tas ἐλπίδας, you are pursuing hopes which are winged 
(i.e. hopes being winged) ; ἀθάνατον τὴν μνήμην καταλείψουσιν, immortal is 
the memory they will leave behind them (i.e. τὴν μνήμην οὖσαν ἀθάνατον); 
ποιεῖ τοὺς Μήδους ἀσθενεῖς, he makes the Medes (to be) weak (§ 166). 
A predicate adjective is often known by its position with respect to 
the article; see § 142, 3, and the examples. 


§ 138.] AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 197 


Note 1. (a) An attributive adjective belonging to several nouns 
generally agrees with the nearest or the most prominent one, and is 
understood with the rest; as τὸν ἀγαθὸν ἄνδρα καὶ γυναῖκα, the good 
man and woman; παντὶ καὶ λόγῳ καὶ μηχανῇ, by every word and de- 
vice. 

(Ὁ) But such an adjective is occasionally plural if it belongs to 
several singular nouns, or dual if it belongs to two; as σωφρόνων ἐστὶ 
καὶ ἀνδρὸς καὶ γυναικὸς οὕτω ποιεῖν, it is the part of prudent (persons), 
buth men and women, thus to do. 


Note 2. (a) A predicate adjective is regularly plural if it be- 
longs to several singular nouns, or dual if it belongs to two. If the 
nouns are of different genders, the adjective is commonly masculine 
if one of the nouns denotes a male person, and commonly neuter if 
all denote things. Thus, εἶδε πατέρα re καὶ μητέρα καὶ ἀδελφοὺς καὶ 
τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα αἰχμαλώτους γεγενημένους, he saw that both his 
father and his mother, his brothers, and his own wife had been made 
captives ; πόλεμος καὶ στάσις ὀλέθρια ταῖς πόλεσίν ἐστιν, war and fac- 
tion are destructive to states. : 


(Ὁ) But it sometimes follows both the gender and number of 
the nearest or most prominent noun; as πρόρριζος αὐτὸς, ἡ γυνὴ, τὰ 
παιδία, ἀπολοίμην, may I perish root and branch, myself, my wife, my 
children. 


_(c) A predicate adjective is sometimes neuter, being used like a 
noun (§ 139), even when its noun is masculine or feminine; as 
καλὸν ἡ ἀλήθεια, a beautiful thing is truth. 


Note 3. A collective noun in the singular denoting persons 
may take a plural participle; as Τροίαν ἑλόντες ᾿Αργείων στόλος, the 
Argives’ army having taken Troy. 


Nore 4. An adjective may conform to the real rather than the 
Oy aie gender of a noun denoting a person; as φίλε τέκνον, dear 
Chua : 


Nore 5. The masculine form of the dual is very often used for 
the feminine in adjective pronouns and the article; as τούτω τὼ τέχνα, 
these two arts. Especially rare are the feminines τά, ravra. 


Nore 6. _ Avo, two, is often used with a plural noun. Ὄσσε, the 
eyes, and δοῦρε, two spears, in Homer, may have plural adjectives. 


Note 7. A predicate adjective is sometimes used where we should 
use an adverb or adverbial phrase; as ἑκόντες ἦλθον, they came will- 
ingly; ὅρκιός σοι λέγω, I say it to you on my oath ; πρῶτος δ᾽ ἐξερέ- 
ewe Νέστωρ, and first, Nestor inquired. There is often, however, a 
great distinction between the adjective and the adverb; as πρῶτος 
αὐτοὺς εἶδον, 1 was the first to see them; πρώτους αὐτοὺς εἶδον, they 
were the first whom I saw; πρῶτον (adv.) αὐτοὺς εἶδον, first (of all 
that I did) I saw them. 


198 SYNTAX. $ [8 139. 


Nore 8. (a) When the subject of an infinitive is omitted be- 
cause it refers to the same person or thing as a nominative, geni- 
tive, or dative connected with the leading verb (ἢ 134, 3), adjectives, 
adjective pronouns, and participles which belong to the omitted sub- 
ject are generally assimilated in case to the preceding nominative, 
genitive, or dative; but they sometimes stand in the accusative 
(agreeing with the omitted subject) instead of the genitive or da- 
tive, rarely instead of the nominative. This occurs chiefly in the 
predicate of εἶναι, or of a copulative verb; for the usage in such 
cases and for examples, see ἃ 136, Note 3. 


(b) With the infinitives of other verbs, the assimilation of an ad- 
jective to a subject nominative is regular and very rarely neglected; 
after a genitive, assimilation seldom (if ever) occurs, and the accusa- 
tive is regular; after a dative either the dative or the accusative may 
be used. 1.0. 


(Nom.) Οὐχ ὁμολογήσω ἄκλητος ἥκειν, I shall not admit that I am 
come unbidden ; οὐκ ἔφη αὐτὸς, ἀλλ᾽ ἐκεῖνον στρατηγεῖν, he said that not 
(he) himself, but he (Nicias) was general; he said οὐκ (ἐγὼ) αὐτὸς 
(orpatny®) ἀλλ᾽ ἐκεῖνος στρατηγεῖ, αὐτός being adjective (8 145, 1) and 
ἐκεῖνος Substantive. 

(Dat.) ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς συσκευασαμένοις ἃ εἶχον καὶ ἐξοπλισαμέ- 
νοις προιέναι, they decided to pack up what they had and arm themselves 
completely, and to advance (παν. ii. 1, 2); but ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς προφυ- 
λακὰς καταστήσαντας συγκαλεῖν τοὺς στρατιώτας, they decided to 
station pickets and to assemble the soldiers (ib. 111. 2, 1); in i. 2, we 
find two datives and an accusative. 

(Accus. for Gen.) κακούργου ἐστὶ κριθέντ᾽ ἀποθανεῖν, στρατηγοῦ 
δὲ μαχόμενον τοῖς πολεμίοις, it is like a malefactor to die by the sen- 
tence of a court, but like a general (to die) fighting the enemy; δέομαι 
ὑμῶν μεμνημένους τῶν εἰρημένων τὰ δίκαια ψηφίσασθαι, I beg of you 
to remember what has been said, and to vote what is just. 


Adjective used as a Noun. 


§ 189. 1. An adjective or participle, generally with the 
article, may be used as a noun; as 6 δίκαιος, the just man; 
ὁ ἐχθρός, the enemy ; φίλος, a friend; κακή, a base woman ; τὸ 
μέσον or μέσον, the middle; oi κακοί, the bad; τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς, to the 
good ; τῶν κρατούντων, of those in power; κακά, evils; τὰ θνητά, 
mortal things; ot γραψάμενοι Σωκράτην, the accusers of Socrates 
(§ 276, 2). 

Nore. In some cases, a noun is distinctly implied; as τῇ ὕστε: 
ραίᾳ (sc. ἡμέρᾳ), on the next day. 


§ 140.] THE ARTICLE. 199 


2. The neuter singular of an adjective with the article is 
often used as an abstract noun; as τὸ καλόν, beauty (—= κάλ- 
Aos), τὸ δίκαιον, Justice (== δικαιοσύνη). 


Note. The participle, which is a verbal adjective, is occasion- 
ally thus used for the infinitive, which is a verbal noun; as τὸ de- 
duds, fear (= τὸ δεδιέναι) ; ἐν τῷ μὴ μελετῶντι, in the not practising 
(= ἐν τῷ μὴ μελετᾶν); both in ‘Thucydides. So in Latin, opus est 
maturato, there is need of haste. 


THE ARTICLE. 


Homeric Use of the Article. 


§ 140. In the oldest Greek (as in Homer) the arti- 
cle appears generally as a demonstrative or personal pro- 
noun, sometimes as a relative. Lg. 


Τὴν δ᾽ ἐγὼ οὐ λύσω, but I will not free her; τοῦ δὲ κλύε Φοῖβος ᾿Απόλ- 
λων, and Phoebus Apollo heard him; 6 γὰρ ἦλθε θοὰς ἐπὶ νῆας ᾿Αχαιῶν, 
Jor he-came, &c. ΑΒ relative, πυρὰ πολλὰ τὰ καίετο, many fires which 
were burning ; δῶρα τὰ ἔδωκαν, gifis which they gave. 


Note 1. Even in Homer, adjectives and participles used as 
nouns (δ 189, 1) have the article, as in Attic Greek; as oi yap ἄριστοι 
ev νηυσὶν κέαται, for the bravest sit in the ships ; οἱ ἄλλοι, the others; τά 
τ᾽ ἐόντα τά τ᾽ ἐσόμενα, both things that are and things that are to be. 


Norr 2. (a) When the article is used with nouns in Homer, it 
is generally a pronoun,.with which the noun is in apposition; as 
ὁ δ᾽ ἔβραχε xddxeos”Apns, and he, brazen Ares, roared; ἡ δ᾽ ἀέκουσ᾽ 
ἅμα τοῖσι γυνὴ κίεν, and she, the woman, went with them unwilling. 


(b) Nearer the Attic use of the article are examples like these: 
αὐτὰρ ὁ τοῖσι γέρων ὁδὸν ἡγεμόνευεν, but he, the old man, showed them 
the way; tov δ᾽ οἷον πατέρ᾽ εὗρον, and they found him, the father, alone. 


(c) Hardly, if at all, to be distinguished from the Attic article is 
that found in examples like these: dre δὴ τὴν νῆσον ἀφίκετο, when 
now he came to the island ; τό τε σθένος Qpiwvos, and the might of 
Orion; ai δὲ γυναῖκες ἱστάμεναι θαύμαζον, and the women stood and 
wondered. 


(d) It is, therefore, often difficult to decide the exact force of an 
article in early Greek. The above examples show a gradual transi- 
tion, even in Homer, from the original pronoun to the true definite 
article. ‘ 


200 SYNTAX, [8 141. 


Nore 3. The examples in Note 2 (c) are exceptional; and in such 
cases the nouns usually stand without the article in Homer, as in 
Latin. Thus δεινὴ δὲ κλαγγὴ γένετ᾽ ἀργυρέοιο βιοῖο would in Attic 
᾿ Greek require ἡ κλαγγὴ and τοῦ βιοῦ (ὃ 141). 


Nore 4. Herodotus generally uses the forms of the article be- 
ginning with τ in the place of the ordinary relative, — of which he 
uses only the forms ὅς, ἥ. οἵ, and ai, except after prepositions. Thus 
ὄρνις ipds, τῷ οὔνομα Φοῖνιξ, a sacred bird, whose name is Phoenix. In 
other respects, he uses the article as it is used in Attic prose. 


Note 5. The Lyric poets follow the Homeric usage with respect 
to the article more closely than Herodotus; and the Attic poets, espe- 
cially in the lyric chorus, admit Homeric uses. 


Attic Use of the Article. 


Ἂν 


ὃ 141. In Attic Greek the article generally cor- 
responds to the English definite article the; as ὁ ἀνήρ, 
the man; τῶν πόλεων, Of the cities; τοῖς “Ελλησιν, to the 


Greeks. 


Note 1. The Greek uses the article in certain cases in which the 
English generaliy omits it. Such are the following: — 


(a) Proper names may take the article; as ὁ Σωκράτης or Σωκρά- 
ts, Socrates. 


(Ὁ) Abstract nouns very often take the article; as ἡ ἀρετή, virtue, 
ἡ δικαιοσύνη, justice ; ἡ εὐλάβεια, caution. But ἀρετή; &c. are also used 
in the same sense. 


(c) Nouns qualified by a demonstrative or possessive pronoun 
regularly take the article; as otros ὁ ἀνήρ, this man; ὁ ἐμὸς πατήρ, my 
father ; περὶ τῆς ἡμετέρας πόλεως, about our state. (See § 142, 4.) So 
with nouns on which a possessive genitive of a personal, demonstra- 
tive, or reflexive pronoun depends; as ὁ πατήρ μου, my father; ὃ éuav- 
χὰ πατήρ; my own father (ὃ 142, 1, Note); ὁ τούτων πατήρ, their 

ather. 


(ὦ) Τοιοῦτος, τοσοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τοσόσδε, and τηλικοῦτος may take 
the article; as τὸν τοιοῦτον ἄνδρα, such a man. It is always used with 
δεῖνα, such a-one. 


_ Nore 2. The article is sometimes used, where we use a posses- 
sive pronoun, to mark something as belonging to a person or thing 
mentioned in the sentence; as ἔρχεται Μανδάνη πρὸς τὸν πατέρα, Man- 
dane comes to her father (lit. tothe father). 


Note 3. An adverb, a preposition with its case, or any similar . 
expression, may be used with the article to qualify a noun, like an 


8142. - ‘THE ARTICLE. - 201 


attributive adjective; as of τότε ἄνθρωποι, the men of that time ; rod 
πάλαι Κάδμου, of ancient Cadmus ; οἱ ἐν ἄστει ᾿Αθηναῖοι, the Athenians in 
the city. 

Here a noun denoting men or things is often omitted; as of év 
ἄστει, those in the city; τοῖς τότε, to those of that time ; οἱ ἀμφὶ MAd- 
tava, those about Plato (generally Plato and his school, or simply 
Plato). 


Nore 4, The nouns γῆ, land, πράγματα, things or affairs, vids, 
son, and sometimes other nouns which are readily suggested by the 
context, may be omitted after the article, when a qualifying adjec- 
tive or genitive is added; as εἰς τὴν ἑαυτῶν (sc. γῆν); to their own 
land ; ἐκ τῆς περιοικίδος, from the neighboring country; τὰ τῆς πόλεως, 
the affuirs of the state ; TepuxAns 6 Ξανθίππου (sc. υἱός), Pericles, the son 
of Xanthippus ; τὴν ταχίστην (sc. ὁδόν), the quickest way. Expressions 
like ra τῆς Τύχης, τὰ τῆς ὀργῆς, With no definite nouns understood, 
sometimes do not differ from Τύχη, Fortune, and ὀργή, wrath. 


Note 5. Instead of repeating a noun with new adjuncts in the 
same sentence, it is sufficient to repeat its article; as of τῶν πολιτῶν 
παῖδες καὶ οἱ τῶν ἄλλων, the children of the citizens and those of the 
others. 


Note 6. The infinitive, as a verbal noun (§ 258), may take a 
neuter article; as τὸ εἰδέναι, the knowing ; σοὶ τὸ μὴ σιγῆσαι λοιπὸν ἦν, 
it remained for you not to be silent. 


Note 7. In like manner, a neuter article may precede a whole 
clause considered as a noun; as τὸ γνῶθι σαυτὸν πανταχοῦ ᾽στι χρή- 
σιμον, the saying ‘* know thyself’’ is everywhere useful. 


Note 8. A predicate noun seldom has the article; as νὺξ ἡ 
ἡμέρα ἐγένετο, the day became night ; οὗτοί εἰσι κάκιστοι ἀνθρώπων, these 
are the worst of men. But when the predicate refers definitely to 
distinct individuals, it may have the article; as εἰσὶ δ᾽ οὗτοι οἱ εἰδό- 
τες τἀληθές ; and are these those (whom I mean) who know the truth? 


Position of the Article. 


§ 142. 1. An attributive adjective which qualifies a 
noun with the article commonly stands between the arti- 
cle and the noun; as ὁ σοφὸς ἀνήρ, the wise man; τῶν 
μεγάλων πόλεων, of the great cities. 7 

The position of such an adjective with reference to the article 


(with the two modifications mentioned in 2) is called the attributive 
position, as opposed to the predicate position (see 3). 


202 © SYNTAX. [8 142. 


Nortr. This applies to possessive pronouns and all expressions 
which have the force of attributive adjectives, when they are pre- 
ceded by the article (§ 141, N. 8), and to dependent genitives (ex- 
cept partitives and the genitive of the personal pronoun); as ὁ ἐμὸς 
πατήρ. my father ; ἡ σὴ μήτηρ, thy mother ; 6 ἐμαυτοῦ πατήρ, my own 
father ; οἱ ἐν ἄστει ἄνθρωποι, the men in the city ; οὐδεὶς τῶν τότε Ἑλλή- 
νων, none of the Greeks of that time ; τὸ τῷ ὄντι ψεῦδος, the real false- 
hood ; εἰς τὴν ἐκείνων πόλιν, into their city; of τῶν Θηβαίων στρατηγοί, 
the generals of the Thebans (2, N. 2). For participles, see 2, N. 5. 

Two or even three articles may thus stand together; as τὰ τῆς 
τῶν πολλῶν ψυχῆς ὄμματα, the eyes of the soul of the multitude. 


2. The article together with any of these qualifying 
expressions may follow the noun, in which case the noun 
itself may have another article before it. E.g. 


ὋὉ ἀνὴρ ὁ σοφός, or ἀνὴρ 6 σοφός, the wise man (not, however, 6 ἀνὴρ 
σοφός. see ὃ 142, 3; ai πόλεις ai δημοκρατούμεναι, the states which are 
under democracies ; ἄνθρωποι οἱ τότε, the men of that time; πρὸς ἀδικίαν 
τὴν ἄκρατον, with regard to pure injustice. 


Rrmark. Of the three attributive positions, the first (6.0. ὁ σοφὸς ἀνήρ) 
is the most common and the most simple and natural ; the second (ὁ ἀνὴρ 
ὁ σοφός) is the most formal ; the third (ἀνὴρ ὁ σοφός) is the least common, 
especially in the more careful prose writers. 


Note 1. The article at the beginning of a clause may be sepa- 
rated from its noun by μέν, δέ, τέ, γέ, yap, δή, and sometimes by other 
words. ; 


Nore 2. The partitive genitive (8 168) rarely stands in either of 
the positions here mentioned, but either precedes or follows the gov- 
erning noun and its article, like a predicate; as of κακοὶ τῶν πολιτῶν, 
ΟΥ̓ τῶν πολιτῶν οἱ κακοί, the Lad among the citizens (rarely οἱ τῶν πολι- 
τῶν κακοί). Even the other forms of the adnominal genitive occa- 
sionally have this position, as τῶν παλαιῶν ἡ φιλοσοφία, the philosophy 
of the ancients. : 


Note 8. (a) Ὁ ἄλλος generally means the rest, seldom the other ; 
of ἄλλοι, the others: as ἡ ἄλλη πόλις, the rest of the state (but ἄλλη πό- 
λις. another state); of ἄλλοι Ἕλληνες, the other Greeks. Both ὁ ἄλλος 
and ἄλλος (rarely ἕτερος) may have the meaning of besides; as evdat- 
μονιζόμενος ὑπὸ τῶν πολιτῶν καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ξένων, congratulated by the 
citizens and the foreigners besides ; οὐ γὰρ ἣν χορτὸς οὐδὲ ἄλλο δέν- 
δρον, for there was no grass nor any tree either (lit. any other tree). 


(b) πολύς with the article generally (though not always) means 
the greater part, especially in οἱ πολλοί, the multitude, the majorily, 
and τὸ πολύ, the greater part. So οἱ πλείονες, the majority, τὸ πλεῖον, 
the greater part, οἱ πλεῖστοι aud τὸ πλεῖστον, the greatest number or 
part. ie 


§ 142.] THE ARTICLE. | 203 


Nore 4. When a noun has two or more qualifying words, each 
of them may take an article and stand in either of the above posi- 
tions (1 or 2), or all may stand between one article and its noun; as 
ἡ ᾿Αττικὴ ἡ παλαιὰ φωνή, the ancient Altic speech: τὰ τείχη τὰ ἑαυτῶν 
τὰ μακρά, their own long walls ; ἔπεμπον εἰς τὰς ἄλλας ᾿Αρκαδικὰς πόλεις, 
they sent to the other Arcadian cities ; ἡ ὑπ᾽ ᾿Αρετῆς ‘Hpaxdéous παίδευ- 
σις, the instruction of Hercules by Virtue. Occasionally one stands 
between the article and the noun, while another follows the noun 
without an article; as ἡ ἐν μάχῃ ξυμβολὴ βαρεῖα. 


Nore 5 When an attributive participle (8 138) with dependent 
words qualifies a noun with the article, either the participle or the 
dependent words may follow the noun; as τὸν ῥέοντα ποταμὸν διὰ τῆς 
πόλεως, the river which runs through the city; ἡ ἐν τῷ ᾿Ισθμῷ ἐπιμονὴ 
γενομένη, the delay which occurred at the Isthmus. But such expres- 
sions may also take either of the positions 1 or 2, 


Nore 6. The Greeks commonly said the Euphrates river, τὸν Ev- 
φράτην ποταμόν, &c., rather than the river Euphrates. So sometimes 
with names of mountains (rarely with those of cities or islands). 


3. When an adjective either precedes the article, or 
follows the noun without taking an article, it. forms a 
predicate, and some part of εἰμί, be, is implied (ὃ 138, 
Remark). £.g. 


Ὃ ἀνὴρ σοφός or σοφὸς 6 ἀνήρ (sc. ἐστίν), the man is wise, or wise is 
the man; πολλοὶ οἱ πανοῦργοι, many are the evil-doers ; ἐφημέρους ye 
Tas τύχας κεκτήμεθα, we possess our fortunes for a day (sc. οὔσας). 

The predicate force of such adjectives can often be expressed by 
a periphrasis; as τοῖς λόγοις βραχυτέροις ἐχρῆτο, the words which he 
used were shorter, lit. he used the words (being) shorter ; ἡγοῦντο αὐτονό- 
μων τῶν ξυμμάχων, they presided over their allies (being) independent, 
1.6. the allies over whom they presided were independent. So πόσον ἄγει 
τὸ στράτευμα; how great is the army which he is bringing? §138, Rem. 

The position of such an adjective with reference to the article is 
called the predicate position. | 


4, When a demonstrative pronoun qualifies a noun with 
the article, it takes the position of a predicate adjective (8), 
and either precedes the article or follows the noun. £.g. 


‘ 


Οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ, this man, or ὁ ἀνὴρ οὗτος (never ὁ οὗτος ἀνήρ). Περὶ 
’ ΄ σὰ 
τούτων τῶν πόλεων, about these cities. ‘ 


Nore 1. But if an adjective or other qualifying word is added, 
the demonstrative may stand between this and its noun, contrary to 
the rule; as ἡ στενὴ αὕτη ὁδός, this narrow road ; τῷ ἀφικομένῳ τούτῳ 
ξένῳ, to this slranger who has come. See Note 8 (). 


204 _ SYNTAX. [8 143. 


Note 2. Ἕκαστος, ἑκάτερος, ἄμφω, and duddrepos have the predi- 
cate position (3), like a demonstrative; but with ἕκαστος the article 
may be omitted. Τοιοῦτος, τοσοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τοσόσδε and τηλικοῦτος, 
when they take the article, have the attributive position (1). 


Nore 38, (a) A dependent genitive of the personal pronoun 
(whether partitive or not) has the predicate position (3), while that of 
other pronouns (unless it is partitive) has the attributive position 
(1) ; as ἡμῶν ἡ πόλις OF ἡ πόλις ἡμῶν; OUT city (NOt ἡ ἡμῶν πόλις); 
ἡ τούτων πόλις, these men’s city (not ἡ πόλις TovTwY); μετεπέμψατο 
᾿Αστυάγης τὴν ἑαυτοῦ θυγατέρα καὶ τὸν παῖδα αὐτῆς, Astyages sent for 
his own daughter and her son. 


(Ὁ) But if a qualifying word is added, the personal pronoun may 
stand between this and the noun; as ἡ δοκοῦσα ἡμῶν πρότερον 
σωφροσύνη, what previously seemed to be our modesty. See Note 1. 


Nore 4. The adjectives ἄκρος, μέσος, and ἔσχατος, when they are 
in the predicate position (3), mean the top (or extremity), the middle, 
the last, of the thing which their nouns denote; as μέση ἡ ἀγορά, 
the middle of the market (while ἡ μέση ἀγορά would mean the middle 
market); ἄκρα ἡ χείρ, the extremity of the hand. 

The article here may be omitted entirely. 


Note 5. Πᾶς and σύμπας, all, and ὅλος, whole, generally have the 
predicate position; as πάντες οἱ ἄνδρες or of ἄνδρες πάντες, all the men; 
ὅλη ἡ πόλις OY ἡ πόλις ὅλη, all the city. But they can also be used like 
attributive adjectives, preceded by the article; as ἡ πᾶσα Σικελία, 
the whole of Sicily, τὸ ὅλον γένος, the entire race. 

The distinction here was probably not greater than that between 
all the city and the whole city in English. We find even οἱ πάντες 
πολῖται, the whole body of citizens. 


Nore 6. Αὐτός as an intensive pronoun, ipse, has the predicate 
position ; as αὐτὸς ὁ ἀνήρ, the man himself. But ὁ αὐτὸς ἀνήρ, the same 
man (§ 79, 2). 


Pronominal Article in Attic Greck. 


§ 143, 1. In Attic prose the article retains its origi- 
nal demonstrative force chiefly in the expression ὁ μέν 
»..0 δέ, the one... the other. E.g. 


Ὃ μὲν οὐδὲν, 6 δὲ πολλὰ κερδαίνει, one man gains nothing, another 
gains much. Δεῖ τοὺς μὲν εἶναι δυστυχεῖς, τοὺς δ᾽ εὐτυχεῖς, some must be 
unfortunate, and others fortunate. Τῶν πόλεων αἱ μὲν τυραννοῦνται, αἱ 
δὲ δημοκρατοῦνται, of slates, some are governed by tyrants, others by ~ 
democracies. 


§ 144.] PRONOUNS. 205 


Nore 1. The neuter τὸ μέν. . . τὸ δέ may be used adverbially, 
partly .. . partly. For τοῦτο μέν. . . τοῦτο δέ in this sense, see 


§ 148, N. 4. 


Nore 2. Ὁ δέ, &c., sometimes means and he, but he, &c., even 
when no ὁ μέν precedes: as Ἰνάρως ᾿Αθηναίους ἐπηγάγετο" οἱ dé. . . 
ἦλθον, Inaros called in Athenians ; and they came. ° ; 

2. A few other relics of the demonstrative meaning of 
the article are found in Attic, chiefly the following : — 

Τὸν καὶ τόν, this man and that; τὸ καὶ τό, this and that; τὰ καὶ τά, 
these and those; as ἔδει γὰρ τὸ καὶ τὸ ποιῆσαι, καὶ τὸ μὴ ποιῆσαι, for 
we ought to have done this thing and that, and not to have done the 
other. 

Πρὸ rod (or προτοῦ), before this, formerly. 

Kai τόν or καὶ τήν, before an infinitive; as καὶ τὸν κελεῦσαι δοῦναι 
(sc. λέγεται), and (ut is said) he commanded him to give it. Cyr. 


1. 3, 9. 
So occasionally τῷ, therefore, which is common in Homer. 


PRONOUNS. 
‘PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS. 


§ 144, 1. The nominative of the personal pronouns 
is seldom used, except for emphasis. (See § 134, N. 1.) 

Nore. The forms ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, and ἐμέ are more emphatic than 
the enclitics μοῦ, poi, μέ. ‘The latter seldom occur after prepositions, 
except 1n πρός pe. 

2. (a) The pronouns of the third person, οὗ, of, ἕ, 
σφῶν, σφίσι, &e., when they are used in Attic prose, are 
generally indirect reflexives, that is, in a dependent clause 
(or joined with an infinitive or participle in the leading 
clause) referring to the subject of the leading verb. E.g. 


_ BoBodvvrat μὴ of ᾿Αθηναῖοι σφίσιν ἐπέλθωσιν, they fear that the Athe- 
mans may attack them; ἐδέοντο ὑμῶν μὴ σφᾶς περιορᾶν φθειρομένους, 
they begged you not to see them destroyed. See 8 79, 1, Ν. 

(6) In Homer and Herodotus they are generally per- 
sonal pronouns, though sometimes (direct or indirect) 
reflexives. Eig. 


206 SYNTAX. [§ 145. 


Ἔκ γάρ σφεων φρένας εἵλετο Παλλὰς ᾿Αθήνη, for Pallas Athena bereft 
them of their senses (Hom.); αὐτίκα δέ οἱ εὕδοντι ἐπέστη ὄνειρος, and 
soon a dream came to him in his sleep (Hdt.). 


§ 145, 1. Αὐτός in all its cases may be an intensive 
adjective pronoun, himself, herself, ttself, themselves, like 
ipse. ‘This is always its force in the nominative of all 
numbers, except when it is preceded by the article and 
means the same (ὃ 19, 2). Εν. 


Αὐτὸς ὁ στρατηγός. the general himself; ἐπ᾿ αὐτοῖς τοῖς αἰγιαλοῖς, 
Ὁ the very coasts; ἐπιστήμη αὐτή, knowledge itself. (See § 142, 4, 
2.) 


Notre. A pronoun with which αὐτός agrees is often omitted; as 
ταῦτα ἐποιεῖτε αὐτοί (sc. ὑμεῖς), you did this yourselves ; πλευστέον eis 
Tavtas αὐτοῖς ἐμβᾶσιν (86. ὑμῖν), you must sail, embarking on these 
youeseleee (in person). So αὐτὸς ἔφη (ipse dixit), himself (the master) 
said it. 


2. The oblique cases of αὐτός are the ordinary personal 
pronouns of the third person. 1.9... 


Στρατηγὸν αὐτὸν ἀπέδειξε, he designated him as general. See four 
other examples in Xen. Anab. 1. 1, 2 and 3. 
For piv, viv, and σφέ, see ὃ 79, 1, Notes 3 and 4. 


Notre. The oblique cases of αὐτός are often used where the 
indirect refiexives (§ 144, 2) might stand, and sometimes even where 
the direct reflexives (§ 146) would be allowed; as ἁπλῶς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 
γνώμην ἀπεφαίνετο Σωκράτης πρὸς τοὺς ὁμιλοῦντας αὐτῷ Socrales used to. 
declare his own opinion plainly to those who conversed with him, where 
οἷ might have been used (Xen. Mem. iv. 7, 1); but in i. 2, 3, we 
have ἐλπίζειν ἐποίει τοὺς συνδιατρίβοντας ἑαυτῷ. The union of an 
intensive and a personal pronoun in αὐτός explains this freedom of 
usage. 


REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 


§ 146, The reflexive pronouns refer to the subject of 
the clause in which they stand. Sometimes in a de- 
pendent clause they refer to the subject of the leading 
verb, — i.e. they are indirect reflexives. E.g. 


Γνῶθι σαυτόν, know thyself; ἐπέσφαξεν ἑαυτόν, he slew himself; 
, 7 ΄ ΄ 
τὰ ἄριστα βουλεύεσθε ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς, take the best counsel for yourselves. 


§ 147.] PRONOUNS. 207 


Ὁ τύραννος νομίζει τοὺς πολίτας ὑπηρετεῖν ἑαυτῷ, the ‘yrant thinks that 
the culizens are his own servants. (See § 145, 2, Note.) 

Nore 1. Occasionally a reflexive refers to some emphatic word 
which is not the subject; as ἀπὸ σαυτοῦ ἐγώ σε διδάξω, 1 will teach 
you from your own case (from yourself). In fact, these pronouns 
correspond almost exactly in their use to the English reflexives, 
myself, thyself, himself, &c. 


Nore 2. The third person of the reflexive is sometimes used for 
the first or second; as δεῖ ἡμᾶς ἀνερέσθαι ἑαυτούς, we must ask our- 
selves. 


Note 3. The reflexive is sometimes used for the reciprocal 
(§ 81); διαλεγόμεθα ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς, we discourse with one another (1.6. 
among ourselves). 


POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 


§ 147, The possessive pronouns are generally equiva- 
lent to the possessive genitive of the personal pronouns. 
Thus ὁ ἡμέτερος πατήρ, --- ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν, our father. 
The possessive is regularly preceded by the article. 

See § 167, 1; § 141, N. 1 (©); and below, N. 4. 


Nore 1. The possessive is occasionally equivalent to the objcctine 
genitive of the personal pronoun; as ἡ ἐμὴ εὔνοια, which cominonly 
means my good-will (towards others), rarely means good-will (shown) 
to me. 


Nore 2. In Attic prose, σφέτερος, their, is always (directly or 
indirectly) reflexive, and ὅς, his, her, its, is not used at all. (See 
§ 144, 2.) 


Notre 3. By the possessive pronouns and the possessive genitive 
(8 167, 1) the words my father can be expressed in Greek in five 
forms: ὁ ἐμὸς πατήρ, ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐμός, πατὴρ ὁ ἐμός (§ 142, 1, 2). ὁ πατήρ 
μου, and (after another word) μου ὁ πατήρ (as ἔφη μου ὁ πατήρ). So 
ὁ σὸς πατήρ, &c. 


Nore 4. Our own, your own (when your refers to more than one), 
and their own are generally expressed by ἡμέτερος, ὑμέτερος, and 
σφέτερος, with αὐτῶν in apposition with ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, or σφῶν implied 
in the possessive (§ 187, N. 11); as τὸν ἡμέτερον αὐτῶν πατέρα; our own 
father ; τῇ ὑμετέρᾳ αὐτῶν μητρί, to your own mother; τοὺς σφετέρους 
αὐτῶν παῖδας, their own children. In the third person ἑαυτῶν can be 
used; as τοὺς ἑαυτῶν παῖδας (also σφῶν αὐτῶν παῖδας, without the 
article); but very seldom ἡμῶν (or ὑμῶν) αὐτῶν. 

In the singular, expressions like τὸν ἐμὸν αὐτοῦ πατέρα for τὸν 
ἐμαυτοῦ πατέρα, &c. are poetic. 


208 fae SYNTAX. [8 148. 


DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 


8 148, Οὗτος and ὅδε, this, generally refer to what 
is near in place, time, or thought; ἐκεῖνος, that, refers to 
what is more remote. 


Note 1. The distinction between οὗτος and ὅδε, both of which 
correspond to our this, must be learned by practice. In the histo- 
rians, οὗτος (with τοιοῦτος, τοσοῦτος, and οὕτως) frequently refers to 
a speech just made, while ὅδε (with τοιόσδε, τοσόσδε, and ὧδε) refers 
to one about to be made; as rade εἶπεν, he spoke as follows, but ταῦτα 
εἶπεν, thus he spoke (said after the speech). 


Note 2. Οὗτος is sometimes an exclamation; as οὗτος, τί ποιεῖς ; 
You there! what are you doing ? 


Norte 3. The Greek has no word exactly corresponding to the 
unemphatic demonstrative which is often used-in English as the 
antecedent of a relative, as J saw those who were present. Here a 
participle with the article is generally used; as εἶδον τοὺς παρόντας; 
if a demonstrative is used (εἶδον τούτους οἱ παρῆσαν, I saw these men 
who were present), it has special emphasis (§ 152, N. 3). A relative 
with omitted antecedent sometimes expresses the sense required; as 
εἶδον οὺς ἔλαβεν, 1 saw (those) whom he took (§ 152). 


Nore 4. Τοῦτο pev ... τοῦτο δέ, first . . « secondly, partly... 
partly, is used nearly in the sense of τὸ péev... τὸ δέ (δ 148, 1, N. 1), 
especially by Herodotus. 

For οὑτοσί, ὁδί, ἐκεινοσί, οὑτωσί, ὡδί, &c., see § 83, N. 2. 


INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 


8 149, 1. The interrogative ris ; who? what? may 
be either substantive or adjective; as τίνας εἶδον ; whom 
did I see? or τίνας ἄνδρας εἶδον ; what men did I see? 

2. Tis may be used both in direct and in indirect 
questions ; as τί βούλεται, what does he want? ἐρωτᾷ τί 
βούλεσθε, he asks what you want (§ 241,1). 


Tn indirect questions, however, the relative ὅστις is more common; 
as ἐρωτᾷ ὅ τι βούλεσθε. 


Notre. The same principles apply to the pronominal adjectives 
πόσος, ποῖος, ἕο. (ὃ 87, 1.) ᾿ 


§ 151.] RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 209 


INDEFINITE PRONOUN. 


§ 150. The indefinite tis generally means some, any, 
and may be either substantive or adjective; as τοῦτο 
λέγει τίς, some one says this; ἄνθρωπός τις, some man. 
It is sometimes nearly equivalent to the English ὦ or an; 
as εἶδον ἄνθρωπόν τινα, I saw a certain man, or I saw a 
man. 


Norte. Occasionally ris means every one, like mas τις; as ed μέν 
τις δόρυ θηξάσθω, let every one sharpen well his spear. Hom. 


RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 


§ 151. A relative agrees with its antecedent in gender 
and number ; but its case depends on the construction of 
the clause in which it stands. Lg. 


Eidov τοὺς ἄνδρας ot ὕστερον ἦλθον, I saw the men who came after- 
wards ; οἱ ἄνδρες ods εἶδες ἀπῆλθον, the men whom you saw went away. 


Note 1. The relative follows the person of the antecedent; as 
ὑμεῖς οἱ τοῦτο ποιεῖτε; you who do this ; ἐγὼ ds τοῦτο émoinaa, I who 


did this. 


Note 2. (a) A relative referring to several antecedents follows 
the rule given for predicate adjectives (§ 188, N. 2). It may be 
plural if it refers to a collective noun (δ 138, N. 8); as τὸ πλῆθος 
οἵπερ δικάσουσιν, the multitude who will judge. 


(Ὁ) On the other hand, ὅστις, whoever, may have a plural ante- 
cedent; as πάντα 6 τι βούλονται, everything, whatsoever they want. 


Note 3. In Homer the forms of the relative are sometimes used 
as demonstrative pronouns, like the article (§ 140); as καὶ ὃς Sevraros 
ἦλθε, and he came second ; ὃ yap γέρας ἐστὶ θανόντων, for this is the 
right of the dead. 

A few similar expressions occur in Attic prose, especially the 
Platonic 7 δ᾽ ὅς, said he (where ἦ is imperfect of ἦμί, say). So καὶ 
ὅς, and he, καὶ οἵ, and they, and (in Herod.) ὃς καὶ ὅς, this man and 
that. (Compare τὸν καὶ τόν, § 143, 2.) So also ὃς pev.. . ὃς δέ, in 
the oblique cases, may be used for ὁ μέν . . . ὁ δέ. 


Notre 4. In the Epic and Lyric poets the enclitic τέ is often 
appended to relative words without affecting their meaning; as οὐκ 


210 SYNTAX. [8 152. 


ἀΐεις ἅ τέ φησι; dost thou not perceive what he says? Sometimes it 
seems to make the relative more indefinite, like τις in ὅστις, whoever, 
quicumque. 

But οἷός re in Attic Greek means able, capable, like δυνατός, being 
originally elliptical for τοιοῦτος οἷος, such as, and τέ having ne 
apparent force. 


Omission of the Antecedent. 


§ 152. The antecedent of a relative may be omitted 
when it can easily be supplied from the context, especially 
if it is indefinite (§ 229). Lg. ) 


Ἔλαβεν ἃ ἐβούλετο, he took what he wanted ; ἔπειθεν ὁπόσους ἐδύνατο, 
he persuaded as many as he could ; ἃ μὴ oida οὐδὲ οἴομαι εἰδέναι, what 
I do not know I do not even think I know; ἐγὼ καὶ ὧν ἐγὼ κρατῶ μενοῦ- 
μεν mapa σοί, I and those whom I command will remain with you. 

In such cases it is a mistake to say that ταῦτα, ἐκεῖνοι, &e. are 
understood; see N. 8. The relative clause here really becomes a 
substantive, and contains its antecedent within itself. 


Note 1. Most relative adverbs regularly omit the antecedent; 
as ἦλθεν ὅτε τοῦτο εἶδεν, he came when he saw this (for then, when). 


Nore 2. The following expressions belong here: — ἔστιν οἵ, 

- gome (8 1385, N. 5), more common than the regular εἰσὶν οἵ, sunt 

. qui, there are (those) who; €vioe (from ἔνι, = ἔνεστι or ἔνεισι, and οἵ), 

some; ἐνίοτε (ἔνι and dre), sometimes: ἔστιν οὗ, somewhere; 
ἔστιν ἧ, in some way; ἔστιν ὅπως, somehow. 


Note 8. When a clause containing a relative with omitted ante- 
cedent precedes the leading clause, the latter often contains a 
demonstrative referring back with emphasis to the omitted ante- 
cedent; as ἃ ἐβούλετο ταῦτα ἔλαβεν, what he wanted, that he took, 
entirely different from ταῦτα ἃ ἐβούλετο ἔλαβεν, he took these (definite) 
things, which he wanted; ἃ ποιεῖν αἰσχρὸν, ταῦτα νόμιζε μηδὲ λέγειν 
εἶναι καλόν, what it is base to do, this believe that it is not good even to say 
(here ταῦτα is not the antecedent of ἅ, which is indefinite and is not 
expressed). See § 148, N. 3. 


Assimilation and Attraction. 


8 1538. When a relative would naturally be in the 
accusative as the object of a verb, it is generally assimi- 
lated to the case of its antecedent if this is a genitive or 
dative. Lg. : 


Ν 


\ 
§ 154.] RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 211 


Ἐκ τῶν πόλεων ὧν ἔχει, from the cities which he holds (for. ἃς ἔχει) ; 
τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς οἷς ἔχομεν, with the good things which we have (for ἃ éyo- 
μεν). This is often called attraction. — 


Nore 1. When an antecedent is omitted which (if it could have 
been expressed) would have been a genitive or dative, the assimila- 
tion still takes place; and a preposition which would have belonged 
to the antecedent passes over to the relative; as ἐδήλωσε τοῦτο οἷς 
ἔπραττε, he showed this by what he did (like ἐκείνοις a); σὺν οἷς ἔχω 
τὰ ἄκρα καταλήψομαι, I will seize the heights with the men whom I have 
(as if it were σὺν τοῖς ἀνδράσιν ods ἔχω) ; οὐδὲν ὧν βούλεσθε πράξετε, 
you will do none of the things which you wish (like ἐκείνων ἅ). See 
§ 148, N. 3. 


Nore 2. A relative is very seldom assimilated from any other 
construction than that of the object accusative, or into any other case 
than the genitive or dative. Yet exceptions occur; as ὧν ἠπίστει 
πολλούς, many of those whom he distrusted (like ἐκείνων ois). Even the 
nominative may be assimilated; as βλάπτεσθαι ad’ ὧν ἡμῖν παρεσκεύα- 
ota, to be injured by what has been prepared by us (like ἀπ᾽ ἐκείνων a). 
Thue. 


Nore 8. A like assimilation takes place in relative adverbs; as 
διεκομίζοντο εὐθὺς ὅθεν ὑπεξέθεντο παῖδας καὶ γυναῖκας, they immediately 
brought over their children and women from the places in which they had 
placed them for safety (where ὅθεν, from which, stands for ἐκεῖθεν ot, 
Jrom the places whither). ‘Thue. 


Nore 4. The antecedent occasionally is assimilated to the case 
of the relative, when this immediately follows; as ἔλεγον ὅτι πάντων 
ὧν δέονται πεπραγότες εἶεν, they said that they had done all things which 
they needed (where πάντων ὧν for πάντα ὧν is very irregular). 

This inverted assimilation takes place in οὐδεὶς ὅστις οὐ, every- 
body, in which οὐδείς follows the case of the relative; as οὐδένε ὅτῳ 
οὐκ ἀποκρίνεται (for οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅτῳ), he replies to everybody. 


Note 5. A peculiar assimilation occurs in certain expressions 
with οἷος ; as χαρίζεσθαι οἵῳ σοι ἀνδρί, to please a man like you (for 
τοιούτῳ οἷος σύ). 


8 154. The antecedent is often attracted into the rela- 
tive clause, and agrees with the relative. Kg. 


Μὴ ἀφέλησθε ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ἣν κέκτησθε δόξαν καλήν, do not take 
from yourselves the good reputation which you have gained (for τὴν 
καλὴν δόξαν ἣν κέκτησθε) : here notice the omission of the article. 
Even the subject of a verb may be attracted; as οἴχεται φεύγων ὃν 
ἦγες μάρτυρα, the witness whom you brought (for ὁ μάρτυς ὃν ἦγες) has 
run away. 


Notre. This attraction may be joined with assimilation (§ 153); 
as ἀμαθέστατοί ἐστε ὧν ἐγὼ οἶδα ‘EXAnvay you are ‘he most ignorant of 


212 ες SYNTAX. - [8 155. 


the Greeks whom I know; ἐξ ἧς τὸ πρῶτον ἔσχε γυναικός, from the wife 
which he took first; σὺν 7 εἶχε δυνάμει, with the force which he had 
(for σὺν τῇ δυνάμει ἣν εἶχεν). 


Relative in Exclamations, &c. 


8 155. Oios, ὅσος, and ὡς are used in exclamations ; 
as ὅσα πράγματα ἔχεις, how much trouble you have! 
ὡς ἀστεῖος, how witty! 

For the relative in indirect questions see § 149, 2. 


Relative not repeated. 


8 156, A relative is seldom repeated in a new case in 
the same sentence, but a personal or demonstrative pro- 
noun commonly takes its place. yg. 

"Exeivot τοίνυν, οἷς οὐκ ἐχαρίζονθ᾽ οἱ λέγοντες οὐδ᾽ ἐφίλουν αὐτοὺς 
ὥσπερ ὑμᾶς οὗτοι νῦν, those men, then, whom the orators did not try to 
gratify, and whom they did not love as these now love you (lit. nor did 


they love them as, &c.). Dem. Here αὐτούς is used to avoid repeating 
the relative in a new case, ovs. . 


Notre. Sometimes, however, a new case of the relative is under- 
stood in the latter part of a sentence; as ᾿Αριαῖος δὲ, ὃν ἡμεῖς ἠθέλομεν 
βασιλέα καθιστάναι, καὶ ἐδώκαμεν καὶ ἐλάβομεν πιστά, and Ariaeus, 
whom we wished to make king, and (to whom) we gave and (from 
whom) we received pledges, &c. Xen. 


THE CASES. 


Remark. The Greek is descended from a language which had 
eight cases, —an ablative, a locative, and an instrumental, besides the 
five found in Greek. The functions of the ablative were chiefly 
absorbed by the genitive; those of the instrumental and locative 
chiefly by the dative. 


I. NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE. 


§ 157, 1. The nominative is used chiefly as the sub- 
ject of a finite verb (§ 134, 1), or in the predicate after 
verbs signifying to be, &c. (ὃ 186). 


§ 159.] ACCUSATIVE. 213 


2. The vocative, with or without ὦ, is used in address- 
ing a person or thing; as ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, O men of 
Athens! ἀκούεις, Αἰσχίνη ; dost thou hear, Aeschines ? 


Notr. The nominative is sometimes used in exclamations, and 
even in other expressions, where the vocative is more common; as 
» ΒΝ , ‘ , , ς , » 
ὦμοι ἐγὼ δειλός, O wreiched me! So ἡ Πρόκνη ἔκβαινε, Procne, come 
out ! 


II. ACCUSATIVE. 


ReMARK. The primary purpose of the accusative is to denote the 
nearer or direct object of a verb, as opposed to the remoter or indirect 
object denoted by the dative. It thus bears the same relation to a verb 
which the genitive generally bears toa noun. The object denoted by the 
accusative may be the external object of the action of a transitive verb, or 
the internal (cognate) object which is often implied in the meaning of even 
an intransitive verb. But the accusative has also assumed other functions, 
as will be seen, which cannot be brought under this or any other single 
category. ᾿ 


Accusative of Direct (External) Object. 


8 158. ‘The direct object of the action of a transitive — 
verb is put in the accusative ; as τοῦτο σώζει ἡμᾶς, this 
preserves us; ταῦτα ποιοῦμεν, we do these thing's. 

Notre 1. Many verbs which are transitive in English, and 


govern the objective case, take either a genitive or a dative in Greek. 
(See § 171, § 184, 2, and § 188, 1, N. 2.) 


Norte 2. Many verbs which are transitive in Greek are intransi- 
tive in English; as ὀμοῦμαι τοὺς θεούς, 1 will swear by the Gods; 
πάντας ἔλαθεν, he escaped the notice of all. 


Nore 3. Verbal adjectives and even verbal nouns occasionally 
take an object accusative instead of the regular objective genitive 
(§ 167, 3; § 180); as ἐπιστήμονες ἦσαν τὰ προσήκοντα; they were 
acquainted with what was proper. Xen. So τὰ μετέωρα φροντιστής, 
one who ponders on the things above (like φροντίζων). Plat. 


Cognate Accusative (Internal Object). 


§ 159. Any verb whose meaning permits it may take 
an accusative of kindred signification. This accusative 
repeats the idea already contained in the verb, and may 
_ follow intransitive as well as transitive verbs. LE.g. 


214 SYNTAX. [§ 159. 


Ἥδομαι ras μεγίστας ἡδονάς, I enjoy the greatest pleasures. Rirv- 
χοῦσι τοῦτο τὸ εὐτύχημα, they enjoy this good fortune. So πίπτειν 
πέσημα;, to fall a fall; νόσον νοσεῖν or νόσον ἀσθενεῖν OY νόσον κάμνειν, 
to suffer under a disease ; ἁμάρτημα ἁμαρτάνειν, lo commit an error (to 
sin a sin); δουλείαν δουλεύειν, to be subject’ to slavery; ἀγῶνα ἀγωνί- 
ζεσθαι, to undergo a contest; γραφὴν γράφεσθαι, to bring an indict- 
ment ; γραφὴν διώκειν, to prosecute an indictment ; δίκην ὀφλεῖν, to lose 
a lawsuit ; νίκην νικᾶν, to gain a victory; μάχην νικᾶν, to gain a battle ; 
πομπὴν πέμπειν, to form or conduct a procession; πληγὴν τύπτειν, to- 
strike a blow. 


Remark. It will be seen that this construction is far more ex- 
tensive in Greek than in English. It includes not only accusatives 
of kindred formation and meaning, as νίκην νικᾶν, to gain a victory ; 
but also those of merely kindred meaning, as μάχην νικᾶν, to gain a 
battle. The accusative may also limit the meaning of the verb to 
one of many applications; as ᾿Ολύμπια νικᾶν, to gain an Olympic vic- 
tory ; γάμους ἑστιᾶν, to give a wedding feast ; ψήφισμα νικᾶν, to carry a 
decree (to gain a victory with a decree); τὰ Παναθήναια πέμπειν, to cele- 
brate the Panathenaea by a procession. 

_ For the cognate accusative becoming the subject of a passive 
verb, see § 198. 


Nore 1. The cognate accusative may follow adjectives or even 
nouns; aS κακὸς πᾶσαν κακίαν, bad with all badness; ἀγαθὸς πᾶσαν 
ἀρετήν, good with all goodness; δοῦλος τὰς μεγίστας δουλείας, a slave 
to the direst slavery. 


Nore 2. A neuter adjective sometimes represents a cognate 
accusative, its noun being implied in the verb; as μεγάλα ἁμαρτά- 
νειν, (SC. ἁμαρτήματα) to commit great faults; ταὐτὰ λυποῦμαι καὶ ταὐτὰ 
χαίρω; 1 have the same griefs and the same joys. “80. ri χρήσομαι 
τούτῳ; (= τίνα χρείαν xpnoopa;) what use shall I man- of this? and 
οὐδὲν χρήσομαι τούτῳ, J shall make no use of this (8 188, 1, N. 2). 
So χρήσιμος οὐδέν, good for nothing (N. 1). See ὃ 160, 2, Note. 


Note 8. Here belongs the accusative of effect, which expresses 
a result beyond the action of the verb, which is effected by that 
action; as πρεσβεύουσι τὴν εἰρήνην, they negotiate the peace (as am- 
bassadors, πρέσβεις), but πρεσβεύειν πρεσβείαν, to yo on an embassy. 
Compare the English breaking a hole, as opposed to breaking a stick. 

So after verbs of looking (in poetry); as “Apn δεδορκέναι, to look 
war (Ares); 7 βουλὴ ἔβλεψε νᾶπυ, the Senate looked mustard. 


Notre 4. A transitive verb may have a cognate accusative and 
another object at the same time; as γράφεσθαί τινα τὴν γραφὴν 
ταύτην, to bring this indictment against any one: ἠδικήσαμεν τοῦτον 
οὐδέν. we did this man no wrong; ταῦτα δίδασκέ pe, teach me this 
(§ 164); τοσοῦτον ἔχθος ἐχθαίρω ce, so great hatred do I feel for thee ; 
me μάχην τοὺς βαρβάρους νικήσας, having defeated the barbarians in the 

atile. 


§ 160.] - ACCUSATIVE. 215 


Nore 5. Connected with the cognate accusative is that which 
follows verbs of motion expressing the ground over which the motion 
passes; as ὁδὸν ἰέναι (ἐλθεῖν, πορεύεσθαι, &c.), to go (over) a road ; 
πλεῖν θάλασσαν, to sail the sea ; ὄρος καταβαίνειν, to descend a mountain ; 
&c. These verbs thus acquire a transitive meaning. See ὃ 179, 2. 


Aceusative of Specification.— Adverbial Accusative. 


§ 160. 1. The accusative of specification may be 
joined with a verb, adjective, noun, or even a whole 
sentence, to denote that in respect to which the expression — 
is used. E.g. 


Τυφλὸς εἶ τὰ ὄμματα, you are blind in your eyes; καλὸς τὸ εἶδος, 
beautiful in form; ἄπειροι τὸ πλῆθος, infinite in number; δίκαιος τὸν 
τρύπον, just in his character; δεινοὶ μάχην, mighty in batile ; κάμνω τὴν 
κεφαλήν, I have a pain in my head , ras φρένας ὑγιαίνειν, to be sound in 
their minds ; διαφέρει τὴν φύσιν, he differs in nature ; ποταμὸς, Κύδνος 
ὄνομα, εὖρος δύο πλέθρων, a river, Cydnus by name, of the breadth 
of two plethra ; “Ἑλληνές εἰσι τὸ γένος, they are Greeks by race; καὶ τὰ 
μικρὰ πειρῶμαι ἀπὸ θεῶν ὁρμᾶσθαι, even in small matters I try to begin 
with the Gods. 


Note. This is sometimes called the accusative by synecdoche, 
or the limiting accusative. It most frequently denotes a part; but 
often a character or quality, or any circumstance to which the 
meaning of the expression is restricted. 


2. An accusative in certain expressions has the force 
of anadverb. E.g. 


Τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον, in this way, thus ; τὴν ταχίστην (sc. ὁδόν), in the 
quickest way; τὴν ἀρχήν, at first (with negative, not at all); "τέλος, 
jinally ; προῖκα, as a gift, gratis; χάριν, for the sake of; δίκην, in the 
manner of; τὸ πρῶτον oY πρῶτον, αἱ first; τὸ λοιπόν, for the rest; 
τἄλλα, in other respects; οὐδέν, in nothing, not at all; τί; in what, 
why? ri, in any respect, at all; ταῦτα, in respect to this, therefore. So 
τοῦτο μέν... τοῦτο δέ (8 148, N. 4). 


ΝΌΤΕ. Several of these are to be explained by § 160, 1, as 
τἄλλα, ti; why? ταῦτα, τοῦτο (with μέν and δέ), and sometimes οὐδέν 
and ri. Some are to be explained as cognate accusatives (see § 159, 
Notes 1 and 2), and some are of doubtful origin. 


216 SYNTAX. [8 161. 


Accusative of Extent. 


§ 161. The accusative may denote extent of time or 
space. Εν. 


Ai σπονδαὶ ἐνιαυτὸν ἔσονται, the truce is lo be for a year: ἔμεινε 
τρεῖς ἡμέρας. he remained three days ; ἀπέχει δ᾽ ἡ Πλάταια τῶν Θηβῶν 
σταδίους ἑβδομήκοντα, and Plataea is seventy stades disiant from 
Thebes. 


Note. This accusative with an ordinal number denotes how 
long since; τρίτην ἤδη ἡμέραν ἐπιδεδήμηκεν, this is the third day 
that he has been in town. . 

A peculiar idiom is found in expressions like τρίτον ἔτος τουτί 
(this the third year), i.e. two years ago; as ἀπηγγέλθη Φίλιππος τρίτον ἢ 
τέταρτον ἔτος τουτὶ Ἡραῖον τεῖχος πολιορκῶν, two or three years ago 
Philip was reported to be besieging Heraion Teichos. 


Terminal Accusative (Pcetic). 


§ 162, In poetry, the accusative without a preposition 
may denote the place or object towards which moticn is 
directed. E.g. 

Μνηστῆρας ἀφίκετο, she came to the suitors. Odyss. ᾿Δνέβη 
μέγαν οὐρανὸν Οὔλυμπόν τε. Il. Τὸ κοῖλον "Apyos Bas φυγάς, 


going as an exile to the hollow Argos. Soph. 
In prose a preposition would be used. 


Accusative after Nj and Ma, 


§ 168. The accusative follows the adverbs of swear- 
ing v7 and μά, by. 

An oath introduced by vy is affirmative ; one introduced by 
μά is negative ; as νὴ τὸν Δία, yes, by Zeus; μὰ τὸν Δία, no, by 
Zeus. 

Notre 1. When μά is preceded by vai, yes, the oath is affirmative ; 
as vat, μὰ Δία, yes, by Zeus. 


ΝΌΤΕ 2. Ma is sometimes omitted when a negative precedes; _ 
as οὐ, τόνδ᾽ ἤολυμπον, no, by this Olympus. a 


if Pe 
ST Δ», 
§ 165. ] ACCUSATIVE. ea 


ve 
Δ : a 
. & 


Two Accusatives with one vor fey 


> 


§ 164. Verbs signifying to ask, to demands te: 
to remind, to clothe or unclothe, to conceal, to deprive, 
and to divide, may take two object accusatives. E.g. 


‘Edy tis σε ταῦτα ἐξετάζῃ, if any one shall ask you these questions ; 
μέλλετε τοὺς θεοὺς αἰτεῖν λάγαθά, you are about to ask blessings of the 
Gods; τοὺς παῖδας τὴν μουσικὴν διδάσκει, he teaches the boys music ; 
τὴν ξυμμαχίαν ἀναμιμνήσκοντες τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, reminding the Athenians 
of the alliance ; ἐκδύει ἐμὲ τὴν ἐσθῆτα, he εἰγῖρ8 me of my dress ; μή με 
κρύψῃς τοῦτο, do not conceal this from me; τὴν θεὸν τοὺς στεφάνους 
σεσυλήκασιν, they have robbed the Goddess of her crowns ; τὸ στράτευμα 
κατένειμε δώδεκα μέρη, he divided the army into twelve parts (he made 
twelve divisions of the army). 

In many cases, as in the third and last examples, one of the 
accusatives is cognate; see § 159, N. 4. 


Nore 1. In poetry some other verbs have this construction ; 
thus χρόα νίζετο ἅλμην, he washed the dried spray from his skin; so 
τιμωρεῖσθαί τινα αἷμα, to punish one for blood (shed). : 


Norr 2. Many verbs of this class sometimes have other con- 
structions. Thus verbs of depriving may take the genitive of a 
person with an accusative of a thing, τινός τι; sometimes the reverse, 
twa twos (neut.). For verbs of reminding, see § 171, 2, N. 3. 


Nore 8. The accusative of a thing with some of these verbs is 
really a cognate accusative; see § 159, N. 4. 


§ 165. Verbs signifying to do anything to or to say 
anything of a person or thing take two accusatives 


Lug. 7 


Tavri pe ποιοῦσιν, they do these things to me; τί μ᾽ εἰργάσω ; what 
didst thou do to me? πλεῖστα κακὰ τὴν πόλιν ποιοῦσιν, they do the most © 
evils to the state. Tavri σὺ τολμᾷς ἡμᾶς λέγειν ; dost thou dare to say 
these things of us? Od φροντιστέον 6 τι ἐροῦσιν οἱ πολλοὶ ἡμᾶς, we must 
nol consider what the multitude will say of us. 


Note 1. These verbs often take ed or καλῶς, well, or κακῶς, il, 
instead of the accusative of a thing; τούτους εὖ ποιεῖ, he does them 
good ; ὑμᾶς κακῶς ποιεῖ, he does you harm; κακῶς ἡμᾶς λέγει, he speaks 
ul of us. τ 
“~~ The passive form of these expressions is not ed (or κακῶς) ποιεῖ- 
σθαι, εὖ (or κακῶς) λέγεσθαι, to be done well by, to be spoken well of, 
&e.; but εὖ (or κακῶς) πάσχειν, to experience good (or evil), and εὖ 
(or κακῶς) ἀκούειν, bene (male) audire, to hear one’s self called. 


218 SYNTAX. | [8 166. 


Note 2. Πράσσω, do, very seldom takes two accusatives in this 
construction, mous being generally used. Ed πράσσω and κακῶς 
πράσσω are intransitive, meaning to be well off, to be badly off. 


Norte 8. Verbs signifying to do may take the dative of a person; 
as ἀγαθόν τι ποιοῦσι TH πόλει, they do some good to the state. 


§ 166. Verbs signifying to name, to choose or appoint, 
to make, to consider, and the like, may take a predicate 
accusative besides the object accusative. LE. ¢. 


Ti τὴν πόλιν mpocayopevers ; what do you call the state ?—so καλοῦσί 
με τοῦτο τὸ ὄνομα, they call me by this name; στρατηγὸν αὐτὸν ἀπέδειξε, 
he appointed him general ; εὐεργέτην τὸν Φίλιππον ἡγοῦντο, they thought 
Philip a benefactor ; πάντων δεσπότην ἑαυτὸν πεποίηκεν, he has made 
himself master of all. 


Notre 1. This is the active construction of which the passive 
appears in the predicate nominative with passive verbs (§ 136). 
Like the latter, it includes also predicate adjectives; as τοὺς συμ- 
μάχους προθύμους ποιεῖσθαι, to make the allies eager; τὰς ἁμαρτίας 
μεγάλας ἦγεν, he considered the faults great. 


Note 2. Many other transitive verbs may take a predicate accusa- _ 
tive in apposition with the object accusative; as ἔλαβε τοῦτο δῶρον, 
he took this as a gift ; ἵππους ἄγειν θύματα τῷ ἡλίῳ, lo bring horses as 
offerings to the Sun. Especially an interrogative pronoun may be so. 
used; as τίνας τούτους ὁρῶ; who are these whom I see? (§ 142, 8.) 


~ Nore 3. A predicate accusative may denote the effect of the 
action of the verb upon its direct object; as παιδεύειν τινὰ σοφόν (or 
κακόν). to train one (to be) wise (or bad); τοὺς υἱεῖς ἱππότας ἐδίδαξεν, he 
taught his sons to be horsemen. See § 159, N. 3. 


Note 4. In the passive, when the object accusative becomes the 
subject nominative (§ 197, 1), the predicate aceusative (of every 
kind) becomes a predicate nominative. See § 136, Rem.; and 
§ 137, N. 4. 


111. GENITIVE. 


Remark. As the chief use of the accusative is to limit the meaning of 
a verb, so the chief use of the genitive is to limit the meaning of a noun. 
When the genitive is used as the object of a verb, it seems to depend on 
the nominal idea which belongs to the verb: thus ἐπιθυμῶ involves ἐπιθυ- 
μίαν (as we can say ἐπιθυμῶ ἐπιθυμίαν, §159); and in ἐπιθυμῶ τούτου, 1 have 
a desire for this, the nominal idea preponderates over the verbal. The 
Greek is somewhat arbitrary in deciding when it will allow either to pre- 
ponderate in the construction, and after some verbs it allows both the 
accusative and the genitive. In the same general sense the genitive follows 
verbal adjectives. It has also uses which originally belonged to the abla- 
tive; for example, with verbs of separation and to express sowrce. (See 
Rem. before § 157.) 


§ 167.] GENITIVE. 219 


Genitive after Nouns CAdnominal Genitive). 


§ 167. A noun in the genitive may limit the mean- 
ing of another noun, to express various relations, most of 
which are denoted by of or by the possessive case in 
English. The genitive thus depending on a noun is 
called adnominal. 


The most important of these relations are the following :— 


1. POssEssION: as ἡ τοῦ πατρὸς οἰκία, the father’s house ; 
ἡμῶν ἡ πατρίς, our country. So ἡ τοῦ Διός, the daughter of 
Zeus; τὰ τῶν θεῶν, the things of the Gods (8 141, Note 4). 
The Possessive Genitive. 


2. The Supnsecr of an action or feeling: as ἡ τοῦ δήμου 
εὔνοια, the good-will of the people (i.e. which the people feel). 
The Subjective. Genitive. 


8. The Oxssxcr of an action or feeling: as διὰ τὸ Παυσα- 
viov μῖσος, owing to the hatred of (i.e. felt against) Pausanias ; 
ai τοῦ χειμῶνος καρτερήσεις, the endurance of the winter. So 
τῶν θεῶν ὅρκοι, oaths (sworn) in the name of the Gods (as we 
say θεοὺς ὀμνύναι, ὃ 158, N. 2). The Objective Genitive. 


4. Mareriat, including that of which anything consists : 
as βοῶν ἀγέλη, a herd of cattle; ἄλσος ἡμέρων δένδρων, 
a grove of cultivated trees ; κρήνη ἡδέος ὕδατος, a spring of fresh 
water; δύο xoivixes ἀλφίτων, two quarts of meal. Genitive 
of Material. 


5. Measure, of space, time, or value: as τριῶν ἡμερῶν 
ὁδός, a gourney of three days; ὀκτὼ σταδίων τεῖχος, a wall of 
eight stades (in length) ; τριάκοντα ταλάντων οὐσία, an estate 
of thirty talents ; δίκαι πολλῶν ταλάντων, lawsutts of (1.6. 
involving) many talents. Genitive of Measure. 


6. Tue WuHo te, after nouns denoting a part: as πολλοὶ 
τῶν ῥητόρων, many of the orators; ἀνὴρ τῶν ἐλευθέρων, 


220 SYNTAX. [8 168. 


a man (i.e. one) of the freemen. The Partitive Genitive. 
(See also § 168.) | 


These six classes are not exhaustive; but, they will give a general idea 
of these relations, many of which it is difficult to classify. 


Note. Examples like ᾿Αθηνῶν πόλις, the city of Athens, Τροίης 
πτολίεθρον, the city of Troy, in which the genitive is used instead of 
apposition, are poetic. 


8 168. The partitive genitive (δ 167, 6) may follow 
all nouns, pronouns, adjectives (especially superlatives), 
participles with the article, and adverbs, which denote a 
part. Eug. 


Οἱ ἀγαθοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, the good among the men; ὁ ἥμισυς τοῦ 
ἀριθμοῦ, the half of the number ; ἄνδρα οἶδα τοῦ δήμου, 1 know a 
man of the people: τοῖς Opavirats τῶν ναυτῶν, to the upper benches of 
the sailors; οὐδεὶς τῶν παίδων, no one of the children; πάντων τῶν 
ῥητόρων δεινότατος, the most eloquent of all the orators; 6 βουλόμενος 
τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, any one who pleases of the Athenians; Sia γυναικῶν, 
divine among women (Hom.); ποῦ τῆς γῆς; ubi terrarum? where on 
the earth? tis τῶν πολιτῶν; who of the citizens? δὶς τῆς ἡμέρας, 
twice a day; εἰς τοῦτο ἀνοίας, to this pitch of folly ; ἐν τούτῳ mapa- 
σκευῆς, in this state of preparation; ἃ μὲν διώκει τοῦ Wndioparos 
ταῦτ᾽ ἐστίν, these are the parts of the decree which he prosecutes (lit. 
what parts of the decree he prosecutes, &c.) So ὀρθότατα ἀνθρώπων 
λέγεις, thou speakest as the most correct of men (most correcily of men) ; 
ὅτε δεινότατος σαυτοῦ ταῦτα ἦσθα, when you were at the height of your 
power in these matters. See § 142, 2, N. 2. 


Note 1. An adjective or participle generally agrees in gender 
with a dependent partitive genitive. But sometimes, especially 
when it is singular, it is neuter, agreeing with μέρος, part, under- 
stood; as τῶν πολεμίων τὸ πολύ (for of πολλοί), the greater part of the 
enemy. 


Notre 2. A partitive genitive sometimes depends on τὶς or μέρος 
understood; as ἔφασαν ἐπιμιγνύναι σφῶν τε πρὸς ἐκείνους καὶ ἐκείνων 
πρὸς ἑαυτούς, they said that some of their own men had mixed with them, 
and some of them with their own men (twas being understood with 
σφῶν and ἐκείνων). Compare ὃ 169, 2; 8 170,2. ὁ 


Nore 3. Similar to such phrases as ποῦ γῆς ; εἰς τοῦτο ἀνοίας, &c., 
is the use of ἔχω and an adverb with the genitive; as mas ἔχεις 
δόξης; in what state of opinion are you? οὕτω τρόπου ἔχεις, this is 
your character (lit. in this state of character); as εἶχε τάχους, as fast 
as he could (lit. in the condition of speed in which he was); so ὡς εἶχε 
ποδῶν; εὖ ἔχειν φρενῶν, to be right in his mind. 


§ 170.] GENITIVE. 221 


Genitive after Verbs. 


§ 169. 1. Verbs signifying fo be, to become, or to 
belong take a genitive which is equivalent to the pos- 
sessive or the partitive genitive. E.g. 

Ὃ νόμος otros Δράκοντός ἐστιν, this law is Draco’s. Teviay 
φέρειν ov παντὸς, GX ἀνδρὸς σοφοῦ, to bear poverty is not in the 
power of every one, but in that of a wise man. Δαρείου γίγνονται δύο 


παῖδες, two sons are born (belonging) to Darius. Τούτων γενοῦ pot, 
become (one) of these for me. 


2. Verbs signifying fo name, to choose or appoint, to’ 
make, to consider, and the like, which generally take 
two accusatives (§ 166), may take a partitive genitive in 
place of the predicate accusative. E.g¢. 


Ἐμὲ θὲς τῶν πεπεισμένων, pul me down as (one) of those who are 
4 


persuaded. Τοῦτο τῆς ἡμετέρας ἀμελείας ἄν τις θείη δικαίως, any one 
might justly consider this to belong to our neglect. 


Note. When these verbs become passive, they still retain the 
genitive ; as Σόλων τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφιστῶν ἐκλήθη, Solon was called 
(one) of the Seven Sages. 


3. The genitive after verbs sometimes expresses other 
relations of the adnominal genitive. .9. 


Τὸ τεῖχος σταδίων ἦν ὀκτώ, the wall was (one) of eight stades (in 
length); ἐπειδὰν ἐτῶν ἢ τις τριάκοντα, when one is thirty years old : — 
Genitive of Measure. Oi στέφανοι ῥόδων ἧσαν, the crowns were 
(made) of roses ; τὸ τεῖχος πεποίηται λίθου, the wall is built of stone ; 
— Genitive of Material. οὐ τῶν κακούργων οἶκτος (sc. ἐστίν), there 
is no pity felt for the evil-doers ; — Objective Genitive. 


§ 170. 1. Any verb may take a genitive if its action 
affects the object only in part. E.g. 

Πέμπει τῶν Λυδῶν, he sends some of the Lydians (but πέμπει τοὺς 
Λυδούς, he sends the Lydians). Πίνει rod οἴνου, he drinks of the wine. 
Τῆς γῆς ἔτεμον, they ravaged (some) of the land. 

2. This principle applies especially to verbs signifying 
to share (i.e. to give or take a part) or to enjoy. Kg. 


Mereiyov τῆς λείας, they shared in the booty; so often μεταποιεῖ- 
σθαί τινος, to claim a share of anything (cf. § 171, 1); ἀπολαύομεν τῶν 


992 SYNTAX. [8 171. 


ἀγαθῶν, we enjoy the blessings (i.e. our share of them); οὕτως dvato 
τούτων, thus mayest thou enjoy these. So ob προσήκει μοι τῆς ἀρχῆ ς; 
I have no concern in the government; μέτεστί μοι τούτου, [ have a share 


in this (§ 184, 2, N. 1). 


Notre. Many of these verbs also take an accusative. Μετέχω 
and similar verbs may regularly take an accusative like μέρος, part ; 
as ἴσον μετέχει ἕκαστος Tov πλούτου μέρος, each has an equal share 
of the wealth (where μέρους would mean that each has only a part of 
a share). ‘This use of μέρος shows the nature of the genitive after 
these verbs. . 


§ 171, 1. The genitive follows verbs signifying fo take 
hold of, to touch, to claim, to aim at, to hit, to attain, to 
miss, to make trial of, to begin. E.g. 


᾿Ἐλάβετο τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ, he took his hand; οὔτε πυρὸς οὔτε 
ἔρωτος ἑκὼν ἅπτομαι, I willingly touch neither fire nor love; τῆς 
ξυνέσεως μεταποιοῦνται, they lay claim to sagacity; στοχάζεσθαι τῶν 
ἀνθρώπων, to aim at the men; τῆς ἀρετῆς ἐφικέσθαι, lo aliain to 
virtue ; ἔτυχε tis δίκης, he met with justice; σφάλλεται τῆς ἐλπίδος, 
he fails of (attaining) his hope; πειρᾶσθαι τοῦ τείχους, to make an 
atiempt on the wall; ob πολέμου ἄρχομεν, we do not begin war. 


Note. Verbs of taking hold may have an object accusative, with 
a genitive of the part taken hold of; as ἔλαβον τῆς ζώνης τὸν ᾽Ορόνταν, 
they seized Orontas by his girdle. 


2. The genitive follows verbs signifying fo taste, to 
smell, to hear, to perceive, to understand, to remember, 
to forget, to desire, to care for, to spare, to neglect, lo 
admire, to despise. ἢ... 


"EXevdepins γευσάμενοι, having tasted of freedom (Hat.); κρομ- 
μύων ὀσφραίνομαι, 1 smell onions; dovis ἀκούειν, to hear a voice; 
αἰσθάνεσθαι, μεμνῆσθαι, or ἐπιλανθάνεσθαι τούτων, to perceive, remem- 
ber, or forget these things; συνιέναι ἀλλήλων, to understand one 
another; τῶν μαθημάτων ἐπιθυμῶ, 1 long for learning; χρημάτων 
φείδεσθαι, to be sparing of money; δόξης ἀμελεῖν, to neglect opinion ; 
ἄγαμαι τῆς ἀρετῆς, I admire virtue; καταφρονεῖν τοῦ κινδύνου, to 
despise danger (cf. § 178, 2, Note). 

Note 1. Verbs of hearing, learning, &c. may take an accusative 
of the thing heard, &c., and a genitive of the person heard from; as 
τούτων τοιούτους ἀκούω λόγους, I hear such sayings from these men ; 
πυθέσθαι τοῦτο ὑμῶν, to learn this from you. The genitive here belongs 
under § 176, 1. A sentence may take the place of the accusative; 
as τούτων ἄκουε Ti λέγουσιν, hear from these what they say. See also 
ἀποδέχομαι, accept (a statement) from, in the Lexicon. 


§ 172.] GENITIVE. 223 


_ Notre 2. The impersonals μέλει and μεταμέλει take the geni- 
tive of a thing with the dative of a person (§ 184, 2, N. 1); as 
μέλει μοι τούτου, I care for this ; μεταμέλει σοι τούτου, thou repentest of 
this. Προσήκει, it concerns, has the same construction, but the geni- 
tive belongs under § 170, 2. 


Note 3. Causative verbs of this class take the accusative of a 
person and the genitive of a thing; as μή μ᾽ ἀναμνήσῃς κακῶν, do not 
remind me of evils (i.e. cause me to remember them); τοὺς παῖδας γευ- 
στέον αἵματος, we must make the children taste blood. 

But verbs of reminding also take two accusatives (§ 164). 


Remark. Most of the verbs of § 171 may take also the accusa- 
tive. See the Lexicon. *O¢w, emit smell (smell of ), may take two 
genitives; as τῆς κεφαλῆς ὄζω μύρου, 1 emit a smell of perfume (§ 170, 1) 
from my head. 


8. The genitive follows verbs signifying fo rule or 
to command. E.g. 


"Epos τῶν θεῶν βασιλεύει, Love is king of the Gods; Todvxparns 
Σάμου ἐτυράννει, Polycrales was tyrant of Samos; ὁπλιτῶν καὶ 
ἱππέων ἐστρατήγει, he was general of infantry and cavalry ; ἡγεῖται 
παντὸς καὶ ἔργου καὶ λόγου, he directs everything that is done and 
said. 

This construction is sometimes connected with that of § 175, 2. 
But the genitive here depends on the idea of king or ruler implied 
in the verb, while there it depends on the idea of comparison (see 
Remark before § 167). 


Notr. For other cases after many of these verbs, as the dative 
after ἡγέομαι and ἀνάσσω, see the Lexicon. 


᾿ς 8172. 1. Verbs signifying fulness and want take the 
genitive of material (δ 167, 4). 4... 


Χρημάτων εὐπορεῖ, he has abundance of money; of τύραννοι émai- 
νου οὔποτε σπανίζετε, you tyrants never have a scarcity of praise. 


2. Verbs signifying ¢o fill take the accusative of the 
thing filled and the genitive of material. E.g. 

Ὕδατος τὴν κύλικα πληροῦν, to fill the cup with water. 

Notr 1. Δέομαι, J want, besides the ordinary construction (as 
τούτων ἐδέοντο, they were in want of these), may take a genitive of the 
person with a cognate accusative of the thing; as δεήσομαι ὑμῶν 
μετρίαν δέησιν, I will make of you a moderate request. See §159, N. 4. 


Note 2. (a) Δεῖ may take a dative (sometimes in poetry an 
accusative) of the person besides the genitive; as δεῖ μοι τούτου, 


224 ) SYNTAX. ΠΣ 173. 


I need this; od πολλοῦ πόνου με δεῖ, 1 have no need of much labor 
(cf. οὐ δεῖ pe ἐλθεῖν). 


(Ὁ) Besides the common phrases πολλοῦ δεῖ, it is far from it, 
ὀλίγου δεῖ, i wanis little of it, we have in Demosthenes οὐδὲ πολ- 
λοῦ δεῖ (like παντὸς δεῖ), it wants everything of it (lit. it does not even 
want much). For ὀλίγου and μικροῦ, almost, see the Lexicon. 


Causal Genitive. 


§ 173. 1. The genitive often denotes a cause, especially 
after verbs expressing emotions, as praise or dispraise, 
pily, anger, envy, or revenge. E.g. 


Τούτους τῆς τόλμης θαυμάζειν, to admire these for their courage; 
εὐδαιμονίζω oe τοῦ τρόπου, 1 congratulate you on your character; 
τούτους οἰκτείρω τῆς νόσου, I pity these for their disease; τῶν ἀδικη- 
μάτων ὀργίζεσθαι αὐτοῖς, to be angry with them for their offences ; 
ηλοῦντες τὴν πόλιν τῆς Μαραθῶνι μάχης, envying the city for the battle 
at Marathon; τούτου σοι ov φθονήσω, 1 shall not grudge you this; 
τούτους THs ἁρπαγῆς τιμωρήσασθαι, to take vengeance on these for the 
_ robbery. Most of these verbs may take also an object accusative. 


Note 1. The genitive sometimes denotes a purpose or motive 
(where ἕνεκα is generally expressed); as τῆς τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐλευθερίας, 
for the liberty of the Greeks (Dem. Cor. § 100). See § 262, 2. 


Note 2. Verbs of disputing take a causal genitive; as ἀντιποιεῖ- 

σθαι τῷ βασιλεῖ τῆς ἀρχῆς, to dispute with the king about his dominion ; 

-Εὔμολπος ἠμφισβήτησεν ᾽᾿Ἐρεχθεῖ τῆς πόλεως, Eumolpus disputed with 
Erechtheus about the city (i.e. disputed its possession with him). 


2. Verbs signifying to accuse, to prosecute, to convict, 
to acquit, and to condemn take a causal genitive denoting 
the crime. ΕἾ... 


Αἰτιῶμαι αὐτὸν τοῦ φόνου, I accuse him of the murder; ἐγράψατο 
αὐτὸν παρανόμων, he indicted him for an illegal proposition; διώκει 
pe δώρων, he prosecules me for bribery (for gifts); Κλέωνα δώρων 
ἑλόντες καὶ κλοπῆς» having convicted Cleon of bribery and theft ; 
ἔφευγε προδοσίας, he was brought to trial for treachery, but ἀπέφυγε 
προδοσίας, he was acquitted of treachery; πολλῶν οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 
μηδισμοῦ θάνατον κατέγνωσαν, our fathers condemned many to death 
for favoring the Persians (for πολλῶν and θάνατον see Note). 


Notre. Compounds of κατά of this class commonly take a 
genitive of the person, which depends on the κατά. They may 


\ F 3 ῖ \ 


§ 175.] : | GENITIVE. “225 


take also an object accusative denoting the crime or punishment. 


J: 
, Οὐδεὶς αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ κατηγόρησε πώποτε, nO man ever himself accused 
himself; καταψεύδονταί μου μεγάλα, they tell great falsehoods against 
me; Φοίβου ἀδικίαν κατηγορεῖν, to charge injustice upon Phoebus ; 
ἐνίων ἔπεισαν ὑμᾶς ἀκρίτων θάνατον καταψηφίσασθαι, they persuaded 
you to pass (sentence of ) death upon some without a trial.. 
Verbs of condemning may take three cases, as in the last example 
under § 173, 2. 


8. The genitive is sometimes used in exclamations, to 
give the cause of the astonishment. £.g. 


Ὦ Πόσειδον, τῆς téxvns! O Poseidon, what a trade! ’Q Ζεῦ 
βασιλεῦ, τῆς λεπτότητος τῶν ppevav! O King Zeus! what subilety 
of mind ! 


Genitive of Separation, of Comparison, of Source. 


$174, The genitive may denote that from which any- 
thing is separated or distinguished. 

On this principle the genitive follows verbs denoting 

to remove, to restrain, to release, to abandon, to deprive, 
and the like. E.g. | 


Ἡ νῆσος οὐ πολὺ διέχει τῆς ἠπείρου, the island is not far distant 
from the main-land ; ἐπιστήμη χωριζομένη ἀρετῆς, knowledge separated 
from virtue; λῦσόν pe δεσμῶν, release me from chains; ἐπέσχον τῆς 
τειχήσεως, they ceased from building the wall; πόσων ἀπεστέρησθε; 
of how much have you been deprived? ἔπαυσαν αὐτὸν τῆς στρατηγίας, 
they deposed him from his command ; οὐ παύεσθε τῆς μοχθηρίας, you 
do not cease from your rascality. So εἶπον (αὐτῷ) τοῦ κήρυκος μὴ 
λείπεσθαι, they told him not to be left behind the herald (i.e. to follow 
close upon him); ἡ ἐπιστολὴ, ἣν οὗτος ἔγραψεν aroXerpbeis ἡμῶν, the 
letter which this man wrote without our knowledge (lit. separated 
Srom us). 

For the accusative after verbs of depriving, see § 164. 


§ 175, 1. The comparative degree takes the genitive 
when 7, than, is omitted. E.g. | 


Κρείττων ἐστὶ τούτων, he is better than these; νέοις τὸ σιγᾶν κρεῖττόν 
ἐστι τοῦ λαλεῖν, for youth silence is. better than prating; πονηρία 
θᾶττον θανάτου τρέχει, wickedness runs faster than death. 


Note 1. All adjectives and adverbs which imply a comparison 
may take a genitive: as ἕτεροι τούτων, others than these; ὕστεροι τῆς 


226 | SYNTAX. [8 176. 


μάχης, too late for (later than) the battle ; τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ τῆς μάχης, on the 
day after the battle. So τριπλάσιον ἡμῶν, thrice as much as we. ; 


Note 2. After πλέον (πλεῖν), more, or ἔλασσον, less, # is occasion- 
ally omitted without affecting the case; as πέμψω dpvis ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν, 
πλεῖν ἑξακοσίους τὸν ἀριθμόν, I will send birds against him, more 
than six hundred in number (§ 160). Aristoph. , 


2. The genitive follows verbs signifying to surpass, to 
be inferior, and all others which imply comparison. E£.g. 


“AvOpwros ξυνέσει ὑπερέχει τῶν ἄλλων, man surpasses the others in 
sagacity ; rod πλήθους περιγίγνεσθαι, to be superior to the multitude ; 
ὑστερίζειν τῶν καιρῶν, to be too late for the opportunities. So τῶν 
ἐχθρῶν νικᾶσθαι (or ἡσσᾶσθαι), to be overcome by one’s enemies; but 
these two verbs take also the genitive with ὑπό, and the dative. 
So τῶν ἐχθρῶν κρατεῖν, to prevail over one’s enemies, and τῆς θαλάσσης 
ee’ to be master of the sea. Compare the examples under 
§ 171, 3. 


§ 176, 1. The genitive sometimes denotes the source. Lg. 


Τοῦτο ἔτυχόν σου, I obtained this from you; τοῦτο ἔμαθεν ὑμῶν, he 
learned this from you. Add the examples under § 171, 2, N. 1. 


2. In poetry the genitive occasionally denotes the agent 
after passive verbs, or is used like the cnstrumental dative 
(§ 188). Hg. 


Ἐν “Avda δὴ κεῖσαι, σᾶς ἀλόχου odayels Αἰγίσθου τε, thou liest 
now in Hades, slain by thy wife and Aegisthus. Kur. 
Πρῆσαι πυρὸς δηΐοιο θύρετρα, to burn the gates with destructive 
\ 


fire. Il. 


These constructions would not be allowed in prose. 


Genitive after Compound Verbs. 


§ 177. The genitive often depends on ὃν preposition 
included in a compound verb. L.g. 


Πρόκειται τῆς ᾿Αττικῆς ὄρη μεγάλα, high mountains lie before 
Allica; τῶν ὑμετέρων δικαίων προΐστασθαι, to stand in defence of 
your rights ; ὑπερεφάνησαν τοῦ λόφου, they appeared above the hill ; 
οὕτως ὑμῶν ὑπεραλγῶ, I grieve so for you; ἐπιβάντες τοῦ τείχους; 
having mounted the wall; ἀποτρέπει με τούτου, it turns me from this. 

For the genitive after certain compounds of κατά, see ὃ 173, 2, 
Note. See also § 193. 


§ 180.] GENITIVE. 227 


Genitive of Price or Value. 


178, The genitive may denote the price or value of a 
thing. E.g. 


Δόξα χρημάτων οὐκ ὠνητή (sc. ἐστίν), glory is not to be bought 
with money; πόσου διδάσκει; for what price does he teach? μισθοῦ 
νόμους εἰσφέρει, he proposes laws for a bribe; ὁ δοῦλος πέντε μνῶν 
τιμᾶται, the slave is valued at five minas. So τιμᾶται δ᾽ οὖν μοι ὁ ἀνὴρ 
θανάτου, so the man estimates my punishment at death (i.e. proposes 
death as my punishment). Plat. So also Σφοδρίαν ὑπῆγον θανάτου, 
they impeached Sphodrias on a capital charge (cl. § 178, 2). 


Nore. The genitive depending on ἄξιος, worth, worthy, and its. 
compounds, or on ἀξιόω, think worthy, is the genitive of price or 
value; as ἄξιός ἐστι θανάτου, he is worthy of death; Θεμιστοκλέα τῶν 
μεγίστων ἠξίωσαν, they thought Themistocles worthy of the highest 
honors. So sometimes ἄτιμος and ἀτιμάζω take the genitive. (See 
§ 180, 1.) 


Genitive of Time and Place. 


8 179. 1. The genitive may denote the time within 
which anything takes place. E.2. 

Πέρσαι οὐχ ἥξουσι δέκα ἐτῶν, the Persians will not come within 
ten years. Ths νυκτὸς ἐγένετο, it happened within the night (but τὴν 


νύκτα means during the whole night). So δραχμὴν ἐλάμβανε τῆς ἡμέρας, 
he recewed a drachma a day (each day). 


2. A similar genitive of the place within which is found in 
poetry. Lg. 


Ἦ οὐκ "Apyeos ἦεν ᾿Αχαιικοῦ; was he not in Achaean Argos? 
Odyss. Soin the Homeric πεδίοιο θέειν, to run on the plain (i.e. 
within its limits), and similar expressions. So ἀριστερῆς χειρός, 
on the left hand, even in Hat. 


Genitive with Adjectives. 


$ 180. The objective genitive fallow many verbal 
adjectives. 


1. These adjectives are chiefly kindred (in meaning or 
derivation) to verbs which take the genitive. E.g. 


228 SYNTAX. [§ 181. 


Μέτοχος σοφίας, partaking of wisdom (8 170,2). ᾿Επήβολος ἐπιστή- 
μης. having attained to knowledge ; ἔμπειρος κακῶν, experienced in evils ; 
Tov ἀρίστου στοχαστικός, aiming at the best (§ 171, 1). Κατήκοος τῶν 
γονέων, obedient (lit. hearkening) to his parents ; ἐπιστήμων τῶν δικαίων, 
understanding his rights ; ἐπιμελὴς ἀγαθῶν, ἀμελὴς κακῶν, caring for the 
good, neglectful of the bad; φειδωλοὶ χρημάτων, sparing of money 
($171, 2). ᾿Εγκρατὴς ἑαυτοῦ, being master of himself; ἀρχικὸς avdpar, . 
Jit to rule men (δ 171, 8). Meords κακῶν, full of evils ; ἔρημοι συμμά- 
χων; destitute of allies ; ἡ Ψυχὴ γυμνὴ τοῦ σώματος, the soul stript of the 
body ; καθαρὸς φόνου, free from the stain of murder (ὃ 172,1). ”Evoyxos 
δειλίας, chargeable with cowardice (8 173, 2). Διάφορος τῶν ἄλλων, 
distinguished from the others (§ 174). Αξιος πολλών, worth much 
(§ 178, Note). \ 


Note 1. Especially, adjectives of this class compounded with 
alpha privative (§ 131, 4, a) take the genitive; as ἄγευστος κακῶν, 
without a taste of evils; ἀμνήμων τῶν κινδύνων, forgetful of the 
dangers; ἀπαθὴς κακῶν, without suffering ills; ἀκρατὴς γλώσσης; 
without power over his tongue. 


Notre 2. Sometimes these compounds take a genitive of kindred 
meaning, which depends on the idea of separation implied in them; 
as ἄπαις ἀρρένων παίδων, childless (in respect) of male children; 
ἄτιμος πάσης τιμῆς, destitute of all honor; ἀδωρότατος χρημάτων, 
most free from taking-bribes. 


2. Some are kindred to verbs which take the accusa- 
tive. Eug. 


* Πόλεως ἀνατρεπτικός, subversive of the state ; πρακτικὸς τῶν καλῶν, 
capable of doing noble deeds; φιλομαθὴς πάσης ἀληθείας, fond of 


learning all truth. — Σ 


§ 181. The possessive genitive sometimes follows 
adjectives denoting possession or the opposite. E.g.— 


Οἰκεῖα τῶν βασιλευόντων, belonging to the kings; ἱερὸς ὁ χῶρος τῆς 
᾿Αρτέμιδος, the place is sacred to Artemis; κοινὸν ἁπάντων, common to 
all; δημοκρατίας ἀλλότρια, things not belonging to democracy. 

For the dative after such adjectives, which with some of them is | 
more common than the genitive, see ὃ 185, 


Nore. Some adjectives of place, like ἐναντίος, opposite, may take 
the genitive instead of the regular dative (8 185), but chiefly in 
pomry' as ἐναντίοι ἔσταν ᾿Αχαιῶν, they stood opposite the Achaeans. 

om. 


§ 183.] GENITIVE. 229 


Genitive with Adverbs. 


8 182. 1. The genitive follows adverbs derived from 
adjectives which take the genitive. E.g. 


Oi ἐμπείρως αὐτοῦ ἔχοντες, those who are acquainted with him ; 
ἀναξίως τῆς πόλεως, in a manner unworthy of the state; ἐμάχοντο 
_ ἀξίως λόγου, they fought in a manner worthy of mention, 


2. The genitive follows many adverbs of place. E.g. 


Εἴσω τοῦ ἐρύματος, within the fortress; ἔξω τοῦ τείχους, outside of 
the wall; ἐκτὸς τῶν ὅρων, without the boundaries; ywpis τοῦ σώματος, 
apart from the body; μεταξὺ σοφίας καὶ ἀμαθίας, between wisdom and 
ignorance ; πέραν τοῦ ποταμοῦ, beyond the river; πρόσθεν τοῦ στρα- 
τοπέδου, in front of the camp: ἀμφοτέρωθεν τῆς ὁδοῦ, on both sides 
of the road; εὐθὺ τῆς Φασήλιδος, straight to. Phasélis. 

Such adverbs, besides those given above, are chiefly ἐντός, within; 
δίχα, apart from; ἐγγύς, ἄγχι, πέλας, and πλησίον, near ; πόρρω 
(πρόσω), far from ; ὄπισθεν and κατόπιν, behind; and a few others of 
similar meaning. ‘The genitive after most of them can be explained 
as a partilive genitive or as a genitive of separation; that after εὐθύ 
resembles that after verbs of aiming at (§ 171, 1). ἱ 

Λάθρᾳ and κρύφα, without the knowledge of, sometimes take the 
᾿ genitive. 


Nore. Πλήν, except, ἄχρι and μέχρι, until, ἄνευ and ἄτερ, 
without, ἕνεκα (οὕνεκα), on account of, and μεταξύ, between, take 
the genitive like prepositions. For these and ordinary prepositions 
with the genitive, see § 191. . 


Genitive Absolute. 


§ 183. A noun and a participle not connected with 
the main construction of the sentence may stand by 
themselves in the genitive. This is called the genitive 
absolute. E.g. 


Ταῦτ᾽ ἐπράχθη Κόνωνος στρατηγοῦντος, this was done when 
Conon was general. Οὐδὲν τῶν δεόντων ποιούντων ὑμῶν κακῶς τὰ 
πράγματα ἔχει, affairs are in a bad state while you do nothing which you 
ought todo. Θεῶν διδόντων οὐκ ἂν ἐκφύγοι κακά, if the Gods should 
grant (it to be so), he could not escape evils. "Ovros Ψεύδους ἔστιν 
ἀπάτη, when there is falsehood, there is deceit. 

For the various relations denoted by the genitive absolute, see 
88 277, 278. 


280 SYNTAX. [8 184. 


Iv. DATIVE. 


ReMARK. The primary use of the dative case is to denote that 
to or for which anything is or is done: this includes the dative of 
the remote or indirect object, and the dative of interest. It also 
denotes that by which or with which, and the time (sometimes the 

lace) in which, anything takes place, —i.e. it is not merely a dative, 

ut also an instrumental anda locative case. (See Remark before 
§ 157.) The object of motion after to is not regularly expressed by 
the Greek dative, but by the accusative with a preposition. (See 
§ 162.) 


Dative expressing To or For. 


ὃ 184, The dative is used to denote that to or for 
which anything is or is done. This includes, — 


1. The dative of the indirect object after transitive verbs, 
which is generally introduced in English by to. £.g. 


Δίδωσι μισθὸν τῷ στρατεύματι, he gives pay to the army; ὑπι- 
σχνεῖταί σοι δέκα τάλαντα, he promises ten talents to you (or he promises 
you ten talents); βοήθειαν πέμψομεν τοῖς συμμάχοις; we will send aid 
to our allies; ἔλεγον τῷ βασιλεῖ τὰ γεγενημένα, they told the king 
what had happened. 


2. The dative after certain intransitive verbs, many of 
which in English take a direct object without fo. E.g. 


Εὔχομαι τοῖς θεοῖς, I pray (to) the Gods; δικαιοσύνη λυσιτελεῖ τῷ 
ἔχοντι; justice is advantageous to (or profits) the one having it; τοῖς 
νόμοις πείθεται, he is obedient to the laws (he obeys the laws); βοηθεῖ 
τοῖς φίλοις, he assists his friends ; ἀρέσκει τοῖς πολίταις, tt is pleas- 
ing to (or it pleases) the citizens; εἶκε ἀνάγκῃ, yield to necessity ; 

Bod πιστεύει τοῖς φίλοις, he does not trust his friends; τοῖς Θηβαίοις 
ὀνειδίζουσιν, they reproach the Thebans ; τί ἐγκαλεῖς ἡμῖν ; what have 
you to blame us for? ἐπηρεάζουσιν ἀλλήλοις, they revile one another ; 
ὀργίζεσθε τοῖς ἀδικοῦσιν, you are angry with the offenders. So 
πρέπει μοι λέγειν, it is becoming me to speak; προσήκει μοι, it belongs 
to me; δοκεῖ μοι, it seems to me; δοκῶ μοι, methinks. 


The verbs of this class which are not translated with fo in 
English are chiefly those signifying to benefit, serve, obey, 
defend, assist, please, trust, satisfy, advise, exhort, or any of 
their opposites; also those expressing friendliness, hostility, 
abuse, reproach, envy, anger, threats. 


§ 184.] DATIVE. a ὃς 


Note 1. (a) The impersonals δεῖ, μέτεστι, μέλει, μεταμέλει, — 
and προσήκει take the dative of a person with the genitive of a thing; 
as δεῖ μοι τούτου, I have need of this; μέτεστί μοι τούτου, I have a share 
in this; μέλει μοι τούτου, I am interested in this; προσήκει μοι τούτου, 
I am concerned in this. (For the gen. see § 170, 2, § 172, N. 2.) 

(>) Δεῖ and χρή take the accusative (very rarely the dative) when 
an infinitive follows. For δεῖ (in poetry) with the accusative and 
the genitive, see § 172, N. 2. 


Note 2. Some verbs of this class may take the accusative. Others, 
whose meaning would place them here (as μισέω, hate), take only the 
accusative. Aodopéw, revile, has the accusative, but λοιδορέομαι (mid- 
dle) the dative. Κελεύω in Attic Greek has only the accusative 
(commonly with the infinitive) ; in Homer generally the dative. 


3. The dative of interest (or of advantage or dis- 
advantage), which is generally introduced in English by 
for. E.g. ; 


Πᾶς ἀνὴρ αὑτῷ πονεῖ, every man labors for himself; Σόλων ᾿Αθη- 
ναίοις νόμους ἔθηκε, Solon made laws for the Athenians; οἱ καιροὶ 
προεῖνται τῇ πόλει, lit. the opportunities have been sacrificed for the 
_state (for its disadvantage); ἐλπίδα ἔχει σωτηρίας τῇ πόλει, he has 
hope of safety for the state. ee 


Note 1. A peculiar use of this dative is found in statements of 
time; as τῷ ἤδη δύο γενεαὶ ἐφθίατο, two generations had already passed 
away for him (1.6. he had seen them pass away). Hom. Ἡμέραι ἦσαν 
τῇ Μυτιλήνῃ ἑαλωκυίᾳ ἑπτά, for Mitylene captured (1.6. since its cap- 
ture) there had been seven days. Ἡμέρα ἦν πέμπτη ἐπιπλέουσι τοῖς 
᾿Αθηναίοις; it was the fifth day for the Athenians sailing on (i.e. 
at was the fifth day of their voyage). 


Note 2. Here belong such Homeric expressions as τοῖσιν ἀνέστη, 
he rose up for them (i.e. to address them); τοῖσι μύθων ἦρχεν, he began 
to speak before them. 


Nore 3. In Homer, verbs signifying to ward off take an accusa- 
tive of the thing and a dative of the person; as Δαναοῖσι λοιγὸϊ 
ἄμυνον, ward off destruction from the Danai (lit. for the Danat). 
Here the accusative may be omitted, so that Δαναοῖσι ἀμύνειν means 
to defend the Danai. For other constructions of ἀμύνω see the 
Lexicon. 

Aéxopat, reccive, takes a dative in Homer by a similar idiom; 
as δέξατό of σκῆπτρον, he took his sceptre from him (lit. for him). 


Nore 4. Sometimes this dative has nearly the same force as a 
possessive genitive; as of ἵπποι αὐτοῖς Sedevra, their horses are tied 
(lit. the horses are tied for them); διὰ τὸ ἐσπάρθαι αὐτῷ τὸ στράτευμα, 
because his army has been scattered (for him); ἦρχον τοῦ ναυτικοῦ τοῖς 


232 | SYNTAX. Eg 185. 


Συρακοσίοις, they commanded the navy for the Syracusans (i.e. the 
Syracusans’ navy). i 


Nore 5. The participles βουλόμενος, ἡδόμενος, προσδε- 

dpevos, ἀχθόμενος, and a few others, may agree with a dative, 

the phrase being equivalent to the verb of the participle; as αὐτῷ 
βουλομένῳ ἐστίν, it is to him wishing it (1.6. he wishes it). 


Note 6. Here belong the so-called ethical dative, in which the 
personal pronouns have the force of for my sake, &c., and sometimes 
cannot easily be translated; as ri σοι μαθήσομαι; what am Ito learn 
for you? πῶς ἡμῖν ἔχεις ; how are you (we wish to know) ? 


4, The dative of possession, after εἰμί, γίγνομαι, 
and similar verbs. E.g. ? | 


Πολλοί μοι φίλοι εἰσίν, I have many friends ; πάνταϊ σοι γενήσεται, 
all things will belong to you; ἔστιν ἀνθρώπῳ λογισμός, man has 
reason; Ἱππίᾳ μόνῳ τῶν ἀδελφῶν παῖδες ἐγένοντο, ἰο Hippias alone of 
the brothers there were children born. 


5. The dative denoting that with respect to which a 
statement is made, —often belonging to the whole sen- 
tence rather than to any special word. E.g.. 


Ἅπαντα τῷ φοβουμένῳ ψοφεῖ, everything sounds to one who is 
afraid; σφῷν μὲν ἐντολὴ Διὸς ἔχει τέλος, as regards you two, the order 
of Zeus is fully executed. : 

So in such expressions as these: ἐν δεξιᾷ ἐσπλέοντι, on the-right 
as you sail in (with respect to one sailing in); συνελόντι; OF as 
συνελόντι εἰπεῖν, concisely, or to speak concisely (lit. for one having 
made the matter concise). So ὡς ἐμοί, in my opinion. 


§ 185, The dative follows many adjectives and ad- 
verbs of kindred meaning with the verbs included in 
§ 184, and some verbal nouns. £.g. 3 


Δυσμενὴς τοῖς φίλοις, hostile to his friends ; ὕποχο ς τοῖς νόμοις, 
subject to the laws; ἐπικίνδυνον τῇ πόλει, dangerous to the state ; 
βλαβερὸν τῷ σώματι, hurtful to the body; εὔνους ἑαυτῷ, kind to 
himself; ἐναντίος αὐτῷ, opposed to him. (For the genitive after 
évavrios, see ὃ 181, Note.) Supdepdvras αὑτῷ, profitably to him- 
self: ἐμποδὼν ἐμοί, in my way. So καταδούλωσις τῶν Ἑλλήνων τοῖς 
᾿Αθηναίοις, subjugation of the Greeks to the Athenians. 


§ 187.] DATIVE. | 233 


Dative of Resemblance and Union. 


$186. The dative is used with all words implying 
resemblance, union, or approach. This includes verbs, 
adjectives, adverbs, and nouns. 1.9". 


Σκιαῖς ἐοικότες, like shadows ; ᾿ ὁμιλοῦσι τοῖς κακοῖς, they associate 
with the bad; τοὺς φεύγοντας αὐτοῖς ξυνήλλαξεν, he reconciled the 
exiles with them ; 3 ὁμολογοῦσιν ἀλλήλοις, they ag gree with one another ; 
διαλέγονται τούτοις, they converse with these τοὺς ἵππους ψόφοις 
πλησιάζειν, to bring ug the horses near to noises. Ὅμοιοι τοῖς τυφλοῖς, 
like the blind ; κύματα ἶσα ὄρεσσιν, waves like mountains (Hom.) ; 
τοῖς αὐτοῖς Κύρῳ ὅπλοις ὡπλισμένοι, armed with the same arms as 
Ci yrus. _ Ἐγγὺς ὁδῷ, near ἃ road ‘(also the genitive, § 182, 2); 
ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, as soon as (it was) day; ὁμοῦ τῷ πήλῳ, together with 
the mud ; τὰ τούτοις ἐφεξῆς, what comes next to these. 


Note 1. To this class belong not merely such verbs as éa- 
λέγομαι, discourse with, but also μάχομαι; Toe MEW, and others 
signifying contend with, quarrel with ; as μάχεσθαι τοῖς Θηβαίοις, 
to fight with the Thebans : πολεμοῦσιν ἡμῖν, they are at war with us; 
ἐρίζουσιν ἀλλήλοις, they contend with each other ; διαφέρεσθαι τοῖς 
πονηροῖς, to be at variance with the base. So ἐς χεῖρας ἐλθεῖν τινι; ΟΥ̓ 
ἐς λόγους ἐλθεῖν τινι, to come to a conflict (or words) with any one. 


Note 2. After adjectives of likeness, an abridged form of 
expression may be used; as κόμαι Χαρίτεσσιν ὁμοῖαι, hair. like 
(that of) the Graces (Hom. ); Tas ἴσας πληγὰς ἐμοί, the same number 
of blows with me. 


Dative after Compound Verbs. 


§ 187. The dative follows many verbs compounded 
with ἐν, σύν, or ἐπί; and some compounded with πρός, 
παρά, περί, and ὑπό. ΕΠ... 


Τοῖς νόμοις ἐμμένων, abiding by the laws; αἱ ἡδοναὶ ἐπιστήμην 
οὐδεμίαν Ψυχῇ ἐμποιοῦσιν, pleasures produce no knowledge in the 
soul ; ἐνέκειντο τῷ Περικλεῖ, they pressed hard on Pericles; ἐμαυτῷ 
συνήδειν οὐδὲν ἐπισταμένῳ, I was conscious to myself that I knew 
nothing (lit. with m yself’) ; ἤδη ποτέ σοι ἐπῆλθεν; did it ever occur to 
you ? Προσβάλλειν τῷ τειχίσματι, to attack the fortification ; adeh- 
gis ἀνδρὶ παρείη, let a brother stand by a man (i.e. let a man’s 
brother stand by him) ; τοῖς κακοῖς περιπίπτουσιν, they are involved in 
evils ; ὑπόκειται τὸ πεδίον τῷ ἱερῷ, the plain lies below the temple. 

This dative sometimes depends on the preposition (§ 193), and 
sometimes on the a contained in the compound as a whole. 


234 SYNTAX. [8 188, 


Causal and Instrumental Dative. 


8 188. 1. The dative is used to denote the cause, 
manner, means, or instrument. Εἰ... 


CAUSE: ᾿Αποθνήσκει νόσῳ, he dies of disease; πολλάκις ἀγνοίᾳ 
ἁμαρτάνομεν, we often err through ignorance. MANNER: Apépo 
ἠπείγοντο, they pressed forward on a run; πολλῇ κραυγῇ ἐπελθεῖν, to 
advance with a loud shout; τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, in truth ; τῷ ὄντι, in reality ; 
Bia. forcibly ; ταύτῃ, in this manner, thus. MEANS or INSTRUMENT: 
ὋὉρώμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, we sce with our eyes; ἐγνώσθησαν τῇ σκευῇ 
τῶν ὅπλων, they were recognized by the fashion of their arms; κακοῖς 
ἰᾶσθαι κακά, to cure evils by evils; οὐδεὶς ἔπαινον ἡδοναῖς ἐκτήσατο, 
no one yains praise by pleasures (ὃ 205, 2). | 


Note 1. The dative of respect is a form of the dative of manner ; 
as δυνατὸς τῷ σώματι, strong in his body; πόλις, Θάψακος ὀνόματι, 


a city, Thapsacus by name (cf. § 160, 1). 


Note 2. Xpdopat, to use (to serve one’? self by), takes the 
instrumental dative ; as χρῶνται ἀργυρίῳ, /they use money. 
neuter pronoun (6.0. ri, τὶ, 6 Tt, OF τοῦτο) maybe added as a cognate 
accusative (8 159, N. 2); as ri τούτοις χρήσχμαι ; what shall I do with 
these ? (lit. what use shall I make of thesg#). Νομίζω has sometimes 
the same meaning and construction asAvpdopat. 


2. The dative of manner is used with comparatives to 
denote the degree of difference. E.g. 


Πολλῷ κρεῖττόν ἐστιν, it is much better (better by much); τῇ 
κεφαλῇ μείζων (or ἐλάττων), a head taller (or shorter); τοσούτῳ 
ἥδιον ζῶ, I live so much the more happily; τέχνη ἀνάγκης ἀσθενεστέρα 
μακρῷ, art is weaker than necessity by far. 

So sometimes with superlatives, and even with other expressions 
which imply comparison; as μακρῷ κάλλιστά τε καὶ ἄριστα, by far the 
most beautiful and the best ; δέκα ἔτεσι πρὸ τῆς ev Σαλαμῖνι ναυμαχίας, 
ten years before the battle of Salamis. | ᾿ 


3. The dative sometimes denotes the agent with passive 
verbs, especially with the perfect and pluperfect. £.g. 


Τοῦτο ἤδη σοι πέπρακται, this has now been done by you; ἐπειδὴ 
παρεσκεύαστο τοῖς Κορινθίοις, when preparation had been made by the 
Corinthians (when the Corinthians had their preparation made). 

Here there seems to be a reference to the agent’s interest in the 
result of the completed action expressed by the perfect and plu- 
perfect. With other tenses, the agent is regularly expressed by 
ὑπό, &c. and the genitive (ὃ 197, 1); rarely by the dative, except in 
poetry. 


8 189.] - DATIVE. . - 235 


4, With the verbal adjective in -réos, in its personal 
(passive) construction, the agent is expressed by the 
dative; in its impersonal (active) construction, by the 
dative or the accusative. See § 281. 


5. The dative is used to denote that by which any 
person or thing is accompanied. E.g. 


Ἦλθον of Πέρσαι παμπληθεῖ στόλῳ, the Persians came with an 
army in full force; ἡμεῖς καὶ ἵπποις τοῖς δυνατωτάτοις καὶ ἀνδράσι 
πορευώμεθα, let us march both with the strongest horses and with men; 
οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι τῷ τε κατὰ γῆν στρατῷ προσέβαλλον τῷ τειχίσματι καὶ 
ταῖς ναυσίν, the Lacedaemonians attacked the wall both with their land 
army and with their ships. 

This dative is used chiefly in reference to military forces, and is 
originally connected with the dative of means or instrument. The 
last example might be placed equally well under § 188, 1. 


Nore. This dative sometimes takes the dative of αὐτός for 
emphasis; as μίαν (ναῦν) αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσιν εἷλον, they took one 
(ship) men and all (8 145, 1, Note). Here the instrumental force 
disappears, and the dative may refer to any class of persons or 
things: thus δένδρεα αὐτῇσιν ῥίζῃσι, trees with their very roots.. Hom. 


Dative of Time. 


§ 189, The dative without a preposition often denotes 
time when. ‘This is confined chiefly to nouns denoting 
day, night, month, or year, and to names of festivals. E.g. 


Τῇ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἀπέθανεν, he died on the same day; “Eppat μιᾷ νυκτὶ 
of πλεῖστοι περιεκόπησαν, the most of the Hermae were mutilated in one 
night ; οἱ Σάμιοι ἐξεπολιορκήθησαν ἐνάτῳ μηνί, the Samians were 
taken by siege in the ninth month; τετάρτῳ ἔτει ξυνέβησαν, they came 
to terms in the fourth year; ὡσπερεὶ Ceo pohopiors νηστεύομεν, we 
fast as if it were on the Thesmophoria. So τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ (sc. ἡμέρᾳ), 
on the following day, and δευτέρᾳ, τρίτῃ. on the second, third, &c., im 
giving the day of the month (§ 139, 1, Note). 


Notre 1, Even the words mentioned, except names of festivals, 
generally take ἐν when no adjective word is joined with them. 
Thus ἐν νυκτί, at night (rarely, in poetry, νυκτί), but μιᾷ νυκτί, in one 
night. 


Nore 2. A few expressions occur like ὑστέρῳ χρόνῳ, in after 
time; χειμῶνος ὥρᾳ, in the winter season ; νουμηνίᾳ (new-moon day), on 
the first of the month; and others in poetry. 


286 SYNTAX. | [§ 190. 


Dative of Place (Poetic). 


§ 190, In poetry, the dative without a preposition 
often denotes the place where. E.g. 


Ἑλλάδι ναίων, dwelling in Hellas ; αἰθέρι ναίων, dwelling in 
heaven; οὔρεσι, on the mountains; τόξ᾽ ὦὥμοισιν ἔχων, having the 
bow on his shoulders; μίμνει ἀγρῷ, he remains in the country. Hom. 
Ἧσθαι δόμοις, to sit at home. Aesch. Νῦν ἀγροῖσι τυγχάνει, now 
he happens to be in the country. Soph. 


Nore 1. In prose, the dative of place is chiefly confined to the 
names of Attic demes; as ἡ Μαραθῶνι μάχη, the battle at Marathon; 
but ἐν ᾿Αθήναις. Still some.exceptions occur. 


Note 2. Some adverbs of place are really local datives; as 
ταύτῃ, τῇδε, here; οἴκοι, at home; κύκλῳ, ina circle, all around. See 


§ 61, N. 2. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


§ 191. The prepositions were originally adverbs, and it is 
chiefly as such that they appear in composition with verbs. 
They are used also as independent words, to connect nouns 
(or words used as nouns) with other parts of the sentence. 

Besides the prepositions properly so called, there are certain 
adverbs used in the same way, which cannot be compounded 
with verbs: these are called improper prepositions, and are 
ἄνευ, ἄτερ, ἄχρι, μέχρι, μεταξύ, ἕνεκα, πλήν, ὧς. All of these 
take the genitive, except ὡς, which takes the accusative. 


I. Four prepositions take the genitive only: ἀντί, ἀπό, 
ἐκ (ἐξ), πρό, ---- with the improper prepositions ἄνευ, ἄτερ, ἄχρι; 
μέχρι; μεταξύ, ἕνεκα, πλήν. 


1, ἀντί, instead of, for. Original meaning, over against, against. 
In comp.: against, in opposition, in return, instead. 


2. ἀπό (Lat. ab, a, Eng. off), from, off from, away from ; originally (as 
opposed to ἐκ) separated from. 


(a) of PLACE: ἀφ᾽ ἵππου μάχεσθαι, to fight on horseback (from a 
horse). 


(Ὁ) of TIME: ἀπὸ τούτου τοῦ χρόνου, from this time. 
(c) of CAUSE: ἀπὸ στάσεων ἐκπίπτειν, to be driven out by factions. 
In come.: from, away, off, in return, ' 


§ 191.] PREPOSITIONS. wie, 237 


3. ἐκ or ἐξ (§ 18, 2; Lat. e, ex), from, out of ; originally (as opposed to 
até) from within. 
(a) of PLACE: ἐκ Σπάρτης φεύγει, he is banished from Sparta. 
(Ὁ) of TIME: ἐκ παλαιοτάτου, from the most ancient time. 


(c) of ORIGIN: ὄναρ ἐκ Διός ἐστιν, the dream comes from Zeus. So 
also with passive verbs (instead of ὑπό with gen.): τιμᾶσθαι 
ἔκ twos, to be honored by some one (the agent viewed as the 
source). 


ΙΝ compP.: out, from, away, off. 


4. πρό (Lat. pro), before: 
(a) of PLACE: πρὸ θυρῶν, before the door. 
(Ὁ) of TIME: πρὸ τῆς μάχης, before the battle. 
(c) of PREFERENCE: πρὸ τούτων, in preference to this. 
(d) of PROTECTION: πρὸ παίδων μάχεσθαι, to fight for one 8 children. 
In comp.: before, forward, forth. 


ὅ. So ἄνευ, ἄτερ, without ; ἄχρι, μέχρι, until; μεταξύ, between; ἕνεκα, 
on account of ; πλήν, except. 


II. Two take the dative only: ἐν and σύν. 


1. ἐν, in, equivalent to Lat. in with the ablative : 


(a) of PLACE: ἐν Σπάρτῃ, in Sparta ;—with a word implying 
number, among: ἐν δήμῳ λέγειν, to speak (among) before the 
people. 

(Ὁ) of TIME: ἐν τούτῳ τῷ ἔτει, in this year. 

. In comp.: in, on, at. 


2. σύν or ξύν (Lat. eum), with, i.e. in company with or by aid of. 
In comP.: with, together. 


III. One takes the accusative only: εἰς or ἐς»: —with the 
improper preposition ὡς. / 


1. εἰς or és, into, to; originally {as opposed to ἐκ) to within (Lat. in with 
the accusative or inter): 


(a) of PLACE: ἔφυγον els Μέγαρα, they fled into Magers: 


(Ὁ) of TIME: els νύκτα, (to) till night ; els τὸν ἅπαντα χρόνον, for all 
time. 

(c) of NUMBER and MEASURE: εἰς διακοσίους, (amounting) to two 
hundred ; εἰς δύναμιν, up to one’s power. 

(α) of PURPOSE or REFERENCE: χρήματα ἀναλίσκειν εἰς τὸν πόλεμον, 
to spend money on the war ; χρήσιμος εἴς τι, useful for any- 
thing. 

In comp.: into, in, to. 


2. ὡς, to, only with persons : εἰσιέναι ὥς τινα, to go in to (visit) any one. 


238 SYNTAX. [8 191. 


IV. Three take the genitive and accusative: διά, κατά, ὑπέρ. 


1. διά, through (Lat. di-, dis-). 

(1) with the GENITIVE : 
(a) of PLACE: δι’ ἀσπίδος ἦλθεν, tt went through a shield. 
(6) of TIME: διὰ νυκτός, through the night. 
(Ὁ of MEANS: 60’ ἑρμηνέως λέγειν, to speak through an interpreter. 
(ὦ) in various phrases like δι’ οἴκτου ἔχειν, to pity ; διὰ φιλίας ἱέναι, 

to be in friendship (with one). 
(2) with the ACCUSATIVE, on account of, by reason of: δι ᾿Αθήνην, by 
help of Athena; διὰ τοῦτο, on this account. 
In comp.: through, also apart (Lat. di-, dis-). 


2. κατά (cf. adverb κάτω, below), originally down (opposed to ἀνά). 
(1) with the GENITIVE: 


(a) ps JSrom: ἅλλεσθαι κατὰ τῆς πέτρας, to leap down from the 
rock. 


(Ὁ) down upon: κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς καταχεῖν, to pour down upon the 
head ; also against, under, concerning. 


(2) with the AccUSATIVE, down along ; of motion over, through, among, 
into, against ; also according to, concerning. 


(a) of PLACE: κατὰ ῥοῦν, down stream; κατὰ γῆν καὶ θάλασσαν, 
by land and by sea. 


(Ὁ) of TIME: κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον, during (at the time of) the war. 
(c) DISTRIBUTIVELY: κατὰ τρεῖς, by threes, three by three; καθ᾽ 
ἡμέραν, day by day, daily. 
In compP.: down, against. 
3. ὑπέρ, over (Lat. super). 
(1) with the GENITIVE: 


(a) of PLACE: ὑπὲρ τῆς κεφαλῆς, over (his) head; ὑπὲρ τῆς θαλάσσης 
above (away from) the sea. 


(Ὁ) for, in behalf of (opposed to κατά) : μάχεσθαι ὑπέρ τινὸς, to fight 

_for one (originally over him); ὑπὲρ σοῦ δέδοικα, I fear for 

you ; ὑπέρ Twos λέγειν, to speak in place of one ; in the orators 
sometimes concerning (like περί). 


(2) with the accusATIVE, over, beyond, of place and measure. 
In comp.: over, beyond, exceedingly, in behalf of. 


V. One takes the dative and accusative (very rarely the 
genitive): avd. . 
ἀνά (cf. adverb ἄνω, above), originally wp (opposed to κατά). 


(1) with the DATIVE (only Epic and Lyric), wp on: ἀνὰ σκήπτρῳ, on ἃ 
sceptre. : 


§ 191.] PREPOSITIONS. 239 


(2). with the ACcCUSATIVE, up along; and of motion over, through, 
among (cf. κατά). 


(a) of PLACE: ἀνὰ ῥοῦν, up stream ; ἀνὰ στρατόν, through the army 
(Hom.). 
(Ὁ) of TIME: ἀνὰ πᾶσαν τὴν ἡμέραν, all through the day. : 
(c) In DISTRIBUTIVE expressions: ἀνὰ τέτταρας, by fours. 
In comp.: up, back, again. 


(3) with the GENITIVE, only in the Homeric expression, ἀνὰ νηὸς βαίνειν, 
to go on board ship. 


VI. Seven take the genitive, dative, and accusative: ἀμφί, 
ἐπί, μετά, παρά, περί, πρός, ὑπό. 


1. ἀμφί (Lat. amb-), connected with ἄμφω, both ; Signy on both 
sides of ; hence about. 


(1) with the GENITIVE (rare in prose), about, concerning. 


(2) with the DATIVE (only Ionic and poetic), about; hence concerning, 
on account of. 

(8) with the AccusATIVE, about, near, of place, time, number, ete. : 
ἀμφ᾽ dra, by the sea; ἀμφὶ δείλην, near evening ; ἀμφὶ τὰ ἑξήκοντα, 
about sixty (circiter sexaginta); so ἀμφί τι ἔχειν, to be (busy) about 
a thing. 


In comp.: about, on both sides. 
2. ἐπί, on, upon. 
(1) with the GENITIVE: - 


(a) of PLACE: ἐπὶ πύργου, on a tower ; sometimes towards: ἐπὶ 
Σάμου πλεῖν, to satl (wpon) towards Samos. 


(Ὁ) of TIME: ἐφ᾽ ἡμῶν, in our time. 
(2) with the DATIVE: 


(a) of PLACE: ἐπὶ τῇ θαλάσσῃ οἰκεῖν, to live upon (by) the sea. 

(0) of TIME: ἐπὶ τῷ σημείῳ, upon the signal; ἐπὶ τούτοις, thereupon. 

(c) Likewise over, for, at, in addition to, on account of, tn the power 
of ; and in many other relations: see the Lexicon. 


(8) with the ACOUSATIVE, originally wp to; then to, towards, against: 
ἀναβαίνειν ἐφ᾽ ἵππον, to mount a horse ; ἐπὶ δεξιά, to the right. 


In comp.: upon, over, after, toward, to, for, at, against, besides. 
3. μετά (akin to μέσος, Lat. medius), amid, among. 


(1) with the GENITIVE, with, on the side of: μετὰ τῶν συμμάχων τοῖς 
πολεμίοις μάχεσθαι, with og help of) the allies to fight with 
(against) the enemy (§ 186, N. 1). 


(2) with the DATIVE (poetic, chiefly Epic), among. | 


240 SYNTAX. ες [8191.᾿ 


. (8) with the ACCUSATIVE: 
(a) into (the midst 97), after (in quest of), for (poetic). 


(0) generally after, next to: μετὰ τὸν πόλεμον, after the war; μέγι- 
στος μετὰ τὸν Ἴστρον, the largest (river) next to the Ister. 


In comP.: with (of sharing), among, after (in quest of): it also denotes 
change, as in peravoéie, change one’s mind, repent. — 


4. παρά, by, near, alongside of (see Note 1). 
(1) with the GENITIVE, from beside, from. 
(2) with the DATIVE, near: παρὰ Κύρῳ ὄντες, being near Cyrus. 


(8) with the AccUSATIVE, fo (a place) near, to; also by the side of, beyond 
or beside, except, along with, because of. 
(a) of PLACE: ἀφικνεῖται παρὰ Κῦρον, he comes to. Cyrus. 
(Ὁ) of TIME: παρὰ πάντα τὸν χρόνον, throughout the whole time. 
(ὃ of CAUSE: παρὰ τὴν ἡμετέραν ἀμέλειαν, on account of our neglect. 


(d) with idea of beyond or beside, and except: οὐκ ἔστι παρὰ ταῦτα 
ἄλλα, there are no others besides these ; παρὰ τὸν νόμον, con- 
trary to the law (properly beyond it). 


In comp.: beside, along by, hitherward, wrongly (beside the mark), over 
(as in overstep). 


5. περί, around (on all sides). 


(1) with the GrnITIVE, about, concerning (Lat. de): περὶ πατρὸς ἐρέσθαι, 
to inquire about his father; also (poetic) above; κρατερὸς περὶ 
πάντων, nighty above all. 


(2) with the DATIVE, about, around, concerning, seldom in Attic prose. 


(3) with the ACCUSATIVE, nearly the same as ἀμφί. 
In comp.: around, about, exceedingly. 


6. πρός, at or by (in front of), akin to πρό. 
(1) with the GENITIVE: 


- (a) in front of, looking towards : πρὸς Θράκης κεῖσθαι, to be situated 
over against Thrace ;—in swearing: πρὸς θεῶν, before (by) 
the Gods. Sometimes pertaining to (as character): ἢ κάρτα 
πρὸς γυναικός ἐστιν, swrely it is very like a woman. 

(Ὁ) ibs (properly from before): τιμὴν πρὸς Ζηνὸς ἔχοντες, having 

honor from Zeus ; sometimes with passive verbs (like ὑπό): 
πρός τινος φιλεῖσθαι, to be loved by some one. 


(2) with the DATIVE: 


(a) at: ὁ Κῦρος ἣν πρὸς Βαβυλῶνι, Cyrus was at Babylon. — 
(Ὁ) in addition to: πρὸς τούτοις, besides this, furthermore. 


8 191.] PREPOSITIONS. 241 


(3) with the ACCUSATIVE: 
(a) to: ἰέναι πρὸς "Ολυμπον, to go to Olympus. 

(Ὁ) towards : πρὸς Βορρᾶν, towards the North ; so of persons: πιστῶς 
διακεῖσθαι πρός twa, to be faithfully disposed towards one ; 
πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἡσυχίαν εἶχον, they kept the peace towards one 
another. 

(c) with a view to, in reference to: πρὸς τί με ταῦτ᾽ ἐρωτᾷς, (to what 
end) for what do you ask me this? πρὸς τὴν δύναμιν, according 
to one’s power. 

In comr.: to, towards, against, besides. 
7. ὑπό, under (Lat. sub), by. 
(1) with the GENITIVE : 

(a) of PLACE: ὑπὸ γῆς, under the earth ; sometimes from under. 

(Ὁ) to denote the AGENT with passive verbs: τιμᾶσθαι ὑπὸ τῶν πολι- 
τῶν, to be honored by the citizens. 

(c) of CAUSE: ὑπὸ δέους, through fear ; ὑφ᾽ Hdovijs,through pleasure. 


(2) with the DATIVE (especially poetic): θανεῖν ὑπ᾽ ᾿Ιλίῳ, to perish under 
(the walls of) Ilium. 


(3) with the ACCUSATIVE : 
(a) of PLACE, under, properly to (a place) under. 
(Ὁ) of TIME, towards (entering into): ὑπὸ νύκτα, just before night 
(Lat. sub noctem): sometimes during. 
In comp.: under, secretly, slightly, gradually. 


Note 1. Further details of the meaning and use of the prepo- 
sitions must be learned by practice and from the Lexicon. In 
general, the accusative is the case used with prepositions to denote 
that towards which, over which, along which, or upon which motion . 
takes place; the genitive, to denote that from which anything pro- 
ceeds; the dative, to denote that in which anything takes place. 
It will be noticed how the peculiar meaning of each case often 
modifies the expression by which we translate a given preposition: 
thus παρά means near, alongside of ; and we have παρὰ τοῦ βασι- 
λέως; from the neighborhood of the king; παρὰ τῷ βασιλεῖ, in the 
neighborhood of the king; mapa τὸν βασιλέα, into the neighborhood 
of the king. 


Note 2. The original adverbial use of the prepositions some- 
times appears when they are used without a noun; this occurs 
especially in the older Greek, seldom in Attic prose. Thus περί; 
-roundabout or exceedingly, in Homer; πρὸς δέ or καὶ πρός, and besides, 


eA in Herodotus. 


Norte 8. The preposition of a compound verb may also stand 
separately, in which case its adverbial force plainly appears; as ἐπὶ 
κνέφας ἦλθε (κνέφας ἐπῆλθε), darkness came on; ἡμῖν ἀπὸ λοιγὸν 
ἀμῦναι (ἀπαμῦναι), to ward off destruction from us. 

This is called tmesis, and is found chiefly in Homer. 


16 


εἴ 


242 SYNTAX. | [§ 192. 


Notr 4. A preposition sometimes follows its case, or a verb to 


. which it belongs; as νεῶν ἄπο, παιδὸς πέρι; ὀλέσας ἄπο (for ἀπολέ- 
σας). For the accent see § 23, 2. 


Nore 5. A few prepositions are used adverbially with a verb 
understood; as πάρα for πάρεστι, ἔπι and μέτα (in Homer) for 
ἔπεστι and μέτεστι. So ἔνε for ἔνεστι, and ἄνα, up! for ἀνάστα (ἀνά- 
στηθι). For the accent see ὃ 29, 2. 


Note 6. Sometimes εἰς with the accusative or ἐκ or ἀπό with the 
genitive is used in expressions which themselves imply no motion, 
with reference to some motion implied or expressed in the context; 
as ai ξύνοδοι ἐς TO ἱερὸν ἐγίγνοντο, the synods were held in the temple 
(lit. into the temple, involving the idea of going into the temple to 
hold the synods); τοῖς ἐκ Πύλου ληφθεῖσι (ἐοικότες), like those cap- 
tured (in Pylos, and brought home) from Pylos, i.e. the captives 
from Pylos; διήρπαστο καὶ αὐτὰ τὰ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν ξύλα, even the 
very timbers in the houses (lit. from the houses) had been stolen. So 
év with the dative sometimes occurs with verbs of motion, referring 
to rest which follows the motion; as ἐν τῷ ποταμῷ ἔπεσον, they fell 
(into and remained) in the river; so ἐν γούνασι πίπτειν, to fall on 
one’s knees. These are instances of what is called the constructio 
praegnans. 


§ 192. (Recapitulation.) 1. The following prepositions 
take the genitive: ἀμφί, ἀντί, ἀπό, διά, ἐκ (ἐξ). ἐπί, κατά, μετά, 
παρά, περί, πρό, πρός, ὑπέρ, ὑπό, ----ἴ,6. all except εἰς, ἐν, σύν, ἀνά. 
Also the improper prepositions ἄνευ, ἄτερ, ἄχρι, μέχρι, μεταξύ, 
. ἕνεκα, πλήν. 

2. The following take the dative: ἀμφί, ἀνά, ἐν, ἐπί, μετά, 
παρά, περί, πρός, σύν, ὑπό. : 

8. The following take the accusative: ἀμφί, ἀνά, διά, εἰς (ἐς), 
ἐπί, κατά, μετά, παρά, περί, πρός, ὑπέρ, ὑπό, ---- ἰ.6. all except 
ἀντί, ἀπό, ἐκ, ἐν, πρό, σύν. So also ὡς (with words denoting 
persons). 


§ 193. A preposition is often followed by its own case 
when it is part of a compound verb. Hg. 


Παρεκομίζοντο τὴν ᾿Ιταλίαν, they sailed along the coast of Italy; 
᾿ἐσῆλθέ pe, it occurred to me; ἡ μήτηρ συνέπραττεν αὐτῷ ταῦτα. his 
mother assisted him in this (i.e. ἔπραττε. σὺν αὐτῷ). For examples of 
the genitive, see § 177; for those of the dative, see § 187. 


§ 196.] ADVERBS. - | 248 


ADVERBS. 


§ 194. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and other 
adverbs. E.g. 


Οὕτως εἶπεν, thus he spoke; ὡς δύναμαι, as I am able; πρῶτον 
ἀπῆλθε, he first went away ; τὸ ἀλη θῶς κακόν, that which is truly evil ; 
μᾶλλον πρεπόντως ἠμφιεσμένη, more becomingly dressed. 


For adjectives used as adverbs, see § 138, N. 7. For adverbs preceded 
by the article, and qualifying a noun like adjectives, see ὃ 141, Ν. 8. 
For adverbs with the genitive or dative, see §§ 168 (with N..3); 182, 2; 
185; 186. For adverbs as prepositions, see ὃ 191. For negative adverbs, 
see ὃ 283. 


THE VERB. 
VOICES. 


Active. 


§ 195. In the active voice the subject is represented 
as acting; as τρέπω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς, I turn my eyes; ὁ 
πατὴρ φιλεῖ τὸν παΐδα, the father loves the child; ὁ ἵππος 
τρέχει, the horse runs. 


Note 1. The form of the active voice includes most intransitive 
verbs; as τρέχω, run. On the other hand, the form of the middle 
or passive voice includes many deponent verbs which are active and 
transitive in meaning; as βούλομαι τοῦτο, J want this. Some transi- 
tive verbs have certain intransitive tenses; as ἕστηκα, I stand, ἔστην, 
1 stood, from torn, place. Such tenses are said to have a middle, 
or sometimes even a passive, meaning. 


Note 2. The same verb may be both transitive and intransi- 
tive; as ἐλαύνω, drive (trans. or intrans.) or march. The intransi- 
tive use sometimes arose from the omission of a familiar object; as 
ἐλαύνειν (ἴππον OY ἅρμα), τελευτᾶν (τὸν βίον), to end (life) or to die. 
Compare the English verbs drive, turn, move, &c. 


Passive. 


§ 196. In the passive voice the subject is represented 
as acted upon; aS ὁ παῖς ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς φιλεῖται, the 
child is loved by the father. 


24400 SYNTAX. /T§ 197. 


§ 197. 1. The object of the active becomes the subject 
of the passive. The subject of the active, the agent, is 
generally expressed by ὑπό and the genitive in the pas- 
sive construction. (See § 196 and the example.) 


Even a genitive or dative used as a direct object can become the 
subject of the passive ; as καταφρονεῖται ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ, he is despised by me 
(cf. καταφρονῶ αὐτοῦ, ὃ 171, 2); πιστεύεται ὑπὸ τῶν ἀρχομένων, he is 


“ 


trusted by his subjects (cf. πιστεύουσιν αὐτῷ, ὃ 184, 2); so ἀρχόμενος, 


t 


ruled over, is passive of ἄρχω, rule (§ 171, 3). 


2 
Note 1. Other prepositions than ὑπό with the genitive of the 
agent, though used in poetry, are not common in Attic prose. Such 
are παρά, πρός, ἐκ, and ἀπό. 


Note 2. When the active is followed by two accusatives, or by 
an accusative of a thing and a dative of a person, the case denoting 
a person is generally made the subject-of the passive, and the other 
(an accusative) remains unchanged. L£.g. 

Οὐδὲν ἄλλο διδάσκεται ἅνθρωπος, the man is taught nothing else (in 
the active οὐδὲν ἄλλο διδάσκουσι τὸν ἄνθρωπον). “"AdXo τι μεῖζον 
ἐπιταχθήσεσθε, you will have some other greater command imposed on 
you (active, ἄλλο τι μεῖζον ὑμῖν ἐπιτάξουσιν, they will impose some other 
greater command on you). Οἱ ἐπιτετραμμένοι τὴν φυλακήν, those to 
whom the guard has been intrusted (active, ἐπιτρέπειν τὴν φυλακὴν τού- 
τοις). Διφθέραν ἐνημμένος, clad in a leathern jerkin (active, ἐνάπτειν 
τί τινι, to fit a thing on one). So ἐκκόπτεσθαι τὸν ὀφθαλμόν, to have 
his eye cut out, and ἀποτέμνεσθαι τὴν κεφαλήν, to have his head cut off, 
&c., from possible active constructions ἐκκόπτειν τί τινι, and ἀποτέ- 
μνειν τί τινι (§ 184, 8, N. 4). This construction has nothing to do 
with that of § 160. : 

The first two examples are cases of the cognate accusative of the 
thing retained with the passive, while the accusative or dative of 
the person is made the subject (§ 159, Notes 2 and 4). 


2. The perfect and pluperfect passive generally take the 
AMative of the agent (§ 188, 3). 

The personal verbal in -réos takes the dative, the imper- 
sonal in -réoy the dative or accusative, of the agent (§ 188, 4). 


- §198. The subject of the passive may be a neuter 
adjective which represents a cognate accusative of the 
active construction; or the passive may be used imper- 
sonally, the subject being implied in the idea of the verb 
itself. Eig. | 


§ 199.] - THE VERB. — VOICES. sig 245 


᾿Ασεβεῖται οὐδέν, no act of impiety is committed (act. ἀσεβεῖν οὐδέν, 
§ 159, N. 2). So παρεσκεύασται, preparation has been made (it is 
prepared) ; ἁμαρτάνεται, error is committed (it is erred): οἵ. ventum 
est. This occurs chiefly in such participial expressions: as Ta noe- 
Bnpéva, the impious acts which have been committed ; τὰ κινδυνευ- 
θέντα, the risks which were run; ra ἡμαρτημένα, the errors which 
have been made, ὅς. (See § 134, N.1,d). Even an intransitive 
verb may thus have a passive voice. 


Middle. 


§ 199. In the middle voice the subject is represented 
as acting upon himself, or in some manner which concerns 
himself. 


1. As acting on himself: ἐτράποντο πρὸς λῃστείαν, 
they turned themselves to piracy. This, though the most 
natural, is the least common use of the middle. 

2. As acting for himself or with reference to himself: 
ὁ δῆμος τίθεται νόμους, the people make laws for them- 
selves, whereas τίθησι νόμους would properly be said of a 
lawgiver; τοῦτον μεταπέμπομαι, I send for him (to come 
to me); ἀπεπέμπετο αὐτούς, he dismissed them. 

8. As acting on an object which be/ong's to himself: 
ἦλθε λυσόμενος θύγατρα, he came to ransom his (own) 
daughter. Hom. 


Remark. The last two uses may be united in one verb, as in 
the last example. 


Note 1. Often the middle expresses no more than is implied in 
the active; thus τρόπαιον ἵστασθαι, to raise a trophy for themselves, 
generally adds nothing but the expression to what is implied in 
τρόπαιον ἱστάναι, to raise a trophy; and either form can be used. 
The middle sometimes appears not to differ at all from the active 
in meaning; as the poetic idéc0a,:to see, and ἰδεῖν. 


Note 2. The middle sometimes has a causative, San as 
ἐδιδαξάμην σε, Thad you taught.” ” 

This gives rise to some special uses of the middle; as in δανείζω, 
lend, δανείζομαι, borrow (cause somebody to lend to one’s self). So 
μισθῶ, let, μισθοῦμαι, hire.(cause to be let to one’s self); I let myself 
for pay 15 ἐμαυτὸν μισθῶ.. 


Note 3. The middle of certain verbs is πρύμο in its meaning. 
Thus, ἀποδίδωμι, give back, ἀποδίδομαι, sell; γράφω, write or propose 


946 SYNTAX. [$ 200. 


a vote, γράφομαι, indict; τιμωρῶ τινι, I avenge a person, τιμωροῦμαί 
τινα, J avenge myself on a person or I punish a person; Gute, fasten, 
ἅπτομαι, cling to (faslen myself to); so ἔχομαι, hold to. 

The passive of some of these verbs is used as a passive to both 
active and middle; thus γραφῆναι can mean either 10 be written or 
to be indicted. | 


Note 4. The future middle of some verbs has a passive sense; 
as ἀδικῶ, wrong, ἀδικήσομαι, I shall be wronged. 


TENSES. 


I, TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 


§ 200. The tenses of the indicative express action as 
follows : — 


PRESENT, continued or repeated present action: γράφω, 
Lam writing or I write (habitually). 

IMPERFECT, continued or repeated past action: ἔγραφον, 
I was writing or I used to write. : 

PerFEcT, action finished in present time: γέγραφα, J have 
written. | 

PLUPERFECT, action finished in past time: ἐγεγράφειν, J had 
written. — 

Aorist, simple past action (N. 5): ἔγραψα, 7 wrote. 

Futvure, future action: γράψω, I shall write or 1 shall be 
writing. 

Future Perrect, action to be finished in future time : 
γεγράψεται, τέ will have been writien. 

Nore 1. Jn narration, the present is sometimes used vividly for 
the aorist; as πορεύεται πρὸς βασιλέα ἡ ἐδύνατο τάχιστα, he goes 
(went) to the king as fast as he could. 

For the present expressing a general truth, see § 205, 1. 


Notre 2. The present and especially the imperfect often express 
an attempted action; as πείθουσιν ὑμᾶς, they are trying to persuade 
you; ᾿Αλόννησον ἐδίδου, he offered (tricd to give) Halonnesus; ἃ 
ἐπράσσετο οὐκ ἐγένετο, what was attempted did not happen. 


Note 3. (a) The presents ἥκω, Jam come, and οἴχομαι, Iam 


gone, have the force of perfects; the imperfects having the force of 
pluperfects. (Cf. N. 6.) 


§ 200.] TENSES. es 


(Ὁ) The present εἶμι, I am going, has a future sense, and is used 
as a future of ἔρχομαι, ἐλεύσομαι not being ordinarily used in Attic 
prose. ; 


Note 4. The present with πάλαι or any other expression of 
past time has the force of a present and perfect combined; as 


πάλαι σοι τοῦτο λέγω, L have long been telling you this (which I now 
tell). 


Note 5. (a) The aorist takes its name (ἀόριστος, unlimited, 
unqualified) from its denoting a simple past occurrence, with none 
of the limitations (ὅροι) as to completion, continuance, repetition, &c. 
which belong to the other past tenses. It corresponds exactly to 
the so-called imperfect in English, whereas the Greek imperfect 
corresponds to the forms J was doing, ἕο. Thus, ἐποίει τοῦτο is 
he was doing this or he did this habitually ; πεποίηκε τοῦτο is he has 
already done this; ἐπεποιήκει τοῦτο is he had already (at some past 
time) done this; but ἐποίησε τοῦτο is simply he did this, without 
qualification of any kind. 

(>) The aorist of verbs which denote a state or condition generally 
expresses the entrance into that state or condition; as πλουτῷ, J am © 
rich ; ἐπλούτουν, I was rich ; ἐπλούτησα, I became rich. So ἐβασίλευσε, 
he became king ; ἦρξε, he obtained office. 


(c) The distinction between the imperfect and aorist was some- 
times neglected, especially in the earlier Greek. See βαῖνον and BA 
in 1]. i. 487 and 489; βάλλετο and βάλετο in Ji. 11. 43 and 45; 
ἔλιπεν and λεῖπε, Jl. iil. 106 and 107. 


Note 6. Some perfects have a present meaning; as θνήσκειν, 
to die, τεθνηκέναι, to be dead; γίγνεσθαι, to become, yeyovevat, 
to be; μιμνήσκειν, to remind, μεμνῆσθαι, to remember; καλεῖν, to call, 
κεκλῆσθαι, to be called. So οἶδα, I know, novi. This is usually 
explained by the meaning of the verb. 

In such verbs the pluperfect has the force of an imperfect; as 
ἤδειν, 1 knew (§ 127). (Cf. N. 3, a.) 


Nots 7. The perfect sometimes refers vividly to the future; 
as εἴ pe αἰσθήσεται ὄλωλα, if he shall perceive me, I am ruined © 
(perii). So sometimes the present; as ἀπόλλυμαι, I perish! (for 
1 shall perish). 


Nore 8. The second person of the future may express a per- 
mission, or even a command ; as πράξεις οἷον ἂν θέλῃς, you may act 
as you please; πάντως δὲ τοῦτο δράσεις, and by all means do this 
(you shall do this). So in imprecations; as ἀπολεῖσθε, to destruction 
with you! (lit. you shall perish). See § 257, where the future with 
ov μή is explained in this way. ᾿ 


Note 9. The future perfect is sometimes merely an emphatic 
future, denoting that a future act will be immediate or decisive ; as 


248 SYNTAX. (§ 201. 


φράζε καὶ mempagerat, speak, and it shall be (no sooner said than) 
done. Compare the similar use of the perfect infinitive, § 202, 2, N. 2. 


§ 201. The division of the tenses of the indicative 
into primary and secondary (or historical) is explained 

in § 90, 2. 
τς In dependent clauses, when the construction allows 
both subjunctive and optative, or both indicative and 
optative, the subjunctive or indicative regularly follows 
primary tenses, and the optative follows secondary tenses. 
ΗΕ. 2. 


ς 


Πράττουσιν ἃ ἂν βούλωνται, they do whatever they please ; 
ἔπραττον ἃ βούλοιντο, they did whatever they pleased. Λέγουσιν 
ὅτι τοῦτο βούλονται, they say that they wish for this; ἔλεξαν ὅτι 
τοῦτο βούλοιντο, they said that they wished for this. 

These constructions will be explained hereafter (§§ 233, 243). 


_ ‘Remark. The gnomic aorist is a primary tense, as it refers to 
present time (§ 205, 2); and the historic present is secondary, as it 
refers to past time (§ 200, N. 1). 


Notre 1. The only exception to this principle occurs in indirect 
discourse, where the form of the direct discourse can always be re- 
tained, even after secondary tenses. See § 242, § 248, Note, § 216, 2. 


Nore 2. The distinction into primary and secondary tenses 
extends to the dependent moods only where the tenses keep the 
same distinction of time which they have in the indicative, as in the 
optative and infinitive of indirect discourse (§ 203). 

An optative of future time generally assimilates a dependent 
conditional relative clause or protasis to the optative when it might 
otherwise be in the subjunctive: thus we should generally have 
πράττοιεν ἂν ἃ βούλοιντο, they would do whatever they (might please) 
pleased (see the first example under § 201). See 8 235, 1. -Such an 
optative seidom assimilates the subjunctive or indicative of a final 
or object clause (§ 215) in prose; but oftener in poetry. It very 
rarely assimilates an indicative of indirect discourse, although it 
may assimilate an interrogative subjunctive (§ 244, N. 1). 


II. TENSES OF THE DEPENDENT MOODS. 
A. Not in Indirect Discourse. 


A 


Ὲ § 202. In the subjunctive and imperative, and also in the 
optative and infinitive when they are not in indirect discourse 
(§ 203), the tenses chiefly used are the present and aorist. 


8 202.] TENSES. 249. 


1. These tenses here differ only in this, that the present 
denotes a continued or repeated action, while the aorist denotes 
a simple occurrence of the action, the time of both being pre- 
cisely the same. .g. 


᾿Ἐὰν ποιῇ τοῦτο, if he shall do this (habitually), ἐὰν ποιήσῃ τοῦτο, 
(simply) if he shall do this; εἰ ποιοίη τοῦτο, if he should do this 
(habitually), εἰ ποιήσειε τοῦτο, (simply) if he should do this; ποίει 

τοῦτο, do this (habitually), ποίησον τοῦτο, (simply) do this. Οὕτω 
νικήσαιμί τ᾽ ἐγὼ καὶ νομιζδίμην σοφός, on this condition may I 
gain the victory (aor.) and be considered (pres.) wise. Βούλεται τοῦτο 
ποιεῖν, he wishes to do this (habitually); βούλεται τοῦτο ποιῆσαι; 
(simply) he wishes to do this. 

This is a distinction entirely unknown to the Latin, which has. 
(for example) only one form, si faciat, corresponding to εἰ ποιοίη 
and εἰ ποιήσειεν. Even the Greek does not always regard it; and 
in many cases it is indifferent which tense is used. 


2. The perfect, which seldom occurs in these constructions, 
represents an action as finished at the time at which the pres- 
ent would represent it as going on. L.g. 


Δέδοικα μὴ λήθην πεποιή κῃ; I fear lest it may prove to have caused 
Sorgetfulness (μὴ ποιῇ would mean lest it may cause). . Mndevi Bon- 
θεῖν ὃς μὴ πρότερος βεβοη θηκὼς ὑμῖν 7, to help no one who shall not 
previously have helped you (és ἂν μὴ . . . . βοηθῇ would mean who 
shall not previously help you). Οὐκ ἂν διὰ τοῦτό γ᾽ εἶεν οὐκ εὐθὺς δεδω- 
κότες, they would not (on enquiry) prove to have failed to pay imme- 
diately on this account (with διδοῖεν this would mean they would not 
fail to pay). Οὐ βουλεύεσθαι ἔτι Spa, ἀλλὰ βεβουλεῦσθαι, it 
is no longer time to be deliberating, but (it is time) to have finished 
deliberating. 


Nott 1. The perfect imperative generally expresses a command 
that something shall be decisive and permanent; as ταῦτα εἰρήσθω, 
let this have been said (i.e. let what has been said be final), or let this 
(which follows) be said once for all; μέχρι τοῦδε ὡρίσθω ὑμῶν ἡ Bpa- 
δυτής, at this point let the limit of your sluggishness be fixed. ‘This 
is confined to the third person singular passive; the rare second 
person singular middle being merely emphatic. The active is used 
only when the perfect has a present meaning (§ 200, N. 6). 


Note 2. The perfect infinitive sometimes expresses decision or 
permanence (like the imperative, N. 1), and sometimes it is merely 
more emphatic than the present; as εἶπον τὴν θύραν κεκλεῖσθαι, they 
ordered the gate to be shut (and kept so); ἤλαυνεν ἐπὶ τοὺς Μένωνος, 
ὥστ᾽ ἐκείνους ἐκπεπλῆχθαι καὶ τρέχειν ἐπὶ τὰ ὅπλα, so that they were 
(once for all) thoroughly frightened and ran to arms. The regular 


250 SYNTAX. .  [§ 208. 


meaning of this tense, when it is not in indirect discourse, is that 
given in § 202, 2. See ὃ 95, 1, Note. Ἷ 


8. (a) The future infinitive is regularly used only to 
represent the future indicative in indirect discourse (§ 203). 


(6) It occurs occasionally in other constructions, in place 
of the regular present or aorist, to make more emphatic 
a future idea which the infinitive receives from the con- . 
text. Lg. 


᾿Ἐδεήθησαν τῶν Μεγαρέων ναυσὶ σφᾶς ξυμπροπέμψειν, they asked 
the Megarians to escort them with ships; οὐκ ἀποκωλύσειν δυνατοὶ 
ὄντες, not being able to prevent. So rarely after ὥστε, and to express 
a purpose. In all these constructions the future is strictly excep- 
tional, the only regular forms of the infinitive out of indirect dis- 
course being the present and aorist, except in the few cases in which 
the perfect is used (§ 202, 2) and in the case mentioned in the 
following Note. See also § 203, N. 2. | 


Notre. One regular exception to the principle just stated is 
found in the periphrastic future (§ 118, 6), where the present and 
future infinitives with μέλλω are equally common, but the aorist 
seldom occurs. 


4. The future optative is used only in indirect discourse 
and constructions which involve this (§ 203, N. 3). 


B. In Indirect Discourse. 


Remark. The term indirect discourse includes all clauses de- 

pending on a verb of saying or thinking which contain the thoughts 
or words of any person stated indirectly, i.e. incorporated into the 
general structure of the sentence. It includes of course all indirect 
quotations and questions. 


8 208, When the optative and infinitive stand in indirect 
discourse, each tense represents the corresponding tense of the 
same verb in direct discourse. £.g. 


Ἔλεγεν ὅτι ypador, he said that he was writing (he said γράφω, I 
am writing); ἔλεγεν ὅτι γράψοι, he said that he would write (he said 
γράψω, 1 will write); ἔλεγεν ὅτι γράψειεν, he said that he had 
written (he said ἔγραψα); ἔλεγεν ὅτι γεγραφὼς ety, he said that 
he had already written (he said γέγραφα). “Hpero εἴ τις ἐμοῦ εἴ 
σοφώτερος, he asked whether any one was wiser than I (he aske 
ἔστι τις ;)- : 


§ 203.] : TENSES. λα fh 288 


Φησὶ γράφειν, he says that he is writing (he sayS-ypado); φησὶ 
γράψειν, he says that he will write (γράψω); φησὶ γράψαι, heways 
that he wrote (ἔγραψα); φησὶ γεγραφέναι, he says that he haswritien | |» . 
(γέγραφα). ἌΣ Fs ὃν. ---“ 

Εἶπεν ὅτι ἄνδρα ἄγοι ὃν εἶρξαι δέοι, he said that he was bringing a 
man whom it was necessary to confine (he said ἄνδρα ἄγω ὃν εἶρξαι 
Sei). ᾿Ἐλογίζοντο ὡς, εἰ μὴ μάχοιντο, ἀποστήσοιντο ai πόλεις, 
they considered that, if they should not fight, the cities would revolt 
(they thought ἐὰν μὴ μαχώμεθα, ἀποστήσονται; if we do not fight, 
they will revolt). 

These constructions will be explained in § 243, § 246, and § 247. 
Here they merely show the different force of the tenses in indirect 
discourse and in other constructions. Compare especially the 
difference between φησὶ γράφειν and φησὶ γράψαι under ὃ 203 
with that between βούλεται ποιεῖν and βούλεται ποιῆσαι under 
§ 202. Notice also the same distinction in respect to the present 
and aorist optative. 


Note 1. The present infinitive may represent the imperfect as 
well as the present indicative; as τίνας εὐχὰς ὑπολαμβάνετ᾽ εὔχεσθαι 
τὸν Φίλιππον ὅτ᾽ ἔσπενδεν ; what prayers do you suppose Philip made 
when he was pouring libations? (i.e. τίνας nixero;). The perfect 
infinitive likewise represents both perfect and pluperfect. In such 
cases the time of the infinitive must always be shown by the 
context (as above by ὅτ᾽ ἔσπενδεν). 

τ So rarely the present optative represents the imperfect indicative 
(§ 243, Note 1). See § 204, Note 1. 


Notre 2. Verbs of hoping, expecting, promising, &c. form an in- 
termediate class between verbs which take the infinitive in indirect 
discourse and those which do not (see Rem. before § 203); and they 
allow either the future infinitive (as in § 203) or the present and 
aorist (as in ὃ 202). E.g. 

Ἤλπιζον μάχην ἔσεσθαι, they expected that there would be a battle 
(Thuc.); but ἃ οὔποτε ἤλπισεν παθεῖν, what he never expected to 
suffer (Eur.). Ὑπέσχετό μοι βουλεύσασθαι, and ὑπέσχετο μηχανὴν 
παρέξειν (both in Xen.). 

The construction of indirect discourse (the future) is the more 
common here. In English we can say 1 hope (expect or promise) 
to do this, like ποιεῖν or ποιῆσαι; or L hope I shall do this, like 
ποιήσειν. 


Norte 3. The future optative is never used except as the repre- 
sentative of the future indicative, either in indirect discourse (as 
in the examples under § 203), or in the construction of § 217 (which 
is governed by the principles of indirect discourse). Even here the 
coe indicative 1s generally retained. See § 217, and § 248, 

\ ote. 


252 SYNTAX. | [8 204. 


Ill. TENSES OF THE PARTICIPLE. 


§ 204, The tenses of the participle generally express the 
same time as those of the indicative; but they are present, 
past, or future relatively to the time of the verb with which 
they are connected. £.g. 


“Αμαρτάνει τοῦτο ποιῶν, he errs in doing this; ἡμάρτανε τοῦτο 
ποιῶν, he erred in doing this; ἁμαρτήσεται τοῦτο ποιῶν, he will err in 
doing this. (Here ποιῶν is first present, then past, then future, abso- 
lutely; but always present to the verb of the sentence.) Ταῦτα 
εἰπόντες ἀπῆλθον, having said this, they departed. Οὐ πολλοὶ dai- 
νονται ξυνελθόντες, not many appear to have joined the expedition. 
πήνεσαν τοὺς εἰρηκότας, they praised those who had (already) 
spoken. Τοῦτο ποιήσων ἔρχεται, he is coming to do this; τοῦτο ποιή- 
σων ἦλθεν, he came to do this. ΑΛΔπελθε ταῦτα λαβών, take this and be 
off (λαβών being past to ἄπελθε, but absolutely future). 


Note 1. The present may here also represent the imperfect; as 
οἶδα κἀκείνω σωφρονοῦντε, ἔστε Σωκράτει συνήστην, I know that they 
both were continent as long as they associated with Socrates (i.e. 
ἐσωφρονείτην). See § 208, Note 1. 


Note 2. The aorist participle in certain constructions does not 
denote time past with reference to the leading verb, but expresses a 
simple occurrence without regard to time (like the aorist infinitive in 
§ 202). This is so in the following examples: — 


Ἔτυχεν ἐλθών he happened to come; ἔλαθεν ἐλθών, he came 
secretly; ἔφθη ἐλθών, he came first. (See § 279, 4.) Tepudeiv τὴν 
γῆν τμηθεῖσαν, to allow the land to be ravaged (to see it ravaged). 
(See § 279, 8.) So sometimes when the participle denotes that in 

which the action of the verb consists (δ 277); as εὖ γ᾽ ἐποίησας 
ἀναμνήσας pe, you did well in reminding me. | 


IV. GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES. 


δ 205. 1. The present is the tense commonly used in 
Greek, as in English, to denote a general truth or an 
habitual action ; as πλοῖον εἰς Δῆλον ᾿Αθηναῖοι πέμπουσιν, 
the Athenians send a ship to Delos (annually). 


2. In animated language the aorist is. used in this 
sense. ‘This is called the gnomic aorist, and is generally 
translated by the English present. Z.g. 


§ 207.] THE PARTICLE “AN. 2538 


"Hy τις τούτων τι παραβαίνῃ, ζημίαν αὐτοῖς ἐπέθεσαν, i.e. they 
impose a penalty on all who transgress. Mi? ἡμέρα τὸν μὲν καθεῖλεν 
ὑψόθεν, τὸν δ᾽ jp ἄνω, one day (often) brings down one man from a 
height and raises another high. 

Note 1. Here one distinct case in past time is vividly used to 
represent all possible cases. Examples containing such adverbs as 
πολλάκις, often, ἤδη, already, οὔπω, never yet, illustrate the construc- 
tion; as ἀθυμοῦντες ἄνδρες οὔπω τρόπαιον ἔστησαν, disheartened men 
never yet raised a trophy, i.e. never raise a trophy. 


Note 2. An aorist resembling the gnomic.is found in Homeric 
similes; as ἤριπε δ᾽ ὡς ὅτε tis δρῦς ἤριπεν, and he fell, as when some 
oak falls (lit. as when an oak once fell). 


Nore 8. The gnomic aorist sometimes occurs in indirect dis- 
course in the infinitive and participle, and even in the optative. 
8. The perfect is sometimes gnomic, like the aorist. Eg. 


To δὲ μὴ ἐμποδὼν ἀνανταγωνίστῳ εὐνοίᾳ τετίμηται, but those who are 
not before men’s eyes are honored with a good will which has no 
rivalry. 

The gnomic perfect may be used in the infinitive. 


§ 206. The imperfect and aorist are sometimes used 
with the adverb ἄν to denote a customary action. E.g. 


Διηρώτων ἂν αὐτοὺς τί λέγοιεν, 1 used to ask them (I would often 
ask them) what they said. Πολλάκις ἠκούσαμεν ἂν ὑμᾶς, we used 
often to hear you. 


Remark. This construction must be carefully distinguished 
from the ordinary apodosis with ἄν (§ 222). It is equivalent to our 
phrase he would often do this for he used to do this, and was probably . 
_ developed from the past potential construction (§ 226, 2, N. 2). 


Nore. The Ionic has iterative forms in -σκον and -σκομὴν 
in both imperfect and aorist. (See § 119, 10.) Herodotus uses 
these also with ἄν, as above. 


THE PARTICLE “AN. 


8 207. The adverb dy (Epic κέ) has two distinct 
uses. ; 

1. It is joined to all the secondary tenses of the indica- 
tive (in Homer also to the future indicative), and to the 
optative, infinitive, or participle, to denote that the action 


254 SYNTAX. [$ 208. 


of the verb i is dependent on some condition, expressed or 
implied. Here it belongs to the verb. 


2. It is jomed regularly to εἰ, if, and to all relative 
and temporal words (and occasionally to the final particles 
ὡς, ὅπως, and ὄφρα), when these are followed by the 
subjunctive. Here it belongs entirely to the particle or 
relative, with which it often forms one word, as in ἐάν, 


a 


ed ΡῚ 7 ᾽ 
ὅταν, ἐπειδάν. 


There is no English word which can translate ἄν. In its first 
use it is expressed in the would or should of the verb (βούλοιτο ἄν, 
he would wish ; ἑλοίμην ἄν, 1 should choose). In its second use it has 
no force which can be made apparent in English. 

REMARK. The above statement (§ 207) includes all regular uses of ἄν 
except the Epic construction explained in § 255, and the iterative con- 
struction of § 206. 

The Following sections (§§ 208-211) enumerate the various uses of dv: 
when these are explained more fully elsewhere, reference is made to the 
proper sections. 


§ 208. 1. The present and perfect indicative never take ay. 


2. The future indicative often takes ἄν (or κέ) in the early 
poets, especially Homer; very rarely in Attic Greek. 1.5. 

Καί κέ τις ὧδ᾽ ἐρέει, and perhaps some one will thus speak; ἄλλοι, 
οἵ κέ με τιμήσουσι, others who will honor me (if occasion offers). The 
future with ἄν seems to have been an intermediate form between 
the simple future, will honor, and the optative with ἃ ἄν, would honor. 


tar ἡ the few ‘examples found in Attic prose is in Plat. Apol. 
p- 29 


3. The most common use of ἄν with the indicative is when 
it forms an apodosis* with the secondary tenses. It here 
denotes that the condition upon which the action of the verb 
depends ts not or was not fulfilled. See ὃ 222. 


For the past potential construction with ἄν, see § 226, 2, N. 2; for the 
iterative construction with ἄν, see § 206. 


§ 209, 1. In Attic Greek the subjunctive is used with ἄν 
only in the constructions mentioned in § 207, 2, where ἄν 
belongs to the introductory word. See § 223, § 225, § 232, 3, 
. § 233; also § 216, 1, N. 2. 


§ 211.] THE PARTICLE "AN. 255 


2. In Epic poetry, where the subjunctive is often used 
nearly or quite in the sense of the future indicative (δ 255), 
it may, ike the future (ὃ 208, 2), take ἄν ΟΥ κέ. Lig. 


Ei δέ κε ᾿μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἔλωμαι, and if they do not 
give her up, [οὐ take her myself. 


§ 210. The optative with ἄν forms an apodosis, with 
which a condition must be either expressed or implied. It 
denotes what would happen if the condition should be fulfilled 


(§ 224). 


Nore. The future optative is never used with ἄν. See § 203, 
3. 


.§ 211, The present and aorist (rarely the perfect) infini- 
tive and participle are used with ἄν to form an apodosis. 
Each tense is here equivalent to the corresponding tense of the 
indicative or optative with dy, —the present representing also 
the imperfect, and the perfect also the pluperfect. 

᾿ς Thus the present infinitive or participle with av may repre- 
sent either an imperfect indicative or a present optative with ἄν ; 
the aorist, either an aorist indicative or an aorist optative with 
av; the perfect, either a pluperfect indicative or a perfect opta- 
tive with av. L.g. 


(Pres.) Φησὶν αὐτοὺς ἐλευθέρους ἂν εἶναι, εἰ τοῦτο ἔπραξαν, he 
says that they would (now) be Sree (ἦσαν av), if they had done this ; 
φησὶν αὐτοὺς ἐλευθέρους ἂν εἶναι, εἰ τοῦτο πράξειαν, he says that they 
would (hereafter) be free (εἶεν ἄν), if they should do this. Οἶδα αὐτοὺς 
ἐλευθέρους ἃ ἂν ὄντας, εἰ τοῦτο ἔπραξαν, I know that they would (now) 
be Sree. (ἦσαν ἄν), if they had done this; οἶδα αὐτοὺς ἐλευθέρους ἂν 
ὄντας, εἰ ταῦτα πράξειαν, I know that they would (hereqfter) be see 
(εἶεν dv), if they should do this. 

(Aor. ) Φασὶν αὐτὸν ἐλθεῖν dv (or οἶδα αὐτὸν ἐλθόντα dy), ei τοῦτο 
ἐγένετο, they say (or I know) that he would have come (ἦλθεν av), 
af this had happened ; φασὶν αὐτὸν ἐλθεῖν ἂν (or οἶδα αὐτὸν ἐλθόντα 
ἂν), εἰ τοῦτο γένοιτο, they say (or I know) that he would come 
(ἔλθοι dv), if this should happen. 

(Perf. > Ei μὴ τὰς ἀρετὰς ἐκείνας παρέσχοντο. πάντα ταῦθ᾽ ὑπὸ τῶν 
βαρβάρων ἂν ἑαλωκέναι (φήσειεν ἄν τις), had they not exhibited those 
exploits of valor, we might say that all this would have heen captured 
by the barbarians (ἑαλώκει Gv); οὐκ ἂν ἡγοῦμαι αὐτοὺς δίκην ἀξίαν 
δεδωκέναι, εἰ αὐτῶν ΘΟ ἐσόμεθα, I do not think they would (then, — 


256 \ SYNTAX. [8 212. 


in the future) have suffered proper punishment (δεδωκότες ἂν εἶεν), 
if you should condemn them. : 

The context must decide in each case whether we have the equiva- 
lent of the indicative or of the optative with ἄν. In the examples 
given, the form of the protasis generally settles the question. 


Notre. As the early poets who use the future indicative with ἄν 
(8 208, 2) do not use this construction, the future infinitive and 
participle with ἄν are very rarely found. 


8 212, 1. When ἄν is used with the subjunctive (as in 
§ 207, 2), it is generally. separated from the introductory 
word only by monosyllabic particles like μέν, δέ, τέ, yap, &e. 

2. In a long apodosis ἄν may be used twice or even three 
times with the same verb ; as οὐκ ἂν ἡγεῖσθ᾽ αὐτὸν κἂν ἐπι δρα- 
μεῖν; do you not think that he would even have rushed thither ? 
In Thue. ii. 41, ἄν is used three times with παρέχεσθαι. 


3. “Av may be used elliptically with a verb understood ; as 
οἱ οἰκέται ῥέγκουσιν - ἄλλ᾽ οὐκ ἂν πρὸ τοῦ (SC. ἔρρεγκον), the slaves 
are snoring ; but in old times they would n’t have done so. So in 
φοβούμενος ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ παῖς, fearing like a child (ὥσπερ ἂν 
ἐφοβεῖτο εἰ παῖς ἦν). ς 

4. When an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate verbs, 
ἄν generally stands only with the first; as οὐδὲν ἂν διάφορον 
τοῦ ἑτέρου ποιοῖ, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ ταὐτὸν ἀμφότεροι ἴοιεν, he would do 
nothing different from the other, but both would aim at the same 
object (ἄν belongs also to ἴοιεν). 


Note. The adverb τάχα, quickly, soon, readily, is often prefixed 
to ἄν, in which case τάχ᾽ ἄν is nearly equivalent to ἴσως, perhaps. 
The ἄν here always forms an apodosis, as usual, with the verb of 
the sentence; as τάχ᾽ ἂν ἔλθοι, perhaps he would come. 


THE MOODS. 


§ 213, 1. The indicative is used in simple, absolute 
assertions; as γράφει, he wriles; ἔγραψεν. he wrole ; 
γράψει, he will write ; γέγραφεν, he has written. 

It has a tense to express every variety of time which is 
recognized by the Greek verb, and it can thus state a sup- 


§ 213.] THE MOODS. | 257 


position as well as make an assertion in the past, present, 
or future. It also expresses certain other relations which in 
other languages (as in Latin) are generally expressed by a 
different mood. ‘The following examples will illustrate these 
uses : — 


Ei τοῦτο ἀληθές ἐστι, χαίρω, if this is true, I rejoice (§ 221); εἰ 
ἔγραψεν, ἦλθον ἄν, if he had written, I should have come (§ 222); 
εἰ γράψει, γνώσομαι, if he shall write (or if he writes), I shall know 
(§ 223, N.1). ’Empedcirat ὅπως τοῦτο γενήσεται, he takes care that 
this shall happen (ὃ 217). Λέγει ὅτι τοῦτο ποιεῖ, he says that he is 
doing this; sometimes, εἶπεν ὅτι τοῦτο ποιεῖ, he said that he was doing 
this (he said ποιῶ). Εἴθε pe ἔκτεινας, ὡς μήποτε τοῦτο ἐποίησα, 
O that thou hadst killed me, that I might never have done this! (8 251, 
2; § 216, 3). Εἴθε τοῦτο ἀληθὲς ἦν, O that this were true! (§ 251, 2). 


REMARK. These constructions are explained in the sections re- 
ferred to. Their variety shows the impossibility of giving any 
precise single definition, which will be of practical value, including 
all the uses even of the indicative. With the subjunctive and 
optative it is equally impossible. 


2. The various uses of the subjunctive are shown by 
the following examples : — 


ἜΡρρχεται iva τοῦτο ἴδῃ, he is coming that he may see this (§ 216); 
φοβεῖται μὴ τοῦτο γένηται, he fears lest this may happen (8 218). 
᾿Εὰν ἔλθῃ, τοῦτο ποιήσω. if he shall come (or if he comes), 1 shall do 
this (8 223); ἐάν τις ἔλθῃ, τοῦτο ποιῶ, if any one (ever) comes, ἢ 
(always) do this (8 225). Ὅταν ἔλθῃ, τοῦτο ποιήσω, when he shall 
come (or when he comes), I shall do this (§ 232, 3); ὅταν res ἔλθῃ, 
τοῦτο ποιῶ, when any one comes, I (always) do this (§ 233). 

"Iopev, let us go (ὃ 253). Μὴ θαυμάσητε, do not wonder (§ 254). 
Ti εἴπω; what shall I say? (§ 256). Οὐ μὴ τοῦτο γένηται. this 
(surely) will not happen (§ 257). Ἴδωμαι., J shall see (Hom. § 255). 

These constructions are explained in the sections referred to. 


Remark. The subjunctive, in its simplest and apparently most 
primitive use, expresses simple futurity, like the future indicative; 
this is seen in the Homeric independent construction, ἴδωμαι, J shall 
see; εἴπῃσί tis, one will say. Then, in exhortations and prohibi- 
tions it is still future; as ἴωμεν, let us go; μὴ ποιήσητε τοῦτο, do 
not do this. In final and object clauses it expresses a future pur- 
pose or a future object of fear. In conditional and conditional 
relative sentences it expresses a future supposition; except in 
general conditions, where it is indefinite (but never strictly present) 
In its time. 

17 


258 SYNTAX. [§ 213. 


3. The various uses of : the optative are shown by the 
following examples : — Hits. 


Ἦλθεν ἵνα τοῦτο ἴδοι, he came that he might see this (§ 216); ἐφο- 
Beiro μὴ τοῦτο γένοιτο, he feared lest this should happen (δ 218). 
Ei ἔλθοι, τοῦτ᾽ ἂν ποιήσαιμι, tf he should come, I should do this 
(§ 224); εἴ τις ἔλθοι, τοῦτ᾽ ἐποίουν, if any one (ever) came, I (always) 
did this (§ 225). “Ore ἔλθοι, τοῦτ᾽ ἂν ποιήσαιμι, whenever he should 
come (at any time when he should come), I should do this (§ 282, 4); 
ὅτε τις ἔλθοι, τοῦτ᾽ ἐποίουν, whenever any one came, I (always) did this 
(§ 233). ἘἘπεμελεῖτο ὅπως τοῦτο γενήσοιτο, he took care that this 
should happen (§ 217). Eimev (or ἔλεγεν) ὅτι τοῦτο ποιοίη (ποιήσοι 
or aA te he suid that he was doing (would do or had done) this 
(§ 243). ia 

Ἔλθοι ἄν, he might go (if he should wish to) (§ 226, 2). Eide μὴ 
ἀπόλοιντο, O that they may not perish! Mn γένοιτο; may it not 
happen (§ 251, 1). 

These constructions are explained in the sections referred to. 


Remark. The optative in many of its uses is a vaguer and less 
distinct form of expression than the subjunctive, in constructions 
of the same general character. This appears especially in its inde- 
pendent uses; as in the Homeric Ἑλένην ἄγοιτο, he may take Helen 
away (cf. ἀγέσθω, let him take); ἴοιμεν, may we yo (ct. ἴωμεν, let us 
go); μὴ γένοιτο, may it not happen (οἷ. μὴ γένηται. let it not happen) ; 
ἕλοιτο dv (Hom. sometimes ἔλοιτο alone), he would take (ef. Hom. 
ἕληται, sometimes with κέ, he will take). So in future conditions; 
as εἰ γένοιτο, if it should happen (cf. ἐὰν γένηται, if rt shall ee 
In other dependent clauses it is generally a correlative of the su 
junctive, sometimes of the indicative; it expresses the changed 
relation of a dependent subjunctive or indicative in these con- 
structions when the verb on which it depends is changed from 
present or future to past time. The same change in relation is 
expressed in English by a change from shall, will, may, do, ts, 
&e. to should, would, might, did, was, Χο. To illustrate these 
last relations, compare ἔρχεται ἵνα ἴδῃ, φοβεῖται μὴ γένηται. ἐάν 
τις ἔλθῃ τοῦτο ποιῶ, ἐπιμελεῖται ὅπως τοῦτο γενήσεται, and λέγει 
ὅτι τοῦτο ποιεῖ, with the corresponding forms after past leading 
verbs given in ὃ 213, 8. 


4, The imperative is used to express commands and 
prohibitions; as τοῦτο ποίει, do this; μὴ φεύγετε, do 
not fly. Bete’ 

5. The infinitive is a verbal noun, which expresses the 
simple idea of a verb without restriction of person or 
number. | : 


§ 215.] THE MOODS. 259 


8 214, The following sections (88 215-257) treat of all 
- eonstructions which require any other form of the finite verb 
than. the indicative in simple assertions (§ 213, 1). The 
infinitive and participle are included here only so far as they 
are used in indirect discourse or in protasis and apodosis. 
These constructions are divided as follows : — 


I. Final and Object clauses after iva, ὡς, ὅπως, and μή. 
II. Conditional sentences. .III. Relative and Temporal sen- 
tences. IV. Indirect Discourse. V. Causal sentences. 
VI. Wishes. VII. Commands,. Exhortations, and Prohibi- 
tions. VIII. Homeric Subjunctive (like Future Indicative). 
—Interrogative Subjunctive. — Οὐ μή with Subjunctive or 
Future Indicative. 


I. FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES AFTER ia, ds, ὅπως, μή. 


§ 215. The clauses which depend on the so-called final 
particles iva, ws, ὅπως, that, in order that, and μή, that not, 
lest, may be divided into three classes : — 


A. Final clauses, expressing the purpose or motive ; as 
ἔρχεται iva τοῦτο ἴδῃ, he is coming that he may see this. 
Here all the final particles may be used. 


B. Object clauses with ὅπως after verbs signifying to 
strive for, to care for, to effect; as σκόπει ὅπως τοῦτο 
γενήσεται, see to it that this is done. 


C. Object clauses with μή after verbs of fear or caution ; 
as φοβεῖται μὴ τοῦτο γένηται, he fears that (or lest) this 
may happen. — 


' Remark. The first two classes (sometimes classed together as 
Jinal) are to be distinguished with special care. ‘The object clauses 
in B are the direct object of the leading verb, and can even stand 1 in 
apposition to an object accusative like τοῦτο; as σκόπει τοῦτο, ὅπως 
μή σε ὄψεται, see to this, namely, that he does not see you. But a final 
clause could stand in apposition only to τούτου ἕνεκα, Sor the sake of 
this, or διὰ τοῦτο, to this end ; as ἔρχεται τούτου ἕνεκα, wa ἡμᾶς ἴδῃ, 
he is coming for this purpose, namely, that he may see us. 


200 SYNTAX. [$ 216. 


Nort 1. The negative adverb in all these clauses is μή; except 
after μή, lest, where ov is used. : 


Nore 2. “Odpa, that, is used as a final particle in Epic and Lyric 
poetry. 


A. Final Clauses. 


ὃ 216. 1. Final clauses take the subjunctive after 
primary tenses, and the optative after secondary tenses. 
fig. ; 


Διανοεῖται τὴν γέφυραν λῦσαι, ὡς μὴ διαβῆτε, he thinks of breaking 
up the bridge, that you may not pass over. Λυσιτελεῖ ἐᾶσαι ἐν τῷ 
παρόντι, μὴ καὶ τοῦτον πολέμιον προσθώμεθα, it s expedient to allow 
it for a time, lest we may add him to the number of our enemies. Παρα- 
καλεῖς ἰατροὺς, ὅπως μὴ ἀποθάνῃ, you call in physicians, that he may 
not die. Φίλος ἐβούλετο εἶναι τοῖς μέγιστα δυναμένοις, ἵνα ἀδικῶν μὴ 
διδοίη δίκην, he wished to be a friend to the most powerful, that he 
might do wrong and not be punished. Τούτου ἕνεκα φίλων ᾧετο δεῖσθαι, 
ὡς συνέργους ἔχοι, he thought he needed friends for this purpose, 
namely, that he might have helpers. 


Nore 1. The future indicative very rarely takes the place of 
the subjunctive in final clauses after ὅπως, ὄφρα, and py. This is 
almost entirely confined to poetry. See Odyss. i. ὅθ, iv. 163; JI. 
xx. 301. 


Note 2. The adverb ἄν (κέ) is sometimes joined with ὡς, ὅπως, 
and ὄφρα before the subjunctive in final clauses; as ὡς ἂν μάθῃς, 
ἀντάκουσον, hear the other side, that you may learn. It adds nothing 
to the sense that can be made perceptible in English. In Homer 
and Herodotus it occasionally oceurs even before an optative. 


2. As final clauses express the purpose or motive of some 
person, they admit the double construction of indirect dis- 
course (§ 242). Hence, instead of the optative after secon- 
dary tenses, we can have the mood and tense which would be 
used when a person conceived the purpose in his own mind ; 
that is, we can say either ἦλθεν. ἵνα ἴδοι, he came that he 
might see (ἢ 216, 1), or ἦλθεν ἵνα ἴδῃ, because the person 
himself would have said ἔρχομαι ἵνα ἴδω, [come that 1 may see. 
(See § 248, Note.) 

On this principle the subjunctive in final clauses after 
secondary tenses is nearly as common as the more regular 
optative. Hg. | 


§ 217.] | ‘THE MOODS. 261 


Τὰ πλοῖα κατέκαυσεν, iva μὴ Κῦρος διαβῇ, he burned the vessels, 
that Cyrus might not pass over. 


3. The secondary tenses of the indicative are used in final 


clauses with iva, sometimes with ws or Ά ὅπως, to denote that’ 


the end or object is dependent on some unfulfilled condition 
or some unaccomplished wish, and therefore is not or was not 
attained. L.g. 

Ti μ᾽ ov λαβὼν Exrewas εὐθὺς, ὡς ἔδειξα μήποτε; &c., why did you 
not take me and kill me at once, that I might never have shown? &e. 
Φεῦ, φεῦ, τὸ μὴ τὰ πράγματ᾽ ἀνθρώποις ἔχειν φωνὴν, ἵν ἦσαν μηδὲν οἱ 
δεινοὶ λόγοι, Alas! alas! that the facls have no voice for men, so that 
words of eloquence might be as nothing. . 


B. Object Clauses with ὅπως after Verbs of Striving, &c. 


§ 217, Object clauses depending on verbs signifying 
to strive for, to care for, to effect, regularly take the 
future indicative after both primary and secondary tenses. 


The future optative may be used after secondary tenses, as _ 


the correlative of the future indicative, but commonly the 
indicative is retained on the principle explained in § 216, 2. 
(See ὃ 202, 4.) L.g. 


Φρόντιζ᾽ ὅπως μηδὲν ἀνάξιον τῆς τιμῆς ταύτης πράξεις, take heed 
that you do nothing unworthy of this honor. ᾿Ἐμηχανώμεθα ὅπως 
μηδεὶς τοῦτο γνώσοιτο, we were planning that nobody should know 
this (here γνώσεται would be more common). “Empacoov ὅπως τις 
βοήθεια ἥξει, they were trying to effect (this), that some assistance 
should come. 


_ Nortel. Sometimes the present or aorist subjunctive or optative 
is used after these verbs, as in final clauses. In this case ὡς also 
may be used. Ὅπως ἄν or ὡς ἄν may be used before the subjunc- 
tive, never before the regular future indicative. My is sometimes 
used for ὅπως μή; generally with the subjunctive. 


Note 2. The future indicative with ὅπως sometimes follows 
verbs of exhorting, entreating, commanding, and forbidding, which 
commonly take an infinitive of the object; as διακελεύονται ὅπως 
τιμωρήσεται πάντας τοὺς τοιούτους, they exhort him to take vengeance 
on all such. 


Norte 8. The construction of § 217 is not found in Homer; but 
such verbs as are mentioned in Note 2, and verbs signifying to con- 


202 SYNTAX. [§ 218. 


sider, to try, and the like, take ὅπως or ὡς with the subjunctive and 
optative, as in final clauses. L.@. 

Λίσσεσθαι δέ μιν αὐτὸς ὅπως νημερτέα εἴπῃ, and implore him thyself 
to speak the truth; λίσσετο δ᾽ αἰεὶ Ἥφαιστον κλυτοεργὸν ὅπως λύσειεν 
“Apna, he implored him to liberate Ares. So φράσσεται ὥς κε νέηται; 
βούλευον ὅπως by’ ἄριστα γένοιτο. 


Note 4. Both ὅπως and ὅπως μή are often used with the future 
indicative in exhortations or prohibitions, some imperative like σκόπει 
or σκοπεῖτε, take care, being understood. E.g. | 

Ὅπως οὖν ἔσεσθε ἄξιοι τῆς ἐλευθερίας, (see that you) prove your- 
selves worthy of freedom. “Ὅπω ς μοι μὴ ἐρεῖς ὅτι ἔστι τὰ δώδεκα δὶς ξξ, 
see that you do not tell me that twelve is twice siz. For a similar ellipsis 
of a verb of fearing, see § 218, N. 2. 


“~ 


C. Object Clauses with μή after Verbs of Fearing, &c. 


§ 218. After verbs denoting fear, caution, or danger, 
μή, that or lest, takes the subjunctive after primary tenses, 
and the optative after secondary tenses. 

The subjunctive may also follow secondary tenses, to retain 
the mood in which the fear originally occurred to the mind. 
ti.g. 


Φοβοῦμαι μὴ τοῦτο γένηται (vereor ne accidat), I fear that this 
may happen; φοβοῦμαι μὴ ov τοῦτο γένηται (vereor ut accidat), 
I fear that this may not happen (§ 215, N.1). Φροντίζω μὴ κράτιστον 
7 μοι σιγᾶν, I am anxious lest it may be best for me to be silent. Οὐκέτι 
ἐπετίθεντο, δεδιότες μὴ ἀποτμηθείησαν, they no longer made attacks, 
fearing lest they should be cut off. ᾿Ἐφοβοῦντο py τι πάθῃ, they feared 
lest he should suffer anything (§ 216, 2). 


Note 1. The future indicative is very rarely used after μή in 
this construction. But ὅπως μή is sometimes used here, as in the 
object clauses of § 217, with both future indicative and sub- 
junctive. 


ΝΌΤΕ 2. My with the subjunctive, or ὅπως μή with the future 
indicative, may be used elliptically, a verb of fear or caution being. 
understood. £.g. 

Μὴ ἀγροικότερον ἢ τὸ ἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν, (I fear that) the truth may be too 
rude a thing to say. ᾿Αλλὰ μὴ οὐ τοῦτ᾽ ἦ χαλεπόν, but (I fear that) this 
may not be a difficult thing. See § 217, N. 4. 

Nore 3. Verbs of fearing may refer to objects of fear which 
are present or past. Here μή takes the present and past tenses οἵ. 
. the indicative. £.g. 


§ 220.] THE MOODS. 263 


Δέδοικα μὴ πληγῶν δέει, I fear that you need blows. Φοβούμεθα μὴ 
ἀμφοτέρων dua ἡμαρτήκαμεν, we fear that we have missed both at 
once. Acide μὴ δὴ πάντα θεὰ νημερτέα εἶπεν, I fear that all which the 
Goddess said was true. Hom. Ὅρα μὴ παίζων ἔλεγεν, beware lest he 
was speaking in jest. _ 


II. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 


§ 219, 1. In conditional sentences the clause con- 
taining the condition is called the protasis, and that 
containing the conclusion is called the apodosis. The — 
protasis is introduced by εἰ, if. 


The Doric ai for εἰ is sometimes used in Homer. 


2. The adverb ἄν (Epic κέ) is regularly joined to εἰ in 
the protasis when the verb is in the subjunctive; εἰ with 
dv forming ἐάν, ἄν (a), or ἤν. (See ὃ 207, 2.) The 
simple εἰ is used with the indicative and optative. 

- The same adverb ἄν is used in the apodosis with the 
optative, and with the secondary tenses of the indicative 
in the construction of § 222. 


8. The negative adverb of the protasis is regularly μή, 
that of the apodosis is ov. | 

Nore. When ov stands in a protasis, it always belongs to some 
particular word (as in οὐ πολλοί, few, οὔ φημι, [ deny), and not to 


the protasis as a whole; as ἐάν τε σὺ καὶ Ἄνυτος οὐ φῆτε ἐάν τε φῆτε, 
both if you and Anytus deny it and if you admit it. 


CLASSIFICATION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 


§ 220. Conditional sentences in Greek have six forms. 
The classification is based chiefly on the time to which the 
supposition refers, partly on what is implied with regard to 
the fulfilment of the condition, and partly on the distinction 
between particular and general suppositions explained in II. 


964 SYNTAX. [§ 220. 


I. Four Forms of Ordinary Conditions. 


The most obvious distinction of conditions is that of 
(a) present or past and (6) future. 


Present and Past Conditions. 


(a) In present or past conditions, the question of fulfil- 
ment has already been decided (in point of fact), but we may 
or may not wish to imply by our form of statement how this 
has been decided. In Greek (as in English or Latin) we 
may, therefore, state such a condition in one of two ways :— 


1. We may simply state a present or past condition, imply- 
ing nothing as to its fulfilment; as if he is (now)-doing this, 
ei Touro πράσσει; ---ἴ ἠδ was doing it, εἰ ἔπρασσε; ; —if he did tt, 
εἰ ἔπραξε; ; —tf he has (already) done it, εἰ πέπραχε. The apodosis 
here expresses simply what zs (was or will be) the result of 
the fulfilment of the condition. ‘Thus we may say :— 

Ei πράσσει τοῦτο, καλῶς ἔχει, if he is doing this, it is well; 
εἰ πράσσει τοῦτο, ἡμάρτηκεν, if he is doing this, he has erred; εἰ 
πράσσει τοῦτο, καλῶς ἕξει, if he is doing this, it will be well. Ei 
ἔπραξε τοῦτο, καλῶς ἔχει (εἶχεν, ἔσχεν, or ἕξει), if he did this, it is 
(was or will be) well. So with the other tenses of the indicative. 
(See § 221.) 

So in Latin: Si hoe facit, bene est; Si hoc fecit, bene erit. 


2. We may state a present or past condition so as to imply 
that it is not or was not fulfilled; as if he were (now) doing 
this, εἰ τοῦτο ἔπρασσε: ---ἴ he had done this, εἰ τοῦτο ἔπρα ξε 
(both implying the opposite). The apodosis here expresses 
what would be (or would have been) the result if the condition 
were (or had been) fulfilled. The adverb ἄν in the apodosis 
distinguishes these forms from otherwise similar forms under 
(a) 1. Thus we may say: — 

Ei ἔπρασσε τοῦτο, καλῶς ἂν εἶχεν. if he were (now) doing this, it 
would be well; εἰ ἔπραξε τοῦτο, καλῶς ἂν ἔσχεν, if he had done this, 


it would have been well. (See $ 222. oe 
In Latin: Si hoe faceret, bene esset; Si hoc fecisset, bene fuisset. 


8 220.] THE MOODS. 265 


The Greek has no form implying that a condition is or was fulfilled, 
and it is hardly conceivable that any language should find such a form 
necessary or useful. Shs 


Future Conditions. 


(5) We may state a future condition in Greek (as in 
English and Latin) in either of two ways. : 


»» 


1. We may say 7 λ6 shall do this, ἐὰν πράσσῃ (or πράξῃ) 
τοῦτο (or, still more vividly, εἰ πρά ἕξει τοῦτο), making a dis- 
‘tinct supposition of a-future case. The apodosis expresses 
what will be the result if the condition shall be fulfilled. 
Thus we may say :— 

Ἐὰν πράσσῃ (or πράξῃ) τοῦτο, καλῶς ἕξει, if he shall do this, it 
will be well (sometimes εἰ πράξει τοῦτο). (See ὃ 223.) In Latin: 
Si hoc faciet (or si hoe fecerit), bene erit; sometimes Si hoe 
faciat. 


2. We may also say if he should do this, εἰ πράσσοι (or 
πράξειε) τοῦτο, still supposing a case in the future, but less 
distinetly and vividly than before. The apodosis corresponds 
to this in form (with the addition of dv), and expresses what 
would be the result if the condition should be fulfilled. Thus 
we can say :— 


_ Ei πράσσοι (or πράξειε) τοῦτο, καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι, if he should 
do this, it would be well, (See ὃ 224.) In Latin: Si hoe faciat, 
bene sit. 


II. Present and Past General Suppositions. 


The supposition contained in a protasis may be either 
particular or general. A particular supposition refers to a 
definite act or a definite series of acts; as uf he (now) has this, 
he will give it; if he had it, he gave it ; if he had had the power, — 
he would have helped me ; if he shall receive it (or if he receives 
it), he will give it; if he should receive it, he would give it. 
A general supposition refers to any one of a class of acts, 
which may oecur (or may have occurred) on any one of ἃ. 
series of possible occasions; as if ever he receives anything, 


2066. "SYNTAX, : [§ 220. 


he (always) gives it; if ever he received anything, he (always) 
gave it; if he had (on each occasion) had the power, he would 
(always) have helped me; if ever any one shall (or should) wish 
to go, he will (or would) always be permitted. 

Although this distinction is seen in all classes of con- 
ditions (as the examples show), it is only in the present and 
past conditions which do not imply non-fulfilment, 7.e. in 
those of (a) 1, that the Greek distinguishes general from 
particular suppositions in construction. Here, however, we 
have two classes of conditions which contain only general 
suppositions. 


(a) When the apodosis has a verb of present time express- 
ing a customary or repeated action (§ 205), the protasis may 
refer (in a general way) to any one of a class of acts which 
can be supposed to occur within the period represented in 
English as present. Thus we may say :— 


Ἔάν τις κλέπτῃ; κολάζεται, if (ever). any one steals, heis (in all 
such cases) punished; ἐάν τις πράσσῃ (or πράξῃ)[)ρ τοιοῦτόν τι, χαλε- 
παίνομεν αὐτῷ, if (ever) any one does such a thing, we are (always) 
angry with him. (See § 225.) . 


(Ὁ) When the apodosis has a verb of past time expressing 
a customary or repeated action, the protasis may refer (in a 
general way) to any one of a class of acts which can be sup- 
posed to have occurred in the past. Thus we may say :— 


Et τις κλέπτοι, ἐκολάζετο, if (ever) any one stole, he was (in all 
such cases) punished; εἴ τις πράσσοι (or πράξειε) τοιοῦτόν τι, 
ἐχαλεπαίνομεν αὐτῷ, if (ever) any one did such a thing, we were (always) 
angry with him. (See § 225.) 


Remark 1. Although the Latin sometimes agrees with the Greek 
in distinguishing general conditions from ordinary present and: past 
conditions, using δὲ faciat and si faceret like ἐὰν πράσσῃ and εἰ πράσ- 
σοι above, it yet commonly agrees with the English in not recogniz- 
ing the distinction, and uses the indicative alike in both classes. 
Even the Greek sometimes (especially in poetry) neglects the distinc- 
tion, and uses the indicative in these general conditions (§ 225, Ν, 1). 


ReMARK 2. In external form the present general condition coin- 
cides with the more vivid future condition, (Ὁ) 1, both being ex- 
pressed by ἐάν and the subjunctive, and the form of the apodosis 
alone distinguishing them. But in sense there is a much closer 
connection between the general present condition and the ordinary 


8.222.] THE MOODS. 267 


present condition expressed by ei and the present indicative, (a) 1, 
with which in most languages (and sometimes even in Greek) it 
coincides also in form (see Remark 1). On the other hand, ἐάν 
with the subjunctive in a future condition generally agrees in sense 
with εἰ and the future indicative (8 223, N. 1), and is never inter- 
changeable with εἰ and the present indicative. 


I. Four Forms ΟΕ OrDINARY CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
A. Present and Past Conditions. 
1. Simple Particular Suppositions. 


§ 221, When the protasis simply states a present or 
past particular supposition, implying nothing as to the 
fulfilment of the condition, it takes the indicative with 


ei. Any form of the verb may stand in the apodosis. 
L..g.. 


Ei θεοί τι δρῶσιν αἰσχρὸν, οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοί, if the Gods do anything 
disgraceful, there are no Gods. Eur. Ei ἐγὼ Φαῖδρον ἀγνοῶ, καὶ 
ἐμαυτοῦ ἐπιλέλησμαι" ἀλλὰ yap οὐδέτερά ἐστι τούτων, if I do not know 
Phaedrus, [ have forgotten myself; but neither of these is so. Ei θεοῦ 
ἦν, οὐκ ἦν αἰσχροκερδής, if he was the son of a God, he was not ava- 
ricious. ᾿Αλλ᾽ εἰ δοκεῖ σοι, πλέωμεν, but if it pleases you, let us sail. 
Κάκιστ᾽ ἀπολοίμην, Ξανθίαν εἰ μὴ φιλῶ, may I die most wretchedly, if 
I do not love Xanthias. 


Nore. Even the future indicative can stand in a protasis of 
this class if it expresses merely a present intention or necessity that 
something shall be done; as αἶρε πλῆκτρον, εἰ μαχεῖ, raise your 
spur, if you are going to fight. Aristoph. Here εἰ μέλλεις μάχεσθαι 
would be the more common expression in prose. It is important to 
notice that a future of this kind could not be changed to the sub- 
junctive, like the ordinary future in protasis. (For the latter see 
§ 223, N. 1.) 


- 


2. With Supposition contrary to Fact. 


8 222, When the protasis states a present or past 
supposition, implying that the condition is not or was not 
fulfilled, the secondary tenses of the indicative are used 
in both protasis and apodosis. The apodosis takes the 
adverb ap. 

‘The imperfect here refers to present time or to a 


208. SYNTAX. [§ 222. 


continued ‘or repeated action in past time, the aorist to 
an action simply occurring in past time, and the (rare) 
pluperfect to an action finished in past or present time. 
fi.g. 


Ταῦτα οὐκ ἂν ἐδύναντο ποιεῖν, ef μὴ διαίτῃ μετρίᾳ ἐχρῶντο, they 
would not be able (as they are) to do this, if they did not lead an 
abstemious life. Ei ἦσαν ἄνδρες ἀγαθοὶ, ὡς σὺ φὴς, οὐκ ἄν ποτε 
ταῦτα ἔπασχον, if they had been good men, as you say, they would 
never have suffered these things (referring to several cases). Καὶ tows 
ἂν ἀπέθανον, εἰ μὴ ἡ ἀρχὴ κατελύθη, and perhaps I should have 
perished, if. the government had not been put down. Ei ἀπεκρίνω; 
ἱκανῶς dv ἤδη ἐμεμαθήκη (§ 118, 2, N. 4), if you had answered, I 
should already have learned enough (which now I have not done). 
Ei μὴ ὑμεῖς ἤλθετε, ἐπορευόμεθα ἂν ἐπὶ τὸν βασιλέα, if you 
te not come (aor.), we should now be on our way (impf.) to the 

ing. 


Note 1. Sometimes ἄν is omitted in the apodosis, as in English 
we may say it had been for it would have been, or in Latin aequius 
fuerat tor acquius fuisset ; as εἰ μὴ ἦἧσμεν, φόβον παρέσχεν, if we had 
. not known, this had (would have) caused us fear. So καλὸν ἢν 

αὐτῷ εἰ οὐκ ἐγεννήθη ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖνος, it had been good for that man 
if he had not been born. Ν. E. . 


Note2. The imperfects ἔδει, χρῆν or ἐχρῆν, ἐξῆν, and others 
denoting necessity, propriety, obligation, possibility, and the like, are 
often used with the infinitive to form an apodosis implying the non- 
fulfilment of a condition. (ἂν is ποῦ used here, as these phrases ) 
simply express in other words what is usually expressed by the | 
indicative with ἄν. )} Thus, ἔδει σε τοῦτον φιλεῖν, you ought to love | 
him (but do not), ‘or you ought to have loved him (but did not), is | 
equivalent to you would love him, or would have loved him (epirets 
ἂν τοῦτον), if you did your duty (ra δέοντα). So ἐξῆν σοι τοῦτο 
ποιῆσαι, you might have done this; εἰκὸς ἦν σε τοῦτο ποιῆσαι, you 
would properly have done this. The real apodosis is here always in 
the infinitive. ωῴφελον with the infinitive in wishes is used in the 
same way; see § 251, 2, N. 1, and the examples. 

When the present infinitive is used, the construction refers to 
the present or to continued or repeated action in the past; when the 
aorist is used, it refers to the past. 


Note 3. In Homer the imperfect indicative in this class of 
sentences (§ 222) always refers to the past. We occasionally find a 
present optative in Homer in the sense in which Attic writers use 
the imperfect indicative; and in a few passages even the aorist 
optative with κέ in the place of the aorist indicative (see J/. ν. 311 
and 388). 


8224}, THE MOODS. - 969 


B. Future Conditions. 


1. Subjunctive in Protasis with Future Apodosis. 


_ § 229, When a supposed future case is stated dis- 
tinctly and vividly (as in English, if I shall go, or if I go), 
the protasis takes the subjunctive with ἐάν (Epic εἴ xe). 
The apodosis takes the future indicative or some other 
form expressing future time. 1.5", 


Ei μέν κεν Μενέλαον ᾿Αλέξανδρος καταπέφνῃ, αὐτὸς ἔπειθ᾽ “Ἑλένην 
ἐχέτω καὶ κτήματα πάντα, if Alexander shall slay Menelaus, then let 
him have Helen and all the goods himself. Hom. "Av τις ἀνθιστῆ- 
ται, πειρασόμεθα χειροῦσθαι, if any one shall stand opposed to us, we 
shall try to overcome him. *Eav οὖν ins viv, πότε ἔσει οἴκοι; if there- 
Sore you go now, when will you be at-home? 


Remark. The older English forms if he shall go and if he go 
express the force of the Greek subjunctive; but the ordinary 
modern English uses if he goes even when the time is clearly 
future. 


Nott 1. The future indicative with εἰ is very often used for the 
subjunctive in conditions of this class, as a still more vivid form 
of expression; as ef μὴ καθέξεις γλῶσσαν, ἔσται σοι κακά, if you 
do not (shall not) restrain your tongue, you will have trouble. This 
common use of the future, in which it is merely a more vivid form 
rope the subjunctive, must not be confounded with that of § 221, 

ote. 


Nore 2. In Homer εἰ (without dy or κέ) is often used with the 


subjunctive, apparently in the same sense as εἴ κε or ἤν; as εἰ δὲ νῇ 

ἐθέλῃ ὀλέσαι, but if he shall wish to destroy our ship. The same use of 

ei for ἐάν is found occasionally even in Attic poetry. See § 239, N. 1. 

Ee For the Homeric subjunctive with κέ in apodosis, see § 255, 
ote. 


2. Optative in Protasis and Apodosis. 


§ 224. When a supposed future case is stated in a 
less distinct and vivid form (as in English, if I should go), 
the protasis takes the optative with εἰ, and the apodosis 
takes the optative with ἄν. E.g. 


Eins φορητὸς οὐκ ἂν, εἰ πράσσοις καλῶς, you would not be en- 
durable, if you should be in prosperity. Οὐ πολλὴ ἂν ἀλογία εἴη, εἰ 


2τὸ ᾿ SYNTAX. [§ 225. 


οβοῖτο τὸν θάνατον ὁ τοιοῦτος; would it not be a great absurdity, 
of such a man should fear death? Oikos δ᾽ αὐτὸς, εἰ φθογγὴν λάβοι, 
σαφέστατ᾽ ἂν λέξειεν, but the house itself, if it should find a voice, 
would speak most plainly. 
The future optative cannot be used in protasis or apodosis, except 
in indirect discourse representing the future indicative (see the 
third example under § 247). 


Notre 1. “Av is very rarely omitted in an apodosis of this class. 
Most examples occur in Homer; as ὃ οὐ δύο γ᾽ ἄνδρε φέροιεν, which 
two men could not carry (if they should try). But ἄν is sometimes 
omitted in the Attic poets after such expressions as οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ ὅπως 
and οὐκ ἔστιν ὅστις (see Aesch. Prom. 292, Eur. Alc. 52). 


Note 2. For the Homeric optative used like the past tenses of the 
indicative in conditions, see § 222, N. 3. 


Il. PRESENT AND PAst GENERAL SUPPOSITIONS. 


§ 225. In general suppositions, the apodosis expresses 
a customary or repeated action or a general truth, and the 
protasis refers in a general way to any one of a class of 
acts. Here the protasis has the subjunctive with ἐάν 
after present tenses, and the optative with εἰ after 
past tenses. The apodosis has the present or imperfect 
indicative, or some other form which implies repetition. 


fig. 


*Hy ἐγγὺς €XOn θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνήσκειν, if death comes 
near, no one is (erer) willing to die. "Amas λόγος, av ἀπῇ τὰ πράγματα, 
μάταιόν τι φαίνεται καὶ κενόν. all speech, if deeds are wanting, appears 
a vain and empty thing. Et τινας θορυβουμένους αἴσθοιτο, κατα- 
σβεννύναι τὴν ταραχὴν ἐπειρᾶτο. if he saw any falling into disorder 
(or whenever he saw, &c.), he (always) tried to quiet the confusion. 
Εἴ tis ἀντείποι, εὐθὺς τεθνήκει, if any one refused, he was imme- 
diately put to death. 


Remark. The gnomic aorist (§ 205, 2), which is a primary 
tense (§ 201), can always be used here in the apodosis with the 
subjunctive depending on it; as ἤν τις παραβαίνῃ, ζημίαν αὐτοῖς 
ἐπέθεσαν, if any one transgresses, they impose a penalty on him. 


Note 1. The indicative is occasionally used in the place of the 
subjunctive or optative in general suppositions; that is, these sen- 
tences may follow the construction of ordinary present and past 
suppositions (§ 221), as in Latin and English; as εἴ τις δύο 4 καὶ 


8.226. THE MOODS. 271 


mhéous τις ἡμέρας λογίζεται, μάταιός ἐστιν, if any one counts on two 
or even more days, he is a fool. See § 233, N. 1. 


Notre 2. Here, as in ordinary protasis (§ 223, N. 2), e is some- 
times used with the subjunctive in poetry for ἐάν or εἴ κε. 


’ PecuLt1AR Forms oF ConDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
Ellipsis and Substitution in Protasis or Apodosis. 


§ 226. 1. The protasis sometimes is not expressed in its 
regular form with εἰ or ἐάν, but is contained in a participle, 
or implied in an adverb or some other part of the sentence. 
When a participle represents the protasis, its tense is always 
that in which the verb itself would have stood in the indica- 
tive, subjunctive, or optative. The present (as usual) includes 
the imperfect. ΔΜ. 


Πῶς δίκης οὔσης ὁ Ζεὺς οὐκ ἀπόλωλεν; how is it that Zeus has not 
been destroyed, if Justice exists? (ei δίκη ἐστίν). Σὺ δὲ κλύων εἴσει 
τάχα, but you will soon know, if you listen (= ἐὰν κλύῃς). ᾿Απολοῦμαι 
μὴ τοῦτο μαθών, I shall be ruined unless I learn this (ἐὰν μὴ μάθω). 
Τοιαῦτά τὰν γυναιξὶ συνναίων ἔχοις, such things would you have to 
endure if you should dwell among women (i.e. εἰ συνναίοις). Ἢπί- 
ornoev ἄν τις ἀκούσας, any one would have disbelieved such a thing if 
he had heard it (1.6. εἰ ἤκουσεν). Mappav δ᾽ ἂν αἰτήσαντος (sc. σοῦ) 
ἧκόν σοι φέρων ἂν ἄρτον, and if you (ever) cried for food (εἰ αἰτήσειας, 
§ 225), I used to come to you with bread (§ 206). 

Διά ye ὑμᾶς αὐτοὺς πάλαι ἂν ἀπολώλειτε, if it had depended on 
yourselves, you would long ago have been ruined. Οὕτω yap οὔκέτι 
Tov λοιποῦ πάσχοιμεν ἂν κακῶς, for in that case we should no longer 
suffer harm (the protasis being in οὕτω). Οὐδ᾽ ἂν δικαίως ἐς κακὸν 
sob rt, nor should J justly (i.e. if 1 had justice) fall into any 
trouble. 


2. The protasis is often altogether omitted, leaving the 
optative or indicative with dv alone as an apodosis. 


(a) Here there is sometimes a definite protasis suggested - 
by the context or by the circumstances. 22. 


Οὐκ ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἢ δύνανται φέρειν Stappayeiev yap ἄν. they do not 
eat more than they can carry; .for (if they did) they would burst. 
“Hyere τὴν εἰρήνην ὅμως" ov yap ἦν 6 τι ἂν ἐποιεῖτε, you still kept the 
i Sor there was nothing which you could have done (if you had 
not). 


272 SYNTAX. [8. 226, 


(6) Sometimes, however, the implied protasis is too indefi- 
nite to be expressed (in Greek or in English), as often when 
it is merely if he pleased, if he could, if he should try, if there 
should be an opportunity, if we should consider, if what is 
natural (or likely) should happen, &c. Sometimes it is even 
too vague to be really present in the mind. Thus arises the 
potential optative and indicative (with av), corresponding to 
the English forms with may, can, must, might, could, would, 
and should. L.g. 


Ἴσως ἄν τις ἐπιτιμήσειε τοῖς εἰρημένοις, perhaps some one might (or 
may) find fault with what has been said. Ἡδέως δ᾽ ἂν ἔγωγ᾽ ἐροΐμην 
Λεπτίνην, and I should be glad to ask Leptines. Τοῦτο ovr ἂν οὗτος 
ἔχοι λέγειν οὔθ᾽ ὑμεῖς meta Geinre, neither could (can) he say this, nor 
would you believe it (if he should). Οὐκ ἂν μεθείμην τοὺ θρόνου, 1 
won't give up the throne (I would n’t on any condition). Ποῖ οὖν τρα- 
ποίμεθ᾽ ἂν; whither then can we turn? 

Θᾶττον 7 τις ἂν Pero, quicker than one would have thought. Krimov 
πᾶς τις ἤσθετ᾽ ἂν σαφῶς, every one must have heard the sound. So 
ἡγήσω ἄν, you would have thought; εἶδες dv, you might have seen; 
ef. Latin crederes, diceres, videres, &c. 

So βουλοίμην ἄν (velim), I should wish (in some future case) ; 
ἐβουλόμην ἄν (vellem), I should (now) wish, 1 should prefer (on some 
condition not fulfilled). 


Note 1. The potential optative sometimes expresses a mild 
command, and sometimes is hardly more than a future, or a softer 
expression for a mere assertion; as ywpois ἂν εἴσω, you may go in; 
λέγοις ἂν, you may speak (for speak); κλύοις ἂν ἤδη, Φοῖβε, hear me 
now, Phoebus. Οὐκ ἂν οὖν πάνυ γέ τι σπουδαῖον εἴη ἡ δικαιοσύνη, 
Justice will not then turn out to be anything very excellent: see also the 
fourth and fifth examples under (Ὁ). Οὐκ ἂν ἀρνοίμην τοῦτο, I 
will not (would not) deny it. 

In these cases and in most of those under (0), the form of an 
apodosis was unconsciously used with no reference to any definite 
condition. 


Note 2. The potential indicative sometimes expresses what 
would have been likely to happen, i.e. might have happened (and 
perhaps did happen), with no reference to any unfulfilled condition ; 
as ἢ γάρ μιν ζωόν ye Kixnoeat, ἤ Kev "Opeorns κτεῖνεν ὑποφθάμενος, for 
either you will find him alive, or else Orestes may already have killed 
him before you (Od. iv. 546); ὃ θεασάμενος πᾶς ἄν τις ἀνὴρ ἡράσ θὴ 
δάϊος εἶναι, every man who saw this (the ‘Seven against Thebes ’) would 
have longed to be a warrior (Aristoph.). See § 206, Rem. 


ὃ. The apodosis may be expressed by an infinitive or 
participle in indirect discourse, each tense representing its 


§ 227. ~ THE MOODS. 273 


own tenses of the indicative or optative (§ 203, with Note 1). 
If the finite verb in the apodosis would have taken ay, this 
particle is used with the infinitive or participle. .g. 


Ἡγοῦμαι, εἰ τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, πάντα καλῶς ἔ ἔχειν; 1 believe that, if you 
are doing this, all is well; ἡγοῦμαι, ἐὰν τοῦτο ποιῆτε, πάντα καλῶς 
€ Ee εἰν, 1 believe that, if you shall do this, all will be well; οἶδα i ὑμᾶς ἐὰν 
ταῦτα γένηται εὖ ppdboctna, I know that you will prosper if this is 
(shall be) done. Yor examples of the infinitive and paren with 
ἄν, see 8211. ᾿ 


4. The apodosis may be expressed in an infinitive not in 
indirect discourse (§ 260, 1), especially one depending on a 
verb of wishing, commanding, advising, &c., from which the 
infinitive receives a future meaning. .g. 


Βούλεται ἐλθεῖν ἐὰν τοῦτο γένηται; he wishes to go if this shall be 
done; κελεύω ὑμᾶς ἐὰν δύνησθε ἀπελθεῖν, I command you to depart 
if you can (§ 223). For the principle of indirect discourse which 
appears in the protasis here after past tenses, see ὃ 248, 1. 


Note 1. Sometimes the apodosis is merely implied in the con- 
text, and in such cases εἰ or ἐάν is often to be translated supposing 
that or in case that; as ἄκουσον καὶ ἐμοῦ, ἐάν σοι ταὐτὰ δοκῇ, hear me 
also, in case the same shall please you (i.e. that then you may assent to 
. it); οἱ δ᾽ ᾧκτειρον, εἰ ἁλώσοϊντο, and others pitied them, in case they 
should be captured (i.e. thinking what they would suffer if they should 
be captured). See ὃ 248, 2. So πρὸς τὴν πόλιν, εἰ ἐπιβοηθοῖεν, 
ἐχώρουν, they marched towards the city, in case they (the citizens) should 
rush out (i.e. to meet them if they should rush out). On this principle 
we must explain ai κέν πως βούλεται, Il. 1. 66; at κ᾿’ ἐθέλῃσθα, 
Od. iii. 92; and similar passages. 


Note 2. The apodosis is sometimes entirely suppressed for 
effect ; as εἰ μὲν δώσουσι γέρας, if they (shall) give me a prize, — very 
well αἰ. i. 135; cf. i. 580). 


Mixed Constructions. — Aé in Apodosis. 


§ 227. 1. The protasis and apodosis sometimes belong to 
different forms. This happens especially when an indicative 
with εἰ in the protasis is followed by an optative with ἄν in the 
apodosis, the latter sometimes having another protasis implied, 
and sometimes being a potential optative (ὃ 226, 2). £.g. 


Ei viv ye δυστυχοῦμεν, πῶς τἀναντί᾽ ἂν πράττοντες οὐ σωζοίμεθ᾽ 
ἄν; if we are now unfortunate, how could we ἊΣ being saved if we 


18 


274 SYNTAX. [8 228. 


should do the opposite? Ei οὗτοι ὀρθῶς ἀπέστησαν, ὑμεῖς ἂν od 
χρεὼν ἄρχοιτε, 17 these had a right to secede, you cannot (could not) 
possibly hold your power righifully. 


_ Nore. Sometimes a protasis contains the adverb ἄν, belonging 

not to εἰ, but to the verb. Here the verb is also an apodosis at 
the same time; as ef μὴ ποιήσαιτ᾽ ἂν τοῦτο, if (it is true that) you 
would not do this (i.e. if u should be necessary), which differs entirely 
from εἰ μὴ ποιήσαιτε τοῦτο, if you should not do this; εἰ τοῦτο 
ἰσχυρὸν ἦν ἂν αὐτῷ τεκμήριον, if this would have been a strong proof for 
him (if he had had it). 


2. The apodosis is sometimes introduced by the conjunc- 
tion δέ, which cannot be translated in English. ἢ... 


Ei δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι, but if they do nol give 
her up, then I will take her myself. ety 


Et after Verbs of Wondering, &c. 


§ 228. Some verbs expressing wonder, contentment, dis- 
appointment, indignation, ὅσο. take a protasis with εἰ where a 
causal sentence would seem more natural. So miror δὲ in 
Latin. £.9. 

Θαυμάζω δ᾽ ἔγωγε εἰ μηδεὶς ὑμῶν μήτ᾽ ἐνθυμεῖται μήτ᾽ ὀργίζεται, and I 
wonder that no one of you is erther concerned or angry (lit. if no one 


of you is, &c., 1 wonder). See also § 248, 2, for the principle of 
indirect discourse applied to these sentences. 


Nore. Such verbs are especially θαυμάζω, αἰσχύνομαι, ἀγαπάω, 
and ἀγανακτέω. They sometimes take ὅτι, because, and a causal 
sentence (§ 250). 


ΠῚ. RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 


REMARK. The principles of construction of relative clauses include all 
temporal clauses. Those introduced by ἕως, πρίν, and other particles mean- 
ing until, have special peculiarities, and are therefore treated separately 
(§§ 239, 240). 


8 229. The antecedent of a relative is either definite 
or indefinite. It is definite when the relative refers to a 
definite person or thing, or to some definite time, place, 
or manner; it is indefinite when no such definite person, 
thing, time, place, or manner is referred to. Both definite 


§ 232.) : THE MOODS. 275 


and indefinite antecedents may be either expressed or 
understood. £. ¢. | 


(Definite.) Ταῦτα ἃ ἔχω ὁρᾷς, you see these things which I have ; 
or ἃ ἔχω ὁρᾷς. “Ore ἐβούλετο ἦλθεν, (once) when he wished, he came. 

(Indefinite.) Tlavra ἃ ἂν βούλωνται ἕξουσιν, they will have every- 
thing which they may want; or ἃ ἂν βούλωνται ἕξουσιν, they will have 
whatever they may want. “Ὅταν ἔλθῃ, τοῦτο πράξω, when he shall come 
(or when he comes), I will do this. “Ore βούλοιτο, τοῦτο ἔπρασσεν, 
whenever he wished, he (always) did this. ‘Qs ἂν εἴπω, ποιῶμεν, as I 
shall direct, let us act. 


Definite Antecedent. 


§ 230. A relative as such has no effect on the mood 
of the following verb. A relative with a definite ante- 
cedent therefore may take the indicative (with οὐ for its 
negative) or any other construction which could occur in 
an independent sentence. ἢ... 

Tis ἔσθ᾽ ὁ χῶρος δῆτ᾽ ἐν ᾧ βεβήκαμεν ; i.e. the place in which, &c. 
Ἕως ἐστὶ καιρὸς, ἀντιλάβεσθε τῶν πραγμάτων. (now) while there is an 
opportunity, &c. Τοῦτο οὐκ ἐποίησεν, ἐν ᾧ τὸν δῆμον ἐτίμησεν ἄν, he did 
not do this, in which he would have honored the people. So ὃ μὴ 
γένοιτο, may this not happen. 


Indefinite Antecedent. — Conditional Relative. 


§ 231. A relative clause with an indefinite antecedent 
has a conditional force, and is often called a protasis, 
the antecedent clause being called the apodosis. Such 
a relative is called a conditional relative. The negative 
particle is μή. 


_ Nore. Relative words (like εἰ, if) take ἄν before the subjunc- 
tive. (See § 207, 2.) With ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, and ἐπειδή, ἄν forms 
ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπάν ΟΥ̓ ἐπήν (Ionic ἐπεάν), and ἐπειδάν... “A with ἄν may 
form ἅν. In Homer we generally find ὅτε xe, &c. (like εἴ xe, § 219, 2), 
or ore, &c. alone (8 234). : 


§ 232. The conditional relative sentence has four 
forms (two of present and past, and two of futwre con- 


ditions) which correspond to the four forms of ordinary 
protasis (88 221-224), 


276 SYNTAX. [§ 288. 


1. Present or past condition simply stated (§ 221). E.g. 


Ὅ τι βούλεται δώσω, I will give him whatever he (now) wishes 
(like εἴ τι βούλεται, δώσω, if he (now) wishes anything, I will give it). 
*A μὴ οἶδα, οὐδὲ οἴομαι εἰδέναι, what I do not know, I do not even think 
I know (like εἴ τινα μὴ οἶδα, if there are any things which I do not 
know). 


2. Present or past condition stated so as to imply that 
the condition is not or was not fulfilled (supposition con- 
trary to: fact, ὃ 222). E.g. 


» 


“A μὴ ἐβούλετο δοῦναι, οὐκ ἂν ἔδωκεν, he would not have given what 
he had not wished to give (like εἴ τινα μὴ ἐβούλετο δοῦναι, οὐκ ἂν ἔδευ τεν, 
if he had not wished to give certain things, he would not have given 
them). Οὐκ ἂν ἐπεχειροῦμεν πράττειν ἃ μὴ ἠπιστάμεθα, we should 
not (then) be undertaking to do (as we now are) things which we τε 
not understand (like εἴ τινα μὴ ἠπιστάμεθα, if there were any things 
which we did not understand, the whole belonging to a supposition 
not realized). So ὃν γῆρας €rerpev, Od. i. 217. 

This case occurs much less frequently than the others. 


8. Future condition in the more vivid form (§ 223). 
E.g. 

"0 re dv βούληται, δώσω, I will give him whatever he may wish 
(like ἐάν τι βούληται, δώσω, if he shall wish anything, I will give it). 
Ὅταν μὴ σθένω, πεπάυσομαι, when I (shall) have no more strength, 
1 shall cease. ᾿Αλόχους καὶ νήπια τέκνα ἄξομεν ἐν νήεσσιν, ἐπὴ ν πτολίε- 
θρον ἕλωμεν, we will carry them as soon as we shall have taken the 
city. Hom. 


Norr. The future indicative cannot generally be substituted for 
the subjunctive here, as it can in common protasis (§ 223, N. 1). 


4. Future condition in the /ess vivid form (δ 224). E.g. 


Ὅ τι. βούλοιτο, δοίην av, I should give him whatever he might 
wish (like εἴ τι βούλοιτο, δοίην ἄν, if he should wish anything, I should 
give it). Tlewav φάγοι ἂν ὁπότε βούλοιτο, if he were hungry, he 
would eat whenever he might wish (like εἴ ποτε βούλοιτο, if he should 
ever wish). 

§ 238. The conditional relative sentence has the same 
forms as other conditional sentences (§ 225) in present 
and past general suppositions, taking the subjunctive after 
present tenses, and the optative after past tenses. /.g. 


Ὁ τι ἂν βούληται δίδωμι, 1 (always) give him whatever he wants. 
(like ἐάν τι βούληται, if he ever wants anything). “O τι βούλοιτο 


§ 235.] THE MOODS. ~ 277 


ἐδίδουν, I (always) gave him whatever he wanted (like εἴ τι βούλοιτο). 
Συμμαχεῖν τούτοις ἐθέλουσιν ἅπαντες, ods ἂν ὁρῶσι παρεσκευασμένους, 
all wish to be allies of those whom they see prepared. “Hvik’ ἂν οἴκοι 
γένωνται, δρῶσιν οὐκ ἀνάσχετα, when they get home, they do things 
unbearable. Ovds μὲν ἴδοι εὐτάκτως ἰόντας, τίνες τε εἶεν ἠρώτα, Kat 
ἐπεὶ πύθοιτο ἐπήνει, he (always) asked those whom he saw (at any 
time) marching in good order, who they were; and when he learned, he 
praised them. ᾿Ἐπειδὴ δὲ dvorx Gein, εἰσήειμεν mapa τὸν Σωκράτη, and 
(each morning) when the prison was opened, we went in to Socrates. 


Nore 1. The indicative sometimes takes the place of the sub- 
junctive or optative here, as in the general suppositions of common 
protasis (see § 225, N. 1). ‘This occurs especially in poetry after 
the indefinite relative ὅστις, which itself expresses the same idea 
of indefiniteness which és with the subjunctive or optative usually 
expresses; aS ὅστις μὴ τῶν ἀρίστων ἅπτεται βουλευμάτων, κάκιστος 
εἶναι δοκεῖ, whoever does not cling to the best counsels seems to be most 
base. Soph. Antig. 178. (Here és ἂν μὴ ἅπτηται would be the com- 
mon prose expression.) Such examples belong under § 232, 1. 


Nore 2. Homeric similes sometimes have as, ὥς re, ὡς ὅτε, ὡς ὅς 
(seldom ὥς xe, &c.), with the subjunctive, where we should expect 
the present indicativé, which is sometimes used; as ὡς γυνὴ κλαί- 
no7t,.... ὡς Odvoeds, &c., as a wife weeps, so did Siateay &e. 
Odyss. viii. 523. See Odyss. v. 828; Jl. x. 5; xi. 67. 


§ 234. Conditional relative sentences have most of the 
peculiarities and irregularities of common protasis. Thus, the 
protasis and apodosis may have different forms (§ 227, 1); 
the simple relative is sometimes found in poetry with the sub- 
junctive (like εἰ for ἐάν or εἴ xe, ὃ 223, N. 2); the relative 
clause may depend on an infinitive, participle, or other con- 
struction (§ 226, 8. and 4); and the conjunction δέ may 
connect the relative clause to a following antecedent clause 
(§ 227, 2). 


Assimilation in Conditional Relative Clauses. 


8 235, 1. When a conditional relative clause referring to 
the future depends on a subjunctive or optative referring to 
the future, it regularly takes by assimilation the same mood 
with its leading verb. £.g. 

Ἔάν τινες of ἂν δύνωνται τοῦτο ποιῶσι; καλῶς ἕξει, if any who may 


be able shall do this, it will be well; εἴ τινες οἱ δύναιντο τοῦτο ποιοῖεν, 
καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι, if any who should be (or were) able should do this, it 


278 _ SYNTAX. [8 286. 


would be well. Eide πάντες ot δύναιντο τοῦτο ποιοῖεν, O that all who 
may be (or were) able would do this. (ilere the optative ποιοῖεν, 
§ 251, 1, makes οἱ δύναιντο preferable to ot ἂν δύνωνται, which would 
express the same idea). TeOvainv ὅτε μοι μηκέτι ταῦτα μέλοι, may 
1 die whenever I shall no longer care for these (ὅταν μέλῃ Would express 
the same idea). Soin Latin: Injurias quas ferre nequeas defugi- 
endo relinquas. 


2. Likewise, when a conditional relative sentence depends 
on a secondary tense of the indicative implying the non-ful- 
filment of a condition, it takes by assimilation a similar 
form. L£.9. 


Εἴ τινες οἱ ἐδύναντο τοῦτο ἔπραξαν, καλῶς ἂν εἶχεν, if any who had 
been able had done this, it would have been well. Ei ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ φωνῇ 
τε καὶ TO τρόπῳ ἔλεγον ev ois ἐτεθράμμην, if I were speaking to you 
in the dialect and in the manner in which I had been brought up (all 
introduced by εἰ ξένος ἐτύγχανον ὦν, if I happened to be a foreigner). 
So in Latin: Si solos eos diceres miseros quibus moriendum esset, 
neminem tu quidem eorum qui viverent exciperes. 


Nore. All clauses which come under this principle of assimilation are 
really protases, and belong equally under ὃ 232, 2, ὃ, or 4. This princi- 
ple often decides which form shall be used in future conditions. 

7 


Relative Clauses expressing Purpose, Result, or Cause. 


§ 236, The relative is used with the future indicative 
to express a purpose. L.g. | 


TlpeoBeiav πέμπειν ἥτις ταῦτ᾽ ἐρεῖ καὶ παρέσται τοῖς πράγμασιν. to 
send an embassy to say this, and to be present at the transactions. Οὐ 
yap ἔστι μοι χρήματα, ὁπόθεν ἐκτίσω, for I have no money to pay the 
Jine with. 

The antecedent here may be definite or indefinite; but the nega- 
tive particle is always μή, as in final clauses. : 


Note 1. In Homer, the subjunctive (with κέ joined to the rela- 
tive) is commonly found in this construction after primary tenses, 
and the optative (without κέ) after secondary tenses. The optative 
is sometimes found even in Attic prose, usually depending on 
another optative. 

NotE 2. ἜΦ᾽ ᾧ or ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, on condition that, which commonly 

_ takes the infinitive-(§ 267), sometimes takes the future indicative; 
as ἐπὶ τούτῳ ὑπεξίσταμαι. ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε ὑπ᾽ οὐδενὸς ὑμέων ἄρξομαι, I with- 
draw on this condition, that I shall be ruled by none of you. Hadt. 

Note 8. In this construction the future indicative is very 
rarely changed to the future optative after past tenses. 


§ 239.) ὁ THE MOODS. : 279 


ὃ 237. “Nore (sometimes os), so that, which generally 
takes the infinitive (8 266, 1), is sometimes followed by 
the indicative to express a result. The negative is ov. 
Eg. wc ie 

Οὕτως ἀγνωμόνως ἔχετε, ὥστε ἐλπίζετε αὐτὰ χρηστὰ γενήσεσθαι; are 
you so senseless that you expect them to become good ? 


Remark. When ὥστε takes the infinitive (with negative μή), the 
action of the verb is stated more distinctly as a result depending on 
the action of the leading verb; the indicative emphasizes the action 
rather as an independent fact. Thus, in the preceding example, we 
might have had ἐλπίζειν, when the more natural translation would 
have been are you so senseless as to expect. Sometimes it is indiffer- 
ent whether the indicative or the infinitive is used with ὥστε. 


Nore. A simple relative sentence with ὅς or ὅστις sometimes 
denotes a result, where ὥστε would be expected; as τίς οὕτως εὐήθης 
ἐστὶν, ὅστις ἀγνοεῖ; who is so simple as not to know ? 

§ 238. The relative is sometimes equivalent to ὅτι, be- 
cause, and a personal or demonstrative. The verb is in the 
indicative, as in ordinary causal sentences (§ 250). #.g. 

Θαυμαστὸν ποιεῖς. ὃς ἡμῖν οὐδὲν Sidws,:-you doa strange thing in 
giving us nothing (like ὅτι σὺ οὐδὲν δίδως). Δόξας ἀμαθὴς εἶναι, ds... 
ἐκέλευε, having seemed unlearned, because he commanded, &c. 

Compare causal relative sentences in Latin. 


Temporal Particles signifying Until and Before that. 


§ 239. 1. When ἕως, ἔστε, ἄχρι, μέχρι, and ὄφρα, 
until, refer to a definite point of past time, they take the 
indicative. Δ. 


Νῆχον πάλιν, ἕως ἐπῆλθον cis ποταμόν, I swam on again, until I 
came into a river. Hom. Ταῦτα ἐποίουν, μέχρι σκότος ἐγένετο, this 
they did until darkness came on. 


2. These particles follow the construction of conditional | 
relatives in the last three forms which correspond to or- 
dinary protasis, and in general suppositions. Hg. 


Ἐπίσχες, ἔστ᾽ ἂν καὶ τὰ λοιπὰ προσμάθῃς, wait until you (shall) 
learn the rest besides (8 252, 8). Εἴποιμ᾽ ἂν... ἕως παρατείναιμι 
τοῦτον, I would tell him, &c., until I put him to the torture (8 232, 4; 
§ 235, 1). ‘“Hdéws ἂν τούτῳ ἔτι διελεγόμην, ἕως αὐτῷ... . ἀπέδωκα, 


»- 


280 SYNTAX, ε [8 240, 


I should (in that case) gladly have continued to talk with him until I 
had given him back, ἕο. (ὃ 232, 2; § 235, 2). “Α δ᾽ ἂν ἀσύντακτα ἧ, 
ἀνάγκη ταῦτα ἀεὶ πράγματα παρέχειν, ἕως ἂν χώραν λάβῃ, whatever things 
are in disorder, these must always make trouble until they are put in 
order (§ 233). Περιεμένομεν ἑκάστοτε, ἕως dvorx Gein τὸ δεσμωτήριον, 
we waited each day until the prison was opened (8 233), or until the 
prison should be opened (Note 2). 


Nore 1. The omission of ἄν after these particles and πρίν, when 
the verb is in the subjunctive, is more common than it is after εἰ or 
ordinary relatives (8 223, N. 2), occurring sometimes in Attic 
prose; as μέχρι πλοῦς γένηται, Thuc. i. 137. 

Note 2. Clauses introduced by ἕως, &c. and by πρίν frequently 
imply a purpose; see the examples under 2. When these clauses 
depend upon a past tense, they admit the double construction of 
indirect discourse (§ 248, 8), like final clauses (§ 216, 2). See 
examples under § 248, 3. : 


§ 240. 1. When πρίν, before, until, is not followed by 
the infinitive (see below, 2), it takes the indicative, sub- 
junctive, or optative, following the principles already 
stated for ἕως (ὃ 239). Hg. 


Οὐκ ἦν ἀλέξημ᾽ οὐδὲν, πρίν γ᾽ ἐγώ σφισιν ἔδειξα, &c., there was no 
relief, until I showed them, &c. (ὃ 259, 1). Οὐ χρή με ἐνθένδε ἀπελθεῖν, 
πρὶν ἂν δῷ δίκην. I must not leave this place until he is punished 
(§ 232, 3). Ovx ἂν εἰδείης πρὶν retpnOeins, you would not know until 
you had (should have) tested it (§ 232, 4; § 235, 1). ᾿Ἐχρῆν μὴ πρότε- 
pov συμβουλεύειν, πρὶν ἡμᾶς ἐδίδαξαν, &c., they ought not to have 

iven advice until they had instructed us, &c. (§ 232, 2; § 235, 2). 
Ορῶσι τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους ov πρόσθεν ἀπιόντας, πρὶν ἂν ἀφῶσιν οἱ 
ἄρχοντες, they see that the elders never go away until the authorities 
dismiss them (§ 233). Οὐδαμόθεν ἀφίεσαν, mow παραθεῖεν αὐτοῖς 
ἄριστον. they dismissed them from no place before they had set a meal 
before them (§ 233). ᾿Απηγόρευε μηδένα βάλλειν, πρὶν Κῦρος ἐμπλη- 
σθείη θὴρῶν, he forbade any one to shoot until Cyrus should be sated 
with the hunt (§ 239, 2, N. 2; 8 248, 3). . 

For πρίν without ἄν with the subjunctive, see § 239, N. 1. 


2. In constructions in which πρίν (following the principle 
of ἕως, ὃ 239) might take the subjunctive or optative, these 
moods are generally used only when the leading verb is nega- 
tive or interrogative with an implied negative. It takes the 
indicative (when that would be allowed by the construction) 
after both negative and affirmative sentences, but chiefly after 
negatives. 3 


$ 


§ 242.) THE MOODS. ~ 7 281 


When πρίν does not take the indicative, subjunctive, or 
optative, it is followed by the infinitive (ὃ 274). In Homer, 
the infinitive is the form regularly used after πρίν, without 
regard to the leading sentence. 


Note. [lpi is by ellipsis for πρὶν 7 ( procoan)s and is prob- 
ably for mpo-vov (mpo-w), a comparative of mpd, before. Πρὶν 7, 
πρότερον ἤ, and πρόσθεν ἤ may be used in the same construc- 
tions as πρίν itself. 


IV. INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 


§ 241, 1. A direct quotation or question gives the exact 
words of the original speaker or writer. In an indirect 
quotation or question the original words conform to the 
construction of the sentence in which they are quoted. 


Thus the words ταῦτα βούλομαι may be quoted either directly, 
λέγει τις “ταῦτα βούλομαι,᾽᾽ or indirectly, λέγει τις ὅτι ταῦτα Bov- 
λεται ΟΥ̓ φησί τις ταῦτα βούλεσθαι, some one says that he wishes for this. 
So ἐρωτᾷ ‘ri βούλει ;” he asks, ‘‘ what do you want??? But ἐρωτᾷ τί 
βούλεται, he asks him what he wants. 

2. Indirect quotations may be introduced by ὅτι or as, 
that, or by the infinitive (as in the example given above) ; 
sometimes also by the participle. 

Nore. Ὅτι, that, occasionally introduces even a direct quota- 


tion; as in Anab. i. 6, 8. 
3. Indirect questions follow the same rule as indirect 
quotations in regard to their moods and tenses. 


_ Nore. The term indirect discourse applies to all clauses (even 
single clauses in sentences of different construction) which indirectly 
express the words or thought of any person, even past thoughts of 
the speaker himself (§ 248). 


§ 242, 1. Indirect quotations after ὅτε and ὡς and 
indirect questions follow these general rules :— ~ 

(a) After primary tenses, each verb retains both the 
mood and the tense of the direct discourse. 


282 SYNTAX. [8 248. 


(b) After secondary tenses, each indicative or sub- 
junctive of the direct discourse may be either changed to 
the same tense of the optative or retained in its original 
mood and tense. But all secondary tenses of the indica- 
tive implying non-fulfilment of a condition (§ 222) and 
all optatives are retained unchanged. 


Nore. The imperfect and pluperfect, having no tenses in the 
optative, generally remain unchanged in all kinds of sentences. 
The aorist indicative likewise remains unchanged when it belongs 
to a dependent clause of the direct discourse (§ 247); but when it 
belongs to the leading clause, it is changed to the optative like the 
primary tenses (§ 249). 

2. When the quotation depends on a verb which takes 
the infinitive or participle, its leading verb is changed to 
the corresponding tense of the infinitive or participle 
(dv being retained when there is one), and its dependent 


verbs follow the preceding rule. 


3. “Ay is never omitted with the indicative or optative 
in indirect discourse, if it was used in the direct form; 
but ἄν belonging to a relative word or particle in the 
direct form (§ 207, 2) is regularly dropped when the sub- 
junctive is changed to the optative in indirect discourse. 

Nore. “Ay is never added in the indirect discourse when it was 
not used in the direct form. 

4. The negative particle of the direct discourse is 
regularly retained in the indirect form. But the infini- 


tive and participle occasionally have μή where οὐ would 
be used in direct discourse (§ 283, 3). 


SIMPLE SENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 


Indicative and Optative after ὅτι and ὡς, and in Indirect 
Questions. 


§ 243. When the direct form is an indicative (with- 
out av), the principle of § 242, 1, gives the following rule 


8.248. THE MOODS. 3 283 


for indirect quotations after ὅτε or ὡς and for indirect 
questions : — 

After primary tenses the verb retains both its mood 
and its tense. After secondary tenses it is either 
changed to the same tense of the optative or retained - 
in the original mood and tense. E.g. 


Λέγει ὅτε γράφει, he says that he is writing ; λέγει ὅτι ἔγραφεν, 
he says that he was writing ; λέγει ὅτε ἔγραψεν, he says that he wrote ; 
λέξει ὅτι γέγραφεν, he will say that he has written. ’Epwra τί βού- 
Aovrat, he asks what they want; ἀγνοῶ ti ποιήσουσιν, I do not 
know what they will do. : 

Εἶπεν ὅτι γράφοι or ὅτι γράφει, he said that he was writing (he 
said γράφω). Eimev ὅτι γράψοι or ὅτι γράψει, he said that he 
would write (he said γράψω). Eimev ὅτι γράψ εἰεν or ὅτι ἔγραψεν, 
he said that he had written (he said ἔγραψα, I wrote). Ἐπεν ὅτι 
γεγραφὼς εἴη or ὅτι γέγραφεν, he said that he had written (he said 
γέγραφα, I have written). 

Opt.) ᾿Ἐπειρώμην αὐτῷ δεικνύναι, ὅτι οἴοιτο μὲν εἶναι σοφὸς, εἴη 
δ᾽ οὔ, I tried to show him that he believed himself to be wise, but was not 
so (1.6. οἴεται pev... ἔστι δ᾽ ov). Ὑπειπὼν ὅτι αὐτὸς τἀκεῖ πράξοι; 
ᾧχετο, hinting that he would himself attend to things there, he departed 
(he said αὐτὸς τἀκεῖ πράξω). ᾽Ἐλεξαν ὅτι πέμψειε σφᾶς 6 Ἰνδῶν 
βασιλεύς, κελεύων ἐρωτᾶν ἐξ ὅτου ὁ πόλεμος εἴη, they said that the 
king of the Indians had sent them, commanding them to ask on what 
account there was the war (they said ἔπεμψεν ἡμᾶς, and the question 
was ἐκ Tivos ἐστὶν ὁ πόλεμος ;). "“Hpero εἴ τις ἐμοῦ εἴη σοφώτερος, 
he asked whether there was any one wiser than I (i.e. ἔστι τις σοφώ- 
TEpos ;). 

(Inpic.) Ἔλεγον ὅτι ἐλπίζουσι σὲ καὶ τὴν πόλιν ἕξειν μοι χάριν, 
they said that they hoped you and the state would be grateful to me. 
"Hee δ᾽ ἀγγέλλων Tis ὡς Ἢλάτεια κατείληπται, some one was come 
with a report that Elatea had been taken (here the perfect optative 
might have been used). ᾿Αποκρινάμενοι ὅτι πέμψουσι πρέσβεις, 
εὐθὺς ἀπήλλαξαν, having replied. that they would send ambassadors, they 
dismissed them at once. ᾿Ηπόρουν ti ποτε λέγει; J was uncertain what 
he meant (ri ποτε λέγει ;). ᾿Ἐβουλεύοντο τίν᾽ αὐτοῦ καταλείψουσ εν; 
they were considering (the question) whom they should leave here. 


Nore 1. The imperfect and pluperfect regularly remain un- 
changed in this construction after secondary tenses (ὃ 242, 1, N.). 
But occasionally the present optative represents the imperfect here; 
as ἀπεκρίναντο ὅτι οὐδεὶς μάρτυς παρείη, they replied that there had been 
no witness present (οὐδεὶς παρῆν), Where the context makes it clear 
that παρείη does not stand for πάρεστι. See ὃ 203, N. 1. 


Nore 2. In a few cases the Greek changes a present indicative 
to the imperfect, or a perfect to the pluperfect, in this construetion, 


284 SYNTAX. [ὃ 244. 


instead of retaining it or changing it to the optative; as ἐν ἀπορίᾳ 
ἦσαν, ἐννοούμενοι ὅτι ἐπὶ ταῖς βασιλέως θύραις ἦσαν, προὐδεδώκεσαν 
δὲ αὐτοὺς οἱ βάρβαροι, they were in despair, considering that they were 
at the King’s gates, and that the barbarians had betrayed them. (See 
the whole passage, Anab. iii. 1, 2.) This is also the English 
usage. 


Subjunctive or Optative representing the Interrogative 
Subjunctive. 


§ 244, In indirect questions, after a primary tense, an 
interrogative subjunctive (δ 256) retains its mood and 
tense; after a secondary tense, it may be either changed 
to the same tense of the optative or retained in the sub- 
junctive. Eg. 


BovAevouat ὅπως σε ἀποδρῶ, I am trying to think how I shall 
escape you (πῶς σε ἀποδρῶ;). Οὐκ oi8 εἰ Χρυσάντᾳ τούτῳ δῶ, I do not 
know whether I shall give them ἰο. Chrysantas here. Οὐκ ἔχω τί εἴπω, 
I do not know what I shall say (ri εἴπω;) Non habeo quid dicam. 
᾿Ἐπήροντο εἰ παραδοῖεν τὴν πόλιν, they asked whether they should give 
up the city (mapadépev τὴν πόλιν ; shall we give up the city?). “Hrépe 
6 τι χρήσαιτο τῷ πράγματι, he was at a loss how to deal with the 
matter (ri χρήσωμαι;). ᾿Ἐβουλεύοντο εἴτε κατακαύσωσιν εἴτε τι 
ἄλλο χρήσωνται, they were deliberating whether they should burn 
them or dispose of them in some other way. 


ΝΟΤΕ 1. An interrogative subjunctive may be changed to the 
optative when the leading verb is in the optative, contrary to the 
general usage in indirect discourse (8 201, N. 2); as οὐκ ἂν ἔχοις 
ὅ τι εἴποις, you would not know what to say. 


Norte 2. In these cases εἰ (not ἐάν) is used for whether, before 
the subjunctive as well as the optative: see the second example. 


Indicative or Optative with ἄν. 


§ 245, An indicative or optative with ἄν retains its mood 
and tense (with av) unchanged in indirect discourse after ὅτι 
or ὡς and in indirect questions. 1.9. 


Λέγει (or ἔλεγεν) ὅτι τοῦτο dv ἐγένετο, he says (or said) that this 
would have happened ; ἔλεγεν ὅτι οὗτος δικαίως ἂν ἀποθάνοι, he said 
that this man would justly die. ᾿Ηρώτων εἰ δοῖεν ἂν τὰ πιστά, they asked 
whether they would give the pledges (Soinre ἄν;). 


8 2417.] 


e 
͵ ro « "hal 


: δ 246. When the infinitive or participle is used“in’ «~~ 
indirect discourse, its tense represents the tense of the 


finite verb in the direct form to which it corresponds, the 
present and perfect including the imperfect and pluper- 
fect. Each tense with dv can represent the correspond- 
ing tenses of either indicative or optative with ἄν. E.g. 


᾿Αρρωστεῖν προφασίζεται, he pretends that he is ill; ἐξώμοσεν 
ἀρρωστεῖν τουτονί, he took an oath that this man was ill. Kara- 
σχεῖν φησι τούτους, he says that he detained them. “Edn χρήμαθ᾽ 
ἑαυτῷ τοὺς Θηβαίους ἐπικεκηρυχέναι, he said that the Thebans had — 
offered a reward for him. ᾿ἘΕπαγγέλλεται τὰ δίκαια ποιήσειν, 
he promises to do what is right. See examples under ὃ 203, 
and N. 1. 

Ἤγγειλε τούτους ἐρχομένους, he announced that these were coming 
(οὗτοι ἔρχονται) ; ἀγγέλλει τούτους ἐλθόντας, he announces that these 
came: ἀγγέλλει τοῦτο γενησόμενον, he announces that this will be 
done; ἤγγειλε τοῦτο γενησόμενον, he announced that this would be 
done ; ἤγγειλε τοῦτο γεγενημένον, he announced that this had been 
done (τοῦτο avin. | 

See examples of ἄν with infinitive and participle under § 211. 


Note. The infinitive is said to stand in indirect discourse and its 
tenses correspond to those of the finite moods, when it depends on 
a verb implying thought or the expression of thought, and when also 
the thought, as originally conceived, would have been expressed b 
some tense of the indicative.(with or without ἄν) or optative (wit 
ay), and can therefore be transferred without change of tense to the 
infinitive. Thus in βούλεται ἐλθεῖν, he wishes to go, ἐλθεῖν repre- 
sents no form of either aorist indicative or aorist optative, and is 
not in indirect discourse. But in φησὶν ἐλθεῖν, he says that he went, 
ἐλθεῖν represents ἦλθον of the direct discourse. 


INDIRECT QUOTATION OF COMPOUND SENTENCES. 


§ 247. When a compound sentence is indirectly 
quoted, its /eading verb follows the rule for simple sen- 
tences (§§ 243-246). 

After primary tenses the dependent verbs of the quo- 
tation retain the same mood and tense. After secondary. 
tenses, all primary tenses of the indicative and al/ sub- | 


286 ‘SYNTAX. [§ 247. 


junctives may either be changed to the same tense of the 
optative or retain the mood and tense of the direct 
form. But dependent secondary tenses of the indicative 
are kept unchanged. Κι. 


“Av ὑμεῖς λέγητε, ποιήσειν (φησὶν) ὃ μήτ᾽ αἰσχύνην μήτ᾽ ἀδοξίαν 
αὐτῷ φέρει, if you (shall) say so, he says he will do whatever does not 
bring shame or discredit to him. Here no change is made, except. in 
ποιήσειν (ὃ 246). 

᾿Απεκρίνατο ὅτι μανθάνοιεν ἃ οὐκ ἐπίσταιντο, he replied, that they 
were learning what they did not understand (be said μανθάνουσιν ἃ 
οὐκ ἐπίστανται, Which might have been retained). Ei τινα φεύγοντα 
λήψοιτο, mponydpevev ὅτι ws πολεμίῳ χρήσοιτο, he announced that 
if he should catch any one running away, he should treat him as an 
enemy (he said εἴ τινα λήψομαι, χρήσομαι, ὃ 223, N. 1). Ἐνόμιζεν, 
ὅσα τῆς πόλεως προλάβοι, πάντα ταῦτα βεβαίως ἕξειν, he believed 
that he should hold all those places securely which he should take from 
the city beforehand (ὅσ᾽ ἂν προλάβω, ἕξω). ᾿Ἐδόκει μοι ταύτῃ πειρᾶσθαι 
σωθῆναι, ἐνθυμουμένῳ ὅτι, ἐὰν μὲν λάθω, σωθήσομαι. it seemed best 
to me to try to gain safety in this way, thinking that, if 1 should 
escape notice, I should be saved (here we might have had εἰ λάθοιμι, 
σωθησοίμην). "Ἑφασαν τοὺς ἄνδρας ἀποκτενεῖν ods ἔχουσι ζῶντας, 
they said that they should kill the men whom they had living (ἀποκτε- 
νοῦμεν ods ἔχομεν. Which might have been changed to ἀποκτενεῖν 
avs ἔχοιεν). Πρόδηλον ἦν (τοῦτο) ἐσόμενον, εἰ μὴ κωλύσετε. it 
was plain that this would be so unless you should prevent (τοῦτο 
ἔσται, εἰ μὴ κωλύσετε, Which might have become εἰ μὴ κωλύσοιτε). 
"Ἤλπιζον τοὺς Σικελοὺς ταύτῃ, ois μετεπέμψαντο, ἀπαντήσεσθαι. they 
hoped the Sikels whom they had sent for would meet them here (N. 2). 


Note 1. One verb may be changed to the optative while another 
is retained; as δηλώσας ὅτι ἕτοιμοί εἰσι μάχεσθαι, εἴ τις ἐξέρχοιτο, 
having shown that they were ready to fight if any one should come 
Sorth (ἕτοιμοί εἰσιν, ἐάν τις ἐξέρχηται). This sometimes causes a great 
variety of constructions in the same sentence. 


Note 2. The aorist indicative is not changed to the aorist opta- 
tive in dependent clauses, because the latter tense is commonly 
used to represent the aorist subjunctive. In dependent clauses in 
which confusion would be impossible (as in causal sentences, which 
never have a subjunctive), even an aorist indicative may become 
optative. ᾿ 

For the imperfect and pluperfect see § 242, 1 (Ὁ), Note. 


Note 3. A dependent optative of the direct form naturally 
᾿ remains unchanged in all indirect discourse. 


Note 4. Occasionally a dependent present or perfect indicative 
is changed to the imperfect or pluperfect, as in the leading clause 
(§ 248, N. 2). : 


8 248.] THE MOODS. 287 


§ 248. The principles of § 247 apply also to any 
dependent clause (in a sentence of any kind) which 
expresses indirectly the past thoughts of any person, even 
of the speaker himself. 


This applies especially to the following constructions : — 


1. ‘Clauses depending on an infinitive after verbs of wish- 
ing, commanding, advising, &c., which imply thought, although 
the infinitive after them is not in indirect discourse ($ 246, 
Note). | 


2. Clauses containing a protasis with the apodosis implied 
in the context (δ 226, 4, N. 1), or with the apodosis expressed 
in a verb like θαυμάζω (ὃ 228). 


3. Temporal clauses expressing a past intention or purpose, 
especially those introduced by ἕως or πρίν after past tenses. 


4, Even ordinary relative sentences, which would regularly 
take the indicative. 


This affects the construction of course only after past 
tenses. L.9. 


(1) ᾿Εβούλοντο ἐλθεῖν, εἰ τοῦτο γένοιτο, they wished to go if this 
should happen. (Here ἐβούλοντο ἐλθεῖν, ἐὰν τοῦτο γένηται might be 
used, expressing the form, if this shall happen, in which the wish 
would be conceived. Here ἐλθεῖν is not in indirect discourse. 
(§ 226, 4; § 246, N.) ᾿Ἐκέλευσεν ὃ τι δύναιντο λαβόντας μεταδιώκειν, 
he commanded them to take what they could and pursue (he said 6 τε 
ἂν δύνησθε, what you can, and therefore we might have had 6 τι ἂν 
δύνωνται). Προεῖπον αὐτοῖς μὴ ναυμαχεῖν ἹΚορινθίοις, ἣν μὴ ἐπὶ Κέρκυραν 
πλέωσι καὶ μέλλωσιν ἀπυβαίνειν, they instructed them not to engage 
ina sea fight with Corinthians, unless these should be sailing against 
Corcyra and should be on the point of landing. (Here the direct 
forms are retained, for which εἰ μὴ πλέοιεν καὶ μέλλοιεν might 
have been used.) ? 


(2) "Quxretpov, εἰ ἁλώσοιντο, they pitied them, in case they should 
be captured (the thought being εἰ ἁλώσονται, which might have 
been retained). Φύλακας συμπέμπει, ὅπως φυλάττοιεν αὐτὸν, καὶ εἰ τῶν 
ἀγρίων τι φανείη θηρίων, he sends (sent) guards, to guard him and (to 
be ready) in case any of the savage beasts should appear (the thought 
being ἐάν τι φανῇ). Τἄλλα, ἣν ἔτι ναυμαχεῖν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τολμήσωσι, 
παρεσκευάζοντο, they made the other preparations, (to be ready) in case 
the Athenians should still venture a naval batile. "Eyaipov ἀγαπῶν εἴ 
τις ἐάσοι, I rejoiced, being content if any one would let it pass (the 


288 SYNTAX. [8 249. 


thought was ἀγαπῶ εἴ τις ἐάσει). ᾿Εθαύμαζεν εἴ τις ἀργύριον πράτ- 
τοιτο, he wondered that any one demanded money (Xen. Mem. 
i. 2, 7); but in the same book (i. 1, 18) we find ἐθαύμαζε δ᾽ εἰ μὴ 
φανερὸν αὐτοῖς ἐστιν, he wondered that it was not plain. 


(3) Σπονδὰς ἐποιήσαντο ἕως ἀπαγγελθείη τὰ λεχθέντα εἰς Aake- 
δαίμονα, they made a truce, (to continue) until what had been said should 
be reported at Sparta (their thought was ἕως ἂν ἀπαγγελθῇ, which 
might have been retained). Οὐ yap δή odeas ἀπίει ὁ θεὸς τῆς ἀποι- 
kins, πρὶν δὴ ἀπίκωνται ἐς αὐτὴν Λιβύην, 1.6. until they shouid come, 
&c. (where ἀπίκοιντο might have been used). Hdt. Μένοντες 
ἕστασαν ὁππότε πύργος Τρώων ὁρμήσειε, they stood waiting until (for 
the time when) a column should rush upon the Trojans. Hom, 

(4) Καὶ ἥτεε σῆμα ἰδέσθαι, 6 tre pa of γαμβροῖο πάρα Προίτοιο 
φέροιτο, he asked to see the token, which he was bringing (as he 
sail) from Proetus. Karnydpeov τῶν Αἰγινητέων τὰ πεποιήκοιεν 
προδόντες τὴν Ἑλλάδα, they accused the Aeginetans for what (as they 
ns they had done in betraying Greece. 

or the same principle in causal sentences, see § 250, Note. 


Nore. On this principle, final and object clauses with ἵνα, ὅπως, 
ὡς, μή, &c. admit the double construction of indirect discourse, and 
allow either the subjunctive or future indicative (as the case may 
be) to stand unchanged after secondary tenses. (See § 216, 2. 
The same principle extends to all conditional and all conditional 
relative and temporal sentences depending on final or object clauses, 
as these too belong to the indirect discourse. 


“Ὅπως AND HOMERIC’O IN INDIRECT QUOTATIONS. 


§ 249. 1. In a few cases ὅπως is used for ds or ὅτι in 
indirect quotations, chiefly in poetry. 1.9. 


Τοῦτο μή μοι φράζ᾽, ὅπως οὐκ εἶ κακός, do not tell me this, that you 
are not base. Soph. 


2. Homer rarely uses 6 (neuter of ὅς) for ὅτι. 1.0. 


A 


_Acvocere yap τό γε πάντες, ὅ μοι γέρας ἔρχεται ἄλλῃ, for you all see 
this, that my prize goes another way. Τιγνώσκων ὅ οἱ αὐτὸς ὑπείρεχε 
χεῖρας ᾿Απόλλων, knowing that Apollo himself held over him his hands. 


V. CAUSAL SENTENCES. 


§ 250. Causal sentences express a cause or reason, and 
are introduced by ὅτι, ὡς, because, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, ὅτε, ὁπότε, 
since, and by other particles of similar meaning. , They» 


§ 251.] THE MOODS. 289 


take the indicative after both primary and secondary 
tenses. ‘The negative particle is od. E.g. 


Κήδετο yap Δαναῶν, ὅτι ῥα θνήσκοντας ὁρᾶτο, for he pitied the 
Danai, because he saw them dying. “Ore τοῦθ᾽ οὕτως ἔχει, προσήκει, 
&c., since this is so, it is becoming, &c. 


Nore. On the principle of indirect discourse (§ 248), the optative 
may be used in a causal sentence after a past tense, to imply that 
the cause is assigned on the authority of some other person than the 
speaker; as τὸν Περικλέα ἐκάκιζον, ὅτι στρατηγὸς dv οὐκ ἐπεξάγοι, 
they abused Pericles, because (as they said) being general he did not 
lead them out. Thuc. (This assigns the Athenians’ reason for abus- 
ing him, and does not show the historian’s opinion.) 


VI. EXPRESSION OF A WISH. 


§ 251. 1. When a wish refers to the future, it is ex- 
pressed by the optative, either with or without εἴθε or εἰ 
yap (Hom. αἴθε, at γάρ), O that, Oif. The negative is 
μή: which can stand alone with the optative. £.g. 


Al yap ἐμοὶ τοσσήνδε θεοὶ δύναμιν παραθεῖεν, O that the Gods would 
clothe. me with so much strength. Hom. Τὸ μὲν νῦν ταῦτα πρήσσοις 
τάπερ ἐν χερσὶν ἔχεις, for the present may you continue to do these 
things which you have now in hand. Wdt. Ἐἴθε φίλος ἡμῖν γένοιο, 
O that you may become our friend. Μηκέτι (anv ἐγώ, may I no longer 
live. Τεθναίην, ὅτε μοι μηκέτι ταῦτα μέλοι, may 1 die when I shall 
no longer care for these things (§ 235, 1). 

For the distinction between the present and aorist see § 202, 1. 


Nore 1. In poetry εἰ alone is sometimes used with the optative 
in wishes; as εἴ por γένοιτο φθόγγος ἐν βραχίοσιν, O that I might 
Jind a voice in my arms. Eur. 


Notr 2. The poets, especially Homer, sometimes prefix ὡς (not 
translatable) to the optative in wishes; 845 ὡς ἀπόλοιτο καὶ ἄλλος ὅτις 
τοιαῦτά ye ῥέζοι, likewise may any other perish who may do the like. 


Nore 3. In poetry, especially in Homer, the optative alone 
sometimes expresses a concession or permission, sometimes a command 
or exhortation ; as αὖτις ᾿Αργείην “Ἑλένην Μενέλαος ἄγοιτο, Menelaus 
may take back Argive Helen. TeOvains, ὦ Tpoir’,i κάκτανε Βελλερο- 
φόντην, either die, or kill Bellerophontes: Here, and in the optative 
alone in wishes, we probably have an original independent use of 
the optative; while all the forms of wishes introduced by εἴθε, εἰ 
γάρ. or εἰ are elliptical protases, as is seen by the use of εἰ, and by 
the force of the tenses, which is the same as it is in protasis. 

19 


290 ‘SYNTAX, [§ 252. 


2. When a wish refers to the present or the past, and 
- it is implied that its object is not or was not attained, it 
is expressed by a secondary tense of the indicative with 
εἴθε or εἰ yap, Which here cannot be omitted. The imper- 
fect and aorist are distinguished here as in protasis 


(§ 222). Eg. 


Εἴθε τοῦτο ἐποίει, O that he were doing this, or O that he had done 
this. Ἐἴθε τοῦτο ἐποίησεν, O that he had done this; εἰ yap μὴ 
ἐγένετο τοῦτο, O that this had not happened. 

EW εἶχες βελτίους φρένας, O that thou hadst a better understanding. 
Ei γὰρ τοσαύτην δύναμιν εἶχον, O that I had so great power. Eide σοι 
τότε συνεγενόμην, O that 1 had then met with you. 


Note 1. The aorist ὥφελον of ὀφείλω, debeo, and in Homer some- 
times the imperfect ὥφελλον, are used with the infinitive in wishes, 
with the same meaning as the secondary tenses of the indicative; as 
ὥφελε τοῦτο ποιεῖν, would that he were doing this (lit. he ought to be 
doing this), or would that he had done this (habitually); ὥφελε τοῦτο 
ποιῆσαι, would that he had done this. For the distinction made by 
the different tenses of the infinitive, see § 222, N. 2. 


Norte 2. Ὠφελον is negatived by μή (not od), and it may even 
be preceded by εἴθε, εἰ γάρ, or ὡς; aS μή mor Sedov λιπεῖν τὴν 
Σκῦρον, O that I had never left Scyros; εἰ yap ὥ φελον οἷοί τε εἶναι, O 
that they were able, &c.; so ὡς ὥφελες ὀλέσθαι. As this is really an 
apodosis, like ἔδει, &c., with the infinitive (§ 222, N. 2), the use of 
εἴθε and εἰ γάρ with it is an anomaly: μή should perhaps be con- 
structed with the infinitive. 


VI. IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE IN COMMANDS, 
~EXHORTATIONS, AND PROHIBITIONS. 


§ 252. The imperative expresses a command, exhorta- 
tion, or entreaty; as λέγε, speak thou; φεῦγε, begone ! 
ἐλθέτω, let him come ; χαιρόντων, let them rejoice. 


Notr. A combination of acommand and a question is found in 
such phrases as οἶσθ᾽ ὃ δρᾶσον; do—dost thou know what? 


§ 253. The first person of the subjunctive (generally 
plural) is used in exhortations. Its negative is μή. E.g. 


Ἴωμεν, let us go; ἴδωμεν, let us see; μὴ τοῦτο ποιῶμεν, let us 
not do this. 


§ 256.] THE MOODS. 291 


Norte. Both subjunctive and imperative may be preceded by 
ἄγε (ἄγετε), φέρε, or ἴθι, come! ‘These words are used without 
regard to the number or person of the verb which follows; as dye 
μίμνετε πάντες. 


§ 254, In prohibitions, in the second and third per- 
sons, the present imperative or the aorist subjunctive is 
used with μή and its compounds. 1... 


Μὴ ποίει τοῦτο, do not do this (habitually), or do not. ga on doing 
this; pn ποιήσῃς «τοῦτο, (simply) do not do this. Μὴ κατὰ τοὺς 
νόμους δικάσητε- μὴ βοηθήσητε τῷ πεπονθότι δεινά" μὴ evopKeire, 
do not judge according to the laws; do not help him who has suffered 
outrages ; do not abide by your oaths. 

The two forms have merely the usual distinction between the 
present and aorist (§ 202, 1). 


Notre. The third person of the aorist imperative sometimes 
occurs in prohibitions; the second person very rarely. 


VIII. SUBJUNCTIVE LIKE FUTURE INDICATIVE 
(IN HOMER).—INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. — 
SUBJUNCTIVE AND FUTURE INDICATIVE WITH 


οὐ μή. 
§ 255. In Homer, the subjunctive in independent sen- 
tences sometimes has the force of a future indicative. L.g. 


Οὐ γάρ πω τοίους ἴδον ἀνέρας, οὐδὲ ἴδωμαι, for I never yet saw nor 
shall l ever see such men. Καί ποτέ τις εἴπῃσιν, and one will (or 
may) some time say. 


Note. This subjunctive may, like the future indicative, take 
ay or κέ to form an apodosis. See § 209, 2, with the example. 

§ 256. The first person of the subjunctive, and some- 
times the third, may be used in questions of doubt, where 
a person asks himself or another what he is todo. It is — 
negatived by μή. It is often introduced by βούλει or 
βούλεσθε (in poetry θέλεις or θέλετε). E.ug 

Εἴπω ταῦτα; shall I say this? or βούλει εἴπω ταῦτα; do you wish 
that I should say this? Tot τράπωμαι; ποῖ πορευθῶ; whither shall 
I turn? whither shall I go? Tov δὴ βούλει καθιζόμενοι ἀναγνῶμεν; 
where now wilt thou that we sit down and read? Τί τις εἶναι τοῦτο φῇ; 
what shall any one (i.e. I) say this is? 


So in τί πάθω; what will become of me? what harm will it do me? 
(lit. what shall I undergo ?) 


292 SYNTAX. a [§ 257. 


§ 257. The subjunctive and future indicative are 
used with the double negative οὐ μή in the sense of the 
future indicative with οὐ, but with more emphasis. £.¢. 


Od μὴ πίθηται, he will not obey. Οὔτε yap γίγνεται, οὔτε γέγονεν, 
οὐδὲ οὖν ph γένηται, for there is not, nor has there been, nor will 
there ever be, ἕο. Οὔ mor ἐξ ἐμοῦ ye μὴ πάθῃς τόδε, you never shall 
suffer this at my hands. Οὔ τοι μήποτέ oe. . - ἄκοντά τις ἄξει, no one 
shall ever take you against your will, &c. 

The double negative here seems to have merely the force of 
emphasis, and the subjunctive is a relic of the old usage (ὃ 259). 
The aorist subjunctive is generally used in these expressions. 


Notre. This construction in the second person sometimes ex- 
presses a strong prohibition; as οὐ pp καταβήσει, do not come down 
(lit. you shall not come down); od μὴ σκώψῃς, do not mock. The 
future indicative and the aorist subjunctive are both allowed in this 
sense. The imperative force is to be explained as in the future 
used imperatively (§ 200, N. 8). : 

ἐκ 


THE INFINITIVE. 


§ 258. The infinitive has the force of a neuter verbal 
noun, and may take the neuter article in all its cases. It 
may at the same time, like a verb, have a subject or ob- 
ject; and it is qualified by adverbs, not by adjectives. 


§ 259. The infinitive as nominative may be the sub- 
ject of a finite verb, especially of an impersonal verb 
(§ 134, N. 2) or of ἐστί; or it may be a predicate 
(§ 186). As accusative it may be the subject of another 
infinitive. Hg. | 


Συνέβη αὐτῷ ἐλθεῖν, it happened to him to go; ἐξῆν μένειν, it was 
possible to remain; ἡδὺ πολλοὺς ἐχθροὺς ἔχειν; is it pleasant to have 
many enemies? φησὶν ἐξεῖναι τούτοις μένειν he says it is possible for 
these to remain (μένειν being subject of ἐξεῖναι). Τὸ γνῶναι ἐπιστή- 
μὴν λαβεῖν ἐστιν, to learn is to acquire knowledge. Τοῦτό ἐστι τὸ adu- 
κεῖν, this is to commit injustice. Τὸ yap θάνατον δεδιέναι οὐδὲν ἄλλο 
ἐστὶν ἢ δοκεῖν σοφὸν εἶναι μὴ ὄντα, for to fear death (the fear of 
death) is nothing else than to seem to be wise without being so. 


Note. These infinitives usually stand without the article; but 
whenever it is desired to make the infinitive more prominent as a 
ye (see the last examples), the article can be added. See § 260, 

. 2 . ie 
; ‘ 


§ 260.] THE INFINITIVE. 293 


§ 260. The infinitive without the article may be the 
object of a verb. It generally has the force of an object 
accusative, sometimes that of a cognate accusative, and 
sometimes that of an object genitive. 


1. The object infinitive not in indirect discourse may follow 
any verb whose action naturally implies another action as its 
object. Such verbs are in general the same in Greek as in 
English, and others must be learned by practice. .g. 


Βούλεται ἐλθεῖν, he wishes to go: βούλεται τοὺς πολίτας πολεμικοὺς 
εἶναι, he wishes the citizens to be warlike; παραινοῦμέν σοι μένειν, 
we advise you to remain; προείλετο πολεμῆσαι, he preferred to make 
war; κελεύει σε μὴ ἀπελθεῖν, he commands you not to depart; ἀξιοῦ- 
ow ἄρχειν, they claim the right torule; ἀξιοῦται θανεῖν, he is thought 
to deserve to die; δέομαι ὑμῶν συγγνώμην μοι ἔχειν, I ask you to have 
consideration for me. So κωλύει σε βαδίζειν, he prevents you from 
marching ; ov πέφυκε δουλεύειν, he is not born to be a slave: ἀναβάλ- 
λεται τοῦτο ποιεῖν, he postpones doing this; κινδυνεύει θανεῖν, he is 


in danger of death. 


Norte 1. The tenses here used are chiefly the present and aorist, 
and these do not differ in their time (§ 202, 1, 2, and 3). In this 
construction the infinitive has no more reference to time than any 
other verbal noun would have, but the meaning of the verb gene- 
rally gives it a reference to the future; as in ἀξιοῦται θανεῖν (above) 
θανεῖν expresses time only so far as θανάτου would do so in its place. 
Its negative is μή (§ 283, 3). 

Note 2.. When the infinitive is the object of a verb which does not com- 
monly take this construction, it generally has the article ; as τὸ τελευτῆσαι 
πάντων ἣ πεπρωμένη κατέκρινεν, Fate adjudged death to all. Occasionally 
even the ordinary verbs included in ὃ 260, 1 (as verbs of wishing) take the ᾿ 
infinitive with τό as an object accusative, chiefly in poetry ; as τὸ δρᾶν οὐκ 
ἠθέλησαν, they were not willing to act. 


2. The object infinitive in indirect discourse (§ 203) follows 
a verb implying thought or the expression of thought, or some 
equivalent phrase. Here each tense of the infinitive corre- 
sponds in time to the same tense of some finite mood. See 
§ 246, with the examples and Note. 

Nore 1. Of the three common verbs meaning to say, — 

(a) φημί regularly takes the infinitive in indirect discourse; 

(0) εἶπον takes ὅτι or ὡς with the indicative or optative; 


(c) λέγω allows either construction, but in the active voice it gen- 
erally takes ὅτι or ὡς. 


294 SYNTAX. : [8 261. 


Norte 2. A relative clause depending on an infinitive in indirect 
discourse sometimes takes the infinitive by assimilation; as ἐπειδὴ 
δὲ γενέσθαι ἐπὶ τῇ οἰκίᾳ, (ἔφη) ἀνεῳγμένην καταλαμβάνειν τὴν θύραν, 
and when they came to the house, they found the door open (he said). 
Herodotus allows this even after εἰ, if, and διότι, because. 


§ 261, 1. The infinitive without the article limits the 
meaning of many adjectives and nouns. Eg. 


Avvards ποιεῖν τοῦτο, able to do this: δεινὸς λέγειν, skilled in 
speaking ; ἄξιος τοῦτο λαβεῖν, worthy to receive this. πρόθυμος λέ- 
yetv, eager lo speak ; μαλακοὶ καρτερεῖν, (too) effeminate to endure: 
ἐπιστήμων λέγειν τε καὶ σιγᾶν; knowing how both to speak and to be 
silent. 

᾿Ανάγκη ἐστὶ πάντας ἀπελθεῖν. there is a necessity that all should 
withdraw ; κίνδυνος ἦν αὐτῷ παθεῖν τι, he was in danger of suffering 
something; ὥρα ἀπιέναι, it is time to go away; ἐλπίδας ἔχει τοῦτὸ 


ποιῆσαι; he has hopes of doing this. a 


Note 1. Adjectives of this class are especially those denoting 
ability, fitness, desert, readiness, and their opposites; and, in general, 
those corresponding in meaning to verbs which take the infinitive 
(ὃ 260, 1). Nouns of this class are such as form with a verb (gen- 
erally εἰμί) an expression equivalent to a verb which takes the 
object infinitive. Most nouns take the infinitive with the article as 
an adnominal genitive (§ 262, 2). 


Norte 2. The article is sometimes prefixed to the infinitive here, 
as after verbs (§ 260, 1, N. 2). This shows more clearly its char- 
acter as an object accusative ; as τὸ βίᾳ πολιτῶν δρᾶν ἔφυν ἀμήχανος, 
I am incapable of acting in defiance of the citizens. 


2. Any adjective or adverb may take the infinitive 
without the article as an accusative of specification 
(§ 160,1). Lg. 


Θέαμα αἰσχρὸν ὁρᾶν, a sight disgraceful to behold ; λόγοι ὑμῖν χρη- 
σιμώτατοι ἀκοῦσαι; words most useful fur you to hear; ta χαλεπώτατα 
εὑρεῖν, the things hardest to find ; πολιτεία χαλεπὴ ov ζῆν, a govern- 
ment hard to live under. Κάλλιστα (adv.) ideiv, in a manner most 
delightful to behold. 


Remark. This infinitive is generally active rather than passive; 
aS πρᾶγμα χαλεπὸν ποιεῖν, a thing hard to do, rather than χαλεπὸν 
ποιεῖσθαι, hard to be done. ‘ 


Nore. Nouns and even verbs may take the infinitive on this 
principle; as θαῦμα ἰδέσθαι, a wonder to behold. ᾿Αριστεύεσκε μά- 
χεσθαι, he was the first in fighting (like μάχην). Hom. ; 


§ 263.] THE INFINITIVE. | 295 


§ 262, 1. The infinitive may depend on a preposition, 
in which case the article.tod, τῷ, or τό must be pre- 
fixed. ig. : 


Πρὸ τοῦ τοὺς ὅρκους ἀποδοῦναι, before taking the oaths; πρὸς τῷ 
μηδὲν ἐκ τῆς πρεσβείας λαβεῖν, besides receiving nothing by the embassy ; 
διὰ τὸ ξένος εἶναι οὐκ ἂν οἴει ἀδικηθῆναι; do you think you would not 
be wronged on account of your being a stranger ? 


2. The genitive and dative of the infinitive, with the 
article, can stand in most of the constructions belonging 
to those cases; as in that of the adnominal genitive, the 
genitive after a comparative or after verbs and adjectives, 
the dative of manner, means, &c., the dative after verbs 
and adjectives, and sometimes in that of the genitive of 
cause or purpose (§ 118,1). Eg. 


Τοῦ πιεῖν ἐπιθυμία, a desire to drink; κρεῖττον τοῦ λαλεῖν; better 
than prating ; ἐπέσχομεν τοῦ δακρύειν, we ceased our weeping (8 263); 
ἀήθεις τοῦ κατακούειν τινός εἰσιν, they are unused to obeying any one. 
Τῷ φανερὸς εἶναι τοιοῦτος ὦν, by having it evident that he was such a 
man; τῷ κοσμίως ζῆν πιστεύειν, to trust in an orderly life; ἴσον τῷ 
προστένειν, equal to lamenting beforehand. Μίνως τὸ λῃστικὸν καθῃ- 
ρει, τοῦ τὰς προσόδους μᾶλλον ἰέναι αὐτῷ, Minos put down piracy, that 
his revenues might come in more abundantly. Thue. 


§ 263. 1. Verbs and expressions denoting hindrance or 
freedom from anything allow either the infinitive with rod 
(§ 262, 2) or the simple infinitive (§ 260, 1). As the infin- 
itive after such verbs can take the negative μή without affect- 
ing the sense (§ 283, 6), we have a third and fourth form, 
still with the same meaning. (See Note, and ὃ 263,2.) .g. 


Εἴργει σε τοῦτο ποιεῖν, εἴργει σε TOU τοῦτο ποιεῖν, εἴργει σε μὴ 
τοῦτο ποιεῖν, εἴργει σε τοῦ μὴ τοῦτο ποιεῖν, all meaning he prevents 
you from doing this. Τὸν. Φίλιππον παρελθεῖν οὐκ ἐδύναντο κωλῦσαι, 
they could not hinder Philip from passing through. Τοῦ δραπετεύ- 
εἰν ἀπείργουσι, they restrain them from running away. “Omep ἔσχε μὴ 
τὴν Πελοπόννησον πορθεῖν, which prevented (hen) from ravaging 
Peloponnesus. "Eee αὐτόὺς τοῦ μὴ καταδῦναι, it will keep them 
JSrom sinking. ' 


Notr. When the leading verb is negatived (or interrogative im- 
plying a negative), the double negative μὴ οὐ is generally used 
rather than the simple μή with the infinitive (§ 283, 7) so that we 


296 7 SYNTAX. τς [8 264, 


can say οὐκ εἴργει σε μὴ οὐ τοῦτο ποιεῖν, he does not prevent you from 
doing this. Tov μὴ οὐ ποιεῖν is rarely (if ever) used. 


2. The infinitive with τὸ μή (sometimes with τό alone) may 
be used after expressions denoting hindrance, and also after 
all which even imply prevention, omission, or denial. This 
infinitive with τό is less closely connected with the leading 
verb than are the forms just mentioned (1), and it may often 
be considered an accusative of specification (§ 160, 1), and 
sometimes (as after verbs of dental) an object accusative. 
Sometimes it expresses merely a result. £.9. 


Tov ὅμιλον εἶργον τὸ μὴ τὰ ἐγγὺς THs πόλεως κακουργεῖν, they pre- 
vented the crowd from injuring the neighboring parts of the city. Κωλύ- 
σει σετὸ δρᾶν, he will prevent you from acting (§ 260,1, N.2). Κίμω- 
va παρὰ τρεῖς ἀφεῖσαν ψήφους τὸ μὴ θανάτῳ ζημιῶσαι, they allowed 
Cimon by three votes to escape the punishment of death (they let him off 
Srom the punishment of death). Φόβος ἀνθ᾽ ὕπνου παραστατεῖ, τὸ μὴ 
βλέφαρα συμβαλεῖν, fear stands by me instead of sleep, preventing me 
Srom closing my eyelids. 

Thus we have a fifth and a sixth form, εἴργει σε τὸ μὴ τοῦτο ποι- 

ety and εἴργει σε τὸ τοῦτο ποιεῖν, added to those given in ὃ 263, 1, 
as equivalents of the English he prevents you from doing this. 


Norte. Here, as above (1, Note) μὴ od is used when the. leading 
verb is negatived ; as οὐδὲν yap αὐτῷ ταῦτ᾽ ἐπαρκέσει τὸ μὴ οὐ πε- | 
σεῖν, for this will not at all suffice to prevent him from falling. 


§ 264, The infinitive with its subject, object, or other 
adjuncts (sometimes including dependent clauses) may be 
preceded by the article, the whole standing as a single noun 
in any ordinary construction. £.g. 

Τὸ δὲ μήτε πάλαι τοῦτο πεπονθέναι, πεφηνέναι τέ τινα ἡμῖν συμ- 
μαχίαν τούτων ἀντίρροπον, ἂν βουλώμεθα χρῆσθαι, τῆς παρ᾽ ἐκείνων εὐνοίας 
εὐεργέτημ᾽ ἂν ἔγωγε θείην, but the fact that we have not suffered this 
long ago, and that an alliance has appeared to us to balance these, if 
we shall wish to use it, —this I should ascribe as a benefaction to their 
good-will. Dem. (Here the whole sentence 7d... . χρῆσθαι is the 
object of θείην.) 
ls, 


§ 265, The infinitive without the article may express 
a purpose. ΤΠ. 


Oi ἄρχοντες, ovs εἵλεσθε ἄρχειν pov, the rulers, whom you chose to. 
rule me. Τὴν πόλιν φυλάττειν αὐτοῖς παρέδωκαν, they delivered the 


5.267} THE INFINITIVE. 297 


city to them to guard. Ai γυναῖκες πιεῖν φέρουσαι, the women bringing 
them (something) to drink. | 


Note. In Homer, where ὥστε is seldom used in its sense of so as 
(8 266, N. 3), the simple infinitive may express a result ; as ris σφωε 
ξυνέηκε μάχεσθαι; who brought them into conflict so as to contend ? 


§ 266. 1. The infinitive after ὥστε, so that, so as, ex- 
presses a result. Hg. 


ες ΄ “ a , ε , »” > - 
Hy πεπαιδευμένος οὕτως, ὥστε πάνυ ῥᾳδίως ἔχειν ἀρκοῦντα, he had 
been so educated as very easily to have enough. Σὺ δὲ σχολάζεις, ὥστε 
θαυμάζειν ἐμέ, and you delay, so that I wonder. 


2. The infinitive after ὥστε sometimes expresses a 
condition, like that after ἐφ᾽ ᾧ or ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε (§ 267); and 
sometimes a purpose, like a final clause. ΖΔ. 


᾿Ἐξὸν αὐτοῖς τῶν λοιπῶν ἄρχειν Ἑλλήνων, ὥστ᾽ αὐτοὺς ὑπακούειν 
βασιλεῖ, it being in their power to rule the rest of the Greeks, on condi- 
tion that they should themselves obey the King. Πᾶν ποιοῦσιν ὥστε 
δίκην μὴ διδόναι, they do everything so that they may not suffer punish- 
ment (iva μὴ διδῶσι might have been used). 


Nore 1. ‘Qs sometimes takes the infinitive like ὥστε, generally 
to express a result, seldom to express a purpose. 


Nore 2. Ὥστε may also’take the indicative to express a result 
(§ 237). For the distinction see § 237, Rem. 


Nore 3. Ὥστε in Homer usually means as, like ὥσπερ. (See 
§ 265, Note.) _ 


Norte 4. (a) The infinitive with ὥστε or ὡς sometimes follows a 
comparative with #; as ἐλάττω ἔχων δύναμιν ἢ ὥστε τοὺς φίλους ὠφε- 
λεῖν, having too {ἰ{{16 power to aid his friends. 

(Ὁ) Sometimes ὥστε is omitted; as νόσημα μεῖζον ἢ φέρειν, a dis- 
ease too great to bear (§ 261, 2, with Rem.). 


Nore 5. Verbs, adjectives, and nouns which commonly take the 
simple infinitive occasionally have the infinitive with ὥστε or ὡς ; as 
“ψηφισάμενοι ὥστε ἀμύμειν, having voted to defend them; πείθουσιν ὥστε 
ἐπιχειρῆσαι, they persuade them to make an attempt; φρονιμώτεροι ὥστε 
μαθεῖν, wiser in learning ; ὀλίγοι ws ἐγκρατεῖς εἶναι, too few to have the 
power ; ἀνάγκη ὥστε κινδυνεύειν, a necessity of incurring risk (§ 261, 1). 


§ 267. The infinitive follows ἐφ᾽ ᾧ or ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε; on con- 
dition that, sometimes for the purpose of. .g. 


298 ΠΡΥΝΤΑΧ, [8 268. 


᾿Αφίεμέν oe, ἐπὶ τούτῳ μέντοι, ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε μηκέτι φιλοσοφεῖν, we re- 
lease you, but on this condition, that you shall no longer be a philoso- 
pher. Αἱρεθέντες ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε Evyypawas νόμους, chosen for the purpose 
of compiling laws. 

For the future indicative after these words, see § 236, N. 2. 


§ 268. The infinitive may stand absolutely in paren- 
thetical phrases, generally with ὡς or ὅσον. Eg. 


To Δέλτα ἐστὶ νεωστὶ, ὡς λόγῳ εἰπεῖν, ἀναπεφηνός, the Delta has 
recently, so to speak, made its appearance. So ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν, so to 
speak ; ὡς συντόμως (Or συνελόντι, ὃ 184, 5) εἰπεῖν, to speak concisely ; 
τὸ ξύμπαν εἰπεῖν, on the whole; ὡς ἀπεικάσαι, to judge (i.e. as fur 
as we can judge) ; ὅσον γέ μ᾽ εἰδέναι, as far as I know; ὡς ἐμοὶ do- 
κεῖν, or ἐμοὶ δοκεῖν, as it seems to me; οὐ πολλῷ λόγῳ εἰπεῖν, not to 
make along story, in short. So ὀλίγου δεῖν, to want little, i.e. almost ; - 
in which δεῖν can be omitted. 

Note. In certain cases εἶναι seems to be superfluous; especially 
in ἑκὼν εἶναι, willing or willingly, which ‘generally stands in a neg- 
ative sentence. So τὸ νῦν εἶν αι, at present ; τὸ τήμερον εἶναι to-day ; 
τὸ ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνοις εἶναι, as far as depends on them; τὴν πρώτην εἶναι, at 
Jirst (Hdt.); ὡς πάλαια εἶναι, considering their age (Thuc.); and 
some other phrases. 


§ 269. The infinitive is sometimes used like the im- 
perative, especially in Homer. Lg. 


Mn ποτε καὶ σὺ γυναικί περ ἤπιος εἶναι, be thou never indulgent to 
thy wife. 

Note. The subject is here in the nominative; but in the three 
following constructions it is in the accusative. 


§ 270. The infinitive sometimes expresses a wish, like 
the optative. This occurs chiefly in poetry. Δ... 


Zed πάτερ, ἢ Αἴαντα λαχεῖν ἢ Τυδέος υἱόν, Father Zeus, may the lot 
fall either on Ajax or on the son of Tydeus (Hom.). 


Nore. This construction depends in thought on some word like 
εὔχομαι, I pray, or dds, grant, which is often expressed; as δὸς τίσα- 
σθαι. 


§ 271. In laws, treaties, and proclamations the infinitive 
often depends on ἔδοξε or δέδοκται, be tt enacted, or κελεύε- 
ται, it is commanded ; which may be expressed in a previous 
sentence or understood. .g. 


8 275.] THE PARTICIPLE. 299 


Δικάζειν δὲ τὴν ἐν ᾿Αρείῳ πάγῳ φόνου, &c., and (be it enacted) that 
the Senate on the Areopagus shall have jurisdiction in cases of murder, 
Χο. Ἔτη δὲ εἶναι tas σπονδὰς πεντήκοντα, and that the treaty shall 
continue fifly years. 


§ 272. The infinitive, with or without τό, may be used to 
express surprise or indignation. £.g. 
Τῆς μωρίας" τὸ Δία νομίζειν, ὄντα τηλικουτονί, what folly! to believe 


in Zeus when you are so big! Soin Latin: Mene incepto desistere 
victam ! 


§ 273. In narration, the infinitive often seems to 
stand for the indicative, when it depends on some word 
like λέγεται, tt 8 said, in a preceding sentence. Eig. — 

_ *Amtxopevous δὲ ἐς τὸ “Apyos, διατίθεσθαι τὸν φόρτον, and coming 
to Argos, they were (it is said) setting out their cargo for sale (διατί- 


θεσθαι is an imperfect infinitive, § 203, N.1). Hdt.i.1. See Hdt. 
i. 24, and Xen. Cyr. i. 3, 5. 


§ 274. Πρίν, before, before that, until, besides taking 
the indicative, subjunctive, and optative (§ 240), also 
takes the infinitive. This happens in Attic Greek chiefly’ 
after affirmative sentences, but in Homer without regard 
to the leading verb. L.g. 


᾿Αποπέμπουσιν αὐτὸν πρὶν ἀκοῦσαι, they send him away before hear- 
ing him. Μεσσήνην εἵλομεν πρὶν Πέρσας λαβεῖν τὴν βασιλείαν, we took 
Messene before the Persians obtained their kingdom. 


For πρίν with the finite moods, see ὃ 240. 
Norte. Πρὶν ἤ, πρότερον ἤ, πρόσθεν ἤ, before that, sooner than, 


and even ὕστερον ἤ, later than, may take the infinitive like πρίν 
alone. See § 240, Note. 


THE PARTICIPLE. 


§ 275. The participle is a verbal adjective, and has three 
uses. First, it may express a simple attribute, like an ordi- 
nary adjective; secondly, it may define the circumstances 
under which an action takes place; thirdly, it may form part 
of the predicate with certain verbs, often having a force 
resembling that of the infinitive. 


800 SYNTAX. [8 276. 


§ 276. 1. The participle, like any other adjective, 
may qualify anoun. Here it must often be translated 
by a relative and a finite verb, especially when it is pre- 
ceded by the article. δ. 


Ὁ παρὼν χρόνος, the present time; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες, immortal Gods 
(Hom.); πόλις κάλλει διαφέρουσα, a city excelling in beauty: ἀνὴρ 
καλῶς πεπαιδευμένος, a man who has been well educated (or a well- 
educated man); οἱ πρέσβεις οἱ ὑπὸ Φιλίππου πεμφθέντες, the ambas- 
sadors who were sent by Philip; ἄνδρες οἱ τοῦτο ποιήσοντες, men who 
are to do this. 


2. The participle preceded by the article may be used 
_ substantively, like any other adjective. It is then equiva- 
lent to he who or those who with a finite verb. ΜΚ. 


Oi πεπεισμένοι, those who have been convinced : παρὰ τοῖς ἀρίστοις 
δοκοῦσιν εἶναι, among those who seem to be best: ὁ τὴν γνώμην ταύτην 
εἰπών, the one who gave this opinion: τοῖς ᾿Αρκάδων σφετέροις οὖσι 
ξυμμάχοις προεῖπον, they proclaimed to those who were their allies among 
the Arcadians. 


§ 277. The participle may define the circumstances of 
an action. It expresses the following relations :— | 


1. Time; the tenses denoting various points of time, which 
is relative to that of the verb of the sentence (8 204). #.g. 


Ταῦτα ἔπραττε στρατηγῶν, he did this while he was general ; ταῦτα 
πράξει στρατηγῶν, he will do this while he is general; τυραννεύσας 
δὲ ἔτη τρία Ἱππίας ἐχώρει ἐς Σίγειον, and when he had been tyrant three 
years, Hippias withdrew to Sigeun. 


2. Cause, manner, means, and similar relations, including 
manner of employment. L.g. 


Λέγω δὲ τούτου ἕνεκα, βουλόμενος δόξαι σοι ὅπερ ἐμοί, and I speak 
for this reason, because I wish that to seem good to you which, &c. 
Προεΐλετο μᾶλλον τοῖς νόμοις ἐμμένων ἀποθανεῖν ἢ παρανομῶν ζῆν, 
he preferred to die abiding by the laws rather than to live transgressing 
them; τοῦτο ἐποίησε λαθών, he did this secretly ; ἀπεδήμει τριηραρχῶν, 
he was absent on duty as trierarch. ΔΛηιζόμενοι ζῶσιν, they live by 
plunder. 


3. Purpose or. intention ; generally expressed by the future. 
participle. £.g. 


8 277.} THE PARTICIPLE. 801 


Ἦλθε Avodpevos θύγατρα, he came to ransom his daughter. Hom. 
Πέμπειν πρέσβεις ταῦτα ἐροῦντας καὶ Λύσανδρον αἰτήσοντας, to send 
ambassadors to say this and to ask for Lysander. 


4. Condition ; the tenses of the participle representing the 
corresponding tenses of the indicative, subjunctive, or opta- 
tive, in all classes of protasis. 

See § 226, 1, where examples will be found. 


5. Opposition or limitation ; where the participle is generally 
to be translated by although anda verb. £.g. 


Ὀλίγα δυνάμενοι προορᾶν πολλὰ ἐπιχειροῦμεν πράττειν, although 
we are able to foresee few things, we try to do many things. 


6. Any attendant circumstance, the participle being merely 
descriptive. .g. 


Ἔρχεται τὸν υἱὸν ἔχουσα, she comes bringing her son; mw apaXa- 
Bovres τοὺς Βοιωτοὺς ἐστράτευσαν ἐπὶ Φάρσαλον, taking the Boeotians 
with them, they marched against Pharsdlus. 


Note 1. (a) The adverbs ἅμα, μεταξύ, εὐθύς, αὐτίκα, and 
ἐξαίφνης are often connected (in position and in sense) with the 
temporal participle, while grammatically they qualify the verb of 
the sentence; as ἅμα καταλαβόντες προσεκέατό ogi, as soon as 
they overtook them, they pressed hard upon them: Νεκὼς μεταξὺ 
ὀρύσσων ἐπαύσατο, Necho stopped while digging (the canal). Hat. 

(4) The participle denoting opposition is often strengthened by 
καίπερ OY kai, even (poetic also καί . . . wep), in negative sen- 
tences οὐδέ or μηδέ, with or without περ; or by kat ταῦτα. and that 
too ; aS ἐποικτείρω νιν καίπερ ὄντα δυσμενῆ, T pity him, even though 
heis an enemy. Οὐκ ἂν προδοίην, οὐδέ περ πράσσων κακῶς, I would not 
be faithless, even though I am in a wretched state. 


Nore 2. (a) The participles denoting cause or purpose are often 
preceded by ὡς. This shows that they express the idea of the sub- 
ject of the leading verb or that of some other person prominent in 
the sentence, without implying that it is also the idea of the speaker 
or writer; as τὸν Περικλέα ἐν αἰτίᾳ εἶχον ὡς πείσαντα σφᾶς πολε- 
pec, they found fault with Pericles, on the ground that he had per- 
suaded them to the war; ἀγανακτοῦσιν ὡς μεγάλων τινῶν ἀπεστερη- 
μένοι, they are indignant, because (as they say) they have been de- 
prived of some great blessings. 

(Ὁ) The participle denoting cause is often emphasized by ἅτε, 
οἷον, or οἷα, as, inasmuch as; but these particles have no such 
force as ὡς (above); as dre mais ὧν, ἥδετο, inasmuch as he was a 
child, he was pleased. 


802 SYNTAX. [8 278. 


Note 3. Ὥσπερ, as, very often precedes a conditional partici- 
ple, belonging to an implied apodosis, to which the participle forms 
the protasis; as ὥσπερ ἤδη σαφῶς εἰδότες, οὐκ ἐθέλετ᾽ ἀκούειν, 
you are unwilling to hear, as (you would be) if you already knew it 
well. Here ὥσπερ means merely as; the if belongs to the meaning 
of the participle. Compare ὥσπερ εἰ λέγοις, as if you should say. 
We find even ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ . . . ἡγούμενοι, as if you believed (Dem.). 

The participle thus used with ὥσπερ has οὐ for its negative, not 


μή (§ 288, 4). | 

§ 278. 1. When a participle denoting any of the 
relations included in § 277 belongs to a noun which is 
not connected with the main construction of the sentence, 
they stand together in the genitive absolute. 


See § 183, and the examples there given. All the particles men- 
tioned in the notes to § 277 can be used here. 


Note. Sometimes a participle stands alone in the genitive abso- 
lute, when a subject can easily be supplied from the context, or 
when some general subject, like ἀνθρώπων or πραγμάτων, is under- 
stood; as οἱ πολέμιοι, προσιόντων, τέως μὲν ἡσύχαζον, bul the enemy, as 
they (men before mentioned) came on, kept quiet for a time: οὕτω δ᾽ 
ἐχόντων, εἰκός ἐστιν, kK. τ. r., and this being the case (Sc. πραγμάτων), it 
“ὦν likely, §c. So with verbs like ὕει, &c. (§ 134, N. 1, 6); as 
ὕοντος πολλῷ, when it was raining heavily (where originally Διός was 
understood). 


2. The participles of ¢mpersonal verbs stand in the accusa- 
tive absolute, in the neuter singular, when others would be in 
the genitive absolute. So with passive participles and ov 
when they are used impersonally. £.g. 


Οἱ δ᾽ οὐ βοηθήσαντες, δέον, ὑγιεῖς ἀπῆλθον; and did those who 
brought no aid when it was needed escape safe and sound? So 
εὖ δὲπαρασχόν,. and when a good opportunity offered; οὐ προσῆ- 
kov, wunproperly (it being not becoming); τυχόν, by chance (it having 
happened); προσταχθέν μοι. when 1 had been commanded: eipn- 
μένον. whenit has been said: ἀδύνατον ὅν. it being impossible ; ἀπόρρη- 
Tov πόλει (SC. ὄν), when it is forbidden by the slate. 

Note. The participles of personal verbs sometimes stand with 


their nouns in the accusative absolute; but very seldom unless they 
are preceded by ws or ὥσπερ (§ 277, Notes 2 and 3). 


, 


§ 279. The participle may be used to limit the mean- . 
ing of certain verbs, in a sense which often resembles — 


that of the infinitive (§ 260, 1). 


8.279.] THE PARTICIPLE. 303 


1. In this sense the participle is used with the subject of | 
verbs signifying to begin, to continue, to endure, to persevere, to 
cease, to repent, to be weary of, to be pleased, displeased, or 
ashamed ; and with the object of verbs signifying to cause to 
cease. ἢ. : 


Αρξομαι λέγων, I will begin to speak ; οὐκ ἀνέξομαι ζῶν. J shall 
not endure to live. τοῦτο ἔχων διατελεῖ, he continues to have this 
(4, Note); ἀπείρηκα τρέχων, [1 am tired of running ; τοῖς ἐρωτῶσι 
χαίρω ἀποκρινόμενος, 1 delight to answer questioners; ἐλεγχό- 
μενοι ἤχθοντο, they were displeased at being tested ; αἰσχύνεται τοῦτο 
λέγων, he is ashamed to say this (which he says); τὴν φιλοσοφίαν 
παῦσον ταῦτα λέγουσαν, make Philosophy stop talking in this style. 


ΝΌΤΕ 1. Some of these verbs. also take the infinitive, but gene- 
rally with some difference οὗ meaning; thus, αἰσχύνεται τοῦτο λέ- 
γειν, he is ashamed to say this (and does not say it),—see above; 
ἀποκάμνει τοῦτο ποιεῖν, he ceases to do this, through weariness (but 
corre ποιῶν; he is weary of doing this). But see the last example 
under 3. 


Nore 2. The aorist (sometimes the perfect) participle with ἔχω 
may form a periphrastic perfect, especially in Attic poetry; as θαυμά- 
σας ἔχω τόδε, 1] have wondered at this. In prose, ἔχω with a partici- 
ple generally has its common force; as τὴν προῖκα ἔχει λαβών, he has 
received and has the dowry (not simply he has taken i). 


2. The participle may be used with the object of verbs 
signifying to perceive (in any way), to find, or to represent, 
denoting an act or state in which the object is perceived, 
found, or represented. .g. 


ὋὉρῶ σε κρύπτοντα, I see you hiding; ἤκουσά σου λέγοντος, I 
heard you speak; εὗρε Κρονίδην ἄτερ ἥμενον ἄλλων, he found the son 
of Cronos sitting apart from the others (Hom.); πεποίηκε τοὺς ἐν Αιδου 
τιμωρουμένους, he has represented those in Hades as suffering 
punishment. 


Note. This must not be confounded with indirect discourse, 
. ἴῃ which ὁρῶ σε κρύπτοντα would mean 1 see that you are hiding; 

ἀκούω σε λέγοντα, [ hear that you say (ἀκούω taking the accusative). 
See § 280. 4 χὰ ἜΤ 


3. With verbs signifying to overlook or see, in the sense of 
allow, —meptopdw and édopaw, with περιεῖδον and ἐπεῖδον, 
sometimes ¢«idov, — the participle is used in the sense of the 
object infinitive (§ 260, 1), the present and aorist participles 


΄ 


804 SYNTAX. (§ 280. 


differing merely as the present and aorist infinitives would 
differ in similar constructions (§ 202, 1). .g. 


Μὴ περιίδωμεν ὑβρισθεῖσαν τὴν Λακεδαίμονα καὶ καταφρονη- 
θεῖσαν, let us not allow Lacedaemon to be insulted and despised. Μή 
μ᾽ ἰδεῖν θανόνθ᾽ in’ ἀστῶν, not to see me killed by citizens (Kur.). 
Tlepudeiv τὴν γῆν τμηθεῖσαν, to allow the land to be ravaged (Thue. li. 
18). (But in ii. 20, we find περιιδεῖν τὴν γῆν τμη θῆναι, referring 
to the same thing.) See § 204, N. 2. 


4. With the following verbs the participle contains the lead- 
ing idea of the expression: Aavdavw, escape the notice of ; 
τυγχάνω, happen ; φθάνω, anticipate. The aorist participle 
here does not denote past time in itself, but coincides in 
time with the verb (8 204, N. 2). Hg. 


Anoere διαφθαρέντες, you will be corrupted before you know it. 
Ἔτυχον καθήμενος ἐνταῦθα, I happened to be sitting there; ἔτυχε κατὰ 
τοῦτο τοῦ καιροῦ ἐλθών, he happened to come (not to have come) just at 
that time. "Ἑφθησαν τοὺς Πέρσας ἀπικόμενοι, they came before the 
Persians (Hdt.). Οὐδ᾽ dpa Κίρκην ἐλθόντες ἐλήθομεν, nor did we 
come without Circe’s knowing it (Hom.). See examples under 
§ 204, N. 2. 

The perfect participle here has its ordinary force. 


Note. The participle with διατελέω, continue (8 279, 1), 
οἴχομαι, be gone (ὃ 277, 2), θαμίξζω, be wont or be frequent, and 
some others, expresses the leading idea; but the aorist partici- 
ple with these has no peculiar force; as οἴχεται φεύγων, he has 
taken flight (§ 200, N. 8); od θαμίζεις καταβαίνων eis τὸν Πειραιᾶ, 
you don’t come down to the Peiraeus very often. 


§ 280. With many verbs the participle stands in 


indirect discourse, each tense representing the corre- 
sponding tense of the indicative or optative. 


Such verbs are chiefly those signifying to see, to know, to hear 
or learn, to remember, to forget, to show, to appear, to prove, 
to acknowledge, and ἀγγέλλω, to announce. L.g. 


“Ὁρῶ δέ μ᾽ ἔργον δεινὸν ἐξειργα σμένην. but I see that I have done 
a dreadful deed ; ἤκουσε Κῦρον ἐν Κιλικίᾳ ὄντα, he heard .that Cyrus 
was in Cilicia (cf. 8 279, 2, with N.); ὅταν κλύῃ HEovr’ ᾿᾽Ορέστην, 
when she hears that Orestes will come; οἶδα οὐδὲν ἐπιστάμενος, 
know that I understand nothing ; οὐκ ἤδεσαν αὐτὸν τεθνηκότα. they 
did not know that he was dead; ἐπειδὰν γνῶσιν ἀπιστούμενοι; 
after they find out that they are distrusted: μέμνημαι ἐλθών, 1 re- 


§ 281.] VERBAL ADJECTIVES. 305 


member that I went; μέμνημαι αὐτὸν ἐλθόντα, I remember that he 
went ; δείξω τοῦτον ἐχθρὸν ὄντα, I shall show that this man is an 
enemy (pass. οὗτος δειχθήσεται ἐχθρὸς ὦν); αὐτῷ Κῦρον orparev- 
ches πρῶτος ἤγγειλα, J first announced to him that Cyrus was on his 
march. 

See § 246 and examples; and § 211 for examples of the participle 
with ἄν representing both indicative and optative with ἄν. 


Note 1. Δῆλός εἶμι and φανερός εἶμι take the participle in 
indirect discourse, where we use-an impersonal construction; as 
δῆλος ἦν οἰόμενος, &c., it was evident that he thought, &c. (like δῆ- 
λον ἦν ὅτι οἴοιτο). 


Note 2. With σύνοιδα or συγγιγνώσκω and a dative οὗ 
the reflexive, a participle may be in either the nominative or dative; 
as σύνοιδα ἐμαυτῷ ἠδικημένῳ (or ἠδικημένος); 1 am conscious to 
myself that I have been wronged. 


Nore 8. Most of the verbs included in § 280 may take a clause 
with ὅτι in indirect discourse. Most of them.are found also with 
the infinitive. Οἷδα takes the infinitive regularly when it means I 
know how; as οἶδα τοῦτο μαθεῖν, I know how to learn this (but οἶδα 
τοῦτο μαθών, I know that 1 learned this). 


Notre 4. ‘Qs may be used before this participle in the sense ex- 
plained in § 277, N.2. The genitive absolute with ὡς is sometimes 
found where we should expect the participle to agree with the object 
of the verb; as ὡς πολέμου ὄντος παρ᾽ ὑμῶν ἀπαγγελῶ; shall I 
announce from you that there is war? (lit. assuming that there 18 war, 
shall I announce it from you?) where we might have πόλεμον ὄντα 
with less emphasis, and in closer connection with the verb. 


VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -réos AND -ττέον. 


§ 281. The verbal in -réos has both a personal and 


an impersonal construction. 


1. In the personal construction it is passive in sense, 


and expresses necessity, like the Latin participle in -dus. 
Eg. : | 


᾿Ωφελητέα σοι ἡ πόλις ἐστίν, the city must be benefited by you. 
ἤΛλλλας μεταπεμπτέας εἶναι (ἔφη), he said that other (ships) must 
be sent for. “Ὁ λέγω ῥητέον ἐστίν. what 1 say must be spoken. . 
Ps τ noun denoting the agent is here in the dative (8 188, 4). 
e 2. 


806 SYNTAX. [$ 282. 


2. In the impersonal construction the verbal is in the 
neuter of the nominative singular (sometimes plural), 
with ἐστί expressed or understood. It is active in sense, 
and is equivalent to δεῖ with the infinitive. 

The agent is generally expressed by the dative, some- 
times by the accusative. These verbals may have an 
object like their verbs. Lg. 


Ταῦτα ἡμῖν (or ἡμᾶς) ποιητέον ἐστίν, we must do this (equivalent 
to ταῦτα ἡμᾶς δεῖ ποιῆσαι, § 184, 2, N. 1). Οἰστέον τάδε, we must 
bear these things (sc. ἡμῖν). Ti ἂν "αὐτῷ ποιητέον ein; what would 
he be obliged todo? ᾿Εψηφίσαντο πολεμη τέα εἶναι, they voted that they 
must-go to war (= δεῖν πολεμεῖν). Τοὺς ξυμμάχους οὐ mapadorea 
τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις; we must not abandon our allies to the Athenians. 


The Latin has this construction (but seldom with verbs which 
take an object accusative); as Eundum est tibi (ἰτέον ἐστί cor), — 
Moriendum est omnibus. So Bello utendum est nobis (τῷ πολέμῳ 
χρηστέον ἐστὶν ἡμῖν); we must go to war. (See Madvig’s Latin Gram- 
mar, § 421.) 


INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 


8 282, 1. All interrogative pronouns, pronominal adjec- 
tives, and adverbs can be used in both direct and indirect 
questions. The relative ὅστις and most other relative words 
may be used in indirect questions. (See § 149.) 


2. The principal direct interrogative particles are 7 and ἄρα. 
- These imply nothing as to the answer expected; but dpa ov 
implies that an affirmative, dpa μή that a negative, answer is 
expected. Οὐ and μή alone are often used with the same 
force as with dpa. So μῶν (for μὴ οὖν). Lg. 


Ἦ. σχολὴ ἔσται; will there be leisure? "Ap’ εἰσί τινες ἄξιοι; are 
there any deserving ones? >Ap’ οὐ βούλεσθε ἐλθεῖν ; OF οὐ βούλεσθε 
ἐλθεῖν; do you not wish to go (i.e. you wish, do you not)? "Apa μὴ 
βούλεσθε ἐλθεῖν; or μὴ (Or μῶν) βούλεσθε ἐλθεῖν; do you wish to go 
(you don’t wish-to go, do you)? This distinction between οὐ and μή 
does not apply to the interrogative subjunctive (8 256), which 
allows only μή. 


8 283.] NEGATIVES. 807 


ὃ. ἜἌλλο τι ἥξ ts tt anything else than? or simply ἄλλο τι; 
is it not? is sometimes used as a direct interrogative. Z.9. 


Ἄλλο τι ἢ ἀδικοῦμεν ; are we not (is it anything else than that 
we are) in the wrong?— ἄλλο τι ὁμολογοῦμεν ; do we not agree? 


4. Indirect questions may be introduced by εἰ, whether ; 
and in Homer by 7 or ἠέ. £.9. 

Ἠρώτησα εἰ βούλοιτο ἐλθεῖν, I asked whether he wished to go. 
"Quyero πευσόμενος ἤ που ἔτ᾽ εἴης, he was gone to inquire whether pos- 
sibly you were still living (Hom.). Οὐκ. οἶδα εἰ τοῦτο δῶ, I do not 
know whether I shall give this (here εἰ is used even with the sub- 
junctive : see § 244). 

5. Alternative questions (both direct and indirect) may be 
introduced by πότερον (πότερα)... ἤν; whether...or. Indirect 
alternative questions can also be introduced by εἰ... ἤν», εἴτε... 
εἴτε, cite. ..7, Whether...or; and in Homer by ἤ (ἦέ). .. 
ἢ (ἦε). Lg. 


Πότερον ἐᾷς ἄρχειν ἢ ἄλλον καθίστης ; do you allow him to rule, or 
do you appoint another ? ᾿Εβουλεύετο εἰ πέμποιέν τινας ἢ πάντες ἴοιεν, he 
was deliberating whether they should send some or should all go. 


NEGATIVES. 


8 283, The Greek has-two negative adverbs, od and μή. 
What is said of each of these applies generally to its com- 
pounds, — οὐδείς, οὐδέ, οὔτε, &C., and μηδείς, μηδέ, μήτε, &C. 


-1. Οὐ is used with the indicative and optative in all inde- 
pendent sentences (except wishes, which are generally elliptical 
protases, § 251, 1, N. 3) ; also in indirect discourse after ὅτι 
and ὡς, and in causal sentences. 


Note. In indirect questions, introduced by εἰ, whether, μή can be 
used as well as οὐ; as βούλομαι ἐρέσθαι εἰ μαθών τίς τι Kal μεμνημένος 
μὴ οἶδεν, 1 want to ask whether one who has learnt a thing and remem- 
bers it does not know it? Also, in the second part of an indirect 
alternative question (ὃ 282, 5), both od and μή are allowed; as σκο- 
πῶμεν εἰ πρέπει ἢ οὔ, let us look and see whether it is becoming or not ; 
εἰ δὲ ἀληθὲς ἢ μὴ, πειράσομαι μαθεῖν, but I will try to learn whether — 
it is true or not. 


808 SYNTAX, [8 283 


2. My is used with the subjunctive and imperative in all 
constructions (except the Homeric subjunctive, § 255, which 
has the force of a future indicative). My is used in all final 
and object clauses after iva, ὅπως, &c.; except after μή, lest, 
which takes οὐ. It is used in all conditional sentences, in 
relative sentences. with an indefinite antecedent (ὃ 231) and 
the corresponding temporal sentences after ἕως, πρίν, &c. 
(§§ 239, 240), in relative sentences expressing a purpose 
(§ 236), and in all expressions of a wish with both indicative 
and optative (§ 251). 


8. My is used with the infinitive in all constructions, both 
with and without the article, except that of indirect discourse. 
The infinitive in indirect discourse regularly has οὐ, to retain 
the negative of the direct discourse; but some exceptions 
occur. : 


4. When a participle expresses a condition (ὃ 277, 4) it 
takes μή; so when it is equivalent to a relative clause with 
an indefinite antecedent, as οἱ μὴ βουλόμενοι, any who do not 
wish. (See, however, § 277, N. 3.) Otherwise it takes ov. 
In indirect discourse it sometimes, like the infinitive, takes 
py irregularly (3). 


5. Adjectives follow the same principle with participles, 
taking μή only when they do not refer to definite persons or 
things (i. e. when they can be expressed by a relative clause 
with an indefinite antecedent) ; as οἱ μὴ ἀγαθοὶ πολῖται, (any) 
citizens who are not good, but οἱ οὐκ ἀγαθοὶ πολῖται Means 
special citizens who are not good. 


6. When verbs which contain a negative idea (as those of 
hindering, forbidding, denying, concealing, and distrusting) are 
followed by the infinitive, the negative μή can be added to 
the infinitive to strengthen the negation, Such a negative 
cannot be translated in English, and can always be omitted 
in Greek. For examples see § 263. . 


[8 288, NEGATIVES. 309 


7. When an infinitive would regularly be negatived by 
pn, — either in the ordinary way (38) or to strengthen a pre- 
ceding negation (6), —if the verb on which it depends has a 
negative, it generally takes the double negative μὴ ov. Thus » 
δίκαιόν ἐστι μὴ τοῦτον ἀφεῖναι, it is gust not to acquit him, 
becomes, if we negative the leading verb, οὐ δίκαιόν ἐστι μὴ 
οὐ τοῦτον ἀφεῖναι, tt is not just not to acquit him. So ὡς ody 
ὅσιόν σοι ὃν μὴ οὐ βοηθεῖν δικαιοσύνῃ, since (as you said) it 
was a failure in piety for you not to assist justice. Again, 
. εἴργει σε μὴ τοῦτο ποιεῖν (ὃ 263, 1), he prevents you from doing 
this, becomes, with εἴργει negatived, οὐκ εἴργει σε μὴ οὐ τοῦτο 
ποιεῖν, he does not prevent you from doing this. 

NOTE. Μὴ ov is used also when the leading verb is interroga- 
tive implying a negative; as ri ἐμποδὼν μὴ οὐχὶ ὑβριζομένους 
ἀποθανεῖν; what is there to prevent (us) from being insulted and 
perishing ? 

It is sometimes used with participles, or even nouns, to express 


an exception to a negative statement; as πόλεις χαλεπαὶ λαβεῖν, μὴ ov 
πολιορκίᾳ, cities hard to capture, except by siege. 


8. When a negative is followed by a simple negative (οὐ 
or μή) in the same clause, each retains its own force. If 
they belong to the same word or expression, they make an 
affirmative ; aS οὐδὲ τὸν Φορμίωνα od x ὁρᾷ, nor does he not see 
Phormio (i.e. he sees Phormio well enough). But if they 
belong to different words, each is independent of the other ; 
as οὐ δι’ ἀπειρίαν ye οὐ φήσεις ἔχειν 6 τι εἴπῃς, it is not surely 
through inexperience that you will deny that you have anything 
to say; ob μόνον od πείθονται, they not only do not obey; εἰ μὴ 
Πρόξενον οὐχ ὑπεδέξαντο, if they had not refused to receive 
Proxenus (had not not received him). 

Note. An interrogative od (§ 282, 2), belonging to the whole 
sentence, is not counted as a negative in these cases; aS οὐκ ἐπὶ 
τὸν δῆμον : . . οὐκ ἠθέλησαν συστρατεύειν ; were they nut unwill- 


ing, &c.? 


9. But when a negative is followed by a compound negative 
(or by several compound negatives) in the same clause, the 


810 ᾿ ‘SYNTAX. [8 288. 


negation is strengthened; as ἄνευ τούτου οὐδεὶς εἰς οὐδὲν 
οὐδενὸς ἂν ὑμῶν οὐδέποτε γένοιτο ἄξιος, tf τέ were not for 
this, no one of you would ever come to be of any value for any- 
thing. 

For the double negative οὐ μή, see ὃ 257. 


PART V. 


VERSIFICATION. 


ICTUS.— RHYTHM AND METRE. 


§ 284. 1. Every verse is composed of portions called 
feet. Thus we have four feet in each of these verses : ~ 


Φήσοϊμεν πρὸς | τοὺς στραϊτηγούς. | 
Far from | mértal | céres re|tredting. | 


2. In each foot there is a certain part on which falls a 
special stress of voice called ictus (stroke), and another part 
on which there is no such stress. The part of the foot on 
which the zetus falls is called the arsis, and the rest of the 
foot is called the thesis... The regular alternation of arsis 
and thesis in successive feet produces the rhythm (harmonious 
movement) of the verse. 

3. In this English verse (as in all English poetry) the 
rhythm depends entirely on the ordinary accent of the words, 
with which the ictus coincides. In the Greek verse, however, 
the ictus is entirely independent of the word-accent; and 
the feet (with the ictus marked) are φήσο, ---- μέν zpos, — τούς 
στρα; ----τήγους. In Greek poetry a foot consists of a regular 

combination of syllables of a certain length; and the place 
of the ictus here depends on the quantity (i.e. the length or 
shortness) of the syllables which compose the foot, the ictus 
naturally falling upon a long syllable (8 285, 3). The regu- 


1 The term ἄρσις (raising) and θέσις (placing), as they were used by 
nearly all the Greek writers on Rhythm, referred to the raising and putting 
down of the foot in marching, dancing, or beating time, so that θέσις de- 
noted the part of the foot on which the ictus fell, and ἄρσις the lighter part. 
Most of the Roman writers, however, inverted this use, and referred arsis 
to the raising of the voice and thesis to the lowering of the voice in reading. 
The prevailing modern use of these terms unfortunately follows the Roman 
writers. 


912 VERSIFICATION. [§ 285. 


lar alternation of long and short syllables in successive feet 
makes the verse metrical, i.e. measured in its time. The 
rhythm of a Greek verse thus depends closely on its metre, 
z.e. On the measure or quantity of its syllables. 


Notre. The fundamental distinction between ancient and most 
modern poetry is simply this, that in modern poetry the verse con- 
sists of a regular combination of accented and unaccented syllables, 
while in ancient poetry it consists of a regular combination of long 
and short syllables. ‘The rhythm is the one essential requisite in the 
external form of all poetry, ancient and modern; but in ancient 
poetry, rhythm depends on metre and not at all on accent; in mod- 
ern poetry it depends on accent, and the quantity of the syllables 
(1.6. the metre) is generally no more regarded than it is in prose. 
Both are equally rhythmical; but the ancient is also metrical, and its 
metre is the basis of its rhythm. What is called metre in English 
poetry is strictly only rhythm. 

It is to a great extent uncertain how the Greeks distinguished or 
reconciled the stress of voice which constituted the ictus and the 
raising of tone which constituted the word-accent.. Any combina- 
tion of the two is now very difficult, and for most persons impos- 
sible. In reading Greek poetry we usually mark the Greek ictus 
by our accent, which is its modern representative, and neglect the 
word-accent or make it subordinate to the ictus. Care should al- 
ways be taken in reading to distinguish the words, not the feet. 


FEET. 


§ 285. 1. The unit of measure in Greek verse is the 
short syllable (..,). which has the value of a or an } note in 
music. This is called atime or mora. The long syllable (—) 
has twice the length of a short one, and has the value of a ἃ 


note or 4 in music. 


1 The change from metrical to accentual rhythm can best be seen in 
modern Greek poetry, in which, even when the forms of the ancient lan- 
guage are retained, the rhythm is generally accentual and the metre is no 
more regarded than it is in English poetry. These are the first two verses 
in a translation of the Odyssey :— 


Ψάλλε τὸν | ἄνδρα, Oela, τὸν πολύτροπον, | ὅστις το σούτους 
Tomovs δι[ῆλθε, πορθήσας τῆς | Τροίας τὴν | ἔνδοξον | πόλιν. 
The original verses are : — 
"Ανδρὰ pot | ἕννεπε, | Μοῦσα, ro|Avtpotrov, | ὃς μάλα | πολλὰ - 
Πλάγχθη, ἐϊπεὶ Τροίης ἱερὸν πτολίεθρον ἔϊπερσεν. 
If the former verses set our teeth on edge, it is only through force of 
acquired habit; for these verses have much more of the nature of modern - 


poetry than the Homeric originals, and their rhythm is precisely what we 
are accustomed to in English. 


§ we 


2. ‘Feet : are distinguished according to the number of tin 
which they contain. The most common feet are, the; follow=> z 


ing: — 


Trochee 


Iambus 


Tribrach 


Dactyl 


Anapaest 
Spondee 


Cretic 


Paeon primus 
Paeon quartus 
Bacchius 


Antibacchius 


Tonic a majore 
Ionic ὦ minore 


Choriambus 


FEET. 


τὰ κὰΣ 


VU— 


VUY 


(b) Of Four Times 


we W/V 


ων ο-- 


(c) Of Five Times 


— VV — 


—_VUY 


(d) Of Six Times 


ames, τὰ Nt NP 


VV — 


— VY — 


Molossus (rare) — — — 


Ditrochee 


Diiambus 


—_— Ve VY 


VY awe U oe 


paive- 
ἔφην 
λέγετε 


(in 3 time). 


φαίγνετε 
σέβομαι 
> Ψ 
εἰπών 
(in 3 time). 
φαινέτω 
5 , 
EKTPETETE 
καταλέγω 
ἀφεγγής 

’ 
φαίνητε 
(in ὃ. time). 
ἐκλείπετε 
προσιδέσθαι 
ἐκτρέπομαι 
βουλεύων 

’ 

μουσόμαντις 


ἀπαλλαγή 


313 


\e" 
(a) Of Three Times (in ὃ time). \ er 


Ἂν, « 
> ΄ 
‘ by 
» ee, ee Ae, 
AN ἃ 


δ, SSYTA 


For the dochmius, U — — [ὦ -- see 8 302. 


ἊΣ 
pd 


.814 VERSIFICATION. [8 286. 


Nore. The feet in % time (a), in which the arsis % twice as 
long as the thesis, form the double class (γένος διπλάσεον), as opposed 
to those in 3 time (2), in which the arsis and thesis are of equal 
length, and which form the equal class (γένος ἴσον). The more 
complicated relations of arsis and thesis in the feet of five and six 
times are not considered here. 


3. The ictus falls naturally on a long syllable. The first 
syllable of the trochee and the dactyl, and the last syllable of 
the iambus and the anapaest, therefore, form the arsis, the 
remainder of the foot being the thesis; as ~ ὦ» τὺ 


nee ἐτὶ RNS eS 


Nore 1. When a long syllable in the arsis is resolved into two 
short syllables (§ 286, 1), the ictus properly belongs on the two 
taken together, but in reading it is usually placed on the first. 
Thus ἃ tribrach used for a trochee (+ ὦ) is ὦ UU} one used for 
an iambus (VU ~) isu ὦ u- So a spondee used for a dactyl is 
« _; one used for an anapaest is __ .4- Likewise a dactyl used 
for an anapaest (- v for _ _ for VU _) is_ & uv The only 
use of the tribrach and the chief use of the spondee are to repre- 
sent other feet which have their arsis naturally marked by a long 
syllable. 

Nore 2. Although the principal ictus (which alone has been 


considered) falls on the arsis, there is generally also a subordinate 
ictus on the thesis or on some syllable of the thesis. (See § 299.) 


4. A verse is sometimes introduced by an incomplete foot, 
consisting of one or two syllables equivalent in time to the 
thesis of the fundamental foot of the verse. This is called an 
anacrusis (ἀνάκρουσις, upward beat). (See 8. 389, 3, N.) The 
mark of anacrusis is a following (:). : 


For the basis, introducing a logaoedic verse, see § 299, 2. 


RESOLUTION AND CONTRACTION. — IRRATIONAL TIME, — 
SYLLABA ANCEPS. 


§ 286, 1. A long syllable, being the metrical equivalent 
of two short ones (§ 285, 1), is often resolved into these ; as 
when a tribrach | VU ὦ stands for a trochee — vy, or an iambus 
u—- On the other hand, two short syllables are often con- 
tracted into one long syllable ; as when a spondee — — stands 


§ 287.] RHYTHMICAL SERIES. | 315 


for a dactyl_ | Vor an anapaest., ὦ —. The mark fora 
long resolved into two short is “; that for two short con- . 
tracted into one long is =. 

2. A long syllable in the arsis may be prolonged so as to 
have the measure of three or even four short syllables. A 
single syllable may thus represent a whole foot, including 
both arsis and thesis: this is called syncope. A syllable 
which includes three times is marked / ( 3.3 one which 
includes four times is marked 4 (/) ). 

8. On the other hand, a long syllable may in certain cases 
be shortened so as to take the place of a short syllable in 
verse. Such a syllable is called irrational, and is marked >. 
The foot in which it occurs is also called trrational (ποὺς 
ἄλογος). Thus, in ἀλλ᾽ ax ἐχθρῶν (~{ Vv + >), the apparent 
spondee which takes the place of the second trochee is called 
an irrational trochee; in δοῦναι δίκην ( « v +) that which 
takes the place of the first iambus is called an zrrational 
tambus. | 

4. A similar shortening occurs in the so-called eyelie dac- 
tyl (marked —v v) and cyelie anapaest (marked VY U—), which 
have the time of only three short syllables instead of four. 
The cyclic dactyl takes the place of a trochee — U, especially 
in logaoedic verses (§ 300). The cyclic anapaest takes the 
place of an iambus |, —, and is found especially in the iam- 
bic trimeter of comedy (§ 293, 4). 

5. The last syllable of every verse is common, and may be 
considered long or short to suit the metre, without regard to 
its usual quantity. It is called syllaba anceps. But the con- 
tinuous systems described in § 298 allow this only at the end 
of the last verse. 


RHYTHMICAL SERIES. — VERSE. —CATALEXIS. — PAUSE. 


§ 287. 1. A rhythmical series is a continuous succession 
of feet of the same measure. A verse may consist of one 
such series, or of several such united. ‘Thus the verse 


πολλὰ τὰ δεινὰ, κοὐδὲν ἀν] θρώπου δεινότερον πέλει 


816 ~ VERSIFICATION. [§ 288. 


consists of a First Glyconic (§ 300, 4), wul—vl—vlu 
(at the end of a verse, τυ | —_u | — u | — A), followed by 
a Second Glyconic, —_&|—v vl|_uv!_ A. Each part forms 
a series, the former ending with the first syllable of ἀνθρώπου 
(see above) ; and either series might have formed a distinct 
verse. A rhythmical series generally ends after the arsis of 
the third foot in the dactylic hexameter (§ 295, 4). See 
§ 288. 

2. The verse must close in such a way as to be distinctly 
marked off from what follows. 

(a.) It must end with the end of a word. 

(6.) It allows the last syllable (syllaba anceps) to be either 
long or short (§ 286, 5). 

(c.) It allows hiatus (ὃ 8) before a vowel beginning the 
next verse. . 

3. A verse which has an unfinished foot at the close is 
called catalectic (καταληκτικός, stopped short). A complete 
verse is called acatalectic. 

4. The time of the omitted syllable or syllables in a cata- 
lectic verse is filled by a pause. A pause of one time, equiva- 
- lent to a short syllable (Uv), is marked A (for A, the initial of 
λεῖμμα); a pause of two times (—) is marked A. 


CAESURA AND DIAERESIS, 


ὃ 288, 1. Caesura (i.e. cutting) of the foot occurs when- 
ever a word ends before a foot is finished; as in three cases 
in the following verse : — 


. πολλὰς | δ᾽ ἰφθί] μους Yu|xas “Ai| Se mpot| aber. 


This becomes important only when it coincides with the 
caesura of the verse (as after ἰφθίμους). This caesura is a 
pause within a foot introduced to make the verse more melo- 
dious or to aid in its recital, regularly occurring at the end of 
a rhythmical series which does not end the verse (§ 287, 1). 
In some verses its place is fixed: see § 293, 4; § 295, 4. 

2. When the end of a word coincides with the end of a foot, 
the double division is called diaeresis (διαίρεσις, division); 
as after the first foot in the line just quoted. Diaeresis be- 


§ 289.] : VERSES. 317 


comes important only when it coincides with a natural pause 
in the verse produced by the ending of a rhythmic series ; as 
in the trochaic tetrameter (§ 291, 2) and the dactylic pen- 
tameter (§ 295, 5). 


Note. The following verse of Aristophanes (Clouds, 519), in 
trochaic (8) rhythm, shows the irrational long (§ 286, 3) in the 
first, second, and sixth feet; the cyclic dactyl (§ 286, 4) in the 
third; syncope (8 286, 2) in the fourth; and at the end catalexis 
and pause (ὃ 287, 3 and 4) with syllaba anceps (§ 286, 5): — 

τἀλη!θῆ νὴ | τὸν Διόϊνυϊσον τὸν | ἐκθρέ |Wavra | pe. 
a> Ps De ee i eer Bl 0) eat 


A rhythmical series (§ 287, 1) ends with the penult of Διόνῦσον. 
This is a logavedic verse, called Eupolidéan (§ 300, 7). 


VERSES. 


8 289. 1. Verses are called Zrochaic, lambic, Dactylic, 
&e., from their fundamental foot. 

2. In most kinds of verse, a monometer consists of one 
foot, a dimeter of two feet, a trimeter, tetrameter, pentameter, 
or hexameter of three, four, five, or six feet. But in tro- 
chaic, iambic, and anapaestic verses, which are measured by 
dipodies (i. 6. pairs of feet), a monometer consists of one di- 
pody (or two feet), a dimeter of four feet, a trimeter of six 
feet, and a tetrameter of eight feet. In most kinds of verse, 
there are catalectic as well as acatalectic forms (§ 287, 3). 

3. Rhythms are divided into riseng and falling rhythms. 
In rising rhythms the arsis follows the thesis, as in the iam- 
bus and anapaest; in falling rhythms the thesis follows the 
arsis, as in the trochee and the dactyl. 


Note. It will be seen that prefixing an anacrusis (8 285, 4) 
of the same time as the thesis to a falling rhythm will change 


it to a rising rhythm; 88. ὦ. ὦ with ὦ prefixed becomes 
v—lu—ly; and υὐ]. υὧὐ]--. with Uv prefixed becomes 
vuH—luuv—l|uu—. Many modern writers treat all iambic 
and anapaestic vérses as trochaic and dactyhe with anacrusis; 
δι΄ ete as νον for χα, be ke co 
BNE CERN SP PR 


ΤΟΥ Ash ca” Γι, St de 


318 ) VERSIFICATION. [§ 291. 


4. In Greek poetry, the same kind of verse may be repeated 
without interruption, as in the heroic hexameter (§ 295, 4) and 
the iambic trimeter of the drama (§ 293, 4). Secondly, simi- 
lar verses may be combined into distichs (8 295, 5) or into 
simple systems (ὃ 298). Thirdly, in lyric poetry, verses may 
be combined into strophes of complex rhythmical and metrical 
structure, with antistrophes corresponding to them in form. 

In the following sections, the principal rhythms found in 
Greek poetry are described. 


TROCHAIC RHYTHMS. 


§ 290, Trochaic verses are measured by dipodies (§ 289, 
2). The irrational trochee . > (ὃ 286, 3) in the form οὗ a 
spondee can stand in the second place of each trochaic dipody ; 
so that the dipody has the form, . | . τὸ In trochaic verse, 
therefore, the tribrach ~ _ _ can stand in any place for the 
trochee . ων; and the (apparent) spondee can stand in all 
the even places, that is, in the second part of every dipody. 
An apparent anapaest (. | > for }») is sometimes used 
as the equivalent of the irrational trochee. The cyclic dac- 
tyl —, ὦ (§ 286, 4) sometimes stands for the trochee in 
proper names in both parts of the dipody. 


§ 291, The following are the most common trochaic 
verses : — 


1. The dimeter (acatalectic and catalectic) :— 


φήσομεν πρὸς | τοὺς στρατηγού. _ UYU _>]_u_vu 
Wuxaywyet | Σωκράτης. pigs lect the esha OF eda περ αὶ 


2. The tetrameter catalectic, consisting of seven feet and 
a syllable, or of the two preceding verses combined. There 
is a regular diaeresis (§ 288, 2) after the second dipody, 
where the first rhythmical series ends (§ 287, 1). See 
§ 293, 3. 


ὦ σοφώταϊτοι θεᾶταὶ, || δεῦρο τὸν νοῦν | πρόσχετε. 


RD cs AA aes a an he ago Peak eg <a 


§ 293.] IAMBIC RHYTHMS. 319 


In English poetry each series is generally made a separate 
verse ; as 
Téll me nét in mournful nimbers, 
Life is bit an émpty dréam. 
3. The Ithyphallic, which is a trochaic tripody, not allow- 
ing irrational feet, — 
μήποτ᾽ ἐκτακείη. Zoey Veen a as 


For trochaic systems see § 298, Note. 


IAMBIC RHYTHMS. 


§ 292, Iambic verses are measured by dipodies (§ 289, 2). 
The irrational iambus > — (§ 286, 3) in the form of a spon- 
dee can stand in the first place of each iambic dipody, so that 
the dipody has the form> + ¥ +. In iambic verse, there- Ὁ 
fore, the tribrach VU vw ὦ can stand in any place for the iam- 
bus ὦ.“ and the (apparent) spondee can stand in all the odd 
places, that is, in the first part of every dipody. An apparent 
dactyl (s ὦ ὦ for s _) is sometimes used as the equivalent 
of the irrational iambus; and the cyclic anapaest UY VU— 
(§ 286, 4) is used for the iambus in both parts of the dipody, 
especially by the Attic comedians (§ 293, 4). 


§ 298. The following are the most common iambic 
verses : — 
1. The monometer, — 
πρὸς τὴν θεόν. "πω, 
2. The dimeter (acatalectic and catalectic), — 
ζηλῶ σε τῆς | εὐβουλίας. RO Me) em ri ἰδὲς 


καὶ τὸν λόγον | τὸν ἥττω. Sowa τς κά ΚΝ 


3. The tetrameter catalectic, consisting of seven feet and a 
syllable, or of the two preceding verses combined. ‘There is 
a regular diaeresis (§ 288, 2) after the second dipody, where 
the first rhythmical series ends (§ 287, 1). See § 291, 2. 


εἴπερ τὸν ἄνδρ᾽ | ὑπερβαλεῖ, || καὶ μὴ γέλωτ᾽ | ὀφλήσεις. 


Eg PR  Σ, eas ROE oe CA 


820 ἮΝ VERSIFICATION. [§ 298. 


In English poetry each series is generally made a separate 

verse; as 
A captain bdld | of Halifax 
Who lived in coun|try quarters. 

4. The TRIMETER ACATALECTIC, the most common of all 
iambic verses, in which most of the dialogue of the Attic 
drama is composed. It never allows any substitution in the 
last foot. With this exception it may have the tribrach in 
any place. The irrational iambus > — in the form of a spon- 
dee can stand in the first place of every dipody. The trage- 
dians allow the (apparent) dactyl > ὦ ὦ only in the first and 
third places, and the cyclic anapaest only in the first place ; 
but in proper names they allow the anapaest in every place 
except the last. The comedians allow the dactyl > w ὦ in all 
the odd places, and the cyclic anapaest in every place except 
the last (§ 292). The most common caesura is that after the 
thesis of the third foot. 

The following scheme shows the tragic and the comic iam- 
bic trimeter compared, — the forms peculiar to comedy being 
enclosed in [ ]. 


NO pe I a ee LPP AD ee nO a te es 
“ts sees > 
ον λα νῶν 
>uy >uy [>uv] 
vr fur ]ill[uv—Jlu JI fy] 


In general the tragedians avoid the feet of three syllables, 
even where they are allowed. The following are examples 
of both the tragic and the comic form : — 

(Tragic) χθονὸς μὲν εἰς | τηλουρὸν ἥκομεν πέδον» 
Σκύθην ἐς οἶϊμον, ἄβατον εἰς | ἐρημίαν. 
Ἥφαιστε, σοὶ | δὲ χρὴ μέλειν | ἐπιστολάς. 

(Comic) ὦ Ζεῦ βασιλεῦ " | τὸ χρῆμα τῶν | νυκτῶν ὅσον 
ἀπέραντον" οὐ]δέποθ᾽ ἡμέρα | γενήσεται; 
ἀπόλοιο δῆτ᾽, | ὦ πόλεμε, πολ]λῶν οὕνεκα. 

The Iambic Trimeter appears in English as the Alexan- 
drine, which is seldom used except at the end of a stanza : — 

And hope to mér|it Heaven by mak|ling Earth a Héll. 
For tambie systems, see § 298. 


§ 295.] DACTYLIC RHYTHMS. 321 


᾿ς DACTYLIC RHYTHMS. 


§ 294. The only regular substitute for the dactyl is the ? 
spondee, which arises by contraction of the two short sylla- 
bles of the dactyl (. — from + U ὦ). 


§ 295. The following are the most common dactylic 
verses : — 


1. The dimeter, — 


μυστοδόϊκος δόμος ἐετ ὑν ἔτι έν δ 
μοῖρα διώκει wre po 


2. The trimeter (acatalectic and catalectic), — 
ἁδυμεϊλῇ κελα δήσω. παρ GAR, τατό εἰ ὦ ὙΦ Bsa 
παρθένοι | ὀμβροφύθρι  _ VUU|_UUlI|_*A 

8. The tetrameter (acatalectic and catalectic), — 


ovpavil οἱς τε Gelots δωίρήματα. «ὦ. uu] — —_ [τῷ 


ἔλθετ᾽ ἐϊποψόμεϊναι δύναμιν.  ἀ VU] _e UI _ UU IA 


4, The Heroic Hexameter, the Homeric verse. It always 
has a spondee in the last place, often in the first four places, 
seldom in the fifth. An hexameter with a spondee in the jifth 
place is called spondaic. The most common caesura is after 
the arsis of the third foot: if this divides the thesis, it is called 
a feminine caesura. The caesura sometimes occurs after the 
arsis of the fourth foot. A diaeresis at the end of the fourth 
foot is called bucolic, from its frequent occurrence in bucolic 
poetry. 

For examples see the Iliad and Odyssey. 


5. The Exreciac Disticn consists of an heroic hexameter 
followed by the so-called Elegiac pentameter. This last verse 
consists really of two dactylic trimeters with syncope (§ 286, 2) 
In the last measure; as, — 


Παλλὰς ᾿Αἰθηναί!η || χεῖρας ὕπερθεν ἔ]χει. 
AY oe ord ἐς» δ ὦ ἡ Pea ea ἘΣ 


At the end of the pentameter verse we can place — * 
(§ 287, 4) in place of uw. The verse probably arose from a 


322 VERSIFICATION. [§ 297. 


repetition of the first penthemim (πενθ-ημι-μερές, five half feet) 
of the hexameter. But syllaba anceps (ὃ 286, 5) and hiatus 
(§ 8) are not allowed after the first trimeter, but only at the 
end of the verse (ὃ 287, 2). The last. two complete feet are 
always dactyls. A diaeresis (§ 288, 2) divides the two parts 
of the verse. 


The following is an Elegiac Distich : — 


τίς δὲ Bilos, τί δὲ | τερπνὸν, alvev χρυσέΐης ᾿Αφροϊ δίτης ; 
τεθναίην ὅτε | μοι || μηκέτι | ταῦτα μέϊΪλοι. 
ἡ ἠδ, 


τ εν AST cod Su buss, Kea bs 


Note. In the Homeric verse and in Lyric poetry, a long vowel or 
a diphthong is often shortened at the end of a word when the next 
word begins with a vowel. £.g. 


ὦ πόποι, | 7 pada | δὴ μετε[βούλευϊσαν θεοὶ | ἄλλως. 
, δι. 4 9 A 2) , ’ ? , 

χρυσέῳ ajva σκήπτρῳ, καὶ ἐϊλίσσετο | πάντας ᾿Αἰχαιούς (8 10). 

This sometimes occurs in the middle of a word. Sometimes a 
short final vowel occurs in Homer where a long one is required by 
the verse. This can often be explained by supposing a following 
semi-vowel to have been doubled in pronunciation. Many anom- 


alies in Homeric quantity are explained by the omission of Vau 
or Digamma (8 1, Note 2); as τοῖόν οἱ (.-.-. _) for τοῖόν Fo. 


ANAPAESTIC RHYTHMS. 


§ 296. Anapaestic verses are measured by dipodies 
(§ 289, 2). The spondee and the dactyl (_ + and — ὦ, ὦ) 
may stand for the anapaest. 


Nore. The long syllable of an anapaest is rarely resolved into two 
short, making eg ee alk WY for Wu te 


§ 297. The following are the most common anapaestic 
verses : — 
1. The monometer, — 


τρόπον αἰϊγυπιῶν. σάω τος 
καὶ θέμις | αἰνεῖν. Si OIA A asl a 


σύμφωϊνος ὁμοῦ, tata d WAS ΣΩΣ 


§ 299.] LOGAOEDIC RHYTHMS. τ 5.85 


2. The dimeter acatalectic, — 


μέγαν ἐκ | θυμοῦ | κλάζοντες "Δρη. SSPE feted Moers RY LS vee. 
“ΚΦ 3 +9 / ͵ " 
oir’ ἐκ[πατίοις | ἄλγεσι | παίδων. ἘΠ Ey ESN ee | PSOE Sy Gaines. 


And the 6Jlive of peace | sends its branch|es abroad. 


3. The dimeter catalectic, or paroemiac, — 


ἦραν | otpatia|tw dpe| yay. eT ee Us et ee 
οὕτω | πλουτήϊσετε πάντες. βόδι as eter 4 No laa ed 
The Lord | is advancling. Prepdre| ye!_ + |uvu+luv+ly 


4. The tetrameter catalectic, consisting of seven feet and a 
syllable, or of the two preceding verses combined. There is 
a regular diaeresis after the second dipody. See § 291, 2. 


, - ΄ > ‘ , eee “ “1 " , A 
πρόσχετε τὸν νοῦν | τοῖς ἀθανάτοις || ἡμῖν, τοῖς αἰὲν ἐοῦσι; 
τοῖς αἰθερίοις, | τοῖσιν ἀγήρῳς, || τοῖς ἄφθιτα μη δομένοισιν. 


8 298. An anapaestic system consists of a series of anapaes-| 
tic dimeters acatalectic, with occasionally a monometer, ending 
always with the paroemiac (or dimeter catalectic). ‘These are 
very frequently employed in both tragedy and comedy. £.g. 


© δέκατον μὲν ἔτος τόδ᾽ ἐπεὶ Πριάμου 
6, 
μέγας ἀντίδικος, 

Μενέλαος ἄναξ ἠδ᾽ ᾿Αγαμέμνων, 
᾿ς διθρόνου Διόθεν καὶ δισκήπτρου 
“ > A a > ~ 
τιμῆς ὀχυρὸν ζεῦγος ᾿Ατρειδᾶν, 

᾿ > , , 
στόλον ᾿Δργείων χιλιοναῦταν 
τῆσδ᾽ ἀπὸ χώρας 
ἦραν, στρατιῶτιν ἀρωγάν. 


Norte. Iambic and trochaic systems are sometimes formed on the 
same principle, consisting of iambic or trochaic dimeters acatalec- 
tic, with occasionally a monometer, ending always with a dimeter 
catalectic. 


LOGAOEDIC RHYTHMS. 


§ 299. 1. Logaoedic rhythm is arhythm in 3 time, having 
the trochee as its foundation, but admitting great freedom of 
construction. Besides the trochee — vu, it admits the irrational 
trochee — >, the tribrach ὦ vu ὦ , the cyclic dactyl τῷ ὦ, and 
the syncopated trochee L. 


824 _VERSIFICATION. [§ 300. 


2. The first foot of a logaoedic verse often allows special 
freedom, and it is then called a basis. The basis may be a 
trochee or an irrational trochee — >, and sometimes a 
tribrach U ὦ. An apparent iambus (probably with 
ictus ὦ —) sometimes occurs (see § 300, 7); and rarely 
even two short syllables, ὦ ὦ, stand for a basis in lyric 
poetry. Great license is permitted in using different forms 
of basis, even in verses which otherwise correspond precisely 
(§ 289, 4), as in ὃ 300, 7. <A basis is marked x. 

When a verse has more than one rhythmical series 
(§ 287, 1), each series may begin with a basis (see § 300, 7). 
Sometimes an anacrusis (§ 285, 4) precedes a logaoedic 
verse, either with or without a following basis. 


§ 300. The following are some of the most important 
logaoedic verses : — 


1. Adonic: σύμμαχος ἔσσ. —VUY|—w_ This is the final 
verse of the Sapphic stanza (6.) 
2. First Pherecratic: ἑπταπύλοισι Θήβαι. -«, 1. ὦ.ὦ 

Catal. ψεύδεσι ποικίλοις. vul_ul_A 

3. Second Pherecratic: παιδὸς δύσφορον ἄταν. χ»͵)-, ὦ} ὦ 
Catal. ἐχθίστων ἀνέμων. .»Ίπωω [.-.Λ 

4, Glyconic: (Three forms) :— 
(a) μὴ κατὰ τὸν vedviav. == ay bo ad es ba A 
(Ὁ) Θήβᾳ τῶν προτέρων φάο. _X>|—rU}|_UI_A 
(c) φῶτα βάντα πανσαγίᾳ. sage Sh ey, SO i, Sa ἦι 


5. Three Alcaics, which form the Alcaic stanza: — 

(α) dovvérnu τῶν ἀνέμων στάσιν" 

Ἐκ he Os cry PD δα οἵ 
(2) τὸ μὲν γὰρ ἔνθεν κῦμα κυλίνδεται 

ὔ Sd pas ΣΝ 
(0) τὸ δ᾽ ἔνθεν - ἄμμες δ᾽ ἀν τὸ μέσσον 

SE Waa U  )γἊἂν 
(0) vat φορήμεθα σὺν pedaiva. 

αν σή τω 

Compare in Horace, — 

Vides ut alta stet nive candidum, &c. 


§ 801.] FEET OF FIVE OR SIX TIMES. 325 


6. Sapphic: ποικιϊλόθρον᾽  ἀθάνατ᾽ |’ Adpo|dira. 
aot pee ee beaenor ἔσω 
ae 


Three Sapphics and an Adonic (1) form the Sapphic stanza. 
7. Eupolidéan: ὦ θεώμενοι, κατε!ρῶ || πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐϊλευθέ!ρως. 


Bee Ὁ πε ρον αι 
PEE 3 Se saa Bees 
VUY vyuY | 


Notre. Nearly all the verses here described as logaoedic have 
been called choriambic (ὃ 301, 1). If we consider the dactyl here 


as _ wy andnotas —v vu, itforms _WU_ with the follow- 
ing long syllable; and thus, by the division hitherto common, the 
Pherecratics become (1) —~UUYU—|]U—v and ωὧὦν. [υ.-, 
Q) ~_ σ].--ὐὖὐὖ --ἰὼ and _ Ὁ] οὐδ; the Glyconics 
become. (1): 2 wv a hue wie @) soe OHS ea 
(3) Obs Oo wis and the Sapphic becomes 
—_vl—_vl]—vv—|u~—y, with the Adonie__. wu ___ | vu. 


RHYTHMS WITH FEET OF FIVE OR SIX TIMES. 


§ 801. Some of the more important rhythms with feet of 
five or six times (§ 285, 2, c, d) are the following : — 

1. Choriambic rhythms, with the choriambus — |, V, — as the 
fundamental foot : — 


παῖδα μὲν ai|ras πόσιν αὑΪτᾷ θεμένα. 
Nore. Choriambic verses of this class are rare. Most so-called 
choriambic verses are here explained as logaoedic (§ 300, Note). 
2. Ionic rhythms, with the ionic a minore | ὦ — — as the 
fundamental foot, — 
πεπέρᾶκεν | μὲν ὁ περσέϊπτολις ἤδη 
βασίλειος | στρατὸς εἰς ἀν τίπορον γείτονα χώραν. 
αὐ πολι: εν Ἐκ fee 
A ditrochee — ., — ὦ often takes the place of two long syl- 
lables and the two following shorts. This is called anaclasis 
(ἀνάκλασις, breaking up) : 
ris ὁ κραιπνῷ | ποδὶ πηδήϊματος εὐπεϊτὴς ἀνάσσων ; 


σις ee home Ἐς. 


326 VERSIFICATION. [§ 302. 


3. Cretic rhythms, in which paeons occur by resolution of 
long syllables (_ vu Voruvy — for — Vv —) :— 
οὐκ ἀναϊσχήσομαι" | μηδὲ λέγε | μοι σὺ λόγον. 
κατατεμῶ | τοῖσιν ἱπὶ πεῦσι κατ τύματα. 
Bots κυ 
κε ες ὧν τες 


4. Bacchie rhythms, with the bacchius uv — — as the funda- 
mental foot :— 
tis ἀχὼ, | τίς ὀδμὰ | προσέπτᾶ | μὶ ἀφεγγής ; 


κα, pe το Δ μὰ ἐλο νι οἰδάς κιτνν μκν 


ΘΟΟΘΗΜΊΑΟΚ.: 


8 802. Dochmiac verses, which are used chiefly in 
tragedy to express great excitement, are based upon a foot 
compounded of the bacchius and the iambus, ὦ .- — | u_, 
called the dochmius. This peculiar foot appears in nineteen 
different forms, by resolving the lohg syllables-and admitting 
irrational longs in place of the two shorts. Its most common _ 
omnes: {. and Gow —1 =. As examples 
may be given 


δυσαλγεῖ τύχᾳ. Wie Ge ἢ Ὁ ΤῸΝ 

πτεροφόρον δέμας. ΣΝ ως 

pioddeoy μὲν ὃ. = PUVUH lu (»ω [ὦ ἐν 
μεγάλα μεγάλα kal. wey lus Goras.. 1.) 
φεροίμαν βοσκάν. οὐ ere h oP ie MIO AS τς ΤΉ aad 


προπέμψας ἄχη, | τίνα θροεῖς λόγον; Ve Ue lye 


APPENDIX. 


CATALOGUE OF VERBS, 


Τὰ rats 
aay τὰ oy 


APPENDIX. 


CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 


Norr. — This catalogue professes to contain only those verbs in ordinary 
use in classic Greek which have any such peculiarities as to present diffi- 
culties to a student. No verb is introduced which does not occur in some 
form before Aristotle ; and no forms are given which are not found in writ- 
ers earlier than the Alexandrian period, except sometimes the present 
indicative of a verb which is classic in other tenses, and occasionally a 
form which is given for completeness and marked as later. Tenses which 
are not used by Attic writers, in either prose or poetry, or which occur 
only in lyrical parts of the drama, are enclosed in [ ], except occasionally 
the present indicative of a verb which is Attic in other tenses. 

The simple stem of each verb, when this does not appear in the present, 
z.e. unless the verb is of the jirst class (δ 108, I.), is given in ( ) directly 
after the present indicative. The class of each verb (δ 108) is given in ( ) 
at the end, unless it belongs to the first class, when it is left without a 
number. Verbs in μὲ of the second class (in ὑμι, § 108, v. 4) are marked 
(II.); other verbs in μὲ are marked (I.). A few Epic irregularities are not 
noticed in the classification. 

The modification of the stem made by adding ε in certain tenses (δ 109, 
8) is marked by prefixing (e-) to the first form in which this occurs. A 
hyphen prefixed to a form (as -7jvexa) indicates that it occurs only in com- 
position. This is omitted, however, if the simple form occurs even in 
later Greek ; and it is not always inserted when the occurrence of cognate 
forms, or any other reason, makes it probable that the simple form was in 
good use. It would be extremely difficult to point out an example of every 
tense of even the best English verbs in a writer of established authority 
within a fixed period. 

The imperfect or pluperfect is generally omitted when the present or 
perfect is given. 


A. 
[(aa-), tujwre, infatuate, stem, with aor. daca, doa; a. p. ἀάσθην ; pr. mid, 
ἀᾶται, aor, ἀασάμην, erred. Epic. | 
“Ayapar, admire, [Ep. fut. ἀγάσομαι, rare,] ἠγάσθην, ἠγάσάμην. (1.) 
L ᾿Αγγέλλω (ἀγγελ-), announce, ἀγγελῶ [ἀγγελέω], ἤγγειλα, ἤγγελκα, ἤγγελ- 
μαι, ἠγγέλθην, fut. p. ἀγγελθήσομαι.: ἃ, τη. ἠγγειλάμην. Second aorists 
with Ἃ are rare or doubtful. (4.) ᾿ 


990 APPENDIX. 


᾿Αγείρω (ἀγερ-), collect, a. ἤγειρα ; [Ep. plpf. p. ἀγηγέρατο ; a. p. ἠγέρθην, 
a. m. (ἠγειράμην) συν-αγείρατο, 2 ἃ. τη. ἀγερόμην with part. ἀγρόμενος. | (4.) 

"Αγνῦμι (Fay-), in comp. also ἀγνύω, break, ἄξω, gata, [rarely Epic ἦξα], 
2 p. -ἔάγα [Ion. ἔηγα], 2 ἃ. p. ἐάγην [Ep. ἄγην]. (IT) 


J "Ayo, lead, ἄξω, Aka (rare), ἦχα (in comp.), ἦγμαι, ἤχθην, ἀχθήσομαι; 2 ae 


\ 


ἤγαγον, ἠγαγόμην ; fut. τη. ἄξομαι (as pass.), [a. m. ἀξάμην, (Ion.). ] 

[(ἀδε-), be sated, stem with aor. opt. ἀδήσειεν, pf. part. ddyxws. Epic. ] 

[(ae-), vest, stem with aor. deca, Goa. Epic. ] 

᾿Αείδω, sing, ἀείσω and ἀείσομαι, ἤεισα. In Attic prose, G8, ἄσομαι (dow, 
rare), joa, ἤσθην. 

᾿Αείρω (dep-), take up, f. ἀρῶ, a. Hepa, ἠέρθην, [ἤερμαι late, Hom. plp. p. 
ἄωρτο for ἤερτο ; ἃ. τη. ἀειράμην.] Ionic and poetic. In Attic prose 
always αἴρω (ἀρ-) ἀρῶ, ἦρα, ἦρκα, ἣρμαι, ἤρθην ; ἀροῦμαι, ἠράμην. Poetic 
2 ἃ. τῆ. ἀρόμην. (4.) 

["Anpe (ἀε-), blow, inf. ἀῆναι, ἀήμεναι, part. dels; imp. ἄην. Mid. ἄημαι, 
imp. ajunv. Poetic, chiefly Epic.] (1.) 

AiSéopar, poet. aldoua, respect, αἰδέσομαι, ἤδεσμαι, ἠδέσθην, ἠδεσάμην. 
[Hom. imperat. αἰδεῖο]. ὃ 109, 2. 

Aivéo, praise, αἰνέσω [αἰνήσω], ἤνεσα [ἠἤνησα], -ἦνεκα, “ἤνημαι, ἠνέθην, 
8 109, 1, N. 2. 


᾿[Αἰνῦμαι, take, imp. αἰνύμην. Epic.] (11.) 


Aipéw (ἑλ-), take, αἱρήσω, ἥρηκα, ἤρημαι [Hdt. dpalpnxa, dpatpnuac), ἡρέθην, 
αἱρεθήσομαι ; fut. pf. ἡρήσομαι (rare); 2 a. εἷλον, ἕλω, ὅτο.; εἱλόμην, ἕλω- 
μαι, &e. (8.) ; 

Αἴρω, Attic prose form of ἀείρω. See ἀείρω. 


Αἰσθάνομαι (aicd-), eins (e-) αἰσθήσομαι, ἤσθημαι, ἠσθόμην. Pres. 
αἴσθομαι (rare). (5.) 

Aicyive (aicxiv-), disgrace, aicxivd, ἠσχῦνα, [p. p. part. ἠσχυμμένος Ep., ] 
ἠσχύνθην, felt ashamed, αἰσχυνθήσομαι ; fut. τη. αἰσχυνοῦμαι. (4.) 

᾿Αἴω, hear, imp. ἄϊον, [aor. -ἤϊσα.1 Ionic and poetic. 

[’Atw, breathe owt, only imp. ἄϊον. Epic. See ἄημι.] 

[᾿Ακαχίζω, afflict, redupl. pres., with ἀχέω and ἀχεύω, be grieved (only in 
pr. part. ἀχέων, ἀχεύων), and ἄχομαι, be grieved ; fut. ἀκαχήσω, aor. 
ἀκάχησα ; Pp. Ῥ. ἀκάχημαι (ἀκηχέδαται), ἀκάχησθαι, ἀκαχήμενος or ἀκη- 
χέμενος ; 2 aor. ἤκαχον, ἀκαχόμην. See ἄχνυμαι and ἄχομαι. Epic. ]} 

[᾿Ακαχμένος, sharpened, Epic perf. part. with no present in use. ] 

᾿Ακέομαι, heal, aor. ἠκεσάμην. 

᾿Ακηδέω, neglect, [aor. ἀκήδεσα Ep.}, Poetic. 

"᾿Ακούω (ἀκου- for axoF-), hear, ἀκόύσομαι, ἤκουσα [Dor. pf. ἄκουκα], 2 pf. 
ἀκήκοα (for dx-nxoFa, § 102), 2 plpf. ἠκηκόειν or ἀκηκόειν ; ἠκούσθην, -. 
ἀκουσθήσομαι. 


CATALOGUE ΟΕ VERBS. 33] 


᾿Αλάομαι, wander, [pf. Bunions He pres.), w. inf. ἀλάλησθαι, pt. ἀλαλή- 
μενος], ἃ. ἀλήθην. Chiefly poetic. 

᾿Αλδαίνω (ἀλδὰν-), πσωγέρν,, [ΕΡ. 2 aor. ἤλδανον.) Pres. also ἀλδήσκω. 
Poetic. (4.) 

᾿Αλείφω (ἀλϊῴ-), anoint, ἀλείψω, ἤλειψα," -ἀλήλιφα (or -erpa), ἀλήλιμμαι, 
ἠλείφθην, -ἀλειφθήσομαι (rare), 2 ἃ. p. -ἠλίφην (rare).. Mid. ἢ, ἀλείψο- 
pot, ἃ. ἠλειψάμην. (2.) 

᾿Αλέξω (adex-), ward off, fut. [Ep. ἀλεξήσω] ἀλεξήσομαι or ἀλέξομαι ; aor. 
ἠλέξησα (-ἤλεξα, rare), ἠλεξάμην ; [Ep. 2 a. ἄλαλκον for ἀλ-αλεκ-ον.} (8.) 

[᾿Αλέομαι, avoid, Epic ; aor. ἠλεάμην.] 

᾿Αλεύω, avert, ἀλεύσω, ἤλευσα, ἠλευάμην. 

᾿Αλέω, grind, ἀλέσω (ἀλῶ), ἤλεσα, ἀλήλεσμαι or ἀλήλεμαι. ὃ 102. 

ἤἌλθομαι, be healed, (ε-) ἀλθήσομαι. 

᾿Αλίσκομαν (ἁλ-, ἁλο-), be captured, ἁλώσομαι, ἥλωκα or ἑάλωκα, 2 aor. 
ἥλων or ἑάλων, ἁλῶ [Epic ἁλώω], ἁλοίην, ἁλῶναι, ἁλούς ; all passive in 
meaning. § 109, 8, N. No active ἁλίσκω, but see ἀν-αλίσκω. (6.) 

᾿Αλιταίνομαυν (adir-, ἀλιτὰν-), [with Ep. pres. act. ἀλιτραίνω], sin ; 2 aor. 
ἤλϊἴτον, [ἀλίτόμην, pf. part. ἀλιτήμενος, sinning, Ep.}. Poetic, chiefly 
Epic. (4. 5.) 

᾿Αλλάσσω (ἀλλὰγ-), change, ἀλλάξω, &c. regular; 2 ἃ. po ἠλλάγην. (4.) 

“Addopar (ἀλ-), Leap, ἁλοῦμαι, ἡλάμην ; 2 a. ἡλόμην (rare). [Epic 2 a. 
Goo, Gro, ἄλμενος, by syncope. (4.) 

[᾿Αλυκτάζω and ἀλυκτέω, be excited, imp. ἀλύκταζον Hdt., pf. ἀλαλύκτημαι 
Hom. Ionic. ] 

᾿Αλύσκω (ddi'x-), avoid, ἀλύξω [and ἀλύξομαι], ἤλυξα (rarely -αμην). Poetic. 
᾿Αλύσκω is for ἀλυκ-σκω (δ 108, vi. N. 8). (6.) 

᾿Αλφάνω (ἀλφ-), find, acquire, [Epic 2 aor. ἦλφον.}] (5.) 

| ‘Apapréve (duapr-), err, (€-) ἁμαρτήσομαι, ἡμάρτηκα, ἡμάρτημαι, ἡμαρτή- 
θην ; 2 aor. ἥμαρτον [Ep. ἤμβροτον]. (5.) 

᾿Αμβλίσκω (ἀμβλ-), ἀμβλόω in comp., miscarry, [ἀμβλώσω, late, ] ἤμβλωσα, 
-ἤμβλωκα, -ἤμβλωμαι, ἠμβλώθην. (6.) 

᾿Αμείρω (ἀμερ-) and ἀμέρδω, deprive, ἤμερσα, ἠμέρθην. Poetic. (. 4.) 

᾿Αμπ-έχω and ἀμπ-ίσχω (ἀμφί and ἔχω), wrap about, clothe, ἀμφέξω, 2 ἃ. 
ἤμπισχον ; [Epic impf. ἀμπεχον. Mid. ἀμπέχομαι, ἀμπίσχομαι, ἀμπι- ᾿ 
σχνέομαι ; imp. ἠμπειχόμην ; f. ἀμφέξομαι ; 2 ἃ. ἠμπισχόμην and ἦμπε- 
σχόμην, ὃ 105, 1, N. 3. See ἔχω and ἴσχω. ~ 

᾿Αμπλακίσκω (ἀμπλᾶκ-), err, miss, ἠμπλάκημαι ; 2 a. ἤμπλακον, part. ἀμ- 
πλακών or ἀπλακών. Poetic. (6.) 

ΓΆμπννε, ἀμπνύνθην, ἀμπνῦτο, all Epic: see ἀναπνέω. 

| ᾿Αμύνω (ἀμῦν-), ward of ; fut. ἀμῦνῶ, ἀμῦνοῦμαι ; aor. ἤμῦνα, ἠμῦνάμην. 

τς 4) 


332 APPENDIX. 


᾿Αμφι-γνοέω, doubt, ἠμφιγνόεον and judeyrdeor, ἠμφεγνόησα ; aor. pass. 
part. ἀμφιγνοηθείς. ὃ 105, 1, N. 3. 

᾿Αμφι-έννῦμι (see ἕννυμι), clothe, fut. [Ep. ἀμφιέσω] Att. -ἀμφιῶ ; ἠμφίεσα, 
ἠμφίεσμαι ; ἀμφιέσομαι, ἀμφιεσάμην (poet.). ὃ 10ὅ, 1, N. 3. (I) 

᾿Αμφισβητέω, dispute, augmented ἦμφισ- and ἠμφεσ- (§ 105, 1, N. 8); 
otherwise regular. 

᾿Αναίνομαν (avav-), refuse, imp. ἠναινόμην, aor. ἠνηνάμην. (4.) 

᾿Αναλίσκω and ἀνάλόω, expend, ἀναλώσω, avddwoa, and ἀνήλωσα (κατ- 
ηνάλωσα), ἀνάλωκα and ἀνήλωκα, ἀνάλωμαι and ἀνήλωμαι (κατ-ηνάλωμαι), 
αἀναλώθην and ἀνηλώθην, ἀναλωθήσομαι. See ἁλίσκομαι, 

᾿Αναπνέω, take breath, comp. of ἀνά and πνέω (πνῦ-): see πνέω. [Epic 2 
aor. imperat. ἄμπνυε, a. p. ἀμπνύνθην, 2 ἃ. m. ἄμπνῦτο (for -vero). ] 

“Ανδάνω (Fad-, ad-), please, (€-) [ἁδήσω, Hdt.; 2 pf. ada, Epic ;] 2 aor. 
ἅδον [lon. éa5ov, Epic evador for éFadov.] Ionic and poetic. (5.) 

᾿Ανέχω, hold up ; see ἔχω, and ὃ 105, 1, Note 3. 

[᾿᾿Ανήνοθε, defect. 2 pf., springs, sprung. Epic.] See ἐνήνοθε. 

*Av-olyvup. and ἀνοίγω (see οὔγνυμι); open, imp. ἀνέῳγον (ἤνοιγον, rare) 
[Epic ἀνῷγον] ; ἀνοίξω, ἀνέῳξα (ἤνοιξα, rare) [Hdt. ἀνοιξα], ἀνέῳχα, avéw- 
yuat, ἀνεῴχθην (subj. ἀνοιχθῶ, &c.); fut. pf. ἀνεῴξομαι ; 2 pf. ἀνέῳγα 
(rare). (IT.) 

᾿Αν-ορθόω, set upright, aug. dvwp- and ἠνωρ-. § 105, 1, N. 3. 

᾿Ανύω, Att. also dvitw, accomplish; fut. ἀνύσω, dvicouat; aor. ἤνῦσα, 
ἠνύσάμην ; pf. ἤνῦκα, ἤνυσμαι. (Always v.) 

᾿Ανώγω, order, exhort, imp. ἤνωγον ; ἀνώξω, ἤνωξα ; 2 p. ἄνωγα (as pres.), 
with imperat. ἄνωχθι, ἀνώχθω, dvwx Ge, 2 plpf. ἠνώγεα. Tonic and poetic. 

_ (Arr-avpd), take away, not found in present ; imp. ἀπηύρων (as aor.); 
a. mM. ἀπηυράμην (?);/aor. part. ἀπούρας, ἀπουράμενος. Poetic. 

᾿Απαφίσκω (ἀπὰφ-), deceive, 2 a. ἤπαφον [2 a. m. opt. ἀπαφοίμην]. Po- 
etic. (6.) 

᾿Απεχθάνομαι (ἐχθ-), be hated, (ε-) ἀπεχθήσομαι, ἁπήχθημαι ; 2 a. ἀπηχθό- 
μην. ᾿(5.) 

[᾿Απόερσε, swept off, subj. ἀποέρσῃ, opt. -σειε. Only in 3 pers. Ἐρὶς.] 

᾿Αποκτίννῦμι and -ύω, forms of droxreivw. See κτείνω. 

*Améxpn, it suffices, impersonal. See χρή. 

“Arr (ἁἀφ-), touch, fut. ἅψω, NTS aor. ἦψα, ἡψάμην ; pf. ἥμμαι ; a. Ὁ. 
ἥφθην. (3.) 

᾿Αράομαι, pray, ἀράσομαι, ἠράσάμην, Fpdua. [ἘΡ. act. inf. ἀρήμεναι, to 
pray. | 

᾿Αραρίσκω (dp-), fit, ἦρσα, ἤρθην ; 2 p. dpapa, [Ion. dpnpa, plpf. ἀρήρειν and 
ἠρήρειν ;] 2 ἃ. ἤρᾶρον ; 2 a. m. part. dpuevos (as adj.), fitting. Att. 
redupl. in pres. (δ 108, vi. N. 1). (6.) 


CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 333 


L ᾿Αρέσκω (dpe-), please, ἀρέσω, ἤρεσα, ἠρέσθην ; ἀρέσομαι, ἠρεσάμην. ὃ 109, 
ἘΝ Ἂς 16.) 

[’Apnpévos, oppressed, pf. pass. part. Epic.] 

*Apkéw, assist, dpxéow, ἤρκεσα. § 109, 1, N. 2. 

“Αρμόττω [Ion. ἁρμόσσω], poet. ἁρμόζω (ἁρμοδ-), fit, ἁρμόσω, ἥρμοσα (συν- 
άρμοξα Pind.), ἥρμοκα, ἥρμοσμαι, ἡρμόσθην, fut. p. ἁρμοσθήσομαι ; ἃ. m. 
ἡρμοσάμην. (4.) 

"Αρνῦμαι (ἀρ-), win, secure, pres. and impf.; chiefly — Same stem as 
αἴρω (v. deipw). (II.) 

᾿Αρόω, plough, ἤροσα, [p. p. Ion. ἀρήρομαι, ἠρόθην. g 109, 1, N. 2. 

“Αρπάζω (ἁρπαδ-, dpray-), seize, ἁρπάσω and ἁρπάσομαι [Ep. ἁρπάξω], ἥρ- 
πᾶσα [ἥρπαξα], ἥρπᾶκα, ἥρπασμαι, ἡρπάσθην [Hdt. ἡρπάχθην], ἁρπασθή- 
σομαι. (4.) 

*Apitw and ἀρύτω, draw water, aor. ἤρὕσα, ἠρυσάμην, ἠρύθην [ἠρύσθην, Τογ.]. 

"Apxa, begin, rule, ἄρξω, ἦρξα, ἦρχα, ἦργμαι (mid.), ἤρχθην, ἀρχθήσομαι ; 
ἄρξομαι, ἠρξάμην. 

[᾿Ατιτάλλω (ἀτιτὰλ-), tend ; aor. ἀτίτηλα. Epic and Lyric.] (4.) 

Αὐαίνω (αὐὰν-) or atalvw; fut. aiavd; aor. ninva, ηὐάνθην or αὐάνθην, 

᾿αὐανθήσομαι ; fut. τη. αὐανοῦμαι (as pase). Augment yv- or av- (ὃ 103, 
Note). Chiefly poetic and Ionic. (4.) 

Αὐξάνω or αὔξω (avé-), increase, (ε-) αὐξήσω, αὐξήσομαι, ηὔξησα, ηὔξηκα, 
ηὔξημαι, ηὐξήθην, αὐξηθήσομαι. [Also Ion. pres. ἀέξω, impf. ἀεξον. (5.) 

[᾿Αφάσσω (ἀφὰδ-), feel, handle, aor. ἤφᾶσα;; used by Hdt. for ἀφάω or 
ἁφάω.] (4.) 

᾿Αφ-ίημι, let go, impf. ἀφίην or ἠφίην (§ 105, 1, N. 8); fut. ἀφήσω, δε. 
See inut, ὃ 127. 

[Αφύσσω (agiy-), draw, pour, ἀφύξω. Epic.] ὅ66 ἀφύω. (4.) 

Adie, draw, apicw (late), pica, ἠφυσάμην. Poetic, chiefly Epic.] 

"AxSopar, be displeased, (ε-) ἀχθέσομαι, ἠχθέσθην, ἀχθεσθήσομαι. ὃ 109, 2. 

["Axvipor (ὠχ-), be troubled, impf. ἀχνύμην. Poetic. (II.) Also Epic 
pres. &xopat.] See ἀκαχίζω. 

["Aw, satiate, dow, doa; 2’ aor. subj. ἔωμεν (or ἑῶμεν), inf. devas, to sati- 
ate one’s self. Mid. (ἄομαι) ἀἄται as fut. ; f. ἄσομαι, a. ἀσάμην. Epic.] 


B. 


Bat (Bay-), speak, utter, -βάξω, [p. p. Ep. BéBaxrac]. Poetic. (4.) 

-Βαίνω (Bd-, Bav-), go, βήσομαι (poet. except in comp.), βέβηκα, -βέβαμαι, 
-ἐβάθην (rare); 2 a. ἔβην (δ 125, 8); 2 p. (βέβαα) βεβῶ, δε. (125, 4); [a. 
τη. Ep. ἐβησάμην (rare) and ἐβησόμην]. In active sense, cause to go, poet. 
βήσω, ἔβησα. See ὃ 108, v. N. 1. (5. 4.) 


334 aK APPENDIX. 

Βάλλω (βὰλ-, βλὰ.), throw, f. [βαλέω] βαλῶ, rarely (ε-) βαλλήσω, βέβληκα, 

βέβλημαι [Ep. βεβόλημαι], ἐβλήθην, βληθήσομαι ; 2 ἃ. ἔβαλον, ἐβαλόμην ; 

j fut. τη, Badoduar; f. p. βεβλήσομαι ; [Epic, 2 a. dual ξυμ-βλήτην ; 2 a. 

m. ἐβλήμην, with subj. βλήεται, opt. βλῇο or βλεῖο, inf. βλῆσθαι, pt. 
βλήμενος"; fut. ξυμ-βλήσεαι]. (4.) 

Βάπτω (βὰφ-), dip, βάψω, Baya, βέβαμμαι, ἐβάφην and (poet.) ἐβάφθην ; 
fut. m. βάψομαι. (3.) 

Βάσκω (Ba-), poetic form of Baivw, go. (6.) 

Βαστάζω (Bacrds-), carry, βαστάσω, ἐβάστασα. Poetic. (4.) 

Βήσσω (βηχ-), Att. βήττω, cough, βήξω, ἔβηξα. (4.) 

[Βίβημι (βα.), go, pr. part. βιβάς. Ἐρὶς.1 (I.) 

Βιβρώσκω (βρο-), eat, p. βέβρωκα, βέβρωμαι, [ἐβρώθην ; ἃ ἃ. ἔβρων ; fut. pf. 
βεβρώσομαι] ; 2 p. part. (βεβρώΞ) pl. βεβρῶτες (8 125, 4). [Hom. pres. - 
βεβρώθω. (6.) 

ἡ Brida, live, βιώσομαι, ἐβίωσα (rare), βεβίωκα, (βεβίωμαι) βεβίωται; 2 a. 
᾿ ἐβίων (δ 126Ἀ.8). 

Βιώσκομαι (βιο-), revive, ἐβιωσάμην, restored to life. (6.) 

ι( Βλάπτω (βλὰβ-), injure, βλάψω, ἔβλαψα, βέβλᾶφα, βέβλαμμαι, ἐβλάφθην ; 
2 ἃ. p. ἐβλάβην, 2 f. βλαβήσομαι ; fut. m. βλάψομαι; [fut. pf. βεβλάψο- 
pattIen.]. (3.) 

Βλαστάνω (βλαστ-), sprout, (ε-) βλαστήσω, ἐβλάστησα, βεβχάστηκα (and 
ἐβλ-); 2 ἃ. ἔβλαστον. (5.) 

Βλέπω, see, βλέψομαι [Hdt. -βλέψω], ἔβλεψα. 

Βλίττω or βλίσσω (μελῖτ-, βλῖτ-, ὃ 14, N. 1), take honey, aor. ἔβλϊσα. (4.) 

Βλώσκω (uor-, μλο-, Bro-, § 14, N. 1), go, f. μολοῦμαι, p. μέμβλωκα, 2 a. 
ἔμολον. Poetic. (6.) ; 

Bodw, shout, βοήσομαι, ἐβόησα. [Ton. (stem Bo-), -βώσομαι, EBwoa, éBwod- 
μην, (βέβωμαι) βεβωμένος, ἐβώσθην. ὃ 108, vii. N.] 

Βόσκω, feed, (ε-) βοσκήσω. 

+ Βούλομαι, will, wish, (augm. ἐβουλ- or ἠβουλ-); (€-) βουλήσομαι, βεβούλη- 

μαι, ἐβουλήθην ; [2 p. προ-βέβουλα, prefer.] § 100, N. 2. 
[(Bpdx-), stem, with only 2 aor. ἔβρῶχε and βράχε, resounded. Epic. ] 
Βρίθω, be heavy, βρίσω, ἔβρισα, BéBpida. Rare in Attic prose. 
[(Bpox-), stem, swallow, aor. ἔβροξα, 2 aor. p. ἀνα-βροχείς ; 2 pf. (2) dva- 
βέβροχεν (Hom.). Epic. ]} 
Βρυχάομαι (βρῦχ-), roar, p. βέβρῦχα ; ἐβρυχησάμην ; βρυχηθείς. § 108, 
vii. Ν. (7) , 
Buvéw or βύω (βυ-), stop wp, βύσω, ἔβῦσα, βέβυσμαι. Chiefly poetic. (5.) 


τὰ 


CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 335 


ay 


2 Ταμέω (γὰμ-), marry (said of a man), f.yaue [γαμέω], a. ἔγημα, p. γεγά- 
μηκα, p. p. γεγάμημαι. Mid. marry (said of a woman), f. γαμοῦμαι 
[Epic γαμέσσομαι (1), will provide a wife], a. éynudunv. (7.) . 

Tavipor (ya-), rejoice, μῆς (Epic) Ὑαγθόσομαι, pf. γεγάνῦμαι (later).] Po- 
etic. (II.) 

Teywovéw (γων-), shout, yeywrijow, (ἐγεγώνησα) γεγωνῆσαι ; 2 p. γέγωνα, 
subj. γεγώνω, imper. γέγωνε, [inf. γεγωνέμεν, part. yeywvds.] § 109, 7 
(c). (7.) Pres. also γεγωνίσκω. (6.) 

Telvopat (yev-), be born; a. ἐγεινάμην, begat. (4.) 

& Τελάω, laugh, γελἄσομαι, ἐγέλασα, ἐγελάσθην, ὃ 109, 1, N. 2. 

[Tévro, seized, Epic 2 aor.; once in Hom. ] 

Τηθέω (γηθ-), rejoice, [γὙηθήσω, ἐγήθησα ;| 2 Ῥ. γέγηθα (as pres.). (7.) 

Τηράσκω and γηράω, grow old, ynpdow and γηράσομαι, ἐγήρᾶσα, γεγήρακα 

oe old); 2 a. (ἐγήρω; § 125, 8) [ἐγήρα Hom.], inf. γηράναι, pt. γηράς. 

Ὃς Τίγνομαι and γίνομαι (γεν-, ya-), become, γενήσομαι, γεγένημαι, [ἐγενήθην 

Dor. and Ion.];.2 ἃ. ἐγενόμην [Ep. γέντο for ἐγένετο]; 2 p. γέγονα, win, 
poet. (yéyaa) and 2 plpf. (éveydew), see ὃ 125, 4. (8.) 
vyveoKkw (yvo-), nosco, know, γνώσομαι, [Ion. av-éyrwoa, | ἔγνωκα, ἔγνω- 
σμαι, ἐγνώσθην ; 2a. ἔγνων, perceived. § 125, 8. (6.) 

Γνάμπτω (γναμπ-), bend, γνάμψω, [ἔγναμψα, -ἐγνάμφθην.] Poetic, chiefly 
Epic.] (3.) 

[Γοάω, bewail, 2 aor. (yo-), γόον ; only Epic in active.] Mid. γοάομαι, 
poetic, impf. yodro ; [γοήσομαι (Epic), as active]. § 108, vii. N. (7.) 

¢ Τράφω, write, γράψω, &ec. regular; 2 a. p. ἐγράφην (ἐγράφθην is not class- 

ic); 2f. γραφήσομαι ; fut. pf. γεγράψομαι. 


A. 


(δᾶ-), stem, teach, learn, no pres., [(ε-} δαήσομαι, δεδάηκα, Seddyuat; 2 a. 
τὰ. (?) inf. δεδάασθαι ; 2 p. (δέδαα) ὃ 125, 4; 2 a. δέδαον or ἔδαον, 2 a. 
Ῥ. ἐδάην. Poetic, chiefly Epic. 


[Δαΐζω (daiy-), rend, δαΐξω, ἐδάϊξα, δεδάϊγμαι, ἐδαΐίχθην. Epic and Lyric. ] 
(4.) 


Aalvipr (δαι-), entertain, dalow, ἔδαισα, (ἐδαίσθην) δαισθείς. |Epic δαίνῦ, 
impf. and pr. imperat.] Mid. dalviuar, feast, δαίσομαι, ἐδαισάμην ; 
[Ep. pr. opt. δαινῦτο for δαινυι-το, δαινύατ᾽ for dawvi-vro. §118, 1, N.] (11.) 

Δαίομαι (da-), divide, [Ep. f. ddcoua,] ἐδάσάμην, pf. p. dédacuar[Ep. δέδαι- 
pat]. § 108, iv. 3, Note. (4.) Pres. also δατέομαι (da7-), divide, to 
which δάσομαι, ἐδᾶσάμην, and δέδασμαι can be referred. (7.) 


336 APPENDIX. 


Δαίω. (δὰ-.), kindle, [Ep. 2 p. δέδηα, 2 plpf. δεδήειν ; 2 a. (ἐδαόμην) subj. 

 δάηται.] Poetic. ὃ 108, iv. 3, N. (4.) 

Δάκνω (δὰκ-, δηκ-), dite, δήξομαι, δέδηγμαι, ἐδήχθην, δηχθήσομαι ; 2 a. 
ἔδακον. (ἃ. 5.) 

Δαμνάω and δάμνημι (δᾶ μ-, δμᾶ-), also pr. δαμάζω (δαμαδ-), tame, subdue, 
‘[Ep. f. δαμῶ (w. δαμάᾳ, δαμόωσι) for δαμάσω, ἐδάμασα, [δέδμημαι, ἐδα- 
μάσθην (§ 16,1) and ἐδμήθην ; 2 a. p. ἐδάμην ; [fut. pf. δεδμήσομαι ; 
fut. m. δαμάσσομαι, ἃ. τη. ἐδαμασάμην. See 8 108, V. N.1. (4. 5). 

Δαρθάνω (δαρθ-), sleep, 2 ἃ. ἔδαρθον, poet. ἔδρᾶθον ; (ε-) Ῥ. κατα-δεδαρθη- 
κώς ; κατ-εδάρθην (later). (5.) 

Aaréopar: see δαίομαι. 

[Δέαμαν, appear, only in impf. déaro. Hom.] 

Δέδια, fear: see stem (d:-, δει-). 

Wf [ActBe, fear : see (δι-, δει-).] 

| Δείκνυμι (δεικ-), show, δείξω, ἔδειξα, δέδειχα, δέδειγμαι, ἐδείχθην, δει- 

χθήσομαι; δείξομαι, ἐδειξάμην. See ὃ 123. (11.) [lon. (δεκ-), -δέξω, 
-ἔδεξα, -δέδεγμαι (Ep. δείδεγμαι), -ἐδέχθην, ἐδεξάμην. | 

Δέμω (δεμ-, Sue-), build, ἔδειμα, [δέδμημαι], ἐδειμάμην. Chiefly Ionic. 

Δέρκομαι, see, ἐδέρχθην ; 2 ἃ. ἔδραἄκον, (ἐδράκην) δρὰκείς ; 2 p. δέδορκα, 
§ 109, 8, 7 (a), and 4, N. 1. 

Δέρω, flay, Sep, ἔδειρα, δέδαρμαι ; 2a. ἐδάρην. ὃ 109, 4. 

[Δεύομαι, Epic for déoua.] See δέω, want. 


Δέχομαι, receive, δέξομαι, δέδεγμαι [Hom. δέχαται for δεδέχαται, ὃ 106, 1, 
N.], ἐδέχθην, ἐδεξάμην ; [2 ἃ. m. chiefly Epic (ἐδέγμην) δέκτο, imper. 
δέξο, inf. δέχθαι, part. δέγμενος (sometimes as pres. ). ] 


c Δέω, bind, Show, ἔδησα, δέδεκα Keely δέδηκα), δέδεμαι, ἐδέθην, δεθήσομαι ; 
fut. pf. δεδήσομαι. 


Δέω, want, need, (€-) dejow, ἐδέησα [Ep. ἔδησα,] δεδέηκα, δεδέημαι, ἐδεήθην. 
Mid. δέομαι, ask, δεήσομαι. From Epic stem dev- (ε-) come [ἐδεύησα 


(once in Hom.), and δεύομαι, δευήσομαι]. Impersonal Set, debet, there is 
need, (one) ought, δεήσει, ἐδέησε. 


[Δηρϊάω, act. rare (Sypt-), contend, fut. δηρίσω (late), aor. ἐδήρῖσα (Theoc.}, 
aor, p. δηρίνθην as middle (Hom.). Mid. δηριάομαι and δηρίομαι, as act., 
δηρίσομαι (Theoc.), ἐδηρισάμην (Hom.).] § 108, vii. Note. (7). 

[Δήω, Epic pres. with future meaning, shall find.] See (8a-). 


. (Av, Se-), stem, fear; [Epic pres. δείδω, fut. δείσομαι,] aor. ἔδεισα, pf. 
δέδοικα, 8 109, 8, N. 2 [Ep. δείδοικα, ὃ 101, 1, N.]. From stem &-, [Ep. 
impf. dfov,] 2 pf. δέδια, 2 plpf. ἐδεδίειν [Ep. δείδια, &e.]. See 8 125, 4. 
[Mid. δίομαι, frighten, pursue, δίωμαι, διοίμην, δίεσθαι, διόμενος ; also 
δίεμαι, fear, fice ; impf. act. ἐν-δίεσαν, chased away: poetic, chiefly Ἐγίς.}. 


CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 337 


Διαιτάω, arbitrate, w. double augment in perf. and plpf. and in compounds; 
διαιτήσω, διήτησα (ἀπ-εδιήτησα), δεδιήτηκα, δεδιήτημαι, διῃτήθην (ἐξ-εδιῃ- 
τήθην); διαιτήσομαι, κατ-εδιητησάμην. ὃ 105, 1, N. 2. 

Avakovéw, minister, ἐδιάκόνουν ; διᾶκονήσω (aor. inf. διακονῆσαι), δεδιάκόνη- 
μαι, ἐδιάκονήθην. Later and doubtful (poetic) earlier forms with augment 
διη- or δεδιη-. See ὃ 105, 1, N. 2. 


Δίδημι, bind, chiefly poetic form for δέω. (1.) 


»Διδάσκω (didax-), for διδαχ-σκω (δ 108, vi. N. 8), teach, διδάξω, ἐδίδαξα 


[ἐδιδάσκησα], δεδίδαχα, δεδίδαγμαι, ἐδιδάχθην ; διδάξομαι, ἐδιδαξάμην. (6 ) 


ὁ Διδράσκω (δρα-), only in comp., run away, -δράσομαι, -δέδράκα; 2 ἃ. -ἔδρὰν 


ΠΣ 


[Ion. -ἔδρην], -δρῶ, -δραίην, -δρᾶναι, -δράς (§ 125, 8). (6.) 


ες Δίδωμι (δο-), give, δώσω, ἔδωκα, δέδωκα, &c.; see inflection and synopsis in 


§ 123. [Ep. δόμεναι or δόμεν for δοῦναι, fut. διδώσω for δώσω.] (I.) 

[Δίζημαι, seek, with ἡ fore; διξήσομαι. Tonic and poetic.] (I.) 

Διψάω, thirst, διψήσω, ἐδίψησα. ὃ 98, N. 2, 

Δοκέω (δοκ-), seem, think, δόξω, ἔδοξα, δέδογμαι, ἐδόχθην (rare). Poetic 
δοκήσω, ἐδόκησα, δεδόκηκα, δεδόκημαι, ἐδοκήθην. i λας, δοκεῖ, 7 
seems, &e. (7.) ᾿ 

Δουπέω (δουπ-), sound heavily, ἐδούπησα [Ep. ἐγδούπησα; 2 pf. δέδουπα, 
δεδουπώς, fallen.] Chiefly poetic. (7.) 

Δράω, do, δράσω, ἔδρᾶσα, dédpaxa, δέδραμαι, (rarely δέδρασμαι), (ἐδράσθην) 
δρασθείς. § 109, 2. 

Δύναμαι, be able, augm. ἐδυν- and ἦδυν- (§ 100, N. 2); pr. ind. 2 p. sing. 
poetic δύνᾳ (Att. & Dor.) or δύνῃ (Ion.); δυνήσομαι, δεδύνημαι, ἐδυνήθην 
(rarely ἐδυνάσθην), [Ep. ἐδυνησάμην.)] (I.) 

Δύω, enter or cause to enter, and δύνω (du-), enter ; δύσω (Ὁ), ἔδῦσα, δέδῦκα, 
δέδῦμαι, ἐδύθην (v); 2 a. ἔδῦν, inflected § 123, see also § 125, 3; ἃ. Τῇ. 
ἐδύσάμην [Ep. ἐδυσόμην, inflected as 2 aor.].° (5. ) 


E. 


| *Eéo [Ep. eldw], permit, ἐάσω, εἴῶσα [Ep. ἔασα], elixa, εἴᾶμαι, εἰάθην ; 


ἐάσομαι (as pass.). § 104. 

*Eyyvdao, proffer, betroth, augm. ἠγγυ- or Y ἐνεγυ- (ἐγγεγυ-). 

*Eyelpw (ἐγερ-), raise, rouse, ἐγερῶ, ἤγειρα, ἐγήγερμαι, ἠγέρθην ; 2 Ῥ. ἔγρή- 
γορα, am awake [Hom. ἐγρηγόρθασι (for -ὀρασι), imper. ἐγρήγορθε (for 
-dpare), inf. ἐγρήγορθαι or -όρθαι] ; 2 ἃ. τα. ἠγρόμην [Ep. ἐγρόμην.] (4-) 

"ES, cat, see ἐσθίω. 

“Ἑζομαι, (ἑἐδ- for σεδ- ; cf. sed-eo), sit, [fut. inf. ἐφ- ἔσσεσθαι (Hom.);] aor. 
ἑσσάμην and ἐεσσ-, elodunv. [Act. aor. εἶσα and goa (Hom.).] (4.) See 
ἴζω and καθέζομαι. 

᾿Εἰθέλω and θέλω, wish, imp. ἤθελον ; (ε-) ἐθελήσω, ἠθέλησα. HOA nea. 


΄ 


os 


338 Ἷ APPENDIX. 


"E0iga (ἐθτδ-), accustom, ἐθίσω, ctOica, εἴθικα, εἴθισμαι, εἰθίσθην. § 104. 
(4.) 

"HOw, be accustomed, [only Ep. part. ἔθων;} 2 p. (ὧθ- for Fw0-) εἴωθα [lon. 
ἔωθα], as present , 2 plpf. εἰώθειν. ὃ 104; § 109, 3, N. 1. (8.) 

EtSoy (i5-, Fid-), vid-i, saw, 2 aor., no present ; ἔδω, ἴδοιμι, ἴδε or ἰδέ, ἱδεῖν, 
ἰδών. Mid. (chiefly poet.), εἴδομαι, seem, [Ep. εἰσάμην and ἐεισ- ;] 2 a. 
εἰδόμην (in prose rare and only in comp.), saw, = εἶδον, Οἶδα (2 pf. as 
pres.), Know, plp. ἤδειν, knew, f. εἴσομαι; see ὃ 125, 4; § 127. (8.) 
Hixdtw (εἰκαδ-), make like, eixdow, εἰκᾶσα or ἠκᾶσα, εἴκασμαι or ἤκασμαι, 

τς εἰκάσθην, εἰκασθήσομαι. (4.) 

(Hix) not used in pres. (ix-), resemble, appear, imp. εἶκον, f. εἴξω (rare), 2 
Ῥ. ἔοικα [lon. οἶκα] (with ἔοιγμεν, [ἔϊκτον,] εἴξάσι, eixévar, εἰκώς, chiefly 

. poetic); 2 plp. ἐῴκειν [with ἐΐκτην]. Προσήϊξαι, art like [and Ep. ἤϊκτο 
or éixro], sometimes referred to ἐΐσκω. Impersonal ΝΙΝ it seems, &c. 
For ἔοικα (ἰκ-), see 8 109, 3; § 104. (2). 

[Ethéo (ἐλ-, εἰλ-), press, roll, aor. ἔλσα, pf. p. ἔελμαι, 2 aor. p. ἐάλην or 
ἄλην w. inf. ἀλήμεναι. Pres. pass. εἴλομαι. Epic. Hdt. has (in comp.) 

_ sethnoa, -εἴλημαι, -εἰλήθην. Pind. has plpf. éddre.] The Attic has εἱλέο- 
μαι, and εἴλλω or εἵλλω. See Aw. (4. 7.) 

Hipt, be, and Hips, go. See ὃ 127, I. and II. 

Etrrov (ἐπ- for Fer-, ἐεπ-), said, [Ep. ἔειπον, 2 aor., no present ; ‘ee, εἴ- 
ποιμι, εἰπέ [Ep. imp. ἔσπετε], εἰπεῖν, εἰπών ; 1 aor. εἶπα (opt. εἴπαιμι, 
imper. εἶπον or εἰπόν, inf. εἶπαι, pt. εἴπαΞ), ‘[Hat. ἀπ-ειπάμην. Other 
tenses are supplied by Hom. εἴρω (ἐρ-), and a stem fe-: f. ἐρέω, ἐρῶ ; p. 
εἴρηκα, εἴρημαι ; a. p. ἐρρήθην, rarely ἐρρέθην [101]. εἰρέθη»; fut. pass. ῥηθή- 
σομαι ; fut. pf. εἰρήσομαι. ὃ 101,1, N. See ἐνέτω. (8.) 

Ἐϊΐργνυμι and εἱργνύω, also eipyw (eipy-), shut in; εἴρξω, εἴρξα, elpypat, 
εἴρχθην. Also tpyw, ἕρξω, ἔρξα, [(ἔργμαι) 8 pl. ἔρχαται w. plpf. ἔρχατο : 
ἔρχθην ; Epic]. (11.) 

Εἴργω (εἰργ- ), shut out, εἴρξω, elpta, εἴργμαι, εἴρχθην ; εἴρξομαι. Also [ἔργω, 
-ἔρξα, -ἔργμαι, lonic]; ἔρξομαι (Soph.). [Epic ‘also éépyw.] 

[Εἴρομαι (Ion.), ask, εἰρήσομαι. See tpopar.] 

Kip (ép-), say, Epic in present. See εἶπον. 

Eipw (ép-), sero, join, a. -elpa [Ion. -ἔρσα], p. -elpxa, εἷρμαι [Ep. ἕερμαι]. (4.) 

[ίσκω, liken, compare; poetic, chiefly Epic: pres. also tcxw.] See 
εἴκω. .(7.) 

᾿Ἐικκλησιάζω, call an asses (ἐκκλησία) ; augm. ἠκκλη- and ἐξεκλη-. 

8106, 1, N. 2. 

A? Ehotve, for ἐλα-νυ-ὦ (§ 108, ν. 4, N. 2), poet. ἐλάω (€d\a-), drive, march, f. 

(ἐλάσω) ἐλῶ [Epic ἐλάσσω and ἐλόω ;] ἤλασα, ἐλήλακα, ἐλήλαμαι (Ton. and 

late -ασμαι, Hom. plup. ἐληλέδατο]), ἠλάθην [-ἡλάσθην ? Ion.]; ἠλασάμην. 


(5.) 


CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 339 


EN Ke, confile, ἐλέγξω, ἤλεγξα, ἐλήλεγμαι (δ 97, 4), ἡλέγχϑῳ, ἡλευχϑή, 
σομαι. 

“λίσσω and εἱλίσσω (ἑλικ-), roll, ἑλίξω, εἴλιξα, εἵλιγμαι, εἱλίχθην ; [Epic 
ἑλίξομαι, ἐλιξάμην]. (4.) 

“Ἕλκω (late ἑλκύω), pull, ἕλξω (rarely ἑλκύσω), εἵλκυσα, εἵλκυκα, εἵλκυσμαι, 
εἱλκύσθην. § 104. 

[Ἑλπω, cause to hope, 2 p. ἔολπα, hope; 2 plpf. ἐώλπεν. § 109, 3. Mid. 
ἔλπομαι, hope. Epic.| 

*Epéw, vomit, fut. ἐμῷ (rare), ἐμοῦμαι ; aor. ἤμεσα. ὃ 109,1, Ν. 2. 

Ἔμπολάω, traffic, ἐμπολήσω, &c. regular, Augm. ἦμπ- or ἐνεμπ-. § 105, 
ΤΗΝ 3. 

*Evaipw (évdp-), kill, [Ep. a. m. ple 2 ἃ. ἤνᾶρον. Poetic. (4.) ; 

᾿Ἐνέπω (ἐν and stem σεπ-)} or ἐννέπω, say, tell, [Ep. f. ἐνι-σπήσω and ἐνίψω ;} 
2 a. ἔνι-σπον, w. imper. ἔνισπε [Ep. ἐνίσπες), inf. ἐνισπεῖν [Ep. -éuer.] 
Poetic. See εἶπον. (8.) 

| "Evivobe, defect. 2 pf., sit, lie on, (also past). Epic.] See ἀνήνοθε. 

᾿Ἐνίπτω (ἐνιπ-), chide, [Ep. also ἐνίσσω, 2 a. évévirov and ἠνίπᾶπον, § 100, 
N. 4.] (3.) 

_ “Evvipt (€- for βεσ-), ves-tio, clothe, pres. act. only in comp. [f. ἕσσω, a. 
ἔσσα, p. ἕσμαι] or εἷμαι ; [ἑσσάμην or éeco-.] In comp. -fow, -ἔσα, 
-écdunv. Chiefly Epic: ἀμφι-έννυμι is the common form in prose, (II.) 

*Evoxéw, harass, w. double augment ; ἠνώχλουν,  ἐνοχλήσω, ἠνώχλησα, 
ἠνώχλημαι. § 105, 1, N. 3. 

“Eopratw (éoprad-], Ion. ὁρτάζω, keep festival ; impf. ἑώρταζον. ὃ 104, 
Note 1. (4) | | 

*Exravpéw and ἐπαυρίσκω (aip-), both rare, enjoy, |f. ἐπαυρήσομαι,] a. 
ἐπηυράμην, 2 a. ἐπηυρόμην, os and Ep. éraipov| Chiefly poetic. 
(6. 7.) 

*Exiorapoat, understand, imp. ἠπιστάμην, f. ἐπιστήσομαι, ἃ. ἠπιστήθην ; 
pres. ind. 2 p. poetic ἐπίστᾳ [Ion. ἐπίστεαι.}] (Not to-be confounded 
with forms of ἐφίστημι.) (I.) 

Ἕ πω (cer-), be after or busy with, imp. εἶπον, f. -ἔψω, 2 ἃ. -ἔσπον (for 
é-cer-ov), [a. p. περι-ἐφθην Hadt.,]—all chiefly i in comp. Mid. ἕπομαι 
{and ἕσπομαι], follow, imp. εἱπόμην and ἑπόμην ; ἕψομαι ; 2 a. ἑσπόμην 
and -ἐσπόμην, σπῶμαι, &c., w. imp. [σπεῖο (for σπεο),] σποῦ. 

"Epopor, love, (dep.) poetic for ἐράω ; ἠράσθην, ἐρασθήσομαι, [ἡρασάμην 
Epie.] (1.) 

1 ᾽᾿Εργάζομαι, work, do, augm. eip- (§ 104), ἐργάσομαι, εἴργασμαι, εἰργάσθην, 
εἰργασάμην, ἐργασθήσομαι. 

"EpSw and ἕρδω (Fepy-), work, do, ἔρξω, ἔρξα, [lon. 2 Ῥ. ἔοργα, 2 plpf. 
ἐώῤγει Ionic and poetic. See ῥέζω. (8.) 


4 zi 
340 : APPENDIX. | 


᾿Ἐρείδω, prop, épelow (later), ἤρεισα, [-ἤρεικα, ἐρήρεισμαι and ypyp- with 
ἐρηρέδαται and -ατο,] ἠρείσθην ; ἐρείσομαι, ἠρεισάμην. 

᾿Ερείκω (€pix-), tear, burst, ἤρειξα, ἐρήριγμαι, 2 ἃ. ἤρϊίκον, Poetic. (2.) 

᾿Ἐρείπω (ἐρἴπ-), throw down, ἐρείψω, ἤρειψα, [ἐρήριπα, have fallen, ἐρήριμ- 
μαι], ἠρείφθην ; [2 ἃ. ἤριπον, ἠρίπην ; a. m. -ἠρειψάμην.) (2.) 

᾿Ἐρέσσω (ἐρετ-), strike, row, [Ep. aor. ἤρεσα.] ὃ 108, iv. 1, Note. (4.) 

[ἰἘριδαίνω, contend, for ἐρίζω ; aor. m. inf. ἐριδήσασθαι. Epic. ] 

*Epite (épi5-), contend, ἤρισα, [ἡρισάμην Epic.] (4.) 

"Epopo. (rare or ?) [Ion. εἴρομαι, Ep. ἐρέω or ἐρέομαι], for ἐρωτάω, ask, 
fut. ἐρήσομαι [Ion. εἰρήσομαι], 2 ἃ. ἠρόμην. See εἴρομαι. 

Ἕρπω, creep, imp. εἷρπον ; fut. ἕρψω. Poetic. § 104, N. 2. 

"Eppa, go to destruction, (ε-) ἐρρήσω, ἤρρησα, -ἤρρηκα. 

᾿ *Epvyydve (ἐρῦγ-), eruct, 2 ἃ. ἤρῦγον. (5.) [lon. ἐρεύγομαι, ἐρεύξομαι. (2.)] 

᾿Ἐρύκω, hold back, |Ep. f. ἐρύξω,] ἤρυξα, [Ep. 2 a. ἠρύκακον.] 

[’Ept and εἰρύω, draw, fut. ἐρύω, aor. εἴρῦσα and épiica, pf. p. εἴρῦμαι and 
εἴρυσμαι. Mid. ἐρύομαι and εἰρύομαι, take wnder one’s protection, ἐρύσο- 
μαι and elp-, ἐρυσάμην and εἰρυσάμην ; with Hom. forms of pres. and impf. 
εἰρύαται (U), pico, Epiro and εἴρῦτο, εἴρυντο, ἔρυσθαι and εἴρυσθαι, which 
are sometimes called perf. and plpf. Epic.] See ῥύομαι. 

-"Epxopon (ἐλῦθ-, ἔλευθ-), go, come, f. ἐλεύσομαι (Ion. and poet.), 2 p. ἐλή- 
λῦθα [Ep. ἐλήλουθα and εἰλήλουθα], 2 a. ἦλθον (poet. ἤλῦθον). In Attic 
prose, εἶμι is used for ἐλεύσομαι (δ 200, Note 3). (8.) 

*Eo blo, also ἔσθω and ἔδω (φὰγ-), edo, cat, fut. ἔδομαι, p. ἐδήδοκα, ἐδήδε- 
σμαι [Ep. ἐδήδομαι], ἠδέσθην ; 2 a. ἔφαγον ; [Epic pres. inf. ἔδμεναι ; 2 
perf. part. ἐδηδώς.] (8.) 

‘Eoride, feast, augment εἷστι- (δ 104). 

Eide, sleep, impf. εὗδον or ηὗδον (δ 103, N.); (e-) ebdhou, [-εὕδησα]. Com- 
monly in καθ-εύδω. § 109, 8. 

Evepyeréw, do good, εὐεργετήσω, &c. regular : sometimes augmented εὐηργ. 


(8 105, 2) 
ὴ Εὑρίσκω (εὑρ-), find, (ε-) εὑρήσω, εὕρηκα, εὕρημαι, εὑρέθην, εὑρεθήσομαι ; 
2 ἃ. εὗρον, εὑρόμην. Sometimes augmented ηὑρ- (ὃ 103, Note). § 109, 
1, N.2(0.) 16ἢ 
Hidpatvw (εὐφρὰν- -), cheer, f. εὐφρὰνῶ ; a. εὔφρᾶνα (or ηὔφρ-), [lon. also 
εὔφρηνα ;] a. p. εὐφράνθην (or ηὔφρ-), f. p. εὐφρανθήσομαι ; f. m. edppa- 
4 νοῦμαι. § 103, Note. (4.) 

"Exo (cex-), have, imp. εἶχον ; ἕξω or σχήσω, ἔσχηκα, ἔσχημαι, ἐσχέθην 
(chiefly Ion.); 2 a. ἔσχον (for €-cex-ov), σχῶ, σχοίην (-σχοῖμι), oxES, 
σχεῖν, σχών ; poet. ἔσχεθον, &c.; [Hom. pf. part. συν-οχοκώς, plpf. ἐπ- 
wxaro, were shut.| Mid. ἀκομαὶ, cling to, ἕξομαι and σχήσομαι, ἐσχό- 
μην. (8.) 

"Expo, cook, (ε-) ἑψήσω and ἐφόνωϊαι, ως, ιὕψημαι, ἡψήθην.Ἶ 


CATALOGUE OF VERBS. = 84 


Z. 


Zao, live, w. ζῆς, ζῇ, κα. (8. 98, N. 2); oe ἔζων and 2 ae: ξήσω, ζήσο- 
μαι, ἔζησα, ἔζξηκα. Ton. ζώω. 
Ζεύγνυμι (ζὕγ- ef. jug-um), yoke, ζεύξω, ἔξευξα, ἔζευγμαι, ἐζεύχθην ; 2, ἃ. 
p. ἐξύγην. (2. II.) 
Zéw, boil, poet. ζείω, (ow ; ἔζεσα, [-ἔζεσμαι Τοη.]. 
Ζώννυμι (ζω-), gird, ἔζωσα, ἔζωσμαι, ἐξωσάμην. (11.) 


H. 


& Ἥδϑομαι, be pleased, ἡδόμην ; ἥσθην, ἡσθήσομαι, ἘΠῚ m. ἥσατο ἘΠ The 
act. ἥδω, w. impf. δον, aor. oa, occurs rarely. 

ἯΜμαι, sit: see ὃ 127. 

*"Hyw, say, chiefly in imperf. ἣν δ᾽ ἐγώ, said I, and ἢ δ᾽ ὅς, said he (§ 151, 
Note 8). [Epic ἢ (alone), he said.] “Hm, I say, colloquial. See 
φημί.. 

*Hptw, bow, sink, aor. ἤμῦσα, [pf. ὑπ-εμνή-μῦκε (for -ἐμ-ημυκε, ὃ 102) Hom. 1. 
Poetic, chiefly Epic. 


Θ. 


Θάλλω (θὰλ-), bloom, [2 perf. τέθηλα (as present), plpf. τεθήλειν.] (4.) 

[Odopar, gaze at, admire, Doric for θεάομαι, lon. θηέομαι ; θάσομαι, ἑθᾶσά- 
μην (Hom. opt. θησαίατ᾽).] 

[Odopar, milk, inf. θῆσθαι, aor. ἐθησάμην. Epic. ] 

(Θαπ- or tad, for θαφ-), astonish, stem with [2 perf. τέθηπα, am aston- 
ished, Epic plpf. ἐτεθήπεα ; 2 ἃ. ἔταφον, also intransitive.] § 17, 2, Note. 

Θάπτω (τἄφ- for θαφ-), bury, θάψω, ἔθαψα, τέθαμμαι, [lon. ἐθάφθην, 
rare;| 2 ἃ. p. ἐτάφην ; 2 —_ ταφήσομαι; fut. pf. τεθάψομαι. ὃ 17, 2, 
Note. (3.) 

Oclvw (θεν-), smite, θενῶ, ἔθεινα ; 2 ἃ. ἔθενον. (4.) 

Θέλω, wish, (ε-) θελήσω, ἐθέλησα (not in indic.) ; see ἐθέλω. 

Θέρομαι, warm one’s self, (fut. θέρσομαι, 2 a. p. (€0¢om) subj. θερέω 
Chiefly Epic. ] 

ν Θέω (θῦ-), run, fut. θεύσομαι. § 108, 11. 2. (2.) 

Θιγγάνω (θζγ-), touch, θίξομαι or τεθίξομαι (1), 2 ἃ. ἔθύγον. (5.) 

[Θλάω, bruise, θλᾶσω, ἔθλἄσα, τέθλασμαι, ἐθλάσθην. onic and poetic. ] 

Θλίβω (OAB-), sqyuceze, θλίψω, ἔθλιψα, [τέθλίφα 1αἰ6,7 τέθλιμμαι, ἐθλίφθην; 5 
ee ; [fut. m. θλίψομαι. Hom.]. (2.) 


342 APPENDIX. 


Μθνήσω (θᾶν-, θνᾶ-), die, θανοῦμαι, τέθνηκα ; fut. pf. τεθνήξω, § 110, iv. (c), 
N. 2, or τεθνήξομαι; 2 a. ἔθανον ; 2 p. (τέθναα) ὃ 125, 4, part. τεθνεώς 
|Hom. τεϑνηώ:]. In Attic prose always ἀπο-θανοῦμαι and ἀπ-έθανον. (6.) 
Θράσσω and Opdrrw (τρᾶχ-, θρᾶχ-), disturb, aor. ἔθραξα, ἐθράχθην (rare); 
|p. τέτρηχα, be disturbed, plpf. rerpyxew, Hom.] See ταράσσω. (4.) 
Θραύω, bruise, Opatow, ἔθραυσα, τέθραυσμαι and τέθραυμαι, ἐθραύσθην. 
8 109, 2. Chiefly poetic. 
| Θρύπτω (τρῦφ- for θρῦφ-), crush, ἔθρυψα, τέθρυμμαι, ἐθρύφθην [Ep. 2 a. p. - 
-ἐτρύφην)], θρύψομαι. ὃ 17, 2, Note. (3.) 
Θρώσκω (Pop-, Opo-), Leap, fut. θοροῦμαι, 2 ἃ. ἔθορον. Chiefly poetic. (6.) 
τ Ovw (v), sacrifice, imp. ἔθῦον ; θύσω (0), ἔθῦσα, TED Ka, τέθῦμαι, Wied 
: (0, θύσομαι, ἐθύσάμην. ὃ 17, 2, Note. 
Ove or θύνω (Ὁ), rage, rush. Poetic: classic only in present and imperfect. 


si 


᾿Ιάλλω (ἰᾶλ-), send, fut. -ἰαλῶ, [Ep, aor. ἴηλα.] Poetic. (4.) 

[[1Ἰἄχω, shout, idxov ; 2 pf. (taxa) ἀμφιαχυῖα. Poetic, chiefly Epic. ] 

᾿Ιδρὕύω, place, ἱδρύσω, ἵδρῦσα, ἵδρῦκα, ἵδρῦμαι, ἱδρύθην [or ἱδρύνθην, chiefly 
Epic]; ἱδρύσομαι, ἱδρύσάμην. 

ζω (ἰδ-), seat or sit, mid. ὕζομαι, sit ; used chiefly in καθ-ίζω, which see, 
See also ἦἧμαι. (4.) 

"Type (ἐ-), send; see ὃ 127. (1) 
,. Ἱκνέομαι (ix-), poet, ixw, come, ἵξομαι, tyuar; 2 a. ἱκόμην. In prose usu- 
ally ἀφ-ικνέομαι. From ixw, [Ep. imp. ἵκον, 2 a. tov, § 119, 8.] (5.) 
“Ἴλάσκομαι [Ep. ἱλάομαι] (δεῖν propitiate, ἱλάσομαι, ἱλάσθην, ἱλασά- 
μην. (6.) 

[Ἵλημι, be propitious, pres. only imper. tn or ἵλᾶθι ; pf. subj. and opt. 
ἱλήκω, ἱληκοιμι (Hom.). Poetic, chiefly Epic.] [1.] 

Ἴλλω and ἴλλομαι, roll, for εἴλλω. See εἰλέω, 

Ἵμάσσω (δ 108, iv. 1, N.), ash, aor. ἵμᾶσα. (4.) 

Ἱπτᾶμαι (πτὰ-), fly, impf. ἱπτάμην ; 2 ἃ. m. ἐπτάμην. Active 2 a. ἔπτην 
w. pt. πτάς. See πέτομαι, (I.) 

[Ἴσαμι, Doric for οἶδα, know.] 

[Ἴσκω : for synopsis and inflection see ἐΐσκω.] 

Ἵστημι (ord-), set, place: see, for synopsis and inflection, ὃ 123. (1) 

᾿Ισχναίνω (icxvav-), make lean or dry, fut. ἰσχνᾶνῶ, aor. tcxvava [ἴσχνηνα 
Ion.], a. p. doxvdvOnv; fut. m. loxvavotua. (4.) 

Ἴσχω (for σι-σεχω, isxw), have, hold, redupl. for ἔχω (cex-w). See ἔχω. 


< 


CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 343 


Κ. 


Καθαίρω (καθὰρ-), purify, καθαρῶ, ἐκάθηρα and éxd@apa, κεκάθαρμαε, 
ἐκαθάρθην ; καθαροῦμαι, ἐκαθηράμην. (4.) 

ἸΚαθ-έζομαι (ἐδ-), sit down, imp. ἐκαθεζόμην, f. καθεδοῦμαι. See ἕζομαι. 

 αθεύδω, sleep, imp. ἐκάθευδον and καθηῦδον [Epic καθεῦδον), ὃ 103, Note; 
fut. (€-) καθευδήσω (δ 109, 8). See εὕὔδω. 


Kaolto, set, sit, f. καθιῶ (for καθίσω), καθιζήσομαι ; ἃ. ἐκάθϊσα or. per ἴσα, 
ἐκαθισάμην. See ἵζω. .For κάθημαι, see ἣμαι, 

Καίνῦμαι for καδ-νυμαι (xad-), excel, p. κέκασμαι (Dor. κεκαδ- μένος]. (11. 

Katvw (κὰν-), kill, f. κανῶ, 2 a. ἔκανον, 2 p. κέκονα. Chiefly poetic. (4.) 

Kaiw (xav-), or κάω, burn; καύσω ; ὄκαυσα, poet. Exea [Epic ἔκηα] ; -κέ- 
καυκα, κέκαυμαι, ἐκαύθην, καυθήσομαι, [2 a. ἐκάην :] fut. mid. xadcouae 
(rare). (4) 

Καλέω (καλε-, κλε-), call, f. καλῶ (rarely καλέσω) ; ἐκάλεσα, κέκληκα, κέ- 
κλημαι (opt. κεκλῇο, κεκλήμεθα), ἐκλήθην, κληθήσομαι; fut. τη. καλοῦμαι, 
a. ἐκαλεσάμην ; fut. pf. κεκλήσομαι. ὃ 109,1, N. 2; 8118, 1, N. 

ἸΚαλύπτω (καλὺῦβ-), cover, καλύψω, ἐκάλυψα, κεκάλυμμαι, ἐκαλύφθην, καλυ- 
φθήσομαι ; aor. τη. ἐκαλυψάμην. In prose chiefly ἴῃ compounds. (3.) 

ἹΚάμνω (κἂμ-), labor, καμοῦμαι, κέκμηκα [Ep. part. κεκμηώΞ] ; 2 ἃ. ἔκαμον, 
[Ερ. éxaudunv.] (5.) 

Κάμπτω (καμπ-}), bend, κάμψω, ἔκαμψα, κέκαμμαι (§ 16, 8, N.; § 97, N. 8), 
ἐκάμφθην. (3. 

Karnyopéw, accuse, regular except in omission of the augment, κατηγό- 
ρουν, &c. See § 105, 1, N. 2. 

[(Kao-), pant, stem with Hom. perf. part. κεκαφηώς ; cf. τεθνηώς. 

[Κεδάννῦμι, Ep. for σκεδάννυμι, scatter, ἐκέδασσα, ἐκεδάσθην.)] (II.) 

ἹΚεῖμαι, lic, κείσομαι; see ὃ 127. . 

Kelpw (xep-), shear, f. κερῶ, a. Execpa [poet. Exepoa], κέκαρμαι, [(ἐκέρθην) 
κερθεὶς ; 2a. p. ἐκάρην ;] f. τη. κεροῦμαι, a m. ἐκειράμην [w. poet. part. 
κερσάμενος.] (4) 

[KéxaSov, deprived of, caused to leave, κεκαδόμην, retired, κεκαδήσω, shall de- 
prive, reduplicated Hom. forms of χάζω.] ὃ 100, N. 3. See χάζω. 

ἹΚελεύω, command, κελεύσω, ἐκέλευσα, κεκέλευκα, κεκέλευσμαι, ἐκελεύσθην. 
§ 109, 2. Mid. chiefly in compounds. 

Kado (xed-), land, κέλσω, ἔκελσα. Poetic. See ὀκέλλω. (4.) 

κέλομαι, order, [Ep. (ε-) κελήσομαι, ἐκελησάμην ; 2 a. m. κεκλόμην or: 
ἐκεκλόμην (§ 100, N.3).] See $110, v. N. 2. Chiefly Epic. 

Kevréw, prick, κεντήσω, éxévrnoa, [κεκέντημαι Ion., ἐκεντήθην later, συγ- 
κεντηθήσομαι Hdt.J. (Hom. aor. inf. κένσαι, from stem xevr-. (7.)] 

Κεράννυμι (xepa-, xpa-), mix, ἐκέρᾶσα [Ion. ἔκρησα), κέκρᾶμαι [Ion. -nuac], 


844 : APPENDIX. 


ἐκράθην [Ion. -7Oyr] and ἐκεράσθην ; f. pass. κραθήσομαι; a.m. ἐκερασά- 
μην. (II.) 
ἹΚερδαίνω (xepdav-), gain, f. κερδανῷ [Ion. xepdavéw and ῬΕΎΣΗΒΕΥ ἐκέρ- 
Sava [Ion. -yva or ἡσα], -κεκέρδηκα (κερδᾶ-, § 109, 6). (4.) 
ἹΚεύθω (κῦθ-), hide, κεύσω, [ἔκευσα ;] 2 p. κέκευθα (as pres.) ; [Ep. 2 a. 
κύθον, subj. κεκύθω.] (2.) 
Κήδω (καδ-), vex, (ε-) [κηδήσω, -ἐκήδησα ; 2 p. κέκηδα]. Mid. κήδομαι, 
sorrow, ἐκηδεσάμην, [Ep. fut. pf. κεκαδήσομαι.) (2.) 
@ Κηρύσσω (κηρῦκ-), proclaim, κηρύξω, ἐκήρυξα, κεκήρῦχα, κεκήρνυγμαι, ἐκη- 
ρύχθην, κηρυχθήσομαι ; κηρύξομαι, ἐκηρυξάμην. (4.) 
[Κίδνημι, spread, Ion. and poetic for σκεδάννυμι.)] (1.) 
[Kivopat, move, pres. and imp.; as mid. of kwéw. Epic.] (II) 
Kipynpe and κιρνάω: see κεράννυμι. 
Κιχάνω (xix-), find, (€-) κιχήσομαι, [Ep. ἐκιχησάμην] ; 2 a. ἔκιχον [and ἐκί- 
χὴν like ἔστην]. Poetic. (5.) 
Κίχρημι (xpa-), lend, [χρήσω Hadt.], ἔχρησα, κέχρημαι ; ἐχρησάμην. (1) 
Κλάζω (κλαγγ-, κλὰγ-), clang, κλάγξω, ἔκλαγξα ; 2 p. κέκλαγγα [Ep. κέ- 
κληγα, part. κεκλήγοντες ;)] 2 ἃ. ἔκλαγον ; fut. pf. κεκλάγξομαι. (4.) 
Κλαίω and κλάἄω (κλαυ-), weep, κλαύσομαι (rarely κλαυσοῦμαι, sometimes 
κλαιήσω or κλαήσω), ἔκλαυσα and ae Pah κέκλαυμαι ; fut. pf. (im- 
pers.) κεκλαύσεται. (4.) 
Knrdo, break, ἔκλᾶσα, κέκλασμαι, ἐκλάσθην ; [2 a. pt. κλάς.1 ὃ 109, 2. 
Ἰλείω, shut, κλείσω, ἔκλεισα, κέκλειμαι or κέκλεισμαι, ἐκλείσθην, κλεισθήσο- 
μαι; fut. pf. κεκλείσομαι; ἃ. τη. ἐκλεισάμην. ([lon. pres. Κληίω, ἐκλήισα, 
| κεκλήϊμαι, ἐκληίσθην or ἐκληίθην.) Older Attic λήω, κλήσω, ἔκλῃσα, 
᾿ «κέκλῃκα, κέκλῃμαι, -ἐκλήσθην. 
ν Ἀλέπτω (κλεπ-), steal, κλέψω (rarely κλέψομαι), ἔκλεψα, κέκλοφα, κέ- 
κλεμμαι, (ἐκλέφθην) κλεφθείς ; 2 ἃ. p. ἐκλάπην. ὃ 109, 8, N. 2. (3.) 
; Κλίνω (κλὶν-), bend, incline, κλϊνῶ, ἔκλινα, [κέκλίκα, later,] κέκλζμαι, ἐκλί- 
θην [Ep. ἐκλίνθην], κλίθήσομαι ; 2 ἃ. p. ἐκλίνην, f. κλϊνήσομαι ; fut. m. κλι-. 
_voduat, a. ἐκλινάμην. 8 109, 6. (4. 
Kyte, hear, imp. ἔκλυον (as aor.) ; 2 a. imper. κλῦθι, κλῦτε [Ep. κέκλῦθι, 
κέκλῦὕτε]. Poetic. 

_ Kvata, scrape (in compos.), -κναίσω, -ἔκναισα, -κέκναικα, -κέκναισμαι, -ἐκναί- 
σθην, -κναισθήσομαι.. Also κνάω, with ae, an contracted to ἡ, and ae, 
an to n (ὃ 98, N. 2). 

y Κόπτω (κοπ-), cut, κόψω, ἔκοψα, -κέκοφα [2 p. κεκοπώς Epic], κέκομμαι ; 
2 aor. p. ἐκόπην, 2 fut. p. κοπήσομαι ; fut. pf. -κεκόψομαι ; aor. m. ἐκο- 
ψάμην. (3. 

ἸΚορέννῦμι (xope-), satiate, [f. κορέσω Hdt., κορέω Hom.,] ἐκόρεσα, κεκό- 
ρεσμαι [Ion. -nuce], ἐκορέσθην ; [Ep. 2 p. pt. κεκορηώς, a. m. ἐκορεσά- 
μην.) (11) 


Σ 
. 


CATALOGUE OF YERBS. : 345 


Κορύσσω (κορῦθ-), arm, [aor. κόρυσσε and κορυσσάμενος (Hom.), pf. p. κε- 
κορυθμένος.] Poetic, chiefly Epic. (4.) 


[Koréw, be angry, aor. ἐκότεσα, ἐκοτεσάμην, 2 pf. pt. κεκοτηώς, angry, 


— 


Epic. ] 

Κράζω (xpay-), cry out, fut. pf. κεκράξομαι (rare), 2 pf. xéxparya (imper. κέ- 
κραχθι), 2a. -ἔκραγον. (4.) 

Kpatve (xpav-), accomplish, κρανῶ, ἔκρᾶνα [Ion. ἔκρηνα], ἐκράνθην, κρανθή- 
σομαι ; f. m. κρανοῦμαι ; p. p. 3 sing. κέκρανται (cf. πέφανται, § 97, 
Note 3, d). Ionic and poetic. [Epic κραιαίνω, aor. ἐκρήηνα, pf. and plp. 
κεκράανται and κεκράαντο ; éxpadvOnv (Theoc.).] (4.) 

Kpépapar, hang, (intrans.), κρεμήσομαι. (1.) 

Κρεμάννυμι (xpeua-), hang, (trans.), κρεμῶ (for xpeudow), éxpéuaca, éxpeud- 
σθην ; [ἐκρεμασάμην.] (II.) ὶ 

Κρήμνημι, suspend, mid. κρήμνἄμαι ; only in pres. and ἱτηρῇ, Poetic, (1.) 

Kopltw (xpty-), creak, squeak, [2 a. (ἔκρίκον) 3 sing. κρίκε ;] 2 p. (xéxptya) 
κεκριγότες, squeaking. (4.) 

Kolve (xpiv-), judge, f. κρίνῶ, ἔκρινα, Kéxpixa, κέκρζμαι, ἐκρέθην [Ep. ἐκρίν- 
θην], ᾿κρίθήσομαι ; fut. m. κρϊνοῦμαι, a.m. [ΕΡ. ἐκρινάμην.) § 109, 6. 
(4.) 

Kpove, beat, κρούσω, ἔκρουσα, κέκρουκα, -κέκρουμαι and -κέκρουσμαι, éxpod- 
σθην ; -κρούσομαι, ἐκρουσάμην. 

Κρύπτω, (κρῦβ-, κρῦφ-), conceal, κρύψω, &c. regular; 2 ἃ. p. ἐκρύφην (rare), 
2 ἴ, κρύφήσομαι or κρῦβήσομαι. (3.) . 

ΚΚτάομαι, acquire, κτήσομαι, ἐκτησάμην, κέκτημαι or ἔκτημαι, possess (subj. 
κεκτῶμαι, opt. κεκτήμην or κεκτῴμην), ἐκτήθην (as pass.) ; κεκτήσομαι 
(rarely éxr-), shall possess. ὃ 118,1, Note. 

ἹΚτείνω (xrev-), kill, f. κτενῶ [Ion. xrevéw, Ep. also κτανέω], a. ἔκτεινα, 
(p. ἔκταγκα, rare), 2 PB. ἔκτονα ; [Ep. ἐκτάθην ;] 2 a. &xravoy (ἔκταν poet. 

_ § 125, 3); 2 a. m. poet. ἐκτάμην (as pass.) ; [Ep. fut. τη. -xraveouar.] - 
§ 109, 3, 4 (w. N. 1), 5. In Attic prose ἀποκτείνω is generally used. (4.) 

Krite (xrid-), found, κτέσω, éxrica, ἔκτισμαι, ἐκτίσθην ; [aor. m. ἐκτισά- 
μην (rare). (4.) 

Krivvupe and κτιννύω, in compos., only pres. and impf. See κτείνω. (11.) 

Κατυπέω (κτῦπ-), sound, cause to sound, ἐκτύπησα, [2 ἃ. ἔκτύὕπον.] (7.) 

ἸΚυλίω, more frequently κυλίνϑω or κυλινδέω, roll, ἐκύλϊσα, κεκύλισμαι, 
ἐκυλίσθην, -κυλισθήσομαι. 

Kuvéw (κῦ-), kiss, ἔκῦσα. (5.) ἹΠροσ-κυνέω is deilabaty regular. 

Kirra (κῦφ-), stoop, κύψω and κύψομαι, aor. éxupa, pf. κέκῦφα. (3.) 

Κύρω, meet, chance, κύρσω, ἔκυρσα. Kvpéw is regular. 


346 . APPENDIX. 


Δ. 


{“«Λαγχάνω (λᾶχ-), obtain by lot, λήξομαι [Ton. λάξομαι], εἴληχα, [Ion. and 


poet. λέλογχα,] (εἴληγμαι) εἰληγμένος, ἐλήχθην ; 2 a. Edaxov [Ep. 
λέλ-] (5.) ' 

AapBave (λὰβ-), take, λήψομαι, εἴληφα, εἴλημμαι (poet. λέλημμαζ), ἐλή- 
φθην, ληφθήσομαι ; 2 ἃ. ἔλαβον, ἐλαβόμην [Ep. inf. λελαβέσθαι.] [Ion. 
λάμψομαι, λελάβηκα, λέλαμμαι, ἐλάμφθην ; Dor. fut. λάψοῦμαι.)ὺ (5.) 

«Λάμπω, shine, λάμψω, ἔλαμψα, 2 pf. λέλαμπα ; fut. m. -λάμψομαι Hadt.]. 

«Λανθάνω (λὰθ-), poet. λήθω, lie hid, escape the notice of (some one), λήσω, 
[ἔλησα], 2 p. λέληθα [Dor. λέλαθα,] 2 a. ἔλῶᾶθον [Ep. λέλαθον.] Mid. 
forget, λήσομαι, λέλησμαι [Hom. -ασμαι}, fut. pf. λελήσομαι, 2 a. ἐλαθό- 
μην [Ep. λελαθόμην.] (5.) 

Adokw for λακ-σκὼ (AdK-), speak, (ε-) λακήσομαι, ἐλάκησα, 2 p. λέλᾶκα 
[Ep. λέληκα w. fem. part. λελᾶκυϊα :] 2 ἃ. Erdxov [λελακόμην]. Poetic. 
§ 108, vi. N. 3. (6) 

[Ado, AG, wish, λῇς, λῇ, &e.; Infin. λῆν. ὃ 98, N. 2. Doric.] 


μ, «Λέγω, say, λέξω, ἔλεξα, λέλεγμαι (δι-εἰλεγμαὼ, ἐλέχθην ; fut. λεχθήσομαι, 


λέξομαι, λελέξομαι, all passive. For pf. act. εἴρηκα is used (see εἶπον). 


«(λίγ gather, arrange, count (Attic only in comp.), λέξω, ἔλεξα, εἴλοχα, 


*. 


εἵλεγμαι or λέλεγμαι, ἐλέχθην (rare); 2 a. p. ἐλέγην, f. λεγήσομαι. [2 ἃ. 
m. ἐλέγμην (λέκτο, imper. λέξο, inf. λέχθαι, pt. Aéyuevos)]. [The Hom. 
forms λέξομαι, ἐλεξάμην, ἔλεξα, and ἐλέγμην, in the sense put to rest, rest, 
are generally referred to stem λεχ-, whence λέχος, &c. ] 

«Λείπω (dim-), leave, λείψω, λέλειμμαι, ἐλείφθην ; 2 p. λέλοιπα ; 2 a. ἔλιπον, 
ἐλιπόμην. See ὃ 95 and § 96. (2.) 

[Λελίημαι, part. λελιημένος, eager (Hom.).] 

Aciw, stone, generally κατα-λεύω ; -λεύσω, -ἔλευσα, ἐλεύσθην, -λευσθήσομαι. 
§ 109, 2. 

«Λήθω, poetic : see λανθάνω. 

Antto (A7i5-), plunder, act. rare, only impf. ἐλήϊζον. Mid. ληΐζομαι (as . 
act.), [fut. ληΐσομαι, aor. eet, Ion. 1. Eurip. has ἐλῃσάμην, and 
pf. p. λέλῃσμαι. (4) 


Atocopat or (rare) λίτομαι (Air-), supplicate, [ἐλισάμην, 2 ἃ. ἐλιτόμη»ν]. 


[ Aoéw, Epic for λούω ; λοέσσομαι, ἐλόεσσα, ἐλοεσσάμην. 

Aovw or Aéw wash, regular. In Attic writers and Herod. the pres. and 
imperf. generally have contracted forms of λόω, as ἔλου, ἐλοῦμεν, λού- 
μενος. 

Ava, loose, see ὃ 95 and § 96; [Epic 2 ἃ. τη. ἐλύμην (as pass.), λύτο and 
Noro ; pf. opt. λελῦτο or λελῦντο, § 118, 1, Note.] 


CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 


M. VS 
ν Ε] SS | 

Μαίνω (udv-), madden, a. ἔμηνα, 2 pf. μέμηνα, am mad, 2 
Mid. μαίνομαι, be mad, [uavodua, ἐμηνάμην.] (4) 

Μαίομαι (ud-), scek, μάσομαι, ἐμασάμην. Chiefly Epic. See ὃ 108, iv. 3, 
Note, and μάομάι. (4) 

v Μανθάνω (udd-), learn, (€-) μαθήσομαι, μεμάθηκα ; 2 ἃ. ἔμαθον. (5.) 

Méopat, only in contract form [μῶμαι (imper. pweo or μῶσο, inf. μῶσθαι,] 

_pt. μώμενος), desire eagerly ; 2 p. (μέμαα) ὃ 125, 4 [part. μεμαώς (-dros 
or -dros).] A second p. μέμονα (uev-) supplies the singular of (uéuaa). 

Μάρνᾶμαι, fight (subj. μάρνωμαι,. imp. μάρναο); a. ἐμαρνάσθην. Poetic. 
(2)... ze 

Mdprre (uapr-), seize, udpyw, ἔμαρψα [2 pf. μέμαρπα Epic]. Poetic. (3.) 

Μάσσω (μὰγ-), knead, μάξω, &c. regular; 2a. p. ἐμάγην. (4.) 

& Méxopor [Ion. μαχέομαι], fight, f. μαχοῦμαι [Hdt. μαχέσομαι, Hom. μα- 
χέομαι or μαχήσομαι], p. μεμάχημαι, ἃ. ἐμαχεσάμην [Ep. also ἐμαχησά- 
μὴν ; Ep. pres. part. μαχειόμενος or μαχεούμενος . 

[Μέδομαι, think of, plan, (€-) μεδήσομαι (rare). Epic. ] 

ΜΜεθ-ίημι, send away ; see ἵἴημι ($127). [Hadt. pf. pt. μεμετιμένος. 

Μεθύσκω (μεθῦ-), make drunk, ἐμέθῦσα, ἐμεθύσθην. See μεθύω. (6.) 

Μεθύω, be drunk, only pres. and impf. 

Melpopar (uep-), obtain, [Ep. 2 pf. 3 sing. ἔμμορε ;] impers. unites it is 
Jated, εἱμαρμένη (as subst.), Fate. (4.) 

ἹΜέλλω, intend, augm. ἐμ- or ἦμ-; (€-) μελλήσω, ἐμέλλησα. 

Maa, concern, care for, (ε-) μελήσω [Ep. μελήσομαι, 2 p. μέμηλα]; μεμέ- 
λημαι [Ep. μέμβχεται, μέμβλετο, for μεμέληται, μεμέλητο]; (ἐμελήθην) 
μεληθείς. Μέλει, ἐξ concerns, impers.; μελήσει, ἐμέλησε, μεμέληκε. 

Μέμονα (μεν-), desire, 2 perf. with no present. § 109, 8, Ionic and poetic. 
See μάομαι. 

οἱ Méva, remain, f. μενῶ [Ion. pevéw], ἔμεινα, (ε-) μεμένηκα. 

᾿ Μερμηρίζω (ὃ 108, iv. ὁ, N. 1), ponder, [uepunpléw, ἑμερμήριξα] (Attic 
-ἐμερμήρισα). Poetic. (4.) 

ΜΜήδομαι, devise, μήσομαι, ἐμησάμην. Poetic. 

Μηκάομαι (μᾶκ-, μηκ-), bleat, [2 a. part. κακών ; 2 Ῥ. part. μεμηκώς, με- 
μᾶκυϊα ; 2 plp. ἐμέμηκον.] Chiefly Epic. § 108, vii. Note. (2. 7.) 

Mnrtido (Epic -6w), plan. Mid. pytidopar and μητίομαι (Pind. ), patel 
σομαι, ἐμητισάμην. Epic and Lyric.] ὃ 108, vii. Note. (7.) 


Μιαίνω (μιὰν-), stain, μιᾶνῶ, euldva [Ion. ἐμίηνα], μεμίασμαι, ἐμιάνθην, 
μιανθήσομαι. (4.) 


j 
/ 


348 APPENDIX. 


Μίγνυμι (uiy-) and μίσγω, mix, μίξω, ἔμιξα, μέμιγμαι, ἐμίχθην, μιχθήσο- 
t; 2a. p. ἐμίγην, [Ep. fut. μιγήσομαι ; 2 ἃ. τὰ. ἔμικτο and μῖκτο ; fut. 
pf. μεμίξομαι.] (11.) ὲ 


᾿ΝΜιμνήσκω (μνὰ-), remind; mid. remember; μνήσω, ἔμνησα, μέμνημαι, 


remember, ἐμνήσθην (as mid.) ; μνησθήσομαι, μνήσομαι, μεμνήσομαι; ἐμνη- 
σάμην (poet.). Μέμνημαν (memini) has subj. μεμνῶμαι, opt. μεμνῴμην 
or μεμνήμην, imp. μέμνησο [Hdt. μέμνεο], inf. μεμνῆσθαι, pt. μεμνημένος. 
§ 118, 1, Note. (6.) 
[From Ep. μνάομαι come ἐμνώοντο, μνωόμενος, &c.] ὃ 120, 1 (0). 

Micyo, mix, pres. and impf. See plyvups. 

Mito, suck, (lon. μυζέω, aor. -ἐμύζησα (Hom.) |. 

Mito (uvy-), grumble, mutter, aor. ἔμυξα. Poetic. (4.) 

Mukdopar (μῦκ-), bellow, [Ep. 2 pf. μέμῦκα ; 2 a. wixov;] ἐμυχησάμην. 
Chiefly poetic. § 108, vii. Note. (2. 7.) 

Mie, shut (the lips or eyes), aor. ἐμῦσα, pf. μέμῦκα. 


N. 


Nato (va-), dwell, [ἔνασσα, ἐνασσάμην,] ἐνάσθην. Poetic. ὃ 108, iv. 8, 
Note. (4.) 

Νάσσω (ναδ-, vay-), stuff, [ἔναξα,] νένασμαι or νέναγμαι. (4.) 

[Νεικέω and νεικείω, chide, νεικέσω, ἐνείκεσα. Ionic, chiefly Epic. ] 

Νέμω, distribute, f. veud, ἔνειμα, (€-) νενέμηκα, νενέμημαι, ἐνεμήθην ; νεμοῦ- 
μαι, ἐνειμάμην. 

ἹΝέομαι, go, come, or (as future) will go. Chiefly poetic. 

1. Néw (wi), swim, -évevoa, -νένευκα ; f. τὰ. part. vevoodpevos. (2.) 

2. Néw, heap up, ἔνησα, νένημαι or νένησμαι. fica Ion. νηέω, νήησα, 
νηῆσαι, &e.] 

3. Néw and νήθω, spin, νήσω, ἔνησα, ἐνήθην ; (Ep. a. M. γήσαντο.] 

Nite later virrw (viB- -), wash, νίψω, ἔνιψα, μέεμμαι, [-ἐνίφθην ;] νίψομαι, 
ἐνιψάμην. § 108, iv. (0), N.2. (4. 

Νίσσομαι (νιτ-), go, fut. νίσομαι (sometimes viccouar). Poetic. (4.) 

Noéw, think, perceive, νοήσω, &c., regular in Attic. [lon. ἔνωσα, -νένωκα, 
νένωμαι.] (7) 

Νομίζω (vouts-), believe, fut. νομιῶ [voulow late], aor. ἐνόμϊσα, pf. νενό«- 
Mika, νενόμισμαι, aor. p. ἐνομίσθην, fut. p. νομισθήσομαι. (4) 


4 


f 


Vv 


CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 349 
: ἘΞ. 
ἘΞέω, scrape, [aor. ἔξεσα and ξέσσα, chiefly Epic], ἔξεσμαι. § 109, 2. 
Exnpatve (inpav-), dry, ξηρὰνῶ, ἐξηρᾶνα [Ion. -qva}, ἐξήρασμαι and ἐξή- 


βαμμαι, ἐξηράνθην. (4.) 
ve, polish, ἔξῦσα, ἔξυσμαι, ἐξύσθην ; aor. τα. ἐξυγάμην 8 109, 2. 


Ο. 

᾿Οδοποιέω, make a way, regular; but pf. ὡδοπεποίηκα (ὡδοπεποιημένη). 
So sometimes ὁδοιπορέω, travel. 

(‘O8v-), be angry, stem with only [Hom. ὠδυσάμην, ὀδώδυσμαι]. 

Ὄζω (ὀδ-), smell, (€-) ὀξήσω [lon. ὀξέσω], ὥξησα [Ion. ὥζεσα], 2 p. ὄδωδα 
(late), [plp. ὀδώδειν Hom.} (4.) 

Οἴγνυμι and οἴγω, open, οἴξω, ᾧξα [Ep. also dita], -ἔψγμαι, a. p. part. 
oix Geis ; fut. pf. dv-ewterar. See dv-olyvupr. (II) 

Oidéw and οἰδάνω, swell, [οἰδήσω (Ion.),] ᾧδησα, ᾧδηκα. 

Οἰνοχοέω, pour wine, οἰνοχοήσω, οἰνοχόησα ere and Lyric). Impf. 3 p. 
οἰνοχόει, φνοχόει, ἐῳνοχόει. 
Οἴομαι, chink, in prose generally οἶμαι and ᾧμην in 1 per. sing.; οἰήσομαι, 
φήθην. [Ep. act. οἴω (only 1 sing.), often ὀΐω ; ὀΐομαι, ὀϊσάμην, ὠΐσθην.] 
Otxopar, be gone, (ε-) οἰχήσομαι, οἰχῶμα or ᾧχωκα (with irreg. w for 7), 
§ 109, 8, Note ; [Ion. οἴἔχημαι or ᾧχημαι, doubtful in Attic]. 

᾿Οκέλλω (ὀκελ-), run ashore, aor. ὥκειλα. Prose form of κέλλω. (4.) 

᾿Ολισθάνω, rarely ὀλισθαίνω (ὀλισθ-), slip, [Ion. ὠλίσθησα, ὠλίσθηκα]; 2 a. 
ὥλισθον. (5.) 

"Odddpr (probably for dd-vu-us) rarely ὀλλύω (ὁλ-), destroy, lose, f. ὁλῶ 
[ὀλέσω, ὀλέω], ὥλεσα, -ὀλώλεκα ; 2 p. ὄλωλα, perish, 2 plpf. ὀλώλειν 


(8 102, Note 2). Mid. ὄλλυμαι, perish, ὀλοῦμαι, 2 ἃ. ὠλόμην. In prose — 


generally ἀπ-όλλυμι. § 108, v. 4, Note 2. (II) 

"Ὄμνῦμι and ὀμνύω (du-, duo-), swear, f. ὀμοῦμαι, ὥμοσα, ὀμώμοκα, duchuo- 
cpa (with ὁμώμοται), ὠμόθην and ὠμόσθην ; ὀμοσθήσομαι, a. Mm. -ὠμο- 
σάμην. 8 102, N. 2. (IL) 

᾿Ομόργνῦμι (ὀμοργ-), wipe, ὀμόρξω, ὀμόρξομαι, ὥμορξα, ἌΜΜΙΝ: ; yet 
ομορχθείς. Chiefly poetic. (II.) 

vy’ Ovivnpe (ὀνὰ- )s benefit, ὀνήσω, ὥνησα, ὠνήθην ; ὀνήσομαι ; 2 ἃ. Τῇ. ΚΡῊΣ 

or (rare) ὠνήμην. [Hom. imper. ὄνησο, pt. ὀνήμενος). ὃ 125, 2, N. 2. (.) 

["Ovopat, ἐπϑιῖέ, (inflected like δίδομαι) ; " ὀνόσομαι, ὠνοσάμην (Epic also 
ὠνάμην), -ὠνόσθην. Tonic and poetic.] (1.) 

᾿Οξύνω (ὀξῦν-), sharpen, -ὀξύνῶ, ὥξῦνα, -ὥξυμμαι, «ὠξύνθην, {ξνθύσηα 
In prose only in compos. (4.) 

᾿Οπυίω (ὀπυ-), marry, fut. ὀπύσω. § 108, iv. 3, N. Pres, ὀπύω (doubt- 
ful). (4.) sie 


Yi 


350 | APPENDIX. 


“Opdw (épa-, ὁπ-), see, imperf. ἑώρων [Ion. ὥρων or ὥρεον ;] ὄψομαι, ἑώρᾶκα or 4 


ἑόρακα, ἑώρᾶμαι or ὦμμαι, ὥφθην, ὀφθήσομαι ; 2 Ὁ. ὄπωπα (Ion. and poet.). 
For 2. ἃ. εἶδον, &c., see εἶδον, [Hom. pres. mid. 2 sing. ὅρηαι.)] (8.) 

*Opyatve (dpyav-), be angry, aor. dpydva, enraged. Onlyin Tragedy. (4.) 

*Opéyo, reach, ὀρέξω, ὥρεξα, [lon. ὥρεγμαι, Hom. p. p. 3 plur. épwpéxarat, 
plp. dpwpéxaro,| wpéxOnv ; ὀρέξομαι, ὠρεξάμην. 

"Ορνῦμι (ὀρ-), raise, rouse, pow, ὦρσα, 2 p. ὄρωρα (as mid.) ; [Ep. 2 a. 
ὥρορον.)] Mid. rise, rush, [f. dpoduat, p. dpwpeuar,] 2 a. ὠρόμην [with 
ὦρτο, imper. ὄρσο, ὄρσεο, ὄρσευ, inf. ὦρθαι, part. Spuevos]. Poetic. (IL) : 

᾿ς Ὀρύσσω or ὀρύττω (dpi'y-), dig, ὀρύξω, ὥρυξα, -dpdpuxa (rare), ὀρώρυγμαι 

(rarely ὥρυγμαι), ὠρύχθην ; f. p. -ὀρυχθήσομαι, 2 f. ὀρυχήσομαι) ; [ὠρυ- 
ξάμην, caused to dig, Hdt.] (4.) 

᾿Οσφραίνομαι (ὀσῴφρ-), smell, (€-) ὀσφρήσομαι, ὠσφράνθην (rare), 2 a τὰ. 
ὠσφρόμην. §108,v. N. 1. (5. 4.) 

[Οὐτάζω, wound, οὐτάσω, ovraca, οὕτασμαι. Chiefly Epic.] (4.) 

[Οὐτάω, wound, οὔτησα, οὐτήθην ; 2a. 8 sing. obra, inf. οὐτάμεναι and οὐτά- 
μεν ; 2. ἃ. mid. οὐτάμενος as pass. Epic. ] 

ἐΟφείλω (ὀφελ-), ὃ 108, iv. 2, N. 1 [Ep. reg. ὀφέλλω], owe, ought, (ε-) 

ὀφειλήσω, ὠφείλησα, (ὠφείληκα ?) ἃ. p. pt. ὀφειληθείς ; 2 ἃ. ὥφελον, used 
in wishes (ὃ 251, 1, Note 1), Othat/ (4.) 
᾿Οφέλλω (ὀφελ-), increase, [aor. opt. ὀφέλλειε Hom.] Poetic, especially 
Epic. (4) 
᾿Οφλισκάνω (ὀφλ-, ὀφλισκ-), be guilty, incur (a penalty), (€-) ὀφλήσω, 
ὦφλησα (1816), ὥφληκα, ὥφλημαι ; 2 a. ὦφλον (inf. and pt. sometimes 
ὄφλειν, ὄφλων). (6. 5.) 


Π. 


Παίζω (παιδ-, παιγ-), sport, παιξοῦμαι, ἔπαισα, πέπαικα (πέπαιχα later), 
πέπαισμαι. ὃ 108, iv. (Ὁ), Ν. 1. (4) 

:. ΠΠαίω, strike, παίσω, poet. (€-) παιήσω, ἔπαισα, πέπαικα, ἐπαίσθην. 

Παλαίω, wrestle, παλαίσω, ἐπάλαισα, ἐπαλαίσθην. § 109, 2. 

Πάλλω (πὰλ-), brandish, ἔπηλα, πέπαλμαι ; [Hom. 2 a. ἀμπεπᾶλών, as if 
from πέπαλον ; 2 ἃ. m. ἔπαλτο and πάλτο.] (4.) 

Tlapavopéw, transgress law, augm. παρὴν- or παρεν-, mapaver-. § 105, 1, 
Note 2. 

Tlapowéw, insult (as a drunken man), imp. ἐπαρῴνουν ; παροινήσω, ἐπαρῷ- 
νησα, πεπαρῴνηκα, ἐπαρῳνήθην. 

ΤΠάσομαι, fut., shall acquire (no pres.), pf. πέπᾶμαι, ἐπασάμην. Poetic. 
Not to be confounded with rdcouat, ἐπα σάμην, &c., of πατέομαι. 


CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 351 


Πάσσω or πάττω (8 108, iv. 1, N.), sprinkle, rdow, ἔπᾶσα, ἐπά- 
σθην. (4.) 
Ὺ Πάσχω (πὰθ-, πενθ-), suffer, πείσομαι (for πενθ-σομαι, § 16, 6, N. 1); 2p. 
/ πέπονθα [Hom. πέποσθε and πεπᾶθυϊα) ; 2 ἃ. ἔπᾶθον. (8.) 
ι Πατέομαι (πᾶτ-), cat, πάσομαι (a), ἐπάσάμην ; [Ep. plp. πεπάσμην.} Ionic 
and poetic. See πάσομαι, (7) ὁ 
ὙΠείθω (πἴθ-), persuade, πείσω, ἔπεισα, πέπεικα, πέπεισμαι, ἐπείσθην (§ 16), 


πεισθήσομαι ; fut. m. πείσομαι ; 2 p. πέποιθα, trust, [Ep. ἐπέπιθμεν, pip. f 


for ἐπεποίθειμεν ;] poet. 2 ἃ. ἔπιθον and ἐπιθόμην [Ερ. πέπιθον and πεπιθό- 
μην. [Epic (€-) πιθήσω, πεπιθήσω, πιθήδας.}] (2.) 

Πεινάω, hunger, regular except in having ἡ for a in contract forms, inf. 
πεινῆν [Epic πεινήμεναι], &c. See ὃ 98, N. 2. 


Tlelpw (περ-), pierce, περῶ (3), ἔπειρα, πέπαρμαι, [-ἐπάρην]. Ionic and 


poetic. (4.) 

Tlexréw {(πεκ-, πεκτ-), comb, Epic pres. πείκω ; [Dor. fut. πεξῶ,] aor. ἔπεξα, 
ἐπεξάμην, ἐπέχθην. Poetic. (3. 7.) 

Πελάζω (πελὰδ-) and poet. πελάω (meda-, πλα-), bring near, approach, 
pres. also weAdOw, approach ; f. πελῶ (for weddow), ἐπέλασα, πέπλημαι, 
ἐπελάσθην and ἐπλάθην ; ἐπελασάμην ; [2 ἃ. τη. ἐπλήμην, approached.) (4.) 

Πέλω and πέλομαι, be, imp. ἔπελον, ἐπελόμην [syneop. ἔπλε, ἔπλεο (ἔπλευ), 
ἔπλετο, for ἔπελε, ὅτο.; so ἐπι-πλόμενος and περι-πλόμενος]Ὶ. Poetic. 

ν ἸΠέμπω, send, πέμψω, ἔπεμψα, πέπομφα, πέπεμμαι (ὃ 97, Ν. 8, α), ἐπέμ- 
φθην, πεμφθήσομαι ; πέμψομαι, ἐπεμψάμην. See pf. p. of πέσσω. 

Πεπαίνω (rerdv-), make soft, ἐπέπᾶνα, ἐπεπάνθην, πεπανθήσομαι. (4.) 

TlépSopat, Lat. pedo, 2 fut. (pass.?) -παρδήσομαι, 2 p. πέπορδα, 2 ἃ. -ἔπαρδον. 

Πέρθω, destroy, sack, πέρσω [πέρσομαι (as pass.) Hom.], ἔπερσα, [Ep. 2 a. 
(w. πραθ- for περθ-) ἔπραθον, ἐπραθόμην (as pass.) with inf. πέρθαι. 
§ 109, 7 (a). Poetic. 

Πέρνημι, mid. πέρνᾶμαι : poetic for πιπράσκω. (I.) 

Πέσσω or πέττω (mem-), cook, πέψω, ἔπεψα, πέπεμμαι (8 97, ἡ Ὁ a; 
ef. πέμπω), ἐπέφθην. ὃ 108, iv. 1, N. (4. 

ἹΠετάννυμι (πετὰ-), expand, πετάσω (πετῶ), ἐπέτασα, neenanes (πεπέ- 
τασμαι late), ἐπετάσθην. (IL) | 

Πέτομαι {πετ-, rr-), fly, (€) πτήσομαι (poet. πετήσομαι) ; 2a. τῇ. ἐπτό- 
μην. To ὕπταμαι (rare) belong 2 ἃ. ἔπτην (poet.) and ἐπτάμην. The 
forms πεπότημαι and ἐποτήθην (Dor. -ἅμαι, -ἀ θην) belong to wordopat, 

TlevOopar (πῦθ-} : see πυνθάνομαι. (2.) 

ἸΠήγνῦμι (πὰγ-), fix, freeze, πήξω, ἔπηξα, ἐπήχθην (rare ce poet.); 2a. p. 
ἐπάγην, 2 f. p. παγήσομαι ; 2 p. πέπηγα, be fixed; [Ep. 2 a. m. κατ- 
ἔπηκτο ;] πήγνῦτο isennett) pr. opt. for πηγνύοιτο (Plat.) ; [πήξομαι, 
ἐπηξάμην.] (11.) 


352 | APPENDIX. 


[TItAvapor, approach, pres. and impf. Epic.] (1.) 

L- Πίμπλημι (πλὰ-), fill, πλήσω, ἔπλησα, -πέπληκα, πέπλησμαι, ἐπλήσθην, 7 
πλησθήσομαι ; ἃ. τη. ἐπλησάμην (trans.); [Ep. 2 ἃ. τη. ἐπλήμην.] § 125," : 
31. 

Πίμπρημι (πρᾶ-), burn, πρήσω, ἔπρησα, πέπρημαι and πέπρησμαι, ἐπρήσθην ; 
[Ion. f. πρήσομαι, fut. pf. πεπρήσομαι.} ὃ 125, 2. Cf. πρήθω, blow. (1. 

Πινύσκω (πινῦ-), make wise, [Hom. aor. ἐπίνυσσα ;] chiefly Epic. See 
πνέω. (6.) 

« Πίνω (ai-, πο-), drink, fut. πίομαι (πιοῦμαι rare) ; πέπωκα, πέπομαι, ἐπό- 
θην, ποθήσομαι ; 2 ἃ. ἔπϊον. (8.) : 
Πιπίσκω (m-), give to drink, πίσω, ἔπῖσα. Ionic and poetic. See 

πίνω. (6.) 

Πιπράσκω (περᾶ-, rpa-), sell, [Ep. περάσω, ἐπέρασα,] πέπρᾶκα, πέπρᾶμαι 
[Hom. πεπερημένοΞ], ἐπράθην [Ion. -nuat, -ηθην] ; fut. pf. πεπράσομαι. 

9 The Attic uses ἀποδώσομαι and ἀπεδόμην in fut. and aor. (6.) ᾿ 

ΜΠίπτω (πετ-, wro-) for πι-πετ-ω, fall, ἴ, πεσοῦμαι [Τοῃ. πεσέομαι]; p. πέπτωκα, 

τς Ῥεῖ. πεπτώς [Ep. πεπτηώς or -ews]; 2. ἃ. ἔπεσον [Dor. ἔπετον]. (8.) 

[Πίτνημι, spread, pres. and impf. act. and mid. Epic and Lyric. See 
πετάννυμι.) (1.) 

Πλάζω (πλαγγ-), cause to wander, ἔπλαγξα. Pass. and mid. πλάζομαι, 
wander, πλάγξομαι, will wander, ἐπλάγχθην, wandered. Ionic and 
poetic. (4.) 

Πλάσσω (πλατ-ἢ), form, [πλᾶσω Ion.], ἔπλᾶσα, πέπλασμαι, ἐγλάδδιν»: 
ἐπλασάμην. § 108, iv.1,N. (4.) 

Πλέκω, plait, knit, πλέξω, ἔπλεξα, [πέπλεχα or πέπλοχα Ion. (rare)], πέ- 
πλεγμαι, ἐπλέχθην, πλεχθήσομαι ; 2 ἃ. p. -ἐπλάκην ; ἃ. m. ἐπλεξάμην. 
Πλέω (πλῦ-), sail, πλεύσομαι or πλευσοῦμαι, ἔπλευσα, πέπλευκα, πέπλευ- 
σμαι, ἐπλεύσθην (later). ([Ion. and poet. πλώω, πλώσομαι, ἔπλωσα, πέ- 

πλωκα, Ep. 2 aor. ἔπλων.)] (2.) ᾿ 

(.. Πλήσσω or πλήττω (πληγ-), strike, πλήξω, ἔπληξα, πέπληγμαι, ἐπλήχθην 
(rare) ; 2 p. πέπληγα (rare) ; 2 ἃ. p. ἐπλήγην (in comp. -ἐπλάγην) ; 2 | 
pass. πληγήσομαι and -πλὰγήσομαι ; fut. pf. πεπλήξομαι ; [Ep. 2 a. πέ- ~ 
mdryov (or ἐπέπλ-), πεπληγόμην ; Ion. a.m. ἐπληξάμην.) § 110, vii. N. 2. 
(2. 4.) 

Tl ive (πλῦν-), wash, rrivd, ἔπλῦνα, πέπλὕμαι, ἐπλὕὔθην ; [fut. m. (as pass.) 
πλυνοῦμαι, a. ἐπλῦνάμην. §109, 6. (4) 

TIvéw (πνῦ-), blow, breathe, πνεύσομαι and πνευσοῦμαι, ἔπνευσα, -πέπνευκα, 
[ΕΡ. πέπνῦμαι, be wise, pt. πεπνυμένος, wise, plpf. πέπνῦσο.] [Ep. 2 aor. 
ἄμ-πνῦὕε, ἄμ-πνῦτο, a. p. ἀμ-πνύνθην ;] see ἄμπνυε. See πινύσκω. (2.) 

TIviyo (mviy-), choke, -mviéw [later -πνίξομαι, Dor. πνιξοῦμαι], ἔπνιξα, πέ- 
πνιγμαι, ἐπνζγην, πνΐγησομαι. (2.) 

ἸΠοθέω, desire, ποθήσω, ποθήσομαι, ἐπόθησα ; and ποθέσομαι, ἐπόθεσα. ὃ 109, 
1, N. 2 (8). 


CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 353 


(IIop-, προ-), give, allot, stem whence 2 a. ἔπορον (poet.), p. p. πέπρωμαι, 
chiefly impers., πέπρωται, it is fated (with πεπρωμένη, Fate). See μείρο- 
μαι. 


μνΠράσσω or πράττω (mpay-), do, πράξω, ἔπραξα, πέπρᾶχα, πέπραγμαι, 


} 


ἐπράχθην, πραχθήσομαι ; fut. pf. πεπράξομαι ; 2 p. πέπράγα, have fared 
(well or ill) ; mid. f. πράξομαι, a. ἐπραξάμην. (4) ~~~ 

[Πρήσσω (πρηγ-), do, πρήξω, ἔπρηξα, πέπρηχα, πέπρηγμαι, ἐπρήχθην ; πέ- 
πρηγα ; πρήξομαι, ἐπρηξάμην.] Τοηΐϊς for πράσσω. (4.) 

(mpra-), buy, stem, with only 2 aor. ἐπριάμην, inflected throughout in 
§ 123. 

TIpiw, saw, ἔπρῖσα, πέπρισμαι, ἐπρίσθην. ὃ 109, 2. 

Πτάρνὑμαι (rrdp-), snecze ; [f. πταρῶ ;] 2 aor. éwrdpov, [ἐπταρόμην], (ἐπτά- 
pnv) mrapeis. (II.) 

Πτήσσω (rrdak-, rrnk-), cower, ἔπτηξα, ἔπτηχα. From stem πτὰκ-, poet. 
2 a. (-ἔπτακον) καταπτἄκών. [From stem mrd-, Ep. 2 ἃ. καταπτήτην, 
dual; 2 pf. pt. rerrnws.] (4. 2.) 

Πτίσσω (§ 108, iv. 1, N.), pound, [ἔπτἴσα, ἔπτισμαι.] (4.) 

Πτύσσω (πτῦγ-), fold, mrviw, ἔπτυξα, ἔπτυγμαι, -ἐπτύχθην ; mrviouat, 
ἐπτυξάμην. (4.) 

πυνθάνομαι (πῦθ-), hear, enquire, πεὔσομαι [Dor. πευσοῦμαιῇ, πέπυσμαι: : 
2 ἃ. ἐπυθόμην. (5.) Poetic πεύθομαν (πῦθ-). (2.) 


P. 


Ῥαίνω (pd-, pdv-), sprinkle, pivd, eppava, ἔρρασμαι, (ἐρράνθην) ῥανθείς: 
[From stem ῥα- (cf. βαίνω), Ep. aor. ἔρασσα, pf. p. ἐρράδαται, plpf. ἐρρά- 
daro, ὃ 119, 3.] See ὃ 108, v. N. 1. Tonic and poetic. (5. 4.) 

[Ῥαίω, strike, ῥαίσω, ἔρραισα,] ἐρραίσθην ; [fut. m. (as pass.) -ῥαίσομαι. 
Poetic, chiefly Epic. 

“Parra (pag-), stitch, ῥάψω, ἔρραψα, ἔρραμμαι ; 2 a. p. ἐρράφην ; a. m. éppa- 
ψάμην. (3.) 

‘Pacow or ῥάττω (ῥὰγΎ-), throw down, ῥάξω, ἔρραξα, -ἐρράχθην. (4.) 

“Ῥέζω (ῥεγ-), for ἔρδω, do, ῥέξω, ἔρεξα (rarely ἔρρεξα) ; [lon. a. p. ῥεχθείη, 
ῥεχθείς.] (4.) 

Ῥέω (ῥῦ-), flow, ῥεύσομαι, Eppevoa, (€-) ἐρρύηκα; - ἃ. Ῥ. ἐρρύην ; ῥυήσο- 
μαι. ὃ 108, ii, Note. (2.) 

(‘Pe-), stem οἵ εἴρηκα, εἴρημαι, ἐρρήθην (ἐρρέθην), ῥηθήσομαι, εἰρήσομαι. See 
εἶπον.) 

“Prope (pd'y-, prry-), poet. ῥήσσω, break ; ῥήξω, ἔρρηξα, [-ἔρρηγμαι rare, 
ἐρρήχθην rare 3] 2 a. p. ἐρράγην ; ῥἄγήσομαι; 2 p. eppwya, be broken 
(§ 109, 3, N. 1); [ῥήξομαι,] ἐρρηξάμην. (2. 11.) 


or 


Me 


-», 


᾿ 


354 | APPENDIX. 


“Ῥιγέω ne -), shudder, [prynow, | épplynoa, [2 p. Epptya (as pres.)}] Poetie, 
chiefly Epic. ['7.] 

“Pryde, shiver, prywow, épplywoa ; inf. ῥιγῶν or ῥιγοῦν, ὃ 98, Note 3. 

‘Plata (ῥῖφ-), throw, ῥίψω, ἔρριψα (poet. ἔριψα), Eppipa, ἔρριμμαι [poet. 
ῥέρριμμαι, Hom. plp. ἐρέριπτο], ἐρρίφθην, ῥιφθήσομαι; 2 a p. éppi- 
φην. Pres. also ῥιπτέω. (3. 

“Ῥύομαι (ὅ), defend, ῥύσομαι, ἐρρύσάμην. [Epic, inf. ῥῦσθαι for ῥύεσθαι ; 
impf. 8 pers. ἔρρῦτο and pl. ῥύατο. ὃ 119, 3.] Poetic. See ἐρύω. 

*Purda, be foul, [Epic ῥυπόω ; Ion. pf. pt. ῥερυπωμένος). — 

“Ῥώννυμι (ῥω-), strengthen, ἔρρωσα, Eppwuat (imper. Eppwoo, farewell), ἐρρώ- 
σθην. (11.) 

Σ᾿ 

Σαίρω (σἄρ-}, sweep, aor. pt. onpas; 2 Ῥ. σέσηρα, grin, esp. in part. σεση- 
pws [Dor. cecdpas.] (4.) 

Σαλπίζω (σαλπιγγ-), sound a trumpet, : aor. ἐσάλπιγξα. (4.) 

[Σαόω, save, σαώσω, ἐσάωσα, ἐσαώθην, σαώσομαι; imperf. 3 sing. σάω (for 
ἐσάω) as if from Aeol. σάωμι ; imperat. σάω (for σάου). Ἐίο.] 

Σβέννυμι (σβε-), extinguish, σβέσω, ἔσβεσα, -ἔσβηκα, ἔσβεσμαι, ἐσβέσθην ; 
2 ἃ. ἔσβην ; -σβήσομαι. (11.) 

Σέβω, revere, [imp. ἔσεβον late], aor. Ὁ. ἐσέφθην, w. part. σεφθείς, awe. 
struck. 

Xelw, shake, celow, ἔσεισα, σέσεικα, σέσεισμαι, ἐσείσθην ; a. m. ἐσεισάμην ; 
[Ep. imp. éocelovro]. 

Σεύω (σὕ-), move, urge, [a. ἔσσευα, ἐσσευάμην ;) ἔσσυμαι, ἐσσύθην or ἐσύθην ; 
2 ἃ. τὴ. ἐσσύμην (with ἔσυτο, σύτο, cimevos). Poetic. (2.) 

Σημαίνω (σημᾶν-), show, σημὰνῶ, ἐσήμηνα (sometimes éonudva), σεσήμα- 
σμαι, ἐσημάνθην, σημανθήσομαι ; mid. σημανοῦμαι, ἐσημηνάμην. (4.) 

Σήπω (σὰπ-), rot, σήψω, 2 p. σέσηπομᾷειϑ pres.) ; σέσημμαι ; 2 ἃ. p. ἐσά- 
πην, ἴ. σἄπήσομαι. (2.) 

Σκάπτω (σκὰφ-), dig, σκάψω, ἔσκαψα, ἔσκἄφα, ἔσκαμμαι, 2 aor. p. ἐσκά- 
gy. (3.) 

Σκεδάννυμι (cKxedd-), scatter, f. σκεδῶ [σκεδάσω, | ἐσκέδαᾶσα, (ἐσκέδασμαι) 
ἐσκεδασμένος, ἐσκεδάσθην ; ἐσκεδασάμην. (II.) 

Σκέλλω (σκἕλ-, okré-), dry up, [Ep. ἃ. ἔσκηλα,] ἔσκληκα; 2 a, 
ἔσκλην (ἀπο-σκλῆναι). (4.) 


"Σκέπτομαι (σκεπ-), view, σκέψομαι, ἐσκεψάμην, ἔσκεμμαι, fut. pf. ἐσκέψομαι, , 


[ἐσκέφθην, Ion.}. For pres. and impf. the better Attic writers use 
σκοπῶ, σκοποῦμαι, &c. (see σκοπέω). (3.) 

Σκήπτω (σκηπ-), prop, -σκήψω, ἔσκηψα, -ἔσκημμαι, ἐσκήφθην ; σκήψομαι, 
ἐσκηψάμην. (3.) 


ἵ 


CATALOGUE OF VERBS. (2%,. 385, \ 
Σκίδνημι, mid. cxidvd ua, scatter, chiefly poetic for ova est, @). : myer 5 
Σικοπέω, view, in better Attic writers only pres. and im Bett and mid. ἄς 
For the other tenses σκέψομαι, ἐσκεψάμην, and ἔσκεμμαι of Ὁ, 
used. See σκέπτομαι, . 
Σκώπτω (σκωπ-), jeer, σκώψομαι, ἔσκωψα, ἐσκώφθην. (3. Se 
Zpdw, smear, with ἡ for ἃ in contracted forms (δ 98, N. 2), σμῇ for σμᾷ, &e, : 
[Ion. σμέω and σμήχω], aor. p. δια-σμηχθείς (Aristoph.). 
Σπάω, draw, σπάσω (ἃ), ἔσπᾶσα, ἔσπἄκα, ἔσπασμαι, ἐσπάσθην, σπασθήσο- 
μαι; σπάσομαι, ἐσπασάμην. § 109, 1, N. 2; § 109, 2. 
Σπείρω (σπερ-), sow, σπερῶ, ἔσπειρα, ἔσπαρμαι ; 2a. p. ἐσπάρην. (4.) 


« Σπένδω, pour a libation, σπείσω, ἔσπεισα, ἔσπεισμαι ; σπείσομαι, ἐσπεισά- 


μην. § 16, 3 and 6. 


| Στείβω (criB-), tread, -ἔστειψα, (ε-) ἐστίβημαι (§ 108, ii. Note). Poetic. (2.) 


vy Στέλλω (cred-), send, στελῶ [στελέω], ἔστειλα, ἔσταλκα, ἔσταλμαι ; 2 a. p, 


+ 


Στείχω (στἴχ-), go, [-ἔστειξα, 2 a. ἔστίχον.)] Poetic and Ion. (2.) 


ἐστάλην ; -σταλήσομαι ; a.m. ἐστειλάμην. 8 109, 4. (4.) i 

Στενάζω (crevay-), groan, στενάξω, ἐστέναξα. (4.) S 

Zrépyw, love, στέρξω, ἔστερξα ; 2p. ἔστοργα. § 109, 8. 

Zrepéw, deprive, also oreplokw ; στερήσω, ἐστέρησα [Epic ἐστέρεσα], ἐστέ- 
pnka, ἐστέρημαι, ἐστερήθην, στερηθήσομαι; 2aor. p. ἐστέρην, 2 fut. (pass. 
or mid.) στερήσομαι. 

[Xretpor, pledge one’s self; 3 pers. pres. sae impf. στεῦτο. Poetic, | 
chiefly Epic. ] 

Στίζω (στιγ-), prick, στίξω, ἔστιξα, ἔστιγμαι. (4.) 

Στορέννῦμι or στόρνυμι (στορε-), στορῶ (for στορέσω), ἐστόρεσα, [ἐστορέ- 
σθην], ἐστορεσάμην. (II.) 

\ Στρέφω, turn, στρέψω, ἔστρεψα, ἔστραμμαι, ἐστρέφθην (rare in prose) [lon. 
ἐστράφθην); 2 pf. ἔστροφα (rare) ; 2 a. p. ἐστράφην, f. orpapjoouar; mid. 
στρέψομαι, ἐστρεψάμην. ὃ 109, 4, Ν, 1. 

Στρώννῦμι (στρω-), same as στορέννυμι ; στρώσω, ἔστρωσα, ἔστρωμαι, ἐστρώ- 
θην. (110 

Σ,τυγέω (στῦὕγ-), dread, hate, ἐστύγησα [ἔστυξα], [ἐστύγηκα,] ἐστυγήθην ; 

2 f. p. στυγήσομαι ; [Ep. 2 ἃ. ἔστὕὔγον.)] Ionic and poetic. (7.) 

[Στυφελίζω (στυφελιγ-), dash, aor. ἐστυφέλιξα. Epic.] (4.) 

Σύρω (ciip-), draw, (fut. cvpd late,] aor. ἔσῦρα, ἐσυράμην. (4.) 

Σφάζω (σφὰγ-), slay, Att. prose gen. σφάττω ; σφάξω, ἔσφαξα, ἔσφαγμαι, 
[ἐσφάχθην (rare)]; 2aor. p. ἐσφάγην, fut. σφαγήσομαι ; aor. mid. “ἐσφα- σς 
ξάμην. (4.) μὴ ' 

\y Σφάλλω (σφᾶλ-), trip, deceive, σφαλῶ, ἔσφηλα, ἔσφαλμαι; 2 ἃ. Lp. ἐσφάλην, 

f. σφᾶλήσομαι ; fut. τη. σφαλοῦμαι. (4.) 


᾿Σάζω (σωδ-), save, [also Ep. σώω, w. subj. σόῃς, ody, &e.]; σώσω, ἔσωσα, 


σέσωκα, σέσωσμαι (or -wuat), ἐσώθην, σωθήσομαι; σώσομαι, ἐσωσάμην. (4.) 


356 APPENDIX. 


T. 


(ra-), take, stem with Hom. imperat. τῆ. 

[(ray-), seize, stem with Hom. 2 a. pt. reraydv.] Cf. Lat. tango. 

[Τανύω, stretch, raviow, érdvica, τετάνυσμαι, ἐτανύσθην ; aor. m. ἐτανυσσά- 

τ μην. 8109, 2. Epic form of τείνω.] 

Ταράσσω (ταρᾶχ-), disturb, ταράξω, ἐτάραξα, τετάραγμαι, ἐταράχθην, τα- 
ραχθήσομαι ; ταράξομαι ; |Ep. pf. (τέτρηχα) τετρηχώς, disturbed ; plp. 
τετρήχει.] (4.) 

/ πάσσω (τὰγ-), arrange, τάξω, ἔταξα, τέταχα, τέταγμαι, ἐτάχθην, ταχθή- 
σομαι ; τάξομαι, ἐταξάμην ; 2 ἃ. p. ἐτάγην ; fut. pf. τετάξομαι. (4.) 

Telvw (rev-), stretch, τενῶ, ἔτεινα, rérdka, τέτἅμαι, ἐτάθην, τἀ θήσομαι ; τε- 
νοῦμαι, ἐτεινάμην. ὃ 109, 6. (4.) 

᾿ς πλέω, finish, (τελέσω) τελῶ, ἐτέλεσα, τετέλεκα, τετέλεσμαι, ἐτελέσθην ; fut. 
m. [τελέομαι] τελοῦμαι, ἃ. m. ἐτελεσάμην. ὃ 109, 2. 

TéXw (τελ-), cause to rise, rise, aor. ἔτειλα ; [plpf. p. éréradro.] In compos, 
«τέταλμαι, -ἐτειλάμην. § 109, 4. (4.) 

[(Tep-), find, stem with only Hom. redupl. 2 a. τέτμον or ἔτετμον. ] 

| Πέμνω (reu-, τμε-) [Ion. τάμνω, Hom. once réuw], cut, f. TEMG, τέτμηκα, τέ- 
τμημαι, ἐτμήθην, τμηθήσομαι ; 2 ἃ. ἔτεμον, ἐτεμόμην (or ἐτᾶἄμ-) ; fut. m. 
-τεμοῦμαι ; fut. pf. τετμήσομαι. See τμήγω. (5.) 

Téprw, amuse, τέρψω, ἔτερψα, ἐτέρφθην [Ep. ἐτάρφθην, 2 ἃ. p. ἐτάρπην 
(with subj. τραπείω), 2 ἃ. m. (r)erapréuny]; fut. m. τέρψομαι (poet.), 
[a. ἐτερψάμην Epic.] § 109, 4, N. 1. 

[Τέρσομαι, become dry, 2a. p. ἐτέρσην. Chiefly Epic. Fut. act. répow in 
Theoc. ] 

[1Τετίημαι, Hom. perf.; generally in part. τετιημένος, with τετιηώς, both 
passive, dejected, troubled. } 

[Térpov or ἔτετμον (Hom.), found, for re-reu-ov.] See (rep-). 

Terpatvw (rerpdv-), bore, late pres. τιτραίνω and τιτράω ; [fut. -τετρανέω 
lon.,. aor. ἐτέτρηνα,) -ἐτετρηνάμην. From stem (rpd-), aor. ἔτρησα, 
pf. p. τέτρημαι. ὃ 108, v. N. 1; 8 109, 7 (()ἡ. (5. 4.) 

Τεύχω (rix-), prepare, make, revéw, ἔτευξα, [Ep. rérevya as pass.,] τέτυ- 
yuo. (Ep. τέτευγμαι, ἐτύχθην (Ion. ἐτεύχθην) ; fut. pf. τετεύξομαι ;] f. m. 
τεύξομαι, [a. ἐτευξάμην.] [Epic 2 ἃ. (τῦκ-) τετυκεῖν, reruxdunr.] Po- 
etic. (2.) 

Thxw (τᾶκ-), melt, [Dor. τάκω), τήξω, ἔτηξα, ἐτήχθην (rare) ; 2 a. p. érd- 
κὴν ; 2p. τέτηκα (as mid.). (2.) 

Τίθημι (θε-), put ; for inflection and synopsis, see § 123. (I.) 

Tiere (rex-), beget, bring forth, τέξομαι (poet. also τέξω, rarely τεκοῦμαι), 
ἔτεξα (rare), ἐτέχθην (rare) ; 2 p. τέτοκα ; 2 ἃ. ἔτεκον, érexdunv. See ὃ 108, 
iii. (end). (3.) 


CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 357 


‘ Tivo (ri-), with 7, pay, τίσω, erica, τέτικα, -τέτισμαι, -ἐτίσθην. (5.) 
[Tiralvw (rirdv-), stretch, aor. (ἐτίτηνα) τιτήνας. Epic for τείνω.] (4.) 
[Titpde, bore, late present.| See terpatve. 

| "Πιτρώσκω (rpo-), wound, τρώσω, Erpwoa, τέτρωμαι, ἐτρώθην, τρωθήσομαι; 
|fut. m. τρώσομαι Hom.} (6.) 

.« TAdw, bear, dare, syncop. for (rada-w), pres. not classic ; f. τλήσομαι, [Ep. 
a. érddagoa,| p. τέτληκα [with Epic mi-forms (8 125, 4) rérAdyev, τε- 
τλαίην, τέτλαθι, τετλάμεναι and τετλάμεν, τετληώς] ; 2 ἃ. ἔτλην [Dor. 
ἔτλαν. Poetic. 

[Τμήγω (τμᾶγ-), cut, poet. for τέμνω ; τμήξω (rare), ἜΗΙ 2 a. ἔτμᾶαγον, 
ἐτμάγην (τμάγεν for ἐτμάγησαν).}] (2.) 

‘Topéw (τορ-), pierce, pres. only in |Ep. ἀντι-τορεῦντα] ; f. [τορήσω, rarely 
τετορήσω, [a. ἐτόρησα, 2 ἃ. ἔτορον.) (7.) 

| Τρέπω [Ion. τράπω], turn, τρέψω, ἔτρεψα, τέτροφα or τέτραφα, τέτραμμαι, 
ἐτρέφθην |lon. ἐτράφθην! ; f. m. τρέψομαι, a. m. ἐτρεψάμην ; 2 ἃ. [ἔτρα- 
πον Ep. and Lyr. }, ἐτράπην, ἐτραπόμην. ὃ 109, 3, N. 2, and 4 with Note 1. 
This verb has all the six aorists. 

\ Tpépw (τρεφ- for θρεφ-, ὃ 17, 2, Note), nowrish, θρέψω, ἔθρεψα, τέτροφα 
(late rérpadq), τέθραμμαι (inf. τεθράφθαι), €OpepOny (rare) ; 2 ἃ. p. ἐτρά- 
φην. ;fEp. 2 ἃ. ἔτρἄφον as pass.] ; f. m. θρέψομαι, ἃ. m. ἐθρεψάμην. § 109, 

3, N. 2; and 4 with N. 1. 

4 Pek (rpex- for Opex-, ὃ 17, 2, Note; δρὰμ-), run, f. δραμοῦμαι (- Sodan: 
only in comedy), ἔθρεξα (rare), -δεδράμηκα, -dedpdunuat; 2 p. -δέδρομα 
(poet.), 2 ἃ. ἔδραμον. (8.) 

Tpéw (tremble), aor. ἔτρεσα. Chiefly poetic. 

TpiBw (rpiB-), rub, τρίψω, ἔτριψα, rérpipa, τέτριμμαι, ἐτρίφθην ; 2 a. p. 
ἐτρίβην, fut. p. τρίβήσομαι ; fut. pf. τετρίψομαι ; f. m. τρίψομαι, a. τη. 
ἐτριψάμην. (2.) 

Τρίζω (τριγ-), squeak, 2 p. rérptya as present. Tonic and poetic. (4.) 

Τρύχω, exhaust, fut. [Ep. τρύξω] τρυχώσω (rpvxo-, ὃ 109, 8, N.), ἃ. ἐτρύ- 
Xwoa, p. part. τετρυχωμένος, [a. p. ἐτρυχώθην Ion. ]. ᾽ 

ἸΤρώγω (tpay-), gnaw, τρώξομαι, [ ἔτρωξα,Ἴ -τέτρωγμαι ; 2 ἃ. ἔτραγον. § 108, 


ii. (end). (2.) 
᾿ ἸΤυγχάνω (τῦχ-, τευχ-), hit, happen, τεύξομαι, [Ep. ἐτύχησα,ὔ τετύχηκα or 
τέτευχα ; 2a, ἔτὕχον (5. 2.) 

\ Τύπτω (rivr-), strike, (€-) τυπτήσω, ἔτυψα [ετύπτησα later], [τέτυμμαι Ion. 
and poet.]; 2 a. ἔτὕπον (rare), ἐτύπην (poet.) ; τυπτήσομαι (as pass. ); 
a.m. ετυψάμην. (3.) 

Tide (τῦφ- for θυφ-, ὃ 17, 2, Note), raise smoke, smoke, τέθυμμαι, 2 a Pp. 
«ἐτύφην, 2 ἴ, p. -τύφήσομαι. (2.) 


358 | APPENDIX. 


a Υ. 

NV ὙὙπισχνέομαι Ion. and poet. ὑπίσχομαι (strengthened from ὑπέχομαι), 
promise, ὑποσχήσομαι, ὑπέσχημαι, (ὑπεσχέθην) once in ὑποσχέθητι 
(Plat.); 2 ἃ. μι. ὑπεσχόμην. See ἴσχω and ἔχω. (5.) 

“Ὑφαίνω (ὑφὰν-), weave, ὑφὰνῶ, ὕφηνα, ὕφασμαι (109, 6, Ν.), ὑφάνθην ; 
aor. m. ὑφηνάμην. (4.) 
"Yo, rain, tow, ὗσα, ὕσμαι, ὕσθην. [Hdt. ὕσομαι as pass. | 


Φ͵ 


» Φαίνω (φὰν-), show, f. φανῶ [φανέω], a. ἔφηνα, πέφαγκα, πέφασμαι (§ 109, 
6, N.), ἐφάνθην ; 2 a. p. ἐφάνην, 2 f. φανήσομαι : 2 p. πέφηνα ; f. τη. 
φανοῦμαι, ἃ. m. ἐφηνάμην (rare and poet.), showed, but dm-epnvauny, de- 
clared ; |Ep. iter. 2 aor. φάνεσκε, appeared.| For nye πεφήσομαι, see 
φάω. See ὃ 95; § 96; § 97, 4. (4) 

Φάσκω (φᾶ-), say, only pres. and impf. See φημί. (6.) 

Paw, shine (pres. late), [Hom. imperf. dde, fut. pf. πεφήσεται.Ἶ 

Φείδομαι (Pid-), spare, φείσομαι [Hom. πεφιδήσομαι], ἐφεισάμην, [Hom. 2 a, 
πεφιδύμην.] (2.) 

(φεν-, φὰ-), kill, stems whence [Hom. πέφαμαι, πεφήσομαι ; 2 a. stu Ἂν 
πέφνον or ἔπεῴφνον, with part. πέφνων]. 

Pépw (oi-, ἐνεκ-, eveyx- for év-evex-), bear, f. οἴσω, a. ἤνεγκα, Ὁ. ἐνήνοχα, 
ἐνήνεγμαι, a. p. ἠνέχθην ; f. p. ἐνεχθήσομαι and οἰσθήσομαι ; 2 a. ἤνεγκον ; 
f. m. οἴσομαι (sometimes as pass.); a. ἢ). ἠνεγκάμην, 2 ἃ. τη. ἠνεγκόμην 
(very rare). [lon. ἤνεικα and -αμην, ἤνεικον, ἐνήνειγμαι, ἠνείχθην ; Hdt. 
dv-oicat or ἀν-ῷσαι, inf. from aor. goa (late) ; Hom. aor. imper. oige for 
οἷσον, pres. imper. φέρτε for pepere.} (8.) 

ἡ Φεύγω (piy-) flee, φεύξομαι and φευξοῦμαι (§ 110, ii. N. 2), 2 p. πέφευγα 
(§ 109, 3); 2 ἃ. ἔφὕγον; [Hom. p. part. πεφυγμένος and πεφυζότες.) (2.) 

~/ Pypl (pd-), say, φήσω, ἔφησα ; p. p. imper. πεφάσθω, part. πεφασμένος. 
Mid. [Dor. f. φάσομαι]. For other forms and inflection, see 8 127. (1.) 

J Pave (φθὰ-), anticipate, φθάσω and φθήσομαι, EpOdoa, [EpOdxa late ;] 2 a. 
act. ἔφθην (like ἔστην), [Ep. 2 ἃ. m. φθάμενος.) (5.) 

/ Φθείρω (φθερ-), corrupt, f. φθερῶ [Ion. -φθερέω, Ep. φθέρσω], a. ἔφθειρα, 
Ῥ. ἔφθαρκα, POapum; 2 a. p. ἐφθάρην, 2 f. p. POdpncomar; 2 p. δι- 
épOopa ; f. m. φθεροῦμαι [Hdt. φθαρέομαι]. (4.) 

Φθίνω (Ep. also φθίω], waste, decay, φθίσω, ἔφθισα, EPOiwar, [ἐφθέθην ; fut. 
τη. φθίσομαι ;7) 2 a. τι. ἐφθέμην [subj. φθίωμαι, opt. φθίμην for φθι-ι- μην, 
imper. 8 sing. φθίσθω, inf. φθίσθαι, part. φθίμενος. Attic t, Epie τ; but 
always ¢ in ἔφθῖμαι, ἐφθέθην, ἐφθέμην (except in contr. opt. φθέμην). 
Epic φθίω has generally i. Chiefly poetic. The present is generally 
intransitive ; the future and aorist active are transitive. (5.) 


y 


CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 359 


Φιλέω (GiA-), love, φιλήσω, &c. regular. [Ep. a. m. ἐφζλάμην ; inf. pres. 

φιλήμεναι, from Aeolic pidnut.] (7.) 
. do, bruise, [fut. φλάσω (Dor. φλασσῶ), aor. ἔφλασα, ἔφλασμαι, ἐφλά- 

σθην.] See θλάω,. 

Φράγνῦμι (φρᾶγ-), fence; mid. ppd&yvipar ; only in pres. and impf. See 
φράσσω. (IT 

Φράζω (φρὰδ-), tell, φράσω, ἔφρᾶσα, πέφρᾶκα, πέφρασμαι [Ep. pt. πεῴφρα- 
Suevos,] ἐφράσθην (as mid.); [φράσομαι Ep.], ἐφρασάμην (chiefly Epic). 
[Ep. 2 a. πέφρᾶδον or ἐπέφραδον.] (4.) ! 

Φράσσω (φρὰγ-), fence, φράξω, éppata, πέφραγμαι, ἐφράχθην ; ἐφραξάμην. 
See φράγνυμι. (4.) 

Φρίσσω or φρίττω (φρῖκ-), shudder, φρίξω (late), ἔφριξα, πέφρϊκα. (4.) 

Φρύγω (φρῦγ-), roast, φρύξω, ἔφρυξα, πέφρυγμαι, [ἐφρύγην.] (2.) 

ν Φυλάσσω (φυλᾶκ-), guard, φυλάξω, ἐφύλαξα, πεφύλᾶχα, πεφύλαγμαι, ἐφυ- 

λάχθην ; φυλάξομαι, ἐφυλαξάμην. (4.) ᾿ 

Φύρω, mix, [ἔφυρσα, πέφυρμαι, ἐφύρθην ; [fut. pf. πεφύρσομαι Pind.]. 
Φυράω, mix, is regular, φυράσω, &c. : 

Siw, (ὅ), produce, φύσω, Epica, πέφῦκα, be (by nature), with 2 p. (πέφυα) 
8 125, 4 [Ερ. πεφύάσι, ἐμ-πεφύῃ, πεφυώς]; 2 a. ἔφῦν, be, be born, (subj. 
φύω); 2a. p. ἐφύην (subj. Pd); fut. m. φύσομαι.᾿ 


x. 


Xdtw (xa5-), yield, retire (pres. only in ἀνα-χάζω), [Ep. f. χάσομαι, a. 
-ἔχασσα (Pind.), a. τη. ἐχασάμην (Epic, once in Xen. δια-χάσασθαι); 2 ἃ. 
τη. κεκαδόμην ; fut. κεκαδήσω, will deprive (ὃ 110, iv. c, N. 2, 2 ἃ. κέκα- 
δον, deprived.| (4.) 

Xalpw (xap-), rejoice, (ε-) χαιρήσω, κεχάρηκα, κεχάρημαι and κέχαρμαι, 2 a. 
Ῥ. ἐχάρην, [Ep. a. τη. χήρατο, 2 a. τη. κεχαρόμην ; 2 p. pt. κεχαρηώς 1" 
fut. pf. κεχαρήσω, κεχαρήσομαι (§ 110, iv. c, N. 2).] (4) 

Xardw, Joosen, [χαλἄσω Ion.,] ἐχάλᾶσα [-αξα Pind.], ἐχαλάσθην. § 109, 2. 

Xavddavw (χὰδ-), hold, 2 a. ἔχᾶδον. From stem (xevd-), [Epic fut. χείσο- 
μαι (§ 16, 6, N. 1), 2 pf. κέχανδα.] (5.) 

Xdorw, later χαίνω (xdav-), gape, f. χἄνοῦμαι, 2 p. κέχηνα (as pres.), 2 a. 
éxavov. Ionic and poetic. (4.) : 

Xétw (xed-), fut. χεσοῦμαι (rarely -χέσομαι), ἔχεσα, 2 p. -κέχοδα ; 2 ἃ. ἔχε- 
σον ; ἃ. mM. ἐχεσάμην ; p. part. κεχεσμένος. (4.) - 

Xéw (χῦ-), pour, f. χέω [Ep. χεύω], a. ἔχεα [Ep. ἔχευα], -«κέχὕκα, κέχὕμαι, 
ἐχὕὔθην, χυθήσομαι ; ἃ. m. ἐχεάμην, 2 ἃ. τη. ἐχὕμην. § 108, ii. 2, N.; 
§ 110, iii, 1, N. 2. (2.) | 

[(ζλαδ-)} stem of 2 pf. part. κεχλᾷ dus, swelling, (Pind.). ] 


860 APPENDIX. 


“Χόω, heap up, χώσω, Exwoa, -κέχωκα, κέχωσμαι, ἐχώσθην, χωσθήσομαι. 
§ 109, 2. 

Xparpéw (χραισμ-), avert, help, late in present ; [Hom. χραισμήσω, ἌΡΑ 
ounoa; 2 ἃ. ἔχραισμον] (7.) 

Xpdopar, wse, (perhaps mid. οὗ χράω); χρήσομαι, ἐχρησάμην, κέχρημαι, 
ἐχρήσθην ; (fut. pf. κεχρήσομαι Theoc.]. For χρῆται [Hdt. χρᾶται], &e. 
see § 98, Note 2. 

Xpdw, give oracles, χρήσω, ἔχρησα, κέχρηκα, κέχρησμαι (-ημαι ὃ), ἐχρήσθην. 
Mid. consult an oracle, [χρήσομαι, ἐχρησάμην.) ὃ 98, Note 2. For 
xpns and χρῇ = χρήζεις and χρήζει, see χρήζω. 

Χρή (impers.), irreg. pres. for xpy-o1, there is need, (one) ought, must, subj. 
χρῇ, opt. χρείη, inf. χρῆναι, (poet. χρῆν); imperf. χρῆν or ἐχρῆν. ᾿Από- 
XPN, {{ suffices, inf. ἀποχρῆν, imperf. ἀπέχρη, [lon. ἀποχρᾷ, ἀποχρᾶν, 
ἀπέχρα ;] ἀποχρήσει, ἀπέχρησε. (1.) 

“Χρήζω (χρῃδ-), lon. χρηΐζω, want, ask, χρήσω [Ion. χρηΐσω], ἔχρῃσα, [Τοη. 
ἐχρήϊσα]. Χρῇς and χρῇ (as if from χράω), occasionally have the meaning 
of χρήζεις, χρήζει. (4.) 

Xplw, anoint, sting, xplow, Expioa, κέχρϊμαι (or -ἰσμαι), ἐχρίσθην. 

“Χρώννυμι (xpw-), color, also χρώζω ; κέχρωσμαι, ἐχρώσθην. (II.) 


Ψ, 


Wd, rub, with ἡ for ἃ in contracted forms (8 98, N. 2), ψῇ, ψῆν, ἔψη, &c.; 
gen. in compos., -ψήσω, -ἔψησα, -ψήσομαι, -ἐψησάμην. 

Ψ εύδω, deceive, ψεύσω, ἔψευσα, ἔψευσμαι, ἐψεύσθην, ψευσθήσομαι ; ψεύσομαι, 
ἐψευσάμην. § 16, 1, 2, 3. 

Vix (Wix-), cool, ψύξω, ἔψυξα, ἔψυγμαι, ἐψύχθην, [ψυχθήσομαι 1οπ.]; 2 ἃ. 
p. ἐψύχην or (generally later) ἐψύγην (stem ψῦγ-). (2.) 


. 


ἮὨθέω (ὠθ.), push, impf. gen. ἐώθουν (§ 104); dow [poet. ὠθήσω], ἔωσα [Ion. 
ὦσα], ἔωσμαι [Ion. -ὥσμαι], ἐώσθην ; ὠσθήσομαι ; f. τὰ. ὥσομαι, a τη. 
ἐωσάμην [lon. ὠσάμην]. (7.) 

V ᾽᾿Ωνέομαι, buy, imp. ἐωνούμην (§ 104) or ὠνούμην ; ὠνήσομαι, ἐώνημαι, ἐωνή- 
θην. Classic writers use ἐπριάμην (8 128) for later ὠνησάμην (or ἐωνησά- 
μην.) 


N. B. In these Indexes the principal references are made to 
the pages of the Grammar. But amore precise reference to some 
part of the page, or to a section, sub-section, or note, is added 
in a parenthesis whenever it seemed necessary. For forms of 
verbs, see the Catalogue of Verbs. For forms of irregular nouns, 
see pp. 50-52. 


GREEK 


A 1; open vowel 6; in contraction 
(3, 4); becomes 7 in temp. aug- 
ment 119 (end); @ changed to ἡ 
at end of vowel verb stems 131 
(1); in vbs. in pe 156 (N. 1); 
changed to 7 in 2d perf. 132 (3); 
e changed to ἄ in liquid stems 133 
(4); Doric ἃ for ἡ 25 (1); ἃ as con- 
nect. vowel 144, 147 (1); as suffix 
182 (1), 185 (11). 

a- or av- privative 188 (a); copula- 
tive 188 (N. 2). 

@, improper diphth. 6; by contrac- 
tion 9 (end). 

ἀγαθός compared 65. 

ἀγγέλλω, pf. and plpf. mid. 114 (e); 
w. partic. 304 (end). 

ἄγε and ἄγετε w. imperat. 291 (top). 

ἄγευστος, &c. w. gen. 228 (N. 1). 

ἄγηρως declined 54. 

ἀγνώς, adj. of one ending 57 (N. 4). 

ἄγχι w. gen. 229 (2). 

ἄγω, augm. of ἤγαγον 120 (N. 4). 
ἀδελφός, voc. ἄδελφε 33 (top). 

-άϑην, adv. ending 186 (d). 

ἀδύνατά ἐστιν, &c. 193 (2). 

«ἄζω, denom. vbs. in 186. 

ἀηδών, decl. of 47 (N. 2). 

ἀθρόος, decl. of 53 (2). 

“A€ws, accus. of 33 (N. 1). 

at, diphthong 6; augmented 122; 
sometimes elided. in poetry 12 
(top); short in accentuation 19 
(§ 22, N. 1). 

nt, Doric for εἰ 263 (1). 

αἰδώς, decl. of 47 (N. 1). 

αἴθε or al γάρ (for εἴθε, &c.) 289 (1). 

.αίνω, denom. vbs. in 186. 

αἴρω, 128 (top) 137 (2, N. 2); pf. 
and plpf. mid, 114 (e). 

-ais, -αισα, in aor. partic. (Aeol.) 
153 (15). 

αἰσχρός compared 64 (1). 


INDEX. 


ἀκούω, 2 perf. 122 (N. 2), 189 (ὦ 
N. 1); εὖ or κακῶς ἀκούω 217 
(end). 

ἀκροάομαι, future 132 (N. 1). 

ἄκρος w. article 204 (N. 4). 

ἀλέξω, augment of ἄλαλκον 120 N. 


4). 

ἀληθής declined 56. 

ἁλίσκομαι 135 (N.) 

ἀλλάσσω, pf. and plpf. mid, inflect- 
ed 112, 113, 114 (top). 


ἀλλήλων declined 74. 
ἄλλον Ss of 76; w. art. 202 
ἄλλο τι ἤ; or ἄλλο τι; 307 (3). 


ἀλύσκω, formation 130 (Ν. 8). 

ἅλς declined 41. 

ἅμα w. dat. 233; w. partic. 301 
(Bt). 

ἐὰν as &e., Dor. for ἡμεῖς, &c. - 
73 (N 

Sue ἘΣ ἀμός for ἡμέτερος (or ἐμός) 
4 (Ν. 1). 

ἀμπισχνέομαι 129 (3). 

ἀμύνω 128 (top); w. ace. and dat. 
(Hot) 231 (N. 3); ἀμυνάθω 152 


iene "ἢ gen., dat., and accus. 239, 
242. 


ἀμφιέννυμι, augment 124 (N. 3). 
ἀμφισβητέω, augment 124 (N. 3). 
ἄμφω and ἀμφότερος 70; w. art. 204 
(N. 2). 

ἄν (Epic κέ), adv. 253-256: 
Contents, p. xxiii. Two uses: 
apodosis 253, in protasis and final 
cl. 254. In apodosis, w. second- 
ary tenses of indic. 254 (3), 263 
(2), 264 (2), 267 (2), 272 (b), 276 
(2); w. optative 255 (§ 210), 263 
(2), 265 (2), 269 (2), 272 (δ), 276 
(4); w. fut. indic. (Hom.) 254 
(§ 208, 2); w. subj. used as fut. 


ya 


364 GREEK 


‘(Hom.) 255 (2), 291; w. infin. 
and partic. in apod. 255, 285, 273 
top). In protasis w. subj. 254 
(end), 263 (2), 265 (1), 269 (1), 
270; dropped when subj. becomes 
opt. 282 (3). In final clauses w. 
ws, ὅπως, and ὄφρα 260 (N. 2). 
Omitted in protasis (in poetry) 269 
(N. 2), 271 (N. 2), 277; in apodo- 
sis 268 (N. 1), 270 (N. 1); not 
used w. ἔδει, χρῆν, &c. in apod. 
268 (N. 2); repeated in long apod. 
256 (2); ellipsis of vb. 256 (3); 
used only w. first of several vbs. 
256 (4). See ἐάν, ἤν, dv(a), and 
τάχα. 

ἄν (a) for ἐάν (εἰ ἄν) 268 (2). 

ἄν for ἀνά (Hom.) 12 (Ν. 8). 

αν- privative : see a- privative. 

ἅν (ἃ dv) by crasis 11, 275 (N.). 

-av for -άων in gen. pl. 31 (4). 

ἀνά w. dat. and acc. 238, 239, 242; 
w. gen. 239 (3). 

ἄνα, wp/ 242 (N. 5). 

ἀνάγκη w. infin. 294 (1). 

ἀναλίσκω and ἀναλόω augment 120 
(N. 1). 

ἀνάξιος w. gen. 227 (N.). 

ἄνευ w. gen. 237, 229 (N.). 

ἀνέχω, augment 124 (N. 3); w. par- 
tic. 303 (1). 

ἀνήρ declined 48 ; ἁνήρ 11. 

ἀνοίγω, augment 123 (8 104, N. 1). 

ἀντί w. gen. 236. 

ἄξιος declined 53. ἄξιος and ἀξιόω 
w. gen. 227 (N.). 

Grats, adj. of one ending 57 (N. 4); 
w. gen. 228 (N. 2). ᾿ 

ἄπειρος w. gen. 228 (Ν. 1). 

ἀπιστέω w. dat. 230 (end). 

ἁπλόος, ἁπλοῦς declined 55, 56. 

gest w. gen. 236; for ἐν w. dat. 242 


(N. 6). | 
ἀποδίδωμι and ἀποδίδομαι 245 (N. 
3) 


ἀπόλλυμι, augm. of plpf. 122 (N. 2). 

᾿Απόλλων, accus. 37 (Ν. 1); voc. 21 
(1, N.), 38 (N.). 

ἀπολογέομαι, augment 124 (top). 

ἅπτω and ἅπτομαι 246 (top). 

ἄρ (Hom. for ἄρα 12 (N. 8). 

dpa, dpa ov, and dpa μή, interrog. 
306 (end). 


INDEX. 


ἀραρίσκω, Att. redupl. 122, 129 
(end), 134 (c). 

ἀργύρεος, ἀργυροῦς, declined 55 ; ac- 
cent 34 (N. 2). 

ἀρι- intensive prefix 188 (N. 1). 

‘-aptoy, dimin. in 184 (8). 

ἄρσην or ἄρρην 59 (N. 3). 

ἄσσα or ἄττα 76 (2). 

ἅσσα or ἅττα 77 (N. 1). 

ἀστήρ, decl. 48 (N. 1). 

ἀστράπτει without subj. 193 (6). 

ἄστυ, declined 44. 

-αται, -aro (for -vrat, -vro) in 3 pers. 
plur. 151 (end). 

ἅτε w. partic. 301 (end). 

ἄτερ w. gen. 237, 229. 

ἅτερος 11 (N. 2). 

-ato (for -ντο) : see -arat, 

ἄττα or ἅττα : see ἄσσα and ἄττα. 

αὐαίνω, augment 122 (end). 

rn αὔταρκες, accent 21 (1, 

ἮΝ 


αὐτίκα w. partic. 301 (N. 1). 

αὐτός personal pron. 71 (1), 206 (2); 
intensive adj. pron. 72 (N. 1), 206 
(1); w. subst. pron. omitted 206 
(1, N.); position w. article 204 
(N. 6); for reflexive 206 (2, N.); 
compared 66 (end). ὁ αὐτός 78 (2); 
ταὐτοῦ, &c. 73 (N.). 

αὑτοῦ, &c. for ἑαυτοῦ 73. 

ἀφίημι, augment 124 (N. 8); opt. 
forms 176 (N. 1). 

ἀχθομένῳ τινί ἐστιν 232 (N. 5). 

ἄχρι as prepos. w. gen. 237, 229 
(N.); as conj. 279. 

-ἄω, denom. vbs. in 186; contract 
forms infl, 115-118; dial. forms 
154, 155. 


B, middle mute, labial, and sonant 
8 ; euph. changes before a lingual 
14 (1), bef. σ 14 (2), bef. u 14 (3); 
inserted between mw and ἃ orp 13 
(N. 1); changed to ¢ in pf. act. 
138 (6). 


alvw, formation 129 (4, N. 1). 

άκχος (xx) 13. 

ασίλεια 30, 182 (a, N.): βασιλεία 

30, 183 (N. 2). | 

reek declined 45 ; compared 66 
3). 


B 
B 
B 


GREEK 


βασιλεύω, denom. 186; w. gen. 223 
(3); aor. of 247 (N. 5). 
λίττω (uedir-) by syncope 13 (N. 1). 
péas, Boppas, declined 31 (N. 1). 
βούλομαι, augment 120 (N. 2); βού- 
λει in indic. (not βούλῃ) 146 (N. 
2); βουλοίμην ἄν and ἐβουλόμην ἄν 
272 (Ὁ); βούλει or βούλεσθε w. in- 
terrog. subj. 291 (end); βουλομένῳ 
τινί ἐστιν, &c. 232 (N. 5). 
βοῦς declined 45, 46; stem in com- 
pos. 187 (N.). : 
βροτός (uop-), by syncope 13 (N. 1). 
Buvéw (βυ- ve-) 129 (3). 


Τ᾽, middle mute, palated, and sonant 
8; w. sound of v before x, Ὕ; x, or 
ἕξ 8 (top); euph. changes before lin- 


gual 14 (1), bef: σ 14 (2); ch. tox 


in pf. act. 138 (0). 
γαστήρ, decl. of 48. 
γέγονα as pres. 247 (N. 6). 
γελασείω, desider. vb. 186 (N. 1). 
γεννάδας, adj. of one ending 57 
N. 4 


γέρας declined 47. 

γεύω w. acc. and gen. 223 (N. 3): 
γεύομαι w. gen. 222 (2). 

Ὑῇ omitted after article 201 (N. 4). 

ylyas declined 40. 

γίγνομαι 130, 134 (c); copul. vb. 
194 (Rem.); w. gen. 221 ; w. poss. 
dat. 232 (4). 

γιγνώσκω, redupl. in pres. 129 (end); 
w for o 130 (top). 

γλυκύς declined 57, 58. 

γραῦς declined 45, 46. 

γράφω and γράφομαι 245 (N. 3); 
ἔγράφην 246 (top); γράφομαι w. 
cogn, accus. 214, w. gen. 224 (2). 


A, middle mute, lingual, and sonant 
8; euph. changes before lingual 
14 (1), bef. « 14 (3), dropped bef. 
σ 14 (2); inserted in ἀνδρός (ἀνήρ) 
13 (N. 2), 48, before -arac and 
-ato (in Hom.) 151 (end). 

Sa-, intens. prefix 188 (Ν, 1). 

Salw (da-) 128 (3, N.). 

δαμνάω (δαμ-) 129 (4, N. 1). 

Savel{w and δανείζομαν 245 (N, 2). 


INDEX. 365 


Sds, accent 22 (3, N. 1). 

Sé,in 6 pév... ὃ δέ 204, 205 (N. 1 
and 2); in apodosis 274 (2). 

-δε, local ending 52; enclit. 23. 

Set, impers.: see δέω, want. 

δείδοικα and δείδια (Hom.) 121 (top). 

δείκνυμι, synopsis 159, 165, 166; in- 
flection of m-forms 159-165; w. 
partic. 305 (top); partic. δεικνύς 
declined 60. 

δεῖνα, pron., declined 77. 

ϑέομαι w. gen. or w. gen. and acc. 
223 (N. 1). 

ϑέρκομαι 133 (4, N. 1). 

er (-σ-) 181 (N. δ) heterog. 50 
2 


δεσπότης, voc. of 30 (N. 2). 

Séxarat (Hom.) as perf. 124. 

δέω, bind, contraction 118 (N. 1). 

δέω, want, contraction 118 (N. 1), 
in Hdt. 155 (2, a). Impers. δεῖ 
193 (N. 2); w. gen. and dat. (rare- 
ly acc.) 223 and 224, 231 (top); δεῖν 
for ὀλίγον δεῖν, almost, 298 ; δέον 
(acc. abs.) 302; ἑνός, &c. w. δέοντες 
70 (N. 2, δ); ἔδει in apod. without 
ἄν 268 (N. 2). See δέομαι. 

δηλοῖ without subj. 192 (c). 

δῆλός εἰμι w. partic. 305 (N. 1). 

SyAdw, inflect. of contract forms 115- 
118; infin. 10 (N. 2), 118 (N. 5); 
pres. partic. δηλῶν declined 62. 

Δημήτηρ declined 48 (3); accent of 
voc. 21. 

-δην or -άδην, adv. in 186 (18). 

τδης, patronym. in 184 (9). 

διά w. gen. and acc. 238, 242, 

διαιτάω, augm. 124 (top). 

διακονέω, augm. 124. 

διαλέγομαι, pf. 121 (top); w. dat. 
233 (Ν, 1). 

διατελέω w. partic. 808 (1), 804 (N.). 

διδάσκω, formation 180 (N. 8); w. 
two acc. 217; causative in mid. 
245 (N. 2). 

δίδωμι, synopsis 159, 165, 166 ; infil. 
of w.-forms 159-165; redupl. 157 
(3), 168 (2); impf. 158 (top), cona- 
tive 246 (N. 2); aor. in xa 187 (1, 
N. 1). 

δίκην, adverbial accus. 215 (2). 

διορύσσω, augm. of plpf. 122 (N. 2). 

διότι 288 ; w. inf. (Hdt.) 294 (top). 


366 GREEK 


διπλάσιος, &c. (as compar.) w. gen. 
225 (N. 1). 

διψάω, contraction 118 (N. 2). 

διωκάθω 152 (11). 

Spas, accent 22 (8, N. 1). _ 

S010, δοιοί (Hom.) 69 (N. 1). 

-δόν (-δά) or -ηδόν, adv. in 186 (18). 

δοκέω (δοκ-) 130; impers. δοκεῖ 193 
(N. 2); ἔδοξε or δέδοκται in decrees, 
&c. 298 (end); (ws) ἐμοὶ δοκεῖν 
298. 

δρασείω, desider. vb. 186 (N. 1). 

Spdw 131 ; 2 ἃ. pay 169 (N. 1). 

δύναμαι 168 (1); accent of subj. and 
opt. 158 (N. 2); ἐδύνω 158 (N. 8). 

δύο declined 69; w. pl. noun 197 
(N. 6). 

Svo--, inseparable prefix 188 (6); augm. 
of vbs. compounded with 124, 


E, open short vowel 6; in contrac- 
tion 9 (3, 4); as syll. augm. 119, 
120, 121, before a vowel 123; be- 
comes 7 in temp. augm. 119 (end), 
rarely εἰ 121; length. to 7 at end of 
vowel verb stems 131 (1), in vbs. in 
pt 156 (N. 1); length. to εἰ when 
cons. are dropped bef. ¢ 15 (6), in 
aor. of liq. stems 137 (2), in θεῖναι 
and εἶναι 156 (N. 1), in 2 ἃ. p. 
subj. (Hom.) 153 (12, c) in 2 a. 
act. subj. of ws-forms (Hom.) 171 
(δ), ew to ew in pres. (Hom.) 155 
(c); changed to ἄ in liq. stems 133 
(4); ch. tooin 2 pf. 132 (3), rarely 
in 1 pf. 133 (3, N. 2), in nouns 
181 (N. δ); fut. liquid stems in e 
136 ; ε added to stem in pres. 130, 
in other tenses 134; inserted for o 
in fut. 136 (c); dropped by syneope 
13, 47, 48; dropped in eeo (Hdt.) 
and dropped or contracted in ea 
and eo (Hom.) 155 (2, δ); as con- 
necting vowel 144, 145, 152 (10, 
11). 

é, ne 71, 72; use in Attic 208. 

-εα in plpf. act. (Ion.) 152 (4); contr. 
to ἡ in Att. 146 (N. 4). 

~eat, for esac in verbal endings, contr. 
to ἢ or ec 10 (N. 1), 145 (N. 1), 151 
(2): see -eo. ; 

ἐάν, for εἰ ἄν 254, 263, 269, 270. 


INDEX. 


-eas, in ace. pl. of 3 decl., contr. to 
ews 9 (3, N.), 42, 48, 44; seldom 
contr. in nouns in evs 45 (8, N. 2). 

ἑαυτοῦ, declined 73 ; synt. 206. 

ἐγγύς, adv. w. gen. 229 (2). 

ἐγείρω 128 (top); pf. and plpf. mid. 
114 (6); Att. redupl. 122 (N. 1). 

ἐγχελύς, decl. of 44 (end). 

ἐγώ, declined 71, 72; generally omit- 
ted 192 (N. 1), 148 (foot-note). 

ἔδυν (of δύω) 158 (end), 169 (3); 
synopsis 159 ; inflected 161, 162. 

éé, for ἕ, Hom. pron. 72 (N. 2). 

ἕθεν, for οὗ 72 (N. 2). 

ses pf. and plpf. mid. infl. 114 
(ς 


ει, length. from ε : see e; frome 123 
(II.), 127 (d); as augm. (for ee)” 
123, for redupl. in pf. 121 (top). 

εἰ, 7f, 268, 267, 269, 270; whether, 
307 ; εἰ, εἴθε, and ef yap in wishes 
289, 290. 

εἶδον w. partic. 303 (3). 

εἰκάθω, εἰκάθοιμι, &c. 152 (11), 

εἰκών, decl. of 47 (N. 2). 

εἵμαρται, augm. 121 (top). 

εἰμί, conjug. 172, 173; as copula and 
as subst. vb. 191 (N. 1); w. pred. 
nom. 194; w. poss. or part. gen. 
221; w. poss. dat. 232 (4); ἔστιν 
οἵ, ἔστιν οὗ, ἔστιν ἢ or ὅπως 210 
(Ν. 2); ἑκὼν εἶναι, τὸ νῦν εἶναι, 
κατὰ τοῦτο εἶναι, &c. 298; accent 
(enclitic) 28, 24; accent of dy, 
ὄντος 22 (3, N. 2). 

εἶμι, conjug. 174; pres. as fut. 247 


(top). 

eto for οὗ, 72 (N. 2). | 

εἶπον w. ὅτι or ὡς 293 (end); ὡς 
(ἔπος) εἰπεῖν 298, 

εἴργω, &c. w. gen. 225; w. infin. or 
infin. w. τοῦ and μή (6 forms), 295, 
296. 

εἴρηκα, augm. 121 (top). 

“en re ae. adj. in, decl. 57, 58, 
15 (N. 2); formation 185 (15). 

els w. accus. 237; for ἐν w. dat. 242 
(N. 6). 

εἷς, μία, ἕν, declined 69; compounds 
of 70. 

εἴσω, adv. w. gen. 229 (2). 

εἴτε. .. εὔτε (ἢ) 307 (5). 


εἴωθα, 2 pf. 123, 180, 133 (8, N. 1). 


GREEK 


ἐκ or ἐξ, form 12 (2); x unchanged in 
comp. 14 (N. 1; 3, N.); ε long 
before liquid 18 (top); accent 24 
(end); w. gen. 237, for év w. dat. 
242 (N. 6). 

ἕκαστος, ἑκάτερος, &c. w. article 204 
(N. 2). 

ἐκεῖνος 75, 208: ἐκεινοσί 75 (N. 2). 

ἐκεῖ and ἐκεῖθεν 79. 

ἐκεῖσε 52, 79, 186. 

ἐκτός, adv. w. gen. 229 (2). 

ἑκὼν εἶναι 298. 

ἐλάσσων 66 (5), 15 (a). 

ἐλαύνω, form of pres. 129 (N. 2); 

_ _ fut. 136 (6); sense 243 (N. 2). 
ἐλάχεια (Hom.), ἐλάχιστος 66 (5). 

ἐλάω for ἐλάσω 136 (b): see ἐλόω. 

ἐλέγχω, pf. and plpf. infl, 112, 118, 
114 (top). 

ἔλλαχον, &c., (Hom.) for ἔλαχον, 
120 (N. 5). 

ἐλόω, Hom. fut. of ἐλαύνω, &c. 154 
(end of δ). 

ἐλπίζω, &c. w. fut. infin. or pres. 
and aor. 251 (N. 2). . 

ἐλπίς, declined 40; accus. sing. 37 (2). 

ἐμαυτοῦ declined 73; synt. 206. 

ἐμέθεν, ἐμεῖο, ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ 72 (N. 2). 

ἐμεωυτοῦ (Hdt.) 74 (top). 

ἐμίν (Dor. for ἐμοί) 73 (N. 7). 

ἔμμεν or ἔμμεναι, ἔμεν or ἔμεναι, for 

᾿ εἶναι 173, 172 (9). > 

ἐμός 74, 207. 

geste a and ἐμπίπρημι 168 (N. 1). 

ἔμπροσθεν w. gen. 229 (2). 

-ev for -σαν (aor. p.) 152 (9). 

év, w. dat. 237; in comp. 233; in 
expr. of time 235 (N. 1); euph. 
ch. bef. liquid 15 (6), but not 
before o, § or p 15 (N. 8). 

ἐναντίος w. gen. 228 (end); w. dat. 
232 (end). 

ἕνεκα w. gen. 237, 229 (N.),. 

ἔνεστι impers. 193 (N. 2). 

ἔνθα, ἔνθεν 79. 

ἔνι for ἔνεστι 242 (Ν. 5). 

ἔνιοι and ἐνιότε 210 (N. 2). 

ἔνοχος w. gen. 228 (top). 

ἐντός w. gen. 229 (2). 

ἐξ: see ἐκ. 

ἐξαίφνης w. partic. 801 (N. 1). 

ἔξεστι impers. 198 (N. 2); ἐξῆν in 
apod. without ἄν 268 (Ν, 2). 


INDEX. 367 


ἐξόν, ace. abs. 302 (2). 

ἔξω w. gen. 229 (2). 

eo and εου contr. to ov 9 (2), to ev 
(lon.) 25 (3). 

-eo for -εσο 145 (N. 1.), 151 (2). 

ἕο for οὗ 72 (N. 2). 

éot for of 72 (N. 2). 

ἔοικα (ix-) 123, 132 (3). 

éés for ὅς (poss.) 74 (Ν, 1). 


| εοῦυ : See €0. 


ἐπάν and ἔπεάν (ἐπεὶ dv), 275 (N.). 

ἐπεί and ἐπειδή 275, 288; w. infin. 
in or. obl. 294 (top). 

ἐπειδάν 254, 275, 276. 

ἐπήν 254, 275, 276. 

ἐπί w. gen., dat., and accus. 239; in ~ 
comp. 233. 

ἔπι for ἔπεστι 242 (N. δ). 

ἔπιθυμέω w. gen. 222 (2), 
(Rem.). ᾿ 

ἐπίσταμαι 168 (1); ἠπίστω 168 (Ν. 8); 
accent of su ene opt. 158 (N. 2); 
w. partic. 804. 

ἐπριάμῃν: {(πρια-) 158 (end); synop- 

- sis 159; inflected 164, 165. 

ἐρέσσω, stem ἐρετ- 127 (a, N.). 

épu-, intens. prefix 188 (N. 1.). 

ἐριδαίνω 129 (4, N. 1). 

ἐρίζω w. dat. 233 (N. 1). 

ἔρις, accus. of 37 (2). 

“Fpuas, “Eppfjs, declined 30. 

ρωτάω w. two accus. 217. 

es, stems of 3 decl. in 42. 

és w. accus. 237 : see εἰς. 

-εσσι in dat. pl. (Hom.) 49. 

ἐσσί (Hom.) 173 (N. 2), 142 (N). 

ἕσσων 65. 

tore, until 279. ἡ. 

-έστερος, -έστατος 64 (N. 4). 

ἐστί, w. ending τι 142 (N.); accented 
ἔστι 24 (3, ἮΝ. 1). 

ἔστιν of (οὗ, 7, ὅπως) 210 (N. 2). 

ἑστώς (for ἑσταώς), ἑστῶσα, ἑστός 
παν ἑστεώς) 62 (Ν.), 189 (Ν. 8), 
167. 


218 


ἔσχατος w. article 204 (N. 4). 

ἔσω w. gen. 229 (2): see εἴσω. 

ἐτέθην for ἐθεθην 16 (2, N.). 

ἕτερος w. gen. 225 (Ν. 1). 

ἐτύθην for ἐθυθην 16 (2, N.). 

ev contr. from eo or eov (Ion.) 25 (3). 

"ἢ ε (through eF) 45 (N. 1), 126 
2). 


808 GREEK 


εὖ, augm. of vbs. compounded w. 
194 (2); w. ποιέω, πάσχω, ἀκούω, 
&c. 217 (end); w. πράσσω 218 


(top). 

ev, pron. for οὗ 72 (N. 2). 

εὐδαίμων declined 56, 57; accent 21 
(1, N.). 

εὔελπις, 57 (N. 3), accus. 37 (2). 

evepyeréw, augm. 124 (2). 

εὐθύ w. gen. 229 (2), 

εὐθύς w. partic. 301 (N. 1). 

evkdéns, 43 (N. 4). 

edvoos, εὔνους, compared 64 (Ν, 8). 

εὑρίσκω w. partic. 303 (2). 

εὖρος, aceus. of specif. 215 (1). 

εὐρύς, wide, Hom. acc. of 59 (N. 1). 

-evs, nouns in 45, 182 (2). 

ἵν denom. vbs. in 186. 
ἐφοράω w. partic. 303 (3). 

ἐφ᾽ ᾧ or ἀφ᾽ ᾧτε w. infin. 297 (end); 
w. fut. ind. 278 (N. 2). 

ἐχρῆν or χρῆν in apod. without dv 
268 (N. 2). 

ἔχω᾽ w. partic. for perf. 808 (N. 2). 
éxouat 246 (top); w. gen. 222 (1). 

ἐχθρός compared 64 (1). 

-€w for -dw in vbs. (Hdt.) 155 (1, ὦ). 

-ew in fut. of liquid stems 136 (2). 

-ew and -ewv, Ion. gen. of 1st decl. 31. 

-ews, -ewv, Att. 2d decl. in 33. 

ἕως, dawn 33 (N. 1). 

ἕως, conj. 274 (Rem.); while 276 (3); 
until 279, 280, expr. purpose 280 
(N. 2), in indir, disc. 287 (3). 

ἑωυτοῦ, for ἑαυτοῦ (Hdt.) 74 (top). 


Z, double cons. 7; origin 7 (8 5, 2); 
makes position 17; verb stems in 
127 (6); syll. augment before 121 
(2). 


{a-, intens. shea 188 (N. 1). 
ζάω, contr. form of 118 (N. 2). 

-te, adv. in 52, 186. 

«ἴω, verbs in 127, 186; fut. of 136. 


H, open long vowel 6; in Ton. for 
Dor. ἃ 25; @ and ε length. to ἡ 
119, 181, & to 7 132, 156 (N. 1 
and δ); conn. vowel in subj. 146; 
-ἢ for -ea in plpf. act. 146 (N. 4), 
152 (4). 


INDEX. 


-y for εσαι or yout in 2 pers. sing. 
10 (N. 1), 145, 146, 151 (2). 

ἤ, whether (Hom. ), or, interrog. 307; 
than, omitted 226 (N. 2). 

po w. gen. (or dat.) 223 (8). 
ἡδομένῳ σοί ἐστιν, Kc. 232 (No. 5). 

ἡδύς compared 64 (1); ἡδίων de- 
clined 65. 

ἠέ, He, interrog. (Hom.) 307. 

ἠείδης, &e. (οἶδα) 179. 

ἥειν (εἶμι) 174. 

ἥκιστα (superl.) 65. 

ἥκω, as perf. 246 (Ν, 8). 

ἡλίκος 78. 

ἦμαι, conjug. 177. 

ἡμάς or ἧμας 72 (N 

ἡμέτερος 74, 207 ; 
(N. 4). 

ἡμι-, insepar. particle 188 (d). 

ἡμίν, ἥμιν 72 (Ν. 5). 

ἤν for εάν (εἰ dv) 268 (2), 

ἡνίκα, rel. adv. 79. 

‘ree declined 41, 
ρακλέης 43 (N. 8). 

ἥρως declined 47 (N. 1). 

-4s, comp. adj. in 185 (17); 189 (6). 

-fjs, in nom. pl. of nouns in -evs 45 
(3, N. 2). 

σι or ys, in dat. pl. 1 decl. ( Ton.) 81. 

ἥσσων (comp.) 65. 

nv, diphthong 6; augm. of ev 122 
(end). 

ἠχώ decl. 46.. 

ἠώς (lon.) decl. 47 (N. 1). 


» 5). 
w. αὐτῶν 207 


©, rough mute, lingual, and surd 8 ; 
‘euph. changes before lingual 14 
(1), bef. « 14 (8), dropped bef. σ 
14 (2). | 

θάλασσα decl. 29. 

θαμίζω w. partic. 304 (N.). 

θάπτω (rap-) 16 (2, N.). 

θάρσος and θράσος 13 (top). 

θάσσων 16 (2, N.), 64 (1). 

θἄτερον 11 (N. 2). 

θαυμάζω w. gen. 222 (2), 224 (1); 
θαυμάζω εἰ 274. 

θέλεις or θέλετε w. interrog. subj. 291 
(end). 

-θεν, -θε, local end. 52, 186. 

θεός, vocative 33 (top). 

θέρομαι, fut. of 137 (N. 4). 


GREEK 


declined 41. 
on declined 41. 
-6, local end. 52, 186. -@in 1st aor. 
pass. imper. becomes τί after θη- 
16 (3), 149 (8). 


θνήυκω (@av-), metath. 134 (a); 7 |. 


for ἅ 130 (N. 2); fut. perf. act. 
139 (c, N. 2); perf. as pres. 247 
(N. 6). 

θοἰμάτιον (by crasis) 11. 

θρίξ, τριχός 16 (2, N.). 

θυγάτηρ declined 48. 


I, close vowel 6; contr. w. foll. vowel 
10, 44(N.3); length. ἴο 1119 (end), 
125 (11.), 128, 131, toe 125 (II.); 
τ added to demonstr. 75 (N. 2); 
modal sign in opt. 146 (end); in 
redupl. of pres. stem 129 (end), 
157 (3), 168 (2); representing 7 of 
ja 15 (7), 16. 

ἴα for μία (Hom.) 69 (N. 1). 

ἰάομαι 131 (end). 

-(8ys, patronym. in 184 (9). 

-(.ov, diminutives in 184 (8). 

ἴδρις declined 57 (N. 2). - 

ἱδρόω, contraction 118 (N. 3). 

ἱδρύνθην (ἱδρύω) 140 (VI. N. 2). 

te or ty as modal sign in opt. 146 
(end), 147 (3). 

-({@, denominative verbs in 186. 

tmpe conjug. 175, 176; aor. in xa 137 

1 


ἱκνέομαι 129 (3). 

-tkos, adj. in 185 (13). 

ἵλεως adj. declined 54. 

-ty in acc. sing. 37 (2). 

tv, Doric for of 73 (N. 7). 

tva final conj. 259, 260, 261. 

πῖον, diminutives in 184 (8). 

-tos, adj. 1η. 185 (12). 

ἱππότα, nom. (Hom.) 31 (2). 

Ἰσθμοῖ 52 (N. 2). 

-Coxos, -ίσκη, dimin. in 184 (8). 

ἴσος w. dat. 233. 

ἵστημι, synopsis 159, 166, 167; in- 
flect. of ws-forms 159-165; redupl. 
of pres. 157 (3), 168 (2); fut. perf. 
act. 139 (¢, N. 2); partic. ἱστάς 
declined 59. ; 

ἰχθύς declined 44. 


᾿Ἴώ, accus. ᾿Ιοῦν (Hdt.) 47 (N. 3). 


24 


INDEX. 369 


«ἴων, patronym. in 184 (9, N.). 
πίων, -ἰστος, comp. and superl. in 64, 


K, smooth mute, palatal, surd 8; 
euph. ch. before lingual 14 (1), 
bef. uw 14 (3), w. o forms ἕξ 14 (2); 
_ ch. to x in pf. act. stem 188 (ὁ). 

K in ov« 12 (2). 

ig in aor. of three vbs. 187 (1, 

1 


κάββαλε (κατέβαλε) 12 (N. 8). 

δ ΕΝ and καθεύδω, augment 124 
N. 3). 

κάθημαι conjug. 177. 

καθίζω, augment 124 (N. 8). : 

καθίστημι as copul. vb. 194 (Rem.). 

καὶ τόν w. infin. 205. . 

καίπερ w. partic. 301 (N. 1). 

καίω 128 (3). : 

κακός compared 65. 

κάκτανε (κατέκτανε) 12 (N. 8). 

καλέω, fut. in -έω, ὦ 136 (a); perf. 
opt. (poet.) 150 (1); perf. as pres. 
247 (N. 6). 


καλός compared 65. 
καλύβη and καλύπτω 126 (111.). 
κάμπτω, pf. mid. 14 (8, N.), 114 


(a). 
κάτ (Hom.) for κατά 12 (N. 8). 
κατά, prep. w. gen. and accus, 238, 
242; in comp. 224 (end). 
Kara, (καὶ εἶτα) 11. 
κατηγορέω, augment 124 (top). 
κατθανεῖν (καταθανεῖν) 12 (N. 3). 
κέ or κέν 12 (1, N. 1), 253. 
κεῖμαι conjug. 178. 
ate (for ἐκεῖνος) 75 (end). 
κελεύω w. accus. and inf. 231 (2, 


N. 2). 
κέρας declined 47. 
Kepdatvw 129 (4, N. 1), 188 (6). 
Kéws, accus. of 33 (N. 1). 
κηρύσσει without subj. 192 (d). 
κίχρημι 168 (2). 
κλαίω 128 (3). 
κλαυσιάω, desider. vb. 186 (N. 1). 
-κλέης, proper nouns in, decl. 43. 
κλέπτης, compared 66 (end). 
κλίνω, drops v 133 (6); 114 (d). 
κλισίηφι 52 (N. 3). 
κνάω, contraction 118 (N. 2). 
κρείσσων, κράτιστος 65 (1). 


370 GREEK 


κρέμαμαι 168 (1); accent of subj. 
and opt. 158 (N. 2). 

κρίνω, drops v 133 (6). 

κρύφα w. gen. 229 (2). 

κτάομαι, augm. of perf. 121 (N. 2); 
perf. subj. and opt. 150 (1). 

κτείνω ΓΈ (top), 198 (4, N. 1), 184 

top). 

as rg compared 64 (end). 

κύκλῳ 236 (N. 2). 

Kuvéw (κυ-) 129 (3). 

κύων, κύντερος, κύντατος 66 (3).". 

κωλύω, accent of certain forms 110 


(N. 8). 
Kas, accus. of, 33 (N. 1). 


A, liquid 7, sonant 8; Ad after syll. 
augm. (Hom.) 120 (N. 5). 

λαγχάνω and λαμβάνω, augm. of 
perf. 121 (top).. 

λαμπάς declined 40. ) 

AavOdve (λαθ-) 129 (top); w. partic. 
304 (4). 

λάσκω (Aax-), formation 130 (N. 3). 

λέγω, collect, augm. of perf. 121 (top). 

λέγω, say, constr. of 293 (end); λέ- 
γουσι 192 (N. 1, 0b); λέγεται 

‘ omitted 299 (ὃ 273). 

λείπω (λιπ-), synopsis 88, 89; mean- 
ing of tenses 92; 2d perf. plpf., 

_ and aor. inflected 104-106. 

λέων declined 39. 

λοιδορέω w. acc. and λοιδορέομαι w. 
dat. 231 (2, N. 2). 

λύω, synopsis 86, 87; meaning of 
tenses 92; conjug. 94-103; λύων 
and λελυκώς declined 59, 60; quan- 
tity of v 132 (N. 1). 

λῴων, λῷστος 65 (1). 


M, liquid, nasal, and sonant 7, 8; 
ἼΩΝ bi μβρ for μὰ and pp 13 


-μα, neut. nouns in 183 (4). 
μά, in oaths, w. ace. 216. 
μαίομαι (ua-) 128 (3, N.). 
μακρός, decl. of 538; μακρῷ w. comp. 
234 (2). . 
ΒΕ» Lge σρλρο (μᾶλλον, μάλιστα) 67 
ι ) 


end). 
Μαραθῶνι, &c., dat. of place 236 
(N. 1). | 


INDEX. 


μάχομαι ν΄. dat. 233 (N. 1). 

μέγας declined 62, 63; compared 65. 
μέζων for μείζων 65, 15 (end). 

-μεθον in Ist pers. dual 146 (N. 8). 
μείζων 65, 15 (end). 

μείρομαι, augm. of perf. 121 (top). 
μείων, μεῖστος 66 (5). 

μέλας declined 58, 59. 

μέλει w. dat. and gen. 223 (top), 231 


(top). 


μέλλω augment 120 (N. 2); νυ. infin. 


as periph. fut. 151 (6), 250 (N). 

μέμνημαι, perf. subj. and opt. 150 
(1); as pres. 247 (N. 6); w. partic. 
304 (end). ἢ 

μέν, in ὁ μέν... . ὁ δέ 204, 205. 

-μεναι, -μεν, in infin, 169 (14), 172 (9). 

sect gst and Mevéddos, accent 33 
(N. 2). 

μεντἄν (by crasis), 11. 

μεσημβρία 13 (N. 1). 

μέσος, compar. 64 (N. 2); w. art. 
204 (N. 4). 

μετά, prep. w. gen., dat., and ace. 
239, 240, 242; μέτα (Hom.) for 
μέτεστι 242 (N. 5). 

μεταμέλει w. gen. and dat. 223 (top); 
231 (top). 

μέταξύ w. gen. 237, 229 (N.); w. 
partic. 301 (N. 1). 

μεταποιέομαι w. gen. 221 (end). 

μέτεστι w. gen, and dat. 222 (top), 
231 (top). . 

μετέχω w. gen. 221 (end). 

μέτοχος w. gen. 228 (top). 

ped 72 (N. 2). 

μέχρι, as prep. w. gen. 229 (N.) 237; 
as conj. 279, with subj. without 
dv 280 (N. 1). | 

μή, adv., not, 307-309; w. ἵνα, ὅπως, 
&e. in final and object clauses 260 
(N. 1); in protasis 263 (3); in rel. 
cond. sent. 275; in wishes 289 (1); . 
w. imperat. and subj. in prohibi- 
tions 290, 291; .w. dubitative subj. 
291; w. infin. 308 (3); 282 (4); 
w. infin. and ὥστε 279 (Rem.), 
297 ; w. infin. after negative verb 
295, 296. See od μή and μὴ οὐ. 

μηδέ, μήτε, &c. 307, 309; μηδείς and 
μηδὲ εἷς 70 (top). 

μηκέτι, 12 (2). 

μήτηρ, decl. of 48 (N. 1). 


GREEK 


μήτις (poet.) 76; accent 24 (N. 3). 
μὴ od 309 (7), 295, 296; one syllable 
in poetry, 11 (N. 3); wy... οὐ in 
final cl. 260 (top). 
-pt in 1st pers. sing. 85 (3, N.), 142, 
147 (1), 156. 
μικρός compared 66: 
μιμνήσκω, augment of perf. 121 
(N. 2); ἡ for ἅ 180 (N. 2). See 
έμνη 
ean vy 7 72 (N. 4). 
ίνως, accus. of 33 (N. i 
μισέω w. accus. 231 (2, N. 
μισθόω, middle of 245 (N. 2). 
μνάα, μνᾶ, declined 30. 
μολ- in pf. of βλώσκω 13 (N. 1). 
μορ- in βροτός 13 (N. 1). 
-μος, αν in 182 (3); adj. in 185 
(17). 
μοῦνος (μόνος) 25 (3). 
μύριοι and μυρίοι 70 (2, N. 8). 
μυρίος, μυρία 70 (2, N. 3). 
μῶν (μὴ οὖν), interrog. 306 (end). 


N, liquid, nasal, and sonant 7, 8 ; 

τ eth, ch. before labial and palatal 
15 (5), before liquid and o 15 (6); 
in ἐν and σύν 15 (N. 3); dropped 
in some vbs. in vw 133 (6), or 
changed to o bef. μαι 15 (N. 4); 
inserted in aor. pass. 140 (VI. 
τ τς ; in 5th class of verbs 128, 


a case- ena 35 (2, Ν.). 

-vat, infin. in 149 (1), 153 (14), 
172 (9): see -μεναι. 

ναίχι, accent 23 (4). 

ναίω (να-) 128 (8, Ν.). 

ναός, νηός, and νεώς 33 (N. 2). 

vats, declined 46: compounds of | 6 
(ναυμαχία, ναυσίπορος, νεώσοικος, 


ὅ 6.) 187 (1, N.); ναῦφι 52 (Ν᾽ j 


3). 

véw (νυ-) 126 (2). 

veds declined 33. 

vq, in oaths, w. accus. 216. 
vy-, insep. neg. prefix 188 (ὁ 6). 
νῆσος declined 32. 

νηῦς (for ναῦς) 46 (N.). 

νίζω (viB-) 127 (N. 2). 
viv and pty 72 (N. 4). 

vida (accus.) 50 (3). 


INDEX. 871 


νομίζω ν΄. infin. 285, 293 (2); w. 
dat. like χράομαι 234 (N. 2). 

γόος, νοῦς, declined 34. 

-vos, adject. in 185 (14). 

νουμηνίᾳ 235 (N. 2). 

-vot and -ντι in 3d pers. plur. 15 
(6), 142, 144, 145, 146, 157 (d). 

-vTwv in 3d pers. pl. imper. 148. 

νυκτί and ἐν νυκτί 235 (Ν. 1). 

νύν or νύ (Ep.) 12 (1, N. 1); enclitic 
23 (4). 

νῶϊ, νῶϊν 72 (N. 2). 

νωΐτερος 74 (N. 1). 


=, double consonant 7; surd 8 ; syll. 
py bee before 121 (2). 
ξεῖνος (lon. ) for ζένος 25 (2). 
ξύν for σύν, w. dat. 237. 


O, open short vowel, 6; in contrac- 
‘tion 9 (2), 10(N. 2), 1: length. to w 
119 (end), 132 (3); to ov 15 (6), 
in Ion. 25 (2); fore in 2 pf. 132 
(3), rarely in 1 pf. 133 (3, N, 2), 
in nouns 181 (N. 5); as conn. 
vowel 144, 145, 147 ; as suffix 182 
(1), 185 (11); at end of first part 
of compounds 187 (1). 

-o, case-ending in gen. sing. 35 (2, 
N. ); for -co in ond pers. sing. 14 
(end), 145 (N. 1). 

ὃ, H, τό, article, decl. of 71; syntax 
199-205 ; in Hom. 199, 200, in 
Attic 200, 201; ὁ μέν... ὁ δέ 204, 
205; proclitic forms 24, when 
accented 25 (Ν. 2). See Article. 

8, rel. (neut. of ὅς), for ὅτε (Hom.) 
288 (2). 

μων ie, (Ton.) 69 (N.). 
ἥδε, τόδε, demonstr. pronoun, 
dest 74, 75 ; syntax 208 ; w. arti- 
cle 200 (c), 203 (4); ὁδί 75 (N. 2). 
ὀδούς, ὀδόντος 37 (top). 

οε and oo contracted to ov 9 (2). 

oe contr. to ov 9 (4), to οἱ (in vbs. 
in ow) 10 (Ν. 2). 

ὄζω w. two | gen. 223 (Rem.). 

on contr. to w 9 (2), to » 9 (2, N.). 

oy and oe contr. to ot (in vbs. in dw) 
10 (N. 2). 

ὅθεν 79 ; by assimilation 211 (N. 3). 


812 GREEK 


ot, diphth. 6; in 2 pf. for 7 132 (3); 
augmented to w 122; rarely elided 
12 (top); short in accent. 19 (2, 
N. 1); οἱ in voc. sing. 46, 47 (N. 2). 

oi, pron. 71, 72; use in Attic 205. 

ot, adv. (whither) 79. 

oia w. partic. 301 (end). 

οἶδα, conjug. 178, 179; w. partic. 
304, 305 ; οἷσθ᾽ ὃ δρᾶσον 290 (N.). 

Οἰδίπους 49 (a). 

-ouny, &c. in opt. act. of contract vbs. 
147 (4); in 2 perf. opt. 148 (N. 1). 

-ouv (Ep.) for -ow in dual 34, 49. 

οἴκαδε; οἴκοθεν, οἴκοι, οἴκονδε 52; 
οἴκοι 286 (N. 2). 

-ovo in gen. sing. 94. 

οἴομαι, ole. in 2d pers. sing. indic. 
146 (N. 2). 

οἷος 78; οἵῳ σοι 211 (N. 5); οἷός re, 
able, in Attic 210 (top). 

κοισα for -ovea in partic. 153 (15). 

-orot in dat. plur. 34. 

οἴχομαι, perf. 135 (N.); in pres. as 
perf. 246 (end); w. partic. 304 

N 


ὀλίγος compared 66; ὀλίγου {δεῖν) 
298 (§ 268). 

ὄλλυμι (dA-), form of pres. 129 (N. 
2), future 136 (α). 

ὁμιλέω w. dat. 233. 

ὄμνυμι (du-, duo-) 185 (N.); w. ac- 
cus. 213 (N. 2). 

ὅμοιος w. dat. 233. 

ὄναρ 50 (3). 

ὀνίνημι (dva-) 168 (N. 2). 

ὄνομα (by name) 215 (1). 

ὀνομάζω w. two accus. 218 ; in pass. 
w. pred. noun 194. 

ὀξύνω, pf. and plpf. pass. 114 (ὦ). 

oo contracted to ov 9 (2). 

~oos and -oov, nouns in 33, 34; ad- 
ject. in 54-56. 

gov for οὗ 78 (top). 

ὅπη, ὁπηνίκα, ὁπόθεν, ὅποι 79. 

ὄπισθεν ν. gen. 229 (2). 

ὁποῖος, ὁπόσος 78. 

ὁπότε rel. 79, 275 ; causal 288 ; ὁπό- 
ray 254, 275. 

ὁπότερος 78. 

ὅπου 79. 

ὀπυίω (ὀπυ-) 128 (3, N.). 

ὅπως, rel. adv. 79; as indir. inter- 
Tog. w. subj. or opt. 284; as final 


INDEX. 


particle 259, 260, 261, sometimes 
w. ἄν 260 (1, N. 2); in obj. cl. w. 
fut. ind. 261, rarely w. ἄν 261 (N. 
1); ὅπως μή w. fut. after vbs. of 
fearing 262 (Ν. 1), νυ. ellipsis of 
leading vb. 262 (N. 2). ὅπως for 
ws in ind. quot. 288. 

ὁράω, augm. of 123 (N. 1); w. par- 
tic. 303 (2), in ind. discourse 304 
(end). 

ὄρνις declined 40; accus, sing. 37 
(2); voc. sing. 38 (c). 

ὅς rel. pron. 77 : see Relative. 

ὅς, his, poss. (poet.) 74. 

és as demonstr. 209 (N. 8). 

ὄσσε w. pl. adj. (Hom.) 197 (N. 6). 

ὀστέον, ὀστοῦν, declined 33, 34. 

ὅστις declined 77 ; Hom. forms 78 ; 
as indir. interrog. 306 (1); w. plur. 
antec. 209 (N. 2). 

ὀσφραίνομαι, formation 129 (4, N. 
1); w. gen. 222 (2). 

ὅτ᾽ for ὅτε (not ὅτι) 12 (N. 2). 

ὅτε, rel. 79, 2753 causal 288; ὅταν ~ 
254, 275. 

ὅτευ or ὅττευ, ὅτεῳ, ὅτεων, ὁτέοισι 78 
(N. 2). 

ὅτι, that, in ind. quot. 281, 282, 283 ; 
in direct quot. 281 (2, N.); because, 
causal 288, 289; not elided 12 
(N. 2). 

ὅτις, Stiva, Stivas, ὅττεο, ὅττι 78 
(top). ; 

ov length. from o 15 (6); for o in 
Ion. 25 (2). 

-ov in gen. sing. 28, 31, 32, 35 (2, 
N.); for -eco in 2d pers. mid. 145. 

ov, οὐκ, οὐχ 12 (2); accent 24 (end); 
use 263 (3), 260 (top), 307-310 ; 
οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ ὅπως, &c. w. opt. (without 
dv) 270 (N. 1). See od μή and 


μὴ οὐ. 

οὗ, ot, ἕ, &c. 71, 72; synt. 205. 

οὗ rel. adv. 79. 

οὐδέ 307 ; οὐδὲ εἷς and οὐδείς 70 (top). 

οὐδ᾽ ὥς 24 (end); οὐδὲ πολλοῦ δεῖ 
224 (top). 

οὐδείς 70 (top), 307; οὐδένες &c. 70 
(top); οὐδεὶς ὅστις οὐ 211 (N. 4). 

οὐκ : see οὐ. 

οὐκέτι 12 (2). 

οὗκ (ὁ ἐκ) 11. 


οὐ μή w. fut. ind. or subj. 292. 


‘GREEK 


«οὖν in acc. sing. (Hdt.) 47 (N. 3). 

οὕνεκα for ἕνεκα 229 (N.). 

οὗὑπί (ὁ ἐπί) 11. 

οὐρανόθι 52. 

οὖς, car, accent 22 (3, N. 1). 

οὔτε 307. 

οὔτις (poet.) 76 (N. 1). 

οὗτος declined 74, 75; use of 208 ; 
disting. from ἐκεῖνυς and ὅδε 208 
(see N. 1); ταύτα (dual) rare 197 
(N. 5); w. article 200 (c), position 
w. art. 203 (4); in exclam. 208 
(N. 2); ref. to preceding rel. 210 


(N. 3); w. μέν and δέ 208 (N. 4); | 


ταῦτα and τοῦτο as adv. accus. 215 
.(2); οὑτοσί Τῦ (Ν. 2). 

οὕτως and οὕτω 12 (3). 

οὐχ : see οὐ. 

ὀφείλω (ὀφελ-), owe, 128 (M.A): 
ὥφελον in wishes 290 (N. 1, 2), 
268 (N. 2). 

ὀφέλλω, increase 128 (N. 1). 

ὀφέλλω, owe (Hom. = ὀφείλω), 128 
(N. 1); impf. ὥφελλον in wishes 
290 (N. 1). . 

ὄφελος 50 (3). 

ὄφρα, as final part. 260 ; wntil 279. 

-ow denom. verbs in 186 ; infl. of 
contr. forms 115-118. 

-ow, &c. Hom. form of vbs. in aw 154 
(6); Hom. fut. in 6 (for dow, dw, 
ὦ) 154 (end of ὃ). 


II, smooth mute, labial, surd 8 ; eu- 
phonic ch. before lingual 14 (1), 
bef. μὶ 14 (3); with σ᾽ becomes y 14 
(2); ch. to @ in perf. act. 138 (0). 

παίζω, double stem 127 (N. 1). 

mats, accent 22 (3, N. 1); voce. sing. 
38 (c). 

=< w. pres. (incl. perf.) 247 (N. 


ee for παρά (Hom.) 12 (N. 3). 

παρά, w. gen., dat., and accus. 240, 
242 ; in comp. 233. 

πάρα for πάρεστι 242 (N. 5). 

παρανομέω, augm. 124 (top). 

Tapackevatw, impers. παρεσκεύασται 
192 (d), 245 (top). 

was declined 58 ; w. art. 204 (N. 5). 

πατήρ declined 48. 

παύω and παύομαι w. partic. 303 (1). 


INDEX, “818 


πείθω, pf. and plpf. mid. infl. 111, 
112, 113 (N. 2). 

πείθομαι w. dat. 230 (2). 

πεινάω, contraction 118 (N, 2). 

Πειραιεύς decl. 45 (N. 3). 

πείρω, pf. and plpf. mid. 114 (e). 

πέλας w. gen. 229 (2). 

πέμπω, pf. pass. 14 (3, N.), 114 (a); 
πέμπειν πομπήν 214 (top). 

πένης compar. 66 (7). 

πέπτω, pf. pass. (cf. πέμπω) 114 (a). 

mera declined 56, 57. 

πέρ, enclit. 23 (4); w. partic. 801 
(N. 1). 

πέραν w. gen. 229 (2). 

πέρας declined 41. 

περί, w. gen., dat., and acc. 240, 
242; in comp. 233; not elided in 
Attic 12 (N..2); πέρι 20 (§ 23, 


2). 
Περικλέης, Περικλῆς, declined 43. 
περιοράω w. partic. 303 (3). 
περισπώμενον 19 (§ 21, 2). 
πέσσω (πεπ-) 127 (N.). 


79. 
τ indef. 28 (2 


) 

me λείδης (Hom. εΐδης) 184 (c). 
(kos; 78. . 

μὰ ἐγ μοί 79. 

πῆχυς declined 48, 44, 

Bie me pe and πίμπρημι, redupl. 168 


πλακόεις, πλακοῦς, declined 59 (N. 


2). 
πλεῖν (for πλέον) 226 (N. 2). 
πλείων or πλέων, πλεῖστος 66. " 
πλέκω, pf. and plpf. mid infil. 111, 
112, 113 (N. 2). 
πλέω (πλυ-)} 126 (2); contr. 118 (N. 
1); πλεῖν θάλασσαν 215 (Ν. 5). 
πλήν ν΄. gen. 237, 229 (N.). 
πλησίον w. gen. 229 (2). 
πλήσσω (πληγ-), ἐπλάγην (in comp.) 
141 (N. 2). 
πλύνω 138 (6). 
πνέω (πνυ-) 126 (2). 
ποθεν ; ποθέν 79. 
ποθί, enclitic 23 (2). 
ποῖ; 79. 
mot, indef. 79 ; enclitic 28 (2). 
ποιέω w. two accus. 217 ; w. partic. 
303 (2); εὖ and κακῶς ποιῶ 217 
(end). 


874 GREEK 


arotos; ποιός 78. : 
πολεμέω, πολεμίζω w. dat. 233 (N. 


1); disting. from πολεμόω 187 
N. 3). 
πόλις, declined 48, 44; Ion. forms 
44 (N. 8). 


πολλός, Ion, == πολύς 68 (N. 1). 

πολύς, declined 62, 63; lon. forms 
63 (N. 1); compared 66; w. art. 
202 (end); of πολλοί and τὸ πολύ 
202 (end) 220 (N. 1); πολύ and 
πολλά as adv. 67 (2); πολλῷ w. 
comp. 234 (2); πολλοῦ δεῖ ‘and 
οὐδὲ πολλοῦ det 224 (top). 

πομπὴν πέμπειν 214 (top). 

moppw or πρόσω w. gen. 229 (2). 

Ποσειδάων, ἸΠοσειδῶν, accus. 37 (2, 
N. 1); accent of voc. 21 (1, N.). 

πόσος; ποσός 78. 

πότε; 79. 

ποτέ, indef. 79 ; enclitic 23 (2). 

πότερος ; πότερος (or -pds) 78. 

πότερον or πότερα, interrog. 307 (5). 

ποῦ; 79; w. part. gen. 220 (N. 3). 

πού indef. 79; enclitic 23 (2). 

πούς, nom. sing. 37 (top); acc. 37 (2). 

πρᾶος, declined 63 ; two stems of 63 
By as . 


πράσσω (πρᾶγ-), perf. 138 (Ὁ); 2nd 
perf. 188 (3, N. 1), 139 (d, N. 2); 
seldom w. two accus. 218 (top); 
εὖ and κακῶς πράσσω 218 (top): 
πρέπει impers. 193 (N. 2). 


ers oun πρεσβύτης, πρέσβυς 51 
26). ; 


πρεσβεύω, denom. verb 186. 

᾿ πρίν, formation 281 (1st N.); w. finite 
moods 280; w. infin. 281, 299; 
πρὶν ἤ 281 (1st N.). 

πρό, w. gen. 237; not elided 12 (N. 
2); contracted w. augment 123 (N. 


1), or w. foll. ε or o 188 (3); po} 


τοῦ or προτοῦ 205 (2). 

᾿ «προῖκα, gratis, as adv. 215 (2). 

πρός, w. gen., dat., and acc. 240, 241, 
242; in compos. 233; πρός, besides, 
as adv. 241 (N. 2). 

προσϑεχομένῳ μοί ἐστιν 232 (N. 5). 

προσήκει impers. 193 (N. 2); w. gen. 
and dat. 222 (top), 231 (top); 
προσῆκὸν (acc. abs.) 302 (2). 

πρόσθεν w. gen. 229 (2); πρόσθεν ἤ 
(like πρὶν ἤ) 281 (top), 299 (N.). 


INDEX. 


προσταχθέν (acc. abs.) 302 (2). 

πρόσω w. gen. 229 (2). 

πρότερος 66 (2); πρότερον ἤ (like 
πρὶν ἤ) 281 (top), 299 (N.). 

προὔργου and προὔχω 188 (3). 

πρώτιστος 66 (2). 

πρῶτος 66 (2); τὸ πρῶτον or πρῶτον, 
at first 215 (2). 

πυνθάνομαι w. gen. 222 (2); w. par- 
tic. 304 (end). 

πώ, indef., enclitic 23 (2). 

πῶς; 79. 

πώς, indef. 79 ; enclitic 23 (2). 


P, liquid 7; sonant 8; ῥ at begin- 
ning of word 7; pp after syll. 
augm. and in comp. after vowel 
13 (δ 15, 2), 119; μβρ for up 18 
(N. 1). 

ῥά, enclitic 23 (4). 

ῥῴδιος compared 66. 

ῥαίνω 129 (4, N..1).. 

ῥῴων, ῥᾷστος 66 (9). 

ῥέω (pv-) 126 (2). 

a a (ῥὰγ-), 2 pf. Eppwya 188 (3, 

ῥηίδιος, ῥηίτερος, 66 (9). 

pryde, infin. ῥιγῶν 118 (N. 8). 

pls, nose, declined 41. 

-poos, adject. in, decl. of 53 (2). 

-pos, adject. in 185 (17). 


2, two forms 6 (top); sibilant, semi- 
vowel, and surd 7, 8; after mutes, 
only in and w 14 (2); v before σ 
15 (6); linguals changed to ¢ be- 
fore a lingual 14 (1), before μ 14 
(3); dropped between two conso- 
nants 14 (4); dropped in stems in 
eg 42, in oa and oo 145 (N. 1), 
151 (2), 14 (end), 10 (N. 1); add- 
ed to some vowel stems 132 (2); 
double, after syll. augm. 120 (N. 
5), in fut. and aor. (Hom.) 152 
(7); movable in οὕτως and ἐξ 12; 
dropped in ἔχω and ἔσχω 131. 

s as ending of nom. sing. 35 (2, 
N.), 28, 32; of ace. pl. 35. 

-σαι and -σὸ in 2d pers. sing. 142, 
145; drop σ 145 (N. 1), 14 “(end).. 

σάλπιγξ declined 39. 


GREEK 


-cav, 3d pers. plur. 142, 145, 147 
3 


) 

σαυτοῦ 73, 206, 207. 

σβίννυμι, 2d aor. ἔσβην 158 (N. 6). 

σέ 71. 

σεαυτοῦ 73. 

σείει without subj. 193 (0). 

σεῖο, σέθεν 72 (N. 2). 

-σείω, desideratives in 186 (N. 1). 

σεμνός, compared 64. 

σέο, σεῦ 72 (N. 2). 

σεύω (cv) 126 (2). 

σεωυτοῦ (Hdt). 74 (top). 

-σϑα (Hom.) in 2 pers. sing. subj. 
act. 153 (d), in ind. of vbs. in μὲ 
171 (4). 

-σθον and -σθην in 2 and 8 p. dual 
142; -σθον for -σθην in ὃ pers. 146 
(N. 5). 

«σι in 2 p. sing. (in ἐσσί) 142 (N.) 

-ov in dat. pl. 35; Ion. we 31, 34, 
35 (2, N.) 

-ot as locative ending 52 (N. 2). 

-o. (for -ντι, -vot) in 3 p. pl. 142, 
145, 146, 157 (d). 

-σιμος, adject. in 185 (17). 

σῖτος and σῖτα 50 (2). 

oxedavvupt, fut. of 136 (0). 

-σκον, -σκομην, lon. iterative end- 
ings 152 (10); synt. 253 (N.). 

σκοπέω w. ὅπως and fut. ind. 261; 
w. σκόπει or σκοπεῖτε omitted 262 


σκότος, decl. of 49 (a). 

σμάω, contraction 118 (N. 2). 

-σο in 2 pers. sing. 142, 145, 14 
(end): see -σαι. 

ods, poss. pron. 74, 207. 

σοφός declined 53. 

σπένδω, σπείσω, cuph. ch. 15 (N. 1); 
pf. and plpf. mid. 114 (ὦ. 

στείβω, pf. mid. 126 (N.). 

στέλλω, pf. mid. inflected 111, 112, 
113 (N. 2), 114 (ὦ. 

στοχάζομαι w. gen. 222 (1). 

στρατηγέω w. gen. 223 (3). 

σύ declined 71, 72; generally om. 192 
(N. 1). 

συγγιγνώσκω w. partic. (nom. or 
any: 305 (N. ΝῊ 

συμβαίνει impers. 198 (N. 2). 

σύν or ξύν w. dat. 237; in compos. 
233. ; 


INDEX. 375 


συνελόντι (or ὡς συνελόντι) εἰπεῖν 

_ 232 (6). ! 

-σύνη, nouns in 183 (7). 

epg w. partic. (nom. or dat.) 305 
2 


σφέ 72 (N. 1, 2, 3); σφέα 72 (top); 
σφέας, σφεῖας, σφέων, σφείων 72 
(Ν. 2). : 

ἐᾷ τὴς μὴν 74. ; 

σφίν or ot 72 (N. 2); σφίν (not σφί 
in Trag. 72 (N. ἢ; site ἊΣ 

te for opérepos 74 (N. 1). 

o τὶ σφῶϊ, ζο., σφωέ, σφωΐν 72 

2 


μὰ i 74 (Ν, 1). 

σφῶν αὐτῶν, &c. 74 (N.). 

σχοίην (οἵ ἔχω) 148 (Ν. 1). 

Σωκράτης, decl. of 48 (N. 1); ace. 
49 (b); voc. 21 (1, N.). 

σῶμα, declined 41; nom. formed 36 
(1); dat. pl. 14 (2), 39. 

σωτήρ, σῶτερ 21 (1, N.). 

σώφρων compared 64 (N. 4). 


T’, smooth mute, lingual, surd 8; 
dropped before σ 14 (2); dropped 
or ch. to o in nom. of 3 decl. 36 
(1); vr dropped before o 15 (N. 
1, 2), 37 (top). 

-ra& (Hom.) for -rys in nom. of Ist 
decl. 31. 

τὰ and ταῖν (dual of ὁ), rare 71 
(N. 2), 197 (N. 5). 

-rat in 3 pers. sing. 142, 145. 

τάλας adj., decl. of 57 (1). 

τἄλλα (τὰ ἄλλα) 11, 20 (8 24, 2). 

ταὐτά, ταὐτό, ταὐτόν, ταὐτοῦ 73 


(N:). 
ταύτῃ adv. 79. ; 
ταφ- for θαφ- (θάπτω) 16 (2, N.). 


τάχα w. ἀν (τάχ᾽ dv) 256 (§ 212, N.). 
ταχύς compared 64 (1), 16 (2, N.); 


τὴν ταχίστην 215 (2). 

τάων (= τῶν) 71 (N. 2). 

τέ, enclitic 23 (4); w. relatives 209 
(N. 4); w. ofos 210 (top). 

τεθνεώς 62 (N.), 139 (N. 3). 

τεῖν (Ion. = σοί) 72 (N. 2). 

τείνω, drops v 133 (6). 

-repa, fem. nouns in 182 (3). 

τελέω, future in ὦ, οῦμαι 186 (a); pf. 
and plpf. mid. infl, 112, 113 
(N. 2). ἥ 


376 GREEK 


τέλος, finally, adv. acc. 215 (2). 

τέο, τεῦ, τεῦς, τεοῦ (= σοῦ) 73 (N.7). 

τέο, τεῦ (== τοῦ for τίνος or τινός), 
τέῳ, τέων, τέοισι 76 (N. 2). 

-réov, verbal adj. in 150 (3); impers., 
with subj. in dat. or acc. 306 ; 
sometimes plural 306 (top). 

-téos, verbal adj. in 150 (3); passive 
305 (1). 

reds Doric (= ods) 74 (N. 1). 

τέρην decl. of 59 (N. 3). 

-Tepos, comparative in 64. . 

τέρπω, 2 aor. w. stem ταρπ- 133 (4, 
Ν. 


τέσσαρες (or τεττ-), Ion. τέσσερες, 
&c., declined 69. 

τετραίνω 129 (4, N. 1). 

τέτρᾶσι (dat.) 69 (end). 

τεῦ, τεῦς, τέῳ, τέων 76 (N. 2): see 


τέο. 

Téws, accus. of 33 (N. 1). 

τῇ, τῇδε 79. 

τηλίκος, τηλικοῦτος &c. 78. 

-τὴν in 3 pers. ἄπ] 142; for -rov in 
2 pers. 146 (N. 5): see -σθον and 
-σθην. 

τηνίκα, τηνικαῦτα, &c. 79. 

-τήρ, masc. nouns in 182 (2); syncop. 
47, 48. 

-τήριον, nouns of place in 183 (6). 

als; mase. nouns in 182 (ὁ). 
σι and τῆς (= ταῖς) 71 (N. 2). 
for 00 13. 

om adv. in 186 (18). 

“Tl, ending of 3 pers. sing. (Doric) 
142; in éori 142 (N.). 

τίθημι, synopsis 159, 165, 166; in- 
flection of μιε- forms 159-165 ; re- 
dupl. 157 (3), 168 (2); aor. in κα 
and κάμην 137 (1, N. 1.); partic. 
τιθείς declined 60. 

τίκτω (rex-) 126 (end of III.). 

τιμάω, denom. verb 186 (1); stem 
and root of 26 (N.); inflec. of 
contr. forms 115-118; w. gen. of 
valwe 227; partic. τιμάων, τιμῶν, 
declined 61. 

τιμήεις, τιμῇς, decl. of 59 (N. 2). 

τιμωρέω and τιμωρέομαι 245 (N. 3). 

τίν, Doric (cot) 73 (N. 7). 

τίς interrog., declined 76; accent 22 
(3, N. 2); subst. or adj. 208 (1); 
in direct and ind. questions 208 (2). 


INDEX. 


τὶς indef., declined 76; subst. or adj. 
209; like πᾶς τις 209 (N.). 

tla, stem and root of 26 (N.). 

-ro in 3 pers. sing. 142, 145. 

τόθεν 79. 

τοί, enclitic 23 (4). 

rol, ταί, art. == οἱ, ai 71 (N. 2). 

τοί, lon. (= σοι) 72 (N. 2). 

τοῖος, τοιόσδε, τοιοῦτος 78, 200 (d). 

τοΐσδεσσι or τοΐσδεσι (= τοῖσδε) 75 
(N. 3). 

τὸν Kal τόν, &c. 205 (2). 

-rov, in 2 and 3 p. dual 142; for 
-τὴν in 3 pers. (Hom.) 146 (N. 5): 
see -τὴν. 

-ros, verb. adj. in 150 (3). 

τόσος, τοσόσδε, τοσοῦτος 78 ; 
σούτῳ w. compar. 234 (2). 

τότε 79; w. art. 201 (top). 

τοῦ for τίνος, and tov for τινός 76. 

τοὐναντίον (by crasis) 11. 

-τρᾶ, fem. nouns in 183 (5, N.). 

τρεῖς, τρία, declined 69. 

τρέπω, ch. ε toa 133 (4, N. 1); six 
aorists of 141 (N. 3). 

τρέφω, τρέχω, &c. 16 (2, N.). 

-τριᾶ, fem. nouns in 182 (5). 

τρίβω, perf. act. 126 (N.); pf. and 
plpf. mid. infl. 111, 112, 113 
(N. 2). 

τριήρης, declined 42, 43; accent 43 
(Ν. 1). 


το- 


τριπλάσιος w. gen. 226 (top). 

-tpls, fem. nouns in 182 (0). 

tptx-ds, gen. of θρίξ 16 (2, N.). 

-Tpoy, neut. nouns in 183 (5). 

τρόπον, adv. accus. 215 (2). 

τρύχω, τρυχώσω 135 (N.). 

τρώγω (Tpay-) 126 (top), 133 (top). 

Tpas, accent 22 (3, N. 1). 

τύ, Dor. (= σύ) 73 (N. 7). 

τυγχάνω (τῦχ-) 129 (top); w. gen. 222 
(1); w. partic. 304 (4); τυχύν 
(ace. abs,) 302 (2). 

τύνη, lon. (= σύ) 72 (N. 2). 

τύπτω Ww. cogn. accus. 214 (top). 

τῷ for τίνι, and τῳ for τινί 76. 

τῷ, therefore, Hom. 205 (2). 

-Two, masc. nouns in 182 (6d). 

Tas 79. 


Y, close vowel 6; contr. w. foll.. 
vowel 10 (5), 44; length. to 5 119 


GREEK 


(end); 125 (II.) 128, 131, to ev 
125 (110) 


εὐδριον, diminutives in 184 (8).. 

vdwp decl. of 52 (29). 

ὕειν, impers. 193 (top); ὕοντος (gen. 
abs.) 302°(1, N.). 

vt diphthong 6 (3). 

-via in pf. part. fem. 59-61, 149 

end). 

vids decl. 52 (30); om. after art. 201 

ὑμέ, ὑμές (Dor.) 73 (N. 7). 

ὑμέτερος 74, 207; ὑμέτερος αὐτῶν, 
&e. 207 (N. 4). 

ὑμίν, ὕμιν, types, ὕμμι, ὕμμε, &c. 72. 

-vvw, denom. verbs in 186, 128 (top). 

ὑπέρ, w. gen. and accus. 238, 242. 

ὑπισχνέομαι 129 (3). 

ὑπό, w. gen., dat., and accus. 241, 
242; in comp. 233. 

ὑποπτεύω, augment 124 (top). 

ὕποχος w. dative 232 (end). 

ὕστερον ἤ w. infin. 299 (N.). 

ὕστερος w. gen. 225 (N. 1); ὑστέρῳ 
χρόνῳ 235 (N. 2).. 

ὑφαίνω, pf. and plpf. mid. 114 (ὦ). 


#, rough mute, labial, and surd 8 ; 
not doubled 13; euph. changes 
before lingual 14 (1), bef. σ 14 (2), 
bef. w 14 (3); v before ¢ 15 (5). 

φαίνω, synopsis of 90, 91; meaning 

of tenses 93; fut. and aor. inflect- 
ed 106-110; pf. mid. 112, 113, 
(N. 2), 114 (ὦ), 15 (N. 4); forma- 
tion of pres. 127 (d), of fut. 136 
(2), of aor. 137 (2), of perf. act. 
134 (N.), of aor. pass. 140 (vi. N. 
2); synt., w. partic. 304, 305. 

φανερός εἰμι w. partic. 305 (N. 1). 

φείδομαι w. gen. 222 (2). 

φέρτερος, φέρτατος, φέριστος 65. 

φέρω 131 ; aor. in a 137 (1, N. 2). 

φημί, conjug. 176, 177; w. infin. in 

indir. disc. 293 (end). 

φθάνω w. partic. 304 (4). 

φιλέω, φιλῶ, inflect. of contract forms 
115-118 ; partic. φιλέων, φιλῶν, 
declined 62. 

φίλος compared 66. 

φλέψ declined 39. 

φλεγέθω 152 (11). 


INDEX. 377 


φονάω, desid. verb 186 (N. 1). 

pate, pf. and plpf. mid. 114 (ὦ. 

φρήν, gender 49 (1); accent of com- 
pounds 21 (1, N.). 

φροντίζω w. ὅπως and fut. ind. 261 ; 
w.-4 and subj. or opt. 262. 

φροντιστής w. accus. 213 (N. 8). 

φροῦδος (πρό, ὁδοῦ) 188 (3). 

φύλαξ declined 39. 

φωνήεις, not contracted 59 (N. 2). 

φῶς (φόως), light, accent 22 (8, N. 1). 


X, rough mute, palatal, and surd 8 ; 
not doubled 13 ; euph. ch. before 
a lingual 14 (1), bef. o (ξ) 14 (2), 

‘bef. μ 14 (8); v before x 15 (5). 

χαὶ (καί ai) and xot (καί oi) 11. 

χαρίεις declined 58; compared 64 
(N. 5); vr dropped in dat. plur. 15 
(N. 2). 

χάριν as adv. accus, 215 (2). 

xelp declined 52. 

χείρων (xepelwv), χείριστος 65. 

χέω (xu-), pres. 126 (2); fut. 136 (N. 
3); aor. 137 (1, N. 2). 

χοἰ (καὶ οἱ) and χαὶ (καὶ af) 11. 

Xpdopar w. dat. 284 (N. 2); w. dat. 
and cogn. acc. 214 (N. 2). 

xpd, contraction 118 (N. 2). 

χρή 168 (1); w. infin. 193 (N. 2). 
χρῆν or ἐχρῆν, contraction 118 (N. 
4); in apod. (without ἄν) 268 (N. 
2 


χώρα declined 29 ; gen. sing. 29 (2). 
χωρίς w. gen. 229 (2). 


W, double consonant 7; surd 8; syll. 
augm. before 121 (2). ᾿ 
dw, contracted 118 (N. 2). 
ήφισμα νικᾶν 214 (Rem. ), 


Ὦ, open long vowel 6 ; length. from 
o 119 (end), 132(3); for o in stem 
of Att. 2d decl. 33 (2); nouns in 
w of 3d decl. 46, 47, voc. sing. 38 


(3). 
ῳ, diphthong 6; by augment for οἱ 
122. 
ὦ, interjection, w. voc. 213 (2). 

ὧδε 79, 208 (N. 1). 


378 GREEK 


-wv, masc. denom. in 183 (6). 

των in gen. plur. 35 (2, N.), 382; -ῶν 
(for -dwv) in 1st decl. 28, 21 (2). 

ὦν, partic. of εἰμί, 172 ; accent 22 (3, 
N. 2). 


ὥρᾳ w. gen., as dat. of time 235 (N. 


Ma “nouns in (Attic decl.) 33 (2); 
adj. in ws, wy 54; pf. partic. in ws 
59-61 ; ate 67 (1). 

ὡς, rel. adv. in rel. sent. 275; 
w. partic. 301 '(N. 2), 305 (N. 4); 
in wishes w, opt. 289 (N. 2); in 
indir. quot. 281-283 ; causal 288, 


INDEX. 


289 ; as final particle 260, 261 (N. 
1 and 8); like ὥτσε w. infin. 297 
(N. 1); w. absol. infin. 298. 

ὡς, prepos. w. accus. 237, 242 (3). 

ὥς, thus 79 ; accent 24 (end). 

ὥσπερ, W. "conditional partic. 302 
(N. 3); w. accus. abs. 302 (2, N.); 
ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ 256 (3); accent 24 (N. 
3 


ὥστε, w. infin. 297; w. indic. 279; 
ind.. disting. from inf. 279 (Rem. ); 
accent 24 (N. 3). 


ων, Ton. diphthong 6. 


wits, οὑτός, τωὐτό (lon.) 72 (N. 6). 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


(N. B. See Note on p. 362.] 


Abandon, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 225. 

Ability or fitness, verbal adj. denot. 
185 (13). 

' Ablative, functions of in Greek 212 

(Rem. ) 

Absolute case: gen. 229, 302 (1); 
accus. 302 (2). 

Abstract nouns, in compos. 189 (6) ; 
w. art. 200 (0) ; neut. adj. w. art. 
for 199 (2). 

Abuse, vbs. expr., w. dat. 230 (2). 

Acatalectic verses 316 (3). 

Accent, general principles of 18-20 ; 
of nouns and adj. 21, 22; in gen. 
and dat., of oxytones 21 (2), of 
Attic 2d decl. 21 (end), of 3d decl. 
22 (3); of verbs 22, 23; of parti- 
ciples 22 (N. 2); of opt. in a and 
ot 23 (N. 4), 19 (§ 22, N.1); of con- 
tracted syllables (incl. crasis and 
elision) 20, 21; enclitics 23, 24 ; 
proclitics 24. Accent and ictus in 
verse 312 (N.). 

Accompaniment, dat. of 235 (5); w 
αὐτοῖς 235 (5, N.). 

Accusative case 27 ; sing. of 3d decl. 
37; contract. acc. and nom. pl. 
alike in 3d decl. 42, 45 (N. 1); 
subj. of infin. 192 (2), 298 (§ 269, 
N.) 299 ; after prepos. 238-242, in 
compos. 242 (end) ; acc, absol. 302 
(2), rarely w. partic. of personal 
verb 302 (2, N.) ; in appos. w. sen- 
tence 196 (N. 3); infin. as accus. 
292, 293, 294 (2), 296 (2); re- 
tained w. passive 244 (ῃ. 2). Other 
syntax of accus. 213-218 : see Con- 
tents, p. XX. 

Accusing, vbs. of, w. gen. 224 (2). 

Acknowledge, vbs. signif, to, w. par- 
tic. 304. 

Action, suffixes denot. 182 (3). 


‘Admire, 


Active voice 79 (1), meaning of tenses 
92, 93; person. endings” 142 ; use 
of 243 ; form of, incl. most in- 
trans. vbs. 243 (N. 1) ; object of, 
as subj. of pass. 244. 

Acute accent 18; of oxytone changed 
to grave 20. 

Addressing, voc. in 213 (2) ; 
213 (N.). 

Adjectives, formation 185 ; inflection 
53-63 : see Contents, p. xvi.; com- 
parison 64-66 ; agreement w. nouns 
196, 197; attributive and pred. 
196 (Rem.) ; pred. adj. w. copula- 
tive vb. 194; referring to omitted 
subj. of infin. of copul. verb 194 
(N. 3), 195, of other verbs 198 
(N. 8); used as noun 198, 199; 
verbal, w. gen. 227, 228, w. accus. 
213 (N. 3); verbal in ros 150 (8), 
in τέος and réov 150 (8), 305, 306, 
235 (4). 


nom. in 


vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 
222 (2). 

Adonie verse 324 (1). 

Advantage or disadyv., dat. of 231 (8). 

Adverbial accus. 215 (2). ΄ 

Adverbs, how formed from adj. 67, 
186; from partic. 67 (N.); com- 
parison 67; rel. 79; local, from 
nouns or pron. 52; "numeral 68, 
69 ; syntax 243 ; w. gen. 220, 229 
(2); w. dat. 232 (end), 233 (top) ; 
assim. of rel. adv. to antec. 211 
(n. 3); w. article for adj. 200 (end), 
201 (top ). 

Adviaitig. vbs. of, w. dat. 230 (2). ” 

Aeolic dialect 2; forms of aor. opt. 
in Attic 153 (13) ; form of infin. 
and partic. 153 (14, 15) ; forms in 
με 170 (2). 

Age, pronom. adj. denot. 78. 


880. 


Agent, nouns denoting 182 (2) ; expr. 

after pass. by-gen. w. prep. 244 (1), 

- by dat. (esp. after pf. pass.) 234 (3), 
244 (2); w. verbals in réos by dat., 
w. verbal in réov by dat. or accus. 
235 (4), 244 (2), 305, 306. 

' Agreement, of verb w. subj. nom. 
193 (1); of adj. &c. w. noun 196 ; 
of adj. w. nouns of diff. gend. or 
numb. 197 (N. 1-3). 

Aim at, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 

1 


Aleaics and Alcaic stanza 324 (5). 

Alexandrian period 2. 

Alexandrine verse (Engl. ) 320 (end). 

Alpha: see a; privative 188 (a) ; 
copulative 188 (N. 2). 

Alphabet 5; obsolete letters 6 (N. 2). 

Anaclasis in Ion. verse 325 (2). 

Anacrusis 314 (4). 

Anapaest 313; cyclic 315 (4); in 
trochaic verse 318 ; in iambic verse 
319, 320. 

Anapaestic rhythms 322, 323; sys- 
tems 323. 

Anastrophe 20 (§ 23, 2). 

Anceps, syllaba 315 (5). 

Anger, vbs, expr. w. gen. 224 (1) ; 
w. dat. 230 (2). 

Antecedent of rel. 209-211; agree- 
ment w. 209; omitted 210; as- 
simil. of rel. to 210, of antec. to 
rel. 211 (N. 4); attraction 211, w. 
assimil. 211 (end). Definite and 
indef. antec. 274, 275. 

Antepenult 17 (top). 

Antibacchius 313. 

Antistrophe 318 (4). 

Aorist (first) 80 ; secondary tense 80 ; 
tense stem 83 (III.), 137 (111.), 
141 ; aor. in xa in three vbs. 137 
(1, N. 1); person. endings 142 (2) ; 
coun. vowel 144 (1), 145, w. end- 
ings 146; augment 84 (c), 119; 
iterat. end. cxov and σκόμην (Hom. ) 
152 (10) ; Hom. ¢ and o (for 7, w) 
in subj. 153 (12) ; accent of infin. 
act. 22 (1). Second Aorist 80 
(N. 1); tense stem 83 (V.), 140 
(V.), 141; secondary 80; pers. 
endings 142 (2); conn. vow. 144 
(1), 145, w. endings 145; augm. 
84 (c), 119; redlitgl (Hom.) 120 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


(N. 3); Att. redupl. 122 (N. 1); 
iter. endings (Ion.) 152 (10) ; 
Hom. in o 152 (8); Ion. forms in 
subj. act. of ws-forms 171 (7) ; ac- 
cent of infin. and partic. 22 and 23 
(§ 26, N. 3). Aorist Passive (first 
and second), w. act. endings 143 
(1) ; tense stems 83 (VI., VII.), 
140 and 141 (VI., VII), 141; conn. 
vowel : none in indic. 143 (8), in 
subj. and opt. 146 (N. 1), 147 (3), 
none in imperat. 149 (3) and infin. 
149 (1) ; accent of infin. and partic. 
22 and 23 (N. 3). Syntax of Aorist: 
indic. 246, disting. from impf. 247 
(N. 5), gnomic 252 (2), iterative 
253; in dependent moods 248-251; 
when not in indir. disc., how dis- 
ting. from pres. 248 (end), 249 (1), 
opt. and infin. in indir. disc. 250, 
251; infin. w. vbs. of hoping, &c. 
251 (N. 2) ; in partic. 252, aor. not 
past in certain cases 252 (N. 2), 
304 (4). Indic., in apod. w. ἄν 
254 (3), 267, 268, iterative w. ἄν 
253; in protasis 264, 265, 267, 
268 ; in rel. cond. sent. 276 (2) ; 
in wishes 290 (2) ; in final cl. 261 
(3). Opt. w. ἄν 255, 269 (2), 276 
(4). Infin. or partic. w. ἄν 255. 
Aphaeresis 11 (N. 4). 
Apodosis 263 (1); negative of (οὐ) 
- 263 (3); in past tenses of indic. 
w. ἄν 253 (end), 254 (3), 263 (2), 
264 (2), 267 (2); various forms 
in cond. sent. 264-266, 267-270 ; 
w. protasis omitted 271 (2); repres. 
by infin. or partic. 272 (3), 273 (4); 
implied in context 273 (N. 1); 
suppressed for effect 273 (N. 2); 
introd. by δέ 274 (2). 
Apostrophe (in elision) 11 (1). 
Appear, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 
304. 


Appoint, vbs. signif. to, w. two acc. 
218; w. ace. and part. gen. 221 (2). 

Apposition 195; gen. in. app. w. 
possessive 195 (N. 1) ; nom. or acc. 
in app. w. sentence 196 (N. 3); 
partitive appos. 196 (N. 2). 

Approach, vbs. implying, w. dat. 233. 

Arsis and thesis, used in sense opp. 
to the Greek 311 (foot-note). 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Article, definite, declined 71 ; τώ and 

τοῖν as fem. 71 (N. 2); rotand rai 
(Epie and Doric) 71 (N. 2); pro- 
clitic in some forms 24; in crasis 
11 (N.1); ὁ αὐτός 73 (2). Homeric 
art. as pronoun 199, w. adj. and 
partic. 199 (N. 1).~ Art. in Herod. 
-200 (N. 4); in Lyric and Attic 
poets 200 (N. 5); Attic prose use 
200, 201 ; position w. attrib. adj. 
201 (end), 202 (2), w. pred. adj. 
203 (3), w. demonstr. 203 (4) ; as 
pronoun in Attic 204 (1), 205. 

Ashamed, vbs. signif. to be, w. par- 
tic. 808 (1). 

Asking, vbs. of, w. two accus. 217. 

Aspirate, w. vowels 6 (end); w. 
mutes 8 (2), 16 (1); avoided in 
redupl. 16 (2); transferred in 
τρέφω, θρέψω, &c. 16 (2, N.) 

Assimilation of rel. to case of antec. 
210 (end), w. antec. omitted 211 
(N. 1); im rel. adv. 211 (N. 3); 
antec. rarely assim. to rel. 211 
(N. 4). See Attraction. Assim. 
of cond. rel. cl. to mood of antec. 
clause 277, 278. Assim. (Hom.) 
in vbs. in dw 154 (0). 

amar vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230 
(2). 

Attain, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 
1 


(1). 

Attic dialect 2; why basis of Gram- 
mar 2. Attic 2d decl. 33 (2); 
redupl. 122, 120 (N. 4); future 
136 (N. 1). 

. Attraction in rel. sent. 211; joined 

τς Μ, assim. 211 (end), 212 (top). | 

Attributive adjective (opp. to predi- 
cate) 196 (Rem.); position of ar- 
ticle w. 201-203. Attrib. com- 
pounds 190 (3). 

Augment 84 (c), 119-124: see Con- 
tents, p. XViil. 


Bacchius 313 ; Bacchic rhythms 326. 

Barytones 19. 

~ Basis in logaoedic verse 324. 

Be or belong, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 
221 (top). 

᾿ Become, vbs. signif, to, w. gen. 221 

(top). 


381 


Begin, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 
(1) ; w. partic. 808 (1). 

Belong, vbs. signif. to w. gen. 221 
(top). 

Benefit, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230 
2 


| Boeotia, Aeolians in 1. 

Breathings 6, 7 ; form 7 (N. 2). 

Bucolic diaeresis in Heroic hexam. 
321 (4). 


Caesura 316 (1). 

Call : see Name. 

Cardinal numbers 68-70 ; decl. of 69. 

Care for, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 — 
9 ; 


Cases 27 (3); meaning 27 (8, N. 1); 
oblique 27 (end): endings 35; 

᾿ syntax of 212-242: see Contents, 
pp- XX.—XxXii. | 

Catalexis and ecatalectic verses 316 (3). 

Causal sentences, w. conj. and indie. 
288, 289; w. opt. (ind. disc.) 289 
(N.), 288 (4) ; w. relat. 279. 

Cause, expr. by gen. 224; by dat. 
234; by partic. 300, 301 (N. 2). 

Caution or danger, vbs. of, w. μή 
262. : 

Cease or cause to cease, vbs. signif. 
to, w. partic. 303 (1). 

Choosing, vbs. of, w. two acc. 218; 
w. 860, and part. gen. 221 (2). 

Choriambus 313 ; choriambic rhythms 
325 (1). 

Circumflex accent 18; origin 18 
(Rem.); on contr. 501]. 20. 

Circumstances, partic. denot. 300, 
301. 

Claim, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 221 
(end), 222 (1). 

Classes of verbs: eight of vbs. in 
w 125-131, two of vbs. in μὲ 157. 
Close vowels 6 (N.), 10 (5); stems 

ending in 35 (top). 

Clothing, vbs. of, w. two accus. 217. 

Cognate mutes 8 (2, N.). Cognate 
aceus. 213-215. 

Collective noun, w. plur. verb 193 ᾿ 
(3); w. pl. partic. 197 (N. 8); 
foll. by pl. relat. 209 (N. 2). 

Collision of vowels, how avoided 8 


(§ 8). 


882 
Command or exhortation 290, 289 
(Ν. 3), 262 (N. 4), 272 (N. 1), 247 
(N. 8); verbs of commanding w. 
gen. 223 (9). 
Common Dialect 2. 
Comparative degree 64-67; w. gen. 
225 (1) ; w. dat. 234 (2). 
Comparison of adjectives 64, irreg. 
65, 66; of adverbs 67; of some 
nouns and pronouns 66 (3). 
Comparison, verbs denot. w. gen. 
226 (2). 
Composition of words: see Formation. 
᾿ Compound words 180, 187-190 ; first 
part of 187, second part 188; 
meaning of (three classes) 189, 
190. 
ment 123, 124; accent 22 (§ 26 
N. 1); w. gen., dat., or ace. 242 
(end), 226, 233. Compound nega- 
_ tives, 307; repetition of 309, 310. 
Concealing, vbs. of, w. two accus. 
217; w. infin. and μή 308 (6), 
295, 296. ᾿ 
Concession 272 (Ὁ), 289 (N. 8). 
Conclusion : see Apodosis and Condi- 
tion. 
Condition and conclusion 263 (1); 
conditional sentences 263-274 ; see 
Contents, pp. xxiii. and xxiv. ; 
classification of cond. sent. 263- 
267 ; general and particular cond. 
disting. 265, 266 ; comparison of 
Latin gen. cond. 266 (Rem. 1) ; 
cond. expr. by partic. 301 (4), 271 
(1). See Protasis. Relative cond. 
sent. 275-278 : see Relative. 
Conjugation 84; of verbs in ὦ 85- 
155 ; of verbs in με 156-179. 
Connecting vowel 143 (4), 144 (foot- 
note), 82 (foot-note); of indic. 
144, 145; of subj. 1463 of opt. 
147 ; of imperat. 148 ; of infin. and 
partic. 149; in iterative forms 152 


‘ 


(10); in forms in @ 152 (11) ;. 


omitted in perf. mid., aor. pass., and 
pu-forms 148. 

Consider, vbs. signif. to, w. two acc. 
218; w. acc. and gen. 221; in 
pass. w. gen. 221 (N.). 

Consonants, divisions of 7, 8; eu- 
phonic changes in 13-16; double 
7 (2); movable 12; consonant 


Compound verbs 189 ; aug- |. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


stems 82 (3), 35. Consonant de- 
clension (Third) 35. 

Constructio praegnans 242 (N. 6). 

Continue, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 
303 (1). 

Continued action, tenses of 246. 

Contraction 8 ; rules of, 8-10 ; quan- 
tity of contr. syll. 18 (§ 20, 1); 
accent 20; of nouns: Ist decl. 30, 
2d decl. 33, 8d decl. 42-47; of 
adject. 54-58; of partic. 61, 62; 
of verbs in aw, ew, and ow 115- 
118; in gen. pl. of 1st decl. 29 
(N.), of 2d deel. 32 (top); in redupl. 
(ee to ec) 123 (top); in forma- 
tion of words 181 (N. 3), 188 (3). 
See Crasis and Synizesis. 

Convicting, vbs. of, w. gen. 224 (2). 

Co-ordinate and cognate mutes 8 (2, 
N.). 

Copula 191 (N. 1). 

Copulative verbs 194 (Rem.); case of 
pred. adj. or noun with infin. of 
194 (N. 3), 195 (N. 4, 5). 

Coronis 10 (1). 

Correlative pronominal adj. 78; adv. 
79. 

Crasis 10, 11; examples 11; quanti- 
ty 18 (§ 20, 1); accent 20 (2). 

Cretic 313; rhythms 326. 

Cyclic anapaests and dactyls 315 (4). 


Dactyl 313; cyclic 315 ; in anapaes- 
tic verse 322, 314 (N. 1); in iam- 
bic verse (apparent) 319; 320; in 
trochaic verse (cyclic) 318 ; in loga- 
oedic verse (cyclic) 323, 324 

Dactylic rhythms 321, 322. 

Danger, vbs. of, w, μή 262. 

Dative case 27 (3) ; endings of 35, 
28, 32; in 3d decl. 39; syntax of 
230-236: see Contents, p. xxi. 
Prepositions w. dative 242 (2). 

Declension 28; of Nouns 28-52: 
first 28-31, second 31-34, third 
34-49, of irreg. nouns 49-52; of 
Adjectives 53-63, first and second: 
decl. 538-56; third 56, 57, first and 
third 57-59; of partic. 59-62; of 
irreg. adj. 62, 63; of the Article 71 ;. 
of Pronouns 71-78. See Contents, 
pp. xvi., xvii. . 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


κα eae 


Defend, vbs. dignit, to, w. dat. 230 


pce! of difference, dat. of 234 (2). 

Demanding, vbs. of, w. two ace. 217. 

Demes, names of Attic, in dat. 236 
(N. 1). 

Demonstrative pronouns 74, 75; 

᾿ synt. 208; w. article 200 (0), posi- 
tion 203 (4) ; article as demonstr. 


(Hom.) 199, ‘(Att.) 204, 205; rel. 
as dem. 209 (N. 3). 
Denominatives 180 (Ὁ); denom. 


verbs 186. 

Denying, vbs. of, w. infin. and μή 
308 (6), 295, 296. 

Dependent clauses, moods in των 
Dependent moods 80 (ὃ 89, N.); 
tenses of 248-251. 

Deponent verbs 80 (top); ΦΈΡΟΝ 
parts of 84 (6); pass. and mid. 
depon. 80 (2, N.). 

Deprive, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 225; 
w. two ace. 217. 

Derivatives 180 (0). 

Desiderative verbs 186 (N. 1). 

Desire, vbs. expr. w. gen. 222 (2). 

sr vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 
(2 


Determinative compounds 190 (2). 

Diaeresis in verse 316, 317, 319 (end), 
321 (4), 322 (top), 323 (4). 

Dialects 2; dialectic changes 25 ; 
dial. forms of nouns and adj. 31, 
34, 48 (N. 4), 44 (N. 3), 45 (N. 4), 
46 (N.), 47 (N. 3); of numerals 69; 
of the article 71 (N. 2); of pro- 
nouns 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78; 
of verbs in w 151-153, of contract 
vbs. 154, 155, of vbs. in we 170- 
172, 173, 174, 176, 177, 178, 179. 

Digamma 6 (Ν. 2), 45 (N. 1), 46 (N.), 
123 (N. 2), 126 (2), 139 (ὦ, N. 1); 
seen in metre 322 (1st note). 

Diiambus 313. 

Dimeter 317 (2); anapaestic 323, 
dactylic 321 (1), iambic 319 (2), 
trochaic 318 (1). 

Diminutives, suffixes of 184 (8). 

Diphthongs 6 ; improper 6 (3 and N.); 
in contraction 9 (1, 4); in crasis 
10 (a), 11 (Ὁ) ; elision of (poet.) 12 
(top) ; augment 122. 

Dipody 317 (2). - 


883 


Direct object 191 (2), 213 (Rem.) ; 
of act. verb 213, 244. Direct dis- 
course, question, and quotations 
pi es 

Disadvantage, dat. of 231 (3). 

Disobey, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230 
(2). 


peer vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230 


Displeased, vbs. signif. to be, w. par- 
tic. 308 (1). 

Dispraise, vbs. expr., w. gen. 224 (1); 

Disputing, vbs. of, w. gen. 224 (N. 2). 

Distich 318 (4) ; elegiac 321 (5). 

Distrusting, vbs. of, w. dat. 230 (2) ; 
w. infin. and μή 308 (6), 295, 296. 

Ditrochee 818; in Ionic rhythms 325 
(2). ι 

Divide, vbs. signif. to, w. two ace. 
217. 

Dochmius 313; dochmiac verses 326. 

Doing, vbs. of, w. two ace. 217. 

Doric dialect 2; future 152 (6), in 
Attic 136 (N. 2). 

Double consonants 7,14 (2), 17 (ὃ 19, 
2). : 

Double negatives 309, 310, 292, 295, 
$96. See μὴ οὐ and οὐ μή. 

Doubtful vowels 6. 

Dual 26 (end). 


| Effect, accus. of 214 (N. 3.). 


Elegiac pentameter and distich 321 
5 


(5). 

Elision 11, 12; of diphthongs 12 (top); 
περί, πρό, ὅτι, and dat. in « not 
elided 12; accent of elided word 20 


(3). 

Ellipsis of verb w. ἄν 256 (8); of σκόπει 
w. ὅπως and fut. ind. 262 (N. 4); 
of vb. of fearing w. μή and subj. 
262 (N. 2); of protasis 271 (2); of 
apodosis 273 (N. 2). 

Emotions, vbs. expr., w. gen. 224 (1). 

Enclitics 23, 24: ALG accent if em- 
phatic 24 (3, N. 1); at end of 
compounds 24 (N. 3) ; successive 
encl. 24 (N. 2). 

Endings 26 (2); case-endings of 
nouns, 28, 32, 35; local 52; per- 
sonal endings of verbs 142-150: 
see Contents, p. xviii. 


384 


Endure, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 
wei. 

Enjoy, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 221 
(end). 

Envy, vbs. expr., w. gen. 224 (1); 
w. dat. 230 (2). 

Epic dialect 2. 

Epicene nouns 27 (2, N. 2). 

Ethical dative 232 (N. 6). 

Euphony of vowels 8-12; of conso- 
nants 13-16. 

Eupolidean verse 317 (1st N.), 325 (7). 

Exclamations, nom. in 213 (N.), voe. 
213 (2), gen. 225 (3); relat. in 

- 212; mark of 25. 

Exhorting, vbs. of, w. dat. 230 (2). 
Exhortations : see Commands. - 
Expecting, &c., vbs. of, w. fut. pres. 

or aor. infin. 251 (n. 2). 
Extent, accus. of 216; adnom. gen. 
denoting 219 (5). 


Falling rhythms, 317 (8). 

Fearing, verbs of, w. μή and subj. or 
opt. 259, 262, sometimes w. fut. 
ind. 262 (N. 1), w. pres. or past 
tense of indic. 262 (N. 3) ; ellipsis 
of 262 (N. 2). 

Feet (in verse) 311, 312, 313; ictus 
of, 311; arsis and thesis, 311. 

Feminine nouns 27 (N. 3) ; form in 


participles 149 (end), in 2 pf. par- |. 


tic. (Hom.) 139 (N.4). Feminine 
caesura 321 (4). 

Festivals, names of, in dat. of time 
235. 

Fill, vbs. signif. to, w. acc. and gen. 
223 (2). 

Final clauses 259-261, w. -subj. and 
opt. 260 (1), w. subj. after past 
tenses 260 (2), rarely w. fut. ind. 
260 (1, N. 1); w. ἄν or xe 260 (1, 
N. 2); w. past tenses of indic. 
261 (3) ; neg. μή 260 (top). Final 
disting. from object clauses 259. 

Find, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 303 
2 


(2). 

Finite moods, 80 (N.). 

ες First aorist stem, 83, 137. 

First passive stem, 83, 140. 

Fitness, &c., verbal adj. denot., for- 
mation of, 185 (13). 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Forbidding, vbs. of, w. μή and infin. 
308 (6), 295, 296. 

Forgetting, vbs. of, w. gen. 222 (2) ; 
w. partic, 304 (end). 

Formation of words 180-190; see 
Contents, p. xix. 

eee vbs. expr. ; w. dat. 230 

A 

Fulness and want, vbs. expr., w. 
gen. 223 ; adject. 228 (top). Ful- 
ness, formation of adj. expr. 185 
(15). 

Future 80, 82; tense stem formed 
82, 135 (II.) ; of liquid verbs 136 
(2); Attic fut. in ὦ and -οῦμαι 136 
(N. 1); Doric fut. 152 (6), in Attic 
136 (N. 2); second fut. pass. 141; 
fut. mid. as pass. 246 (N. 4). Fut. 
indice. expressing permission or 
command 247 (N. 8); rarely in 
final clauses 260 (N.1) ; regularly 
in object clauses with ὅπως 261 ; 
rarely with μή after verbs of fear- 
ing 262 (N. 1); in protasis 265, 
269 (N. 1), 267 (N.); in rel. 
clauses expressing purpose 278 ; 
with ἐφ᾽ ᾧ or ἐφ᾽ gre 278 (N. 2) ; 
with οὐ μή 292; with ἄν (Hom.) 
254 ; periphrastic fut. with μέλλω 
151 (6), 250.(N.); optative 250 
(4), 251 (N. 8), 261 (§ 217), never 
w. dy 255 (N.); infin. 250 (3 and 
N.), 251 (N. 2), 285; partic. 252, 
285, 300 (3). 

Future perfect 80, 83; tense stem 
formed 88, 189 (c); active form 
in 2 vbs. 139 (c, N. 2), gen. peri- 
phrastic 151 (3) ; meaning of 246, 
as emph. fut. 247 (N. 9). 

Gender, natural and grammatical 27 
(2, N. 1); mmat. design. by 
article 27 (2, x 1) ; common and 
epicene 27 (2, N. 2) ; general rules 
27 (N.3); gen. of Ist decl. 28, of 
2d 31, of 3d 49; gen. of adjectives 
197 en 


General disting. from particular sup- 
positions 265, 266 ; forms of 270, 
276; w. indic. 270 (N. 2), 277 
(N. 1) ; in Latin 266 (Rem. 1). 

Genitive case 27 (3) ; accent 21, 22 ; 
of 1st decl. 28-31 ; of 2d decl. 32- 
34; of 3d decl. 35, 42 (1, N.), 44 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


(N. 2) ; syntax 218 (Rem.), 219- 
229: see Contents p. XX., XXi. ; 
gen. absol. 229, 302; gen. of infin, 
w. τοῦ 295; pred. gen. w. infin. 
194 (end) 195, 198 (N. 8). 

Gentile nouns, suffixes of 184 (10), 
185 (top). 

Glyconic verse 324 (4). 

Gnomic tenses 252, 253 ; present 252 
(1); aorist 252 (2), 253, 248(Rem.), 
in infin., opt., and partic. 253 
(N. 3); perfect 253 (3). 

Grave accent 18, 19; for acute in 
oxytones 20 (top). 


Hear, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 (2) ; 
w. partic. 304. 

Hellenes 1. 

Hellenistic Greek 2 (end). 

Herodotus, dialect of 2. 

Heroic hexameter 321 (4). 

Heteroclites 49 (end). 

Heterogeneous nouns 50 (2). 

Hexameter 317 (2) ; Heroic 321 (4). 

Hiatus, how avoided 8 (§ 8) ; allowed 
at end of verse 316 (c). 

Hindrance, vbs. of, w. μή and infin. 
808 (6), 295, 296. 

Hippocrates, dialect of 2. 

Historic present 246 (N. 1), 248 
(Rem. ). 

Histgrical (or secondary) tenses : see 

ndary. 

bs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 (1). 

d, vbs. signif. to take hold of, w. 
gen. 222 (1). 

Homer, dialect of 2; verse of 321 
(4) ; Hellenes of 1 (end). 

Hoping, &c., vbs. of, w. fut., pres., 
or aor. infin. 251 (n. 2). 

Hostility, vbs. expr.; w. dat. 230 (2). 

Hypothetical: see Conditional. 


lambus 313. TIambic rhythms 319, 
320; tragic and comic iambic trim- 
eter 320; iambic systems 323 
(N.). 

Imperative 80; pers. endings and 
conn, vowels 148, 149; of verbs 
in μὲ 156 (end) ; syntax 258; in 
commands 290 ; in prohib. w. μή 


385 


(pres.) 291 ; w. ἄγε, φέρε, ἴθι, 291 
(top); after οἶσθ᾽ ὅ 290 (N.); per- 
fect 249 (N. 1), 85 (end). 

Imperfect tense 80; secondary 80 ; 
from present stem 82 (I.), 135 (I.) ; 
augment 84 (c), 119 ; person. end- 
ings. 142 (2); conn. vowel 144 
(1), 145, w. endings 145; μι- 
forms 156, 157 (end) ; iterat. end- 
ings oxov and σκομὴν (lon.) 152 
(10), 268 (Ν.). Syntax 246 ; how 
disting. from aor. 247 (N. 5); de- 
noting attempted action 246 (N. 
2); how expr. in infin. and partic. 
251 (N. 1), 252 (N. 1), 285, in 
opt. (rarely) 283 (N. 1); w. ay 
254 (3), 267, 268, iterative w. dv 
253; in conditions 264, 267, in 
Homer 268 (N. 3); in rel. cond. 
sentences 276 (2); in wishes 290 
(2); in final clauses 261 (3). 

Impersonal verbs 192 (ὁ, d), 198 
(N. 2) ; partic. of, in accus. abs. 
302 (2); impers. verbal in -τέον 
306 (top). 

Improper diphthongs 6. 

Inceptive class of verbs (VI.) 129, 
130 (N. 4). : 

Inclination, formation of adj. denot- 
ing 185 (16). 

Indeclinable nouns 50 (4). 

Indefinite pronouns 76, 209; pro- 
nominal adj. 78, . adverbs 79. 

Indicative 80 ; personal endings and 
formation 142-145; connect. vow- 
els 144, 145; tenses οἵ 246, 247, 
_primary and secondary (or histori- 
cal) 248, General use of 256, 257; 
in final clauses: rarely fut. 260 
(N. 1), second. tenses 261 (3); in 
object cl. w. ὅπως (fut.) 261 ; after 
verbs of fearing w. μή : rarely 
fut. 262 (N. 1), pres. and past — 
tenses 262 (end); in protasis : 
pres. and past tenses 264 (1), 267 
(1), in gen. suppos. for subj. 270 
(end) ; future 265 (1), 269 (N. 1), 
267 (N.) ; second. tenses in supp. 
contr. to fact 264 (2), 267; in 
cond. rel. and temp. clauses 276, 
277, by assimilation 278 (2); 
in apodosis 267, 269, second. 
tenses w. dv 254 (3), 264 (2), 267, 


886 ENGLISH 


268 ; potential indic. w. ἄν act 
in wishes (second. tenses) 290 ; 
causal sent. 288 ; in rel. sent. of 
purpose (fut.) 278 ; fut. w. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ 
or ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε 278 (N. 2) : ; W. ἕως, &c. 
279 ; w. πρίν 280 ; inindirect quo- 
tations and questions 281-283 ; 
future w. οὐ μή 292. See Present, 
Future, Aorist, &c. 

Indirect compounds (verbs) 189 (7), 
124. Indir. object of verb 191 
(end), 213 (Rem.), 230. Indirect 
Discourse 250 (Rem.), 281-288 : 
see Contents, p. xxv. Indir. quo- 
tations and questions 281, 306, 
307. Indir. reflexives 205, 206. 

Inferiority, vbs. expr., w. gen. 226 

2). 

ees 80; endings 149; ~u-forms 
157 (e); syntax 292-299: see Con- 
tents, p. xxvi. Tenses of, not in 
indir. dise. 248, 249, in indir. disc. 
250, . 251, distinction of the two 
uses 285 (N.); impf. and ἘᾺΝ 
suppl. by pres. and pf. 251 iL); 
w. dv 255; gnomic aor. Ἔ 253 

ΘΝ; ), perf. “253 (3); w. μέλλω 

_ 151 (6), 250 (N.); w. ὥφελον in 
wishes (poet.) 290 (N. 1, 2); nega- 
tive of 308 (3), μὴ od with 309 
(7), 295 (N.), 296 (N.). Rel. w. 
infin. 294 (top). 

Inflection 26. ᾿ 

Instrument, dat. of 234; suffixes de: 
noting 183 (5). 

Intensive pronoun 72 (N . 1), 206 
(1); w. dat. of accompaniment 235 
(5, N.). 

Intention, partic. expr. 300. 

Interchange of quantity 33 (N. 2), 
45 (N. 1). 

Interest, dative of 231, 232. 

Interrogative pronoun 76, 208; pron. 
adj. 78; adverbs 79; sentences 
306, 807; subjunctive 291, 284. 

Intransitive verbs 192 (top); cognate 
object of 213; verbs both trans. 
and intrans. 243 (Notes). 

st oon assimilation of relatives 211 

. 4). 

Tonic race and dialect 1, 2. 
feet 313, rhythms 325. 

Jota class of verbs (IV.) 126-128. 


Tonic 


INDEX. ἢ 


Iota subscript 6 (8 3, N.), 

n/ Irregular nouns 49-52; adjectives 
62, 63, comparison 65, 66; verbs 
130, 131 (Rem.). 

Italy, Dorians of 1. 

Iterative imperf. and aorist w. ἄν 
253; origin of 253 (Rem.). Itera- 
tive forms in σκον, σκόμην (Lon.) 
152 (10); w. ἄν 253 (N.) 

Ithyphallic verse 319 (top). 


Know, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 804. 
Koppa, as numeral 6, 68. 


Labials 7 ; labial mutes 8 ; euphonic 
changes of 14 (1, 2, 3) ; euph. ch. 
of ν before 15 (5); labial verb 
stems 82 (3); 126 (III.), 127, in 
perf. act. 138 (0). 

Learn, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 304. 

Letters 5 ; used for numbers 70 (N. 4). 

Likeness, dat. of 288 ; abvidged 
expr. w. adject. of 233 (N. 2). 

Linguals 7; lingual mutes 8; eu- 
phon. changes of 14 (1, 2, 3), ν Ww. 
ving. dropped bef. ¢ 15 (N. 1); ling. 

stems 82 (3), 127 (0). 

Liquids 7, 8; ν Mi 15 (6); w 
in stems 16 (top); vowel bef. 
mute and liquid 17 (8) ; liquid 
verb stems 82 (3), 127 (2), 128, 
future of 136 (2), aorist of 137 (2), 
133 (5), change of ε to a in mono- 
syll. 133 (4). 

Local endings 52. 

Locative case 52 ( 
230 (Rem). 

Logaoedic rhythms 323-325. 

Long vowels, 17, 18 ; how augmented 
120 (N. 1). 


N. 2), 212 (Rem:), 


Make, vbs. signif. to, w. two ace. 218 ; 
w. acc. and gen. 221 ; in pass, w. 
gen. 221 (N.) 

Manner, dative of 234 (1), w. com- 


par. 234 (2); partic. of 300. 
Masculine nouns 27 (N. 3): see Gen- 
der. 
Material, adj. denoting 185 (14); 


gen. of 219 (4). 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Means, dative of 234; partic. of 
300 ; suffixes denoting 183 (5). 

Measure, gen. of 219 (5). 

Metathesis 13, 134 (a), 138 (5). 

Metre 312 (top) ; related to rhythm 
312 (N.) 

M.-forms 156 (Rem.); enumeration 
of 168-170. See Contents, p. 
xviii. 

Middle mutes 8 (2), 17 (end). 

Middle voice 79 (end) endings 142 ; 
conn. vowels 144, w. endings 145 ; 
three uses 245 ; in causative sense 

.245 (N. 2); peculiar meaning of 
245 (N. 3) ; fut. in pass. sense 246 
(N. 4). 

Miss, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 (1). 

Mixed class of verbs (Υ 111.) 130, 131; 
mixed forms of conditional sen- 
tence 273. 

Modern Greek 3, 


-_ Molossus 313. 


Monometer 317. 

Moods 80; finite 80 (N.); depend- 
ent 80 (N.); general uses of 256- 

258; constructions of (i.-viii.) 
259-292 ; see Contents, pp. xxiii.— 
ΧΧΥΪ. 

Movable consonants 12. 

Mutes 8; co-ordinate and cognate 8 
(2); euphonic changes of 14, 15; 
vowel before mute and liquid 17 
(3); mute verb stems 82 (3), 125 
(II.), 126, 127, fut. of 185 (1), aor. 
of 187 (1), perf. act. of 138 (0). 


Name or call, vbs. signif. to, w. two 
ace. 218; w. acc. and gen. 221; 
in pass. w. gen. 221 (N.). 

Nasals 7, 8 (top). 

Nature, vowel long or short by 17. 

Negatives 8307-310: see Ov and Μή. 

Neglect, vbs. signif., w. gen. 222 (2). 

Neuter gender 27 (2): see Gender. 
Neuter plur. w. sing. verb. 193 (2) ; 
neut. pred. adj. 197 (N. 2, c); 
neut. sing. of adj. w. art. 199 (2) ; 
neut. adj. as cognate accus. 214 
(N. 2), 244 (end); neut. accus. of 
adj. as adverb 67; neut. partic. of 
impers. vbs. in accus. absol. 302 
(2); verbal in réov 306. 


887 


Nominative case 26; singular of 3d 
decl. formed 36, 37 ; subj. nom. 
193, 212; pred. nom. 194, w. in- 
fin. 194 (end), 195 (N. 4), 198 
(N. 8); in exclam. like voc. 213 
(N.); in appos. w. sentence 196 
(N. 3); infin. as nom. 293, 198 
(N. 2). Plur. nom., gener. neut., 
w. sing. verb 193 (2), rarely masc. 
or fem. 194 (N. 5), 210 (N. 2). 
Sing. nom. w. plur. verb: of col- 
lect. noun 198 (8), of relative 209 
(N. 2). 

Nouns 28-52: see Contents, p. xvi. 

Number 26; of adject., peculiarities 
in agreement 197. 

Numerals 68-70. 


- 
. 


Obey, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230 (2). 

Object, defined 191 (end) ; direct and 
indirect 191, 213 (Rem.); direct 
obj. (accus.) 213, as subj. of pass. 
244; indirect obj. (dat.) 230- 
232; gen. as object of verb 218, 
of noun 219 (3), of adject. 227, 
228; double obj. acc. 217. Ob- 
ject of motion, by accus. w. pre- 
pos. 230 (Rem.), 241 (N. 1), by. 
accus. alone (poetic) 216. 

Objective genitive 219 (3). Objec- 
tive compounds 189 (1). « 

Oblique cases 27 (end). 

Omission of augment 124; of subj. 
nom. 192 (N. 1) ; of subj. of infin. 
192 (3), 194 (end), 198 (N. 8); 
of antecedent of rel. 210; of μά in 
oaths 216 (end) ; of ἄν in apod. 
w. indic. 268 (N. 1), w. opt. 270 
(N. 1); of protasis 271 (2); of 
apodosis 273 (N.2). See Ellipsis. 

Open vowels 6 (8 2, N.) ; in contrac- 
tion 9 (top). 

Optative 80; pers. endings and for- 
mation 146-148 ; Aeolic forms in 
aor. act. (Attic) 153 (13); Ionic 
-aro for -vro 151 (end); peculiar 
pu-forms 158 (top); in verbs in 
νυμι 158 (N. 5) ; periphr. forms of 
perf. 150 (1, 2), 85 (end). / Tenses: 
not in indir. diseourse, pres. and 
aor. 248 (end), 249 (1), perf. 249 
(2), never fut. 250 (4); im indir. 


588 
disc. 250, 251, future 251 (N. 3), 
261 ; how far disting. as primary 
and secondary 248 (N. 2). General 
uses of opt. 258 (3); in final 
clauses 260 (1); in obj. cl. w. 
ὅπως (sometimes fut.) 261; w. μή 
after vbs. of fearing 262 ; in prot- 
asis 265 (2), 269 (2), in gen. 
suppos. 266 (b), 270; in apod. w. 
ἄν 255, 269 (2), rarely without ἄν 
270 (N. 1), w. ἄν without protasis 
expressed 271 (2), potential opt. 
272 (6); in cond. rel. sent. (as in 
protasis) 276 (4), in gen. suppos. 
276 (end), by assimilation 277 (1); 
w. ἕως, &c., wntil 279, w. πρίν 280; 
indirect discourse: w. ὅτι or ws 


282, 283, w. dv (retained) . 284 |- 


(end); in dependent clauses of 285, 
286; in any dependent clause expr. 
past thought 287; in causal sen- 
tences 289 (N.); in wishes, alone 
or w. εἴθε or εἰ γάρ 289 (1), w. εἰ 
alone 289 (N. 1), w. ws (poetic) 
289 (N. 2), expr. concession, ὅζο. 
.(Hom.) 289 (N. 3). Future only 
in indir. discourse 251 (N. 3), or 
in obj. cl. w. ὅπως (involving ind. 

. dise.) 261, rare in rel. cl. of 
purpose 278 (N. 3); never w. ἄν 

. 255 (N.). 

Oratio obliqua: see Indirect Dis- 
course. 

Ordinal numerals 68. | 

Overlook, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 
303 (3). 

Oxytones 19. 


Paeons 313 (6) ; in Cretie rhythms 
326 (3). 


Palatals 7-; as mutes 8 (2) ; euphonic 


changes of 14 (1, 2, 3); ν before 

_ 15 (5): pal. verb stems 82 (3), 
126 (a), 127 (N. 1), in perf. act. 
138 (d). 

Paroemiac verse 323 (3). 

Paroxytone 19, 

Participle 80; formation 149; de- 
clension 53 (end), 59-62; Doric 
and Aeol. forms 153 (15); of 
uc-form 157 (7), 167 (1), 172 (10), 
2 perf. in aws or eds 62 (N.), 139 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


(N. 2, 3); accent 22 (end), 23 

(top). Tenses 252; pres. as im- 

perf. 252 (N. 1); aor. w. λανθάνω, 

τυγχάνω, φθάνω, not past 304 (4), 

252 (N. 2); partic. w. dua, μεταξύ, 

εὐθύς, &c. 801 (N. 1, a), w. καίπερ 

or καί 301 (N.1, 0), νυ. ὡς 301 (N. 2, 

a), 305 (N. 4), w. dre, οἷον, ofa, 801 

(N. 2, δ), w. ὥσπερ 302 (N. 3) ; fut. 

of purpose 300 (3) ; conditional 

301 (4), 271 (1); as apodosis 272 

(3), w. ἄν 273 (top), 255, 256; 

perf. w. ἔχω forming periphr. 

perf. 303 (Ν. 2), w. εἰμί forming 

periphr. perf. subj. and opt. 150 

(1, 2) or indice. 151 (4); in gen. 

absol. 229, 302 (1), accus. abs, 302 

(2); partic. alone in gen. abs. 302 

(1, N.); plur. w. sing. collective 

noun 197 (N. 3). Three uses of 

partic. 299; for details of these, 

in pp. 300-305, see Contents, p. 

XXVIi. 

Particular and general suppositions 
distinguished 265, 266. 

Partitive genitive 219 (6), 220, 221, 
222. Partitive apposition’ 196 
(N. 2. 

Passive voice 79 (1); personal end- 
ings 142; conn. vowels 144, w. 
endings 145; aor. pass. formed 
like active 142 (1); use of 243- 
245 ; subject of 244; retains one 
object from active constr. 244 (N. 
2); impersonal pass. constr. 244 
(end), 245 (top), 192 (end). 

Patronymics, suffixes of 184 (9). 

Pause in verse: caesura 316 (1), 
diaeresis 316 (end), 317. 

Pentameter, elegiac 321 (end), 322+ 

Penthemim (24 feet) 322 (top}. 

Penult 17 (top). 

Perceive, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 
(2);.w. partic. 303 (2and N.), 304 
(end). 

Perfect tense 80; primary 80 (2); 
tense stem 83, 187-139; personal 
ending 142; connect. vowel 144, 
145, w. endings 145 (2); changes 
in vowel of stem 131-134 ; augment 
120, 121; Att. reduplic. 122; sec- 
ond perf. 80 (N. 1), 83, 132 (3), 
139 (d), of the ju-form 167, 169, 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


170; perf. mid. w. o inserted 132 
(2); perf. in Homer 139 (top). 

_ Perf. indic. 246; as pres. 247 (N. 
6); w. fut. meaning 247 (N. 7); 
never w. ἄν 254 (1); gnomic 253 
(3); compound form 151 (4); 3 
pers. pl. mid. in αται (for νται) 151 
(end) ; compound form 151 (4, 5), 
111 (2). In dependent moods: 
not in indir. disc. 249 (2), imperat. 
249 (N. 1), infin. 249 (N. 2); opt., 
infin., and partic. in indirect dise. 
250, 251, 281 ; infin. includes plpf. 

. 251 (N.1), w. ἄν 255 (end) ; com- 
‘pound form of pf. subj. and opt. 
150 (1, 2), 85 (end). 

Perfect active stem 83, 138 (0). 

Perfect middle stem 83, 137 (end), 

- 138. 

Periphrastic forms, of perf. 150 (1, 
2), 151 (4, 5); of fut. w. μέλλω 
151 (6), 250 (N.); of fut. perf. 151 
(3) 


Perispomena 19. 
Persevere, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 
303 (1). 


Person of verb 81 (top); agreement |. 


w. subj. in 193 (1) ; subj. of first 
or second pers. omitted 192 (N. 1), 
third person 192 (N. 1); p. of rel. 
pron. 209 (N. 1). See Personal 
Endings. Personal endings of 
verb 142-151: see Contents, p. 
xviii. 


Personal pronoun 71-73, 205, 206 :} 


omitted 192 (N. 1); of third pers. 
in Attic 205 (a), in Hom. and Hdt. 
205 (b); substituted for rel. 212 
(§ 156). 

Pherecratic verses 924, 

Pity, vbs. expr. w. gen. 224 (1). 

Place, suffixes denoting 183 (6); ad- 
verbs of 79, 52, w. gen. 229 (2); 
accus. of (whither?) 216; gen. of 
(within which) 227 (2); dat. of 
(where ?) 236. 

Please, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230(2). 

Pleased, vbs. signif. to be, w. partic. 
808 (1). 

Pluperfect 80; formation from perf. 

- stem 83 (LV.), 137-139: see Per- 
fect; endings 142; conn. vowel 
145 (top), w. endings 145 (2); in - 


889 


for -ew 146 (N. 4); Ion. form in -ea 
152 (4); augment 121 (4); Att- 
redupl. 122 (N. 2); second plpf. 80 

Ο(Ν. 1), 83, 182 (3), 139 (d), of the 
pe-form 167, 169, 170; secondary 
tense 80 (ὃ 90, 2), 248 ; as impf. 247 
(N. 6), in protasis 256, 257 (top), 
267 (1), w. suppos. contr. to fact 
267 (2), how disting. from impf. 
and aor. 268 (top) ; w. ἄν 254 (3), 
267 (2); expr. in infin. by perf. 
251 (N. 1), inf. w. dv 255 (end); 
compound form w. εἰμί 151 (4). 

Plural 26 (end); neut. w. sing. verb 
193 (2); verb w. sing. collect. noun 
193 (3); adj. or relat. w. several 
sing. nouns 197, 209 (N. 2, a); 
plur. antec. of ὅστις 209 (N. 2, 6). 

Position, vowels long by 17. 

Possession, gen. of 219 (1), 221 (top) ; 
dat. of 232 (4). 

Possessive pronouns 74, 207 ; w. ar- 
ticle 200 (c), 202 (top). Possessive 
compounds 190 (3). Our own, 
your own, &c. 207 (N. 4). 

ys opt. and indic. w. ἄν 272 
(ὁ ᾿ 


Praise, vbs, expr., w. gen. 224 (1). - 

Predicate 191 (1); pred. noun and 
adj. w. verbs 194, 195, 198 (Ν. 8); 
noun without article 201 (N. 8); 
pred. adject. 196 (Rem.), 197 (N. 2; 
7), 198 (N. 8), position of w. art. 
203 (8); pred. accus. w. obj. acc. 
218 ; infin. as pred. 292. 

Prepositions, w. gen.,dat., and accus. 
236-242 ; accent when elided 20 
(end); anastrophe 20 (§ 23, 2), 
242 ; tmesis 241 (N. 3); augment " 
of comp. verbs 123, 124; prep. as 
adv. 236, 241 (N. 2), 242 (N. 5); 
in comp. w. gen., dat., or ace. 242 
(end), 226, 233; w. rel. by as- 
simil. 211 (N. 1); w. infin. 295 
(top). 

Present stem 82 (I.), 85, 156, 157; 
formation 125-131. 

Present tense 80 (1); primary, 80, 
248; formation 125-131; endings 
142; connect. vowel 144 (1), w. 
endings 145 (2); of mui-form 156, 
157. Pres. indice. 246; historic 
(for aor.) 246 (N. 1), 248 (Rem.) ; 


390 


gnomic 252 (1); expr. attempt 
246 (N. 2); of ἥκω and οἴχομαι as 
erf. 246 (end); of εἶμι as fut. 247 
top); w. πάλαι, &c. 247 (N. 4); 
never w. ἄν 254. Pres. in depend- 
ent moods: not in indirect disc. 

how disting. from aor. 249 (1), 

from perf. 249 (2) ; in indir. disc., 

opt. and infin. 250 (end), pres. for 
impf. in opt., infin., and partic. 

283 (N.1), 251 (N.1), 252 (N. 1), 

285. 

, Price, genitive of 227. 

Primary or principal tenses 80 (2), 
248 ; how far recogn. in dependent 
moods 248 (N. 2). 

Primitive word 180 (2).° 

Principal parts of verbs 83 (5), of 
deponents 84 (6). 

Proclities 24. 

Prohibitions w. μή 291; w. οὐ μή 292 
(N.). 

Promising, verbs of, w. fut., pres., or 
aor. infin. 251 (N. 2). 

Pronominal adj. and adv. 78, 79. 

Pronouns 71-79, 205-212: see Con- 
tents, pp. Xvii., xix. ; some encli- 
tic 23 (1, 2), accent retained after 
accented prepos. 24 (N.1). See 
Personal, Relative, &c. 

Pronunciation: see Preface, pp. x.—xil. 

Proparoxytones 19. 

Prosecute, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 
294 (3). 

Protasis 263; forms of 263-267 ; 
expr. in partic., adv., &c. 271 (1) ; 
omitted 271 (2). In cond. rel. and 
tempor. sentences 275 ; forms 275- 
277. 

Prove, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 304 
(end). 

Punctuation marks 25. 

Pure syllables 17 (§ 18, 2); verbs 
82 (N.). 

Purpose : expr. by final clause 259 ; 
by rel. cl. w. fut. indic. 278, in 
Hom. by subj. 278 (N. 1); im- 
plied in cl. w. ἕως, πρίν, &c. 280 

-  (N. 2); by infin. 296 (end); by 
. ἐφ᾽ Bor ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε w. infin. 297 (end); 

by fut. partic. 300 (3) ; sometimes 

by gen. 224 (N. 1), by gen. of infin. 

295 (2). 


ENGLISH 


INDEX. 


Quality, nouns denot, 183 (7). 

Quantity of syllables 17 ; relation to 
rhythm 312 (N.). 

Questions, direct and indirect disting. 
281; direct 306, 307, of doubt, w. 
subj. 291; indirect, w. indic. or 
4s 281, 282, 283, w. subj. or opt. 


Recessive accent 19 (8). 

Reciprocal pronoun 74 ; reflexive used 
for 207 (N. 3). 

Reduplication, of perf. stem 84 (c), 
119 (c), 120, 121; of 2 aor. 120 
(N. 3), 134 (c) ; of present 134 (c), 
129 (end), in verbs in μὲ 157 (8), 
168 (2); in plpf. 121 (4). Attic 
redupl. in perf. 122, in 2 aor. 120 
(N. 4), in pres. (of ἀραρίσκω) 129 
(end). 

Retlexive pronouns 73, 206 ; used for 
reciprocal 207 (N. 3) ; 3d pers. for 
Ist or 2nd 207 (N. 2). Indirect 
reflexives 205 (a), 206 (end). 

Relation, adject. denoting 185 (12). 

Relative pronouns 77, Homer. forms 
78 (top); pronom: adj. 78, ad- 
verbs 79; relation to antecedent 
209 ; antec. om. 210; assimilation 
of rel. to case of antec. 210, 211, 
of antec. to case of rel. 211 (N. 4); 
assim. in rel. adv. 211 (N. 3); 
attraction of antec. 211, joined w. 
assim. 211 (N.); rel. not repeated 
212 ; rel. as demonstr. 209 (N. 8) ; 
in exclam. 212. Relative and tem- 
poral sentences 274-281 : see Con- 
tents, pp. XXiV., XXV. 

Release, vbs. signif. to w. gen. 225. 

Remember, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 
222 (2); w. partic. 304. 

Reminding, vbs. of, w. two acc. 217; 
w. ace. and gen. 223 (N. 8). 

Remove, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 225. 

Repent, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 303 
] 


Represent, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 
303 (2). 

Reproach, vbs, expr., w. dat. 230 (2). 
Resemblance, vbs. implying, w. dat. 
233. 

Respect, dative of 232 (5). 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Restrain, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 225. 
Result, nouns denot. 183 (4); expr. 


by ὥστε w. infin. 297 (1), w. indic. 


279. 

Revenge, vbs. expr. w. gen. 224 (1). 

Rhythm and metre, how related 311, 
312; rising and falling rhythms 317 
(3). See Anapaestic, Dactylic, 
Iambic, &c. 

Rhythmical series 315 (1), 316. 

Rising rhythms 317 (3). 

Romaic language 3. 

Root and stem defined 26 (2). 

‘Rough breathing 6. 

Rough mutes 8. 

Rule, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 22% (3). 


San 6 (N. 2); as numeral 69. 
Satisfy, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230 
2 


Saying, vbs. of, w. two accus. 217 ; 
constr. in indirect discourse 293 
(end). 

Second aorist, perfect, &c. 80 (N. 1). 

Second aorist stem 83, 140. 

Second passive stem 83, 141. 

Second perfect stem 83, 139. 

Secondary (or historical) tenses 80 
(2), 248; low far recogn. in de- 
pend. moods 248 (N. 2). 

See, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 304, 
303 (2, and N.). | 

Semivowels 7 (end). 

Sentence 191 (1); as subject 193 
(N. 2). 

Separation, gen. of 225, 228 (N. 2). 

Septuagint 3. 

Serving, vbs. of, w. dat. 230 (2). 

Sharing, vbs. of, w. gen. 221 (end). 

Short vowels 17; syllables, time of 
312 (1). 

Show, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 304. 

Sibilant (σ) 7 (end). 

Sicily, Dorians in 1. 

Similes (Homeric), aor. in 253 (N. 2). 

Simple stem of verb 81. (2); forma- 
tion of present from 125-131. 

Singular number 26; sing. vb. w. 
neut. pl. subj. 193 (2), rarely w. 
mase. or fem. pl. subj. 194 (N. 5), 
210 (N. 2); several sing. nouns 
w. pl. adj. 197 (N. 1). 


391 


Smell, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 
(2) ; ὄζω 223 (Rem.). 

Smooth breathing 6. Smooth mutes 
8 : 


Sonants and surds 8 (2, N.). 

Source, gen. of 226 (1). 

Space, acc. of extent of, 216. 

Spare, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 
(2) 


Specification, acc. of 215. 

Spondee 313; for anapaest 322; for 
dactyl 321; for iambus or trochee 
315, 318, 319, 320. Spondaic hex- 
ameter verse 321 (4). 

Stem and root 26 (2). 
verbs 81-84, 125-141: see Con- 
tents, p. xviii. Simple stem 81 

2 


Strophe and antistrophe 318 (4). 

Subject 191, modified 191 (N. 2); of 
finite vb. 192 (1), omitted 192 
(N. 1); of infin. 192 (2), 298 (§ 269, 
N.), omitted 192 (3); infin. or 
sentence as subj. 193 (N. 2); agree- 
ment of subj. w. finite vb. 193; of 
passive 243, 244. 

Subjective genitive 219 (2). 

Subjunctive 80; pers. endings and 
formation 146; peculiar mc-forms 
158 (N. 2, 4); in vbs. in νυμι 158 
(N. 5);-Ionic forms 153 (12), in 2 
aor. act. of w-form 171 (7); peri- 
phr. forms in perf. 150 (1, 2), 85 
(end). Tenses: pres. and aor. 248, 
249 (1), perf. 249 (2). General 
uses 257 (2): in final cl. 260 (1) ; 
in obj. cl. w. ὅπως or ὡς (for fut. 
indic.) 261; w. μή after vbs. of 
fearing 262; in protasis 265 (1), 
269 (1), in gen. suppos, 266 (a), 
270; w. ἄν or κέ in prot. 254, 269, 
270, in poetry without ἄν 269 (N. 
2), 271 (N. 2); in apod. w. ἄν or κέ 
(Epic) 255 (2), 291; in cond. rel. 
sent. (as in prot.) 276 (3), in gen. 
suppos. 276 (end), by assim. 277 
(1), w. ἕως, &c., wntil 279, w. πρίν 
280; in exhortations 290 (end), w. 
ἄγε, &e. 291 (top); in prohibitions 
(aor.) w. μή 291; w. οὐ μή 292; in 
questions of doubt 291, retained in 
indirect form 284; in rel. cl. of 
purpose (Homer.) 278 (N. 1); 


Ν 


Stems of - 


392 


changed to opt. in indir. discourse 
after past tenses 282. 
Subscript, iota 6 (N.). 
Substantive 28 (N.): see Noun. 
Suffixes 181. 
Superlative degree 64-67. 
Suppositions, general and particular 
265, 266. 
Surds and sonants 8 (2, N.). 
Surpassing, vbs. of, w. gen. 226 (2). 
Swearing, particles of, w. accus. 216. 
Syllaba anceps at end of verse 315 
(5). 
Syllabic angment 119; of plupf. 121 


(4). 

Syllables 17; division of 17 (N.); 
quantity of 17, 18; long and short 
in verse 312. 

Syncope 13 (2); in nouns 47, 48; 
ea stems 134 (0); in feet 315 
(2). 

Synizesis 10. 

Systems, tense 82 (4); anapaestic, 
trochaic, and iambic 323. 


Taste, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 (2). 

Tau-class of verbs 126 (III.). \ 

Teaching, vbs. of w. two accus. 217, 
914 (N. 4). 

Temporal augment 119 (4), 119 (end), 
121 (3); of diphthongs 122 ; omis- 
sion of 124. Temporal sentences: 
see Relative. 

Tense stems and systems 81-84; 

formation of 135-141; table of 141. 

Tenses 80; primary and secondary 
80, 248; of indic. 246, 247; of de- 
pend. moods 248-251; of partic. 
252; gnomic, 252, 253; iterative 
253. See Present, Imperfect, &c. 

Tetrameter 317 (2) ; trochaic 318 (2); 
iambic 319 (end); dactylic 321 
(3) ; anapaestic 323 (4). 

Thesis 311; not Greek θέσις 311 (foot- 
note). . 

Threats, vbs. expr. w. dat. 230 (2). 

Time, acc. of (extent) 216; gen. of 
(within which) 227 ; dat. of (poet 
ic) 235 ; expr. by partic. 300, 301 
(N. 1). 

Tmesis 241 (end). 

Touching, vbs. of, w. gen. 222 (1). 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Tragedy, iambic trimeter of 320. 

Transitive verbs 192 (top). 

Trial of, vbs. signif. to make, w. gen. 
222 (1). 

Tribrach 313; for trochee or iambus 
814 (N. 1), 318, 319. 

Trimeter 317 (2); iambic (acatal.) 
320 (4), in English 320 (end). 

Tripody, trochaic 319 (top). 

Trochee 313. Trochaic rhythms 318, 
319. 

Trust, vbs. signif, to, w. dat. 230 (2). 


Unclothe, vbs. signif. to, w. two acc, 
217 


Understand, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 
222 (2). 

Union, &c. vbs. implying, w. dat. 
299, 


Value, genitive of 227. 

Vau or Digamma 6 (N. 2); as numer- 
al 68; dropped in noun stem 4 
(N.1), 46 (N.); in verb stems 123 
(Ν. 2), 126 (2), 128 (8), 139 (ὦ, 

1 


Verbals 180 (2), 181, (top). Verbal 
nouns and adj. w. object. gen. 219 
(3), 227 (end), with obj. accus. 213 
(N.3). Verbals in ros 150 (3); in 
or téov 150 (38), 305, 306, 235 
(4). : 

Verbs, conjugation and formation of 
79-179: see Contents, pp. xvii., 
xviii.; syntax of 243-306: see 
Contents, pp. XXii.-xxvii. 

Verses 316 (2) ; catalectic and acata- 
lectic 316 (3). 

Vocative case 27 (3); sing. of 3d 
decl. 38 ; in addresses 213 (2). 

Voices 79 (1); uses of 248-246. See 
Active, Middle, Passive. 

Vowels 6 ; open and close 6 (ὃ 2, N.). 
Vowel declension (1st and 2d) 28, 

. 85. Vowel stems of nouns 28, 31 
(N.), 35 (top); of verbs 82 (3), 
131 (end), 133 (6), w. vowel length- 
ened 131 (1); with σ added 132 
(2). Connecting vowels 143 (4), 
144, 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


Want, verbs signif. 223. 

Weary of, vbs. signif. to be, w. partic. 
303 (1). | 

Whole, gen. of (partitive) 219, 220. 

Wishes, expr. by opt. 289 (1); by 
second, tenses of indic. 290 (2); 


893 
by ὥφελον w. infin. 290 (N. 1); 
negative μή 289, 290 (N. 2); by in- 
fin. 298. 

Wondering, vbs. of, w. ef 274, 287 
i)’ sometimes w. ὅτι 274 (§ 228, 


i wv Σ ΓΝ 
ts IVER 


14 DAY USE. | 
RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED 


LOAN DEPT. 


This book is due on the last date stamped below, of 
on the date to which renewed. 
Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. 


ε ado >” . REC'D LD | 
A LEI USA 3 ὼ PM 


| 


Ger. 
Universit, 
Be 


ἫΝ 


U. C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES 


μι 


CO4b2450bS 


Sedna! 


